JP2018201739A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of a player.SOLUTION: An operation presentation is set which is to be performed when operation means is operated by a player. If the operation presentation is set, a valid period is set in which an operation by the operation means is determined as valid. If a valid period is set by valid period setting means, identification information corresponding to the valid period thus set is notified. Notification means makes a notification of a specific notification mode on the basis of the valid period becoming less than a prescribed period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 216

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. When the lottery result is notified, the symbol for notifying the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner during the variation time determined by the lottery, and then stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols indicating the lottery result. In the period when the variable display is executed, a gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect is displayed in which a notice display regarding a lottery result to be notified is displayed by operating an operation unit that can be operated by a player.

2012-217766

  By the way, the above-described gaming machine has been demanded to further improve the gaming interest by suitably performing various effects using the operating means. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an operation means operable by the player, an operation effect setting means for setting an operation effect to be executed when the operation means is operated, When the operation effect is set by the operation effect setting means, the effective period setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation by the operation means is determined to be effective, and the effective period is set by the effective period setting means A notification unit that notifies identification information corresponding to the set valid period, and the notification unit reports a specific notification mode based on the fact that the valid period is equal to or less than a predetermined period. Is.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is a gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a suggestion mode that suggests to the player that it is a period for operating the operating means during a period in which the valid period is set is displayed on the display means. A suggestion mode display means, and the suggestion mode display means variably displays the suggested mode as an operated suggestion mode indicating that the operation means has been operated based on the operation means being operated. The operation means is simulated in a manner different from the operated suggestion based on the fact that the operation means is not operated even when the valid period is equal to or less than a predetermined period. The pseudo operation mode is displayed.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the suggestion mode is configured by a pattern imitating the shape of the operation means, and the pseudo operation mode includes the pattern. It is comprised by the production | presentation aspect to operate.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation effect setting means for setting the operation effect to be executed when the operation means is operated, and the operation effect setting means. When the operation effect is set, an effective period setting unit that sets an effective period in which the operation by the operation unit is determined to be effective, and setting when the effective period is set by the effective period setting unit Notification means for notifying the identification information corresponding to the effective period, and the notification means notifies the specific notification mode based on the fact that the effective period is equal to or less than a predetermined period.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, it has a suggestion mode display means for displaying on the display means a suggestion mode that suggests to the player that it is a period during which the operation means is operated during the period in which the effective period is set, and the suggestion mode display means includes: Based on the operation of the operation means, the suggestion mode is changed to an operated suggestion mode indicating that the operation means has been operated, and the effective period is not more than a predetermined period. Based on the fact that the operation means is not operated, a pseudo operation mode indicating that the operation unit has been operated in a pseudo manner is displayed in a mode different from the operated suggestion mode.

  Therefore, there is an effect that it can be easily recognized that the effective period has passed.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the following effect is produced. In other words, the suggestion mode is configured with a symbol imitating the shape of the operation means, and the pseudo operation mode is configured with an effect mode for operating the symbol.

  Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily notify that the operation effect has been executed as the effective period elapses.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective front view of an operation unit and a game board. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a game board. (A) is a front view of a general winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board in the XIII-XIII line | wire of FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the game board in the range XIV of FIG. It is a rear view of a general winning opening unit. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the game board in the range XIV of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of the first unit, (b) is a side view of the first unit, and (c) is a rear view of the first unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a 1st unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a 1st unit. It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXI-XXI line | wire of FIG.18 (b). It is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit shown in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIII-XXIII line | wire of FIG.18 (b). (A) is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIVa-XXIVa line of FIG. 21, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIVb-XXIVb line of FIG. 21, (c) is a figure. It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIVc-XXIVc line of 21. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the 1st unit in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIVb-XXIVb line | wire of FIG. 25 (a). (A) is the elements on larger scale of the 1st unit in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIVb-XXIVb line | wire of Fig.26 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit along the line XXVIIa-XXVIIa of FIG. 25 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 25 (a). FIG. 26C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIc-XXVIIc in FIG. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit along the line XXVb-XXVb of FIG. 25 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit along the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 25 (a). is there. (A) is a front view of a 2nd unit, (b) is a rear view of a 2nd unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a 2nd unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a 2nd unit. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd unit in the XXXII-XXXII line | wire of FIG. (A) is a front view of a center frame, (b) is a side view of a center frame. (A) is a perspective front view of a center frame, (b) is a perspective rear view of a center frame. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a center frame. It is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XXXVI-XXXVI line of FIG. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board, (b) is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a rear view of a back case. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of a back case, (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of a back case. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a rear view of a back case. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a rear view of a back case. (A) is a perspective rear view of a back case and a board | substrate box, (b) is a rear view of a back case and a board | substrate box. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a rear view of a lower displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in a retracted state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the 1st overhanging state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the 2nd overhanging state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the retracted state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the 1st overhanging state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the 2nd overhanging state. (A) is a back view of the first link member and the cam member in the retracted state, (b) in the first extended state, and (c) in the second extended state. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement unit along the LIVa-LIVa line of FIG. 50, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit along the LIVb-LIVb line of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 50, (b) is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 51, (c) is a figure. It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LVc-LVc line | wire of 52. (A) is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LVIa-LVIa line | wire of FIG. 52, (b) is a front view of the 1st link member and cam member of the lower displacement unit in a 2nd overhang | projection state. (A) is a front view of a lower displacement member, (b) is a rear view of a lower displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a lower displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a lower displacement member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in the 1st position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in the 2nd position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in the 3rd position. (A)-(c) is the elements on larger scale of a lower displacement member. (A) to (c) is a front view of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) is a front view of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) is a front view of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) is a front view of the lower displacement member. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the lower displacement member in the range LXIXa of FIG.68 (b), (b) is the elements on larger scale of the lower displacement member in the range LXIXb of FIG.68 (a). (A) is a top view of a distribution unit, (b) is a rear view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a distribution unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the LXXIII-LXXIII line | wire of Fig.70 (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the distribution unit in the range LXXIV of FIG. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a distribution unit. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a distribution unit. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a distribution unit. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a distribution unit and a lower displacement unit. It is a top view of a distribution unit and a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit. It is a rear view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of a decoration unit. (A) is a side view of the decoration unit in the direction of arrow XCIIa in FIG. 91, and (b) is a side view of the decoration unit in the direction of arrow XCIIb in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a decoration unit. 89 is a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and FIG. 89 is a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and FIG. (A) is a closed state, (b) is an intermediate state, (c) is a side view of a decorative unit and a right transmission member in an open state, respectively. (A) is an open state, (b) is an intermediate state, (c) is a side view of a decorative unit and a right transmission member in a closed state, respectively. (A) is a side view of the decoration unit in a closed state, (b) is a side view of the decoration unit in an open state. (A) is a front view of a rotating body, (b) is a side view of the rotating body in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100 (a), and (c) is an arrow Cc in FIG. 100 (a). It is a side view of the rotary body in the direction view. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotary body. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a rotary body. (A) is a side view of the rotator when the opening and closing member is closed, and (b) is a side view of the rotator when the opening and closing member is open. (A) And (b) is a side view of a decoration unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CVI in FIG. 105. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. (A) is a top view of the ball holder, (b) is a front view of the ball holder, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the ball holder along the line CVIIIc-CVIIIc of FIG. 108 (a). It is. It is a disassembled perspective view of a ball stand. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a ball stand. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the rotation unit in the CXI-CXI line of FIG. It is a front view of an upper displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of an upper displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of an upper displacement unit. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state where the upper displacement member is disposed at the retracted position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is disposed at an intermediate position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state where the upper displacement member is arranged at the overhang position. (A) is a front view of a variable part, (b) is a rear view of a variable part. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in the 3rd position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a lower displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a lower displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a lower displacement member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 1st position, (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 2nd position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd position, (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 2nd position. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. (A) is a top view of the distribution unit in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a distribution unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the CXXXIV-CXXXIV line | wire of Fig.131 (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the distribution unit in the range CXXXV of FIG. It is a front view of the rotation unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a distribution unit. (A) to (c) is a side view of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. (A) to (c) is a side view of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the displacement unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a displacement unit. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a displacement unit in case a game ball is held by a displacement member. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a displacement unit in case a game ball is held by a displacement member. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotation operation unit. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the pachinko machine in the CXLVII-CXLVII line of FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective front view of the 1st link member in a 9th embodiment, and (b) is a section schematic diagram of a lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of the game board in 10th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 11th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member. (A) is a front view of a lower displacement member, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along line CLIIIb-CLIIIb in FIG. 153 (a), and (c) is a diagram in FIG. 153 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement member in the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line. (A) is a disassembled perspective front view of the ball receiving part in 12th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of a ball receiving part. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member, (c) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement member in the CLVc-CLVc line | wire of FIG.155 (b). (A) is a front view of the special winning device in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device, and (c) is a CLVIc-CLVIc line in FIG. 156 (a). It is sectional drawing of a special prize-winning apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a special winning device. (A) is a top view of the special prize-winning device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize-winning device along the line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb in FIG. 158 (a). (A) is a rear view of the back case in 14th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic cross section of the back case in the CLIXb-CLIXb line | wire of Fig.159 (a). (A) is a schematic cross section of the back case in 15th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic cross section of the back case in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a rear view of the back case in 17th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the back case in the CLXIb-CLXIb line | wire of Fig.161 (a). (A) is a front view of the back case in 18th Embodiment, (b) is a back view of a back case. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a rear view of a back case. (A) is a schematic top view of a game board, (b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the engaging member in 19th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is sectional drawing of the one way in the CLXVIb-CLXVIb line | wire of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the back case and rotation unit in 20th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of an engaging member, (b) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engaging member. (A) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engaging member, and (b) is a rear view of the back case 20300. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case and the rotation unit in the twenty-first embodiment. (A) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engaging member, (b) is a schematic cross section of the rotation unit in the CLXXIB-CLXXIb line of FIG. 171 (a). (A) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engaging member, (b) is a schematic cross section of a back case and a rotation unit. (A) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engaging member, (b) is a schematic cross section of a back case and a rotation unit. It is a perspective front view of an engaging member and a fixing member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a back case. (A) is a schematic cross section of the back case taken along the line CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa of FIG. 175 (b). It is a front view of the back case in 24th Embodiment, FIG. 177 (b) is sectional drawing of the back case in the CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb line | wire of FIG. 177 (a). FIG. 187 is a cross-sectional view of the back case taken along the line CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII in FIG. 177 (b). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 25th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 26th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 27th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the game board in 28th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 29th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the general winning opening unit in 30th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the general winning opening unit in 31st Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the special prize apparatus in 32nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the special prize apparatus, (b) is a top view of the special prize apparatus, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize apparatus along the line CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc in FIG. 185 (a). It is. (A) is sectional drawing of a special winning apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of the special winning apparatus in the CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb line of FIG. 186 (a). (A) is a disassembled perspective front view of the 1st path | route member in 33rd Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of a special prize-winning apparatus. (A) is a front view of the game board in 34th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb line | wire of FIG. 188 (a). It is a disassembled perspective front view of a game board. 188 is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXC-CXC in FIG. 188. (A) is a front view of the game board in 35th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the CXCIb-CXCIb line of (a). It is a disassembled perspective view of a special winning device. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of the game board 13 in the CXCIII-CXCIII line | wire of FIG. 191 (b). (A) is the disassembled perspective front view which showed typically the game board in 36th Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a game board. (A) is the disassembled perspective front view which showed typically the game board in 37th Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 38th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a lower displacement member, (b) is a sectional view of the lower displacement member along line CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb in FIG. 197 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of FIG. 197 (a). It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement member in the CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc line. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of the lower displacement member in 39th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a lower displacement member, and FIG. 199 (b) and FIG. 199 (c) are sectional views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in a 40th embodiment, and Drawing 200 (b) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in the CCb-CCb line of Drawing 200 (a). (A) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in 41st Embodiment, (b) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in the CCIb-CCIb line of Drawing 201 (a). (A) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in the CCIIa-CCIIa line of Drawing 201 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in the CCIIb-CCIIb line of Drawing 201 (a). is there. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the back case in 42nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a schematic cross section of the back case in the CCIVb-CCIVb line | wire of FIG. 204 (a). (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a schematic cross section of the back case in the CCVb-CCVb line | wire of Fig.205 (a). (A) is a back view of a game board, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the CCVIb-CCVIb line of FIG. 206 (a). It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the internal structure of the special prize-winning apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the fluctuation | variation per 16R probability variation big hit in the 1st control example, (b) is an example of the display mode of the rotation unit at the time of 16R probability variation big hit variation. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the fluctuation | variation per 6R probability variation big hit in the 1st control example, (b) is an example of the display mode of the rotation unit at the time of 6R probability variation big hit variation. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the fluctuation | variation in the CHARGE effect in a 1st control example, (b) is the display content which showed the fluctuation | variation stop in the CHARGE effect in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the roulette effect after the special symbol stop in a 1st control example, (b) is the display content which showed the result of the roulette effect in a 1st control example It is the figure which showed an example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content in which the button press effective period generate | occur | produces in a 1st control example, (b) is the display content when the button press effective period in a 1st control example passes fixed period. It is the figure which showed an example. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content during the button press in the 1st control example, (b) is button presentation after each button press effective period display in the 1st control example corresponds. It is the figure which showed an example in the case of doing. It is a timing chart which showed the period during the button press production in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the button automatic press effect 1 in a 1st control example, (b) showed the example of the display content of the button automatic press effect 2 in a 1st control example. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the button automatic press effect 3 in a 1st control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents when an attacker wins a jackpot game in the first control example, and (b) is a case where a pseudo attacker wins a jackpot game in the first control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display content of. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in a 1st control example, (b) shows typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit random number table, and (c) is It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal hit random number table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot type selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table, (c) These are the schematic diagrams which showed typically the content of the special figure 2 jackpot classification selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern selection table for normal / latency. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern selection table for probability change. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram shown in. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the reservation rank selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the reservation mode selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the treasure box aspect selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the production counter group typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surfaces BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the common map prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the other winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a main process by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern reception process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information relevant process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding mode selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the treasure box aspect selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the right attacker jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo attacker production | presentation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the change production setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the operation effect setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the charge production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production | presentation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the liquid crystal effect execution management process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the operation effect management process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the notice effect display process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the change replacement switching process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is. (A) is the flowchart which showed the operation effect command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the button fusion display process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo | simulation winning display process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the point acquisition effect start in a 2nd control example, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the point acquisition effect completion | finish. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the point acquisition effect in the holding ball in a 2nd control example, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the reach selection variation pattern. is there. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the pseudo fluctuation in a 2nd control example, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the point consumption re-variation. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the symbol HOLD selection screen in a 2nd control example, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the symbol HOLD screen in a 2nd control example. . (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is a schematic structure of RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the point selection table with holding | maintenance in the 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the point selection table without reservation in the 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation | variation point selection table in a 2nd control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the display position in a 2nd control example. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the hit consumption point selection table in a 2nd control example, (b) shows typically the content of the outlier consumption point selection table in a 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern reception process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the point selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the advance notice setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special point selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the consumption reach selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A)-(c) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the 3rd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the initial operation data in the 3rd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the firing operation data in a 3rd control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the origin operation data in a 3rd control example. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st operation data in a 3rd control example, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the 2nd operation data in a 3rd control example. FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the initial stage operation setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the initial stage discharge operation setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the operation control process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge operation setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge operation setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the internal structure of the special prize-winning apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in the 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the effect performed corresponding to the gaming state in the 4th control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the effect in the latent effect production A mode in the 4th control example, (b) is the effect in the latent effect production B mode in the 4th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the random number 4 table per special symbol in a 4th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of the small random number 4 table in a 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal hit random number 4 table in the 4th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special figure 1 big hit type selection 4 table in a 4th control example, (b) is the special figure 2 big hit type selection 4 table in a 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection 4 table in the 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 4 tables for probability change in the 4th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 4 tables for latency in a 4th control example, (b) showed the content of 4 tables for time shortening in the 4th control example typically. It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in the 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation start process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation execution process 4 which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 deviation variation process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change execution process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 removal stop process 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo production setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 1st control example.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 111, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the paper is the front (front) side and the back side of the paper is the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is left (left) ) Side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 4 supported to be openable and closable. The outer frame 11 has a front view (in order to support the inner frame 4).
1) Metal hinges 18 are attached to two places on the upper left and lower sides, and the inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side with the side on which the hinges 18 are provided as an opening / closing axis.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 4, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 or a ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a is played on the game board 1.
A launch rail (not shown) or the like for guiding to the front surface area 3 is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4 are a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface, and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side.
And are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places on the left and right sides of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front door is provided with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening / closing axis. 5 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). On the upper surface of the upper plate 17, the frame button 2
2 is provided. The frame button 22 is, for example, the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
This is operated by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed at or changing the contents of the effect of super reach.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light-emitting means such as an LED is incorporated, and a display lamp 34 is provided that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right-side electric decoration part 32, and an adhering space K1 (see FIG. 2)
A stamp or the like affixed to the pachinko machine 10 is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 10
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with a bill or a card inserted in a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the ball, lending of the ball is performed according to the operation. Is called.
Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium).
Lending balls are supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Return button 43
Is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation.
b, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is formed on a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and windmills, rails 76 and 77, general winning opening 63, first
The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is done. The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player.
The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

An outer rail 77 formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by bending a belt-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
As in the case of the outer rail 77, an arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed of a band-shaped metal plate is planted at the inner position of the outer rail 77. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed by dividing the two rails 76 and 77 and the resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening etc.
The area where the fired ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 76 (FIG. 2
The return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left portion of the), and the situation where the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide path again is prevented. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). First
The symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. Multiple L
The ED is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by the combination of the emission colors.

In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to a winning in either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. The jackpot type determined here is 15R probability variation jackpot,
4R probability variation jackpot and 15R regular jackpot are prepared. 1st symbol display device 37A, 3
7B shows not only whether the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type if it is a big hit.

Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R regular jackpot” is the maximum number of rounds after 15 jackpots,
While shifting to the low-probability state, during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) is a jackpot that becomes a short-time state.

In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normal, the state of the game that is neither probable nor short-lived (
Neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is up).

During probability change and short time, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the second prize opening 64
The time for opening the first electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the first electric combination 640a is in the opened state (open state), the second prize opening 640 is compared with the case where the first electric combination 640a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is ready to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, Thus, the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than normal. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the first electric accessory is determined at the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count that 640a opens. In addition, during the probability change and in the short time, the time for opening the first electric combination 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 and the number of times of opening the first electric combination 640a per change are not changed. Only the probability of hitting the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal probability.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 includes a first winning port 64 and a second winning port.
The first symbol display device 37A, triggered by any one of the winning openings 640 (starting prize)
The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays the variation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variation display in 37B, and the passage of the sphere of the first through gate 66 And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol.

The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66, the second symbol display device displays a display symbol (second symbol (
(Not shown)), the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” are alternately displayed for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Also, if the winning lottery results in a loss, the second symbol display device will display “
The symbol “x” is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 uses the first electric accessory 64 attached to the second winning opening 640 when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”).
It is configured such that 0a is activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal.
Therefore, since the chances for winning in the winning lottery increase, the player can be given many opportunities for the first electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

In the meantime, the probability of winning is increased during probability change or in a short time.
Even if other methods such as increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are used, if the ball is likely to win the second winning port 640 during the probability change or in a short time, the change display of the second symbol is displayed. Such time may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, First against
The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball that flows down the game board out of the balls fired on the game board. When the sphere passes through the first through gate 66, the second
A symbol winning lottery is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays the change,
If the winning lottery result is a win, a “○” symbol will be displayed as the stop symbol for variable display.
If the winning lottery result is out of place, a symbol “x” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The total number of passages of the first through gate 66 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a second symbol hold lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37A,
37B and part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also,
The maximum number of balls held for passing the ball of the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times,
It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( (See FIG. 4), the jackpot lottery is made, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the first
The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won at the winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won at the second winning slot 640 are the same, but the ball is won at the first winning slot 64. The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball is won and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball is awarded to the second prize opening 640, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins the first prize slot 64 Is three,
The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

Further, on the left side of the first winning port 64 in front view, a third winning port 82 through which a ball can win is disposed. When the ball wins, the third winning port 82 can send the winning ball to the first opening 511 of the sorting unit 500 described later via the pitching unit 600. That is, the third winning opening 82 is disposed in communication with a first opening 511 described later.

The third winning combination port 82 is accompanied by a third electric accessory 82a. The third electric accessory 82a is configured to be rotationally displaced with respect to the game board 13 so that it can be opened and closed.
“a” is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the third winning opening 82.
On the other hand, if there is a jackpot determination triggered by winning of the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, the third electric accessory 82a is opened (expanded) before, after, or during the jackpot. State), and the ball is likely to enter the third winning opening 82. In addition, the third winning opening 82
A sensor device SE1 for detecting a passed sphere is mounted on the downstream side.

Note that the opening timing of the third electric accessory 82a is the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 56.
It may not be performed with 40 winnings as a trigger, and as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the first through gate 66 sleeping ball, the symbol “○” is displayed as the second symbol When displayed on the device, it may be opened.

The first winning combination 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. This first electric accessory 64
0a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state).
Thus, it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640 a is The open state (enlarged state) is entered, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second pattern is higher during probability change and during shorter time than normal,
In addition, since the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is short, “○” is displayed in the variation display of the second symbol.
The number of times that the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the time of probability change or time reduction, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than during normal time. Therefore, the second winning opening 640 is more likely to change during the probability change or shorter than the normal time.
This makes it easy for the ball to win.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a as in the second winning port 640, and the ball is in a state where the ball can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. The ball is fired so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”).
) It is more advantageous for the player to aim at winning big wins by obtaining many opportunities for winning big wins by winning at the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, during a certain change or in a short time, passing the ball through the first through gate 66 makes it easy for the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state, and wins the second winning opening 640. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the first through gate 66 is allowed to pass. Thus, it is advantageous for the player to open the first electric combination 640a and aim for a 15R probability variation big win by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). How to
It can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10,
If the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is a big win, the first winning symbol will be displayed after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30
Open until seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis.
And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality (for example, three) of two or more may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

In the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided an adhering space K1 for adhering a certificate paper, an identification label, etc., and the certificate paper or the like attached to the adhering space K1 is a small window of the front door 5 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the first outlet 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 1
16 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100 ~
Reference numeral 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are coupled to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). Also,
A seal seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing sticker,
It can be known whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11.
2 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 allows the big hit lottery and the first symbol display device 3
The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of display in 7A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device is executed.

Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Work area where values are stored (
Work area). Note that the RAM 203 retains data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B,
Solenoid comprising a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory 209 is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1.
15 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, and the MPU 201 outputs signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erase signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is similar to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the PU 211, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 211, and a work area (work area) for storing various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. have. The RAM 213 is the pachinko machine 10
Even after the power is turned off, the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be held (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also receives a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
1 is input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 has a ball launch unit 112 that has a launch strength according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.
a is controlled. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (
The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 on the condition that the operation handle 51 is not operated), and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51. .

The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display control device 114 such as display) or notice effect
The setting of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 performed in is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 2
25, a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to each other. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the content of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the sound lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, the sound corresponding to the display content is output from the audio output device 226, and also in correspondence with the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 8.
1 is used to control the display of the variation effect of the third symbol in 1. The display control device 1
14 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and the RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 3).
RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a reference). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 is an AC 2 supplied from the outside.
Taking in the voltage of 4 volts, various switches such as various switches 208 and solenoid 20
It generates a 12 volt voltage for driving a solenoid such as 9 and a motor, a 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are generated. Necessary voltages are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 receives the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
201 and a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 2
51, the output of the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, is set to a normal value for a time sufficient for the execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 200 and the game board 13. 7 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

In FIG. 7, the upper displacement member 940 is retracted upward and the lower displacement member 440 is retracted downward. In FIG. 8, the upper displacement member 940 rotates downward from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 9, the displaced state is the state shown in FIG. 7, and the state in which the lower displacement member 440 is projected to a first projecting position to be described later is shown in FIG. 10. The state displaced to the 2nd overhang position which is a position is each illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 30 formed in a box shape.
0, and in the inner space of the rear case 300, the upper displacement unit 900, the lower displacement unit 400, the rotation unit 700, and the distribution unit 5 attached to the rear surface of the game board 13
And the pitching unit 600 are accommodated.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall 301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 302 standing from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The upper displacement unit 900 is disposed in the upper part of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and has a rectangular horizontally long base member 910, and is slidably disposed on the base member 910. An upper displacement member 940, and an opening 301a of the rear case 300 (ie,
On the front side of the 3rd symbol display device 81), an effect of rotating and displacing the upper displacement member 940 while sliding is formed. A detailed description of the upper displacement unit 900 will be given later.

The lower displacement unit 400 is disposed in the bottom side of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 at a lower portion of the opening 301 a and has a horizontally long base member 410 in a front view, and is slidably disposed on the base member 410. The lower displacement member 440 is provided, and an effect of rotating and displacing the lower displacement member 440 while sliding is formed on the front side of the rear case opening 301a (ie, the third symbol display device 81). A detailed description of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described later.

The rotation unit 700 includes a rear base 720 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view disposed on the right side (arrow) in front view of the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a front side of the rear base 720. And the player can visually recognize the effect of rotationally displacing the rotary body 800 through a transparent plate portion formed on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. The detailed description of the rotating unit 700 will be described later.

The pitching unit 600 is attached to the back side of the game board 13, and the third winning opening 82 of the game board 13 is provided.
A path through which game balls sent to the back side of the game board 13 are sent to a first opening 511 of the sorting unit 500 described later is formed.

The distribution unit 500 includes a path forming member 510 attached to the back side of the game board 13, a base plate 520 disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed opposite to the path forming member 510,
A distribution member 540 that distributes the game balls attached to the base plate 520 and flowing down between the path forming member 510 and the base plate 520 to each of the pitching paths (second pitching path KR2 or third pitching path KR3) is provided. . The game balls distributed to the distribution member 540 are sent to the lower displacement unit 400. A detailed description of the distribution unit 500 will be described later.

<A 1st decoration body and a 2nd decoration body are arrange|positioned in the position adjacent to the front-back direction>
Next, referring to FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, the general winning a prize opening unit 1 disposed on the game board 13.
50 will be described.

First, the general winning opening unit 150 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12.
FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13, and FIG.
FIG. 12B is a cross-sectional view of the general winning a prize opening unit 150 taken along the line XIIb-XIIb in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. And a general prize opening unit 150.

The base plate 60 includes a first opening 60a that is opened in the center portion when viewed from the front, and a second opening 60b that is opened on the lower side in the gravity direction of the game area formed by the rail members 76 and 77. . A center frame 86 is disposed in the first opening 60a, and the second opening 60 is provided.
In b, a general winning opening unit 150 is arranged. In addition, a sticker with a decoration (pattern, symbol, etc.) formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) is attached to the base plate 60 so that the player can visually recognize the decoration. The decoration on the front side of the base plate 60 is not limited to the seal, and the decoration may be printed (painted) on the front surface of the base plate 60.

The general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed in the game area of the game board 13 (in front of the base plate 60), and the path of the game ball flowing down the game area can be changed. In addition, general prize opening unit 1
50 is arranged at a position along the lower end of the gravity direction (arrow D direction side) in the front view (arrow B direction view) with respect to a game area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. Is done. In FIGS. 13 to 16, the seal disposed on the base plate 60 is illustrated with the reference numeral of the decorative member 60 c. In the present embodiment, a character (person) is added to the decorative member 60c.
Is drawn.

The general winning opening unit 150 includes a main body 151 formed in a crescent shape in front view,
A first standing portion 152 standing on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the end of the main body portion 151;
A second standing portion 153 that extends from the end of the first standing portion 152 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) toward the center of the game area, and a rear side of the main body portion 151. Decorative member 15
4 and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning holes 63 formed on the front side of the main body 151.
And mainly.

The main body 151 is set to have an outer shape slightly larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b opened in the thickness direction of the base plate 60, and is covered with the opening of the second opening 60b.
0 is disposed on the front side. Further, the second opening 60b allows the game ball flowing into the general winning opening 63 provided in the main body 151 to be sent to the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60). Further, the main body 151 is configured such that the base plate 6 increases from the inner portion toward the outer end in a front view.
An inclined surface 151a that is inclined toward the 0 side, a recess 151b that is recessed in the back surface on the base plate 60 side (arrow B direction side), and a back surface portion 151 that forms the back surface of the main body 151 excluding the recess 151b.
d.

The inclined surface 151 a is formed to be inclined by approximately 30 degrees with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 151a and flow down along the inclination of the inclined surface 151a, and moved to the front side of the main body 151.

Here, the inclined surface 151 a is not formed at the end of the main body 151, and the side surface of the main body 151 is
When formed perpendicular to the front surface of the base plate 60, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 abut (collision) from the direction orthogonal to the side surface of the main body 151, There is a risk that the abutted game ball will rebound in the direction opposite to the flow-down direction.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game ball that contacts the side surface of the main body portion 151 can be moved to the front side of the main body portion by the inclined surface 151a, so that the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily It is possible to suppress stagnation. As a result, the game ball can flow smoothly from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front surface of the main body 151 of the general prize opening unit 150.

As described above, the back surface portion 151d is the back surface of the main body portion 151, and the concave portion 1 in the back view.
A constant width is formed around 51b. In addition, the back portion 151d is a general winning opening unit 1
In a state where 50 is disposed on the base plate 60, the base plate 60 is disposed in contact with the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c).

The recess 151b is recessed toward the front side (arrow F direction side). Also, the recess 151b
Has a concave bottom surface 151b2 which is a bottom surface in the concave direction, and an inner side surface 151b3 which is erected from the outer edge of the concave bottom surface 151b2 toward the back side (arrow B direction side).

The concave bottom surface 151b2 is an adhesive surface of a decorative member 154 described later, and is formed as a plane parallel to the front surface of the main body 151. Thereby, when the decoration of the decoration member 154 is visually recognized via the main body 151, the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be visually recognized uniformly.

Inner side surface 151b3 is extended in the front-back direction (arrow FB direction) in front view. Further, the shape of the inner side surface 151b3 in a front view is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of a decorative member 154 described later. Thus, when the decorative member 154 is disposed in the recess 151b, the decorative member 1
It can suppress that 54 protrudes outside the recessed part 151b. Therefore, the general prize opening unit 1
When the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the back surface portion 151 d and the base plate 60 when the 50 is disposed on the base plate 60, a gap is formed between the back surface portion 151 d of the main body portion 151 and the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. Thereby, it can suppress that the main-body part 151 projects over the front side rather than the normal arrangement | positioning position with respect to the base board 60. FIG. As a result, the game ball can flow smoothly from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front surface of the main body 151 of the general prize opening unit 150.

The recess 151b is a recess that accommodates a decoration member 154, which will be described later, in the recess space, and the recess installation depth (recessed distance to the front side (arrow F direction side)) is larger than the thickness dimension of the decoration member 154. It is set large. In addition, the concave portion 151b extends from the end of the main body 151 in the front view.
51 is recessed along the shape of the end of the main body 151 at a position separated by a certain distance.

Therefore, when the decorative member 154 is disposed inside the recess 151b, it is possible to suppress the back surface of the decorative member 154 from projecting to the back side of the main body portion 151. Therefore, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decoration member 154 is sandwiched between the recessed bottom surface 151 b 2 and the base plate 60, so that the back surface portion 151 d of the main body portion 151 and the base plate 60 It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Thereby, it can suppress that the main-body part 151 projects over the front side rather than the normal arrangement position with respect to the base board 60. FIG. As a result, the game ball can smoothly flow down from the upper side of the main body 151 in the direction of gravity (in the direction of the arrow U) to the front of the main body 151 of the general prize opening unit 150.

The first standing portion 152 is erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the end portion of the main body portion 151 on the end portion side (inner rail 76 side) of the game area. The first standing portion 152 is set to have the standing dimension substantially the same as the width dimension in the planting direction of the inner rail 76 planted on the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Further, in the first standing portion 152, the distance between the front door 5 that covers the front side of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body 151 is moved to the first standing portion 1 at the lower end of the game area in the direction of gravity.
52. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body 151 from colliding with the inner rail 76, and to suppress the inner rail 76 from colliding with the game ball and being bent.

Here, the space between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 is a space for guiding the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13, and the inner rail 7
A space for providing reinforcement or the like between the facing of the outer rail 6 and the outer rail 77 is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to arrange reinforcement for the purpose of preventing the inner rail 76 from bending, and there is a possibility that the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail 76 and the inner rail 76 is bent.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the general winning a prize opening unit 150 (
The first standing portion 152) can make it difficult for the game ball flowing down the game area to collide with the inner rail 76. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a change in the distance between the facing of the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 due to the bending of the inner rail 76. As a result, the game ball can be stably launched into the game area.

The second standing portion 153 extends downwardly from the end of the first standing portion 152 in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) toward the center of the game area (first winning port 64) in front view. (See FIG. 2). Thereby, the game ball flowing down between the inner rail 76 and the center frame 83 (see FIG. 2) is placed on the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the extending portion of the second standing portion 153 that is inclined downward. When the ball is sent, the game ball can roll along the descending slope of the second standing portion 153 and can be sent toward the center of the game area. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) of the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 are won (inflow) into the first winning port 64 disposed in the center of the game area. It can be made easy.

The decorative member 154 is formed in a plate shape and is bonded to the back side of the main body 151. In addition, the decoration member 154 is provided with a decoration that is continuous with the decoration formed on the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 in front view on the main body 151 side. Thereby, the decoration formed on the base plate 60 can be visually recognized as one decoration together with the decoration of the decoration member 154. In addition,
In the present embodiment, a part of the character (person) is drawn on the decorative member 154, and the character of the decorative member 60c and the character of the decorative member 154 can be viewed together as one character.

The decorative member 154 is made of a light transmissive material. Thereby, the light which passed through the 2nd opening part 60b from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base board 60 enters from the back surface of the decoration member 154, and is radiate | emitted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decoration member 154. Can be made. Therefore, the decoration formed on the front surface of the decoration member 154 can be brightened and made visible to the player, and the player can easily make the decoration of the decoration member 154 visible.

Next, the base plate 60 and the general winning opening unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XIII-XIII in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the decorative member 154 has an outer shape larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60 b of the base plate 60 in a front view. As a result, the general prize opening unit 150
Is disposed on the base plate 60, the end of the decorative member 154 is connected to the recess 151b of the main body 151.
Between the concave bottom surface 151b2 and the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Therefore,
When the adhesion between the main body 151 and the decorative member 154 is peeled off due to aging or the like, the decorative member 1
It is possible to prevent 54 from falling off the game board 13.

Further, the decorative member 154 has a width dimension that overlaps with the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and the circular shape of the base plate 60 into which a protrusion 155 that protrudes from the back surface of the main body 151 described later is inserted. Is set larger than the diameter of the opening 60g (see FIG. 11). This
It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the decoration of the decoration member 154 and the decoration member 60c in the front view due to the displacement of the arrangement of the decoration member 154 with respect to the main body 151 or the position of the decoration member 60c. . As a result, the player can easily recognize the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decoration member 154 as one decoration.

Further, the three general winning ports 63 arranged in the main body 151 are connected to the openings 514 to 516 of the distribution unit 500 (see FIG. 71) arranged on the back side of the game board 13,
The game balls that have won the general winning opening 63 are sent to the fourth pitch route KR4 of the sorting unit 500. A detailed description of the distribution unit 500 will be described later.

Further, in the sorting unit 500, a substrate (not shown) having a light source capable of irradiating light on the front side is disposed on the base plate 520 (see FIG. 71), and the light emitted from the substrate is the base plate. The second opening 60b of 60 is inserted to irradiate the back of the general winning a prize opening unit 150.

Therefore, the second opening 60 b is used as a space for irradiating light to the path of the game ball to be won from the general winning opening 63 of the general winning opening unit 150 and the back of the general winning opening unit 150. As a result, there is no need to separately form an opening for sending a game ball, an opening for allowing light to pass through, and two openings, so light is applied to the entire back surface of the general winning a prize opening unit 150. The main body 151 of the general prize opening unit 150 can be made easy.
The general winning opening 63 can be arranged in the entire area. As a result, the general prize opening unit 150
The design freedom can be improved, and light can be emitted from the entire area of the general prize opening unit 150 to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration (decoration member 154) of the general prize opening unit 150.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the decorative member 154 that is connected to the decorative member 60 c of the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is disposed along the front surface of the base plate 60. Therefore, the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be arranged at positions adjacent (approaching) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).
Accordingly, the decorative member 60 is viewed from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the upper end portion in the gravity direction of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)).
When visually recognizing c and the decoration member 154, the decorations of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 are visually recognized as being shifted as compared with the case where the decoration of the general prize opening unit is arranged in front of the general prize opening unit. Can be suppressed. As a result, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decorative member 154
The player can visually recognize the connection portion with the decoration of the player regardless of the player's viewpoint, and can improve the design of the game board 13.

Next, the connection of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the range XIV of FIG. In FIG. 14, the light path visually recognized by the player is shown by a two-dot chain line.

As described above, the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decoration member 154 are visually recognized by the player as one decoration. Therefore, in order for the player to visually recognize the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decoration member 154 as one decoration (pattern), it is necessary to suppress the misalignment between the decorations of the two. However, when the decoration is formed on the base plate 60 or when the decoration member 154 is disposed on the main body 151, it is difficult to arrange the decoration at an accurate position (the same position every time). Accordingly, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decoration position of the decoration member 154 with respect to the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 is displaced so that the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 are disposed. In addition, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decoration as one decoration.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the end of the decorative member 154 is disposed on the back side of the inclined surface 151a. Thereby, the decoration of the decoration member 154 and the decoration member 60 of the base plate 60 are obtained.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to accurately recognize the connecting portion with the decoration of c (the player can visually recognize the connecting portion by blurring the connecting portion). Therefore, the player can recognize the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 as one decoration.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the connecting portion (hereinafter referred to as “boundary P <b> 1” (see FIG. 14)) between the decoration of the decoration member 154 and the decoration of the decoration member 60 c is an inclined surface 1 of the main body 151.
It is located on the back side of 51a. Therefore, the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint and the connecting portion between the front surface of the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a (hereinafter referred to as “boundary P2” (see FIG. 14)) The light emitted toward the viewpoint can be changed to light reflected at different positions of the decoration member 60c or the decoration member 154 (that is, on the path of the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint). In addition, the formation of the boundary P2 can be suppressed).

Accordingly, at the boundary P1, the player can easily recognize the displacement of the decoration member 60c relative to the decoration member 154 as the displacement of the decoration, and at the boundary P2, the displacement of the decoration due to the difference in the light refraction direction is recognized by the player. Since the decoration visually recognized by the player from the respective positions of the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 can be made a decoration at different positions, the positional deviation of the decorations at the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 is the same position. Visible to the player can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decoration position shift at the boundary P1 and the decoration position shift at the boundary P2 from being combined, and the amount of the decoration position shift is increased and recognized by the player. As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Furthermore, by arranging the boundary P1 on the back side of the inclined surface 151a, from the viewpoint of the player, a connecting portion of the decorative member 60c and the main body 151 (hereinafter referred to as “boundary P3” (see FIG. 14)), The boundary P1 can be arranged between the boundary P2. Therefore, during the position shift position (boundaries P2, P3) of the decoration due to the light being refracted when the light is emitted from the main body 151,
A boundary P1 can be arranged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the extension of the recognized area by shifting the decoration position. That is, it is possible to limit the area where the position of the decoration is visually recognized with respect to the front of the game board 13. As a result, the misalignment area of the decoration can be reduced with respect to the game area of the game board 13, so that the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized as one decoration by the player.

In this embodiment, the character's face is decorated on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60,
The body of the character decorated on the decoration member 60c is decorated on the decoration member 154 of the general prize opening unit 150. In other words, the decoration outline is located at the decoration connecting portion between the decoration member 60 c and the decoration member 154. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the position shift of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 is the decorative outline. As a result, the decorative member 6
It is possible to make the player easily recognize the decoration of 0c and the decoration member 154 as one decoration.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decoration member 60 c of the base plate 60 is decorated up to the neck of the character's face, the decoration member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is decorated with the decoration member 154, and the decoration member 6.
The clothes worn by the character's body decorated in 0c are decorated, and the character's face (neck) and clothes are different in color (in this embodiment, the face is skin color and the clothes are black). This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are divided by changing the position shift of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 to a portion having a different color. Can do. As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

As described above, the main body 151 is provided with the concave portion 151b on the back surface side, and the decorative member 154 is disposed on the inner side. In addition, the shape of the inner side surface (inner side surface 151b3) of the recess 151b is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view. Thereby, when disposing the decorative member 154 in the main body 151, the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b can be used as a guide (positioning). As a result, when the decorative member 154 is attached to the main body 151, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the arrangement of the decorative member 154 with respect to the main body 151.

Further, on the back side of the main body 151, protrusions 155 (see FIG. 15) protruding in a columnar shape are formed at a plurality of places (in this embodiment, three places (see FIG. 15)). The protrusion 155 is a positioning protrusion for positioning with the base plate 60 when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, and is inserted into the recess 60 d provided in the base plate 60. Also, the protrusion 155
Is at least one place (one place in the present embodiment) is a concave bottom surface 151b2 of the concave portion 151b.
And is inserted into an opening formed in the decorative member 154. Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be used for positioning when the decorative member 154 is disposed on the main body 151.

Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be positioned when the general prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, and can be positioned when the decorative member 154 is disposed on the main body 151. Therefore, since the part used as the positioning at the time of arrange | positioning the decoration member 154 in the front side of the decoration member 60c can be made into the same part, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 are displaced. Can be suppressed. As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be combined and easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Further, the protrusion 155 protruding from the concave bottom surface 151b2 is a range E1 (FIG. 15) described later.
Reference) region (attachment region of the adhesive tape 154a). Thereby, the main body 15
When the decorative member 154 is disposed in the position 1, the edge portion of the decorative member 154 is disposed in alignment with the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b with the protrusion 155 inserted into the opening of the decorative member 154. Thus, two locations of the decorative member 154 can be positioned with respect to the main body 151. Therefore, it is not necessary to arrange the decorative member 154 on the main body 151 by aligning the edge of the decorative member 154 at two locations on the inner surface 151b3 of the recess 151b. As a result, the disposition work of the decorative member 154 on the main body 151 can be simplified.

Next, adhesion between the main body 151 and the decorative member 154 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the general winning a prize opening unit 150, and FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 in a range XIV in FIG. In FIG. 15, the decorative member 1
The range of the adhesive tape 154a affixed to 54 is indicated by a two-dot chain line with the reference numeral E1. Moreover, in FIG. 14, the path | route of the light visually recognized by a player is shown with a dashed-two dotted line. In the present embodiment, the adhesive tape 154a is formed from a light-transmitting double-sided tape, and the range E
1 is affixed.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the adhesive tape 154 a that bonds the decorative member 154 and the main body 151 is attached with a certain width along the end of the decorative member 154. Thereby, in the area | region (part other than the range E1) where the adhesive tape 154a is not affixed, the adhesive tape 154
A gap (space) having a predetermined width is formed between the main body 151 (recessed bottom surface 151b2) and the decorative member 154 (front surface of the decorative member) by the thickness of a.

Further, the adhesive tape 154a passes through the boundary P3 from the end portion of the decorative member 154 and is inclined 1
It is bonded to a region exceeding the virtual line PK1 (see FIG. 14) orthogonal to 51a. This
A range E1 (the end of the decoration member 154) where the adhesive tape 154a is pasted on the part (the part whose wavelength is changed) where the light that passes through the main body 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151a is affected by the decoration of the decoration member 154 Part). As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the general prize opening unit 150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily viewed as one decoration by the player.

Here, when the player visually recognizes the game board 13 from a position higher than usual (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity), FIG. As shown, the light L that escapes from the inclined surface 151a toward the player's line of vision repeatedly reflects the front and back surfaces of the main body 151 and passes through the inside of the main body 151. In this case, the decorative member 15
If the entire area of the front face of 4 is in contact with the main body 151 via the adhesive tape 154a, the wavelength of light is changed by the decoration of the decoration member 154 every time it is reflected on the decoration member 154 side. Therefore, the light that passes through the inside of the main body portion 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151a is the decorative member 15.
4 cannot be reflected only by the change of the wavelength due to the decoration of the end of 4. Therefore, the inclined surface 151
Since the decoration recognized by the player from a is different from the wavelength of the decoration visually recognized by the player from the front of the main body 151, the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a are not connected to each other. It was.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the adhesion part to the main-body part 151 of the decoration member 154 is set to range E1.
By using only, it is possible to prevent the light L reflected and passing through the inside of the main body 151 from being influenced by the decoration of the decoration member 154 (the wavelength of the light is not changed). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16, the portion of the light that passes through the main body 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151 a is affected by the decoration of the decoration member 154 (the portion where the wavelength is changed) is adhesive tape 154 a.
Can be made the range E1 (end portion of the decorative member 154), and can be easily recognized by the player as being connected to the decoration of the inclined surface 151a visually recognized by the player. As a result, the designability of the game board 13 can be improved.

Next, the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 36. First, with reference to FIG. 17, a method for arranging the special prize-winning device 550 will be described. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIG. 17, the center frame 86 includes a base frame 86a formed in a substantially circular frame shape surrounding the central opening of the base plate 60, and a projecting portion protruding outward in the radial direction of the base frame 86a. 86b.

The base frame 86a is shaped along the central opening of the base plate 60, and a part of the base frame 86a is inserted inside the central opening, and a portion excluding a part of the base frame 86a is the base plate 60. It is arrange | positioned by the base board 60 in the state projected over the front side.

The projecting portion 86 b is projected from the game area of the game board 13 on the right side in the front view (arrow R direction side). Thereby, the special prize-winning device 550 arranged in the projecting portion 86b can be arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) in front view with respect to the gaming area, and when the player enters the special gaming state, A part of the pitch of the game balls can be constituted by the special prize-winning device 550.

The projecting portion 86b has an opening 86b1 that opens in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and is located above the opening 86b1 (arrow U direction) and toward the back side (arrow B direction side). And a recessed portion 86b2 that is recessed.

A part of the first unit 551 of the special prize device 550 described later is inserted into the opening 86b1. Thus, the first unit 551 can be connected to the second unit 552 of the special prize device 550 disposed on the back side of the protruding portion 86b via the opening 86b1.

The recess 86b2 can accommodate a part of the first unit 551 of the special prize device 550 described later. The recess 86b2 has a detection device 86b3 that can detect the passage of a game ball.
Is disposed. Thereby, it is possible to detect the game ball passing through the portion accommodated inside the recess 86b2 of the first unit 551.

The special prize-winning device 550 is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86, and on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the projecting portion 86b. The second unit 552 is mainly provided.

The first unit 551 has a space (path) through which the game ball can flow down, and a part thereof is disposed in the game area of the game board 13. The first unit 551 is disposed on the center frame 86 with screws inserted through the second unit 552. A detailed description of the arrangement method of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 18A is a front view of the first unit 551, and FIG.
) Is a side view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 18C is a rear view of the first unit 551. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit 551.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the first unit 551 includes a first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and a second path member 570 disposed on the back side of the first path member 560. The third path member 580 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570 is mainly provided.

The first path member 560 has a front plate 564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13 and a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens upward (arrow U direction side). A first receiving portion 561, a second receiving portion 562, and a third receiving portion 563 that protrude from the upper end of the face plate 564 to the back side, and the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion. A first wall portion 565 formed continuously with the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the portion 563 and extending along a part of the end portion of the front plate 564, and below the first wall portion 565 2 sets of 2nd wall part 566 and 3rd wall part 567 which are formed in 2 and protruded from two places spaced apart by predetermined spacing are mainly provided.

The front plate 564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 570 or a third path member 580 described later, and is formed of a light transmitting member. The As a result, the player moves the game ball flowing down through the first unit 551 to the front plate 564.
(Through) can be visually recognized.

Further, the front plate 564 includes a guide portion 564a that protrudes on the second path member 570 side (back side (arrow B direction side)).

The guide portion 564a is a front plate 564 by a game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551.
It is a wall part which suppresses that the whole region of the wall surface of a wall becomes dirty, and the 2nd path | route member 570 mentioned later or 3rd
It extends along the flow path of the game ball flowing down between the facing members of the path member 580. In addition, the guide portion 564a is provided so as to protrude from the rolling surface of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 at a position separated from the radius of the game ball. In other words, the guide portion 564a protrudes at a position substantially the same as the center position of the game ball flowing down the first path member 560. Thereby, the part which the front board 564 and a game ball contact | abut can be limited to the protrusion front-end | tip part of the guide part 564a. Therefore, the front plate 5
It can suppress that a damage | wound arises by contact | abutting with a game ball in the whole region of 64, and the stain | pollution | contamination adhering to a game ball transfers. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first path member 560 via the front plate 564.

The first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are portions that receive game balls flowing down from the game area above (in the direction of arrow U) the first unit 551 into the first unit 551. The upper opening is set to a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. The first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are juxtaposed in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) at the upper end (arrow U direction side) of the front plate 564. The

The first receiving portion 561 is set to have a larger game ball receiving width (width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction)) than the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563. As a result, the game balls flowing into the special winning device 550 are more likely to flow into the first receiving unit 561 than the second receiving unit 562 or the third receiving unit 563.

Further, the first receiving part 561 is communicated with a flow path formed inside the first unit 551. As a result, the game balls received by the first receiving unit 561 flow down inside the first unit 551. The flow path of the game balls of the first unit 551 will be described later.

The 2nd receiving part 562 and the 3rd receiving part 563 are connected to the flow-down path formed inside the 2nd unit 552 mentioned below. As a result, the game balls received by the second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving unit 563 flow down inside the second unit 552. The second unit 55
The second flow path will be described later.

The 1st wall part 565 is an inner wall which forms the space which sends a game ball between facing the 4th wall part 573 formed in the 2nd path | route member 570 mentioned later. One end of the first wall portion 565 is connected to the lower side of the first receiving portion 561 described above, and the other end side extends to the lower side of the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 (arrow LR). Direction wall) and a curved wall portion 565b that is curved in a substantially C shape when viewed from the back and is connected to the upper side wall portion 565a.

The upper side wall portion 565a is an inner wall that covers the upper surface of the rolling surface when the game ball rolls on the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of a fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later, and the fourth wall portion 573. It is formed at a position that is separated upward (arrow U direction side) from the diameter of the game ball in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the game ball.

The curved wall portion 565b is an inner wall that changes the rolling direction of a game ball that rolls on the upper surface of a fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later, and is formed at a position facing the rolling side end of the fourth wall portion 573. The Further, the curved wall portion 565b is formed in a semicircular arc shape centering on the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 can be guided to the lower surface side of the fourth wall portion 573 by flowing down along the inner wall of the curved wall portion 565b, and the rolling can be performed. The moving direction can be opposite to the rolling direction of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573.

The second wall portion 566 is an inner wall that forms a space of a path that branches off from the main flow path of the game ball that flows down inside the first unit 551, and a pair of wall sections that protrude from the back surface of the front plate 564. Is set to a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the path | route which flows down the 1st unit 551 can be increased.

The third wall portion 567 is a wall portion that forms the inner surface of a path that branches off from the main pitching path (main path SK3) of the game ball that flows down inside the first unit 551, and projects from the back surface of the front plate 564. The distance between the pair of wall portions facing each other is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the path | route of the game ball which flows down the 1st unit 551 can be increased.

In addition, the second wall portion 566 and the third wall portion 567 have downstream end portions of the first unit 5.
51 is arranged on the opposite side of the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Thereby, a game ball can be sent to the both sides of the left-right direction of the 1st unit 551 from the branch passage mentioned later.

The second path member 570 includes a plate-like base plate 571 that faces the front plate 564 of the first path member 560, and the fourth wall portion 5 that protrudes from the front surface of the base plate 571 toward the first path member 560.
73, a fifth wall portion 574 protruding from the fourth wall portion 573 at a predetermined distance away from the fourth wall portion 573, and a protruding portion at a predetermined distance from the fifth wall portion 574 to the lower side. The sixth wall portion 575 is mainly provided and formed.

The base plate 571 is disposed at a position that is separated from the front plate 564 of the first path member 560 by a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can flow down between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571. In addition, the base plate 571 has a first opening 571 that opens at a position corresponding to each of the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563.
a, a second opening 571b and a third opening 571c, a fourth opening 571d opening below the first opening 571a, and an opening above each of the fifth wall 574 and the sixth wall 575. The fifth opening 571e and the sixth opening 571f, the fifth wall 574 and the sixth wall 575
And a recessed portion 571g that is located between and recessed on the back side.

The first opening 571a, the second opening 571b, and the third opening 571c are used to play game balls that flow into the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 of the first path member 560 described above. This is an opening that passes through the back side of the base plate 571.

The base plate 571 includes the first opening 571a, the second opening 571b, and the third opening 5.
The 1st rolling part 576, the 2nd rolling part 577, and the 3rd rolling part 578 which protrude to the back side from the lower end part of 71c are provided. Thereby, a game ball passing through the first opening 571a is passed to a third path member 580 described later, and a game ball passing through the second opening 571b or the third opening 571c is
Each ball is sent to a second unit 552 described later.

The first opening portion 571a and the fourth opening portion 571d have a third path member 580 described later on the back side.
A part of is covered. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is sent to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 571 from the fourth opening 571d.

The fourth wall 573 protrudes from the base plate 571 along the lower end of the fourth opening 571d and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). The fourth wall portion 573 is formed such that the upper surface is inclined downward as it goes from the fourth opening portion 571d opened to the left side of the base plate 571 in the front view to the right side of the front view (arrow R direction side). . Thereby, the game ball that passes through the fourth opening 571d and is sent to the front side of the base plate 571 is placed on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573, and the base plate 571 is inclined by the inclination of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573. Can be sent to the right side (arrow R direction side).

The fifth wall portion 574 is a portion serving as a rolling surface of the game ball sent from the curved wall portion 565b of the first wall portion 565 described above, and the game ball is placed in a direction perpendicular to the lower surface of the fourth wall portion 573. The base plate 571 extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and protrudes at a position spaced apart from the diameter. Further, the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the fifth wall portion is inclined downward from the curved wall portion 565b side (the arrow R direction side) toward the recessed portion 574g side (the arrow L direction side) described later. Formed. Thereby, the game ball sent to the upper surface of the 5th wall part 574 from the curved wall part 565b can be rolled to the recessed part 574g side. Furthermore, the fifth wall 574 includes a first receiving recess 574a and a second receiving recess 574b that are recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are juxtaposed in the extending direction of the fifth wall 574. Further, the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are set such that the recess width and the recess depth are larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, a fifth opening 571e that opens to the base plate 571 is formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the first receiving recess 574a or the second receiving recess 574b passes through the fifth opening 571e and is sent to the back side of the base plate 571.

The recessed portion 574g is formed above the downstream end portion (end portion on the arrow L direction side) of the fifth wall portion 574, and the recessed portion is provided with a game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574. It can be made to flow inside 574g, and can be sent to the upper part of the 6th wall part 575 formed in the downward direction (arrow D direction) of the recessed part 574g.

The sixth wall portion 575 is a portion that becomes a rolling surface of a game ball that rolls on the fifth wall portion 574 and is sent to the recessed portion 574g, and a game ball is formed downward from the lower surface of the fifth wall portion 574. The base plate 571 protrudes from the base plate 571 at a position separated from the diameter of the base plate 571 and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR). The sixth wall portion 575 is formed such that the upper surface is inclined downward from the recessed portion 574g side (arrow L direction side) toward the above-described third wall portion 567 side. Thereby, the recessed portion 574 is formed.
The game ball sent from g to the upper surface of the sixth wall portion 575 can be rolled to the side of the ball feeding path formed by the third wall portion 567. The sixth wall portion 575 includes a third receiving recess 575a and a fourth receiving recess 575b that are recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are juxtaposed in the extending direction of the sixth wall portion 575. Further, the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are set such that the recess width and the recess depth are larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, a sixth opening 571f that opens to the base plate 571 is formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b passes through the sixth opening 571f and is sent to the back side of the base plate 571.

The third path member 580 includes a first covering member 581 disposed on the rear surface of the second path member 570 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side), and the lower side in the gravity direction of the second path member 570 (arrow). The second covering member 582, the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 5 disposed on the back surface of the D direction side).
The first drive unit 583 disposed between the second cover members 582 and the second drive unit 584 disposed on the back surface of the second covering member 582 are mainly provided.

The first covering member 581 includes a curved portion 581a disposed on the back side of the first opening portion 571a and the fourth opening portion 571d described above, and a plate-like attachment portion 58 continuous to the lower side of the curved portion 581a.
1b.

The curved portion 581a includes a first opening 571a and a fourth opening 571d (second path member 570).
) Side is opened and curved in a U-shaped cross section, and a first rolling portion 576 is disposed on the inside thereof (see FIG. 24A). Further, the inner wall surface of the bending portion 581a and the first rolling portion 576 are arranged.
The distance from the projecting tip is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the first
A game ball that rolls on the rolling portion 576 can flow down along the inner wall of the curved portion 581a and be sent to the lower side of the first rolling portion 581a. Therefore, the rolling time of the game ball can be extended by sending the game ball to the bending portion 581a that curves to the back side. As a result, even when the rolling surface of the game ball cannot be secured on a plane parallel to the game area of the game board 13, the rolling speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Further, the curved portion 581a is disposed at a position where the lower end is slightly higher than the lower inner edge of the fourth opening 571d. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the gaming ball that has flowed down from the first rolling portion 576 along the inner wall of the bending portion 581a and sent to the fourth opening portion 571d to flow back into the bending portion 581a.

The attachment portion 581b is formed with two through holes 581b1 through which screws for fastening the first covering member 581 to the back surface of the second path member 570 are inserted. The mounting portion 581b is
A columnar body 551a is provided that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side. The columnar body 551a has a screw hole at the tip for fastening a second unit 552, which will be described later, to the first unit 551. Accordingly, the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be fastened by screwing the screw inserted from the back side of the second unit 552 into the columnar body 551a.

The second covering member 582 is a second bending portion 582a disposed on the back side of the sixth opening 571f.
And the back side wall 58 disposed on the back side of the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b.
2b.

The second curved portion 582a is formed to be curved in a U-shaped cross section where the sixth opening 571f (second path member 570) side is opened (see FIG. 24C). Moreover, the 2nd bending part 582a equips the inner side of U character with the standing wall 582a1 standingly arranged toward the back side from the front side. Standing wall 5
By 82a1, the internal space of the second bending portion 582a is the first on the left side (arrow L direction side) when viewed from the front.
The space 582a2 is divided into a second space 582a3 formed adjacent to the first space 582a2 with the standing wall 582a1 interposed therebetween.

The first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are spaces larger than the diameter of the game ball, and are formed from the front side toward the back side. Also, the first space 582a2 and the second space 58
2a3 is connected on the back side. Further, the inner surface of the first space 582a2 is formed to be inclined downward toward the back side, and the inner surface of the second space 582a3 is formed to be inclined downward as it is directed to the front side. As a result, the game ball sent from the recessed portion 571g to the second bending portion 582a is rolled to the back side due to the inclination of the first space 582a2, and secondly at the end on the back side.
The ball is sent to the second space 582a3 by the bending of the bending portion 582a, rolled to the front side by the inclination of the second space 582a3, passed through the opening of the sixth opening 571f, and sent to the front side of the base plate 571. .

The back side wall 582b is sent to the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b,
This is a wall portion on the back side of the pitching path that guides the game balls passing through the fifth opening 571e and the sixth opening 571f to the lower side of the special winning device 550. Thereby, the first receiving recesses 574a to 4th.
The game balls sent to the receiving recess 575b can be collected. Accordingly, the first receiving recess 5
The game balls that are sent to 74a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, pass through the detection devices SE3 to SE6, which will be described later, and are given game value to the player flow down the game area again, and the game value is given to the player again. Can be prevented.

The first drive unit 583 includes a first solenoid 583a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, a first variable plate 583b coupled to the shaft of the first solenoid 583a,
And a first protection member 583c surrounding the periphery of the solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b.

The first variable plate 583b is a rectangular plate member that is long in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and is displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in accordance with the displacement of the shaft of the first solenoid 583a. .
In addition, in a state where the first variable plate 583b projects to the front side, the tip of the first variable plate 583b is inserted into the fifth opening 571e described above, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574a.
It arrange | positions above the receiving recessed part 574b. Thereby, in a state where the first variable plate 583b is projected to the front side, the first variable plate 583b can prevent the inflow of game balls to the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b.

The first protection member 583c is formed in a box shape that opens on the second path member 570 side, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the first solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b is disposed therein. The first protective member 583c includes a plurality of through holes 583c1 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 583c1 is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first drive unit 583 to the second path member 570 is inserted. The screw inserted through the through hole 583c1 is the first covering member 581.
The second through-hole 581b1 or the second through-hole 582b1 of the second covering member 582 is inserted into the second through-hole 581b1.
It is screwed into a hole formed in the path member 570. Therefore, by arranging the first drive unit 583 on the second path member 570, the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582 can be disposed on the second path member 570. Thereby, the fastening part of the screw of the 1st covering member 581 and the 2nd covering member 582 can be decreased, and manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, since the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 can be sandwiched between the second path member 570 and the first drive unit 583, the first drive unit 583 is
The first covering member 581 or the second covering member 5 when the special winning device 550 is forcibly removed.
It is easy to make the game ball incapable of passing through the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 by incompletely fastening the pin 82 and the second path member 570. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state of being cheated.

Similarly to the first drive unit 583, the second drive unit 584 includes a second solenoid 584a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, a second variable plate 584b coupled to the shaft of the second solenoid 584a, A second protection member 584c covering the periphery of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b.

The second variable plate 584b is formed from a plate-like body that is long in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and is bent and formed in a crank shape when viewed from the front. Further, in the state where the second variable plate 584b is projected to the front side, the tip of the second variable plate 584b is the sixth opening 57 described above.
It is inserted into If and disposed above the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. Thereby, in the state where the second variable plate 584b is projected to the front side, the second variable plate 584b can prevent the game ball from flowing into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b.

The second protective member 584c is formed in a box shape that opens on the second path member 570 side, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b is disposed therein. In addition, the second protection member 584c includes a back side wall portion 584c1 that covers the back side of the pitching path formed by the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560. Thereby, the back side wall part 584c.
1 and the second wall portion 566 can not only form a pitching path but also the rear side wall portion 584c1 and the second wall portion 566.
The second path member 570 can be covered with the wall 566. As a result, the first unit 55
Detection devices SE <b> 3 to 3 are arranged in the second path member 570 by inserting an unauthorized member from the side surface of 1.
It is possible to easily suppress fraud in SE6.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21 to FIG. 24, a description will be given of the pitch of a game ball that flows from the first receiving portion 561 into the first unit 551. FIG. 21 shows XXI-XX in FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit 551 in the I line. FIG. 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 shown in FIG. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. FIG. 24A shows the XXIVa-XXIV of FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit 551 in a line, FIG.24 (b) is XXIVb of FIG.
FIG. 24C is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line -XXIVb, and FIG. 24C is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXIVc-XXIVc of FIG.

The game balls that flow into the first unit flow down the main paths SK1 to SK6 of the game balls in the order of the main path SK1, the main path SK2, the main path SK3, the main path SK4, the main path SK5, and the main path SK6. Alternatively, the main route SK is changed from the main route SK3 on the way down the main routes SK1 to SK6.
3 is flown into the sub route HK1 communicating with 3 and flows down the sub route HK1. Or main route SK
1 to sub route HK communicating with main route SK5 from main route SK5 flowing down main route SK6
2 or the sub route HK3 and flow down either the sub route HK2 or the sub route HK3.

The sub-paths HK1 to HK3 are provided with detection devices SE3 to SE6 that detect the passage of a game ball. The detection device SE3 to SE6 detects the game ball, and the player has a predetermined game value. Is granted. In this embodiment, a game value is given to the player by a predetermined number of prize balls.

As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the main path SK <b> 1 is a curved portion 581 of the first covering member 581.
a and a space formed by the first rolling portion 576 of the second path member 570 (see FIG. 24A), and communicates the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. As described above, the curved portion 581a is formed to be curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side are opened, and passes through the main path SK1. The ball can be detoured to the back side. Thereby, since the space in which the region in front view is limited (when the game ball passes inside the first opening 571a or the fourth opening 571d, the amount of movement of the game ball in the left-right direction can be reduced, It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the main route SK1, thereby making it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the first unit 551, thereby enhancing the interest of the player. it can.

In addition, as will be described later, the game ball that flows into the main route SK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, so that it is possible to play the rolling of the game ball that may give the game value to the player. It can be made easy to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to give the player interest. The main route SK1 communicates with a main route SK2 described later, and a game ball passing through the main route SK1 can flow into the main route SK2.

Further, the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 is the concave portion 86b of the center frame 86 described above.
2 (see FIG. 17). Thereby, when the game ball is clogged in the main route SK1 (the flow is slow), the malfunction can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and an error can be notified.

Furthermore, the passage width of the main route SK1 is set slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball,
It is set smaller than the opening through which the game balls of the detection devices SE3 to SE7 (see FIG. 23) pass. As a result, when a game ball (illegal game ball) having a diameter larger than the diameter (11 mm) of the reference game ball is manufactured, and the ball is illegal (game), the ball passes through the main path. S
Can be kept inside K1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegal game balls from flowing down to the detection devices SE3 to SE7 disposed on the downstream side of the main route SK1 and performing fraud. Further, by stopping the illegal game ball on the main route SK1, it is possible to detect the error (injustice) by detecting it by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17). The fraud in this case is the detection device S
An illegal game ball is fitted into any one of the openings E3 to SE7, and detection is continued by the detection devices SE3 to SE7 to obtain an illegal game ball payout (game value).

The main path SK2 includes a first wall portion 565 of the first path member 560 and a fourth path of the second path member 570.
It is a space formed between the wall portion 573. The game ball flowing into the main path SK2 rolls down on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573. As described above, the fourth wall portion 573 has a horizontal direction (
(In the direction of the arrow LR) and is formed so as to be inclined downward as it is separated from the fourth opening 571d.

Therefore, the above-described bending portion 581a (curving path toward the back side) is formed at a switching portion (a connecting portion between the main path SK1 and the main path SK2) of the game ball in the direction in which the game ball is sent. Loss of sight of game balls flowing down SK1 can be suppressed. That is, when a path that curves to the back side is formed in the middle of a linear ball-feeding path that extends in the left-right direction (for example, the main path SK2), the gaming ball that rolls at a constant acceleration along the curved path. Since the acceleration is changed (decreased), there is a possibility that the player loses sight of the game ball because the line of sight following the game ball precedes the game ball.

On the other hand, since the rolling direction of the game ball is switched and a curved path to the back side is formed at a portion where the rolling speed of the game ball is originally slowed down, the player's eyes must precede the game ball. It is possible to suppress the player from losing sight of the game ball.

Further, the curved portion 581a that is the inner wall of the main path SK1 is the left side (in the direction of the arrow L) of the first unit 551 that is disposed slightly to the right (in the direction of the arrow R) with respect to the central portion in the left-right direction of the game board 13. Side end). Therefore, a curved path (main path SK1) to the back side is formed on the side where the first unit 551 is easily visible from the player located in front of the game board 13, so that the player can move from the main path SK1 to the main path. It is easy to suppress losing sight of the game ball passing through SK2.

Further, the main path SK2 communicates with the curved path WK1, and through the curved path WK1,
It communicates with a main route SK3 described later. Thereby, the game ball passing through the main route SK2 flows into the main route SK3 via the curved route WK1. A detailed description of the curved path WK1 will be described later.

The main path SK3 is a space formed between the fourth wall part 573 and the fifth wall part 574 of the second path member 570. The game balls that flow into the main path SK3 roll down on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574. In the main path SK3, the first variable plate 583b of the first drive unit 583 described above protrudes on the main path SK3 when protruding. On the main path SK3, the first variable plate 5
In the state in which 83b protrudes, the game ball rolling on the upper portion of the fifth wall portion 574 is moved to the first variable plate 58.
The upper surface of 3b rolls and is sent to the main route SK4.

On the other hand, in a state in which the first variable plate 583b is retracted from the main path SK3, the sub-path HK1 of the space formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b formed in the fifth wall portion 574. A game ball is introduced. The sub route HK1 is sent to the collection route formed by the back side wall portion 582b through the fifth opening 571e.

As described above, the first unit 551 includes the first variable plate 583b that protrudes from or retracts from the pitching path of the game ball, and the main unit of the first unit 551 is displaced by the displacement of the first variable plate 583b. When a game ball flowing down the route SK3 is guided to the sub route HK1, and the main route S
Since it can be changed to the case of being guided by K4, it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

In this case, the game ball that flows into the sub route HK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, so that the player can watch whether the game ball has flowed into the sub route HK1. Further, the first variable plate 583b is disposed in the middle of the pitching path formed in the first unit 551, and is displaced in the player's visual recognition direction (arrow FB direction). 583
It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the displacement of b. As a result, the game balls flowing down by the first unit 551 can be watched, and the player can be easily given interest by the flow of game balls.

In addition, the sub route HK1 is a main route SK3 for sending a game ball from the right side (arrow R direction side) to the left side (arrow L direction side) when viewed from the front, and a lower side of the main route SK3 and the game ball from the left side. It is formed in the 5th wall part 574 which forms between main path | route SK6 which pitches to the right side. Therefore,
Since the sub route HK1 is formed using the space between the game balls being sent to the left and right, it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the first unit 551 from increasing in the vertical direction. As a result, by reducing the outer shape of the first unit 551, it is possible to narrow the range in which the player follows the game ball,
It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

The main path SK4 is a space formed by the recessed portion 571g and the protrusion 568 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing into the main path SK4 abuts against the protrusion 568 and is recessed 571g.
After the ball is sent to the inner side (back side), the ball rolls around the projection 568 along the inner surface of the concave portion and is sent to the outer side (front side) of the concave portion. That is, the game ball is rolled so as to bypass the protrusion 568. The main route SK4 communicates with the main route SK5, and a game ball passing through the main route SK4 can flow into the main route SK5.

The main path SK5 is the first space 582 of the second covering member 582 of the third path member 580 described above.
This is a space formed by a2 and the second space 582a3. As described above, the game ball flowing into the main path SK5 rolls in the first space 582a2 to the back side, and then the second space 5
The inside of 82a3 is rolled to the front side. In the main path SK5, the second variable plate 584b of the second drive unit 584 described above projects on the main path SK5 when protruding. This main route SK
In a state where the second variable plate 584b protrudes above the game ball 5, the game ball that rolls inside the second bending portion 582a is sent to the main path SK6.

On the other hand, in a state in which the second variable plate 584b is retracted from the main path SK5, the second receiving plate HK2 is formed in the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b formed in the sixth wall 575. A game ball flows down. The sub route HK2 is sent to the collection route formed by the back side wall portion 582b through the sixth opening 571f.

Further, as described above, the second bending portion 582a configuring the main route SK5 is formed to bend toward the back side, and the game ball passing through the main route SK5 can be detoured toward the back side.
Thereby, even when the area | region in front view is set to the predetermined limited space, the distance which a game ball can roll can be lengthened.

Further, the second variable plate 584b is configured to project or retreat with a part of the upstream side of the main path SK5 and a part of the downstream side of the main path SK5, and the main path SK5. A curved path toward the back side is formed between the upstream side of the main path SK5 and the downstream side of the main path SK5.
The time during which a game value may be given to a player by the game ball passing through K5 can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the time for providing the player with interest.

The sub route HK3 communicates with the communication portion between the main route SK4 and the main route SK5. Sub route H
K3 is the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560 and the rear side wall portion 58 of the third path member 580.
4c1 is a space formed between facing the 4c1.

The sub route HK3 is in a direction different from the flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flows from the main route SK4 into the main route SK5 (right direction in front view (arrow R direction)) (left direction in front view (arrow L direction)). In addition, the lower inner edge of the inflow port of the sub route HK3 is set below (in the direction of arrow D) below the second variable plate 584b.

Here, when the game ball normally flows from the main route SK4 to the main route SK5 (in a state where an external force other than gravity does not act), the game ball flows into the main route SK5 or the sub route HK2. The On the other hand, when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 into the sub-path HK2, the second variable plate 584b is extended and the front surface of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, so that an external force other than gravity is applied to the game ball. When the action is applied, the game ball is pushed out to the inlet of the sub route HK3 by the second variable plate 584b and flows into the sub route HK3.

Therefore, the first unit 551 includes the second variable plate 584b that protrudes or retreats from the pitching path of the game ball, and the main path SK4 of the first unit 551 is displaced by the displacement of the second variable plate 584b. Alternatively, the game balls flowing down the main route SK5 are the main route SK5 and the sub route HK2.
Alternatively, since it is guided to one of the sub-paths HK3, it is possible to change the flow direction of the game balls flowing down the first unit 551.

In this case, since a predetermined game value is given to the player by the game ball flowing into the sub route HK2 or the sub route HK3, it is noted whether the game ball has flowed into the sub route HK2 or the sub route HK3. Can be made. In addition, since the second variable plate 584b is arranged in the middle of the pitching path formed in the first unit 551, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the plate member 584b2. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first unit 551 can be watched, and the player can be easily given interest by the flow of game balls.

Further, as described above, on the upstream side of the main route SK4, the route through which the game ball flows down is switched by the first variable plate 583b. Accordingly, a game ball that does not flow into the upstream side sub route HK1 and is not given a game value to the player is caused to flow further downstream, so that the sub route HK2 or H
Can flow into K3. Therefore, by passing the game ball that may have been given game value to the player once through the switching part of the flow-down path, the game ball is moved to the sub-paths HK2 and H
The player can have the desire to flow into K3 again.

Further, a main path SK4 that is curved to the back side is disposed between the main path SK3 and the main path SK5 where the path of the game ball is switched. Therefore, the game ball can be rolled within a predetermined range in front view, and the player can easily recognize the position of the game ball. That is, after flowing down the main route SK3, the player recognizes the position of the game ball through the main route SK4, so that the player pays attention to the game ball rolling on the main route SK5 connected downstream of the main route SK4. It can be made easy. As a result, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the game balls in which the game balls flow into the sub-paths HK2 and HK3, and the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, inclined surfaces 584b1 (see FIG. 24C) that are inclined toward the back side are formed at the left and right end portions on the front side of the second variable 584b toward the ends in the left-right direction. This
When the second variable plate 584b is extended at the timing when the game ball flows from the main route SK4 into the sub route HK2, and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, the game ball is moved by the inclined surface 584b1. Can be pushed out to the inlet side of the sub route HK3. Therefore, the inclined surface 584b1.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the second variable plate 584b and the first route member 560 by the sub route HK2, and to change the flow direction depending on the timing at which the game ball flows down. A plurality (three paths in this embodiment) can be formed.

The main path SK6 is a space surrounded by the third wall portion 567 of the first path member 560. The game balls flowing down the main route SK6 are sent to the game area of the game board 13. Accordingly, the first receiving part 5
When the game ball that has flowed into 61 does not flow into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, no game value is given to the player, and the ball is sent from the main path SK6 to the game area of the game board 13. It is recovered from the out port 71 formed in the game board 13.

<Guide means for displacing the game ball in the front-rear direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28, the flow of the game ball from the main route SK2 to the main route SK3 will be described. FIG. 25A and FIG. 26A are partially enlarged views of the first unit 551 in the range XXVa in FIG. 21, and FIG. 25B and FIG.
2 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXVb-XXVb. FIG. 27A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 along the line XXVIIa-XXVIIa in FIG. 25A, and FIG. 27B is the first view along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG.
FIG. 27C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the unit 551, and FIG. 27C is a cross-sectional view of XXVIIc-X in FIG.
It is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit 551 in a XVIIc line. FIG. 28 (a) is the same as FIG.
FIG. 28 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXVb-XXVb in FIG.
(B) is the first unit 55 in the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb in FIG.
1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. In FIG. 26, a game ball flowing down the curved path WK1 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 28, the main route SK2, the main route SK3, and the curved route WK1 are:
A first recess is formed in the base plate 571 of the second path member 570 in a circular arc shape in cross section toward the back side.
The concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j, the first step portion 571k protruding stepwise from the inner wall on the main path SK2 to the front side, and the second step protruding stepwise from the inner wall on the main path SK3 A step portion 571m.

The front plate 564 of the first path member 560 includes a first recess 571h, a second recess 571i, and a third
The first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion are respectively provided at positions facing the concave portion 571j.
A convex portion 564d is projected.

The facing dimension L11 (see FIG. 28A) between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c is
It is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is set to a value smaller than the distance dimension L12 between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571 (see FIG. 28A). This
The first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, the first convex portion 564b, the second
A game ball that is sent between facing the convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d is a first concave portion 571h,
The rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball can be reduced by contacting the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d.

Further, the dimension between the first concave part 571h and the first convex part 564b and the dimension between the third concave part 571j and the third convex part 564d are the dimension between the second concave part 571i and the second convex part 564c. The distance is set substantially the same as L11.

Furthermore, the projecting tip surfaces of the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d,
A distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28A) between the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thus, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, the third recess 571j, and the first
A game ball sent between the facing of the convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d can collide with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d.
As a result, the rolling (downflow) speed of the game ball can be reduced.

Further, in this case, the game balls that are in contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d flow down inside the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. . Therefore, the game balls that flow down are moved to the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 57.
1j can be guided in the recessed direction.

The step portion 571k protrudes to the front side from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK2. Step 5
71k is formed on the downstream side in the main route SK2. The stepped portion 571k is set such that the upstream end of the main path SK2 protrudes from the front surface of the base plate 571 to the front side, and the downstream end is located at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. Is set. This
A game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be brought into contact with the step portion 571k and moved to the front side.

Further, the step portion 571k is formed as an inclined surface in which an upstream end projects from the upstream side toward the downstream side toward the front side. As a result, the game ball that flows down the main path SK2 and comes into contact with the upstream end of the stepped portion 571k can flow down to the downstream side while being guided to the front side.

Further, the stepped portion 571k has a first convex portion 564 whose upstream end is formed on the front plate 564.
It is formed on the upstream side of the main path SK2 from b. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball guided to the front side to come into contact with the step portion 571k to come into contact with the first convex portion 564b.

The first recess 571h is recessed in the base plate 571 constituting the main path SK2, and is formed in an elliptical shape that is long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) when viewed from the front. The first recess 571h is formed in the base plate 571 at a position protruding to the front side by the step 571k. The depth of the recess on the back side at the center in the vertical direction of the first recess 571h is the stepped portion 571.
It is set to be substantially the same as the height dimension L22 to the front side of k (see FIG. 27B). Accordingly, the game ball that is sent through the main path SK2 without being violated is allowed to flow inside the first recess 571h without being displaced in the concave direction of the first recess 571h (back side (arrow B direction side)). be able to.

On the other hand, the game ball sent on the main route SK2 in a violent state is brought into contact with the upstream end of the step portion 571k, guided to the front side of the main route SK2, and the first protrusion of the front plate 564. It abuts on the part 564b. Thereby, the game ball can be sent to the inside of the first recess 571h while suppressing the rampage of the game ball.

Further, the first recess 571h is a height dimension Y8 from the rolling surface of the game ball (the surface on the arrow U direction side of the fourth wall portion 573) on the upstream side of the main path SK2 to the recessed bottom surface in the orthogonal direction. FIG.
(See (a)) is set to the radius of the game ball, and a concave bottom surface in a direction perpendicular to the rolling surface of the game ball (the surface on the arrow U direction side of the fourth wall portion 573) on the downstream side of the main path SK2. Up to Y
9 (see FIG. 25A) is set higher than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the main route S
When a game ball flowing down K2 is sent along the first recess 571h, the upper side in the direction of gravity (arrow U
The rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced by applying resistance in the direction of lifting to the direction side to the game ball. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball flowing into the curved path WK1 can be made sufficiently small, and the game ball can be made to smoothly flow down.

The radius X11 (see FIG. 27B) in the cross section of the first recess 571h is set to a value larger than the radius of the game ball, and when the game ball is sent inside the first recess 571h, A game ball can be brought into contact with the inner wall. Thereby, it can suppress that the contact part of the game ball contact | abutted with the 1st recessed part 571h becomes two places, and can suppress that the resistance with respect to rolling of the game ball by the contact part increasing becomes large. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping on the main route SK2.

The first convex portion 564b formed at a position facing the first concave portion 571h is the first concave portion 571h.
Is formed at a position that is separated from the upstream end of the game path in the main path SK2 in the direction in which the game ball is sent (in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 27 (b)), and the distance is set to a size smaller than the radius of the game ball. Is done.
As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 is brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b so that the first concave portion 5
It is easy to send the ball to the inside of 71h.

The second recess 571i is recessed in the base plate 571 of the curved path WK1, and is formed in an elliptical shape whose outer shape in front view is long in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). The second recess 5
In 71i, the center position in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in the front view is set to an intermediate position of the curved path WK1. Further, the second concave portion 571i is formed at a central position in a direction where the central position in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in the front view is orthogonal to the pitching direction of the curved path WK1.

The main path SK1, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK2 are all set to have the same width dimension L18 (see FIG. 25 (a)) perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is sent in the front view. The width dimension L18 is set to approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball.

Further, the first width of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j is set to be approximately ½ of the above-described width dimension L18 in the short side direction when viewed from the front. Thereby, the center of the game ball passing through each path (main path SK1, curved path WK1, and main path SK2) can be passed through the front side of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j. The game balls can be easily fed into the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j.

The step portion 571m protrudes from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK3 to the front side. Step 5
71m is formed on the upstream side in the route of the main route SK3. The step portion 571m is set at a position where the downstream end of the main path SK3 protrudes to the front side of the base plate 571,
The upstream end is set at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. Thereby, the main route S
It is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down K3 from flowing back (bounces back) upstream beyond the step portion 571m after being sent downstream from the step portion 571m.

The third recess 571j is formed in the base plate 571 constituting the inner wall of the main path SK3, and is formed in an elliptical shape that is long in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction) when viewed from the front. Further, the third recess 571j is a base plate 571 at a position protruding to the front side by the step 571m.
Formed. The depth of the recess on the back side at the center of the third recess 571j in the vertical direction is set to be substantially the same as the height L23 (see FIG. 27C) to the front side of the step 571m. Thereby, it is possible to easily cause the game balls sent along the main route KR3 to flow out from the inside to the outside of the third recess 571j.

Furthermore, the end of the third recess 571j on the downstream side of the main path SK3 is connected to a sub-path H described later.
The first variable plate 583b that switches the path flowing down to K1 is disposed above the end (the end on the arrow R direction side) in the gravity direction (arrow U direction) on the upstream side of the main path SK3. Accordingly, when the stop position of the first variable plate 583b is shifted upward in the gravitational direction due to the displacement (the variable plate 583).
b is disposed above the downstream end of the curved wall portion 565b), and the game ball passing through the main path SK3 is sent along the inner surface of the third recess 571j, whereby the first variable plate 583b
You can send a ball without getting caught. As a result, it is not necessary to dispose the first variable plate 583b below in the portion where the first wall portion 565 and the first variable plate 583b are adjacent to each other, and it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 from increasing. .

In this case, the third recess 571j has a horizontal direction (arrow L
-R direction) and is spaced upward with respect to the game balls flowing down the main path SK3, so that the game balls sent from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b are A resistance in the direction of lifting to the side can be applied. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball sent from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b from being caught on the first variable plate 583b.

Further, the first unit 551 is arranged on one side of the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 13 in the front view (
A main route SK2 for sending a game ball in the direction of arrow R), and a main route SK3 for sending a game ball sent from the main route SK2 to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the main route SK2,
A curved path WK1 that connects one side of the main path SK2 and the main path SK3, and the curved path WK1 guides the game ball to at least one of the front side or the back side with respect to the game board (first Since the two convex portions 564c and the second concave portion 571i) are provided on the inner walls on the front side and the back side with respect to the game board, the game balls passing through the curved path WK1 are placed on the front side or the back side (front and back of the game board 13 in front view) Direction).

Accordingly, the flow of the game ball accelerated by rolling on the main route SK2 (first route) is more than when the pitch of the game ball passing through the curved route WK1 is formed in the same plane in the front-rear direction in the front view. You can slow down. Therefore, the game ball that collides with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 returns to the main path SK2 by the amount that the flow velocity of the game ball can be slowed, or the pitching direction of the main path SK2 inside the curved path WK1 (horizontal direction in front view ( (Swaying in the direction of arrow LR))) can be suppressed. Thereby, the player's line of sight can follow the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 in a certain direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the curved path WK1.

In addition, since the game ball can be prevented from swinging (blurring) in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in the front view) with respect to the game board 13 in the front view, the curved path WK1 connecting the main path SK2 and the main path SK3 correspondingly. There is no longer a need to lengthen the path and prevent the game ball from swinging,
The curved path WK1 can be shortened. As a result, the first unit 551 can be stored in a predetermined area with respect to the game board 13, and the first unit 551 with respect to the game board 13 can be accommodated.
Can be secured.

Furthermore, the first recessed portion 571h has a recessed width that increases in the direction (arrow UD direction) orthogonal to the flow-down direction of the main path SK2 toward the upstream side of the main path SK2. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main route SK2 can be easily received in the first recess 571h. Further, since the first recessed portion 571h is set to have a smaller recessed width toward the downstream side of the main path SK2, the game ball received in the first recessed portion 571h can be easily pulled out from the same position. That is, the first recess 5
71h can easily accept the game ball on the upstream side of the main route SK2, and can easily escape the game ball from the same position on the downstream side of the main route SK2. As a result, it is possible to easily send the game ball to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1 communicated downstream of the main path SK2.

In this case, the concave end portion of the first recess 571h in the flow-down direction (arrow R direction) of the main path SK2 is the rolling surface (fourth) of the main path SK2 in the rolling direction of the game ball sent through the main path SK2.
It is formed at a position exceeding the upper surface of the wall portion 573. Therefore, it is possible to make the game ball that escapes from the first recess 571h less susceptible to the rolling surface of the main path SK2. As a result, it is possible to easily send the game ball that has escaped from the first recess 571h to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1.

Further, the main path SK2 is located inside the path from the fourth opening 571d side toward the curved wall 565b side (that is, from the front side left side (arrow L direction side) to the front side right side (arrow R direction side)). The space is formed to be inclined toward the front plate 564 side (front side (arrow F direction side)). The main route S
K2 is formed such that its rolling surface (the surface on the upper side in the gravity direction of the fourth wall portion 573) is inclined downward toward the front side. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily rolled on the front plate 564 side, and the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball can be easily reduced by the first convex portion 564b, and the main path SK2 is generated by the reaction force of the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 colliding with the curved wall portion 565b.
Can be prevented from flowing backward. As a result, it is possible to stably flow down the game ball at the change location of the game ball sending direction.

The second recess 571i has an upper end (end in the arrow U direction) drawn in a straight line along the rolling trajectory at the center of the game ball rolling on the main path SK2 (fourth wall 573). It is formed at a position in contact with the virtual line IL3 (see FIG. 25A). Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the second concave portion 571i to accept the game ball that is sent through the main route SK2 at a relatively high speed and flows into the curved route WK1.

A second concave portion 571i and a second convex portion 564c are formed at a change location (curved path WK1) in the game ball sending direction. As described above, the first protrusion 564b, the second protrusion 564c, and the third
The protruding front end surface of the convex portion 564d, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571.
Since the distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28A) between the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding j is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the distance between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c. The game ball flowing down can be pushed into the second concave portion 571i by contacting the second convex portion 564c. Therefore, it flows into the main path SK3 (second concave portion 571i and second convex portion 564c.
The game ball exiting from the space) can flow down along the arc of the inner surface of the second recess 571i.

Here, the game ball sent from the main route SK2 to the curved route WK1 can easily flow down the position of the game ball on the main route SK2 close to the rolling direction. Therefore, the game ball flowing down inside the second recess 571i comes into contact with the inner surface of the second recess 571i on the right side of the front view (arrow R direction side). Therefore, the direction in which the game balls flow into the main path SK3 can be easily directed from the main path SK3 toward the flow-down direction (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball from colliding with the curved wall portion 565b and temporarily stopping the flow down at the place where the game ball is changed in the direction in which the game ball is sent (see FIG. 28).

Further, the direction in which the game ball is sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is set to the main path SK.
3 can be directed in the direction toward the flow-down direction 3, so that the force with which the game ball collides with the curved wall portion 565b can be reduced. As a result, damage to the curved wall portion 565b due to repeated collision of the game ball with the curved wall portion 565b can be suppressed.

Further, the first convex portion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and the first
The recess 571h is formed in the second path member 570 disposed on the back side.

Here, a recess (second path member 570) is provided in the first path member 560 so as to be recessed toward the front side.
The first recess member corresponding to the first recess 571h of the first path member 56 is provided.
It is necessary to increase the plate thickness of zero. Therefore, as the plate thickness of the first path member 560 increases, the permeability of the first path member 560 deteriorates, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the first unit 551.

In addition, when the recessed portion is formed on the back surface of the bulging portion that partially bulges in front of the first path member 560, the gaming board 13 is in proportion to the bulging portion bulging on the front side of the first path member 560. It is necessary to increase the gap between the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the front side of the glass. Therefore, as the first path member 560 moves away from the glass unit 16, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

In contrast, the first convex portion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and the first concave portion 571h is formed on the second path member 570 disposed on the back side. The thickness of the first path member 560 disposed on the front side can be reduced. Moreover, since the part which protrudes partially in the front side of the 1st path | route member 560 is not formed, the 1st path | route member 560 can be arrange | positioned close to the glass unit 16. FIG. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

The second convex part 564c is located below the main path SK2 (upper surface of the fourth wall part 573) in the gravitational direction (arrow D direction) and descends in substantially the same direction as the rolling direction of the main path SK2 in front view. Inclined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down between the opposing portions of the second convex portion 564c and the second concave portion 571i is guided to the region on the right side (arrow R direction side) in front view of the second concave portion 571i by the inclination of the second convex portion 564c. can do. As described above, the second recessed portion 571i is formed with a curved concave surface, so that the game ball flowing down in contact with the inner side of the region on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second recessed portion 571i is viewed from the front. The ball can be sent in the flow direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side toward the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, the curved path WK
The inflow of game balls from 1 to the main route SK3 can be made smooth.

Further, the second recess 571i has an end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in the front view as the main path S.
An imaginary line IL4 drawn linearly along the rolling trajectory at the center of the game ball rolling on K3 (FIG. 25).
(See (a)). Thereby, the height of the center of the game ball discharged from the downstream end of the second recess 571i can be set on the virtual line IL4. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i is sent in the flow direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). Since the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i can be the main path SK3 or the curved path WK
It is possible to suppress a game ball that is brought into contact with the inner surface of 1 and is sent to the main path SK3 from colliding with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 and stagnating inside these paths.

The direction in which the game ball flows into the main route SK3 can be directed in the direction of the main route SK3 in a position close to the rolling surface of the main route SK3. As a result, the curved path WK1 to the main path S
It is possible to suppress the game ball flowing into K3 from being sent in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball of the curved path WK1 is sent. As a result, the game ball sent to the main route SK3 is changed to the curved route W.
It can suppress that it collides with the inner wall of K1 and stagnates.

<Disposing the first member to which a high game value is given on the front side>
Next, the configuration of the second unit 552 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29A is a front view of the second unit 552, and FIG.
2 is a rear view of FIG. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit 552, and FIG.
FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second unit 552.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the second unit 552 includes a fourth path member 610 disposed on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) and the fourth path member 610. A fifth ball member 620 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and a game ball pitching path are formed between the fifth path member 620 and the fifth path member 620 disposed on the back side of the fifth path member 620. And a decoration member 650 disposed on a side surface of the second unit 552.

The fourth path member 610 is connected to the first unit 551 via the center frame 86 described above.
It is attached to the back side (arrow B direction side). The fourth path member 610 stands on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) from the end of the mounting plate 611 formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. The side wall part 612 is provided, and the first communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 that communicate with the internal space to the second rolling part 577 and the third rolling part 578 of the first unit 551 are provided.

The attachment plate 611 is recessed in a circular shape on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)), and an insertion portion 617 in which a through hole is formed in the recessed bottom surface, and a fifth path member 620. side(
A path-side fastening portion 618 and a decorative-side fastening portion 619 that are formed in a circular shape on the back side (arrow B direction side) and in which a screw screw hole is formed on the protruding tip surface, and a mounting plate 611 An opening 613 that is opened at the center of the second opening 613, and a second insertion portion 614 that is opened outside the opening 613.

The insertion portion 617 is a portion through which the tip of a screw for fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is inserted, and is formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) of the mounting plate 611.

The path-side fastening portion 618 is a portion into which a screw inserted into an insertion hole 632 of a sixth path member 630 described later is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the insertion hole 632. As a result, the sixth
The path member 630 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The decorative side fastening portion 619 is a portion into which a screw inserted into a fastening hole 652 formed in the decorative member 650 described later is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 652. Thereby, the decorative member 650 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The opening 613 is formed at a position facing the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a disposed in the first unit 551. Thus, when the fourth path member 610 is disposed on the back surface of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be disposed inside the opening 613. Accordingly, when the fourth path member 610 is disposed on the back surface of the first unit 551, the fourth path member 610 can be prevented from increasing in the front-rear direction, and the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be surrounded. 4th
It can be surrounded by a path member 610.

The first communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 are formed in a U shape with the upper side (arrow U direction side) opened in a front view and extended in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). . Also,
The first communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 have front end portions in contact with the back side of the second rolling part 577 and the third rolling part 578 of the first unit 551, and The end part is in contact with the front side of the end part of the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 of the fifth path member 620 described later. Further, the first communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 are provided in the fifth unit from the first unit 551 side.
It is formed to be inclined downward toward the path member 620. Thereby, the game balls sent to the first communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 from the second rolling part 577 and the third rolling part 578 of the first unit 551 are transferred to the first communication path 615 and the second communication path 615. The communication path 616 can be rolled to flow into the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 of the fifth path member 620.

The second insertion portion 614 is a hole through which a screw that is screwed into the screw hole 86b4 of the protruding portion 86b is inserted when the fourth path member 610 is fastened to the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86. It is formed at a position corresponding to the screw hole 86b4 (see FIG. 35) formed in 86b. Accordingly, the fourth path member 610 can be disposed on the back surface of the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86.

When the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened, the side wall 612 includes a side surface of the first solenoid 583a and a second solenoid 584a that are disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first unit 551. This is a plate member that covers the side surfaces of the mounting plate 611, and is erected from the entire end portion of the mounting plate 611 to the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)). Note that the standing dimension of the side wall portion 612 on the front side (the first unit 551 side) is set to a length that makes contact with the protruding portion 86 b of the center frame 86. Thereby, since the side wall part 612 is arrange | positioned between the 1st unit 551 and the 2nd unit 552, it can suppress that a clearance gap is formed between the 1st unit 551 and the 2nd unit 552. As a result, it is possible to suppress unauthorized objects from being inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

The fifth path member 620 includes a plate member 621 formed from a substantially rectangular plate in front view, a first inlet 625 and a second inlet 626 opened in the plate member 621, and the periphery of the second inlet 626. To the second inflow port 626 and the sixth path member 630 side (rear side (arrow B direction side))
A second standing wall 623 that is erected on the sixth path member 630 side from the periphery of the first inlet 625 to the lower side of the first inlet 625, From plate member 621 to sixth
And a fastened portion 627 that protrudes toward the path member 630 side.

The plate member 621 is formed in an outer shape smaller than the outer shape of the fourth path member 610 when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the fourth path member 610. Further, the plate member 621 includes a central opening 622 that is opened at the central portion in a front view. The central opening 622 is formed larger than the outer shape of the second solenoid 584a in the rear view, and is formed at a position corresponding to the second solenoid 584a. Thereby, the plate member 621 (
When the fifth path member 620) is disposed on the back side of the fourth path member 610, the fourth path member 61 is provided.
A second solenoid 584 a inserted through the inside of the zero opening 613 can be arranged inside the central opening 622.

As described above, the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 are the first inlets of the fourth path member 610.
It is a part (opening to which it flows) which receives the game ball which interlocks the communicating path 615 and the 2nd communicating path 616 between the 5th path member 620 and the 6th path member 630 facing.

The fastened portion 627 is a portion for screwing a tip of a screw inserted through a fastening hole 633 formed in a sixth path member 630 described later, and is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening hole 633. As a result, the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are fastened. Further, the fastened part 62
7 projecting toward the sixth path member 630 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a gap is formed between the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 so that the game ball can flow down.

The first standing wall 624 extends from the first inlet 625 to the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 63.
This wall guides a game ball that flows in between 0 facing, extends downward, and is connected to the second standing wall 623. The second standing wall 623 is a wall that guides the game ball that has flowed into the fifth path member 620 from the second inflow port, and extends in the vertical direction of the plate member 621. In addition,
A description will be given later of the pitching path formed by the first standing wall 624 and the second standing wall 623.

The sixth path member 630 includes a base plate 631 formed from a substantially rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and a second central opening 634 opened to the base plate 631 at a position facing the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620. Insertion hole 6 penetratingly formed around the second central opening 634 of the base plate 631
32 and a fastening hole 633.

The second central opening 634 is formed in substantially the same size as the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 in a front view, and when the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are combined, The fifth path member 620 communicates with the central opening 622. Thus, when the second unit 552 is disposed on the back side of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a of the first unit 551 can be disposed inside the second central opening 634.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the pitching path formed by the fifth path member 620 will be described. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the second unit 552 taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 32, the second unit 552 includes the first standing wall 624 of the fifth path member 620.
A sub-path HK4 formed surrounded by the second standing wall 623 and a sub-path H formed surrounded by the second standing wall 623
K5.

The sub route HK4 extends downward from the first inflow port 625, then bends toward the sub route HK5 described later, and communicates with the sub route HK5. In addition, in the sub route HK4, a detection device SE7 that detects the passage of the game ball is disposed in a portion extending downward. Thereby, it can be detected that the game ball has passed through the sub route HK4. Further, when the detection device SE7 detects the passing of the game ball,
A predetermined game value is given to the player (in this embodiment, a prize ball of game balls).

In the present embodiment, the number of game balls (for example, three) awarded to the player as the game ball passes through the detection device SE7 is the detection device SE3 disposed in the first unit 551. ~
Number of game balls (for example, 15) awarded to the player as the game ball passes SE6
Less than. That is, the game value given to the player as it passes through the detection device SE7 is given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection devices SE3 to SE6 arranged in the first unit 551. It is set higher than the game value to be played. This makes it easier to focus on the game ball passing through the first unit 551. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to give the player interest.

The sub-path HK5 extends downward from the second inlet 626, and the second unit 552.
Is connected to the recovery path of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the sub route HK5 are collected without giving a game value to the player. Further, the game balls detected by the detection device SE7 after flowing down the sub route HK4 are sent to the sub route HK5 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

The special prize-winning device 550 includes a first unit 551 that is formed of a material that can transmit light and is disposed on the front side of the gaming area, and a second unit that is disposed on the back side of the first unit 551. 552, and the first unit 551 has a first receiving portion 561 capable of entering a game ball.
The second unit 552 includes a second receiving unit 562 and a third receiving unit 5 that can enter a game ball.
63, the game ball entering the first receiving unit 561 has a higher game value to the player than the game ball entering the second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving unit 563 (payout of game balls) Is granted.

Therefore, the handling of the game ball sending paths of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is complicatedly formed (for example, the pitching path of the first unit 551 and the pitching path of the second unit 552 are front-rear direction in front view). Compared to the case where the game balls flow down to the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 at the same timing, it is possible to make it easier for the player to watch the game balls flowing down the first unit 551. Therefore, the 1st receiving part 5 with high game value
It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 having 61. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the game ball passing through a route where a high game value is given to the player, and thus it is easy to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, the inflow port (first receiving portion 561) of the pitching path for sending game balls to the first unit 551
Since the inflow port (the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563) of the pitching path for sending the game ball to the second unit 552 is formed at the adjacent position, the first gaming value is given. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to make a decision until it flows into the unit 551, flows into the second unit 552 to which a low game value is given, or until a game ball flows in. As a result, it is possible to easily provide interest to the player until immediately before the game ball flows into the special winning device 550.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33 to FIG.
The arrangement state will be described. FIG. 33 (a) is a front view of the center frame 86,
FIG. 33B is a side view of the center frame 86. FIG. 34A is a perspective front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 34B is a perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 36 shows the XX in FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the center frame 86 in the XVI-XXXVI line. FIG. 37 (a)
FIG. 37B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 37B is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board 13.
Note that FIG. 37A and FIG. 37B correspond to the cross section of FIG.

<Fixing means for urging the first member toward the base member>
As shown in FIG. 33 to FIG. 37, the special prize-winning device 550 has a first unit 551 that can be removed on the front side of the center frame 86 and a rear side of the center frame 86 with the center frame 86 interposed therebetween. A possible second unit.

The first unit 551 has a first solenoid 583a and a second solenoid 584a disposed on the back side of the first unit 551 inserted in the opening 86b1 of the center frame 86, and is on the front side of the protruding portion 86b. It is arranged. The first unit 551 includes a columnar body 551a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the second unit 552 side.

The columnar body 551a is inserted through the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552.
7 and a hole into which the screw inserted through the insertion portion 617 is screwed is provided at the tip.

The first unit 551 is fixed to the center frame 86 by screws inserted into the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552. More specifically, the first unit 551 is disposed with the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86 between the first unit 551 and the fourth path member 610 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side). Further, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552 by screwing a screw inserted from the insertion portion 617 of the fourth path member 610 into the columnar body 551a.

Further, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened, a screw hole 86b4 (in which a screw inserted into the second insertion portion 614 formed in the second unit 552 is recessed in the protruding portion 86b ( The projecting portion 86b and the fourth path member 610 can be fastened by being screwed to each other (see FIG. 35). As described above, since the fourth path member 610 and the first unit 551 are fastened and fixed, the first unit 551 is fastened by fastening the fourth path member 610 to the projecting portion 86b.
Is fastened to the protruding portion 86b.

As shown in FIG. 37, the opening dimension Y1 in the vertical direction of the first opening 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 37B) is the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 (second path member 570). It is set slightly smaller than Y2 (see FIG. 37 (b)). Also, the first unit 55
The distance dimension Y4 (see FIG. 37B) from the contact surface of the first base plate 60 to the front surface to the contact surface of the second unit 552 to the base plate 60 is the first unit 551 and the second unit. 552
Are set slightly smaller than the thickness dimension Y3 of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 37B).

Thereby, when the 1st unit 551, the 2nd unit, and 552 are fastened, the 1st unit 551 can be urged to the base board 60 side (back side). Therefore, the base plate 6
It can suppress that a clearance gap is formed between the front of 0 and the 1st unit 551. Therefore, it is not necessary to fasten the first unit 551 with a screw from the front side of the base plate 60, and accordingly,
Since the screw fastening allowance is not required on the front face of the first unit 551, the area on the front side of the first unit 551 can be used as a space for sending game balls. As a result, the first
A space for sending game balls formed in the unit 551 can be secured.

In addition, the fastening portion (columnar body 551a) between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is
Since it protrudes and is formed on the back side of the first unit 551, it is possible to secure a space for sending game balls formed on the first unit 551 compared to the case where the fastening portion is formed on the front side of the base plate 60. it can.

Further, since the second unit 552 can be biased toward the base plate 60 (front side), it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60. Therefore,
It is possible to prevent the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551 from being cheated by inserting an unauthorized object such as a wire or a piano wire from between the opposing sides of the second unit 552 and the base plate 60.

Furthermore, since the first unit 551 is disposed on the base plate 60 by screws inserted from the back side of the base plate 60, the fastening allowance (screws are inserted through the front side of the first unit 551). There is no need to form an extended portion where an opening is formed. As a result, the entire area can be used as a pitching path with respect to the outer shape of the first unit 551 in a front view, and the pitching path of the first unit 551 can be enlarged.

Further, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is removed due to fraud from the front side of the game board 13. Can be suppressed. As a result, fraud to the first unit 551 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the screw head. As a result, the first
By recognizing the configuration for fixing the unit 551 to the base plate 60 by the player,
It can suppress that a player's interest falls.

Further, the first unit 551 is a fixing means (screw) fastened from the back side of the base plate 60.
Thus, the base plate 60 is disposed on the base plate 60 in a state of being biased to the back side with respect to the base plate 60.
The first unit 551 and the base plate 60 can be disposed in close contact with each other by the biasing force acting on the first unit 551 toward the back side.

Furthermore, the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86 in a state where a ball-sending path capable of delivering game balls is formed in each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.
51 can be prevented from shifting when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are assembled. As a result, the game balls flowing down inside the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 become the first unit 551 and the second unit 55.
It is possible to suppress stopping at the two pitching paths.

The first unit 551 also includes rolling surfaces (second rolling part 577 and third rolling part 578) for allowing the game balls sent to the first unit 551 to flow into the second unit 552.
Accordingly, each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is connected to the center frame 8.
If the first projecting portion 86b is fastened to the center frame 86, an assembly error of the first unit 551 with respect to the center frame 86 occurs, so that the game balls can be smoothly fed from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552. There was a risk of being lost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first unit 551 is the second unit 5.
Since the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened to each other, the error at the time of fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be minimized. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly sent from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

The fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 are arranged at positions that overlap at least a part of the insertion part 617 and the second insertion part 614 of the fourth path member 610 in the rear view. . Accordingly, the first unit 551 can be removed from the center frame 86 only after the fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 are removed. Thus, the first unit 55 that forms the main paths SK1 to SK6.
1 can be prevented from being removed from the center frame 86 and fraudulently performed on the main paths SK1 to SK6.

Furthermore, the projecting portion 86b includes an erecting portion 86b5 that erects (folds back) toward the second unit 552 at the end (see FIG. 33B). Thus, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86 with the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86 interposed therebetween, the standing portion 86b5 of the first unit 551 The first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a disposed on the back side are surrounded.

Therefore, in the state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86, an unauthorized object such as a wire or a piano wire is inserted from between the opposing sides of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551 from being cheated while the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86.

Further, a first solenoid 583a is provided between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.
In addition, a part of the front side of the second solenoid 584a is disposed, and a standing portion 86b5 is interposed. Therefore, the first solenoid 583a is utilized using the space in which the standing portion 86b5 is disposed.
In addition, a part of the front side of the second solenoid 584a can be disposed. Therefore, a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is accommodated between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, so that the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 5 are accommodated.
It can suppress that 84a protrudes to the back side. As a result, the periphery of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a on the back side can be easily surrounded by the second unit 552, and the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be illegally operated from the back side. It can be suppressed by two units 552.

Further, a first solenoid 583 is provided between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.
a and a part of the front side of the second solenoid 584a are arranged, so that the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 is hidden by the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a so that it is difficult to see from the player side. Can do. Thereby, even if the flow line of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 and the flow line of the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 overlap in front view, the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 It can be easily seen by the player. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 in which the game value higher than the game value given to the player by the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 is given to the player. Because it can, it can be easy to give the player interest.

Further, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86, the decorative member 650 is disposed so as to cover the inner side surface of the base frame 86 a of the center frame 86. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress an unauthorized object such as a wire or a piano wire from being inserted into the special prize winning device 550 through (through) the opening of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the first solenoid 58 disposed in the first unit 551.
3a is inserted on the inner side of the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 formed on the fourth path member 610 and the fifth path member 620 of the second unit 552 on the back side. This
While suppressing that the 2nd unit 552 bulges to the back side (arrow B direction side), the 1st
It is possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires from accessing the solenoid 583a.

Further, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the second unit 552, the second path member 570 of the first unit 551 in which the first solenoid 583a is disposed.
Can be prevented from bending. As a result, the passage of the game ball of the first unit 551 can be stabilized.

Further, as described above, the opening 8 of the projecting portion 86b formed in the center frame 86.
Since the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are surrounded by 6b1, the relatively heavy (heavy) first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are supported by the opening 86b1 (projecting portion 86b). can do. As a result, it is possible to suppress the protruding portion 86b from being bent by the load of the special winning device 550.

Therefore, the center frame 86 disposed on the base plate 60 can be prevented from being bent (bent), and therefore the arrangement of the first units 551 disposed on the center frame 86 is the base plate 60.
Can be prevented from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to smoothly flow the game ball from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

In addition, a second rolling part 57 that sends a game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.
7 and the third rolling part 578 are formed outside the opening 86b1 of the projecting part 86b. Thereby, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 5 arranged inside the opening 86b1.
The first unit 551 to the second unit 552 are driven by the electromagnetic force generated by the drive of 84a.
It can suppress that the rolling of the game ball sent to is inhibited. In other words, the projecting portion 86b can suppress the electromagnetic force generated by driving the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from acting on the outside of the projecting portion 86b. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the game balls sent from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

As described above, the first solenoid 583a is disposed such that the back side is inserted into the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552. Thereby, the detection devices SE <b> 3 to 6 of the first unit 551 and the wiring of the first solenoid 583 a can be arranged through the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634. Moreover, since those wiring can be arrange | positioned along the 1st solenoid 583a, it can suppress that a wiring gets entangled.

Furthermore, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552, the protruding portion 86b in which the first unit 551 is disposed bends. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the center frame 86 disposed on the base plate 60 can be prevented from being bent (bent), so that the first unit 551 disposed on the center frame 86 is displaced from the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to smoothly flow the game ball from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

<Displacement member for disposing the fixing member of the substrate unit on the back member>
Next, with reference to FIG. 38 to FIG. 42, the connection structure of the back case 300 and the substrate unit 110 will be described in detail. First, referring to FIG. 38 and FIG.
The structure of 0 will be described.

FIG. 38A is a front view of the back case 300, and FIG. 38B is a back case 30.
FIG. FIG. 39A is an exploded perspective front view of the back case 300, and FIG.
FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case 300.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the rear case 300 includes an engagement member 310 disposed on the front side (open side (arrow F direction side) formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear surface. Case 300
The board box 100 (main controller 110) described above is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side).
) Is mainly provided.

Further, the back case 300 has a protruding portion 30 that protrudes from the front wall at two locations on the bottom wall portion 301.
1b, a first opening 301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and the engaging member 31
2nd opening part 301d opened to the position facing 0.

The projecting portion 301b is a shaft for holding the engaging member 310 in a slidable state,
The sliding member 314 is inserted into a sliding groove 314 that opens in an engaging member 310 described later. Further, the protruding portion 30
1b is projected in an annular shape, and a screw can be screwed inside the annular shape. Therefore, after inserting the protruding portion 301b into the inside of the sliding groove 314, the engaging member is screwed into the protruding portion 301b with a screw having a head having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 314. 310 for rear case 3
00.

The first opening 301c is an opening for inserting a part of a fixing member 320 (engaged with the engaging member 310) described later, and an engaging part (an engaged portion 332 described later) of the fixing member 320. )
It is formed in the shape which can be inserted. As a result, the fixing member 320 disposed on the back surface side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) is engaged with the engagement member 310 disposed on the front surface side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). be able to.

Further, the first opening 301c is a protruding wall 301c1 that protrudes to the back side at an end (an arrow R direction side) opposite to an engagement side (arrow L direction side) between the fixing member 320 and the engagement member 310. Is provided. The protruding wall 301c1 is formed in a hook shape with the protruding tip on the back side bent approximately 90 degrees, and the bending direction is set in a direction away from the first opening 301c (arrow R direction).

The tip of the protruding wall 301c1 is inserted into a locking portion 331 of the fixing member 320 described later. Thereby, the opposite side (arrow R direction side) of the engaging part of the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 can be locked. As a result, the fixing member 320 disposed on the back case 300 is moved left and right (
The fixing member 320 and the engaging member can be supported (engaged) at both ends in the direction of the arrow LR, and the concentration of force on the engaging portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 is suppressed. 310
Can be prevented from being damaged. A detailed description of the arrangement of the fixing member 320 in the first opening 301c will be described later.

The second opening 301d is an opening for inserting a part of the engaging member 310 (operation element 315), which will be described later, into the back side of the back case 300, whereby the engaging member 310 is connected to the back side of the back case. Can be operated from. Therefore, as described above, after the fixing member 320 is arranged on the back surface of the back case 300, the engaging member 310 is operated from the back side of the back case 300, and the fixing member 320 and the engaging member are connected to the back case 300 ( The bottom wall 301) can be engaged on the front side.

The engaging member 310 has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front. The first piece 311 and the second piece 312 extend in parallel to each other, and the first piece 311 and the second piece 3 thereof.
12 end parts are comprised from the 3rd piece 313 which connects the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the 1st piece 311 and the 2nd piece 312. FIG.

The above-described two sliding grooves 314 are formed in each of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 and are long in the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 (arrow LR direction). Opened in the shape of a slot. Thereby, the engaging member 310 can be slid in the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 (arrow LR direction).

The first piece 311 has an end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is coupled as an engagement portion with a fixing member 320 described later. The engaging portions 316 that are formed and project outward on both sides in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) that is substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 311, and the two engaging portions 316. From a substantially intermediate position toward the recess 317 recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311 and toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300. A projecting operation element 315.

The engaging portion 316 has a substantially triangular outer shape in front view, and is on one side (arrow R direction side).
The outer surface of the first piece 311 is formed as an inclined surface projecting outward from the first piece 311 toward the other side (arrow L direction side) from the one side end. Extension direction (arrow LR
The vertical direction (arrow UD direction) which is a direction substantially orthogonal to (direction) is extended.

The recess 317 is formed by cutting out in the thickness direction of the first piece 311, and the first piece 311.
Is recessed from one end (arrow R direction side) end to the other side (arrow L direction side). Therefore,
One side of the first piece 311 is divided into two forks. Thereby, the rigidity of one side of the 1st piece 311 can be made low compared with the other side. As a result, one side of the first piece 311 can be easily elastically deformed, and the engaging member 310 can be easily engaged with the fixing member 320. A detailed description of the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be described later.

The operation element 315 is an operation part for operating the engaging member 310, and is formed at the other end of the first piece 311, and its protruding dimension is larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall part 301 of the back case 300. It is set to a value and protrudes to the back side of the back case 300 at least by a dimension that can be grasped by the operator with a finger. As a result, the operating element 315 can be protruded from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operating element 315) can be grasped and operated.

The second piece 312 includes a fastening hole 318 that is recessed in a circular shape on the front side. The fastening hole 318 is
This is a part for screwing a screw inserted into a hole (see FIG. 89) penetrating through the back base 720 of the rotating unit 700 described later. As a result, the inside of the rear case 300 (the bottom wall portion 301
After the rotation unit 700 is disposed on the front side of the rotation unit 700, the engagement member 310 disposed on the back side of the rotation unit 700 is operated to move the engagement member 310 to a predetermined position (relative to the fixing member 320 described later). The engagement member 31 by screwing a screw into the fastening hole 318.
0 and the rotation unit 700 (rear base 720) can be fastened. Therefore, the operating member 315 that projects the engaging member 310 arranged at the specified position from the back side of the back case 300.
The operation can be disabled only by the operation of. As a result, in the state where the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the operation element 315 is illegally operated, and the fixing member 320 and the board box 100 (
It is possible to prevent the main controller 110) from being easily replaced with an unauthorized substrate box.

In this case, the fastening hole 318 is inserted through the hole in the back surface base 720 of the rotating unit 700.
The screw to be fastened may be operable from the hole from which the first winning port 64 provided in the game board 13 is removed. In this case, since it is not necessary to release the fastening between the game board 13 and the back case 300, it is possible to suppress the complicated replacement work for the normal board box 100. As a result, it is possible to simplify the replacement work of the normal substrate box 100.

The fixing member 320 is composed of a member separate from the back case 300. As a result, the board box 100 can be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 320 having a smaller outer shape than that of the back case 300, so that the board box 100 can be formed in comparison with the case where the fixing member 320 is formed integrally with the back case 300. Easy to arrange. As a result, it is possible to easily dispose the substrate box 100 on the back case 300 in a state where the substrate box 100 is difficult to be removed from the fixing member 320.

Further, the back case 300 can be used as a part having the same shape in each pachinko machine type. However, since the shape and size of the board box 100 are different in each pachinko machine 10 type, the board box 100 The fixing member 320 on which is disposed cannot be used as a reusable product with another pachinko machine. Therefore, compared to the case where the fixing member 320 is formed integrally with the back case 300, the mold for molding the back case 300 can be the same mold as another pachinko machine. As a result, it is only necessary to form a mold for the fixing member 320 having a smaller outer shape than that of the back case 300, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The fixing member 320 includes an interposed member 330 that engages with the engaging member 310 described above, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the interposed member 330. Thereby, the shaft support member 340 can be used as a reflow product having the same shape as a fixing member of another gaming machine.

The interposition member 330 is formed in a box shape whose front side (arrow F direction side) is open, and the other side (arrow L).
A locking portion 331 protruding from the side surface on the direction side, and an engaged portion 332 formed in a frame shape protruding from the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) to the back case 300 side (front side), An insertion hole 333 that opens in a circular shape on a box-shaped bottom surface, and a protrusion 334 that protrudes from the back surface toward the shaft support member 340 are mainly provided.

The locking portion 331 includes an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening portion 301c described above. The projecting wall 301 c 1 projecting from the projecting wall is inserted into the bottom wall portion 301. Accordingly, when the interposition member 330 (fixing member 320) is disposed on the rear case 300, the protruding wall 301c1 is inserted into the engaging portion 331 of the interposition member 330 so that one side of the interposition member 330 (arrow R). Direction side) can be locked to the back case 300.

The engaged portion 332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 310, and the projecting dimension to the back case 300 side (arrow F direction side) exceeds the engaging member 310 disposed on the back case 300. The distance dimension from the inner surface on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the enclosed space to the front surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is larger than the distance from the front surface of the engagement member 310 to the front surface of the bottom wall portion 301. Is set. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are arranged at positions that overlap in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The insertion hole 333 is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the interposed member 330 to a shaft support member 340 described later is inserted, and is set coaxially with the fastening hole 343 of the shaft support member 340.

The protrusion 334 is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and the distance between the distal end portion on the bent side and the bottom surface of the interposed member 330 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the insertion portion 344 of the shaft support member 340 described later. Is done.
Thereby, the insertion portion 3 is disposed between the front end portion on the bent side of the protrusion 334 and the bottom surface of the interposed member 330.
44 can be inserted.

The shaft support member 340 has a body portion 341 formed in a box shape that opens on the back case 300 side (arrow F direction side), and has a substantially U-shaped cross section from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the body portion 341. And a support portion 342 that bulges.

The main body 341 has an insertion portion 3 that protrudes upward from the side surface on the upper side (arrow U direction side).
44 and a fastening hole 343 that is recessed from the bottom side (arrow D direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the main body 341 formed in a box shape.

The insertion portion 344 is a plate member that is inserted between the front end portion on the bent side of the protrusion 334 and the bottom surface of the interposed member 330 as described above. Thereby, it can suppress that the upper side of the shaft support member 340 inclines to the back side of the back case 300. FIG.

The fastening hole 343 is disposed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) that is biased toward the end opposite to the insertion portion 344. Further, as described above, the fastening hole 343 is inserted into the insertion hole 333 of the interposed member 330 (FIG. 39).
This is a hole for fastening a screw to be inserted through (b). Therefore, the shaft support member 340 is formed on the upper side (
The insertion portion 344 on the arrow U direction side is inserted into the protruding portion 334 of the interposed member 330 and the lower side is fastened and fixed to the interposed member 330. Therefore, since the shaft support member 340 is fixed to the interposed member 330 only by fastening the screw on the lower side, the fastening portion can be reduced and the manufacturing process can be simplified.

The support portion 342 is a portion that is caulked and fastened to the bearing portion 117 of the board box 100 (main control device 110) described above, and is formed in a hollow shape in which caulking metal fittings can be disposed. The substrate box 100 is held in a rotatable state with respect to the shaft support member 340 by fastening with caulking metal fittings.

Next, referring to FIGS. 40A to 41B, the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are used.
The engagement with will be described. FIG. 40A is a front view of the back case 300 in a state before the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, and FIG. 40B is a state before the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. It is a rear view of the back case 300 in the state. FIG.
FIG. 41B is a front view of the rear case 300 in a state after the engagement of the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320, and FIG. 41B is a rear view in a state after the engagement of the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320. 4 is a rear view of case 300. FIG. In FIG. 40B and FIG. 41B, a part of the outer shape of the engaging member 310 that overlaps the back case 300 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, before the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, the interposed member 330 and the shaft support member 340 are disposed on the interposed member 330 side (front side (arrow side). Fastened with screws inserted from the F direction side))) and combined. Thereby, the interposed member 330
And it can suppress that the axial support member 340 is disassembled | disassembled illegally from the back side of the back case 300 (fastened screw is removed). As a result, it is possible to suppress the board box 100 that is caulked and fixed to the shaft support member 340 from being replaced with an unauthorized board box.

The interposed member 330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 320) in the fastened state are the protruding walls 30 formed in the first opening 301c inside the engaging portion 331 of the interposed member 330 as described above.
1c1 is inserted. In this case, the interposed member 330 and the shaft support member 340 (
The fixing member 320) has a first opening 301c from the bent side (arrow R direction side) of the protruding wall 301c1.
It is arranged.

When the fixing member 320 is disposed on the back case 300, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 is disposed at a position facing one end (the engaging portion 316 side) end of the engaging member 310. Thus, by slidingly moving the engaging member 310, one end (arrow R direction side) end of the engaging member 310 can be inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

Here, the outer dimension in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the two engaging portions 316 of the engaging member 310 is the opening in the vertical direction of the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 described above. It is set larger than the dimension. Therefore, there is a problem that the engaging member 310 cannot be disposed in the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

In contrast, the engaging member 310 can easily elastically deform the first piece 311 by the concave portion 317 provided on one side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 311 as described above. Due to the triangular shape of the joining portion 316, the force when the engaging member 310 is slid and abutted against the inner edge of the engaged portion 332 can be applied to the concave portion 317 side of the engaging member 310. As a result, the first piece 311 formed at the fork can be elastically deformed and inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

As shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are
The engaging member 310 is slid and displaced, and the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is inserted into the interposed member 33.
When inserted into the space surrounded by the 0 engaged portion 332, the elastically deformed first piece 311 is returned to its original shape. As described above, the engaging portion 316 has the first side 311 on the other side surface.
It extends in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction. Therefore, the force that elastically deforms the first piece 311 toward the concave portion 317 is not applied only by the force that slides the engaging member 310 in the opposite direction. That is, the first piece 311 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 by the inclined surface of the engaging portion 316 and the concave portion 317.
It can be easily inserted into the space surrounded by, and the other side of the engaging portion 316 (arrow L direction side)
It is possible to make it difficult for the first piece 311 inserted in the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 to be removed by the side surface of the first piece 311. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the back side of the back case 300 due to an illegal act of the player, and the board box 100 (main controller 110) that is caulked and fastened to the fixing member 320 is an illegal board box. Can be suppressed.

The back case 300 is disposed between the base plate 60 and the back case 300, and is located on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60, and the base plate 60 and the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). The engaging member 310 that can be operated from the outside between the opposing members is provided.
Since the engaged portion 332 projecting to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 300 is provided, and the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are engaged with each other and disposed in the back case 300. The engagement member 310 is operated from the outside between the base plate 60 and the back case 300 in a state where the accessory device (in this example, the rotation unit 700) is disposed between the base plate 60 and the back case 300. The engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 can be engaged with each other.

Therefore, the fixing member 320 can be disposed on the back case 300 without the engaging member 310 being obstructed by the accessory device disposed between the base plate 60 and the back case 300. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be easily disposed on the back case 300.

Further, since the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 300, the engaging portion between the back case 300 and the fixing member 320 is the base plate. 60 and the rear case 300 may be disposed between the opposing surfaces. Thereby, the base plate 6
It is difficult to access the engaging portion between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 from the 0 back side (arrow B direction side). As a result, the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 3 are viewed from the back side of the base plate 60.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being fraudulently released (for example, to be replaced with an illegal fixing member).

The back case 300 includes a first opening 301c that is opened at a portion where the fixing member 320 is disposed, and a second opening 301d that is opened at a portion where the engaging member 310 is disposed. The engaging member 310 is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 300 and from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 300 via (inserts) the second opening 301d. The engaging member 332 that has passed through the first opening 301c is disposed on the front side of the rear case 300, and thus the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are allowed to operate. It is possible to make it difficult to access the engaging portion from the back side of the back case 300. as a result,
Regardless of the size of the accessory device arranged in the back case 300, the fixing member 320 can be fixed to the back case 300, and it is operated from the back side of the game board 13 and replaced with an unauthorized board box. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the engaging member 310 includes the operation element 315 that is inserted through the second opening 301d and protrudes to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 300, the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 300 is provided. The engaging member 310 can be easily operated in a state where the engaging member 310 is disposed.
As a result, the engaging operation between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 can be facilitated.

Further, since the engaging member 310 can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301), the engaging member 310 can be moved back and forth with respect to the back case 300 (arrows). The front side (arrow F direction side) of the engaging member 310 can be easily used as an arrangement space for the accessory device arranged on the back case 300 by the amount not displaced in the FB direction. As a result, the area on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) can be easily used as an arrangement space for the accessory device.

Next, an operation for removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 300 from the state shown in FIG. 41 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the first opening 301c is opened in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and the recessed portion 317 of the engaging member 310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is the first. It can be operated from the back side (the direction of arrow B) of the back case 300 through the one opening 301c.

Therefore, the outer portion of the concave portion 317 of the engaging member 310 is elastically deformed toward the concave side of the concave portion 317 with a dedicated tool or the like, thereby engaging the engaging portion 316 and the engaged portion 332 of the engaging member 310. The match is released. In a state where the engagement is released, the engagement member 310 is displaced in a direction (arrow L direction) to be pulled out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 332, and then the deformation of the engagement member 310 is returned. The engagement between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 can be released.

In addition, it is preferable that the clearance gap between the outer side part of the recessed part 317 of the engaging member 310 and the 1st opening part 301c is formed as small as possible. According to this, the fixing member 3 is fixed from the back case 300.
The finger of the person who removes 20 can be made non-insertable, and a dedicated tool can be inserted.
As a result, only the operator who has a dedicated tool can exchange the substrate box 100 (main control device 110), and can be prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized substrate box 100.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42A and FIG. 42B, the board box 100 (main control device 110) that is caulked and fastened to the shaft support member 340 will be described. 42A is a perspective rear view of the back case 300 and the substrate box 100 (main control device 110).
b) is a rear view of the back case 300 and the substrate box 100 (main control device 110). In FIG. 42B, the outer shape of the engaging member 310 that overlaps the substrate box 100 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 42A and FIG. 42B, the substrate box 100 has one end side (arrow R).
The bearing portion 117 protrudes from the end portion on the direction side. The bearing portion 117 has a vertical direction (arrow U
A pair is arranged at a predetermined interval in the -D direction). As described above, the pair of bearing portions 117 is a portion that is caulked and fastened to the support portion 342 of the shaft support member 340, and the vertical dimension (in the direction of the arrow UD) of the support portion 342 and the distance between the facing portions are approximately. Set the same. As a result, the board box 100 is fastened to the shaft support member 340 by disposing the support part 342 between the pair of bearing parts 117 facing each other and inserting the caulking pin from above the bearing part 117 to fix it. Is done.

According to the substrate box 100 configured as described above, the substrate box 100 is rotatably held with respect to the pivot support member 340 and is disposed on the back side of the engagement member 310. As described above, when the operating element 315 is operated to engage the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320, the operating element 315 can be easily operated by rotating the board box 100. Further, after the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the board box 10
By disposing 0 on the back side of the engaging member 310, the operation element 315 can be hardly operated from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, after the pachinko machine 10 is assembled,
It can suppress that 15 is operated and is replaced | exchanged for an illegal board | substrate box.

The other end side (arrow L direction side) of the substrate box 100 is the bottom wall portion 3 of the back case 300.
Toward 01, the board box 100 is fixed by screws inserted from the back side (arrow B direction side) and fastened to the back case 300. As a result, the substrate box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 in a state in which it cannot rotate (operate).

Next, a detailed configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 69. First, a structure for displacing the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46.

FIG. 43 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. 45 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. 43 to 14 illustrate a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position (position disposed at the lowest position with respect to the base member 410).

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 46, the lower displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300 and a transmission member disposed on the base member 410. 420, a link member 430 coupled to the base member 410 and displaced in accordance with the displacement of the transmission member 420, one end slidably coupled to the base member 410, and the other end coupled to the link member 430. And a lower displacement member 440 that is displaced by being transmitted with a driving force from the link member 430.

The base member 410 is formed by combining two horizontally long plate members in the front view in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 411 disposed on the front side and a back base 412 disposed on the back side. A transmission member 420 and a link member 430 are disposed between the front base 411 and the rear base 412.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction in FIG. 43).
a, 411b, two columnar shaft support pins 411c, 411d projecting to the back side, and a curved wall portion 411e projecting in an arc shape with the shaft support pin 411d as an axis. .

The sliding grooves 411 a and 411 b have two protrusions 47 protruding from the back side of the lower displacement member 440.
2 and 473 are holes to be inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed to extend in the left-right direction. Therefore, the protrusion 47 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b.
By displacing 2,473 along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each curved in an arc shape, and upward (from the left side (FIG. 43 left) end to the right side (FIG. 43 right) end of the front base 411 (FIG. 4).
3 upward). Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at positions where the axes of the respective arcs are different, and the gap between the opposing portions in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 described later does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. And can be displaced. That is, the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b
By changing the distance between the lower displacement member 440 and the lower displacement member 440, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated as it slides without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440. The detailed displacement mode of the lower displacement member 440 will be described later.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of the transmission member 420 described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Also,
The shaft support pin 411c is formed of a metal rod-like body and is fitted on the front base 411. Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 from the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, the shaft support pin 4
It can suppress that 11c bends (breaks).

The shaft support pin 411d is a through hole 431 formed at one end of a first link member 431 described later.
It is a protrusion inserted into a, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 431a. Further, the pivot pin 411d is formed of a metallic rod-like body and is fitted on the front base 411. Therefore, when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, it is possible to suppress the shaft support pin 411d from being broken (broken).

The curved wall portion 411e protrudes from the back side of the front base 411 and is supported by the pivot pin 411.
It is formed to be curved around the axis d. The protruding distance of the curved wall portion 411e is set to a distance that comes into contact with the protruding tip surface of a plate-like protrusion 431b of the first link member 431 described later. Therefore, it is suppressed that the 1st link member 431 shifts to the front side. Also, the curved wall portion 411e
Is curved around the axis of the pivot pin 411d, so that even when the first link member 431 is rotated around the axis of the pivot pin 411d, the plate-like protrusion 431 of the first link member 431 is formed.
b can be brought into contact with the protruding front end surface of the curved wall portion 411e.

The collection port 411f is an opening through which a ball emitted from the emission opening 471 flows into the collection port 411f and is collected by the movement of a ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 described later. The downstream side of the recovery port 411f is connected to the recovery path of the sphere. The recovery port 411f is provided on the front base 41.
1 is a hole formed so as to protrude from the right end of the first member, and has an opening surface below the surface facing the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the first extended state. The surface is located on the side.

In addition, the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is disposed above the recovery port 411f. Therefore, the sphere emitted from the emission opening 471 can be received in the collection port 411f and quickly collected.

The back base 412 includes groove portions 412a and 412b that are recessed from the front side (the front side in FIG. 44) toward the back surface, and a locking portion 412c that is formed to protrude toward the front side in the vicinity of the groove portion 412b. Formed mainly for the purpose.

The groove portion 412a is a hole for inserting the tip end side of the shaft support pin 411c of the front base 411 described above, is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pin 411c, and faces the shaft support pin 411c. Recessed in position. Therefore, the cam member 422 is held so as not to be detached from the base member 410 by the front base 411 and the rear base 412 being combined after the shaft support pin 411c is inserted through the shaft portion 422a. Further, since the back surface base 412 can hold the tip end portion of the shaft support pin 411c, when a force is applied to the cam member 422 in the axial direction from the outer peripheral surface thereof, the shaft support pin 411c is connected to the front base 411. It can suppress that it bends and bends from a connection part.

The groove portion 412b is a hole into which the tip end side of the shaft support pin 411d of the front base 411 described above is inserted. The groove portion 412b is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pin 411d and faces the shaft support pin 411d. Recessed in position. Therefore, the first link member 431 has the through hole 431.
After the shaft support pin 411d is inserted through a, the front base 411 and the rear base 412 are combined so that they cannot be detached from the base member 410. Also, the rear base 412
However, since the tip end portion of the pivot pin 411d can be held, the pivot pin 411d is bent from the connecting portion with the front base 411 when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a. Can be prevented from breaking.

The locking portion 412c is a plate that locks one end of an urging spring SP1 described later.
It is formed outside P1. Thereby, the one end side of urging | biasing spring SP1 can be latched. A detailed description of the urging spring SP1 will be described later.

The transmission member 420 includes a transmission gear 421 coupled to the shaft of the drive motor KM1 attached to the front side of the front base 411, and a cam that meshes with the transmission gear 421 and rotates as the transmission gear 421 is driven. The member 422 is mainly provided.

The transmission gear 421 is a gear having an engagement surface over the entire outer peripheral surface, and is externally fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor KM1. Therefore, when electric power is applied to the drive motor KM1 and the shaft portion is rotated, the transmission gear 421 is similarly rotated.

The cam member 422 is formed from a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction while being formed in a shape in which one end of two semicircles having different outer shapes in front view is combined. In the semicircular portion having a small outer shape of the cam member 422, the tooth surface 4 that meshes with the transmission gear 421 on the outer peripheral surface.
22b is engraved, and a shaft portion 422a is formed through the center of the semicircle. Cam member 42
In the semicircular portion having a large outer shape 2, a sliding groove 422 c that is recessed on the back side facing a link member 430 described later is formed.

As described above, the shaft portion 422a is a hole through which the shaft support pin 411c is inserted.
Since the shaft portion 422a is rotatably supported by 1c, the cam member 422 is supported by the shaft support pin 411c.
It is held so as to be rotatable around its axis.

The cam member 422 is configured such that the tooth surface 422b meshes with the transmission gear 421.
Therefore, when the transmission gear 421 is rotated, the cam member 422 can rotate about the shaft of the shaft portion 422a.

The sliding groove 422c is recessed along the outer peripheral portion of the semicircular portion having a large radius of the cam member 422. Accordingly, the distance from the shaft portion 422a is increased from the one end side toward the other end side. Further, the sliding groove 422c has a step portion 422c1 that extends in the direction of the through hole 431a from the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 when the lower displacement member 440 is in a retracted state, which will be described later, and a lower displacement. When the member 440 is positioned in a second extended state, which will be described later, a step 422c3 extending from the sliding projection 431d in the direction of the through hole 431a, and the lower displacement member 440 between the retracted state and the second extended state And a step portion 422c2 that extends from the sliding projection 431d in the direction of the through-hole 431a when positioned in the first extended state of the intermediate state.

The link member 430 is formed of two link members, a first link member 431 and a second link member 432. Further, the link member 430 is formed by rotatably connecting the end portions of the first link member 431 and the second link member 432.

The first link member 431 is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction while being bent into a generally U-shape when viewed from the front. The first link member 431 is a link that is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the cam member 422. The first link member 431 has a through-hole 431a that penetrates in the front-rear direction on one end side, and a columnar connection projection 431c that protrudes on the back side on the other end side. The plate-like protrusion 431b protruding to the position facing the curved wall 411e described above, and the cylindrical sliding protrusion 4 protruding to the front side of the bent portion
And 31d.

The through hole 431a is a through hole into which the pivot pin 411d is inserted as described above. First
The link member 431 is held rotatably with respect to the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 with the pivot pin 411d inserted in the through hole 431a.

The plate-like protrusion 431b is a protrusion that suppresses the first link member 431 from being displaced in the front-rear direction and suppresses the first link member 431 from colliding with the cam member 422 disposed in the front. It is formed in a plate-like body protruding in a curved shape with the hole 431a as an axis, and the protruding length is set larger than the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, it can suppress that the back surface of the cam member 422 and the front surface of the 1st link member 431 collide.

Further, the projecting dimension of the plate-like protrusion 9431b is set to be larger than the thickness (the dimension in the direction of the arrow FB) of the cam member 422. Further, the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) facing the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b is slightly spaced (distance X14 (see FIG. 55A)).
).

The cam member 422 is disposed in a state in which a region between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e can be displaced. Further, the dimension of the two gaps including the gap between the facing of the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 and the gap between the facing of the cam member 422 and the base member 410 is the distance X1 described above.
It is set to be larger than 4.

As a result, the first link member 9 in the direction (arrow F direction) in which the distance X14 described above decreases.
When the 431 is bent, the protruding front end surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b can be brought into contact with the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e). Therefore, the cam member 422 is disposed between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e.
It is possible to prevent the displacement from being restricted due to being sandwiched.

The connection protrusion 431 c is a shaft portion that is connected to a second link member 432 described later, and is inserted into the through hole 432 a of the second link member 432, and the outer diameter of the head from the back side is the through hole 4.
A screw or the like larger than 32a is fastened. Thereby, the 1st link member 431 and the 2nd link member 432 are connected so that rotation is possible.

A wall portion 431f protruding to the back side is formed at the edge portion of the through hole 431a. Wall part 431
f is a wall surface for fitting and holding an urging spring SP1 to be described later on its outer peripheral surface.

The link side engaging portion 431e is a protrusion that locks the other end side of the urging spring SP1 fitted into the wall portion 431f, and is formed to project in a hook shape on the back side of one end side of the first link member 431. .
Therefore, the biasing spring SP1 is in a state where one end side is engaged with the engaging portion 412c of the back surface base 412, and the other end side is engaged with the link side engaging portion 431e of the first link member 431. The Therefore, the urging force of the urging spring SP1 can be applied in a direction in which the other end side of the first link member 431 is rotated upward with respect to the base member 410. As a result, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced, the urging force of the urging spring SP1 acts, so that the drive motor K
The energy consumption of M1 can be suppressed.

The sliding protrusion 431d is formed at a position separated from the through hole 431a by substantially the same distance as the distance from the through hole 431a to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. Further, the sliding protrusion 431d has a tip portion inserted inside the sliding groove 422c. That is, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed such that its outer diameter is smaller than the width dimension between the opposed facings of the sliding groove 422c.

Since the sliding protrusion 431d is arranged inside the sliding groove 422c, the sliding protrusion 431d is displaced by sliding inside the sliding groove 422c in accordance with the rotational displacement of the cam member 422. That is, when the cam member 422 is displaced, the first link member 431 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. A detailed description of the displacement of the first link member 431 will be described later.

Moreover, since the sliding protrusion 431d and the plate-like protrusion 431b are formed at positions close to each other, the forward displacement of the first link member 431 is suppressed by the plate-like protrusion 431b. Therefore, it can suppress that the sliding protrusion 431d pushes the cam member 422 forward. As a result, there is no need to increase the recessed depth of the sliding groove 422c recessed in the cam member 422, and the cam member 42
The rigidity can be ensured without increasing the thickness of 2 in the front-rear direction.

The second link member 432 is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction while being formed in a long rectangular front view. The second link member 432 is mainly provided with a through-hole 432a that is formed through one end in the front-rear direction and a through-hole 432b that is formed through the other end in the front-rear direction.

As described above, the through hole 432a is a hole for being connected to the first link member 431, and the connection protrusion 431c is inserted therein. Accordingly, the second link member 432 is rotatably connected to the first link member 431.

The through hole 432b is connected to a lower displacement member 440 described later, and can transmit the displacement of the link member 430 to the lower displacement member 440. The through hole 432b is a protrusion 48 of the back case 482 described later.
2a is a hole into which the inner diameter is formed larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 482a. Therefore, the protrusion 482a is inserted into the through hole 432b, and a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b is fastened to the tip of the protrusion 482a, so that the lower displacement member 440 becomes the second link member 432. Is held rotatably. Accordingly, the driving of the lower displacement member 440 is transmitted via the link member 430 when the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced.

Next, the displacement operation of the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. 47 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 48 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 49 is a lower displacement unit in the second extended state. FIG. 50 shows the lower displacement unit 40 in the retracted state.
FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 52 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state. Note that FIG.
From 0 to FIG. 52, a state in which the back surface base 412 is viewed transparently is illustrated. 50 to 52, a part of the plate-like protrusion 431b and the curved wall portion 411e of the first link member 431 is illustrated by a chain line.

In the retracted state, the sliding protrusion 431d disposed inside the sliding groove 422c
This is a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is disposed on the lower side and is disposed between the opposed members 42c1. In the second overhanging state, the sliding protrusion 431d is disposed between the step 442c3 and the lower displacement member 440.
This is a state in which the tip end side is arranged at the uppermost position. The first overhanging state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d is disposed between the step portions 442c2 and the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second overhanging state.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 50, in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, the cam member 422 in the first position is rotated by the transmission gear 421 and the other end side (step portion 422) of the sliding groove 422c.
The c3 side) is positioned on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) in the rear view of the shaft portion 422a. In this case, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is guided along the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c and is in a state of being positioned on the step portion 422c1. Therefore, the first link member 431 has a state in which the other end side (the connecting projection 431c side) is positioned on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) of the through hole 431a on the one end side (rotating around the through hole 431a as the axis) The end side is positioned at the lower end of the rotatable range (first driven position).

Since the second link member 432 is connected to the first link member 431, the first link member 4
One end side (through-hole 432a side) connected to 31 is located on the right side in the rear view (right side in FIG. 50). As a result, the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 has the front base 4
11, projections 472, 473 connected to the right side of the sliding grooves 411 a, 411 b (see FIG. 5).
0 right side). As described above, the distance between the vertical facing of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b is larger on the right side in the rear view than on the left side, so the lower displacement member 44
0 is arranged with its longitudinal direction substantially parallel to the left-right direction. That is, it is in a state of being arranged in front of the front base 411.

The displacement from the retracted state shown in FIGS. 47 and 50 to the first extended state shown in FIGS. 46 and 51 is performed by the cam member 422 being displaced.

In the first overhang state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the retracted position to be displaced to the third position. As a result, the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. Due to this rotational displacement, the first link member 43 guided to the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c.
One sliding protrusion 431d is displaced along with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c, and is disposed at the third driven position. In the first overhanging state, the sliding protrusion 431d has a step 422c of the sliding groove 422c.
It is guided between two opposing inner walls.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through-hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding protrusion 431d, and the other end side (the connecting protrusion 431c side) is in the upper left as viewed from the back (FIG. 51). Displaced to the upper left).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, since the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, since the distance between the vertical facings of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b is narrowed from the right side to the left side when viewed from the back, the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 48). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

In the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is positioned on the lower side in the gravitational direction on the tip side. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is shifted from the retracted state to the first extended state, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated and displaced while being slid, so that the front end side of the lower displacement member 440 protrudes to the right in the front view of the base member 410. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region that is different from the variable region of other displacement actors. Collision with other displacement actors can be suppressed.

Further, since the recovery port 411f is positioned below one end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the side opposite to the protrusions 472 and 473 connected to the front base 411), a ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 described later is provided. When the launch operation is performed and the sphere falls down from the exit opening 471 as it is, the sphere can be sent to the collection port 411f.

The displacement from the first projecting state shown in FIGS. 48 and 51 to the second projecting state shown in FIGS. 49 and 52 is performed by further displacing the cam member 422 from the first projecting state.

In the second overhang state, the transmission gear 42 is driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM1 from the first overhang state.
1 is rotated, and the cam member 422 is disposed at a second position rotated approximately 90 degrees from the position of the first overhanging state (third position). Therefore, the other end side of the cam member 422 (the stepped portion 422c3 side is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. Further, the sliding of the first link member 431 guided to the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c by this rotational displacement. The moving protrusion 431d is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c, and is disposed at the second driven position, where the sliding protrusion 431d is in the second overhanging state.
Is guided between the inner walls of the step portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding protrusion 431d, and the other end side (the connecting protrusion 431c side) is substantially in rear view from the position of the first overhanging state. It is displaced to the upper left (upper left in FIG. 52).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, since the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, since the distance between the vertical facings of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b is narrowed from the right side to the left side as viewed from the back, the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side (right side in FIG. 49). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Further, similarly to the first overhanging state, in the second overhanging state, the recovery port 41 is arranged on the lower side in the gravity direction on the tip side.
If is located. In other words, when the lower displacement member 440 is shifted from the retracted state to the second extended state, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated and displaced while being slid, so that the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 protrudes to the right in the front view of the base member 410. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement area different from the variable area of other displacement actors, and to suppress collision with other displacement actors.

Next, the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in each state will be described with reference to FIG. 53A shows the first link member 431 and the cam member 42 in the retracted state, FIG. 53B shows the first overhang state, and FIG. 53C shows the second overhang state.
FIG. In FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c), the first of the cam member 422 is shown.
A portion overlapping the link member 431 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 53A, in the retracted state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is provided.
Is disposed between the inner walls of the step portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. In addition, as described above, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed at a position spaced from the through hole 431a by substantially the same distance as the distance from the through hole 431a to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. Therefore, when a force that rotates about the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the retracted state,
The force can be applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding protrusion 431d. Therefore, the cam member 422 can be prevented from rotating by the rotational force of the first link member 431. As a result, in the retracted state, the first link member 431 is interposed via the second link member 432.
It can suppress that the lower displacement member 440 connected to is displaced.

As shown in FIG. 53 (b), in the first overhanging state, the sliding projection 43 of the first link member 431.
1d, between the opposing inner walls of the step portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Therefore, as in the retracted state, when a force rotating around the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the first overhanging state, the force is applied from the sliding protrusion 431d to the cam member 422. Shaft part 422a
Can act on. Therefore, the cam member 422 is driven by the rotational force of the first link member 431.
Can be prevented from rotating. As a result, in the first overhang state, the second link member 432
It can suppress that the lower displacement member 440 connected to the 1st link member 431 via via is displaced.

Here, in the first overhang position, the drive motor KM1 needs to be maintained in the stopped state in order to maintain the stopped state because the intermediate position of the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 is maintained. Therefore, there is a problem that energy consumption increases when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at the first overhang position (intermediate position of displacement).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding protrusion 4 of the first link member 431 is in the first overhanging state.
Since 31d is arrange | positioned between the opposing inner walls of the step part 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c, it can suppress that the lower displacement member 440 is displaced as mentioned above. Therefore, even when the electric power of the drive motor KM1 is stopped when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at a position in the middle of the displacement, the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped during the displacement.

As shown in FIG. 53 (c), in the second overhanging state, the sliding projection 43 of the first link member 431.
1d, between the opposing inner walls of the step portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Therefore, similarly to the retracted state and the first overhang state, the first link member 431 positioned in the second overhang state has a through hole 4.
When a force rotating around the axis of 31a is applied, the force can be applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding projection 431d. Therefore, the cam member 422 can be prevented from rotating by the rotational force of the first link member 431. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 in the second projecting state.

Further, each step portion 422c1, 422c2, 422c3 has a sliding projection 431d and a through hole 43.
Since it extends in the direction connecting 1a, the width dimension of the sliding groove 422c in the direction in which the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is displaced can be reduced. Therefore, the clearance between the sliding groove 422c and the sliding protrusion 431d, in which the first link member 431 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a at the retracted position, the first protruding position, and the second protruding position, is reduced. it can. Therefore, the gap in which the first link member 431 in each state can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a can be reduced. As a result, the width in which the lower displacement member 440 in each state swings due to vibration or inertial force when the displacement is stopped can be reduced, and the player can easily recognize the stopped state.

Therefore, the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 (drive mechanism) that drive the lower displacement member 440 restrict the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 in the reaction direction when the game ball is emitted from the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from being displaced with respect to the base member 410 along with the reaction. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, the front-rear direction relationship between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 will be described with reference to FIG. 54A shows the lower displacement unit 4 along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG.
FIG. 54B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 51. 51 and 52, the rear base 412 is used.
54 (a) and 54 (b) are cross-sectional views of the lower displacement unit 400 that is not transparently viewed.

As shown in FIG. 54A, the link member 43 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state.
0 is disposed between the back base 412 and the cam member 422. Therefore, the lower displacement member 44
It can suppress that 0 rocks back and forth. That is, the other end side of the first link member 431 is connected to the lower displacement member 440 configured by combining a plurality of fixtures via the second link member 432, so that it is moved in the front-rear direction by the load of the lower displacement member 440 Since there is a possibility of bending, the cam member 422 is disposed forward, so that the first link member 431 can be prevented from bending forward. As a result, the first link member 431 can be prevented from moving forward, so the lower displacement member 44
It can suppress that 0 swings back and forth.

As shown in FIG. 54B, the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhanging state is disposed between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422 as in the retracted state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

Further, in the retracted state and the first extended state, the cam member 422 is disposed on the front side of the connection portion between the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 of the link member 430. Therefore, when the link member 430 is formed of two members, it is necessary to make the connecting portion rotatable. Therefore, the link member 430 is less rigid than the other portion and easily bent because of the gap. Since the member 422 is arrange | positioned, it can suppress that the connection part of the link member 430 bends. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

<The displacement of the displacement member is regulated by the regulation means for regulating the displacement of the driven member>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, the relationship between the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e will be described. FIG. 55A shows the lower displacement unit 4 along the line LVa-LVa in FIG.
FIG. 55B is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. 51, and FIG. 55C is a lower displacement unit taken along the line LVc-LVc in FIG. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the retracted state (first position), the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e are in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). Arranged at different positions. Therefore, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first extended state (third position), it is possible to suppress an increase in resistance acting on the cam member 422. As a result, the start of displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be stabilized.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c), the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging state (
In the case of the third position), a part of the cam member 422 is disposed at a position separating a predetermined gap on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the curved wall portion 411e. Accordingly, when the cam member 422 is displaced in the front direction, the cam member 422 can be prevented from being displaced to the front side by bringing the side surface in the axial direction of the cam member 422 into contact with the curved wall portion 411e.

The surface of the cam member 422 on the front base 411 side (arrow F direction side) is the front base 41.
1 is formed on a flat surface parallel to the back surface (see FIG. 45). Thereby, when the cam member 422 is displaced toward the curved wall portion 411e, the flat surface of the cam member 422 can be brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e. Therefore, the cam member 422 can be prevented from partially abutting against the curved wall portion 411e, and the force can be prevented from concentrating partially. As a result, the cam member 422 can be prevented from being damaged.

Here, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first overhang state (third position), the protrusion 473 connected to the front end side (front base 411). And the opposite side in the longitudinal direction) are rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, as the directional component in the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity, the force component that causes the lower displacement member 440 to tilt in the front-rear direction is increased. Therefore, in the first overhanging state (third position), the longitudinal force acting on the link member 430 that supports the lower displacement member 440 is greater than in the retracting state (first position). Increased. As a result, the cam member 422 connected to the link member 430 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement unit 400 is moved from the retracted state (first position) to the first.
In the case where the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the overhanging state (third position), a part of the cam member 422 is curved wall 41.
Since it is arrange | positioned at the front side of 1e, the displacement of the cam member 422 to the front side can be controlled. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction between the first overhang state (third position) and the second overhang state (second position). Can be easily seen.

The displacement of the link member 430 toward the back side can be regulated by disposing the link member 430 between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422 as described above. That is, when the link member 430 swings to the back side, the link member 430 can be brought into contact with the back surface base 412 to restrict the displacement of the link member 430. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

Further, the front base 411 is provided with a restricting means (curved wall portion 411e) for restricting the swing of the link member 430 in a direction other than the driven direction, and the cam member 422 is displaced between the first position and the second position. The first displacement area for displacing the third position between the first position and the second position from the first position and the second displacement area for displacing the second position from the third position can be displaced, The link member 430 is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position by the cam member 422 being displaced from the first position to the second position, and from the first driven position to the first driven position and the second driven position. The first driven region that displaces the third driven position that is an intermediate position between the first driven region and the second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position can be displaced, and the second displaced region and the first driven region Are set in the same region, and the cam member 422 When it is displaced a second displacement area, restricting means (curved wall 4
11e) restricts the swing of the cam member 422 in the direction other than the displacement direction, and thus the swing of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 is restricted using the same part of the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e). be able to.

Therefore, the cam member 42 can be formed by forming the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e) in one place.
Compared to the case where the restricting means for restricting displacement is formed in each of the link member 430 and the link member 430, the shape of the restricting means can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, the swing member 430 and the cam member 422 are restricted from swinging (curved wall portion 411e).
Since it can regulate using the same part, one regulation means (curved wall part 411e)
In addition, since it is not necessary to form the link member 430, the cam member 422, and the restricting portion, the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e) can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state to the second extended state, the protrusions 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b formed in the front base 411. (The collar C disposed on the protrusions 472 and 473 (see FIG. 14)) is moved in front of the other end side (step 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 (arrow F direction side) as the cam member 422 is displaced. (See FIGS. 50 to 52). Thereby, when the other end side (step part 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is pushed out to the back side by the projections 472 and 473 (collar C arranged on the projections 472 and 473), the cam member 422 is moved to the shaft portion. There is a risk that the link member 430 may come into contact with the link member 430 by being rotationally displaced in the front-rear direction around the 422a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side can be regulated by contacting the curved wall portion 411e, so the cam member 422 is regulated by the shaft portion 422a.
It is possible to suppress rotational displacement in the front-rear direction around the center. As a result, the contact between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the first overhanging state (third position), the displacement is restricted by the curved wall portion 411e, so that the cam member 422 is bent during the initial operation. It can suppress that a frictional resistance becomes large by contacting with the wall part 411e. As a result, the initial operation of the cam member 422 can be stabilized.

Next, the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 (a) shows a diagram L of FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit 400 in a VIa-LVIa line, FIG.56 (b) is a front view of the 1st link member 431 and the cam member 422 of the lower displacement unit 400 in a 2nd overhang | projection state (2nd position). It is. In FIG. 56B, the outer shape of the base member 410 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the end portion of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-like protrusion 431b of the first link member 431. Thereby, the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 in the direction in which the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the second displaced state can be restricted. As a result, the operation of stopping the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 can be distributed to the meshing portions of the transmission gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b and the contact portions of the cam member 422 and the first link member 431. Gear 421 and tooth surface 42
It can suppress that the tooth surface of 2b is damaged.

When the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the first link member 431 is used.
The contact surface between the plate-like protrusion 431b and the cam member 422 is set in a direction orthogonal to an imaginary line KS1 passing through the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 and the contact portion. As a result, when a force is applied around the axis of the first link member 431 in the direction from the second displacement state to the retracted state (first position), the force is applied to the axis of the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. It can suppress acting in the direction of rotating around. As a result, the rotation of the cam member 422 due to the force acting on the first link member 431 can be suppressed.

Here, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of the arrow U) on the distal end side (the side opposite to the projection 473 connected to the front base 411 in the longitudinal direction). Accordingly, the first direction component that supports the lower displacement member 440 is equivalent to the fact that the longitudinal direction component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the gravitational direction.
When the force in the rotational direction acting around the axis of the through hole 431a of the link member 431 is maximized, the transmission of force from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 is suppressed, so that the lower displacement member 440 is moved to the second position. It can be easily maintained at the position of the displacement state.

Further, when the cam member 422 is disposed at the position of the second displacement state, the lower displacement member 440 is disposed.
The force of rotating around the axis of the through-hole 431a of the first link member 431 is applied by the load. In this case, an end portion of the cam member 422 is pushed out to the plate-like protrusion 431b, and the cam member 422 rotates in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the shaft portion 422a (see FIG. 56B).
2, the inner wall of the sliding groove 422 c is pushed out from the sliding projection 431 d, and the cam member 422 is connected to the shaft portion 4.
The force PW2 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction of rotation around the axis 22a acts in a direction that cancels out. As a result, the cam member 422 can be prevented from rotating with the force applied from the first link member 431.

Next, the configuration of the lower displacement member 440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. 57A is a front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 57B is a rear view of the lower displacement member 440. 58 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 440. FIGS. 60A and 60B show the lower displacement member 4.
FIG.

60A shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 is seen transparently, and in FIG. 60B, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are seen transparently. The state is shown.

57 to 60, the lower displacement member 440 includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 470, and the case member 480 and the base member 470. A transmission mechanism 460 that is displaceably disposed therebetween and a decorative member 450 that is formed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 are mainly provided.

The base member 470 is a plate member formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 that protrude to the back side on one end side, and a standing wall 471a that stands on the front side from the edge on the other end side. In the left and right direction (FIG. 57 left and right direction), a protruding wall 477 protruding in a U-shape that is upside down from the upper end of the central portion to the front side, and an upper end of the base member 470 is cut from the end of the protruding wall 477 to one end side. Rack gear 476 provided, shaft portions 474 and 475 projecting to the front side, rectangular wiring locking portion 478 attached to the back surface on one end side of base member 470, and center portion in the vertical direction of base member 470 And an opening 479 that is recessed from the one end side to the other end side.

As described above, the protrusions 472 and 473 are formed by the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411.
It is a connection part which is inserted in and connects the lower displacement member 440 and the front base 411. Therefore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the dimension between the opposing inner walls.

The standing wall 471a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front case 481 and the base member 470 when a front case 481 described later is attached to the base member 470.
The standing dimension is set larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The shaft portions 474 and 475 are protrusions that are inserted into shafts of transmission gears 462 and 463 of the transmission mechanism 460 described later, and rotatably hold the transmission gears 462 and 463.
It is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole.

The rack gear 476 has a tooth surface that meshes with a transmission gear 465 described later. Thereby, a movable rack 464 described later is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 470.
The transmission gear 465 can be rotated.

When the projecting wall 477 receives a ball sent from a ball feeding unit 600 described later in front of the base member 470 through the opening 451a of the decorative member 450, the ball is moved to the lower displacement member 440.
It is a wall surface for suppressing falling to the outside, and the space between the opposing wall portions formed in a substantially U shape is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The wiring locking portion 478 is a member for locking flexible wiring (not shown) to a control board disposed on the back side of the base member 470, and one end of the flexible wiring between the base member 470. Is attached to the back side of the base member 470. Thereby, even if the lower displacement member 440 is disposed so as to be displaceable with respect to the base member 410, the entanglement of the flexible wiring can be suppressed.

Moreover, the wiring latching | locking part 478 is equipped with the processus | protrusion 478a which protrudes in a column shape at the back side. The protruding distance of the protrusion 478a is set to a distance that protrudes to the back side from the link member 430 connected to the back side, and is set to a distance that can contact the front surface of the back surface base 412. Accordingly, the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from swinging backward, and the link member 430 can be suppressed.
Can be prevented from colliding with the back base 412.

The opening 469 is an opening that defines a sliding displacement direction of the movable rack 464 disposed on the front side, and a guide plate 464d of the movable rack 464 described later is inserted therein.

The transmission mechanism 460 is a member disposed in front of the base member 470 and has a transmission gear 461.
, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is coupled to the transmission gear 461, and a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463, and is movable forwardly of the base member 470 so as to be slidable. A rack 464, a movable gear 464 that is rotatably arranged on the movable rack 464, and has a toothed surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465, and a toothed surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465. A rack 466 arranged to be slidable forward,
The rack 466 is formed mainly including a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably disposed on one end side.

The transmission gear 461 is a gear in which the shaft portion of the drive motor KM2 is fitted in the shaft hole. The drive motor KM2 is attached to the base member 470 in a state where the drive motor KM2 is connected to the base member 470. It is arranged.

As described above, the transmission gears 462 and 463 are formed in the shaft hole 474 of the base member 470 in the shaft hole.
475 is inserted and held rotatably on the base member. Also, transmission gears 461 to 46
Reference numeral 3 denotes gear trains that mesh with each other. When the transmission gear 461 is rotated by the drive motor KM2, the terminal transmission gear 463 is rotated.

The movable rack 464 is formed in a rectangular horizontally long plate shape when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a shaft portion 464b protruding in a cylindrical shape from the front side, and an upper side protruding from one end side of the upper end surface. A contact plate 464c, a guide plate 464d projecting from one end to the other end at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, a rack guide portion 464e projecting to the front side opposite to the guide plate 464d,
It is mainly provided with a collision part 464f protruding to the other lower end.

The rack gear 464 a is a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. Therefore, the base member 4
By disposing the rack gear 464a and the transmission gear 463 in mesh with each other, the movable rack 464 can be displaced by driving the drive motor KM2.

The shaft portion 464b is a shaft portion on which the transmission gear 465 is rotatably held.
It is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than that of the five axial holes.

The abutting plate 464c is an abutting portion that abuts against a sorting member 540 of the sorting unit 500 described later to displace the sorting member 540. That is, the distribution member 540 can be displaced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. A contact mode between the contact plate 464c and the sorting member 540 will be described later.

As described above, the guide plate 464d is a plate-like body that is inserted into the opening 479 of the base member 470, and can define the displacement direction of the movable rack 464 that is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2. That is, the movable rack 4 that is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2.
64 can be displaced along the extending direction of the opening 479. In this embodiment,
Since the opening 479 extends in the left-right direction, the movable rack 464 can be slid in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

The rack guide portion 464e is a protruding wall for restricting the displacement direction of the rack 466 described later, and protrudes from one end to the other end in the left-right direction.

The collision portion 464f abuts on a protrusion 492b of a displacement member 492, which will be described later, and the displacement member 492.
, And is formed so as to protrude from the lower end of the movable rack 464. Moreover, the collision part 464f is formed in the state which the other end side inclined. Accordingly, the protrusion 4 of the displacement member 492
92b can be displaced by sliding along the inclined surface.

The rack 466 is formed from a rectangular horizontally long rod-like body when viewed from the front. The rack gear 466a is engraved on the upper end surface, the shaft portion 466b protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the end on the other end side to the back side, and protrudes to the front side. Two sliding plates 466c, and a recessed portion 466 that is recessed from one end to the other end on the back side.
d.

The rack gear 466a is meshed with a transmission gear 465 attached to the movable rack 464.
As a result, in a state where the rack 466 is disposed in front of the movable rack 464, the movable rack 464 is slid, so that the transmission gear 465 is rotated along with the slide displacement, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466. . Accordingly, the rack 466 can be displaced with respect to the movable rack 464.

The shaft portion 466b is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 467, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held rotatably.

The sliding plate 466c is a protrusion that is inserted into an opening 481a of the front case 481 described later, and is formed from a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness. As a result, the transmission gear 46 is connected to the rack 466.
5 when the driving force is transmitted and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464,
The displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the direction in which the opening 481a extends.

The recessed portion 466d is in a state in which the rack guide portion 464e is disposed on the inner side when the rack 466 is disposed in front of the movable rack 464. As a result, the transmission gear 4 is attached to the rack 466.
When the driving force is transmitted from 65 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extending direction of the rack guide portion 464e.

Here, in order to regulate the displacement direction of the rack 466, if the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e are formed, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extending direction of the rack guide portion 464e. However, since the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while being slid in the left-right direction, depending on the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440, the engagement state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 changes due to its own weight. Gear 465 to rack 46
There was a risk that the driving force could not be transmitted to 6 well.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the location that defines the displacement direction of the rack 466 is the sliding plate 46.
6c, the opening 481a, the recessed portion 466d, and the rack guide portion 464e are formed at two locations. Therefore, when the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440 is changed, the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 are changed.
It can suppress that the occlusal state changes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive transmission from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 from being hindered.

Further, the sliding plate 466c is formed to project from two places in the left-right direction (FIG. 57 (a) left-right direction) of the rack 466, and the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (the opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) The rack is disposed below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57) at the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 protrudes most with respect to the movable rack 464).

Here, at the displacement end position, since the ball receiving portion 467 disposed on the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 performs a firing operation (rotational displacement) as described later, the ball receiving portion disposed on one end side of the rack 466 is performed. The other end side of the rack is easily displaced by the inertial force due to the displacement of the portion 467. Therefore, a load is easily applied to the meshing surfaces of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466, and the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 are loaded.
There was a risk of damage.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b)
At the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 protrudes most with respect to the movable rack 464), it is disposed below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57). It is possible to suppress the displacement of the rack 466 at the position where the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 mesh with each other when the rotation operation is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 from being damaged.

The ball receiving portion 467 is a portion that holds a game ball, is formed in a substantially U shape in front view, and is formed so as to be able to receive a ball in an inner portion of the U shape. That is, the inner side of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the sphere. As a result, one ball can be provided in the inner portion of the ball receiving portion 467. Further, the ball receiving portion 467 includes a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end position of the U-shape,
A leg portion 467a protruding downward from the lower outer peripheral surface is mainly provided.

As described above, the shaft hole 467b is a shaft hole for holding the ball receiving portion 467 in the rack 466 in a rotatable state, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held by inserting the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 into the shaft hole 467b. Further, after inserting the shaft portion 466b into the shaft hole 467b, the biasing spring SP2 is disposed around the shaft portion 466b, and a screw having a head larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b is fastened to the shaft portion 466b. The Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the rack 466 in a state of being biased clockwise around the front view. A detailed description of the aspect of the ball receiver 467 will be described later.

The leg portion 467a is a projection that urges the ball receiving portion 467 to be rotated by the urging spring SP2, and the front end of the ball receiving portion 467 has a front end that will be described later with the U-shaped open portion facing upward. The position is set so as to contact the bottom wall portion 481 b of the case 481. Thereby, it can control that ball receiving part 467 rotates.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and the base member 47
A front case 481 disposed on the front side of 0 and a back case 482 disposed on the back side are mainly provided.

The front case 481 is formed in a rectangular horizontally long plate shape when viewed from the front, has an opening 481a extending in the left-right direction at a substantially intermediate position in the gravitational direction, a bottom wall portion 481b formed to protrude from the lower end surface on the back side, and a lower edge portion. A shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction is mainly provided and formed.

The opening 481a is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and as described above, the base member 470.
When the front case 481 is disposed, the rack sliding plate 466c is inserted therein.

The bottom wall portion 481b is formed to protrude from the lower end portion of the front case 481 to the back side and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the bottom wall portion 481b is in a state in which the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom case portion 481b when the front case 481 is disposed on the base member 470.

The back case 482 is a plate member for disposing the control board 491 on the back side of the base member 470, and is formed in a rectangular horizontally long shape whose front view is smaller than that of the base member 470. In addition, the back case 482 includes a protrusion 482a that protrudes to the back side.

As described above, the protrusion 482a is a connecting portion connected to the through hole 432b of the second link member 432, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b. Therefore, after inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b, the through hole 432b is inserted into the tip of the protrusion 482a.
The back case 482 and the second link member 432 can be connected in a rotatable state by fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter.

The decorative member 450 is formed in an outer shape imitating a pattern or character, and a picture of the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 450 includes a front side decorative portion 451 disposed on the front side of the front case 481 and a back side decorative portion 452 disposed on the back side of the back case 482.
And is mainly provided. In the present embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 450.

The front side decorative portion 451 is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the outer shape of the front case 481 in a front view, and is attached to the front case 481. Thereby, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) disposed on the back side of the front side decorative portion can be made invisible to the player.

The back side decorative portion 452 is disposed behind the upper end of the front side decorative portion 451. Thereby, the member arrange | positioned from the upper side of the back side decoration part 452 to the back side of the front side decoration part 451 can be made invisible to a player.

Further, a displacement member 492 is disposed on the same plane as the front side decorative portion 451 in the front-rear direction. The displacement member 492 is formed mainly including a shaft portion 492a protruding to the back side and a protrusion 492b.

The shaft portion 492a is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 481c of the front case 481. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 492a into the shaft hole 481c, the displacement member 492 can be connected to the front case in a rotatable state. Further, the shaft portion 492 into which the shaft hole 481c is inserted.
A biasing spring SP3 is disposed on the tip end side of a. Thereby, the displacement member 492 can be disposed in a biased state. A detailed description of the displacement of the displacement member 492 will be described later.

The shaft portion 492a can transmit a driving force rotating around the shaft of the shaft portion 492a to the displacement member 492 by colliding with the collision portion 464f of the movable rack 464 described above. That is, the movable rack 464 can rotationally displace the displacement member 492 with the displacement.

Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 includes a displacement member 492 (arrangement member) that is displaceably disposed on the lower displacement member 440 (base member), and the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) can hold a game ball. Further, since the displacement member 492 is formed to be able to be ejected and can be displaced when the game ball is emitted from the ball receiving portion 467, the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

That is, when a game ball is launched from the ball receiver 467, the lower displacement member 440 is equivalent to the weight of the game ball.
When the configuration in which the displacement member 492 is displaced in a direction that cancels the change in the center of gravity accompanying the launch of the game ball, for example, is adopted, the lower displacement member 440 accompanying the change in the center of gravity is changed. The occurrence of shakiness can be suppressed. Further, when a game ball is fired from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 is subjected to a reaction as the game ball is fired. For example, the displacement member 492 is moved in a direction to cancel the reaction caused by the game ball being fired. In the case of adopting the displacement configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction.

Further, as described above, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displacement state, the force PW1 in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a (see FIG. 56B). Then, the cam member 422 acts in a direction in which the force PW2 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the shaft portion 422a cancels, and the cam member 422 acts from the first link member 431. Rotation with force can be suppressed. Therefore, in the second displacement state, the cam member 422 and the link member 430 can be arranged in a stable state. Therefore, when a game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 at the position of the second displacement state, the first link member 431 or the cam member 422 swings due to the inertial force due to the launch of the game ball. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 492 is displaced by the collision portion 464f colliding with the shaft portion 492a due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492. . That is, the drive motor KM2 for displacing the ball receiver 467 is
It can also be used as a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the weight of the lower displacement member 440 and easily suppress the rattling.

Further, since the displacement member 492 can be displaced mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiver 467, for example, the position of the ball receiver 467 is detected by the sensor device, and the displacement member 492 is detected according to the detection result. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and to ensure the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member 492 with respect to the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, transition of the transmission mechanism 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. FIG.
1 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, FIG. 62 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position, and FIG. 63 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position. It is. FIGS. 64A to 64C are partial enlarged views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

The first position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at a substantially central position with respect to the base member 470 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 61). The second position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the protruding wall 477 (lower side in FIG. 62). The third position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the right end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction.

61 to 64, the decorative member 450 and the front case 48 of the lower displacement member 440 are also shown.
1 is transparent, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 64A and 64B, the transition state immediately before the displacement to the third position is sequentially illustrated, and in FIG. 64C, the lower displacement member 440 at the third position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 61, the lower displacement member 440 in the first position is such that the movable rack 464 is located at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470. At the first position, the rack 466 is disposed in front of the movable rack 464, and the rack 466 and the movable rack 464 are overlapped in the front-rear direction. That is, the rack 466 is positioned at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470, similarly to the movable rack 464. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the rack 466 is disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

In the first position, as described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are the base member 470.
Are collected at the left end in the left-right direction. Here, since the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while being slid (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states), the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the vicinity of the rotating shaft. It is desirable to be in a state that has been made.

According to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism 460 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 is in a state in which the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are overlapped in the front-rear direction (two-stage rack). It can be brought closer to the grooves 411a, 411b side (the rotating shaft side of the lower displacement member 440).

Therefore, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the first and second extended positions, the lower displacement member 44 is set to the first position.
The driving force when rotating and rotating 0 can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

The displacement from the first position shown in FIG. 61 to the second position shown in FIG. 62 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2.

When the drive motor KM2 is driven from the first position, the transmission gear 461 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 is rotated. Thereby, the transmission gear 462 and the transmission gear 463 are rotated. When the transmission gear 463 is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the movable rack 464 from the rack gear 464 a meshed with the transmission gear 463, and the movable rack 464 is slid to the right with respect to the base member 470.

When the movable rack 464 is slid, the movable rack 46 is moved along with the sliding displacement.
4 is rotated by the rack gear 476 of the base member 470. Accordingly, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 by the rack gear 466a meshed with the transmission gear 465. As a result, the rack 466 is slid to the right in the left-right direction with respect to the movable rack 464, and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position.

The displacement from the second position shown in FIG. 62 to the third position shown in FIG. 63 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2, similarly to the displacement from the first position to the second position. Note that the drive transmission from the drive motor KM2 to the rack 466 is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, when the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiver 46 is moved.
7 is released from the contact state between the leg portion 467a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481, and is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2 disposed in the shaft portion 466b. .

More specifically, in the first and second positions (a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the left side in front of the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position), the front ends of the leg portions 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 are in front. The case 481 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, and the clockwise rotation around the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2 is restricted.

On the other hand, when the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the bottom wall portion 48 is moved.
1b is arranged on the right side of the front view from the end of 1b, and the standing wall 4 of the bottom wall 481b and the base member 470
It arrange | positions inside the recessed part 481b1 formed between opposing to 71a. Therefore, the ball receiver 46
7 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2. When the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a comes into contact with the end surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, and rotation around the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467 is restricted. Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 40 degrees around the shaft hole 467b. Hereinafter, the rotational displacement of the ball receiver 467 at the third position will be referred to as a firing operation.

The ball receiving portion 467 includes a recess 481b1 that is recessed in the track region when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position to the third position direction (first direction), and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. And recess 4
A leg portion 467a engaged with 81b1 is provided and the posture can be changed by engaging the leg portion 467a with the concave portion 481b1, so that the structure for changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is simplified. Can be

Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the collision portion 464f is slid to the right when viewed from the front due to the displacement of the movable rack 464, and the protrusion 492 of the displacement member 492.
collide with b. As a result, the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 492a.

That is, when the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiver 467 is rotationally displaced and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 performs a launch operation, and the ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, and the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter, so that the lower displacement member 440 is lightened.
Can be applied in the opposite direction to the force that causes the displacement member 492 to rotate and to be displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging when the ball is discharged from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a ball receiving operation to the ball receiving unit 467 will be described. FIG.
(A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. 65 (a) to 65 (c).
Then, the transition states in which the receiving operation for receiving the ball into the ball receiving unit 467 is illustrated in order.

In FIGS. 65A to 65C, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are transparently shown, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line.

Further, in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c), the horizontal direction in the retracted state of the lower displacement member 440 is indicated by a two-dot chain line with the phantom line H1, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first tension state. The horizontal direction in the extended state is illustrated with the imaginary line H2. In addition, the angle by which the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the first extended position is indicated by a sign of an angle θ. Note that the imaginary line H1, the imaginary line H2, and the angle θ are also shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 65A, in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is parallel to the imaginary line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is moved to the first position. As a result, the game ball T1 is sent from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, to the opening 451a formed in the front decorative portion 451 of the lower displacement member 440. The game ball T1 sent to the opening 451a is sent to the inside of the projecting wall 477 and sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the game ball T1 is sent to the opening 451a, the lower displacement member 44 is moved.
0 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, as described above, in the second position, since the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed below the protruding wall 477, the game ball T1 sent to the inside of the protruding wall 477 is placed inside the ball receiving portion 467. You can send a ball. When the game ball T1 is received by the ball receiver 467, the game ball T1 can be displaced in accordance with the operation of the ball receiver 467.

As shown in FIG. 65 (c), when the game ball T1 is sent to the ball receiving portion, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position. As a result, the game ball T1 is placed in the ball receiver 467 in the first state.
The ball receiving portion 467 can be arranged at the position.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a base member, a base member that is displaceably disposed on one side of the base member, and a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member. According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of being displaced between the extended position where the base member is extended to the game area and made visible to the player and the retracted position retracted from the game area, the base member is An effect of displacing the displacement member in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the overhang position can be performed.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since one side of the base member is displaceably disposed on the base member, when the displacement member is displaced, the back of the base member with respect to the base member becomes a dead center. There was a problem that stickiness was likely to occur. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized, so that the base member is likely to rattle due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball receiver 467 starts displacement from the second position,
A mode in which displacement is started from a first position closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (base member) than the first position is formed, and at least the lower displacement member 440 is at a predetermined position with respect to the base member 410. In the disposition state (for example, the first projecting state in which the lower displacement member 440 projects to the game area and is visible from the player), the displacement starts from the first position, so the lower displacement member 440 of the base member Shaking can be suppressed. That is, the first position is more than the second position.
Since the position is close to one side of the lower displacement member, by setting the first position as the displacement start position of the ball receiving portion 467, the weight of the ball receiving portion 467 is reduced by the lower displacement member 440 to the base member 410. On the other hand, it can be kept close to the dead point when rattling, and accordingly, the influence of the inertial force when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be made difficult to act on the lower displacement member 440. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be easily suppressed.

Further, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states) while sliding. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced in a state where the game ball T1 is disposed far from the rotation axis, a centrifugal force is easily generated in the game ball T1, and the game ball T1 moves to move the inner wall of the ball receiving portion 467. A collision sound is generated due to a collision between the ball and the game ball T1,
Or there was a problem that the ball receiving portion 467 was damaged.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced to the first position after the game ball T1 is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball T1 is moved to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440. It can be arranged in the vicinity (closer). Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 has a game ball T
When the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states) in a state where 1 is received, it is possible to suppress the generation of centrifugal force in the game ball T1. As a result, it is possible to prevent a collision sound from being generated when the game ball T1 and the ball receiving unit 467 collide with each other, or the ball receiving unit 467 from being damaged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 is the transmission mechanism 4 that operates the ball receiver 467.
60 is formed of a movable rack 464, a transmission gear 465 (pinion gear), and a rack 466 (rack member), and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the rack 466, so that the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 starts from the first position. In this case, not only the weight of the rack 466 but also the weight of the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 should be close to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (a fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles against the base member 410). Can do. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

Further, in a state where the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is increased by the load of the game ball T1. Therefore, as described above, by setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position, the gravity center position of the lower displacement member 440 is set to the sliding groove 4 of the front base 411.
11a, 411b side (rotation shaft side of the lower displacement member 440) can be easily moved. Therefore, when displacing the lower displacement member 440 from the retracted position to the first and second extended positions,
By setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position, it is possible to reduce the driving force when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the ball payout operation will be described. 66 (a) to (c)
These are front views of the lower displacement member 440. In FIGS. 66A to 66C, the transition state of the lower displacement member 440 in the ball dispensing operation is illustrated in order. Also, from FIG. 66 (a) to (c
), The decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently shown, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, the ball paying-out operation is an operation of paying out the game ball T1 received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 from the emission opening 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c), in the paying-out operation of paying out the balls received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the first position to the third position in order. Is done.

That is, the game ball T1 is received inside the ball receiving portion 467 by the receiving operation, and the lower displacement member 440 disposed at the first position is displaced to the third position, so that the game ball T1 is moved to the ball receiving portion 467. Along with the displacement, it is transported to the exit opening 471 side. The game ball T1 moved to the exit opening 471 side is given an inertial force to the exit opening 471 side by the slide displacement of the ball receiver 467 and the launching operation of the ball receiver 467 at the third position. It jumps out from the inside of the part 467. Thereby, the ball can be paid out from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

Here, since the displacement direction when the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) starts to be displaced from the first position is a direction away from the position side of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is at the first position. In the arranged state, the rack 466 (rack member) can be brought closer to the base member 410 from one side of the lower displacement member 440. That is, in order for the ball receiving portion 467 (rack 466) to be displaced in a direction away from one side of the lower displacement member 440, the rack 466 is configured such that the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started and then the transmission gear 465 ( Rack gear 466a with which the pinion gear) is engaged
The side portion is directed to one side of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the weight of the rack 466 can be made closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles against the base member 410), and as a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be moved. It is possible to easily suppress rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when displaced from the stopped state.

The ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction), and is formed so that its posture can be changed when reaching the third position. Therefore, up to the third position, the ball receiving portion T1 receives one game ball T1. While it is easy to maintain the state held by the portion 467, the falling of the game ball T1 from the ball receiving portion 467 can be suppressed, while the second
When the position is reached, the change in the posture of the ball receiver 467 is used to move the game ball T1 to the ball receiver 467.
Easy to pay out from inside.

66 (a) to 66 (c) when the lower displacement member 440 is retracted (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed horizontally with the virtual line H1). When the operation is performed, the game ball paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is sent into the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement member 440 performs the payout operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the position where the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by the angle θ from the imaginary line H1). 4
The game balls paid out to the outside of 40 are sent to the upper part of the ball receiving base 710 of the rotation unit 700.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the discharging operation when two or more balls are sent into the lower displacement member 440 will be described. 67 (a) to (c) and FIG. 68 (a) to (c)
) Is a front view of the lower displacement member 440.

In FIGS. 43A to 43C and FIGS. 44A to 44C, the transition state of the discharging operation is illustrated in order. 43 (a) to 43 (c) and 44 (a) to 44 (c), the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are transparent, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is transparent. Is shown by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to (c), when two or more balls are continuously sent from the sorting unit 500 described later, the second ball is moved by receiving the lower displacement member 440. The game ball T2 can be dropped on the displacement path of the ball receiver 467.

That is, the ball receiving unit 467 is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the first game ball T1 can be sent to the inside of the ball receiving unit 467, and the second game ball T2 can be sent to the first ball. It can be made to contact | abut to the game ball T1, and can be set | placed inside the protruding wall 477 (refer FIG.67 (b)). After receiving the first game ball T1 at the second position, the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the first position, so that the ball receiver 467 receives the first game ball T1 at the ball receiver 467. The second game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiver 467 by displacing 467 to the first position.

Here, in the gaming machine in which the ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position is displaced to the third position by the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, when a malfunction occurs in the displacement of the sorting member 540 of the sorting unit 500 described later. There is a possibility that more than the specified number of game balls may be sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, there is a problem that a problem may occur due to the game balls in excess of the specified number. For example, the transmission mechanism 4 that drives the ball receiving unit 467 with game balls in excess of the specified number.
There was a risk of breakage due to entering 60 and biting into the movable part. Alternatively, game balls exceeding the specified number are out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board 13 or the back case 3
There was a risk of spilling out to the inside of (00).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be displaceable from the second position to the first position opposite to the ball sending direction. The orbital area can be expanded. Therefore, for example, even when a malfunction occurs in the sorting member 540 and a game ball of a specified number or more is sent, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is increased by the amount of the track area of the ball receiving unit 467 being expanded. It can be accepted in the orbital area. As a result, game balls that exceed the specified number,
The ball receiver 467 can be moved along with the displacement to the third position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiver 467 and out of the game area. As a result, the games exceeding the specified number are played. It is possible to make it difficult to cause problems due to the ball.

In addition, the ball receiving unit 467 can receive and hold one game ball T1 sent from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, at the second position, and can also move from the second position to the first position (second direction). ) To be displaceable at least by a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball,
After receiving one game ball at the second position, the ball receiver 467 is moved from the second position to the third direction (
By displacing in the first direction), the number of game balls exceeding the specified number are orbital regions (
The ball can be sent to a region in the first direction with respect to 467 of the ball receiving portion. Therefore, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be moved in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiver 467 in the third position direction (first direction).

In this case, the first game ball T1 is held by the ball receiver 467, and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiver 467, so that the first game ball T1 and 2 Game balls T after the ball
2 can be separated. Therefore, for example, by displacing the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction), while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving member holds the first game ball T1, 2
Only the game balls T2 after the ball can be discharged from the track area.

Further, in the case where the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position and the first ball is received, then the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position and the game ball T1 is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467. Game ball T2
Falls to the top of the rack 466, and the second game ball T2 is moved to the ball receiving portion 467 and the transmission gear 465.
May cause the second game ball T2 to be discharged out of the lower displacement member 440.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the receiving operation for receiving the ball in the ball receiving portion 467 is the first position opposite to the emission opening 471 after the game ball T1 is received inside the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second game ball T2 from being discharged out of the lower displacement member 440.

In other words, in a gaming machine equipped with an accessory that performs a discharging operation for discharging a game ball sent into the accessory, the position of the member that discharges the ball (the ball receiving portion 467 in this embodiment) receives the ball. If the ball is only displaced to the (second position) and the position to discharge the ball (third position), when two or more game balls are sent into the accessory, the ball is discharged to the member that discharges the ball. Outlet (exit opening 471)
In this embodiment, after the first game ball T1 is received, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to the first side opposite to the exit opening 471 in the present embodiment. By displacing to the position, the second game ball T2 can be sent between the ball receiving portion 467 and the emission opening 471.

As shown in FIGS. 68 (a) to (c), after the second game ball T2 is sent on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position before the firing operation. 2
The spherical game ball T2 can be rolled to the exit opening 471 side in a state where the game ball T2 is in contact with the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the second game ball T2 can be discharged from the exit opening 471.

In this case, the ball receiving portion 467 is located above the center position of the second game ball T2 in which the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion is sent on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467 (above FIG. 68 (a)). Placed in. Further, in a state where the leg portion 467a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a is disposed in a state of being inclined by about 45 degrees with respect to the contact surface with the bottom wall portion 481b. Furthermore, the right side (right side in FIG. 68 (a)) of the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the same position in the vertical direction as the right end of the leg portion 467a, so the second game ball The outer surface of T2 can be brought into contact with the leg portion 467a.

In addition, since the leg portion 467a is inclined by approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the outer surface of the lower hemisphere of the second game ball T2 (the lower hemisphere on the bottom wall portion 481b side) Abutted.
Thereby, when rolling the second game ball T2 to the exit opening 471 side, it is possible to generate a force to lift the second game ball T2 upward on the inclined surface of the leg 467a. Therefore,
The frictional force between the second game ball T2 and the bottom wall portion 481b when the second game ball T2 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from being stopped when the second game ball T2 rolls toward the exit opening 471.

In other words, the leg portion 467a protrudes from the ball receiving portion 467 in the direction (first direction) from the first position to the third position, and the protruding tip is the track of the ball receiving portion 467. Since it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower half of the game balls (that is, the second and subsequent game balls T2) sent to the area, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the first position to the third position direction (first direction). When the ball is displaced, the game ball can be moved while the lower half of the game ball is pushed by the leg portion 467a. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467.

Further, a leg portion 467a is provided between the first game ball T1 held by the ball receiving unit 467 and the game ball (the second and subsequent game balls T2) sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiving unit 467. By interposing, the distance between the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be secured by the protruding length of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the second and subsequent game balls T2 from the track area while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1.

Further, the engagement with the recess 481b1 allows the leg portion 467a to have both the role of changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 and the role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half surface thereof. This can reduce product costs.

Further, since the size of the recess 481b1 from the first position to the third position direction (first direction) is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball sent to the track area of the ball receiving unit 467 (that is, When the second and subsequent game balls T2) are moved along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction, the game balls T2) can easily pass through the recess 481b1. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the track area.

As described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is disposed in the retracted state, the lower displacement member 440 is disposed.
The recovery port 411f is arranged below the emission opening 471. Therefore, the game ball T2 that has been discharged in the retracted state is sent to the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement unit 400 is disposed in the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is in a state positioned below the emission opening 471. The opening of the recovery port 411f is opened on the upper side. Therefore, the game ball T2 that has been discharged is sent to the collection port 411f.

That is, the recovery port 411f is in the first direction side (the standing wall 471a side) of the base member 470.
Since it has an opening in the vertical direction and is disposed below the end of the ball, the ball receiver 467
The game balls that are moved in the third position direction (first direction) and discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the second and subsequent game balls T2) are opened to the recovery port 411f. Can be received and recovered from.

Further, the opening of the recovery port 411f is at least perpendicular to the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (the standing wall 471a side) at each position in the retracted state, the first overhanging state, and the second overhanging state. It is arranged in the lower direction. Thereby, even when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to any of the retracted position, the first extended state, and the second extended state, the game ball discharged from the track region of the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the second ball Subsequent game balls T2) can be received and recovered from the opening of the recovery member.

67 (a) to 67 (c) and 68 (a) to 68 (c) at the position of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed horizontally with the imaginary line H1). When performing the discharging operation of the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is
The ball is sent into the collection port 411f. When the lower displacement member 440 performs the discharging operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the position where the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the virtual line H1 by the angle θ), The game ball paid out to the outside of 440 is sent to the collection port 411f as described above.

Next, a configuration when the second game ball T2 is discharged from the emission opening 471 will be described with reference to FIG. 69A is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXa of FIG. 68B, and FIG. 69B is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXb of FIG. 68A. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position immediately before the launching operation, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the side surface of the ball receiving portion 467 on the standing wall 471a side, and the emission opening The lower displacement member 440 can be pushed out from 471.

In this case, when the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is inserted between the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467 rotates, the game ball T2 and the ball receiving portion 467 come into contact with each other. By doing so, the rotational force of the ball receiving portion 467 can be transmitted to the game ball T2. As a result, the game ball T2 can be easily discharged from the emission opening 471. In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 can be returned to the state before the rotation operation using the repulsive force when the ball receiving portion 467 is brought into contact with the game ball T2. Therefore, when the game ball T2 sent to the track area of the ball receiving unit 467 is discharged, the ball receiving unit 46
It is possible to prevent the first game ball T1 held at 7 from dropping out.

Further, in the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position to the third position direction (first direction).
And a concave portion 481b that is erected in a trajectory region at a time lower than the radius of the game ball.
The second and subsequent game balls sent to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 are provided with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction. When the ball is moved, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467 so that the posture change of the ball receiving portion 467 can be regulated. Only the second and subsequent game balls can be easily discharged from the track area while maintaining the state held by the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, the standing wall 471a is erected at a height from the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b to the standing tip, which is lower than the radius of the game ball, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. When the game ball T2 is moved by being pushed by the leg, the lower half surface of the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the standing wall 471a,
The game ball can easily get over the standing wall 471a. In this case, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the game ball T2 is interposed between the ball receiving portion 467 and the standing wall 471a).
Since the reaction force can be applied from the game ball T2 to the ball receiving portion 467, the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion can be restricted, and the first game ball held by the ball receiving portion 467 is dropped. Can be suppressed.
As a result, it is possible to easily discharge only the second and subsequent game balls T2 from the game area while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving unit 467 holds the first game ball.

On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls T2 are not sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467, no game ball is interposed between the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467. Part 467a
Is engaged with the concave portion at 481b1, whereby the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed. As a result, the first game ball T1 (that is, the ball receiver 4) is used by utilizing the change in the posture of the ball receiver 467.
The game balls held in 67 can be easily discharged from the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70A is a top view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 70B is a rear view of the distribution unit 500. 71 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 72 is an exploded rear perspective view of the distribution unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the sorting unit 500 includes a base plate 520 formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an interval between the base plate 520 attached to the front side of the base plate 520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow paths through which a sphere can flow, and a base plate 52.
The distribution member 540 that is rotatably attached to the back surface side of the zero, and the extension that is attached to the end surface of the base plate 520 and extends between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510 to extend the flow down path of the sphere The path member 530 is mainly provided.

The base plate 520 includes a columnar shaft portion 523 that protrudes toward the back surface, a first opening 521 that is formed in a circular arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft portion 523, and a radius that is greater than that of the first opening 521. A second opening 522 penetrating and formed in a large arc shape, a U-shaped cross section with the upper end opened on the side surface of the upper end, and a rolling part 525 extending in the left-right direction, and protruding in a bowl shape on the back side And a locking portion 524 to be formed.

The shaft portion 523 is inserted into a shaft hole 545 of a distribution member 540 described later, and the distribution member 54 is inserted.
The shaft is attached to the base member in a state where 0 can be rotated, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 545.

The first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are openings through which a regulation plate 541 and a storage plate 542 of a distribution member 540 described later are inserted, and are openings having a width larger than the thicknesses of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542. It is formed. In addition, the sorting member 540 can rotate while the base plate 5 is in a rotatable state.
20, the first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are formed so that the length of the arc is larger than the dimension in the circumferential direction in the front view of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542.

The locking portion 524 is an engagement portion that locks the biasing spring SP4 with the locking portion 544 formed on the sorting member 540, and one end of the biasing spring SP4 is locked.

The rolling part 525 is a bottom surface on which a sphere rolls, and has a curved shape formed in a U-shape while being inclined downward toward one end on the left side in the rear view (left side in FIG. 70 (b)). It is formed larger than the outer shape of the sphere. Therefore, it can suppress that the ball | bowl rolling on the rolling part 525 stops at a rolling part, and can roll a sphere to the one end side.

Moreover, the rolling part 525 has a plurality of protrusions 525 that protrude from the front and rear side surfaces toward the inside of the U-shape.
b, and an opening 525a that opens to the back side at the end on one end side.

The protrusions 525b are formed on the front and rear side surfaces at a predetermined interval, and the protrusions 525b formed on the front side and the protrusions 525b formed on the back side are formed at positions that are staggered in front view. Therefore, since the ball rolling on the rolling part 525 can collide with the protrusion 525b, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling part 525 can be reduced.

Here, as described above, the ball is sent to the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 in a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position (FIGS. 65A and 65B). )reference).
Therefore, when the speed at which the game ball that rolls on the rolling portion 525 of the third pitch KR3 is increased, the game ball is sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 440 before the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to the second position. There is a fear.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 525b protruding from the inner surface of the rolling part 525 of the third pitching path KR3 are formed, and the game ball passing through the rolling part 525 of the third pitching path KR3 is formed. Since resistance can be applied, the speed of the game ball passing through the third pitching path KR3 can be reduced. Accordingly, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the switching position (first position) to the receiving position (second position), the required time can be lengthened.
7 can reliably receive a game ball. Further, the output of the displacement speed of the drive motor KM2 can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the ball receiving portion 467 can be slowed, and the product cost can be reduced.

The opening 525a is formed open to the back side of one end of the rolling part 525, and the outer shape in the rear view is formed larger than the size of the sphere. Therefore, the ball that rolls the rolling portion 525 to one end side is discharged from the opening 525a.

The path forming member 510 is formed in a rectangular vertically long plate shape whose lateral width in the left-right direction is smaller than that of the base plate 520, and a plurality of walls larger than the outer diameter of the game ball are formed on the back side. Is formed larger than the outer diameter of the sphere, whereby a plurality of sphere flow paths are formed therein.

The path forming member 510 includes a first opening 511 that opens to the upper end surface, a first pitching path KR1 that is formed between opposing side walls of the first opening 511, and a second pitching path that is coupled to the first pitching path KR1. KR2 and the third pitching path KR3, the second opening 512 and the third opening 513 that open to the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the end of the second pitching path KR2 and the third pitching path KR3, and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A plurality of openings 514, 515, 516 and openings 514, 515, 5
16 is formed mainly including a fourth pitching path KR4 formed by the back side wall and a fourth opening 517 that opens to the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the end of the fourth pitching path KR4.

The first opening 511 is an opening for allowing a ball sent from a ball sending unit 600 (described later) to flow into the distribution unit. The first opening 511 is formed on the side of the upper end of the path forming member 510 and has an outer shape that is larger than that of the ball. Largely formed. In addition, the first opening 511 has the pitching unit 60.
The ball sent from the pitching unit 600 is connected to 0 and can flow in.

The first ball feeding path KR1 is a path that causes the ball that has flowed in through the first opening 511 to flow down between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510, and is formed to extend downward. Further, the fourth pitching path KR4 is formed to extend approximately one third of the path forming member 510 in the vertical direction, and the downstream end is connected to the second pitching path KR2 and the third pitching path KR3. Is done. That is,
A sphere that flows down the first pitching path KR1 is formed to be able to flow down to the second pitching path KR2 or the third pitching path KR3.

As described above, the second pitching route KR2 is a route formed by being connected to the first pitching route KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the second opening 512. That is, when the sphere flowing down from the first opening 511 and flowing down the first pitching path KR1 flows down to the second pitching path KR2, the second opening 5
12 is discharged to the outside of the sorting unit 500.

The second opening 512 is connected to a collection path (not shown) for collecting the sphere. Therefore, the sphere discharged from the second opening is recovered by the recovery path. In addition, the inside of the second opening 512 (second
A sensor device SE2 for detecting the passage of the game ball is arranged at the downstream end of the ball sending path KR2. Therefore, the number of game balls passing through the third winning opening 82 is detected by the sensor device SE1, and the number of game balls passing through the second pitch path KR2 is detected by the sensor device SE2, so that the third pitch is sent. The number of game balls passing through the route KR3 can be detected.

That is, it is possible to detect whether or not a predetermined number (1) of game balls is stored upstream of a restriction plate 541 described later, based on a difference between the sensor device SE1 and the sensor device SE1. For example, when the third electric accessory 82a is opened once, the number of balls passing through the third winning opening 82 (sensor device SE1) is eight, and the ball passing through the second pitching path KR2 (sensor device SE2). If the number is 7,
It can be detected that one game ball has flowed down (stored) in the third pitch path KR3.

As described above, the third pitching path KR3 is a path formed by being coupled to the first pitching path KR1, and the downstream end is coupled to the third opening 513. That is, when the sphere flowing down from the first opening 511 and flowing down the first pitching path KR1 flows down to the third pitching path KR3, the third opening 5
13 is discharged.

The third opening 513 is formed above the other end side (the end side opposite to the opening 525a) of the rolling part 525 of the base plate 520. Therefore, the ball discharged from the third opening 513 is the rolling part 525.
The ball is sent inside. That is, the ball sent to the third pitching route KR3 is sent to the rolling part 525 through the third opening 513.

The openings 514 to 516 are respectively formed on the back side of the third winning opening 82 formed in the game board 13, and balls that have won the third winning opening 82 are sent. That is, when a ball flowing down the game area on the front side of the game board 13 wins the third winning opening 82, the ball is sent to the inside of the distribution unit 500 through the openings 514 to 516.

The fourth pitching path KR4 is formed to be connected to the openings 514 to 516, and 1 on the downstream side.
It connects with one path | route, and is connected with the 4th opening formed in the lower end surface of the path | route formation member 510. FIG. The fourth opening is connected to a collection path (not shown) for collecting the sphere. Therefore, the ball that has won the third winning opening 82 of the game board 13 is sent to the fourth pitching path KR4 of the sorting unit 500, and then discharged from the fourth opening 517 and collected.

The extension path member 530 is formed in a U-shaped cross section that is open on the lower side, and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the extension path member 530 is formed such that the U-shaped inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Therefore, by being disposed on the upper part of the rolling part 525 of the base plate 520, the ball sent to the upper part of the rolling part 525 can be sent inside the rolling part 525 and the extension path member 530. The ball rolling on the rolling part can be prevented from falling from the rolling part 525.

Further, the extension path member 530 has protrusions 531 formed at regular intervals at the same position in the left-right direction as the protrusions 525b formed on the rolling portion 525. Thereby, like the protrusion 525b, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling part 525 can be reduced.

The distribution member 540 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view in which one side is formed long, and is formed with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 is a restriction plate 541 that protrudes from the front side with a plate-like body.
And a storage plate 542, a shaft hole 545 formed penetratingly on one upper end side, and a locking portion 544 formed like a bowl on the back side.

As described above, the shaft hole 545 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 is inserted, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The distributing member 540 is a shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520.
Is inserted into the shaft hole 545 and a screw or the like having a head larger than the shaft hole from the back side is inserted into the shaft portion 523.
Are attached to the base plate 520 in a rotatable state.

The restricting plate 541 is disposed at a connection portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2 through the first opening 521, and a ball flowing down the first pitching path KR1 flows into the second pitching path KR2. And is formed so as to protrude to the front side from the front end face of the shaft hole 545, and the protruding distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the restriction plate 541 is formed to be curved in an arc shape with the axis of the shaft hole 545 as the center. As a result, when the sorting member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545, the regulating plate 54
One displacement region can be minimized.

The storage plate 542 is a plate member that is disposed on the second pitching path KR2 via the second opening 522, and that stores a sphere flowing down the second pitching path KR2 on the upstream side of the storage plate 542. A protrusion distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

The storage plate 542 is formed to be curved in an arc shape with the axis of the shaft hole 545 as the center, and the radius of the arc is larger than the radius of the curved portion of the regulation plate 541. Therefore,
The storage plate 542 is formed at a position farther from the shaft hole 545 than the regulation plate 541. As a result, the regulation plate 541 can be protruded from the connecting portion between the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2, and the storage plate 542 can be disposed on the second pitching route KR2.
Furthermore, the displacement region when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545 can be minimized.

The projecting portion 543 is a drive transmission member that applies a rotational driving force to the sorting member 540 by colliding with the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 described above, and projects to the other end side of the sorting member 540. It is formed. That is, a protrusion 543 to which a driving force is transmitted is formed on the side opposite to one end where the shaft hole 545 serving as the rotation shaft of the distribution member 540 is formed. Thereby, the collision force of the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced.

Accordingly, since the driving force of the driving motor KM3 that displaces the contact plate 464c can be reduced, the energy consumption of the driving motor KM3 can be reduced. In addition, since the energy when the contact plate 464c collides with the protrusion 543 can be reduced during driving, the collision sound can be reduced when the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 collide. In addition,
A detailed mode at the time of a collision between the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 will be described later.

Furthermore, a bulging portion 543a that bulges in a circular shape is formed at a position where the protruding end of the protruding portion 543 contacts the contact plate 464c. By bringing the contact plate 464c into contact with the bulging portion 543a, the ground contact area between the contact plate and the sorting member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, the distribution member 5
When rotating 40, the protrusion 543 (the bulging portion 543a), the contact plate 464c, and the frictional resistance can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor KM3.

As described above, the locking portion 544 is between the locking portion 524 of the base plate 520 and the biasing spring SP.
4 is a part for locking. Therefore, since the force at which the other end side of the sorting member 540 always rotates toward the locking portion 524 can be applied, the shaking of the sorting member 540 due to vibration of the pachinko machine 10 or the like can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the flow path of the balls of the sorting unit 500 will be described in detail. FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of distribution unit 500 taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. In FIG. 73, the distribution member 540 is illustrated by a chain line. FIG. 73 illustrates a state where the sorting member 540 is disposed at the storage position.

Here, the state in which the distribution member 540 is disposed at the storage position is a state in which the distribution member 540 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 and the storage plate 542 is disposed on the second pitching path KR2. .

As shown in FIG. 73, the first pitching path KR1 has a base plate 52 on the lower end side of the flow path.
It is tilted toward the central portion in the left-right direction of 0 (left-right direction in FIG. 73), and the tilted portion is formed in a gentle S-shape. Further, the tip portion curved in an S shape is connected to the third pitching path KR3, and the second pitching path KR2 tilts in the direction opposite to the direction in which the first pitching path KR1 tilts at the end of the first pitching path KR1. It is connected in the state.

Thereby, by causing the sphere flowing down the first pitching path KR1 to collide with the lower surface of the tilted portion,
The downward direction of the sphere can be directed from the direction of gravity to the direction in which the first pitching path KR1 is tilted.
Therefore, the ball can flow down toward the entrance of the third pitching path KR3 (the connecting portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the third pitching path KR3). Therefore, in a state where the sorting member 540 is not disposed, a ball flowing down the first pitching path KR1 can be sent to the third pitching path KR3.

Here, the flow path through which the game ball flows down, the first branch path and the second branch path branched from the flow path, and the game ball flowing down the flow path to one of the first branch path and the second branch path There is a known game machine to distribute.

However, since the conventional gaming machine has a structure in which the game balls that have flowed down the flow-down passage are alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage one by one, the game balls that flow down the flow-down passage are the first branch The passages and the second branch passages are equally distributed (that is, half each). That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a ball receiving portion 467 that is formed so as to be displaceable and receives a game ball from the third ball sending path KR3 is provided, and a contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the sorting member 540. Since the sorting member 540 is displaced by being displaced in contact with each other, the ball receiving portion 46 is displaced.
In accordance with the displacement of 7, the number of game balls distributed to the third pitching path KR3 or the second pitching path can be changed. That is, it is possible to change the number of game balls distributed to the third pitching route KR3.

The displacement of the distribution member 540 is determined by utilizing the displacement of the ball receiver 467.
Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means and a transmission mechanism for displacing the distribution member 540. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the distribution member 540 is controlled using position detection by a sensor device or driving by a driving unit, the reliability of the distribution operation of the distribution member is reduced due to malfunction due to detection failure or control failure. However, according to the present embodiment, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 can be switched in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the ball receiving portion 467 is a member that receives a game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third pitching path KR3, the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 is set to the third destination in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467.
By switching to the pitching route, the game balls distributed to the third pitching route KR3 can be reliably received by the displacement member.

Furthermore, in the conventional gaming machine, the game ball flowing down the flow path is only distributed to one of the first branch path and the second branch path, and therefore it has been insufficient to give the player interest.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution destination by the restriction plate 541 (distribution means) is the third destination.
In the state where the ball-sending route KR3 (first branch passage) is set, the flow of game balls in the third is restricted, and in the state where the sorting destination by the sorting member 540 is the second pitching route KR2 (second branch passage). Since the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) that allows the game ball to flow down on the third pitching path KR3 is provided, it is possible to provide interest to the player.

In other words, when the distribution destination by the restriction plate 541 is the third pitching path, the third pitching path KR3.
When the flow of the game balls distributed to is restricted to store the game balls in the third throwing path KR3, and the sorting destination by the restriction plate 541 is the second throwing path KR2, the third throwing path KR3
Is allowed to flow down (release) the game ball stored in the third pitching path KR3. Thereby, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) to one of the third pitching path KR3 or the second pitching path KR2,
An operation can be formed in which the game balls distributed to the third pitching path KR3 flow down (release). Further, these storage and release operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution operation. As a result, interest can be given to the player.

In addition, since the regulating plate 541 (distribution means) and the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) are provided with a sorting member 540 (integral member), the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are provided.
Can be simplified and the reliability of the operation can be improved. That is, when the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed separately, they are two parts. The structure for operating the two parts is complicated and the reliability of the operation is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be formed as one component, the structure can be simplified correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the operation reliability can be improved. be able to.

Further, the sorting member 540 has a storage position (first state position) and a restriction position (second state position).
In the state where the distribution member 540 is displaced to the storage position, the restriction plate 5 is formed.
41 is disposed at a position where the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path) is a distribution destination, the storage plate 542 is disposed at a position where the flow of the game ball is regulated in the third pitching path KR3, and the sorting member 540 is regulated. In the state displaced to the position, the regulation plate 541 is disposed at a position where the second ball sending path KR2 is assigned as a distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is disposed at a position allowing the game ball to flow down on the third ball throwing path. By displacing the sorting member 540 at two positions (storage position and restriction position), the game balls flowing down the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) are transferred to the third pitching path KR3.
Alternatively, in addition to the operation of distributing to one of the second pitching paths, the operation of stopping (reserving) the flow of game balls allocated to the third pitching path KR3 and the flow of the stopped (stored) gaming balls In addition to forming (opening) operation, the storage and release operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the sorting operation. That is, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced and the operation reliability can be improved.

The distribution member 540 (integral member) is formed to be rotatable, and the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed to be able to protrude and retract with respect to the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path). By projecting to KR3, the flow of the game ball is regulated, and the arc is bent in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the distributing member 540. Therefore, the third pitching path KR3 is used for the regulation plate 541 to appear and disappear. The area of the hole (recess 519) opened in the inner wall can be reduced.

Since the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream side of the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path) is concave, the storage plate 542 to the third pitching path KR3 protrudes. In the initial state (that is, the state where only the front end side of the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the passage), the shape of the front end side of the storage plate 542 can be arranged in an orientation that easily regulates the flow of the game ball, It is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game balls distributed to the third pitching route KR3.

In addition, in a state where the storage plate 542 protrudes to the third pitching path to the maximum and restricts the flow of the game ball, the game ball can be stably held by the recess of the storage plate 542, so that the game ball can be prevented from rampage.

The allocating unit 500 applies an urging force to the allocating member 540 (integral member), and urges the regulating plate 541 in a direction in which the restricting plate 541 protrudes to the third pitching path (first branch path) (biasing means). ), And the distance from the regulating plate 541 to the rotating shaft of the sorting member 540 is the regulating plate 541.
Therefore, the position where the storage plate 542 protrudes to the third emergency path using the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 (that is, the storage position) ) Can be easily maintained.

In this case, since the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotating shaft of the distributing member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulating plate 541 to the rotating shaft of the distributing member 540, when the game ball flowing down collides, the rotating shaft Even when the same impact force is applied due to the large distance from the storage plate 542,
Is easy to immerse, the biasing direction of the biasing spring SP4 is that the storage plate 542 is the third pitching path KR
3, the storage plate 542 can be prevented from being immersed in the recess 519 by the amount of the biasing force.

Moreover, since the distribution member 540 (integral member) is rotated in the direction in which the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) protrudes to the third pitching path (first branch path) by its own weight, the weight is utilized. The distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in a posture (that is, a storage position) in which the storage plate 542 protrudes to the third pitching path KR3. Therefore, when a game ball collides, it can suppress that the storage plate 542 is immersed in the recessed part 519 by the part of its own weight.

Even when the urging spring SP4 (the urging means) falls off, the distributing member 540 is maintained in a posture in which the regulating plate 541 protrudes to the third pitching path KR3 by its own weight, and a game is played to the third pitching path. The sphere can be prevented from flowing down.

Furthermore, an urging spring SP4 is provided to apply an urging force to the allocating member 540 so that the allocating destination by the allocating member 540 is maintained in one of the third pitching path KR3 or the second pitching path KR2, and the ball receiving portion 467 is the allocating member. By displacing 540 in a direction against the direction of the urging spring SP4, the distribution destination by the allocating member 540 is switched to the other of the third pitching path KR3 or the second pitching path KR2, and by the biasing force of the biasing spring The distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is returned to one of the third pitching path KR3 and the second pitching path KR2.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the assignment destination by the assignment member 540 from being inadvertently switched. In this case, after the distribution member 540 is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before the switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging spring SP4. Therefore, the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 is the distribution member 540.
It is unnecessary to be in contact with. That is, the abutting plate 464 c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 can be separated from the sorting member 540. Therefore, the freedom degree of design of the movable range of the ball receiving portion 467 can be increased.

Next, the displacement of the distribution member 540 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 (a)
And (b) is a partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in the range LXXIV in FIG. 73. FIG. 74A shows a state where the distribution member 540 is located at the storage position.
) Shows the state in which the sorting member 540 is positioned at the restriction position. Further, the state in which the distribution member 540 is disposed at the restriction position means that the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540, and the distribution member 540 is centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. This is a state in which the restricting plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the third pitching path KR3 by being rotated.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in a state where the sorting member 540 is disposed at the storage position, the storage plate 542 is disposed on the third pitching path KR3, and the regulation plate 541 is disposed on the path forming member 51.
It is arranged inside a recess 518 formed in the wall on the back side of 0.

In this case, the distance dimension L1 between the end portion of the storage plate 542 that protrudes inward of the third pitching path KR3 and the inner wall of the third pitching path KR3 that faces the leading end is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the balls sent from the upstream of the third pitching path KR3 (first pitching path KR1) are stopped upstream of the storage plate 542.

In addition, the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR from the inside of the curved portion of the storage plate 542.
3 is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere and smaller than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the number of spheres stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 is reduced to 1.
It can be a sphere. Hereinafter, the state of the sorting unit 500 in which one ball is stopped upstream of the storage plate 542 is referred to as a storage state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the state in which the sorting member 540 is disposed at the restriction position, the restriction plate 541 is disposed at the connecting portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the third pitching path KR3. The storage plate 542 is disposed inside a recess 519 formed in the wall portion on the back side of the path forming member 510.

In this case, the distance L3 between the end of the front end of the restricting plate 541 protruding inside the first pitching path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third pitching path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore,
The ball flowing down the first pitching path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 541 and is pitched to the second pitching path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 540 between the restriction position and the storage position, the first pitching path K
A state in which the ball that is sent R1 is sent to the third pitch KR3 and stopped on the third pitch KR3, and the sphere that flows down the first pitch KR1 is not allowed to flow into the third pitch KR3, It is possible to form a state in which a ball is sent to the two-ball pitch route KR2.

Therefore, by displacing one sorting member 540, the sphere's flow path can be reliably switched to either one when the flow path is divided from 1 flow path to 2 flow paths.

Further, the biasing spring SP4 applies a biasing force to the sorting member 540 and maintains the sorting destination by the sorting member 540 in the second pitching path KR2, so that the ball receiving unit 467 cannot receive the game ball. It is possible to suppress switching of the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 to the third pitching path.

Further, the restriction plate 541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be capable of appearing and retracting with respect to the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) or the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path),
Since the inner wall is on the extension line in the flow-down direction at the downstream end of the first pitching path KR1, the regulation plate 541 can be protruded at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first pitching path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the restricting plate 541 to the flow-down passage or the third pitching path KR3 (first branch passage) until the game balls can be distributed. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the distribution destination by the restriction plate 541.

Further, the restricting plate 541 (distribution means) protrudes into the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path), thereby allowing the game balls flowing down the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) to pass through the second pitching path ( Since the projecting direction of the restricting plate 541 is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second pitching path KR2, the game ball flowing down the first pitching path KR1 is projected. When it comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the game, the game ball can be pushed into the second pitching path KR along with the protruding operation of the regulation plate. As a result, the distribution to the second pitching route KR2 can be performed more reliably.

In this embodiment, the restriction plate 541 of the distribution member 540 is disposed at a position closer to the shaft hole 545 than the storage plate 542, but the position where the restriction plate 541 is farther from the shaft hole 545 than the restriction plate 541. May be arranged. That is, the shaft hole 545 of the distributing member 540 is formed as shown in FIG.
And the axis | shaft of the distribution member 540 may be arrange | positioned in the position of the point P of the back surface downstream of the 3rd pitching path | route KR3 shown in FIG.74 (b). In this case, the regulating plate 54 formed on the distribution member 540
1 and the storage plate 542 are arranged at the same positions as in the present embodiment.

In a state where the shaft hole 545 is arranged at the point P, the displacement speed of the regulating plate 541 when the sorting member 540 is rotationally displaced can be made faster than the storage plate 542. Therefore, as described later, when the sorting member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the restricting position, the restricting plate 541 can be quickly projected on the flow path. As a result, it is possible to suppress the gaming balls flowing down the first pitching path KR1 from flowing into the third pitching path KR3 at the timing when the distribution member 540 is switched from the regulation position to the storage position.

In this case, the shape of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in the front view is a point P.
It is formed in a circular arc shape centered at. Thereby, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the restriction position to the storage position (or opposite), the displacement region of the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be minimized. Further, the recesses 518 and 519 that receive the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 on the outside of the third pitching path KR3 have a concave shape along the displacement trajectory of the regulation plate 541 and the regulation plate 541.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, a description will be given of a case where two or more balls are sent from the pitching path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position. 75A and 75B are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500. FIG. 76A and 76B are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIG.

78 (a) and 78 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 in FIG. 74 (a). Also, FIGS. 75A to 76B sequentially show the transition state of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, FIGS. 75A to 76B show a state in which the distribution member 540 is disposed at the storage position.

As shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b), when the first game ball T1 is sent to the first pitching route KR1 in a state where the sorting member 540 is disposed at the storage position, as described above. The game ball T1 is sent to the third pitching route KR3 and stopped above the storage plate 542.

In this case, the storage plate 542 is located at a position downstream from the upper end of the third pitching path KR3 by a distance between the radius and the diameter of the sphere, so that a part of the sphere stopped at the upper part of the storage plate 542 But,
The state is projected to the first pitching path KR1 side (see FIG. 75).

Therefore, as described above, the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side, and is formed so that the game ball can roll on the inner wall on the gravity direction side, Since the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed so as to be able to protrude into and out of the third pitching path KR3 from the inner wall on the lower side in the gravity direction, the game ball is started after the storage plate 542 starts to protrude into the third pitching path KR3. It is possible to shorten the time required until it becomes possible to regulate the flow of water. as a result,
The distribution destination of the restriction plate 541 is from the second pitching path KR2 (second branch path) to the third pitching path KR.
3 and when the game balls are distributed to the third pitching path KR3, the protrusion of the storage plate 542 can be easily in time for the regulation of the flow of the game balls.

In addition, the restricting plate 541 is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the third pitching path KR3, and in a state where the regulation plate 541 protrudes to the maximum at the third pitching path KR3, a force component in the protruding direction is applied from the game ball to the storage plate 542. Therefore, when restricting the flow of the game balls distributed to the third pitching route KR3, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from entering the recess 519 due to an impact when the game balls collide.
Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b), when the second game ball T2 is sent to the first pitch route KR1 when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, the game ball T2 is A ball is sent in the direction from the first pitching route KR1 to the upper end of the third pitching route KR3. Since the game ball T1 is stopped at the upper end of the third pitch path KR3, the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 and is sent to the second pitch path KR2.

In this case, as described above, the game ball T1 is projected to the first pitching route KR1 side, so that the second pitching route KR is not sent to the inside of the third pitching route KR3.
Therefore, the game ball T2 can be sent to the second pitch route KR2 without staying inside the third pitch route KR3. Therefore, the pitching of the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2 can be stabilized.

That is, the second pitching path KR2 (second branch path) in the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path).
The inner wall on the side that desires the game ball flowing down the first pitching path KR1, the third pitching path KR3 (first
The last game ball of the specified number (one ball) of game balls stored in the branch passage) is sent to the third pitch K
Since it is formed so that it can be guided to the side surface of R3, the game ball flowing down the first pitching path KR1 is collided with the last gaming ball of the prescribed number of game balls and then allowed to flow down to the second pitching path KR2. Easy to do.

Of the specified number of game balls, the last game ball means a game ball located on the upstream side (the side opposite to the restriction plate 541). In the present embodiment, the specified number is set to one sphere. In this case, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the third pitching route KR3.

Further, as described above, the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) is tilted at the lower end side of the downflow path toward the central portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 73). The portion is formed in a curved S-shape. That is, the flow direction at the downstream end of the first pitch path KR1 (flow path) is formed in the flow direction at the upstream end of the third pitch path KR3, so that the game balls flowing down the first pitch path KR1 The direction of the repulsive force applied to the last game ball when it collides with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls stored in the ball delivery path is different from the flow direction at the upstream end of the third ball delivery path KR3. Can be made. As a result, with the repulsive force at the time of collision, the last game ball jumps out from the upstream end of the third throwing path KR3, and the second throwing path KR2
Can be prevented from flowing into

Furthermore, since the upper end portion of the third pitching route KR3 is formed to be inclined in the tilt direction of the lower end portion of the first pitching route KR1, the position at which the gaming ball T2 collides with the gaming ball T1 is set at the upper hemisphere of the gaming ball T1. And the second pitching route KR2 side. Therefore, the rebound direction of the game ball T2 that has collided with the game ball T1 can be the entrance (upper end) side of the second pitching path KR2. Therefore, the game ball T2 colliding with the game ball T1 can be easily sent to the second pitching path KR2. As a result, it is possible to suppress the stagnation of the ball in the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2.

Further, the distribution destination by the restriction plate 541 is set to the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path), and the flow of game balls on the third pitching path KR3 is the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means).
In a state where a prescribed number (1 ball) of game balls are stored in the third pitch path KR3,
The game balls that flow down the first pitching path KR1 (downflow passage) are formed to be able to flow down to the second pitching path KR2 (second branch path), so when more than a prescribed number of gaming balls flow down the downflow path, It can suppress that the game ball (game ball T2 after the 2nd ball) exceeding the regulation number stagnates in the 1st pitch route KR1. Therefore, the displacement of the restricting plate 541 (operation in which the distribution destination is the second pitching path KR2)
However, it can suppress that it is inhibited by the game ball which stagnated in the 1st pitch route KR1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a description will be given of a case where a ball is sent to the pitching path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the restriction position. 77 (a) and 77 (b) show the distribution unit 500.
FIG.

77 (a) and 77 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 in FIG. 74 (a). FIGS. 77 (a) and (b) show the transition state of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, FIGS. 77A and 77B show a state in which the sorting member 540 is arranged at the restriction position.

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), when a ball is sent to the first pitching path KR1 in a state where the sorting member 540 is disposed at the restricting position, the pitched game ball T1 is the first pitched ball. Route KR
1 collides with the restricting plate 541 at the lower end. Thereby, the game ball T1 is guided to the second pitching route KR2, and flows down the second pitching route KR2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, an operation when the ball is caused to flow down to the downstream side of the third pitching path KR3 will be described. 78A and 78B are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500. FIG.

78 (a) and 78 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 in FIG. 74 (a). FIGS. 78A and 78B show the transition state of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, FIG. 78A illustrates a state in which the distribution member 540 is disposed at the storage position, and FIG. 78B illustrates a state in which the distribution member 540 is disposed at the restriction position.

As shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state (FIG. 78 (a)).
When the distribution member 540 is displaced and placed at the restriction position when the state shown in FIG.
The game ball T1 stagnated above the storage plate 542 flows down to the downstream side of the third pitching path KR3.

That is, the spheres flow down to the third pitching path KR3 are only spheres that are stagnant above the storage plate 542. Further, as described above, the sphere stagnating above the storage plate 542 is set to 1, so that the third
The balls can flow down to the pitching route KR3 one by one. Therefore, the third pitch KR3
Since the number of spheres flowing down to the downstream side can be stabilized, it is possible to suppress the spheres having an unintended number of spheres from flowing into the third pitching path KR3.

Therefore, the distribution member 540 (distribution means) is moved to the third position as the distribution member 540 is displaced.
A regulation plate 541 (first in / out portion) and a storage plate (second in / out portion) formed so as to be capable of appearing and retracting with respect to the pitching path (first branch path) are provided, and the regulation plate 541 protrudes into the third pitching path. First,
The game balls flowing down the pitching path KR1 (downflow path) are formed so as to be distributed to the second pitching path KR2 (second branch path), and the storage plate 542 is located downstream of the regulation board 541 in the third pitching path KR3. In addition to being positioned and projecting to the third pitching path KR3, the flow of the game balls distributed to the third pitching path KR3 can be regulated, and the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are regulated.
In the state where one protrudes into the passage of the third pitching path KR3, the other is retracted outside the path of the third pitching path KR3 (inside the recesses 518 and 519), so that the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) By displacing the sorting member 540 according to the displacement, only a specified number (one ball) of game balls can be sorted to the third pitching path KR3 and received by the ball receiving unit 467.

That is, when the regulation plate 541 protrudes, the first state in which the game balls flowing down the first pitching path KR1 are distributed to the second pitching path, and the regulation plate 541 is retracted, so that the first pitching path KR1.
The second state in which the game balls flowing down to the third pitching path are distributed, and the flow of the game balls allocated to the third pitching path KR3 is regulated (the game balls are stored) by projecting the second in / out part. Third
And the fourth state in which the game balls stored in the third pitching path are allowed to flow down and received by the ball receiving unit by retreating the second in / out part. Are combined to distribute only a specified number (1 ball) of game balls to the third pitching path KR3.
7 can be received.

Further, since the distribution member 540 includes the restriction plates 541 and 542, that is, formed as one component, the structure of the distribution member 540 (the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are operated,
The structure for exerting these functions can be simplified. Further, when one of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third pitching path KR3, the other is retracted out of the path of the third pitching path KR3. Depending on the position (the first position and the second position), it is sufficient that the distribution member 540 is formed to be displaceable at two positions. That is, the first to fourth states described above can be formed by displacing the sorting member 540 at two positions. Therefore, according to the structure of the distributing member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the distributing member 54 is used.
The structure for displacing 0 can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distribution operation can be improved accordingly.

Next, referring to FIGS. 79 to 80, the sorting unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 40 are arranged.
0 will be described. FIG. 79 is a front view of the sorting unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 80 is a top view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400.
In addition, the state where the lower displacement unit 400 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the sorting unit 500 is disposed on the front side (lower side in FIG. 80) of the lower displacement unit 400. In this case, an opening 525a formed in the rolling portion 525 of the distribution unit 500 and an opening 451a formed in the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440.
Are arranged at positions overlapping each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the ball rolled on the rolling part 525 is sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 440 through the opening 525a and the opening 451a.

In other words, the ball is sent to the lower displacement member 440 from the third winning opening 82 formed in the game board 13 through the game area in front of the game board 13 through the ball delivery unit 600 and the distribution unit 500. Done.

Therefore, the sorting unit 500 includes the rolling part 525 that communicates with the track region of the ball receiving part 467.
Since the distribution member 540 regulates the passage of the game ball in the rolling portion 525, for example, even when the distribution member 540 malfunctions and the second and subsequent game balls T2 are sent, The game balls T <b> 2 subsequent to the eyes can be reliably sent to the trajectory region of the sorting member 540 via the rolling part 525. As a result, problems due to the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be made difficult to occur.

Next, the relationship between the distribution member 540 and the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. 81, 83, and 85 are front views of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 82, 84, and 86 are cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 500. FIG. FIG. 81,
83 and 85, the decoration member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are transparently shown, and only the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500 disposed on the front side is illustrated. 82, 84, and 86, the distributing member 540 is illustrated by a chain line, and the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 disposed on the back side is illustrated by a chain line.

81 and 82 show a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the first position and the distribution member 540 is disposed at the restriction position, and the lower displacement member 44 is illustrated.
A state where 0 is located in the retracted state is illustrated. 83 and 84 show a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the second position and the distribution member 540 is disposed at the storage position, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state. The state is illustrated. 85 and 86, a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the first position and the distribution member 540 is disposed at the storage position is illustrated, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state. The state located in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the retracted state and the state where the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the first position, as described above, A rack 466 for driving 467 is disposed on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (left side in front view of the lower displacement member 440), and the movable rack 464 is disposed on the rear surface side so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, the movable rack 464 is arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (left side of the lower displacement member 440 as viewed from the front), similarly to the rack 466. Therefore, the contact plate 464 c formed on the movable rack 464 is positioned on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440. In this case, the side surface on the other end side of the contact plate 464c (the surface on the left side in front view) is in contact with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the sorting member 540 is displaced to a position where the restricting plate 541 protrudes into the first ball feeding path KR1 (restricted position) by the rotational driving force acting around the axis of the shaft hole 545.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position, the ball that is sent to the first pitching path KR1 of the sorting unit 500 is the third pitching path KR3. The ball is sent to the second pitch route KR2. Also, as mentioned above,
The game ball can be sent to the downstream side of the third pitching path KR3 (downstream side of the storage plate 542) by displacing the sorting member 540 from the storage state in which the ball is stored above the storage plate 542. At this time, a game ball can be sent to the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 by causing the ball receiving portion 467 to perform a ball receiving operation.

Note that the third electric accessory 82a for storing the game balls in the sorting unit 500 is used.
The opening operation is performed before the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position, and when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position, the third electric accessory 82a is closed. . Thereby, when the sorting member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the restriction position, the flow of the game balls passing through the first pitching path KR1 is not restricted by the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542, and an unintended game ball becomes the first one. 3
It is possible to suppress the pitching to the downstream side of the pitching route KR3.

Further, since the sorting member 540 is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the sending of the game ball to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 is regulated according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Or acceptable. That is, the restriction or allowance of the game ball delivery can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. For example, according to the detection result of the sensor that detects the position of the distribution member 540, the distribution member The driving means for driving 540 or the control of each means can be made unnecessary, and accordingly, the product cost can be reduced and the operational reliability can be improved.

Further, in the sorting member 540, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position to the first position direction (second direction).
Since the game ball T2 is allowed to be sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467 in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467 is the first direction than the ball receiving portion 467. The game ball can be reliably sent to the side area.

The ball receiver 467 is formed to be displaceable at a switching position for switching the sorting member 540 and a receiving position (second position) set at a position different from the switching position (first position). In a state where the portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third pitching route KR3, and in a state where the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the receiving position, the ball receiving portion from the third pitching route. 467 is enabled to receive game balls,
Since the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the second pitching path KR2, game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball in the present embodiment) that the ball receiving unit 467 can receive the balls are allocated to the third pitching path KR3. Can be suppressed.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the sorting member 5
Since the ball receiving unit 467 receives the game ball while the distribution destination by 40 is switched to the third ball sending path, the game ball exceeds the specified number that can be received by the ball receiving unit 467 and the third ball sending path KR3. There is a risk of being distributed to. In the case where a means for restricting the inflow of game balls to the third pitching path KR3 is separately provided, the structure becomes complicated and the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, and after the specified number (1 ball in the present embodiment) of game balls is distributed to the third pitching route KR3, the distribution member 540 is provided.
Is displaced to the receiving position, the distribution destination is switched to the second pitching route KR2, so that it is possible to prevent the gaming balls exceeding one ball from flowing down to the third pitching route. Therefore,
The ball receiving unit 467 can suppress the distribution of the gaming balls exceeding the receivable prescribed number (one ball) to the third pitching route KR3. In addition, since it is not necessary to separately provide the above-described means (means for restricting the inflow of game balls to the third pitching path KR3), it is possible to improve reliability and reduce product cost.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 starts from a position where each operation unit is turned off (turned off) when the power is turned on (turned on). Furthermore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, only the control may be reset. In that case, if the distribution member 540 is provided with a driving means, when the power is turned on, the distribution unit 500 in the storage state operates during the initial operation to flow the game ball down to the third pitching path KR3, There is a possibility that the game ball is sent to the retreat side (first position side) of the ball receiving portion 467 arranged at the third position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the displacement of the sorting member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 are synchronized, so even if the power is turned off while the pachinko machine 10 is not located at the predetermined reference position, When the power of the machine 10 is turned on, an unintended game ball can be prevented from being sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiver 467. As a result, the game ball can be prevented from being clogged inside the lower displacement member 440.

Further, when the power is turned off with the game ball remaining in the track area of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiver 467 is left in the track area of the ball receiver 467 by performing the discharging operation described above. The game balls thus obtained can be discharged out of the lower displacement member 440 and recovered from the recovery port 411f.

Next, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. FIG. 83 and 84, the state in which the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 are in the second state.
In the state where it is arranged at the position or the third position (position other than the first position), as described above, the rack 466 for driving the ball receiving portion 467 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction of the lower displacement member 440 (left-right direction in FIG. 83). At the same time, the movable rack 464 is disposed at a position movable from one end of the lower displacement member 440 to the other end side (left side in FIG. 83).

Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is disposed at a position spaced from the end on the other end side of the lower displacement member 4440 to the one end side. In this case, the surface on the other end side of the contact plate 464c (the surface on the left side when viewed from the front) is in a state of being separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. Accordingly, the distributing member 540 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the allocating member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is moved to the third position.
It is displaced to a position (storage position) that is projected on the pitching path KR3.

Accordingly, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the second position or the third position (position other than the first position), the first of the distribution unit 500 is set.
The ball sent to the pitching route KR1 is stopped above the storage plate 542. Also,
As described above, when the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state, the ball that is sent to the first pitching path KR1 collides with the ball that has stopped above the storage plate 542 and is sent to the second pitching path KR2.

Next, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, when the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the first or second extended state, the lower displacement member 440 slides relative to the front base 411 as described above. It is displaced and rotationally displaced. Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, and is in a state of being separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. Thereby, the distribution member 540 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the allocating member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is moved to the third ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) projected on the path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state, the ball sent to the first ball sending path KR1 of the sorting unit 500 is stopped above the storage plate 542. Is done. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, the ball that is sent to the first pitching path KR1 collides with the ball that has stopped above the storage plate 542 and is sent to the second pitching path KR2. .

That is, the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state and the second extended state (states other than the retracted state).
When the lower displacement member 440 is displaced, the position of the opening 451a of the decoration member 450 is displaced, so that the ball communication state between the opening 451a and the opening 525a of the sorting unit 500 is released. . Therefore, when the ball flows down to the third pitching path KR3, the ball may be discharged from the opening 451a into the back case 300. In the present embodiment, the third pitching is performed by setting the sorting member 540 as the storage position. The sphere can be prevented from flowing down to the downstream side of the path KR3. As a result, the sphere of the back case 300 can be prevented from being discharged inside.

In other words, the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 is formed to be displaceable in the retracted state, the first extended state, and the second extended state, and when the lower displacement member 440 is positioned in the retracted state, Since the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the lower displacement member 440, a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced while the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the retracted state, and a state where the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed in the first or second overhanging state. Thus, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In this case, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first or second extended state, the ball receiver 4
67 cannot receive a game ball from the rolling part 525 of the third pitch KR3 (the third pitch KR
In this state, the abutting plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 is not allowed to abut on the distributing member 540. In this state, the rolling portion 525 3 and the opening 451a of the lower displacement member 440 are not in communication. Therefore, in a state where the ball receiving unit 467 cannot receive a game ball (a state where the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first extended state or the second extended state), the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is the third ball Switching to the route KR3 can be suppressed.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is disposed on the base plate 520 of the distribution unit 500 that is formed as a separate member from the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, the lower displacement member 4 correspondingly.
The increase in size of the 40 base members 470 can be suppressed.

Here, since the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 from the first extended state to the retracted state is not only rotationally displaced in the left-right direction but also rotationally displaced, the contact plate 464c in the tilted state is subjected to rotational displacement. The protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 contacts the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the distribution member 540
May not be able to rotate and displace.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the state displaced to the first overhanging position shown in FIG. 85 to the retracted state, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to a location other than the first position. (
The second position or the third position is displaced. Thereby, it can suppress that the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 displaced to the retracted state collides with the protrusion 543. As a result, the projection 543 of the distribution member 540 contacts the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the distribution member 5
It can suppress that 40 cannot carry out rotational displacement.

Further, since the swelled portion 543a is formed in the sorting member 540 as described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first overhanging state to the retracted state due to poor control or the like, the contact plate 464c Even when the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface, the distribution member 5
40 can be rotationally displaced.

That is, since the contact area with the contact plate 464c can be reduced by the bulge portion 543a, the bulge portion 543a can be easily slid along the surface when the contact plate 464c comes into contact. Therefore, the distribution member 540 can be easily rotated and displaced. As a result, it can be suppressed that the projection 543 of the distribution member 540 contacts the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 cannot be rotationally displaced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90, the configuration of the drive transmission portion of the rotation unit 700 will be described. 87 is a front view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 88 is a rear view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 700, and FIG.
FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit 700.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, the rotation unit 700 includes a decoration unit 750 composed of a plurality of displacement members, and a ball holder 71 disposed on the upper side in the gravity direction of the decoration unit 750.
0 and the back base 720 disposed on the back side of the ball receiving base 710 and the decoration unit 750
And a left transmission member 730 disposed on the left side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front, and a right transmission member 740 disposed on the right side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front.

The ball cradle 710 is a member that drops the game ball emitted from the emission opening 471 on one side of the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 described above. Thereby, the ball sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 440 can be sent to the rotation unit 700. Note that the ball pedestal 71
The detailed configuration of 0 will be described later.

The decoration unit 750 is a substantially D-shaped block body in which a curved portion is arranged upward in a side view, and is decorated with a character or a pattern on the front side. In addition, the decoration unit 750 includes a plurality of members, and is configured to be displaceable by transmission of driving that will be described later. The configuration of the decoration unit 750 will be described later.

The back surface base 720 is a plate member that connects the back surface side of the ball receiving base 710 and the back surface side of the decoration unit 750, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the decoration unit 750
Since the fastening portion is limited because it is composed of a plurality of movable members, the decoration unit 750 and the ball pedestal 710 are connected on the back side at a position where the player cannot visually recognize the decoration unit. The decorative unit 750 and the ball pedestal 710 can be assembled as one unit while securing the movable range of 750.

The left transmission member 730 is attached to the drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side surface (left side in FIG. 87) of the decoration unit 750, the transmission member 730 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. Motor base 732 and gear cover 7 covering transmission member 730
33 and a pitching path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and that forms a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the gear cover 733.

The drive motor KM4 is a drive source for moving each member of the decoration unit 750 described later. The drive of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted by a transmission member 730 described later.

The transmission member 730 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 731b meshed with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and a transmission gear 731c. And a transmission gear 731d arranged coaxially by a shaft 735 and a load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d.

The transmission gear 731a is attached to the drive motor KM4 as described above, and rotates when the drive motor KM4 is rotationally driven.

The transmission gear 731b has a one-way clutch OW1 disposed therein, and an inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is coupled to a shaft portion JB1 that transmits a driving force of rotation to the right transmission member 740 on the right side.

The one-way clutch OW1 includes an inner ring that is disposed on the inner side and has a cam surface formed on the outer peripheral surface, an outer ring that is disposed on the outer side of the inner ring, and a plurality of springs and rollers between the inner ring and the outer ring. When the outer ring tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the inner ring, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller increases, and resistance is transmitted to the inner ring, and the outer ring moves in the other direction with respect to the inner ring. When this is rotated, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller becomes low, and this is a cam type clutch that slides and cuts power transmission.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731b receives a driving force in one direction from the driving motor KM4.
When the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the shaft portion JB1, and the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, the outer ring slides with respect to the inner ring, and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft portion JB1 is interrupted.

As with the transmission gear 731b, the transmission gear 731c has a one-way clutch OW1 disposed therein. A shaft 735 is disposed inside the one-way clutch OW1 of the transmission gear 731c.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c receives a driving force in one direction from the driving motor KM4.
When the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the shaft 735 and the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, the outer ring slides with respect to the inner ring and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted. Also,
The transmission gear 731c is meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and the rotation directions of the transmission gear 731c are opposite to each other. Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, the transmission gear 731c
Is the rotation in the other direction. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the other direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction. That is, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, the mode is switched to the mode in which the shaft portion JB1 rotates or the mode in which the shaft 735 rotates.

The transmission gear 731d is attached to the shaft 735. As described above, the shaft 735 is connected to the transmission gear 7.
It is rotated only when 31c is rotated in one direction. Therefore, the transmission gear 731c rotates in one direction only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction, and is not rotated in the other direction.

The load gear 731e has a shaft portion 791a of a resistance member 791 whose shaft hole is attached to the box member 760.
Connected to The resistance member 791 is formed to include a shaft portion 791 a that can rotate with respect to a base portion fastened to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed such that a predetermined amount of resistance acts when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion. That is, since a predetermined amount of force is required to rotate the shaft portion 791a, the load gear 73 connected to the shaft portion 791a is used.
Similarly, the force for rotating 1e is required to be a predetermined amount or more.

Thereby, when the rotating body 800 meshed with the transmission gear 731d is rotated and stopped by the rotation of the transmission gear 731d, it can be suppressed from rotating by the inertial force. That is,
The resistance when the shaft 791a rotates relative to the base portion is set to be larger than the inertial force that acts around the axis of the rotating body 800 when the rotation of the rotating body 800 stops.

The load gear 731e is connected to a transmission gear 731d that is disposed coaxially with the transmission gear 731c. Therefore, the resistance of the load gear 731e applied to the drive motor KM4 is changed to the transmission gear 7.
Only one direction of rotation for rotating 31d can be used. That is, the transmission gear 731c is
When rotating in the other direction, the transmission of the drive between the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d is interrupted, so that the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed from acting. As a result, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed from acting.

The motor base 732 is formed in a box-like body that opens on the decoration unit 750 side, and the drive motor KM4 is disposed outside the bottom portion of the box (left side in FIG. 87) with the shaft inserted through the inside of the box. As a result, the transmission gear 731a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is replaced with the motor base 73.
2 can be disposed inside. That is, the depth of the box of the motor base 732 is the transmission gear 731a.
It is set larger than the width dimension. As a result, the motor base 732 can be disposed in the decoration unit 750 with the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a attached thereto, and the transmission gear 731a can be prevented from colliding with the decoration unit 750.

The gear cover 733 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the back, and is fastened to the decoration unit 750 with the left transmission member 730 disposed therebetween. In addition, a through hole 733a is formed through the decoration unit 750 at a position facing a shaft hole of the rotating body 800 described later. Thereby, the ball | bowl rolling inside the rotary body 800 can be discharged | emitted outside through the through-hole 733a. A description of the sphere sent to the rotating body 800 will be given later.

The ball path cover 734 is a member disposed on the outer side (left side in FIG. 87) of the gear cover 733, is formed of a plate-like body, and has a wall portion projecting from the edge portion toward the gear cover 733. Thereby, a gap can be formed between the gear cover 733 and the ball path cover 734 facing each other, and the sphere inserted through the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733 is inserted through the gap and discharged to the outside of the rotating unit 700. Can do. The sphere discharged from the gap between the gear cover 733 and the ball path cover is sent to a collection path (not shown) and collected.

The right transmission member 740 includes a rotation member 741 connected to the other end side of the shaft portion JB1 described above,
The rotation member 741 is mainly provided with an arm member 742 having one end connected thereto, and a crank cover 743 disposed in the decoration unit 750 in a state where the rotation member 741 and the arm member 742 are covered.

The rotating member 741 includes a main body portion 741b formed in a disk-like plate shape, and a main body portion 741b.
The one-way clutch OW1 fitted to the shaft of the other side of the decorative unit 750 (FIG. 87).
And a columnar protrusion 741a protruding rightward).

In the one-way clutch OW1 attached to the rotating member 741, the shaft hole of the inner ring is inserted into the other end side of the shaft portion JB. The one-way clutch OW1 is arranged so that the inner ring and the outer ring are not transmitted when rotation opposite to the rotation direction of the shaft portion JB1 is input to the inner ring.

As a result, when a driving force having a rotational speed faster than the rotational speed transmitted from the shaft portion JB1 to the rotating member 741 is input to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1, only the outer ring is rotated and the rotating member 741 is driven by the drive motor KM4. It can be rotated by a driving force other than driving. As a result, the rotating member 741 can be rotated at two or more different speeds.

The arm member 742 has a shape that combines a C-shape and an I-shape in a side view,
It is formed by connecting the other ends of the letters. In addition, the arm member 742 includes a shaft hole 742a that is formed so as to penetrate the connecting portion between the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion, an elliptical first sliding groove 742b that is formed so as to penetrate one end of the I-shaped portion, It is mainly provided with an elliptical second sliding groove 742c formed through the other end of the character portion.

The shaft hole 742a is a shaft portion 764a formed in the right side plate 764 of the box member 760 described later.
Is formed in the inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 764a. Therefore, the arm member 742 is disposed in the decoration unit 750 with the shaft portion 764a inserted into the shaft hole 742a, and thus can be rotated with respect to the decoration unit 750.

The first sliding groove 742b is a hole into which the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction formed in an ellipse is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 741a. Therefore,
The protrusion 741a can be inserted inside the first sliding groove 742b, and the arm member 742 can be rotationally displaced by the rotation of the rotating member 741.

The rotating member 741 is formed so that the outer diameter is smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion of the arm member 742, and the shaft is a distance half the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion from the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. It is arranged at a position farther away. Thus, by rotating the rotating member 741, the arm member 742 can be reciprocated around the axis of the shaft hole 742a.

The second sliding groove 742c is a hole into which a projection 773a of the right lid portion 773 described later is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction formed in an ellipse is set larger than the outer diameter of the projection 773a.
Therefore, the protrusion 773a can be inserted inside the second sliding groove 742c. Also, the right lid 773
Is formed so as to be capable of rotational displacement with respect to the box member 760. Therefore, as described above, the rotation member 741 is rotated, and the arm member 742 reciprocates so that the right lid portion 773 connected to the other end of the arm member 742 is rotated with respect to the box member 760. be able to.

The crank cover 743 is mainly provided with an oval part 743a formed in an ellipse in the back view and a ball feeding part 743b formed in a row on the back side of the oval part 743a.

The oval portion 743a is a cover that covers the arm member 742. The outer shape in a side view is formed to be larger than the displacement region of the arm member 742 and the arm member 742, and the arm member 742 extends from the edge toward the decoration unit 750. A wall portion protruding larger than the thickness is formed. Thus, when the crank cover 743 is disposed on the decoration unit 750, the arm member 742 can be disposed between the crank cover 743 and the decoration unit 750 facing each other.

The ball feeding part 743b is a path member for sending a ball to the collection path when a ball flowing down the flow area in front of the game board 13 is collected from a predetermined collection port, and has a predetermined size inside. It is formed in a rod shape with a space. Further, the ball feeding part 743b is opened at the upper end side and connected to the recovery port of the game board 13, and the lower end side is connected to the opening formed in the decoration unit 750. As a result, the balls collected by the game board 13 can be guided to the collection path (not shown) through the interior of the decoration unit 750 via the ball delivery unit 743b.

Next, the decoration unit 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 95. FIG. 91 is a front view of the decoration unit 750. 92A is a side view of the decoration unit 750 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XCIIa in FIG. 91, and FIG. 92B is the arrow XCIIb in FIG.
It is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the direction view. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit 750, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit 750. 91 (b) and 91 (c), the right side plate 764 and the left side plate 76 of the box member 760 are shown.
5 shows a transparent view.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the decoration unit 750 includes a box member 760 serving as a decoration part outside the decoration unit 750 and a lid disposed on the upper side in the gravity direction of the box member 760 (upper side in FIG. 91 (a)). The member 770, and the rotating body 80 disposed inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770
0 is mainly provided.

The box member 760 includes a base member 762 disposed below the rotating body 800, a front plate 761 disposed in front of the base member 762, a lower plate 763 disposed on the bottom surface of the base member 762, The base member 762 is mainly provided with a right side plate 764 disposed on the right side in front view and a left side plate 765 disposed on the left side in front view of the base member 762.

The base member 762 is formed in a rectangular horizontally longer shape than the rotating body 800 in a top view, and is formed with a thickness larger than the outer diameter of the sphere in the direction of gravity. The base member 762 is formed with a curved surface whose upper surface is coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800. Thereby, when the base member 762 is arrange | positioned in the vicinity of the rotary body 800, the collision of the base member 762 and the rotary body 800 can be suppressed.

The base member 762 is mainly provided with a concave portion 762a that is recessed downward on the top surface in the left-right direction and a ball feeding portion 762b that is recessed substantially L-shaped on the bottom surface.

The concave portion 762a is a groove in which the above-described shaft portion JB1 is disposed on the inner side.
It is recessed on the axis of the transmission gear 731b disposed on the 0 side surface. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM4 can be transmitted through the shaft portion JB1.

The ball feeding part 762b is bent and formed in an L shape on the bottom surface, and one end side is the right side plate 7
The other end side is connected to the back side of the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761. Further, the recessed width of the ball feeding portion 762b is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere. Accordingly, the lower surface plate 763 is disposed on the lower side, so that a ball can be sent into the box member 760.

The front plate 761 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined thickness on the back side. Further, the front plate 761 is formed with a winning opening 761a of a size that allows a sphere to be inserted on the front side. As described above, the winning opening 761a is connected to the ball feeding portion 762b of the base member 762 disposed on the back side. Therefore, the ball sent to the inside of the winning opening 761a is sent to the ball sending portion 762b of the base member 762.

The right side plate 764 is formed in a D shape whose outer shape in a side view is curved upward. Further, the right side plate 764 is curved with a shaft portion 764a projecting to the outside of the decoration unit 750, a bearing portion 764c formed penetrating below the shaft portion 764a, and the same shaft as the rotation shaft of the rotating body 800. A curved opening 764d formed in the opening, and a ball feeding portion 762b of the crank cover 743
An opening 764b that opens at a position facing the lower end of the rotating body 800, and an engaging portion 764e that penetrates and is formed in a semicircular shape in a side view on the axis of the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 are mainly formed.

The opening 764 b is a base member 76 for sending a ball sent from the ball sending part of the crank cover 743.
2 is a hole for enabling the ball to be sent to 2, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Thereby, the ball sent to the crank cover 743 can be sent to the base member 762.

The bearing portion 764c is a hole into which the above-described shaft portion JB1 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion JB1. Thereby, a driving force can be transmitted to the right transmission member 740 described above.

The curved opening 764d is an opening through which the protrusion 773a protruding from the right lid 773 is inserted. Further, the curved opening 764d has a lid member 770 that is rotationally displaced by the lid member 770.
It is formed in a circular arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis. Thereby, when the cover member 770 is rotationally displaced, it can suppress that the protrusion 773a and the curved opening 764d collide.

The engaging portion 764e is a member that engages with an end portion on the right side of the base plate 810 disposed inside the rotating body 800 and holds the base plate 810 in a non-rotatable manner. That is, the distal end portion 811a of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inserted into the engaging portion 764e. This
The base plate 810 cannot be rotated.

The left side plate 765 has an outer shape substantially the same as the right side plate 764 in a side view.
The left side plate 765 has a through hole 765a formed through the shaft of the rotating body 800, a shaft portion 765b protruding toward the rotating body 800, and a shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 inserted therein. The hole 765c is mainly provided.

The through hole 765a is an opening through which the sphere discharged from the opening on the left side when viewed from the front of the rotating body 800 is inserted into the through hole 733a of the motor base 732 described above. That is, the through hole 7
65a is formed on the axis of the rotator 800, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be the same as the inner diameter of the opening on the left of the rotator 800 when viewed from the front.

The shaft portion 765b is inserted into a shaft hole 781 formed in the rotation restricting member 780 described later,
The rotation restricting member 780 can be held in a rotatable state. The displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described later.

The through hole 765c is a hole through which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted as described above, and is formed at a position facing the side surface of the load gear 731e described above.

The lower surface plate 763 is a plate member that is disposed on the lower surface of the base member 762 so that the ball feeding portion 762b of the base member 762 and the lower surface plate 763 form a ball feeding path through which a sphere can pass.
The lower surface plate 763 is formed with an opening 763a penetrating in the vertical direction. Opening 763a
Is an opening for sending the ball sent inside the ball sending part 762b to a collection path (not shown). Therefore, the balls that are won in the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761 and the game area are sent to the ball feeding portion 743b of the right transmission member 740, and the balls can be discharged from the interior of the decoration unit 750.

The lid member 770 includes a curved lid portion 771 formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, a right lid portion 773 fastened to the right side surface of the curved lid portion 771, and a curved lid portion 771. And a left lid portion 772 fastened to the left side surface when viewed from the front.

As described above, the curved lid portion 771 is formed in a curved shape that is coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 and has a larger radius than the rotating body 800 as viewed from the side. The curved lid portion 771 includes a transparent portion 771a formed from a transparent plate at a part on the front side.

The transparent portion 771a is a plate that allows the player to visually recognize patterns and characters drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800. In other words, the player has the rotating body 800 with the lid member 770.
Even if the upper end side is covered, the display of the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion 771a.

The right lid portion 773 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side, and the radius outside the ring is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the right lid portion 773 is formed larger than the size of the outer shape of the right end portion 811 of the rotator 800 in a side view. As a result, the right lid 773 is
It is disposed in a state where the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 is inserted into the annular inner portion.

Further, the right lid portion 773 is mainly provided with a protrusion 773a that protrudes to the outside (right side in front view) of the decoration unit 750, and a recess 773b that is recessed radially outward at the outer peripheral edge. . As described above, the protrusion 773a is a protrusion that is inserted into the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742.

The recess 773b can rotate the opening / closing member 870 by inserting a protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 described later. Therefore, the recessed portion 773b is set to have a recessed width larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 871. The concave portion 773b is formed at a position substantially opposite to the edge portion of the right side lid portion 773 where the curved lid portion 771 is disposed.

The left lid portion 772 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side, and the radius outside the ring is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the left lid portion 772 is formed larger than the outer diameter of a tooth surface 881a of the left rotating portion 880 described later. Accordingly, the left lid portion 772 is disposed in a state in which the left rotation portion 880 of the rotating body 800 is inserted into the annular inner portion.

Further, the left lid portion 772 is formed with a plate-like sensor plate 772a that protrudes to the outside of the decoration unit 750 (left side in front view). The sensor plate 772a is disposed between two facing bifurcated sensors (not shown), so that the position of the left lid portion 772 can be detected.

Here, the lid member 770 for the rotating body 800 will be described. The arrangement of the lid member 770 in a state where the rotating body 800 is assembled is such that the left and right end portions of the rotating body 800 are inserted inside the right lid portion 773 and the left lid portion 772 before assembly (separate members), respectively. To do. then,
The rotating body 800 and the lid member 770 are connected by assembling the right lid portion 773, the left lid portion 772, and the curved lid portion 771. Therefore, the lid member 770 is rotatable with respect to the rotating body around the axis of the rotating body 800.

The rotation restricting member 780 is formed to be bent in a substantially L shape in a side view. The rotation restricting member 780 mainly includes a shaft hole 781 penetrating the bent portion, a protrusion 782 protruding in the bending direction on one end side, and a contact surface 783 formed flat on the tip on the other end side. Is done.

As described above, the shaft portion 765b of the left side plate 765 is inserted into the shaft hole 781. Thereby, the rotation restricting member 780 is held rotatably with respect to the left side plate 765. Further, an urging spring SP5 is inserted into the shaft portion. As a result, a rotational force in one direction is applied to the rotation restricting member 780.

The protrusion 782 engages with an engagement protrusion 882 of a left rotation portion 880 described later, so that the rotating body 8
00 rotational displacement can be regulated. The abutting surface 783 is a surface with which the end portion on the back surface side of the lid member 770 mentioned above abuts, and the rotation regulating member 780 can be rotated by the lid member 770 being abutted. The mode of regulation between rotation regulating member 780 and rotating body 800 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 96, the transmission path of the driving force when the driving motor KM4 is rotated will be described. 95 (a) and 96 (a) show the rotation unit 700 in the direction of the arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and FIGS. 95 (b) and 96 (b) show the arrow XC in FIG.
It is the rotation unit 700 in Vb.

In FIG. 95, the direction of displacement of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise) is indicated by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. 96, when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the negative direction (counterclockwise), the displacement direction of each member is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 95A and 95B, when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the forward direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the forward direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the negative direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the positive direction.

In this case, in the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731b, the rotation of the outer ring is not transmitted to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is not rotated. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the arm member 742 is stopped.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731 is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 7 coupled to the shaft 735
31d is rotated. Thereby, the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d and the tooth surface 881a of the rotating body 800 are rotated. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates in the forward direction, the drive force to the lid member 770 is not transmitted and the drive force to the rotating body 800 is transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B, when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the positive direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the negative direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731b is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is rotated. Accordingly, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the rotating member 741 is rotated. As a result, the arm member 742 reciprocates around the axis of the shaft hole 742a, and the lid member 770 is displaced.

On the other hand, in the one-way clutch OW1 provided in the transmission gear 731, the rotation of the outer ring is not transmitted to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is not rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 73 connected to the shaft 735.
The driving force is not transmitted to 1d, and the rotating body 800 and the load gear 731e are not rotated. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates negatively, the drive force to the lid member 770 is in a transmission state and the drive force to the rotating body 800 is not transmitted.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c that transmits the driving force from the driving motor KM4 to the rotating body 800.
The one-way clutch OW1 is disposed in the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4 in the (rotation-side drive means) and the transmission gear 731b (displacement-side transmission means) that transmits to the opening / closing member 870 described later via the lid member 770. Accordingly, the rotational force is transmitted to the transmission gear 731c or the transmission gear 731b.
And transmission to the other can be cut off. As a result, the drive motor K
Only by switching the rotation direction of M4, it is possible to switch the driving object to be driven by the rotation driving force. That is, according to the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, the rotation of the rotating body 800, the stop of the rotation, and the opening / closing member 870 can be switched between displacement and its stop,
The structure can be simplified while a plurality of modes can be formed.

Here, in the structure in which the driving target (the rotating body 800 or the opening / closing member 870 (lid member 770) is switched according to the rotation direction of the driving means using the one-way clutch OW1, the driving force transmitted from the driving motor KM4 is transmitted. When cut off, the rotation or displacement in the direction driven by the driving force becomes free, so that the driving object of the driving means is, for example, the rotating body 8.
When switching from 00 to the opening / closing member 870 (lid member 770) and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, the rotating body 800 is in a rotatable state, and there is a risk that rotation will continue (rotate) due to inertial force.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the load gear 731e (load gear) meshed with the transmission gear 731d driven by the transmission gear 731c is provided, the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM4 is blocked. However, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body 800 using the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear 731e.

Next, displacement of the lid member 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. Fig. 97
Fig. 97 (a) and Fig. 98 (c) are in the closed state, Fig. 97 (b) and Fig. 98 (b) are in the intermediate state, and Fig. 97 (c) and 98 (a) are in the open state. FIG. 750 is a side view of 750 and the right transmission member 740.

97 (a) to 97 (c) and FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (c) show a state in which the crank cover 743 of the right transmission member 740 has been removed. The closed state of the decoration unit 750 is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged in a state of covering the upper half of the rotating body 800 (upper part in FIG. 97 (a)), and the open state is a state in which the lid member 770 is rotated. This is a state in which it is displaced and arranged on the back side (the right side in FIG. 97 (c)) of the rotator 800. The intermediate state is a state in which the lid member 770 is disposed at a position between the closed state and the open state.

Further, in FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (c), the state of being displaced from the closed state to the open state is illustrated in order, and in FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (c), the state of being displaced from the open state to the closed state is illustrated. The states to be performed are illustrated in order.

First, with reference to FIG. 97, the displacement of the lid member 770 when displaced from the closed state to the open state will be described. As described above, the driving force is transmitted to the arm member 742 by the driving motor K.
This is done by rotating M4 in the negative direction.

In the closed state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is disposed on the back side (right side in FIG. 97 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. Therefore, the arm member 742
The first sliding groove 742b into which the protrusion 741a is inserted is disposed on the back side of the shaft hole 742a.

The shaft hole 742a, the first sliding groove 742b, and the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742 are formed on substantially the same straight line. Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 97 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a protruding to the right side surface of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed above the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the rotating member 741 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees, and the protrusion 741 is rotated.
When a is positioned below the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742
Is displaced to the lower side in the gravity direction of the shaft hole 742a (lower side in FIG. 97B) in accordance with the displacement of the projection 741a.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 97 (b)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is disposed at a position where it is rotationally displaced toward the back side of the rotating body 800. .

In this case, the position of the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is arranged on the back side with respect to the rotation axis of the lid member 770 (the center position of the rotating body 800 formed in a columnar shape). Accordingly, a rotational force is applied in a direction in which the lid member 770 is displaced from the closed state to the open state by the load of the lid member 770. As described above, the rotation member 741 is provided with the one-way clutch OW1, and the outer ring is configured to be rotatable in advance with respect to the inner ring. Therefore, the drive motor KM is driven by the load of the lid member 770.
4 can be stopped and the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated.

As shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the lid member 770 is displaced to the back side of the rotating body, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 90 degrees from the intermediate position.
That is, it is the leftmost end (left side in FIG. 97) of the displacement region of the protrusion 741a. Therefore, the rotation of the arm member 742 is restricted, and the rotation of the lid member 770 is stopped.

That is, the displacement of the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state is performed by an operation of driving the drive motor KM4 to displace it to an intermediate state and an operation of dropping the lid member 770 with a load.

As a result, when the lid member 770 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the drive motor KM
4 can be reduced to half of all the sections, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM4 can be reduced.

Further, the displacement speed from the closed state to the intermediate state can be changed to an aspect according to the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4, and the displacement speed from the intermediate state to the open state can be changed to an aspect according to the load of the lid member 770. The displacement speed from the closed state to the open state can be changed in two stages. Therefore, since the displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the displacement speed of the drive motor KM4, it is not necessary to complicate the control. As a result, control can be simplified and occurrence of control failure can be suppressed.

The displacement section where the lid member 770 follows the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4 is referred to as a first section,
A displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the load of the lid member 770 is referred to as a second section.
The reference numeral K1 is described, and the second section is described with reference numeral DK2.

Next, displacement of the lid member 770 when displaced from the open state to the closed state will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, in the opened state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is not in contact with the arm member 742.
The lid member 77 is arranged in a state of being disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 98 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a.
The 0 curved lid portion 771 is arranged on the back side of the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the rotating member 741 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees, so that the protrusion 741.
When a is positioned above the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is provided.
Is displaced downward in the gravity direction of the shaft hole 742a (lower side in FIG. 98 (b)) with the displacement of the protrusion 741a.

Accordingly, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is placed on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 98 (b)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and is rotationally displaced approximately 45 degrees upward from the state where the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is positioned on the back side of the rotating body 800. It is set as the state arrange | positioned in the made position.

The lid member 770 displaced to the closed position (the position shown in FIG. 97 (a)) is disposed in the game area (the front side of the game board 13), and the open position (the FIG. 97 (c)). The lid member 770 that is displaced to the position of () is disposed outside the game area (on the back side of the game board 13). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the game area from colliding with the rotator 800 and rotating the rotator 800. In particular, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the rotary member 800 is provided with an opening / closing member 870 that is displaced toward the game area side, so that a gaming machine flowing down the game area collides with the opening / closing member 870, The opening / closing member 870 can be prevented from being opened (projected).

In addition, since the lid member 770 is disposed outside the game area in the opened position, a space for the opening / closing member 870 to project to the game area is generated by the displacement of the lid member 770 to the opened position. Can be secured. Accordingly, the outer surface of the rotator 800 can be brought closer to the game area, and the player can easily see the opening / closing member 870 accordingly.

Furthermore, since the lid member 770 is formed to be rotatable around an axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 and is formed in a curved plate shape along the outer surface of the rotating body 800, the lid member 770 is in a closed state. A space necessary for displacement between the position (covering position) and the open position (retracted position) can be suppressed, and accordingly, a space for disposing other members can be secured. In addition, since the lid member 770 is formed to be curved in this manner, the game ball flowing down the game area is
It is possible to suppress the stopping on the lid member 770 arranged at the closed position, and to smoothly flow down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), the rotating member 741 is further rotated by approximately 90 degrees, and the protrusion 7
When 1a is displaced to the right side of the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742 of the arm member 742 is provided.
b is displaced to the back side (right side in FIG. 98 (c)) with respect to the shaft hole 742a in accordance with the displacement of the protrusion 741a.

Accordingly, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 98 (c)) with respect to the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed above the rotating body 800.

In this case, with the displacement of the lid member 770, the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is displaced to the front side with respect to the rotation axis of the lid member 770. Therefore, in the middle of the closed state from the intermediate state, the lid member 77
With a zero load, a rotational force is applied in a direction to displace the lid member 770 from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, even when driving of the drive motor KM4 is stopped, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated by the load of the lid member 770.

Therefore, since the lid member 770 can be closed by the load of the lid member 770,
The lid member 770 can be reliably closed.

Here, if the rotational displacement of the lid member 770 is displaced only by the drive motor KM4, the lid member 770 may not be stopped at a normal position when the drive stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is deviated. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the rotation direction of the rotation member 741 is one, when the stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is delayed, rotation for one rotation is required to return to the normal position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the position where the lid member 770 is stopped can be mechanically stopped using the load of the lid member 770, it is possible to prevent the stop position of the lid member 770 from shifting. it can.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force, a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force of the driving unit, and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force to the displacement member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the transmission state of the driving force by the transmission means from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member is also constant. It is displaced at a speed, and a change cannot be given to the displacement mode of the displacement member. For this reason, there is a problem in that the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

Although the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing / decreasing the drive speed of the drive means, the displacement speed in the predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in the other sections. In order to achieve the speed, a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member is arranged, and in accordance with the detection result of the sensor device, it is necessary to control to increase or decrease the output of the driving means,
Product costs and control costs increase. In addition, the structure and control become complicated, leading to a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission means (the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742)
When the one-way clutch OW1 is provided and the inner ring (first member) of the one-way clutch OW1 is displaced in one direction with respect to the outer ring (second member) of the one-way clutch OW1, rollers are engaged with the inner ring and the outer ring. When the driving force is transmitted and the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the engagement of the rollers with the inner ring and the outer ring is released, the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, and the lid member In the second section DK2 (predetermined section) of the displacement section of 770 (displacement member), the outer ring is displaced in one direction with respect to the inner ring. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the other sections. Therefore, a change can be given to the lid member 770, and the presentation effect accompanying the displacement of the lid member 770 can be enhanced.

Further, the outer ring can be advanced in one direction with respect to the inner ring regardless of the driving state of the driving motor KM4. Therefore, for example, the driving motor KM4 is driven at a constant driving speed in all the sections of the displacement section of the lid member 770. It can be driven, and there is no need to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive motor KM4 in the middle of the displacement section of the lid member 770 (that is, depending on whether the first section DK1 or the second section DK2). As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the operation reliability can be improved. Alternatively, in the second section DK2, the operation of the driving unit can be stopped, and in this case, energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, in the driving state in which the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the engagement of the rollers is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, so that the displacement member is in the stopped state (driven state). The driving force of the driving means (driving motor KM4) in such a driving state can be applied to the rotating body 8
It can be used as a driving force for driving 00. That is, the two members of the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 can be displaced by switching the drive direction of the drive means (drive motor KM4).

In addition, the lid member 770 is formed to be rotatable and is disposed at a position where its center of gravity is decentered from the center of rotation. In the second section DK2, the weight of the lid member 770 displaces the outer ring in one direction. Since it is formed so as to be able to act in the direction, the outer ring can be displaced in one direction with respect to the inner ring by utilizing the weight of the lid member 770. That is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the section of the first section DK1. As a result, a change can be given to the displacement mode of the lid member 770, and the presentation effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

Further, the transmission of the driving force is performed by the main body 741 to which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is attached.
b and the main body portion 741b, and a rotation member 741 (crank member) having a protrusion 741a (pin portion) positioned displaced from the rotation center of the main body portion 741c, and the arm member 742. The rotating member 741 is rotated by the outer ring, and the protrusion 741a
Is slid along the first sliding groove 742b, whereby the other end side (second sliding groove 742c side) of the rotating member 741 can be reciprocated. In this case, the other end side of the arm member 742 can reciprocate the lid member 770 between the open position and the closed position as the lid member 770 reciprocates. That is, the displacement direction of the lid member 770 can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive motor KM4.

Further, in this case, since the section of the second section DK can be formed in both reciprocating operations, when the cover member 770 is reciprocated, the displacement can be performed from the middle of the displacement regardless of the direction of displacement. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be increased. As a result, a change can be given to the displacement mode of the lid member 770, and the presentation effect accompanying the displacement of the lid member can be enhanced.

Next, the displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described with reference to FIG. 99 (a
) Is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 99B is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in the opened state. 99A and 99B show a state in which the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is viewed transparently.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a), when the lid member 770 is in the closed state, the rotation restricting member 780 is in a state where the protrusion 782 side is pushed downward by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP5 (
In FIG. 99A, the shaft hole 781 is rotated clockwise about the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engaging protrusion 882 is made smaller than the distance dimension L5 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L4). <L5).

Therefore, the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are not engaged, and the rotating body 800 can be rotated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), when the lid member 770 is opened, the rotation restricting member 780 includes a lid member 770 whose contact surface 783 is displaced toward the back side of the rotating body 800. The contact surface 783 is pressed downward (a state rotated counterclockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781 in FIG. 99B).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engaging protrusion 882 is made larger than the distance dimension L6 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L6). <L4).

As a result, the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted inside the engagement protrusion 882 in the rotating body 800 in a state where the engagement protrusion 882 of the left rotation portion 880 is disposed at the lowest position in the gravity direction. That is, since the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are engaged, the rotating body 8
00 cannot be rotated. In the present embodiment, the position where the rotation of the rotating body 800 is disabled (the position where the protrusion 782 is inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882) is the position where the opening / closing member 870 of the rotating body 800, which will be described later, is opened. Set to

That is, in the rotation restricting member 780 (rotation restricting means) that restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800, the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaced to the open position (second position), and the other side of the displacement member is stretched in the game area. Since the rotation of the rotator 800 is restricted when the rotator 800 is extended, the rotator 800 is rotated in a state where the opening / closing member 870 is extended, and the opening / closing member 87 is moved to another member located on the rotation locus.
It can suppress that 0 interferes. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body 800 due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

Here, the first member and the second member that are formed so as to be displaceable are provided, and the first member is disposed at a covering position that covers at least a part of the second member invisible, and at the covering position. There is also known a gaming machine that is formed so as to be displaceable between a retreat position that reduces a region that covers the second member invisible. According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by disposing the first member at the cover position and displacing the first member to the retracted position from the state in which the second member is not visible to the player. It is possible to produce an effect that the player can visually recognize.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the second member is formed to be displaceable, the second member may be displaced when the second member is exposed. For this reason, there is a problem in that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of production is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the lid member 770 (first member) can regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 (second member) in a state where the lid member 770 (first member) is displaced to the open position (retracted position). Since it is formed, such a rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and an effect of production can be ensured. That is, when performing the effect of displacing the lid member 770 to the open position and exposing the rotating body 800, the displacement of the lid member 770, which must be performed for the effect, is rotated. This is used as means for regulating the displacement of the body 800. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a mechanism for controlling the displacement of the rotating body 800 or to perform control.
The structure can be simplified.

Further, as will be described later, the outer surface of the rotator 800 is formed asymmetrically from the center of rotation (see FIG. 101). Therefore, the rotating body 800 is formed to be rotatable, and the position of the center of gravity is decentered from the center of rotation. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the rotating body 800 can be increased. That is, it is not necessary for the rotary body 800 to have a shape in which the center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and an asymmetric shape with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted. On the other hand, when the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is decentered as described above, the rotating body 800 is displaced by the gravity around the center of rotation (there is a possibility of being rotated), and thus is displaced to the closed position. In addition, the configuration in which the lid member 770 is formed so as to be able to restrict the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, whereby the player can visually recognize the rotating body 800 in an appropriate state, and can ensure the effect.

The rotating body 800 may be formed symmetrically about the axis. In this case, the rotating body 8
By forming 00 from two or more members having different specific gravities, the position of the center of gravity can be arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. For example, by forming the half surface from a metal material and forming the remaining half surface from a flexible material, the center of gravity can generally be located on the metal material side having a larger specific gravity than the flexible material.

Next, the configuration of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. FIG.
00 (a) is a front view of the rotator 800, FIG. 100 (b) is a side view of the rotator 800 in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100 (a), and FIG. It is a side view of the rotary body 800 in the arrow Cc direction view of 100 (a). 101 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 800, and FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body 800.

As shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the rotating body 800 is formed in a cylindrical shape by combining a plurality of members. The rotating body 800 includes a base plate 810 disposed in the shaft portion, a first display unit 830, a second display unit 840, a third display unit 850, and a fourth display unit 830 that are disposed around the base plate 810 and combined in an annular shape. Display unit 860, right rotation unit 89 disposed at one end in the axial direction, left rotation unit 880 disposed at the other end in the axial direction, and an opening / closing member disposed inside first display unit 830 870 mainly.

The base plate 810 has a substantially L-shaped cross section when viewed in the axial direction and a shape extending in the axial direction. The base plate 810 is formed to include a right end portion 811 and a left end portion 812 that protrude outward from both left and right end portions.

The right end portion 811 is formed to project in an annular shape from the right side (the right side in FIG. 100A) of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front. The right end portion 811 mainly includes a tip end portion 811a that partially protrudes from the protruding tip end of the right end portion 811 and a communication hole 811b in an annular inner portion.

The tip portion 811a further protrudes in the axial direction from the tip portion of the right end portion 811, and
The protruding region in the right side view (the direction view in FIG. 100C) is the engaging portion 7 of the right side plate 764.
It is set smaller than the area inside 64e. The tip portion 811a is inserted inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side surface plate 764 as described above. As a result, the base plate 810 and the right side surface plate 764 (lid member 770) are engaged. As a result, the base plate 810 can be brought into a stopped state with respect to rotational displacement of each display surface (first display unit 830, second display unit 840, third display unit 850, and fourth display unit 860) to be described later.

The communication hole 811b is an opening through which a wiring (not shown) connected to the LED base 820, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed through the side surface of the base plate 810 on the right side when viewed from the front. Thereby, wiring can be penetrated.

The left end portion 812 is formed to project in an annular shape from the left side (left side in FIG. 100A) of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front. The left end 812 is a tip 8 that protrudes from the lower semicircle of the left end 812.
12a and a communication hole 812b in an annular inner portion are mainly provided.

The distal end portion 812a further protrudes in the axial direction from the distal end portion of the left end portion 812, and
The protruding shape in the left side view (the direction view in FIG. 100B) is the lower half circle of the annular shape.

The communication hole 812b is a path for discharging the ball sent to the inside of the rotating body 800 by an opening / closing member 870 described later to the outside of the rotating body 800. The communication hole 812b is set to have an inner diameter larger than that of the sphere and substantially the same as the through hole 733a formed in the gear cover 733.

Further, the communication hole 812b is an opening connected to the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733, and the protruding distance of the left end portion 812 is set to a distance in contact with the through hole 733a. Further, a projection 733b is formed on the upper hemisphere of the end face of the through hole 733a. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 733b is set to be approximately the same as the protrusion distance of the tip portion 812a. As a result, the base plate 810 and the gear cover 733 (left transmission member 730) are engaged. As a result, the base plate 810 can be brought into a stopped state with respect to rotational displacement of each display surface (first display unit 830, second display unit 840, third display unit 850, and fourth display unit 860) to be described later.

A reverse rotation prevention member 813 is disposed on the bottom surface of the base plate 810 in a rotatable state. The reverse rotation preventing member 813 is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and a protrusion 813a inclined toward one end side.
Is formed. Further, the reverse rotation preventing member 813 is between the base plate 810 and the biasing spring SP6.
Accordingly, the protrusion 813a is always left on the front view (left side in FIG. 100 (a)).
It is in a state of being energized.

The right rotation unit 890 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side. The right rotation part 890 is formed such that the inner diameter of the inner side of the ring is larger than the size of the right end part 811 of the base plate 810. Accordingly, the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is located inside the right rotation portion 890.
Can be inserted. The right rotating portion 890 includes a shaft hole 891 penetrating in the left-right direction and the shaft hole 8.
It is mainly provided with a sliding groove 892 that is curved and opened around 91.

The shaft hole 891 is a hole into which a shaft portion 872 of an opening / closing member 870 described later is inserted.
The inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of 2. Thereby, it can suppress that the axial part 872 of the opening-and-closing member 870 displaces with respect to the 1st display part 830. FIG.

The sliding groove 892 is formed in a curved shape centered on the shaft hole 891, and the radius thereof is set to be the same as the distance between the protrusion 871 and the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870. Accordingly, the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is inserted into the sliding groove 892, whereby the protrusion 871 can be slid inside the sliding groove 892 when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced.

The left rotating portion 880 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side. The left rotating part 880 is formed so that the inner diameter of the inner side of the annular ring is larger than the size of the left end part 812 of the base plate 810. As a result, the left end 81 of the base plate 810 is placed inside the left rotating part 880.
2 can be inserted. The left rotating portion 880 mainly includes a wall portion 881 protruding in an annular shape from the inner edge portion, an engaging protrusion 882 protruding from the side wall, and a locking portion 883 in which inclined surfaces are continuously arranged on the inner edge portion. Formed in preparation.

The wall portion 881 is formed to project to the left side of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front. The wall portion 881 has a gear tooth surface 881a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the protruding tip, and a communication hole 881b that opens inward.
Is provided. The tooth surface 881a meshes with the transmission gear 881d as described above. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM4 can be transmitted to the rotating body 800.

The communication hole 881b is an opening that communicates the internal space and the external space of the rotating body 800, and can discharge a ball sent into the rotating body 800 by opening an opening / closing member 870 described later.

As described above, the engagement protrusion 882 is a protrusion with which the rotation restricting member 780 is engaged. The engagement protrusion 882 is formed to protrude from the left side surface of the left rotation part 880 when viewed from the front. In addition, two engagement protrusions 882 are formed at positions separated by a predetermined distance, and a protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 is formed so as to be insertable therebetween.

The locking portion 883 has a sawtooth cross section. The left rotation part 880 is a base plate 810.
If it arrange | positions, it will be in the state which the front-end | tip of the protrusion 813a of the reverse rotation prevention member 813 mentioned above contact | abutted to the latching | locking part 883. FIG. Accordingly, when a rotational force that rotates the left rotation portion 880 in one direction is applied, the protrusion 813a is slid along the inclined surface of the locking portion 883, and the left rotation portion 880 is moved.
However, when a rotational force that rotates the left rotation portion 880 in the other direction is applied, the surface of the locking portion 883 is caught by the protrusion 813a and rotation is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to restrict the rotating body 800 from rotating in the direction opposite to the direction rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor KM4. It is possible to suppress the rotating body from rotating backward due to a collision or the like.

Each of the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 is formed in the same curved shape, and can be formed into one annular shape by connecting the end faces thereof. In addition, the inner diameters of the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 formed into one ring are set to be approximately the same as the outer diameters of the left and right rotating units 880 and 890. As a result, the display units 830 to 860 are moved to the left and right rotating units 880 and 89.
By disposing at 0, the first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860 can be formed in one columnar shape.

Further, the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 are each drawn with characters and patterns, and rotate as the driving force is transmitted from the left rotation unit 880 as described above. The player can visually recognize the pattern.

The first display portion 830 is mainly formed by including an opening 831 opened in the curved surface, and a bearing portion 832 that opens to the shaft side and is formed to protrude in a U shape.

The opening 831 is an opening in which an opening / closing member 870 described later is disposed, and the opening / closing member 870.
It is formed in an opening having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer shape of. The bearing portion 832 is formed in a size that allows the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 to be inserted into the opened U-shaped portion. Therefore, the opening / closing member 870 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first display portion 830 by inserting the opening / closing member 870 into the opening 831 and inserting the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 into the bearing portion 832. The displacement mode of the opening / closing member 870 will be described later.

LED board 820 is an LED mounted on LED board 820 by supplying power.
Light can be emitted. The LED board 820 is attached to the back side of the base plate 810.

Next, the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG.
) Is a side view of the rotating body 800 when the opening / closing member 870 is in a closed state. FIG. 103 (b)
These are side views of the rotary body 800 when the opening / closing member 870 is in an open state. In FIG. 103, when the opening / closing member 870 overlaps with other members, the outer diameter thereof is indicated by a chain line.

The closed state of the opening / closing member 870 is that the outer peripheral surface of the opening / closing member 870 is the first display portion 830.
It is the state arrange | positioned substantially in parallel with the outer peripheral surface. On the other hand, the open state of the opening / closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged so as to intersect the outer peripheral surface of the first display unit 830.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the rotating body 800 in the closed state of the opening / closing member 870, the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 has one end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 (FIG. 103 (a)).
Then, it is located on the lower side of the shaft portion 872.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the rotating body 800 in the open state of the opening / closing member 870.
The protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is positioned on the other end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotation part 890. That is, the opening / closing member 870 is displaced by the protrusion 871 sliding inside the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890.

Next, displacement of the protrusion 871 will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (a) and 104 (b) are side views of the decoration unit 750. FIG. Note that FIG. 104A and FIG.
In b), the right side plate 764 of the box member 760 is shown in a transparent state.

FIG. 104 (a) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in a closed state and the opening / closing member 870 is in a closed state. FIG. 104B shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in an open state and the opening / closing member 870 is in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the decoration unit 750 is closed, the right lid 7
The outer edge portion 73 is in contact with the protrusion 871. When the decoration unit 750 is closed, the outer diameter L7 from the rotation shaft on the lower half surface of the right lid portion 773 is made smaller than the distance L8 from the shaft of the right rotation portion 890 to one end side of the sliding groove 892 (L7). <L8).

Further, the difference in dimension between L7 and L8 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the protrusion 871. Therefore,
In a state where the outer edge portion of the right lid portion 773 is in contact with the projection 871, the projection 871 is displaced to one end side of the sliding groove 892. As a result, the opening / closing member 870 is closed. That is, when the decoration unit 750 is closed, the opening / closing member 870 can be prevented from being displaced to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the decoration unit 750 is opened, the right lid 7
With the displacement of 73, the recess 773b formed at the outer edge is displaced. In this case, the recess 773
A protrusion 871 is inserted inside b. Thereby, the protrusion 871 can displace the sliding groove 892 to the other side. As a result, the opening / closing member 870 is opened by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP7 disposed between the shaft portion 872 and the first display portion 830.

As described above, the opening / closing member 870 can be displaced to the opened state in accordance with the displacement of the lid member 770. Therefore, there is no need to provide a driving source for driving the opening / closing member 870 in the rotating body 800, so that the rotating body 800 can be made small.

Further, the drive motor KM4 for displacing the opening / closing member 870 can also be used as a drive means for displacing the lid member 770. In this case, when the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 are displaced by the driving force of separate driving means, the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 may interfere with each other if a control failure occurs. And the lid member 770 can be mechanically coupled to synchronize their displacements, so that the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 can be synchronized.
Can be prevented from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the opening / closing member 870 is opened, the leading end side of the rotation is disposed above the winning opening 761a of the box member 760. Thereby, a ball sent from a ball sending portion 711c of a ball receiving base 710, which will be described later, can be dropped onto the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870.

In this case, the opening / closing member 870 is arranged such that the rotation tip side is above the shaft portion 872. Therefore, the sphere falling on the upper surface can be rolled to the inner side of the rotating body 800. Rotating body 80
The game ball that is rolled into the interior of 0 is rolled onto the upper surface of the base plate 810 that is disposed inside the rotating body 800. Further, since the base plate 810 is inclined downward toward the left end 812 side, the ball rolled on the upper surface of the base plate 810 rolls toward the left end 812 and rotates from the inside thereof. It can be discharged out of the body 800. That is, the inside of the rotating body 800 can be used as a ball sending path.

Further, as described above, the rotation body 800 is provided with the rotation regulating member 780 that regulates the rotation of the rotation body 800, so that the lid member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotation body 800. When performing an effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by displacing the opening / closing member 870. On the other hand, the rotating body 800 may be rotated (spinned). Therefore, the configuration in which the lid member 770 displaced to the open position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the rotating body 800 in an appropriate state. And can secure a production effect.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a rotating member that is formed so as to be rotatable and whose outer surface around the rotation axis is disposed so as to be visible to a player. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the player can visually recognize the display (symbol) on the outer peripheral surface while rotating the rotating member or stopping the rotating member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem in that the rotation member is insufficiently utilized only as a member for holding a display for the player to visually recognize on the outer surface. . In other words, the rotating member is required to hold a display that can be visually recognized by the player, and is therefore relatively large. Therefore, while the occupied space increases, portions other than the outer surface are not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 800 (rotating member) allows the internal space formed therein to communicate with the outside, and the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b formed so that the game ball can pass therethrough. Since the (communication port) is provided, the game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b. Therefore, the internal space of the rotator 800, which is a dead space, can function as a storage space for game balls or a pitching passage, and the rotator 800 can be used accordingly.

In addition, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since only the effect mode in which the player can visually recognize the display on the outer peripheral surface can be formed when the rotating member is stopped, the change in the effect mode is scarce and the effect of the effect is insufficient. There was a problem of being.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is disposed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) so as to be displaceable, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is rotated or stopped. In addition to the production mode in which the player visually recognizes the display, the production mode of displacing the opening / closing member 870 can be formed, and accordingly, the production mode can be changed to increase the production effect.

When the lid member 770 (displacement member) is displaced to the closed position (first position), the rotating body 800 (
Since a part of the outer surface of the rotating member) is formed by the opening / closing member 870, the outer shape of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and accordingly, the space required for the rotating body 800 to rotate can be reduced. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening / closing member 870 protrudes outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the player can easily recognize the displacement of the opening / closing member 870. It is possible to enhance the production effect. In addition, the rotating body 800 is rotated in a state where the opening / closing member 870 is disposed at the closed position, and when the rotation is stopped, the opening / closing member 870 is disposed (displaced) at the open position, thereby forming the outer surface of the rotating body 800. The part (opening / closing member 870) that has been visually recognized can be formed so as to protrude outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, and the interest can be enhanced.

In addition, an LED base 820 that emits light to the base plate 810 is disposed in the internal space of the rotating body 800. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 870 is set to the open position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is opened, the internal space is communicated with the outside, and the light emitted from the LED base 820 can be emitted to the outside. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 870 is set to the closed position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is closed, and light emitted from the LED base 820 can be blocked from being emitted to the outside. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to make the rotating body 800 rotatable and displace the opening / closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, each of the rotating body 800 and the opening / closing member 870 needs a driving means, and the product cost is reduced. Is bulky. In addition, when a driving unit for displacing the opening / closing member 870 is mounted on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 increases, so that it is difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating body 800.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 870 is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the lid member 770, and the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 are displaced by the same drive motor KM4. The KM 4 can also be used to rotate the rotating body 800 and to displace the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. In addition, since it is not necessary to mount driving means for displacing the opening / closing member on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be started or stopped smoothly.

Further, since the opening 831 (first communication port) and the communication hole 881b (second communication port) are formed at different positions, the opening 831 is used as an inflow port for allowing game balls to flow into the internal space from the outside, and the communication hole 881b. Can be used as an outlet from which the game ball flows out from the internal space to the outside. That is,
Even if the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is not rotated (while maintaining the stopped state), the rotating body 8
00 can be used as a game ball sending passage.

Further, the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800, and the communication hole 881b is formed on the end surface in the axial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the game ball into the internal space of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) The inflow can be easily seen by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the rotating body 800 is maintained in the stopped state.

That is, the rotating body 800 is arranged such that the outer surface is visible from the player,
Since the opening 831 (inlet) is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the inflow of the game ball. On the other hand, when the communication hole 881b is formed on the outer surface of the rotator 800, when the rotator 800 is disposed at a rotation position where the communication hole 881b is located above, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the communication hole 881b (outlet) is formed on the end surface of the rotating body 800 in the rotation axis direction, it is possible to form a state in which a game ball can flow out of the internal space regardless of the rotational position of the rotating body 800.

In addition, a displaceable opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is disposed inside the opening 831 (first communication port).
When the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the closed position (first position), the opening 831 is shielded by the opening / closing member 870, and when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position),
Since the opening 831 is opened, the inflow of game balls through the opening 831 can be switched between a shielded state and an allowed state.

Furthermore, one side of the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is pivotally supported by the rotating body 800 (rotating member) so that the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position). Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, when the opening 831 is formed as an inflow port,
The game ball flowing down the game area can be easily introduced into the internal space of the rotating body 800 using the opening / closing member 870.

In addition, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily stopped on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, for example, when a game ball inflow port is formed in the rotator 800, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily introduced into the inflow port using the opening / closing member 870. In this case, when the game ball flowing down the game area is received by the opening / closing member 870, the rotating body 800 may be rotated by the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. . Therefore, the lid member 770 displaced to the open position is the rotation restricting member 78.
The configuration in which the displacement of the rotating body 800 can be regulated by displacing 0 is particularly effective, and this makes it easy to maintain the state in which the opening / closing member 870 can be projected to a predetermined position in the game area.

The shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 is disposed on the rotational direction side of the rotating body 800. In other words, the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is positioned on the front side in the rotational direction of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) with respect to the other side. Therefore, even when the opening / closing member 870 interferes with members disposed around the rotating member when the rotating body 800 is rotated, the force generated by the interference closes the opening / closing member 870 (displaces to the closed position). ) Direction.
That is, when the rotating body 800 rotates, the opening / closing member 870 protrudes by interfering with other members (the second member).
It is possible to suppress displacement to (position). Moreover, it can suppress that the opening / closing member 870 engages with another member, and the rotation of the rotary body 800 is inhibited.

Further, the base plate 810 (fixing member) disposed in the internal space of the rotating body 800 is provided with the rotating body 8.
00 is not rotated with respect to the box member 760 (base member) that is rotatably arranged,
By rolling the game ball that has flowed into the internal space of the rotating body 800 from the opening 831 toward the communication hole 881b on the upper surface of the base plate 810, the game ball rampages in the internal space as the rotating body 800 rotates. Or it can suppress that rolling of a game ball is inhibited and it stays in internal space.

As described above, since the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 870 is restricted by the displacement of the lid member 770, the opening / closing member 870 displaced to the open state (second position) interferes with members around the rotating body 800. Can be suppressed.

As described above, the rotator 80 has the communication hole 811b through which the wiring to the LED base 820 attached to the back side of the base plate 810 is inserted, and the communication hole 881b.
It is formed on the end face opposite to the zero end face. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space that can be used for each of the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b.

That is, when electrical wiring is performed on the LED base disposed inside the rotator 800, the rotator 8
When the wiring is inserted from the outer peripheral surface of 00, the wiring is entangled by the rotation of the rotating body 800. Therefore, it is preferable to wire from the axial end surface of the rotating body. If the opening through which the game ball flows out is formed, it is difficult to secure a space through which the wiring is inserted.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the inflow port of the game ball of the rotator 800 can be the outer peripheral surface, one of the axial end surfaces of the rotator 800 is used as the outflow port of the game ball, and the other is inserted into the wiring. Since it can be used as a mouth, it is possible to easily secure a space for wiring.

As a result, the game ball can be discharged smoothly through the communication hole 881b, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line (wiring to the LED board 820) can be easily performed. Further, since the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b can be separated as much as possible, it is possible to easily suppress the interference between the game ball that rolls the internal space of the rotating body 800 to the communication hole 881b and the electrical connection line.

Next, referring to FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 7
00 will be described. 105 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700, and FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow CVI in FIG. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 40 in the retracted state.
0 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. Further, in the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 106), the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at a substantially central position in the front-rear direction of the ball holder 710.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a mode of sending a ball from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotation unit 700 will be described. FIG. 107 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700. 107 shows a state where the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first overhanging state.

As shown in FIG. 107, the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging state, and the lower displacement member 4
When the ball receiving portion 467 disposed inside the ball 40 receives the ball inside (the ball receiving operation is performed), the ball receiving portion 467 receives the ball from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 as described above. The sphere disposed inside the portion 467 is discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

The sphere discharged from the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 falls freely and falls to the sphere support 710 of the rotating unit 700 disposed on the right side in front view. As a result, a ball can be sent from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating body 800.

Next, the configuration of the ball pedestal 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. 108 (a) is a top view of the ball cradle 710, FIG. 108 (b) is a front view of the ball cradle 710, and FIG. 108 (c) is CVIIIc-CVIIIc of FIG. 108 (a). It is sectional drawing of the ball | bowl stand 710 in a line. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the ball holder 710.

As shown in FIG. 108 and FIG. 109, the ball receiving base 710 has a tray receiving part 711 formed in a box shape.
And a solenoid 712 disposed inside the dish receiving portion 711, a displacement member 713 coupled to the solenoid 712, and a cover member 714 covering the solenoid 712.

The tray receiving portion 711 includes a bottom plate 711a that forms a bottom surface, a standing portion 711b that stands on the edge of the bottom plate 711a, a ball feeding portion 711c that protrudes from a part of the outer edge of the bottom plate 711a, and a ball feeding portion 711c. And a shaft hole 711d formed so as to penetrate the standing portion 711b standing on the edge portion.

The bottom plate 711a is formed in a shape that bends downward toward the ball sending portion 711c described later. As a result, the ball sent to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a is bent (inclined) by the ball sending portion 711c.
Can be rolled to the side.

The bottom plate 711a is made of a flexible material, and the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a (FIG. 10).
8 (c) lower surface) is subjected to a texture process, and fine irregularities are formed on the surface. This
When the bottom plate 711a is molded, the ratio of thermal contraction can be made different between the top surface and the bottom surface, and the bottom plate can be easily bent. In other words, the bottom surface to which the embossing process is applied is less likely to exert a force in a direction in which the bottom plate side is bent convexly when the bottom surface is thermally contracted by the unevenness. On the other hand, since the upper surface side is formed as a flat surface, a force pulling in the horizontal direction acts when the heat shrinks, and the end portion easily changes upward (the upper surface side easily forms a concave curve). Therefore, it is easy to bend in the direction in which the sphere easily rolls when thermally contracted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a defective product when the bottom plate 711a is molded.

The standing portion 711b is located on the upper side in the gravity direction from the outer edge of the ball sending portion 711c (upper side in FIG. 108 (c)).
It is a wall part erected on the wall. The standing distance of the standing portion 711b is set larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Thereby, it can suppress that the ball | bowl sent to the upper part of the baseplate 711a falls below from the edge. In the present embodiment, the standing dimension of the standing part 711b is approximately 1.5 of the diameter of the sphere.
Set to double.

The standing portion 711b is a central standing portion 711b1 that divides the region of the bottom plate 711a into two.
Is connected to the standing portion 711b. The central standing portion 711b1 divides the upper region of the bottom plate 711a into a region where a ball is sent and the other is a region where a solenoid 712, which will be described later, is disposed.

The ball sending portion 711c is formed on the front side of the bottom plate 711a. Also, the horizontal direction (FIG. 108 (
a) The position in the left-right direction) is arranged on the right side (right side in FIG. 108) of the substantially center position of the bottom plate 711a. Further, the ball feeding portion 711c is protruded from the bottom plate and thus curved downward. Thereby, the ball sent from the bottom plate 711a can be dropped downward via the ball sending portion 711c. Note that a winning hole 761a of the lid member 770 is disposed below the ball sending part 711c (see FIG. 106), and a ball falling from the ball sending part 711c can be sent into the winning hole 761a.

A shaft portion 713a of a displacement member 713, which will be described later, is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. This
The displacement member 713 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 711d.

The solenoid 712 can displace the shaft inserted into the solenoid 712 by applying power to the piston. A transmission member 712 a is attached to the shaft of the solenoid 712. The transmission member 712a is a member that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 712 to a displacement member 713 described later, and a communication hole 712a1 is formed through the tip.

The displacement member 713 is formed in a C-shaped cross section, and has a projection 71 projecting to the outside of the C shape at one end thereof.
3b and shaft portions 713a projecting inward from the C shape at both ends.

The protrusion 713b is a protrusion inserted into the communication hole 712a1 of the solenoid 712, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the communication hole 712a1. As a result, the solenoid 7
The 12 displacements are transmitted to the displacement member 713 via the transmission member 712a.

The shaft portion 713a is a shaft that is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. By inserting the shaft portion 713a into the shaft hole 711d, the displacement member 713 can rotate around the shaft of the shaft portion 713a. That is, the displacement member 713 is driven by the displacement of the solenoid 712.

The cover member 714 is formed in an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the solenoid 712, and is disposed above the solenoid 712 disposed on the upper portion of the bottom plate 711a.
1 is fastened and fixed. Thereby, the solenoid 712 can be fixed.

Next, the sphere that falls on the sphere receiving base 710 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 (
FIG. 110A and FIG. 110B are cross-sectional views of the ball pedestal 710. 110 (a) and 110 (b) correspond to the cross section of the ball holder 710 in FIG. 108 (c).

As shown in FIG. 110, the ball sent from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 falls freely in the direction of gravity, and the rotating unit 700 side (right side of FIG. 110 (a)) by the firing operation of the ball receiver 467. ). That is, it is dropped in the lower right direction when viewed from the front with respect to the bottom plate 711a of the ball receiving base 710.

In this case, as described above, the bottom plate 711a is formed to be bent downward toward the ball feeding portion 711c, and the ball feeding portion 711c is formed on the right side with respect to the bottom plate 711a, so that the upper surface of the bottom plate 711a on which the ball falls. Can be an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the right side. Accordingly, the displacement direction of the sphere and the inclination direction of the bottom plate 711a on which the sphere falls can be made closer to parallel.

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), the sphere dropped on the bottom plate 711a moves upward (FIG. 1).
10 (b) upward direction) can be suppressed. Accordingly, a ball sent from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 to the ball receiver 710 of the rotating unit 700 is the ball receiver 71.
It can suppress falling from zero.

Furthermore, the sphere that has fallen on the bottom plate 711a can be rolled to the ball sending portion 711c side with the momentum of the drop. Therefore, the rolling time of the sphere up to the ball sending part 711c can be shortened.
As a result, a ball sent from the lower displacement member 440 to the ball receiving base 710 can be smoothly sent.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, light emission of the ball receiving base 710 will be described. FIG. 111 (a)
And (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotating unit 700 taken along line CXI-CXI in FIG. 87. In FIG. 111 (a), the decoration unit 750 is closed, and in FIG. 111 (b),
A state in which the decoration unit 750 is disposed in the open state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 111 (a), light emission to the ball receiving base 710 in a state where the decoration unit 750 is disposed in a closed state is performed by an LED base 721 disposed on the back side of the back surface base 720. .

More specifically, the light emitted from the LED 721a of the LED base 721 is converted into the lid member 77.
It is made incident on the bottom plate 711a of the ball pedestal 710 by being reflected to the back side of 0. Further, as described above, since the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a is subjected to the texture processing, the incident light can be irregularly reflected by the texture irregularities. Thereby, the entire bottom surface of the ball pedestal 710 can be made to emit light.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), in the state where the decoration unit 750 is disposed in the open state, the transparent portion 771a is formed on the lid member 770 as described above.
The LED 721a of 21 is transmitted without being reflected by the lid member 770. Since the rotator 800 is formed inside the lid member 770, the rotator 800 can be reflected by the outer peripheral surface of the rotator 800 and incident on the ball receiving base 710.

In this case, the LE of the LED base 820 arranged on the back side of the base plate 810 is rotated by rotating the third display portion 850 of the rotating body 800 toward the ball receiving base 710 (upper side in FIG. 111 (b)).
The light emitted from D821 can be reflected from the inner wall of the rotator 800 and emitted from the third display unit 850.

As described above, the inner wall of the third display unit 850 is textured, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the surface. Therefore, the third display unit 850 can easily emit light to the outside of the rotator 800 than the other display units. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the third display unit 850 on the ball receiving base 710 side.

Next, a detailed configuration of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118. First, a structure for displacing the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114.

FIG. 112 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 113 shows the upper displacement unit 90.
FIG. FIG. 114 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper displacement unit 900.
112 to 114 show a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at the retracted position (position disposed at the uppermost position with respect to the base member 910).

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the upper displacement unit 900 is disposed on the base member 910 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300 and the base member 910. A transmission member 920, a rotation member 930 that is rotatably connected to the base member 910 and displaced in accordance with the displacement of the transmission member 920, and one end that is slidably connected to the base member 410 and a rotation member 930. And an upper displacement member 940 that is displaced by being transmitted with a driving force from the rotation member 930.

The base member 910 is formed by combining two horizontally long plate members in the front view in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 911 disposed on the front side and a back base 912 disposed on the back side. A transmission member 920 and a rotation member 930 are disposed between the front base 911 and the back base 912.

The front base 911 has three sliding grooves 91 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction in FIG. 112).
1c, 911d, 911e, and a pivot pin 911b protruding to the back side of the circumferential center position,
A shaft portion 911f protruding to the front of one end side (left side in front view) of the front base and an opening 911a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side are mainly provided.

The opening 911a is an opening through which the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front base 911 is inserted to the back side. Thereby, the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front side of the front base 911 can be inserted into the back side of the front base 911.

The shaft support pins 911g and 911b are inserted through shaft holes of a transmission gear 922 and a transmission gear 923, which will be described later, and can hold the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923 rotatably. That is, the shaft support pins 911g and 911b are formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameters of the shaft holes of the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923.

The sliding groove 911c is formed penetrating in an arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft support pin 911b. The sliding groove 911c is an opening through which a shaft support pin 923a of a transmission gear 923 described later is inserted, and the radius of the arc is substantially the same as the distance from the shaft hole of the transmission gear 923 described later to the shaft support pin 923a. Is set. Thereby, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated in a state where the shaft support pin 923a is inserted into the sliding groove 911c, it is possible to suppress the collision between the shaft support pin and the inner wall of the sliding groove 911c.

The sliding grooves 911d and 911e are grooves into which shaft supporting pins 951 and 952 of the upper displacement member 940 described later are inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the outer diameter of the shaft supporting pins 951 and 952. Is done.

The sliding groove 911e is formed linearly in the longitudinal direction of the front base 911 (front view left-right direction). On the other hand, the sliding groove 911d is formed in an arc shape centered on the lower side of the front base 911. That is, the sliding groove 911e and the sliding groove 911d are formed non-parallel. Therefore, at different positions in the left-right direction, the distance dimensions between the two facing facing grooves 911e, 911d in the vertical direction are different. As a result, the inside of the sliding grooves 911e, 911d can be
When 51 and 952 are slid, the upper displacement member 940 is slid while rotating due to the difference in the distance dimension between the opposing surfaces in the vertical direction.

The shaft portion 911f is formed to protrude in a columnar shape on the front side. The shaft portion 911f can be inserted into a through-hole 931 formed at one end of a rotating member 930 described later, and can hold the rotating member 930 in a rotatable state. That is, the shaft portion 911 f is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 931 of the rotating member 930.

The back base 912 is a plate member that is attached to the back side of the front base 911 at a predetermined interval. The back base 912 is formed from a metal material. Accordingly, the base member 91
The overall rigidity of 0 can be improved. As a result, the base member 9 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle.
When the upper displacement member 940 having a relatively heavy weight is disposed on the base member 910, the base member 910 can be prevented from being twisted.

The transmission member 920 is disposed between the front base 911 and the rear base 912 facing each other. The transmission member 920 includes a transmission gear 921 coupled to the shaft of the drive motor KM5, and the transmission gear 9
The transmission gear 922 meshed with the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923 meshed with the transmission gear 922 are mainly provided.

As described above, the transmission gear 921 is coupled to the drive motor KM5 by inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front side of the front base 911 into the shaft hole. Thereby, the transmission gear 9
21 can be rotationally displaced by the driving force of the driving motor KM5.

The transmission gear 922 is meshed with the transmission gear 921 and the transmission gear 923 as described above.
Thereby, the driving force for rotation of the transmission gear 921 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 923.

The transmission gear 923 is formed with a shaft support pin 923a protruding to the front side at the outer peripheral edge portion thereof. Therefore, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated, the shaft support pin 923a is rotationally displaced around the axis of the transmission gear 923.

The rotating member 930 is mainly formed of a through-hole 931 that is formed in a long rod shape on one side and is formed in the end portion on one end side in the front-rear direction, and an opening 932 that extends in the longitudinal direction at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction. Formed in preparation.

As described above, the through-hole 931 is an opening into which the shaft portion 911f of the front base 911 is inserted. By inserting the shaft portion 911f, the rotating member 930 can be rotated with respect to the front base 911. Can be held. Further, a biasing spring SP is attached to the tip of the shaft portion 911f.
8 is disposed. Thereby, the rotating member 930 is urged in a direction in which the other end side is lifted upward with respect to the front base 911.

The opening 932 is a groove into which the shaft support pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 is inserted, and is formed so that the shaft support pin 923a can slide therein. As described above, when the transmission gear 923 is rotationally displaced to displace the support pin 923a, the support pin 923a is displaced inside the opening 932. Therefore, the rotating member 930 is arranged in a state where one end is rotatably supported.
One end is rotated about the shaft by the displacement of the shaft support pin 923a.

In addition, an annular member 933 formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness on the back side is disposed on the other end side of the rotating member 930 while being formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front.

On the front side of the annular member 933, two sliding grooves 933a that are recessed at symmetrical positions along the outer peripheral edge thereof are formed. The annular member 933 is a portion connected to an upper displacement member 940 described later, and the shaft portion 953 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside. Further, the annular member 933 and the upper displacement member 940 are rotatably connected, and the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced as the rotation member 930 is rotationally displaced.

A protrusion 961 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside the sliding groove 933a. When the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member, the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. it can.

Further, the arc axis of the sliding groove 933 a is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotation member 930. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotation member 930, the first opening portion 960 can be displaced. A detailed description of the first opening portion 960 will be described later.

In addition, a shaft portion cover 913 and a deformation restriction cover 914 formed from a plate-like body are disposed in front of one end side (rotation shaft side) of the rotation member 930. The shaft cover 913 includes a rotating member 93.
It is arrange | positioned ahead of the rotating shaft part of 0, and it is suppressed that the rotating member 930 shakes in the front-back direction. The deformation restricting cover 914 is disposed at a position separated from the rotation shaft by a predetermined distance, and the rotation member 930 can be prevented from being deformed in the front-rear direction by the weight of the upper displacement member 940 disposed on the other end side.

The upper displacement member 940 is a base body 95 connected to the front base 911 and the rotation member 930.
0, and two first opening portions 960 rotatably disposed on the back side of the base body 950,
The base body 950 is mainly provided with two second opening portions 970 rotatably disposed on the front side and a variable portion 980 disposed on one end side.

The base body 950 includes two pivot pins 951 and 952 that are formed to protrude from the back surface on one end side,
It is mainly provided with a shaft portion 953 that protrudes from the back surface on the other end side.

As described above, the shaft support pins 951 and 952 have the sliding grooves 911e and 91 of the front base 911.
It is a protrusion inserted into 1d. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 940 is driven by the rotating member 930, the shaft support pins 951 and 952 slide along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, so that the upper displacement member 940 is slid in the left-right direction. And the other end side can be rotationally displaced downward.

As described above, the shaft portion 953 is a protrusion that is inserted into the annular member 933 and connected to the rotating member 930, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the annular member 933. Thereby, the upper displacement member 940 can be rotatably connected to the rotating member 930. Therefore, the rotating member 9
When 30 is rotationally displaced about one end by the driving force of the drive motor KM5, the annular member 933 is
Due to this displacement, the driving force is transmitted to the upper displacement member 940. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d.

The first opening portion 960 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two sheets are disposed on the back side of the base body 950. The first opening 960 is rotatably supported on the other end side of the base body 950. In addition, the first opening portion 960 protrudes to the back side and the annular member 9
The projection 961 is provided inside the 33 sliding grooves 933a. Accordingly, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotation member 930 due to the displacement of the rotation member 930, the protrusion 9
61 can be slid inside the sliding groove 933a.

In this case, as described above, the curved axis of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a position different from the rotational axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member 930, so that the projection 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. Along with this, the first opening 960 pivotally supported by the base body 950 can be rotationally displaced.

The second opening portion 970 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two pieces are disposed on the front side of the base body 950. The second opening portion 970 is rotatably supported on the other end side of the base body 950. Also. The second opening 970 is formed with an engagement protrusion (not shown) that engages when the first opening 960 is displaced by a predetermined amount. Thus, as described above, when the first opening portion 960 is rotationally displaced about the shaft support portion when the upper displacement member 940 is subjected to a predetermined rotational displacement, the first opening portion 960 engages with the second opening portion 970. Thus, the second opening portion 970 can be rotationally displaced.

Next, the displacement of the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. 115 shows the upper displacement unit 9 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at the retracted position.
FIG. FIG. 116 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at the intermediate position. FIG. 117 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at the extended position.

The retraction position of the upper displacement member 940 is that the pivot pins 951 and 952 are the front base 91.
It is a position in a state where it is arranged on the other end side (right side of the front base 911 as viewed from the front) of one sliding groove 911d, 911e. Further, the overhang position means that the shaft support pins 951 and 952 have the front base 911.
The sliding grooves 911d and 911e are arranged at one end side (the left side of the front base 911 as viewed from the front). Further, the intermediate position is a position where the upper displacement member 940 is displaced to an intermediate position between the retracted position and the extended position.

115 to 117, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced with respect to the front base 911, the upper displacement member 940 changes its longitudinal direction from a substantially horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 115) to a substantially vertical direction ( 117 is rotated and displaced in the vertical direction).

Further, with the rotational displacement, the position of one end side of the upper displacement member 940 is changed to the front base 911.
Is shifted from the position of the right end of the front view to the substantially central position of the front view. That is, the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced while being slid when the rotating member 930 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor KM5 as described above.

In addition, the first opening 960 disposed in the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950 during the displacement from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 116 to the overhanging position shown in FIG. 117. Similarly, the second opening portion 970 that is displaced by engaging with the rotational displacement of the first opening portion 960 is also rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. Therefore, in the extended position, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is oriented in the vertical direction, and the first opening portion 960 and the second opening portion 970 are displaced.

In the present embodiment, the upper displacement member 940 is formed in a shape simulating a human arm (including a hand). Accordingly, the first opening 960 and the second opening 960 are displaced from the first position to the third position.
By displacing the opening portion 970, the player can visually recognize a displacement that thickens the human arm.

Next, the variable unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 (a) shows
FIG. 118B is a front view of the variable portion 980, and FIG. 118B is a rear view of the variable portion 980.

As shown in FIGS. 118A and 118B, the variable portion 980 has a shape imitating a human hand. The variable portion 980 has a main body 981 that forms a rear portion of the hand, and a main body 981. It is mainly formed with finger portions 982 to 986 that are connected to form a finger portion of the hand.

A drive motor (not shown) is arranged inside the main body 981, and a variable plate (not shown) arranged therein can be displaced in the front-rear direction (FIG. 118 (a) vertical direction). Is done.

The finger part 982 is a part corresponding to the thumb, and the base side is connected to the variable plate of the main body part 981. Thereby, the finger | toe part 982 can be displaced because a variable plate is piston-moved.

The finger portions 983 to 986 are formed mainly including a first link RB1 disposed on the base side and a second link RB2 disposed on the distal end side.

The first link RB <b> 1 is connected to the second link RB <b> 2 in a rotatable state at the distal end side, and is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981 at the base side. Therefore, when the variable plate of the main body 981 is caused to perform the piston motion, the second link RB is connected via the first link RB1 and the first link RB1.
2 can be displaced. Thereby, the finger parts 983-986 can be displaced. In the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize the operation of opening and closing the fingers of the hand by displacing the finger portions 982 to 986.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction in FIG. 43).
a, 411b, two columnar shaft support pins 411c, 411d projecting to the back side, and a curved wall portion 411e projecting in an arc shape with the shaft support pin 411d as an axis. .

The sliding grooves 411 a and 411 b have two protrusions 47 protruding from the back side of the lower displacement member 440.
2 and 473 are holes to be inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed to extend in the left-right direction. Therefore, the protrusion 47 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b.
By displacing 2,473 along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each curved in an arc shape, and upward (from the left side (FIG. 43 left) end to the right side (FIG. 43 right) end of the front base 411 (FIG. 4).
3 upward). Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at positions where the axes of the respective arcs are different, and the gap between the opposing portions in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. Can be displaced. In other words, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411 a and 411 b, the lower displacement member 44 is not applied to the lower displacement member 440 without applying a rotational driving force.
0 can be rotated with sliding.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of the transmission member 420 described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Also,
The shaft support pin 411c is formed of a metal rod-like body and is fitted on the front base 411. Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 from the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, the shaft support pin 4
It can suppress that 11c bends (breaks).

Next, referring to FIG. 119 to FIG. 121, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment.
Will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in the same direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2 has been described. However, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes the movable rack 2464 and the rack 466. It is displaced in the opposite direction by the driving force of the driving motor KM2. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment. 120 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. FIG. Note that FIG.
The figure shows a state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 2440 are viewed transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes a base member 2470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 2470, and a case member 480. A transmission mechanism 2460 that is displaceably disposed between the base member 2470 and the decorative member 4 formed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 480.
50 mainly.

The base member 2470 is a plate member that is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 that protrude from the rear surface on one end side, a standing wall 471a that stands from the edge on the other end side to the front side, A protruding wall 477 protruding in a U-shape opposite in the vertical direction from the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 120), shaft portions 474, 475 protruding from the front side, and the shaft portion 474 Shaft portions 2470a and 2470b projecting upward from 475 are mainly provided.

The shaft portion 2470a is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468a described later is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468a.

The shaft portion 2470b is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468b, which will be described later, is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468b. As will be described later, the transmission gear 246
8a and the shaft portion 2470a are arranged in a state where gear tooth surfaces engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof are engaged with each other. That is, the distance between the shaft portion 2470a and the shaft portion 2470b in the front view is determined by the transmission gear 2.
The distance is set to a distance corresponding to the radius of 468a and the transmission gear 2468b.

The transmission mechanism 2460 is disposed in front of the base member 470 and the transmission gears 461, 4.
62, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a movable rack that has a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and is slidably disposed in front of the base member 470. 2464, a transmission gear 2468a meshing with the movable rack 2464, a transmission gear 2468b meshing with the transmission gear 2468a, a rack 46 meshing with the transmission gear 2468b, and rotating to one end of the rack 466 And a ball receiving portion 467 disposed on the main body.

The movable rack 2464 is formed in a rectangular plate-like body that is rectangular when viewed from the front. It is mainly provided with.

The rack gear 2464g is meshed with a transmission gear 2468a described later. Thus, when the drive is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 and the rack 466 is displaced, the transmission gear 2468a can be rotated in accordance with the displacement.

The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are pivotally supported on the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b of the base member 2470, respectively, in a state of being engaged with each other as described above. Thereby, the transmission gear 2
When 468a is rotated, the transmission gear 2468b is rotated. Further, the transmission gear 2468b
Is engaged with the rack gear 466a of the rack 466, and when the transmission gear 2468b is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced.

That is, the rack 466 can be driven by the driving force of the driving motor KM4. Note that the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are partially disposed in positions shifted in the front-rear direction, so that the transmission gear 2468a is prevented from colliding with the rack 466 and the transmission gear 2468b is prevented from colliding with the movable rack 2464.

Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 2440 will be described with reference to FIG. 121.
These are front views of the lower displacement member 2440. In FIG. 121, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 2440 are shown in a transparent state, as in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 121, electric power is applied to the drive motor KM2, and the transmission mechanism 24 described above.
When the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the firing position by 60, the movable rack 464 and the rack 46 are moved.
6 are displaced in different directions.

More specifically, when the drive motor KM4 is rotated, the movable rack 464 is displaced to the other end side (the left side in FIG. 121) of the lower displacement member 440. With this displacement, the transmission gear 24
68a and 2468b are rotated, and the rack 466 is displaced to one end side (the right side in FIG. 3). Thereby, the ball receiver 467 can be displaced to the third position.

Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component that is opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 2440 can be reduced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 2440 due to the change in the center of gravity position can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 122 to 127, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment.
Will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball receiving portion 467 is slid by the rack and pinion mechanism has been described. However, in the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slid by the link mechanism. In addition, in the same part as each said embodiment,
The same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. FIG. 122 (a) shows a lower displacement member 344 in the third embodiment.
FIG. 122B is a rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 3440, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. 125 (a) and 91 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG.

125A shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 is seen transparently, and in FIG. 125B, the decorative member 450 and the front case 3481 of the lower displacement member 3440 are seen transparently. The state is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment includes a base member 3470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 3470, the case member 480 and the base. A transmission mechanism 3460 that is displaceably disposed between the member 3470 and the decorative member 45 formed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 480.
0 is mainly provided.

The base member 3470 is a plate member that is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 that protrude from the back surface on one end side, a standing wall 471a that stands from the edge on the other end side to the front side, A sliding wall 3470c formed continuously from the base end side of the standing wall 471a and standing at the lower edge of the base member 3470, and an upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (FIG. 122 (a) left-right direction) A projecting wall 477 that protrudes in a U-shape that is opposite in the vertical direction from the front side to the front side, and an opening 479 that is recessed while extending from one end side to the other end side in the central portion of the base member 470 in the vertical direction. It is formed.

The sliding wall 3470c is a wall portion that comes into contact with the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 and regulates the position (mode) of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, it is formed to project to a position below the ball receiving portion 467. Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held with the opening of the U-shaped portion facing upward.

The sliding wall 3470c is a recess 3470 that is recessed below the end on the side of the standing wall 471a.
c1 is formed. The concave portion 3470c1 is a groove that receives the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 therein. Thereby, when the ball receiving portion 467 is slid to the standing portion side by the transmission mechanism 3460 described later, the ball receiving portion 467 can be received in the recess and the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotated. As a result, it is possible to cause the ball receiving portion 467 to perform a firing operation (an operation to discharge the sphere held inside the U shape to the outside of the lower displacement member 3440).

The transmission mechanism 3460 includes a drive motor KM2 attached to a front case 3480 described later,
A first link member 3468 that is rotatably connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, a second link member 3469 that is rotatably connected to the first link member 3468, and the second link member The ball receiving portion 467 connected to one end side of 3469 is mainly provided.

The first link member 3468 is formed of a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body, and has a shaft hole 3468b penetratingly formed at one end side, a connection hole 3468a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and a bulge to the other end side. It is mainly provided with a load portion 3468c to be formed.

The shaft hole 3468b is a through hole into which a rotation shaft 3469a of a second link member 3469 described later is inserted, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotation shaft 3469a.

The connection hole 3468a is a hole that is fastened to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 as described above, and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. The shaft of the drive motor KM2 is fitted into the coupling hole 3468a and fastened, whereby the first link member 3468 is connected to the drive motor KM.
It can be rotated with a driving force of 2.

The load portion 3468c is formed to bulge to the other end side with respect to the connection hole 3468a. Load section 3
46c is a member for applying a load for positioning the center of gravity of the first link member 3468 on the other end side of the connection hole 3468a, and is formed to bulge outward from the one end side.

The second link member 3469 is formed in a rectangular horizontally long state, and the first link member 34.
68 on the back side. The second link member 3469 includes a rotating shaft 3469a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the other end side toward the front, and a through hole 3469b that is formed through the one end side in the front-rear direction.
And is mainly provided.

As described above, the rotation shaft 3469a is inserted into the shaft hole 3468b of the first link member 3468. Thereby, the 1st link member 3468 and the 2nd link member 3469 can be connected in the state which can be rotated.

The through hole 3469 b is an opening for connecting the ball receiving portion 467 to the second link member 3469. Further, the through hole 3469b is formed smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the shaft hole 467b and the through hole 3469b of the ball receiving portion 467 are coaxially arranged, and a screw having a head larger than the width in the short direction of the opening 469 is opened from the back side of the base member 3470 and the shaft hole 467b. Is inserted into the through-hole 3469b and fastened to the ball receiving portion 4
67 is connected to the second link member in a rotatable state.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and the base member 47
A front case 3481 disposed on the front side of 0 and a back case 482 disposed on the back side are mainly provided.

The front case 3481 is formed in a rectangular horizontally long plate shape when viewed from the front, has an opening 3481d that passes through a position facing the drive motor KM2, and a bottom wall portion 481b that protrudes from the lower end surface on the back side.
And a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower edge portion.

The opening 3481d is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM2 disposed on the front side of the front case 3481 is inserted on the back side, and has an outer diameter larger than the shaft of the drive motor KM2. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM2 disposed on the front side of the front case 3481 can be transmitted to the first link member 3468 disposed on the back side.

Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 3440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, and FIG.
b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position. FIG. 127A is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the third position, and FIG. 127B is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position.

126A to 127B, the transition state of the lower displacement member 440 is illustrated in order. FIG. 126 (a) and FIG. 126 (b) or FIG. 127 (a) and FIG.
FIG. 7B shows a state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 3440 are viewed transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are in the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position (FIG. 126 (a) left-right direction).
Is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base member 3470 (FIG. 126 (a) left-right direction), and the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on one end side (left side in FIG. 126 (a)) of the base member 3470. Thereby, the 2nd link member 3469 is arrange | positioned at the one end side. As a result, the ball receiver 467 is disposed at the first position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), when the drive motor KM2 is rotated from the state of the first position and the first link member 3468 is rotationally displaced, one end side of the first link member 3468 is the base member 3470. Is displaced with respect to. Thereby, the 2nd link member 3469 connected to the one end side of the 1st link member 3468 is displaced. In this case, the second link member 346
9 is connected to the ball receiving portion 467 and is slidable along the opening 479 of the base member 3470, so that one end side of the second link member 3469 is pushed out to the other end side of the base member 3470. . As a result, the ball receiving portion 46 connected to the other end side of the second link member 3469.
7 can be displaced to the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the drive motor KM2 is further rotationally displaced from the second position, and the first link member 3468 is rotated approximately 180 degrees from the first position. The connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is placed on the other end side of the base member 3470 with respect to the rotation axis. Therefore, the second link member 34
One end side of 69 is further pushed out to the other end side of the base member 3470, and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the third position.

In this case, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed inside the concave portion 3470c1, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated by the urging spring SP2 and launched.

Further, the load portion 3468 c of the first link member 3468 is displaced to one end side of the base member 3470. Thereby, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced with respect to the base member, it is possible to suppress the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 3440 from being changed. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component that is opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 3440 can be reduced by the displacement of the load portion 3468c. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the change in the center of gravity position can be suppressed.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the ball receiving portion 467 can be retracted to the second position and the first position by continuing the rotation of the first link member 3468. Therefore, it is not necessary to switch the control of the drive motor KM2, and the displacement to the second position or the first position can be performed quickly.

Accordingly, when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 changes, so that the lower displacement member 3440 is easily rattled. Thus, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed by quickly bringing the center of gravity position closer to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440.

Further, by immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, the wobbling of the lower displacement member 3440 due to the reaction of the discharging operation when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 can be suppressed.

That is, when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the discharged game ball, and the lower displacement member 3440 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force that causes the base member 470 to be displaced downward by a reaction caused by the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is applied, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is discharged from the lower displacement member 3440. be able to.

Next, referring to FIGS. 128 to 130, the lower displacement unit 44 in the fourth embodiment.
00 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state is formed so as to be able to perform the firing operation has been described. However, the lower displacement unit 440 in the fourth embodiment is described.
When 0, the firing operation of the lower displacement member 440 disposed in the retracted state is restricted. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 128, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown in a transparent state, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. FIG. 128 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position.

As shown in FIG. 128, the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment is an opening that is opened in the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 between the standing wall 471a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481. 4471b is formed.

In the opening 4471b, a distal end portion 4411g1 of an engagement wall 4411g described later is inserted. That is, the opening 4471b is larger than the tip portion 4411g1.

The front base 411 is formed with an engagement wall 4411g formed in a substantially L shape that is continuous with the bottom surface of the recovery port 411f.

The engagement wall 4411g can restrict the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position (perform a firing operation) by inserting the tip end portion 4411g1 bent substantially in an L shape into the opening 4471b. . That is, the tip position of the tip portion 4411g1 is set to be substantially the same as the height of the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the lower displacement member 440 positioned in the retracted state.

Next, a state in which each member of the lower displacement unit 4400 is displaced will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. 129 and 130 are front views of the lower displacement unit 4400. FIG. 129 and 130 show the state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are seen transparently as in FIG.
One bottom wall portion 481b is illustrated by a chain line.

FIG. 129 shows a state where the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the third position. FIG. 130 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position.

As shown in FIG. 129, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 comes into contact with the upper surface of the tip end portion 4411g1 of the engaging wall 4411g, thereby forming the recess 481.
Intrusion into b1 or the opening 4471b is restricted. As a result, the rotation of the ball receiver 467 is restricted.

Therefore, when the ball receiving unit 467 is caused to perform a payout operation in order to discharge the ball sent onto the trajectory region of the ball receiving unit 467 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving unit 467 at the third position. Will rotate,
It is possible to prevent the game ball held inside the ball receiving portion 467 from being discharged.

That is, as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed when the game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) are discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467. Can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track area.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 130, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the position of the first overhanging state (the position that is not the retracted position), the lower displacement member 440 is displaced relative to the base member 470. Therefore, the opening 4471b of the lower displacement member 440 and the engagement wall 4411g are separated from each other. Therefore, in the first overhanging state, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position to perform the firing operation.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, when the game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) are discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed. It is easy to maintain the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the specified number of game balls by suppressing the change, while engaging when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first and second extended positions. The wall 4411g has an opening 4471b.
Since the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the leg portion 467a is separated from the inner space of the leg portion 467a.
Is engaged with the opening 4471b, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed, and a prescribed number of game balls can be easily discharged from the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131 to FIG. 135, the distribution unit 55 in the fifth embodiment.
00 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the distribution member 540 rotates to form the storage state and the restriction state has been described, but the distribution member 540 in the fifth embodiment slides to form the storage state and the restriction state. To do. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. FIG. 131 (a) is a top view of the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 131 (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 5500.
132 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 5500, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 5500. FIG. 134 shows the CXXXIV-C of FIG. 131 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit 5500 in a XXXIV line. In FIG. 134, the outer shape of the sorting member 540 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the distribution unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment includes a base plate 5520 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a base plate 5520 that is attached to the front side of the base plate 5520 and is opposed to the base plate 5520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow paths through which balls can flow, and a distribution member 5540 that is slidably attached to the back side of the base plate 5520
And an extended path member 530 that is attached to the end surface of the base plate 5520 and extends a flow path of a sphere formed between the base plate 5520 and the path forming member 510 facing each other.

The base plate 5520 includes two columnar shaft portions 5526 projecting to the back side, a first opening 5521 and a second opening 5522 penetratingly formed in a rectangular shape, and a U-shaped cross section where the upper end side opens to the side surface of the upper end. It is formed mainly including a rolling part 525 that is formed in a shape and extends in the left-right direction, and a locking part 524 that protrudes like a bowl on the back side.

The shaft portion 5526 is formed so as to protrude two on the back side, and is inserted into two sliding grooves 5546 described later.

The first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are a restriction plate 54 of a distribution member 5540 described later.
1 and an opening through which the storage plate 5542 is inserted, and is formed in an opening having a width larger than the thicknesses of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. Further, since the distribution member 5540 is slidably attached to the base plate 5520, the first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are larger in the sliding direction of the distribution member 5540 than the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. An opening is formed.

The distribution member 5540 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, one of which is long, and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 5540 is a restriction plate 55 that protrudes in a plate shape on the front side.
41, the storage plate 5542, a sliding groove 5546 formed in a long hole in substantially the same direction as the extending direction of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542, and a locking portion 544 formed in a bowl shape on the back side.
And is mainly provided.

The restricting plate 5541 is connected to the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path K via the first opening 5521.
A game ball that is disposed at a connection portion with R2 and flows down the first pitching path KR1 is the second pitching path K.
It is a plate member that restricts the flow into R2, and the distance protruding from the first opening 5521 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the restriction plate 5541 is formed in a straight line when viewed from the front, and the extending direction thereof is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540. Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement region of the restriction plate 5541 can be minimized. as a result,
The opening area of the first opening 5521 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The storage plate 5542 is a plate member that is disposed on the second pitching path KR2 through the second opening 5522, and that flows the game balls flowing down the second pitching path KR2 to the upstream side of the storage plate 5542,
The distance protruding from the second opening 5522 is set to a distance larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the storage plate 5542 is formed in a straight line when viewed from the front, and the extending direction thereof is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540. Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement region of the storage plate 5542 can be minimized. as a result,
The opening area of the second opening 5522 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The sliding groove 5546 is a long hole that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The sliding groove 5546 has the shaft portion 5526 of the base plate 5520 inserted therein. Therefore, the shaft portion 5526 is connected to the sliding groove 55.
In addition to being inserted into 46, a sorting member 5540 can be held in a slidable displacement state with respect to the base plate 5520 by fastening a screw or the like to the tip of the shaft portion 5526 from the back side.

The sliding groove 5546 is formed in two places, and the respective longitudinal directions are formed in parallel. Thereby, the distribution member 5540 can be slid and displaced while suppressing the rotational displacement of the distribution member 5540.

Next, the displacement of the sorting member 5540 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 135
(A) and FIG. 135 (b) show the distribution unit 550 in the range CXXXV of FIG.
FIG. In FIG. 135 (a), a state where the distribution member 5540 is disposed at the storage position is illustrated, and in FIG. 135 (b), a state where the distribution member 5540 is disposed at the restriction position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 135 (a), in a state where the distribution member 5540 is disposed at the restriction position, the storage plate 5542 is disposed in the third pitching path KR3 shape, and the restriction plate 5541 is disposed on the back side of the route forming member 510. It arrange | positions inside the recessed part 518 formed in a wall.

In this case, the distance L9 between the tip of the storage plate 5542 that protrudes to the inside of the third pitching path KR3 and the inner wall of the third pitching path that faces the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the balls sent from the upstream of the third pitching path KR3 (first pitching path KR1)
42 is stopped upstream of 42.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), in the state in which the sorting member 5540 is disposed at the restriction position, the restriction plate 5541 is disposed at the connection portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the third pitching path KR3. The restriction plate 5541 is disposed at the connecting portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the third pitching path KR3, and the storage plate 5542 is the recess 5 formed in the wall on the back side of the path forming member 510.
19 is disposed inside.

In this case, the distance dimension L10 from the end of the restricting plate 5541 protruding to the inside of the first pitching path KR1 to the inner wall of the entrance of the third pitching path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first pitching route KR1 collides with the regulation plate 5541 and is sent to the second pitching route KR2.

That is, by switching the sorting member 5540 between the restriction position and the storage position, a ball that is sent on the first pitching path KR1 is sent to the third pitching path KR3 and stopped on the third pitching path KR3; Spheres flowing down the first throwing path KR1 cannot be flown into the third throwing path KR3,
It is possible to form a state where the ball is sent to the second pitching route KR2.

Therefore, by sliding and displacing one sorting member 5540, the flow path of the sphere can be reliably switched to either one when the flow path is divided into two flow paths.

Further, the restriction plate 5541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) or the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path),
It is an inner wall on the extension line in the flow-down direction at the downstream end of the first pitching path KR1. Therefore, the restriction plate 5541 can be protruded at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first pitching route KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the restriction plate 5541 to the flow-down passage or the third pitching path KR3 (first branch passage) until the game balls can be distributed. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the distribution destination by the restriction plate 5541.

Further, the restricting plate 5541 (distribution means) is projected to the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path), thereby allowing the game balls flowing down the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) to pass through the second pitching path ( Since the projecting direction of the restriction plate 5541 is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second pitching path KR2, the game ball flowing down the first pitching path KR1 is projected. If the game ball is brought into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of
It can be pushed into the pitching route KR. As a result, the distribution to the second pitching route KR2 can be performed more reliably.

Next, referring to FIG. 136 to FIG. 140, the rotation unit 670 in the sixth embodiment.
0 will be described. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the load gear 731e is connected to drive the rotating body 800 and the operation of the rotating body 800 is restricted by inertial force. The gear 731e is removed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138. 136 is a front view of a rotating unit 6700 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating unit 6700. FIG. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 6500.

As shown in FIGS. 136 to 138, the rotating unit 6700 includes a rotating body 8 that rotates and displaces.
Decoration unit 6750 including 00, a ball receiving base 710 disposed above the decoration unit 6750 in the gravity direction, a back base 720 disposed on the back side of the ball receiving base 710 and the decoration unit 6750, and a decoration unit 6750. Left transmission member 7 disposed on the left side of the front view
30 and a crank cover 743 disposed on the right side of the decorative unit 6750 when viewed from the front.

The decoration unit 6750 is a box member 760 formed in a box shape whose upper side in the gravity direction is opened.
And a rotating body 800 that is rotatably disposed inside the box member.
That is, in the first embodiment, the decoration unit 750 is formed with the rotating body 800 disposed inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770, but in the sixth embodiment, the decoration unit 750 is formed with the lid member 770 removed. The

The left transmission member 730 is attached to the drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side surface (left side in FIG. 136) of the decoration unit 750, the transmission member 6731 that transmits the drive force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. A motor base 732, a gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 6731, and a ball path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and formed with a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the opposite side of the gear cover 733 are mainly used. Formed in preparation.

The transmission member 6731 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 6731b meshed with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshed with the transmission gear 6731b, and the transmission gear 731c. And a transmission gear 731d disposed adjacent to each other and coaxially by a shaft 735.

The transmission gear 6731b is a gear that transmits driving force to the transmission gear 731c. The first
In the embodiment, the one-way clutch OW1 is attached inside the transmission gear 731b. However, the one-way clutch OW1 is detached from the transmission gear 6731b in the sixth embodiment. Further, since the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d are the same as those in the first embodiment,
Detailed description thereof is omitted.

Therefore, when driving force in one direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, rotational driving force can be transmitted to the shaft 735, and when driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is transmitted. As a result, the outer ring slides (idles), and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted.

Next, the rotation of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. FIGS. 139 (a) to 139 (c) are side views of the decoration unit 6750 in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (c) are views in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. It is a side view of the decoration unit 6750 in FIG.

139 and 140 show a state where the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is viewed transparently. Further, in FIGS. 139 (a) to 139 (c), the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is shown.
A mode in which the second section DK2 is displaced is illustrated in order, and in FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (c), a mode in which the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 displaces the first section DK1 is illustrated in order.

As shown in FIG. 139, the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced clockwise (clockwise) when viewed from the left (viewed in FIG. 139) when a driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4.

The rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically around the rotation axis as described above, and the center of gravity G is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated from a state where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140 (a) is arranged above the rotating shaft, and the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140 (b) is displaced to a position substantially horizontal to the rotating shaft. When starting, a force that rotates in the rotational direction is applied by the load.

Therefore, the engagement of the roller interposed between the outer ring and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 arranged in the transmission gear 731c is released, and the outer ring (rotating body 800 side) precedes the inner ring (drive motor side). And is in a state of being driven. That is, in the second section, the rotation speed of the rotating body 800 can be rotated faster than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4.

Note that the rotating body 800 that rotates the second section DK2 with the load is shown in FIG.
The center of gravity G shown in FIG. 9C is rotated to a position located below the rotation axis.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the first section DK1, the load of the rotating body 800 acts in the direction opposite to the rotating direction. Therefore, the rotator 800 is rotated according to the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the first section DK1. As a result, a change can be given to the displacement mode of the rotator 800 and the effect of following the displacement of the rotator 800 can be enhanced.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. In the first embodiment described above, the case has been described in which the lid member 770 causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to precede the inner ring by its own weight (that is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 is increased). The displacement member 7710 in the embodiment uses the weight of the game ball to cause the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to precede the inner ring (ie, increase the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

141 and 142 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 in the seventh embodiment. In FIG. 141, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed at the raised position is shown in FIG.
Then, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed at the lowered position is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the displacement unit 7700 transmits a displacement member 7710 formed so as to be slidable and a rotational driving force of a driving means (not shown, for example, an electric motor) to the displacement member 7710. And a load gear 7730 that is rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the displacement member 7710.

The displacement member 7710 is a member that is supported so as to be linearly displaceable along a virtual line L1 by a support mechanism (not shown), and a driven pin 7711 that protrudes from a side surface of the displacement member 7710.
And a rack gear 7712 carved along the imaginary line L1 on the lower surface of the displacement member 7710, and a ball receiving member 7713 rotatably supported at the tip of the displacement member 7710.

The imaginary line L1 is set as a straight line that inclines downward from the ascending position shown in FIG. 141 toward the descending position shown in FIG. That is, in the raised position, the displacement member 7710 is positioned above the gravity direction than the lowered position.

The driven pin 7711 has a driving groove 772 in the arm member 7723 of the transmission member 7720.
This is a member that is slidably inserted into 3b and is formed as a cylindrical body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the drive groove 7723b. A load gear 7730 is engaged with the rack gear 7712, and the load gear 7730 is rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the displacement member 7710.

The ball receiving member 7713 is a member for holding the game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, and is rotated about the rotation shaft 7713a, so that the standing state shown in FIG. 141 and the tilted state shown in FIG. 142 are obtained. It can be formed. In the standing state, one end side protrudes from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, so that the game ball can be held (see FIG. 143). On the other hand, in the tilted state, one end side is positioned below the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, so that the game ball can be discharged from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 7713 is maintained in an upright state by an urging force acting from an urging spring (not shown) (for example, a torsion spring). An engagement pin 7740 is fixed on the track of the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713). When the displacement member 7710 is slid to the lowered position, the engagement pin is connected to the other end of the ball receiving member 7713. When 7740 is engaged, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated to be in a tilted state. On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is slid to the raised position, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring,
Return to the tilted state.

The transmission member 7720 is provided so as to project from a disk-shaped rotation member 7721 that is rotated by the above-described driving means (not shown), and from the axial end surface of the rotation member 7721, and the rotation member 77.
A cylindrical drive pin 7722 that is located eccentrically from the rotation center of the drive shaft 21, and its drive pin 772.
Arm member 77 in which a driven groove 7723a through which 2 is slidably inserted into one end side is formed is formed.
23 mainly.

A one-way clutch OW1 is interposed between the rotating member 7721 and the driving means. More specifically, in the one-way clutch OW1, when the inner ring is connected to the driving means, the outer ring is connected to the rotation member 7721, and the inner ring is rotationally driven in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) by the driving means, When the rotational force is transmitted to the outer ring (that is, the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A), the inner ring is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow A (counterclockwise in FIG. 141) by the driving means. The power transmission to the outer ring (rotating member 7721) is cut off.

The arm member 7723 has a driving groove 77 into which a driven pin 7711 of a displacement member 7710 is slidably inserted on the other end side opposite to the one end side where the driven groove 7723a is opened.
23b is formed, and between the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b (
The intermediate portion is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft 7723c.

Note that the drive pin 7722 is formed as a cylindrical body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the driven groove 7723a. Further, the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b are formed by the arm member 7.
723 is formed as a linear groove along the longitudinal direction of 723.

According to the displacement unit 7700 formed as described above, the displacement member 7710 is shown in FIG.
When the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the state where it is disposed at the raised position shown in FIG. 14, the driving pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in FIG. 141 about the rotation shaft 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates clockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in a direction to push down the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slid along the imaginary line L1. Is disposed at the lowered position shown in FIG.

On the other hand, from the state where the displacement member 7710 is disposed at the lowered position shown in FIG.
When 721 is further rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), the drive pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 141 about the rotation shaft 7723c. To be rotated. As the arm member 7723 rotates counterclockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in a direction to push up the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slid along the imaginary line L1. 141 is located at the raised position.

Here, like the load gear 731e in the first embodiment, the load gear 7730 is formed so as to generate a predetermined amount of resistance when rotating. Thereby, the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723, and the rotation member 7721 is moved in the direction of arrow A (FIG. 141).
By rotating the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 ahead of the inner ring in one direction (arrow A direction). That is, in a state where the game ball is not held, it is possible to suppress an increase in the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when moving from the raised position to the lowered position.

That is, the rotating member 7721 is moved in the direction of arrow A (FIGS. 141 and 1) by the rotational driving force of the driving means.
42), the displacement member 7710 is reciprocally displaced between the raised position and the lowered position at a slide speed corresponding to the rotational drive speed of the rotational drive means (slide displacement).
Is done.

FIGS. 143 and 144 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 when a game ball is held on the displacement member 7710. In FIG. 143, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed at the raised position, and in FIG. 144, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed at the lowered position.
Each is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the displacement member 7710 is formed on its upper surface so as to be able to hold a game ball. In other words, in this embodiment, the displacement unit 7700 is disposed in the game area where the game ball flows down, and the game ball that flows down is formed so that the displacement member 7710 can receive on the upper surface thereof. In FIG. 143, the four game balls indicated by the symbol T are the displacement members 7.
The state held on the upper surface of 710 is illustrated.

In this case, in a state where the displacement member 7710 holds the game ball, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole is increased (heavy) by the weight of the game ball to exceed the resistance associated with the rotation of the load gear 7730. Can be made. That is, the weight of the entire displacement member 7710 (the weight including the game ball) is applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 143), whereby the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1. Can precede the inner ring in one direction (arrow A direction). As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when moving from the raised position to the lowered position can be made faster than the displacement speed when the game ball is not held (see FIG. 141).

Further, the weight of the entire displacement member 7710 can be varied according to the number of game balls held. Thereby, not only whether or not the game ball is held on the displacement member 7710, but also the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be varied (changed) depending on the number of game balls held. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

As described above, the ball receiving member 7713 is disposed at the distal end (the end portion on the downward inclined side) of the displacement member 7710. Therefore, when the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the displacement member 7710 is moved from the game ball.
The force applied to can be made to act as a force for sliding displacement toward the lowered position. That is, this force can be applied to the direction in which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 precedes the inner ring in one direction (arrow A direction) via the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721.

As a result, the game ball flowing down is moved to the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface or the ball receiving member 771).
When 3) is received, the displacement speed of the slide displacement in the direction toward the lowered position of the displacement member 7710 can be further increased by using the kinetic energy of the game ball.

In this case, the flowing game balls have different flow directions and flow speeds. for that reason,
The force (the magnitude of the kinetic energy) applied to the displacement member 7710 can be made different according to the difference in the flow-down state (flow direction and flow speed) of the game ball to be received. Thereby, not only whether or not the game ball is held by the displacement member 7710 and the number of game balls held,
The displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 is changed (changed) even in accordance with the flow-down state of the game ball.
be able to. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

In the seventh embodiment, since the rotation direction of the rotation member 7721 is one direction, there is no need to switch the drive direction of the drive means. In other words, the displacement member 7710 can be reciprocally displaced by continuously rotating the rotating means in one direction. Therefore, the time for switching the driving direction of the driving means can be eliminated. As a result, the displacement member 7710 can be immediately displaced by the amount that does not require switching of the driving means.

In this case, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotationally displaced, and due to a reaction when the game ball received by the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) is dropped. Shaking of the displacement member 7710 can be suppressed.

That is, when a game ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), the load of the displacement member 7710 is reduced by the amount of the dropped game ball, and the displacement member 7710 is likely to be displaced upward by reaction. However, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiver 77
By the reaction caused by the displacement of 13, a force for displacing the displacement member 7710 can be applied to cancel the reaction when the ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710.

The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball moving along the gravity direction on the front surface (front surface) of the game board 13, but also includes a game ball moving in a direction different from the gravity direction. As a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, for example, a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity by colliding with a nail, a tulip, an accessory, etc. Thus, a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

Here, in the present embodiment, by providing the load gear 7730, when the displacement member 7710 does not hold the game ball (see FIG. 141), the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced toward the lowered position. The outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is unidirectional with respect to the inner ring (arrow A
Direction) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 does not increase).

On the other hand, when the load gear 7730 is omitted or the resistance of the load gear 7730 is set to a small value and the displacement member 7710 is slid to the lowered position, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is It may be configured to advance in one direction (the direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 increases). That is, only the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 is applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotation member 7721 is moved in the direction of arrow A (FIG. 1).
Even when it is rotated clockwise (41), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 may precede the inner ring.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148, an upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment, a rotation operation unit 8650 is disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, with respect to the overall configuration of the rotary operation unit 8650 according to the eighth embodiment, FIG.
Will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation operation unit 8650. FIG.
7 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line CXLVII-CXLVII in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, the rotation operation unit 8650 is disposed in the internal space of the upper plate 8017 of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 described later protrudes outward from the upper plate 8017. It is arranged in the state.

The rotation operation unit 8650 includes a drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8651 connected to the shaft portion of the drive motor KM6, and a transmission gear 86 engaged with the outer peripheral surface of the transmission gear 8651.
52, a shaft portion 8653 fitted in the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8852, a one-way clutch OW1 in which the inner ring is fitted on the shaft portion 8653, and a rotation operation portion 8654 in which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted. And is mainly provided.

Transmission gear 8651 is coupled to the shaft of drive motor KM6. Therefore, the drive motor KM6
When the rotational driving force is applied to the transmission gear 8651, the transmission gear 8651 can be rotated. As mentioned above,
The transmission gear 8651 is disposed in a state where the transmission gear 8852 is engaged. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM6, the transmission gear 865 is transmitted via the transmission gear 8651.
2 can be rotated.

The shaft portion 8653 is a rod member formed in a columnar shape, and its axial length is the rotation operation portion 86.
54 is formed longer than the width dimension in the left-right direction. As described above, one of the shaft portions 8653 is fitted in the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8852, and the other is inserted into the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. As a result, the driving force when the transmission gear 8852 is rotated can be transmitted to the one-way clutch OW1.

As described above, the one-way clutch OW1 is formed by the inner ring, the outer ring, and the roller engaged between them. When the inner ring is rotated in one direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be transmitted to the outer ring and the inner ring is moved in the other direction. When rotated, the rotation of the inner ring can be made non-transmitted to the outer ring.

The rotation operation unit 8654 is formed in an annular shape, and is disposed in a state in which a part of the outer peripheral surface protrudes from the upper plate 8017. Further, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted in the inner circle of the rotation operation unit 8654. That is, the inward tilt of the rotation operation unit 8654 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the one-way clutch OW1. Therefore, rotation is transmitted to the rotation operation unit 8654 by rotating the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1.

As a result, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in one direction, the rotation is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 via the transmission gears 8651 and 8852 and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1, and the rotation operation unit 8654. Is rotated. On the other hand, the drive motor KM6
Is driven and rotated in the other direction, the inner ring and the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 are not transmitted, and the transmission of the rotational drive to the rotation operation unit 8654 is cut off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, a case where the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654 will be described. FIG. 148 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10. Note that the cross section of FIG. 148 is shown in FIG.
And corresponding.

As described above, the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates the rotation operation unit 8654 by rotating the drive motor KM6, rotating the rotation operation unit 8654, and non-rotating the rotation of the drive motor KM6. A mode in which the displacement is stopped can be formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, the drive motor KM6 is rotated in one direction, and the rotation operation unit 8 is rotated.
When the player operates the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 to generate a rotational force in the same direction as the rotation A direction when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 8654, the one-way clutch O
The outer peripheral surface of W1 and the rotation operation unit 8654 are rotated in advance. That is, the rotation operation unit 865
4 can be operated by a player's operation at a rotation speed faster than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM6.

Further, when the rotation operation unit 8654 is not rotated (the drive motor KM6 is not rotated), the player applies a driving force to the rotation operation unit 8654 in the rotation A direction so that the rotation operation unit 8654 is rotationally displaced. be able to.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the rotation operation unit 8654 not only forms a non-rotation or rotation state by driving the drive motor KM6, but also the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates from the stopped state by the player's operation. Further, it is possible to form a mode in which the rotation operation unit 8654 is rotated at a higher speed from the rotation state by the player's operation.

As a result, since a plurality of modes for allowing the player to visually recognize the displacement mode of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be formed, the player can be provided with interest. In addition, by forming a plurality of rotation modes of the rotation operation unit 8654, a plurality of performance modes of the pachinko machine 10 can be formed.

Note that a sensor device or the like that measures the number of rotations is disposed on the side surface of the rotation operation unit 8654, and an effect that is changed based on the number of rotations and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be performed.

Next, the first link member 9431 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The plate-like protrusion 9431b of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment includes an inclined surface 9431b1 formed by inclining the contact surface with the cam member 422. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 149 (a) is a perspective front view of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 149 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400. Note that FIG. 149 (b)
Corresponds to the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG.

The lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300, as in the lower displacement unit 400 in the first embodiment. The transmission member 420 disposed on the base member 410 and the transmission member 4
And a lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 45) that is displaced by the transmission of the driving force from 20. Further, the lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment is connected to the base member 410 and the lower displacement member 440 and is displaced as the transmission member 420 is driven.
30 and the lower displacement member 440 is displaced by the displacement of the link member 9430.

As shown in FIG. 149, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction while being bent in a generally U-shape when viewed from the front. The first link member 9431 protrudes through the through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side (the arrow D direction side in FIG. 149 (a)) and the back side on the other end side (the arrow U direction side in FIG. 149 (a)). Columnar connecting projection 431c (see FIG. 46), a plate-like projection 9431b projecting to a position facing the curved wall portion 411e of the base member 410, and a columnar sliding projection 431d projecting to the front side of the bent portion. And prepare.

The plate-shaped protrusion 9431b extends in a curved shape around the axis of the through hole 431a and protrudes toward the front side (front base 411 side (arrow F direction side)). Further, the plate-like protrusion 94
The protruding dimension of 31b is set to be larger than the thickness (dimension in the direction of arrow FB) of the cam member 422. Furthermore, the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) facing the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 9431b is disposed with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 149 (b))).

The cam member 422 is disposed in a state in which a region between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e can be displaced. In addition, the size of the gap in two places including the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410 is larger than the distance X14 described above. It is set large.

As a result, the first link member 9 in the direction (arrow F direction) in which the distance X14 described above decreases.
When the 431 is bent, the protruding front end surface of the plate-like protrusion 9431b can be brought into contact with the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e). Therefore, the cam member 42 is located between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e.
It can suppress that 2 is pinched | interposed and a displacement is controlled.

Further, the plate-like protrusion 9431b includes an inclined surface 9431b1 that protrudes toward the front side toward the cam member 422 on the side surface in the circumferential direction on the cam member 422 side (the arrow L direction side in FIG. 149 (b)). As shown in FIG. 149 (b), the inclined surface 9431b1 is on the protruding side (arrow F direction side).
Inclined approximately 45 degrees toward the surface.

As a result, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-like protrusion 9431b, the cam member 422 is moved to the back surface of the first link member 9431 (on the arrow F direction side). The first link member 94 can be pressed (displaced) against the surface).
The protruding tip end surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the 31 plate-like protrusions 9431b can be pressed against the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 can be prevented from swinging in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the lower displacement member 440 can be easily maintained at the position of the second displacement state.

In this case, it is preferable that a flat surface parallel to the inclined surface 9431b1 is formed at the end of the cam member 422 at a contact portion with the inclined surface 9431b1. Thus, the cam member 422
The cam member 422 can be easily displaced to the back side (arrow B direction side) when the inclined surface 9431b1 comes into contact.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment.
Will be described. In the first embodiment, the general winning opening unit 150 is the adhesive tape 1.
In the tenth embodiment, the adhesive tape 10154a is affixed to the inner side of the end of the decorative member 10154 with a predetermined width. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. Note that FIG.
This corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Also, the general winning a prize opening unit 1015 in the tenth embodiment.
0 is arranged in the game area (front surface of the base plate 60) of the game board 13 and can change the path of the game ball flowing down the game area, similarly to the general prize opening unit 150 in the first embodiment. . Further, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 is an end on the lower side in the gravity direction (arrow D direction side) in the front view (viewed in the arrow B direction) with respect to the game area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. It is arranged at a position along the part.

Further, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 includes a main body 151 formed in a crescent shape in a front view, and a first standing part 152 erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the end of the main body 151. (See FIG. 12) and a second standing portion 153 (FIG. 12 (FIG. 12)) extending from the end of the first standing portion 152 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) toward the center of the game area. a) and a plurality (three in this embodiment) of general winning holes 63 (see FIG. 12A) formed on the front side of the main body 151.

As shown in FIG. 150, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment includes a decoration member 10154 disposed on the back surface of the main body 10151. The decorative member 10154 is affixed to the inner side of the decorative member 10154 with an adhesive tape 10154a bonded to the main body portion 151 at a predetermined width. Thereby, for the thickness of the adhesive tape 10154a,
A predetermined gap (space) is formed between the main body 151 and the decorative member 10154 at the end of the decorative member 10154. As a result, the player can make an angle (for example, a pachinko machine 10 (FIG. 1
When the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 is viewed from the same height as the upper end portion in the gravity direction of the reference), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 10154. .

More specifically, by forming an air layer between the main body 151 and the end of the decorative member 10154, the inside of the main body 151 is reflected to the player side from the end (inclined surface 151a) of the main body 151. Can be prevented from being affected by the decoration at the end of the decorative member 10154 (the wavelength of the light L is hardly changed). In addition, light that passes through the inside of the adhesive tape 10154a and is influenced by the decoration of the decoration member 10154 is repeatedly reflected inside the main body 151 to be emitted to the outside of the main body 151. The influence of the decoration of the decorative member 10154 when reflected toward the viewpoint can be reduced.

Therefore, the change in the wavelength of the light L emitted to the player can be reduced, and when the player visually recognizes the general prize opening unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 10154 It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the boundary. As a result, the decorative member 60c is viewed from a normal angle (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 13).
When the player visually recognizes the decoration of the decoration member 10154, the decoration of the base plate decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 10154 can be easily seen by the player as one decoration, and a predetermined angle (for example, pachinko) (Viewpoint of the same height as the upper end of the machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity)
When viewing from the side, it is difficult to see the decoration at the boundary, and it is difficult for the player to understand that the decoration is divided.

Next, referring to FIGS. 151 to 153, the lower displacement member 114 in the eleventh embodiment.
40 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the decorative member 450 is irradiated with light by the control board 491 disposed on the back side of the lower displacement member 440 has been described. However, the lower displacement member 11440 of the eleventh embodiment is a control board. The player can recognize the position of the internal game ball by the light emitted from 491. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 151 and 152, the lower displacement member 114 in the eleventh embodiment.
The overall configuration of 40 will be described. FIG. 151 shows the lower displacement member 11 in the eleventh embodiment.
FIG. 440 is an exploded perspective front view of 440; 152A and 152B show the lower displacement member 11.
FIG. In FIG. 152A, the outer shape of the light emitter 11491a disposed on the control board 491 is illustrated by a chain line, and in FIG. 152B, the decoration member 11450 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 152A and 152B, the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45), and front and rear of the base member 470. A case member 480 covering the case, the case member 480 and the base member 4
70 is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism 11460 disposed so as to be displaceable between and a decorative member 11450 formed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 (in the direction of arrow FB).

The decorative member 11450 is formed in an outer shape imitating a pattern or character, and a picture of the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 11450 includes a front side decorative portion 11451 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the front case 481, and a back side decorative portion disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 482. 452 is mainly provided. In the present embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 11450.

The front side decorative portion 11451 is formed in an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the front case 481 in a front view, and is attached to the front case 481. Thereby, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) disposed on the back side of the front decoration portion 11451 can be made invisible to the player. Moreover, the front side decoration part 11451 is provided with the transmission part 11451b formed from a light transmissive material inside the front view.

The transmission part 11451b includes a plurality of light emitters 11491 disposed on a control board 491 described later.
It is formed in the whole area of the position facing a, and light emitted from the plurality of light emitters 11491a can be guided to the player side. Moreover, the transmission part 11451b is a front side (arrow F direction side).
Is curved toward the back side (arrow B direction side) toward the outer end in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). Thereby, the light incident from the back side of the transmissive part 11451b is transmitted to the transmissive part 11.
When it passes through the inside of 451b and is emitted from the front side, it is easily diffused.

The transmission mechanism 11460 is a member disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470, the transmission gears 461, 462, and 463, the drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is coupled to the transmission gear 461, A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and arranged to be slidably displaceable on the front side of the base member 470, a transmission gear 465 rotatably arranged on the movable rack 464, and a base The movable rack 46 has a toothed rack gear 476 formed on the member 470 and meshed with the transmission gear 465 and a toothed surface meshed with the transmission gear 465.
4, a rack 11466 that is slidably displaceable on the front side, and the rack 11466.
And a ball receiving portion 467 that is rotatably disposed on one end side.

The rack 11466 is formed of a rectangular horizontally long rod-like body when viewed from the front. The rack gear 466a is engraved on the upper end surface, and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side). A shaft portion 466b projecting in a cylindrical shape, two sliding plates 466c projecting to the front side (arrow F direction side), and recessed on the back surface from one end in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) to the other end A recessed portion 466d (see FIG. 59), and a shielding plate 11466e protruding upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the front side of the rack gear 466a.

The shielding plate 11466e is formed of a non-light-transmitting material and can block light emitted from the light emitter 11491a. Further, the shielding plate 11466e has a protruding height (
The height in the direction of arrow U) is a position higher than the light emitter 11491a disposed on the back side (position in the direction of arrow U). Thus, the shielding plate 1146 is accompanied with the displacement of the rack 11466.
6e can be displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) to block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a.

The control board 491 is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member 470, and includes a plurality of light emitters 11491a that can irradiate light on the front side. The plurality of light emitters 11491a are juxtaposed in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower displacement member 11440, and are disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) via the base member 470. It is arranged above 467 (in the direction of arrow U). Thereby, it can suppress that the light radiate | emitted from the light emission part 11491a by the ball receiving part 467 is interrupted | blocked.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, a state where the game ball is sent to the inside of the ball receiving unit 467 will be described. FIG. 153 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 11440, and FIG. 153 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 taken along the line CLIIIb-CLIIIb of FIG. 153 (a). ) Is a schematic cross-sectional view of lower displacement member 11440 taken along line CLIIIc-CLIIIc in FIG. 153 (a).

As shown in FIG. 153, when a game ball is received by the ball receiver 467, the received game ball is arranged at a position overlapping the front side (arrow F direction side) of the light emitter 11491a. Thereby, with the game ball received by the ball receiving part 467, the light irradiated to the player side from the light emitter 11491a can be blocked. As a result, the position of the game ball sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 11440 can be recognized by the player by the shadow formed by the light being blocked.

In the eleventh embodiment, the control board 491 is provided on the back side of the decorative member 11450 and can emit light toward the displacement region of the ball receiver 467. The control board 491 is provided with the ball receiver 46.
7 is arranged on the back side, and the light received from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467, and the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is reduced. Since they are partially different from each other, the light amount emitted from the decoration member 11450 positioned on the front side of the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 467 or the ball receiving unit 467 and the decoration member 11450 at other positions are output. The amount of light emitted from the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 is positioned on the back side of the portion where the amount of light is different. The player can be recognized.

More specifically, when the control board 491 is disposed on the back side of the ball receiver 467, the light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiver 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiver 467. Thus, the light amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 on the front side of the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 467 or the ball receiving unit 467 can be made darker than the other parts of the decorative member 11450. As a result, the player can recognize that the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the (dark) portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is small.

The ball receiving portion 467 is formed in a shape for receiving the lower hemisphere of the game ball, and the light emitter 1149.
Since 1a is arranged at a position higher than the center of the game ball received by the ball receiver 467,
It is possible to make it difficult for the light received from the light emitter 11491 a to be applied to the ball receiver 467. Therefore, the ball receiver 46 that receives the game ball by the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a.
7 and the outer shape of the rack 11466 that slides and displaces the ball receiving portion 467 can be prevented from forming a shadow on the transmitting portion 11451b. As a result, a shadow can be formed on the transmission part 11451b only with the game ball received by the ball receiver 467, so that the ball receiver 467 is displaced while the game ball is not received by the ball receiver 467. In this case, it is possible to suppress the player's line of sight from paying attention to the ball receiver 467.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, the ball receiver 12467 in the twelfth embodiment.
Will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is blocked by the game ball received by the ball receiver 467 has been described, but in the twelfth embodiment, the first ball disposed in the ball receiver 12467 is used. The light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is shielded by the three pieces 12467e. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 154, the configuration of the ball receiver 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 154 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball receiver 12467 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 154 (b) is a front view of the ball receiver 12467. Note that FIG. 154 (a
), A part of the ball receiving portion 12467 is illustrated by a chain line.

Note that the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment is similar to the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment, and is a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45) and the front and rear of the base member 470. A case member 480 for covering the case and a case member 480
And a decorative member 11450 that is formed so as to cover the front and rear (in the direction of arrow FB). Further, the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment is the case member 480.
And a transmission mechanism 12460 having a ball receiving portion 12467c that is displaceably disposed between the base member 470 and can be deformed by receiving a game ball.

As shown in FIG. 154, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment includes a first piece 12467c formed by being bent in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and a second piece 12467d connected to the first piece 12467c. And a third piece 12467e connected to the second piece 12467d and disposed on the back side of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d.

The first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are portions for holding a game ball sent from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57) to the inside of the lower displacement member 12440, and the first piece 12467c.
When a game ball is sent between the second piece 12467d and the second piece 12467d, the second piece 12467d is displaced in a direction away from the first piece 12467c, and a part of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12 are displaced.
467d is arranged in a U shape in a front view, and a game ball can be held in an inner portion of the U shape.

The first piece 12467c includes a receiving piece 12467c4 that forms one extending side formed in an L shape in a front view, a leg portion 467a that forms the other extending side, a receiving piece 12467c4, and a leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 12467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bending portion), and a connecting portion 12467c1 protruding to the opposite side with the bent portion 12467c5 interposed therebetween. And comprising.

The receiving piece 12467c4 is a part that forms a side surface on the other side (arrow R direction side) formed in a U shape in front view by the one piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, and is formed in a crescent shape on the front side. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 12467d.

The connecting portion 12467c1 protrudes from two locations at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 12467c5. The connecting portion 12467c1 is a second piece 1 described later.
2467d and the third piece 12467e are connected to each other, and include a connecting hole 12467c2 that extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and is opened in a circular cross section.

The connecting hole 12467c2 is a shaft portion 12467e protruding from a third piece 12467e described later.
An opening 3 is inserted. The connecting hole 12467c2 has a shaft portion 12467e3 inserted into an insertion hole 12467d3 formed in a second piece 12467d, which will be described later, on the back side (arrow B direction side).
Is inserted from. Further, the shaft portion 12467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side of the coupling hole 12467c2 (front side (arrow F direction side)). Accordingly, the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e can be fastened to the first piece 12467c.

The first piece 12467c includes a recess 12467c3 that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction side) on the projecting proximal end side of the connecting portion 12467c1. The concave bottom surface of the concave portion 12467c3 is formed at the lowest position (lowermost) among the bottom surfaces where the game balls are held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. Accordingly, the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d
The game ball held in the roll is rolled inside the recess 12467c3.

The second piece 12467d includes the receiving piece 12467c4 and the second piece 124 of the first piece 12467c.
67d is a portion that forms a side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) formed in a U shape when viewed from the front, is formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front, and is concave in a direction away from the receiving piece 12467c4. It is formed in a curved shape. The first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d
An insertion hole 12467d3 that opens circularly in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) in the connecting portion of
And a recessed portion 12467d2 that is recessed in a circular cross section from the back side (arrow B direction side) to the front side (arrow F direction side).

The second piece 12467d is inserted into the insertion hole 12467d3 and the shaft portion 1246 of the third piece 12467e.
7e3 is inserted, and the connecting shaft 12467e of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2.
4 is inserted. Accordingly, when the second piece 12567d is displaced, the third piece 12467e is similarly displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c, the third piece 12567e is similarly rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c.

Further, the second piece 12467d is a connecting portion 12 that protrudes from two locations of the first piece 12467c.
It arrange | positions between the opposition of 467c1, and is connected with the 1st piece 12467c. As a result, the second
When the piece 12467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 12467d3, the connecting portion 12467c
It is possible to suppress the shaft portion 12467e3 from being broken by causing the second piece 12467d to abut on the side surface on the opposite side.

The recessed portion 12467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 12467e4 of a third piece 12467e to be described later is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 12467e4.

The third piece 12467e is a shielding plate 12467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape in front view,
Shaft portion 124 protruding from the shielding plate 12467e1 toward the front side (arrow F direction side).
67e3 and a connecting shaft 12467e4.

The shielding plate 12467e1 is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and the light emitter 11491a.
When arranged on the front side, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be shielded. The shielding of the light from the light emitter 11491a by the shielding plate 12467e1 will be described later.

As described above, the shaft portion 12467e3 is a cylindrical body that is inserted into the connection hole 12467c2 of the first piece 12467c and the insertion hole 12467d3 of the second piece 12467d. Also, the shaft part 1
In the projecting front end surface of 2467e3, a connecting hole 124 is provided from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 12467e3.
A hole into which a screw inserted into 67c2 can be screwed is formed. Therefore, the shaft portion 12467e3 is inserted in the connecting hole 12467c2 and the insertion hole 12467d3.
The first piece 12467c, the second piece 12467d, and the third piece 12467e can be connected to each other by fastening the screw to the insertion distal end surface of the first piece 1246, and the third piece 12467e can be connected to the first piece 1246.
7c can be rotated.

As described above, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is provided with the recessed portion 12467d of the second piece 12467d.
2 is inserted. As a result, the second piece 12467d has a shaft portion 1 with respect to the first piece 12467c.
When the rotational displacement is performed around 2467e3, the connecting shaft 12467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 12467d. Therefore, the third piece 12467e is replaced with the second piece 12467e.
It can be displaced with the displacement of d.

Next, the displacement of the ball receiver 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 155 (a) and 155 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 12440, and FIG. 155 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 12440 along the line CLVc-CLVc in FIG. 155 (b). is there. In FIGS. 155 (a) and 155 (b), a part of the lower displacement member 12440 and the light emitter 11491a are shown by chain lines. In addition, FIG.
In (a), the state before the game ball is received (held) by the ball receiving unit 12467 is illustrated, and in FIG. 155 (b), the game ball is received (held) by the ball receiving unit 12467. Was)
The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 155, in the state before the game ball is received between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the second piece 12467d is the first piece 12467d by the load of the third piece 12467e. The third piece 12467e is brought close to the piece 12467c side.
Is positioned below the light emitter 11491a disposed on the back side of the ball receiver 12467. Therefore, before the game ball is received by the ball receiver 12467, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be emitted to the player side.

On the other hand, when a game ball is received between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d facing each other, the received game ball is formed into a receiving surface (a U-shape in front view) of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. A recess 12 located on the lowermost end of the receiving surface.
467c3. As a result, the second piece 12467d is moved to the shaft portion 124 on the outer surface of the game ball.
It can be rotated in the direction away from the first piece 12467c around 67e3. As a result, the third piece 12467e that moves in accordance with the displacement of the second piece 12467d is replaced with the ball receiving portion 1246.
7 on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the light emitter 11491a disposed on the back side.

Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is used as the shielding plate 1246 of the third piece 12467e.
It can be shielded by 7e1. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be easily shielded only when the game ball is received by the ball receiver 12467. Therefore, the position of the game ball received by the lower displacement member 12440 can be determined by the position of the light emitter 11491a. The player can be recognized at the position of the shadow that blocks the light.

The second piece 12467d has the connecting shaft 12467e4 inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2, and the load of the third piece 12467e is always applied. The center of gravity G of the third piece 12467e (FIG. 1
54 (b)) is set on the opposite side across the shaft portion 12467e3 from the connecting portion between the second piece 12567d and the third piece 12567e. Thereby, in the state where forces other than gravity are not acting on the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467de, the second piece 12467d can be rotated to the first piece 12467c4 side by the load of the third piece 12467e. .

Accordingly, when the game ball is discharged (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 12467, the third piece 124 is obtained.
The second piece 12467d can be displaced to the ball receiving piece 12467c4 side of the first piece 12467c by the load 67e.

Further, the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 12467b by an operation of slidingly moving the inside of the lower displacement member 12440 in the same manner as the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, and is emitted from the lower displacement member 12440. The game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received by the ball receiver 12467, the ball receiver 12
In the structure in which the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b as the 467 slides, the ball receiving portion 12 centered on the shaft hole 467b is caused by the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 12467.
The rotation speed of 467 is changed. Therefore, since the rotational speed depends only on the sliding speed of the ball receiver 12467, there is a problem that the discharge speed of the game ball from the ball receiver 12467 is not stable.

On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, the second piece 12467 is caused by the load of the third piece 12467e.
The rotation direction of d and the rotation direction of the ball receiving portion 12467 around the shaft hole 467b when the game ball is emitted are set to be substantially the same direction, so that the game ball emitted from the emission opening 471 A driving force when the second piece 12467d is displaced can be applied. Accordingly, the ball receiver 124
Even if the force applied to the game ball from the ball receiving portion 12467 is reduced when the 67 is displaced and the game ball is discharged from the emission opening 471, the speed of the game ball to be emitted can be maintained. As a result, the discharge speed of the game ball emitted from the ball receiving portion 12467 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158, the special winning device 13 in the thirteenth embodiment.
550 will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 of the special prize device 550 is used.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the pitch of the game balls flowing into the 51 is switched by the first and second drive units 583 and 584 of the third path member 580. However, in the thirteenth embodiment, By changing the facing interval, the flow path of the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 13550 is adjusted. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 156 and FIG. 157, the special winning device 13 in the thirteenth embodiment.
The overall configuration of 550 will be described. FIG. 156 (a) is a front view of the special prize apparatus 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment, FIG. 156 (b) is a perspective front view of the special prize apparatus 13550, and FIG. 156 (c) is a diagram of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the special prize-winning apparatus 13550 in the CLVIc-CLVIc line of a). FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective front view of the special prize device 13550.

As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the special prize-winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment is shown.
Includes a first path member 13560 disposed on the front side and a second path member 13570 disposed on the back side of the first path member 13560.

The first path member 13560 is a front plate 13564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13 and projects from the left and right ends of the front plate 13564 to the back side (base plate 60 side). The first wall portion 13565 is mainly provided.

The front plate 13564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second route member 13570, which will be described later, and is formed of a light transmitting member. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning apparatus 13550 through the front plate 13564. The front plate 13564 includes a first convex portion 13564b and a second convex portion 13564c that project toward the second path member 13570, and the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564b.
The third convex portion 135 is located below the convex portion 13564c and protrudes toward the second path member 13570.
64d.

The 1st convex part 13564b and the 2nd convex part 13564c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 13550, and the outer side of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction (arrow L
-R direction outer side) is inclined downward from the front plate 13564 toward the center in the left-right direction.

The third protrusion 13564d is located in the center of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) and extends in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). In the thirteenth embodiment, in the game area of the game board 13, the pitches of the game balls flowing down from the special prize-winning device 13550 are different in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the special prize-winning device 13550 and to the left and right of the approximate center position. Special prize device 1
The game ball flowing down from the left side of the front view of 3550 is sent to the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 2),
A specific game value is given to the player by the sent game ball (a predetermined number of game balls are paid out). On the other hand, the game ball flowing down from the right side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front is sent to the out port 71 of the game board 13 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the lower side (the arrow L direction side) below the special winning device 13550 (
A first winning port 64 is arranged on the arrow D direction side. Thereby, the game ball flowing down from the front left side of the special winning device 13550 can be caused to flow into the first winning port 64.

The first wall portion 13565 is a portion that connects the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and the special prize-winning device 13550, and connecting plates 13565a that protrude outwardly from the left and right at the projecting tip portions are respectively formed on the left and right first wall portions 13565. Provide two places.

The connection plate 13565a is formed with a through hole 13565a1 through which a screw for fastening the special prize-winning device 13550 to the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is inserted. This through hole 13
The special prize-winning device 13550 can be fastened to the base plate 60 with screws inserted through 565a1.

The second path member 13570 includes a plate-like base plate 13571 facing the front plate 13564 of the first path member 13560 and the left and right ends (in the direction of the arrow LR) of the base plate 13571 from the first path member 13560. And a fourth wall portion 13573 protruding from the front plate 13564 side.

The base plate 13571 is a member that forms a pitching path for a game ball in a gap between the first path member 13560 and the front plate 13564 facing the front plate 13564, and the outer shape in front view is smaller than the outer shape of the front plate 13564. As a result, the front side of the base plate 13571 is moved to the front plate 1356.
4 can cover the base plate 13571 from the player side.

Further, the base plate 13571 is a fourth protrusion 1357 that protrudes toward the first path member 13560.
1b, 5th convex part 13571c, these 4th convex part 13571b, and 5th convex part 13571c.
6th convex part 13571d which is located in the lower part and protrudes toward the front plate 13564 side.

The 4th convex part 13571b and the 5th convex part 13571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 13550, and from the left and right direction outer side (arrow (LR direction outer side)) of the base plate 13571. The base plate 13571 is formed to be inclined downward toward the center side.

The sixth convex portion 13571d is formed at a position facing the above-described third convex portion 13564d, and is formed to have a length having a predetermined gap from the tip of the third convex portion 13564d. The third
A gap between the facing of the convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d is set to a size smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

In the fourth wall portion 13573, two fastening holes 13573a are formed in each of the left and right fourth wall portions 13573 for fastening the screw inserted through the first path member 13560. Thereby, the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 are fastened and fixed.

Further, around the fastening hole 13573a of the fourth wall portion 13573, there is a first path member 13560.
And a shim member SI for adjusting the gap between the second path member 13570 and the second path member 13570.

The shim member SI is formed of a thin plate-like transparent material, and is hardly visible from the player side. In the present embodiment, the shim member SI is disposed at an end portion on the left side when viewed from the front, and the interval between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side when viewed from the front is increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning apparatus 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 158 (a) is a top view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 158 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 13550 along the line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb in FIG. 158 (a).

As shown in FIG. 158, the special prize-winning device 13550 has a shim member SI at the left end as viewed from the front.
, And a distance L14 (see FIG. 158 (a)) between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side when viewed from the front is the front plate 13564 and the base plate 1 on the right side when viewed from the front.
It is set to be larger than the distance L15 (refer to FIG. 158 (a)) between the opposite to 3571 (L1).
4> L15).

The interval L14 is the interval between the left end (arrow L direction side) at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 are opposed to each other. The interval L15 is the interval between the right side (arrow R direction side) end portions at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 are opposed to each other. Further, the interval L15 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the special prize device 1355 is set.
A game ball flowing down from above 0 can flow into the special prize-winning device 13550 from any position in the left-right direction (L14>L15> diameter of game ball).

Further, the special winning device 13550 is divided into a left and right downstream side by the third convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d. Accordingly, the game balls flowing down the main path SK1 upstream of the special prize device 13550 (see FIG. 158 (b)) are formed on the main path SK2 formed on the left side in the front view of the special prize device 13550 and on the right side in the front view. It flows into one of the formed sub-paths HK1. As described above, the game area on the downstream side of the special prize device 13550 is
The pitching paths are formed differently at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the special prize-winning device 13550.
Accordingly, a game ball sent from the main route SK2 to the game area is sent to a specific winning opening, and a game ball sent from the sub route HK1 to the game area is sent to the out port 71 of the game board 13.

Furthermore, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c of the front plate 13564 described above.
And the protrusion dimension of the 4th convex part 13571b and the 5th convex part 13571c of the base board 13571 is set substantially the same. In other words, the first protrusion 13565b and the second protrusion 13564c that protrude from the front plate 13564 toward the back side have the same protrusion dimension. Also,
Fourth convex portion 13571b and fifth convex portion 13 projecting from the base plate 13571 toward the front side.
571c has the same protruding dimension. Furthermore, the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth
The protrusion dimension with the convex part 13571b is set to be the same.

In addition, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are arranged at positions where the vertical heights are different. That is, the front plate 13
The 1st convex part 13565b and the 2nd convex part 13564c which protrude toward the back side from 564 are protruded from the same height. Further, the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c projecting from the base plate 13571 toward the front side are projected from the same height. Further, the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth convex portion 13571b are disposed at different heights, and the fourth convex portion 13571b is disposed below the first convex portion 13565b. Further, the lower side of the first convex portion 13565b projecting from two locations in the gravity direction is disposed at an intermediate position of the fourth convex portion 13571b projecting from two locations in the gravity direction.

Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 13550 is moved to the first convex portion 13564b.
And it can be made to flow down, making it collide with the 4th convex part 13571b or the 2nd convex part 13564c, and the 5th convex part 13571c in order. As a result, the game ball is moved to the first convex portion 13564b and the second
It can be made to flow down along the extending direction of the convex part 13564c, the 4th convex part 13571b, and the 5th convex part 13571c.

Front plate 13564 and fourth convex portion 1357 on the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front.
1b or a distance dimension L16 (see FIG. 158 (a)) between the facing of the base plate 13571 and the first convex portion 13564b is set larger than the diameter of the game ball by the shim member SI, and the special winning device 13550 Front plate 13564 and fifth convex portion 1357 on the right side in front view.
1c or the distance dimension L17 between the facing of the base plate 13571 and the second convex portion 13564c is:
It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

The interval L16 is the fifth convex portion 13 of the fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b.
Front plate 13564 at the end portion on the 571c and second convex portion 13564c side (arrow R direction side).
Or it is a distance dimension between opposing to the base board 13571. The interval L17 is the fifth convex portion 1
The fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b of the 3571c and the second convex portion 13564c.
It is the distance dimension between facing the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571 at the end portion on the side (arrow L direction side).

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning port 64 is disposed below the left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (on the arrow D direction side). The game ball that flows down can flow into the first winning port 64.

Therefore, the special winning device 13 is viewed from the right side (arrow R direction side) of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front.
The game balls that flow into the main path SK1 of 550 are the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 135.
It is easy to come into contact with 71c, and can flow down along the extending direction of the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c and be guided to the sub-path HK1 side. On the other hand, special prize winning device 1355
The game balls that flow into the main path SK1 of the special prize-winning device 13550 from the left side of the front view of the 0 (in the direction of the arrow L) are unlikely to collide with the first convex part 13564b and the fourth convex part 13571b, and directly enter the sub path HK1 It becomes easy to be thrown. As a result, it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball that has flowed into the special winning device 13550.

In the present embodiment, the first convex portion 13564b, the second convex portion 13564c, and the fourth convex portion 13 are used.
571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are the sixth convex portion 13571d and the third convex portion 13564d.
It is formed above (in the direction of the arrow U) above (the game ball inlets of the main route HK1 and the sub route SK6). Therefore, most of the game balls flowing down the main route SK1 can flow down to the sub route HK1, and a relatively smaller number of game balls than the sub route HK1 can flow down to the main route SK6.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is adjusted by the shim member SI and non-parallel, so that the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 are not parallel to each other.
It is possible to adjust the position of the game ball flowing down between facing the path member 13570 (the direction in which the game ball flows down).

Accordingly, the special prize-winning device 13550 is compared with the case where the direction in which the game ball is likely to flow down is adjusted by changing the angle of the nail struck against the front of the base plate 60 with respect to the front of the base plate 60.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the direction in which the player tends to flow down. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from recognizing that the game is disadvantageous before playing the game with the gaming machine, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, the flow of the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 13550 can be changed only by changing the two opposite directions (front-rear direction (arrow FB direction)) of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. Since the direction can be changed, the adjustment can be simplified compared to a nail that can be adjusted in all directions with respect to the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60). As a result, it is possible to easily make the game ball flow down in the direction intended by the adjuster.

Note that the direction intended by the adjuster is, for example, a distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 on the sub path HK1 side (arrow L direction side) on the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side). A game ball that flows larger inside the special prize-winning device 13550 than the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 flows down to the sub-path HK1, or the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side) ) Between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other, the first path member 13560 and the second path member 135 on the sub path HK1 side (arrow L direction side).
That is, the game ball flowing down the inside of the special prize-winning device 13550, which is larger than the distance between the 70 faces, flows down to the main path SK6.

Furthermore, with respect to the first path member 13560 disposed on the front side, the second path member 13570 disposed on the back side is moved in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) by sandwiching the shim member SI. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the distance between the facing of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. That is, since the second path member 13570 disposed on the far side from the player is moved in the front-rear direction, the first path member 13560 is compared with the case where the first path member 13560 closer to the player is displaced. Second path member 1357
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the distance between the zero facing. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, an engagement member 14310 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the operation element 315 of the engaging member 310 is formed to protrude toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (the back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300 has been described. The operation element 14315 according to the fourteenth embodiment is formed such that the protruding distal end surface is inclined toward the proximal end side. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 159 (a) is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the fourteenth embodiment.
9 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 taken along the CLIXb-CLIXb line in FIG. 159 (a).

Note that the back case 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, is a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in a front view, and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 face the front. The outer wall 302 is erected, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the walls 301 and 302. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

Further, the back case 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment includes an engagement member 14310 disposed on the front side (open side (arrow F direction side) formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the back case 14300. Arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), the substrate box 100 (main controller 11)
0) is mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 159, the engaging member 14310 according to the fourteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front and extends in a direction parallel to each other.
11 and the second piece 312 and the ends of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 are connected to each other by the first piece 1.
4311 and a third piece 313 connected in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the second piece 312.

The first piece 14311 is one side opposite to the other side to which the third piece 313 is coupled (arrow R direction side).
Is formed as an engagement portion with the engaged portion 332 (see FIG. 41A) of the fixing member 320, and the vertical direction is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 14311. (Arrow U-
The engaging portion 316 projecting outward in both directions (D direction), and the recessed portion 317 recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 14311 from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316. And an operation element 143 that protrudes toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (the back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300.
15.

The operation element 14315 is formed at the end of the other side (arrow L direction side) of the first piece 14311, and its protruding dimension is set to a value larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall 301 of the back case 300, and at least It is projected to the back side of the back case 14300 (bottom wall portion 301) by a size that can be grasped by the operator with a finger. As a result, the operation element 14315 can be protruded from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall 301, and the protrusion (the tip of the operation element 14315) can be grasped and operated.

Further, the protruding tip surface of the operation element 14315 is on the engaging portion 316 side (the other side of the first piece 14311 (
It is formed as an inclined surface 14315a that is closer to the base end side of the operation element 14315 as it goes toward the arrow L direction side. As a result, when the operator operates the operator 14315 in the direction in which the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 is released (arrow L direction side), the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 is achieved. The force acting in the direction of releasing can be reduced.

That is, the force by which the operator operates the operator 14315 can be dispersed by the inclined surface 14315a. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to release the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 by operating the operation element 14315 from the back side of the back case 300. as a result,
An operator who tries to replace the substrate box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 illegally can be prevented from operating the operating element 14315 from the back side of the back case 300 and removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. .

Further, the end of the inclined surface 14315 a on the engaging portion 316 side is the bottom wall portion 30 of the back case 300.
1 is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the back side. Thus, the engaging member 14310
The operator's hand operating the operating element 14315 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 14315a for the purpose of releasing the engagement between the fixing member 320 and the fixing member 320. As a result, an operator who makes it difficult to operate the operation element 14315 and tries to replace the substrate box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 illegally operates the operation element 14315 from the back side of the rear case 300, Removal of the fixing member 320 from the back case 300 can be suppressed.

Next, an engagement member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (a). In the first embodiment, the operation element 315 of the engaging member 310 is the rear case 3.
Although the case where it is formed to protrude toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of 00 has been described, the operator 15315 in the fifteenth embodiment is the first piece 15311 of the engaging member 15310. Is pivotally supported. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 160 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 in the fifteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section of FIG. 160 (a) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 159 (b).

The back case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment is similar to the back case 300 in the first embodiment. The bottom wall 301 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 are directed to the front. The outer wall 302 is erected, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the walls 301 and 302. The bottom wall portion 301 is formed with an opening 301a (see FIG. 5) having a rectangular shape in front view at the center thereof, and the bottom wall portion 30 is passed through the opening 301a.
The 3rd symbol display device 81 (refer FIG. 2) arrange | positioned by the back surface of 1 is made visible.

The back case 15300 according to the fifteenth embodiment includes an engagement member 15310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)), and the back case 15300. Arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), the substrate box 100 (main controller 11)
0), and a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41).

As shown in FIG. 160 (a), the engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment has an outer shape in a front view formed in a crank shape, and a first piece 15311 and a first piece extending in directions parallel to each other. Two pieces 312 (see FIG. 41), and the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312
Of the first piece 15311 and the second piece 312 are connected to each other in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 15311 and the second piece 312 (see FIG. 41).

The first piece 15311 has an end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is coupled, and the engaged portion 332 (see FIG. 41 (a)) and an engaging portion that protrudes outward in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) that is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 15311. 316 (see FIG. 41), and a recess 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 15311 from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316, An operation element 15315 inserted through the second opening 301d of the back case 300 and a bearing part 15319 on which the operation element 15315 is pivotally supported are mainly provided.

The bearing portion 15319 protrudes from the first piece 15311 on the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 of the first piece 15311 is connected. Further, the bearing portion 15319 is provided with an operation element 1 to be described later.
A recess is formed into which a cylindrical shaft member 15315c inserted through 5315 in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction) is inserted.

The operating element 15315 is formed in a rod shape, and has a through hole 15315b penetrating in the direction of gravity at the end on the first piece 15311 side, and a shaft member 1531 inserted into the through hole 15315b.
5c.

Therefore, the operating element 15315 is held in a state in which it can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 15311 when the shaft member 15315c inserted into the through hole 15315b is inserted into the recess of the bearing portion 15319. Further, the rotating shaft (shaft member 15315c) of the operator 15315 is the first
It arrange | positions rather than the piece 15311 at the front side. Thereby, the rightward (clockwise) rotation of the operation element 15315 in the state shown in FIG. 160 (a) as viewed from above can be regulated by being brought into contact with the other end of the first piece 15311. Leftward (counterclockwise) rotation can be allowed.

Therefore, when the operator operates the operating element 15315 in the direction in which the engagement between the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 is released (arrow L direction side), the operating element 153 in the state shown in FIG. 160 (a).
The force acting in the direction of releasing the engagement between the engagement member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of the arrow L) when rotating 15 counterclockwise) can be reduced. Accordingly, the operating member 15315 is operated from the back side of the back case 300 to engage the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 3.
The engagement with 20 can be made difficult to release. As a result, a player who intends to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 operates the operation element 15315 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160 (b), an engagement member 15310 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the sliding operation of the engaging member 310 is performed by the operating element 315 has been described. However, in the sixteenth embodiment, the first of the engaging member 16310 is performed.
This is done by operating the end of the piece 16311. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 160B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 in the sixteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section of FIG. 160 (b) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 160 (a). Further, the back case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment is similar to the back case 300 in the first embodiment, and is directed from the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. The outer wall 302 is erected, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the walls 301 and 302. The bottom wall 301 has a rectangular opening 301a (see FIG.
The third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible through the opening 301a.

Furthermore, the back case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment includes an engagement member 16310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)), and the back case 16300. Arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), the substrate box 100 (main controller 1)
10), and a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41).

As shown in FIG. 160 (b), the engaging member 16310 in the sixteenth embodiment has a crank-like outer shape in front view, and a first piece 16311 and a first piece extending in directions parallel to each other. Two pieces 312 (see FIG. 41), and the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312
Of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312 are connected to each other in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312 (see FIG. 41). Further, the engaging member 1 in the sixteenth embodiment
6310 can be slidably displaced by a finger inserted from the back side into the second opening 301d formed in the back case 300.

The first piece 16311 has an end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is coupled, and the engaged portion 332 (see FIG. 41 (see FIG. 41) and engaging portions 316 projecting outward in both the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311 (see FIG. 41). 41) and a recess 317 (see FIG. 41) that is recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 16311 from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316. Prepare.

As shown in FIG. 160 (b), when the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 16310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, the other side of the first piece 16311 (arrow L direction side). Is disposed on the outer side in the horizontal direction with respect to the opening of the second opening 301d. Therefore, the engaging member 16
In the direction in which the engagement between 310 and the fixing member 320 is released (the arrow L direction side), the operator engages the engagement member 1.
When operating 6310, with a finger inserted from the second opening 301d of the back case 300,
It is possible to make it difficult to displace the engagement member 16310 in the direction in which the engagement between the engagement member 16310 and the fixing member 320 is released. As a result, the substrate box 1 disposed on the fixing member 320.
An operator who wants to replace 00 is engaged by the engaging member 1631 from the back side of the back case 300.
It is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the back case 300 by manipulating 0 illegally.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, a back case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the operation element 315 of the engaging member 310 protrudes from the second opening 301d of the back case 300 has been described. However, in the seventeenth embodiment, the second opening 301d of the back case 17300 is projected. The operation element 315 protruding from the cover is covered with a part of the rear case at a predetermined position. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

161 (a) is a rear view of the back case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 161 (b) is a back case 173 along the CLXIb-CLXIb line in FIG. 161 (a).
FIG.

As shown in FIG. 161, the back case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 17301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 17301 toward the front. Are formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 17301 and 302. The bottom wall portion 17301 has a rectangular opening 301 at the center in the front view.
a is formed, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301 is visible through the opening 301a.

Further, the back case 17300 includes a protruding portion 301b that protrudes from two locations on the front side of the bottom wall portion 17301, a first opening portion 301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. A second opening 301d that opens at an opposing position, and a covering portion 17301e that covers the back surface of the second opening 301d on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side).

The covering portion 17301e is on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side) of the second opening 301d.
From the end of the head toward the back side (arrow B direction side). Further, the covering portion 17301e includes a bent portion 17301e1 in which the standing tip portion is bent toward the inside of the opening of the second opening portion 301d in the rear view. Thereby, the covering portion 17301e is on the first opening portion 301c side (
It is formed in a box shape in which the opposite side (arrow L direction side) and the opposite side (arrow L direction side) are open.

Further, the standing distance of the covering portion 17301e (the bent portion 1730 from the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301c).
1e1) is set to be larger than the projecting dimension of the operation element 315 projecting from the bottom wall portion 17301c. Further, the covering portion 17301e is a bent portion 17 in the rear view.
The dimension of 301e1 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is set to be larger than the dimension in the left-right direction of operation element 315 in the rear view.

As a result, in the state where the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, as shown in FIG. 161 (b), the operating element 315 is located inside the covering member 17301e. Placed in. Accordingly, the direction in which the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released (
When the operator operates the engaging member 310 in the direction of the arrow L), it is possible to make it difficult to grip the operating element 315 from the back side of the back case 17300. Thereby, it can suppress that the engagement member 310 is displaced to the direction (arrow L direction side) which cancels | releases engagement with the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320. FIG. As a result, an operator (player) who intends to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 is engaged with the engaging member 31 from the back side of the back case 17300.
It is possible to suppress the removal of the fixing member 320 from the back case 17300 by operating 0.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164, the rear case 183 in the eighteenth embodiment.
00 will be described. In the first embodiment, the engagement member 310 has a linear direction (arrow L−
Although the case of sliding displacement in the R direction) has been described, the engaging member 18310 in the eighteenth embodiment is rotationally displaced with respect to the back case 18300. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 162 and FIG. 163, the rear case 183 in the eighteenth embodiment.
00 and the operation of the engaging member 18310 will be described. 162 (a) and FIG.
63 (a) is a front view of the rear case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG.
FIG. 16B and FIG. 163B are rear views of the back case 18300. FIG. Note that FIG.
FIGS. 162A and 162B show a state where the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged. FIGS. 163A and 163B show the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320. The state where the engagement is released is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the back case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment is erected from the bottom wall portion 18301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 18301 toward the front. The outer wall portion 18302 is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 18301 and 18302. The back case 18300 is provided on the front side of the bottom wall portion 18301 (the open side formed in a box shape (side in the direction of arrow F)) 18310 and on the back side of the back case 18300. And a fixing member 18320 for fixing the substrate box 100 (main control device 110).

The bottom wall portion 18301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is said. The bottom wall portion 18301 has a first opening portion 18301c that opens to a position facing the fixing member 18320, and a projecting portion that is located below (in the direction of arrow D) the first opening portion 18301c and projects to the front side. 18301b.

The first opening 18301c is an opening for inserting an engaged portion 18332 of a fixing member 18320, which will be described later, and is formed in a larger shape than the engaged portion 18332 in a front view. Thus, after the accessory device (rotary unit 700) is arranged inside the back case 18300, the engaging portion of the fixing member 18320 can be arranged on the front side of the back case 18300 from the back side of the back case 18300. it can.

The protruding portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports an engaging member 18310, which will be described later, and the bottom wall portion 1
It protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the front of 8301b. In addition, a hole for screwing a screw is recessed in the protruding front end surface of the protruding portion 18301b. As a result, the engaging member 18310 is moved to the rear case 183.
In the state of being arranged at 00, the engagement member 1831 is screwed into the projecting portion 18301b.
0 can be prevented from coming off the protruding portion 18301b.

The outer wall portion 18302 has a left-right direction (arrow L) on a side surface on the right side (arrow R direction side) in a front view.
-R direction) is provided with an opening 18302a. The opening 18302a is formed on a rotation locus of an engagement member 18310 described later. Thus, after the engaging member 18310 is disposed inside the back case 18300, the engaging member 18310 can be protruded to the outside of the back case 18300 by rotating the engaging member 18310.

The fixing member 18320 includes an interposed member 18330 that engages with an engaging member 18310 described later, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the interposed member 18330.

The interposing member 18330 is formed in a box shape whose front side is open, a locking portion 18331 protruding from the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side), and a rear case from the side surface on one side (arrow R direction side). 300
The engaged portion 18332 that protrudes to the side and is formed in a frame shape, the insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39B) that opens in a circular shape on the box-shaped bottom surface (side surface on the arrow B direction side), and the rear surface Protruding protrusion 33
4 is mainly provided.

The locking portion 18331 has an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 18301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 18301c described above. The projecting wall 18301c1 projecting from is inserted into the bottom wall portion 18301.

Thus, when the interposed member 18330 (fixing member 18320) is disposed on the rear case 18300, the protruding wall 18301c1 is inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the interposed member 18330 so that the other side (arrow L). Direction side) can be locked to the back case 18300.

The engaged portion 18332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310, and the rear case 183.
The projecting dimension toward the 00 side (arrow F direction side) is the engagement member 1 disposed on the rear case 18300.
The distance between the front surface of the enclosed space and the front surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 is set to a dimension that exceeds 8310, and the bottom wall portion 1830 is from the front surface of the engagement member 18310.
It is set larger than the distance to the front of 1. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 and the engaging member 18310 are arranged at positions where they overlap in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The engaging member 18310 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and is bent from a second piece 18312 pivotally supported by the protruding portion 18301b of the back case 18300 and one end of the second piece 18312. The first piece 18311 is formed.

The second piece 18312 includes a shaft support hole 18312a that is opened in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed. Shaft support hole 18312a
Is a hole into which the protruding portion 18301b of the back case 18300 described above is inserted, so that the engagement member 18310 can be disposed in a state of being pivotally supported inside the back case 18300.

The first piece 18311 extends in an arc shape around the axis of the above-described shaft support hole 18312a. As a result, the displacement region of the first piece 18311 can be minimized when the engaging member 18310 is rotated about the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a. In addition, the first piece 18311 has an engagement portion 18316 protruding at both ends in the radial direction from the shaft support hole 18312a and an engagement portion 316 at the two locations at the end opposite to the connection side with the second piece 18312. The first piece 18 from substantially the middle position of
And a recess 18317 that is recessed in the extending direction of 311.

The two engaging portions 18316 have a substantially triangular outer shape in front view. Also,
One engagement portion 18316 of the two engagement portions 18316 has a diameter of the first piece 18311 from the end opposite to the connection portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connection portion side with the second piece 18312. It is formed in an outer shape that protrudes outward in the direction. The other engaging portion 18316 of the two engaging portions 18316
Is formed in an outer shape that protrudes radially inward of the first piece 18311 from the end opposite to the connection part with the second piece 18312 toward the connection part side with the second piece 18312.

The recess 18317 is formed by cutting out the first piece 18311 in the thickness direction, and the first
The end of the piece 18311 is recessed from the end opposite to the connection side with the second piece 18312 toward the connection side with the second piece 18312 along the extending direction of the first piece 18311. Therefore, the first piece 18
The end of 311 is split into two. Thus, the end of the first piece 18311 opposite to the connection side with the second piece 18312 is more easily elastically deformed than the connection side with the second piece 18312, and the engagement member 18310 is connected to the fixing member 18320. It can be easily engaged.

Next, the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 will be described. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 3, the interposition member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 are fastened together by screws inserted from the interposition member 18330 side before engaging with the engagement member 18310.

Further, the engaging member 18310 is provided with the protruding portion 1830 of the back case 18300 as described above.
1b is provided in a state of being pivotally supported, and the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is
The rear case 18300 is disposed so as to protrude from the opening 18302a.

The engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the back case 18300 has a center of gravity at the back case 1.
8300 is located closer to the opening 18302a than the protruding portion 18301b of the 8300, and in the state where no external force is applied, the connection between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is caused by the opening of the rear case 18300. A force rotated in a direction protruding from the portion 18302 a is applied to the engaging member 18310. As a result, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 is protruded to the outside of the rear case 18300, and the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 is increased. You can prevent forgetting.

The interposed member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 18320) in the fastened state are
The protruding wall 18301c1 protruding from the periphery of the first opening 18301c is inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the interposed member 18330, and the left side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 18320 is locked to the rear case 18300. Is done. In this case, the engaged portion 1833 of the fixing member 18320
2 is inserted inside the first opening 18301c, and the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 is disposed at a position facing the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310.

Next, the operator who engages the engaging member 18310 with the fixing member 18320 is the rear case 1.
By engaging the engagement member 18310 protruding from the opening 18302a of the 8300 (the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312) into the back case 18300 (arrow R1 direction side) (see FIG. 163), The joint member 18310 is rotated around the projecting portion 18301b.

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 162, the tip of the engaging member 18310 is moved to the engaged portion 1833.
2 can be inserted into the internal space. In this case, the distance between the outer end portions of the two engaging portions 18316 is set to be larger than the opening size in the vertical direction of the internal space of the engaged portion 18332, but by the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310. Since the first piece 18311 is easily elastically deformed, the end portion of the first piece 18311 is elastically deformed to the inside of the concave portion 18317 so that the distance between the outer end portions of the two engaging portions 18316 is increased. The end of the first piece 18311 can be inserted inside the engaged portion 18332 by making it smaller than the opening size in the vertical direction of the internal space of the engaging portion 18332.

Further, the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 of the engaging member 18310 is inserted inside the opening 18302a of the back case 18300, so that the engaging member 18310 is inserted.
However, it can suppress that the engaging member 18310 is operated from the outer side of the back case 18300 in the engaged state. As a result, the engaging member 18310 is illegally operated and the fixing member 183 is operated.
The board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the board 20 can be prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, release of engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the first opening portion 18301c is opened in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and the recessed portion 18317 of the engaging member 18310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320. However, it can be operated from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 1300 through the first opening 18301c.

Therefore, the outer portion of the recess 18317 of the engagement member 18310 is removed by using a dedicated tool or the like.
By being elastically deformed to the concave side of 317, the engagement between the engaging portion 18316 and the engaged portion 18332 of the engaging member 18310 is released. With this engagement released, the engagement member 18310
Is displaced in a direction (arrow L direction) to be pulled out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 18332, and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is returned, whereby the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 1833 are restored.
The engagement with 2 can be released.

In addition, it is preferable that the clearance gap between the outer side part of the recessed part 18317 of the engaging member 18310 and the 1st opening part 18301c is formed as small as possible. According to this, the finger of the person who removes the fixing member 18320 from the back case 300 can be made non-insertable, and a dedicated tool can be inserted. As a result, only the operator who has a dedicated tool can exchange the substrate box 100 (main control device 110), and can be prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized substrate box 100.

Next, a case where the engagement member 18310 is forgotten to be engaged with the fixing member 18320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic top view of the game board 13, FIG.
64 (b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. Note that FIG. 164 (a) and FIG.
In (b), the state which forgot to engage the engaging member 18310 with the to-be-engaged part 18332 is illustrated. FIGS. 164 (a) and 164 (b) show a state where a piece on the upper side of the outer frame 11 formed in a frame shape in front view is removed.

As described above, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 can be protruded outside the rear case 18300 by gravity. In this case, the engaging member 183 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the game board 13.
Distance dimension LR from the end of 10 to the right side (arrow R direction side) of rear case 18300
1 (see FIG. 164 (a)) is set larger than the inner left / right dimension LR2 (see FIG. 164 (b)) in the left / right direction of the outer frame 11 on which the game board 13 is disposed. Thus, when the game board 13 is to be inserted inside the outer frame 11 when the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged, the back side of the engagement member 18310 is brought into contact with the front of the outer frame 11. Can be touched. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are disengaged,
The engagement board 18310 and the fixing member 18 are restrained by disposing the game board 13 on the outer frame 11.
Forgetting engagement with 320 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 165 and 166, the engaging member 1931 in the nineteenth embodiment.
0 will be described. In the eighteenth embodiment, the engaging member 18310 is disposed on the inner side of the outer frame 11 to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being illegally operated. However, in the nineteenth embodiment, the releasing direction of the engaging member 19310 To prevent the engaging member 18310 from being manipulated illegally. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective front view of the engaging member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 166 (a) is a front view of the back case 18300, and FIG. 166 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the one-way 19350 along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 165, the engagement member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment is formed in a substantially L shape in front view, and has a second piece 19312 having a rotation axis with respect to the rear case 19300, and the second piece. And a first piece 18311 formed by bending from one end portion of 19312.

The second piece 19312 includes a fitting hole 19312b that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) at the end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed. The fitting hole 19312b is a hole into which a one-way 19350, which will be described later, is fitted, and the outer ring 1 of the one-way 19350.
The inner diameter is substantially the same as 9351.

The one-way 19350 includes an inner ring 19352 having a cam surface on the outer peripheral surface, and an inner ring 1
An outer ring 19351 formed in an annular shape surrounding the outer side of 9352, and a plurality of springs 19353 and rollers 19354 disposed between the outer ring 19351 and the inner ring 19352 (see FIG. 166 (b)). When the inner ring 19352 tries to rotate in one direction with respect to 19351, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 19354 increases and acts as resistance to transmit power to the outer ring, and the inner ring moves in the other direction with respect to the outer ring 19351. When it rotates, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 10354 decreases, and this is a cam type clutch that slides and cuts power transmission.
A detailed description of the one-way 19350 will be given later.

An operator 19360 is inserted into the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 at the center. The operation element 19360 includes an operation part 19361 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 19300, and an insertion part 19362 protruding from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation part 19361. Prepare mainly.

The operation portion 19361 is a portion where the operator operates the operation element 19360 from the back side of the back case 19300, is formed in a circular shape, and has an outer shape larger than an opening through which an insertion portion 19362 described later is inserted. . As a result, the operating element 19360 is attached to the rear case 1930.
When arranged from the back side of 0, the operation unit 19361 can be prevented from slipping out to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 19300.

The insertion portion 19362 is formed in a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operation portion 19361, and protrudes from the front side (arrow F direction side). The insertion portion 19362 includes a protruding wall 19362a that protrudes in the radial direction on the outer peripheral surface thereof.

The projecting wall 19362a has an inner ring 1935 of the one-way 19350 with respect to the insertion portion 19362.
2 is an engagement portion that prevents the wheel 2 from idling, and a recess 1935 formed in the inner ring 19352.
2a is inserted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the rotational force acting on the operation element 19360 from being transmitted to the inner ring 19352.

Furthermore, a concave portion that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front is formed on the projecting distal end surface of the insertion portion 19362, and a screw is screwed into the concave portion from the front side to the back side, so that the one-way 19350 is formed. The operation element 19360 can be connected to.

Next, an arrangement state of the back case 19300 and the engaging member 19310 will be described with reference to FIG. The back case 19300 includes a bottom wall portion 19301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 19301 toward the front, and each of the wall portions 19301 and 302 is provided. Is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) opened.
Further, the back case 19300 has a front side of the bottom wall portion 19301 (open side formed in a box shape (
An engagement member 19310 disposed on the arrow F direction side)), a fixing member 18320 disposed on the back side of the back case 19300 and fixing the substrate box 100 (main control device 110),
Is provided.

The bottom wall portion 19301 has an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 19301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is said. The bottom wall portion 19301 has a first opening portion 18301c that opens to a position facing the fixing member 18320, and a lower portion of the first opening portion 18301c (arrow D).
) And is open in the front-rear direction, and the insertion portion 1936 of the operation element 19360 described above inside.
And an opening (not shown) into which 2 is inserted.

The engaging member 19310 described above is arranged from the back side of the back case 19300 to the operating element 19360 after the engaging member 19310 in the state of the one-way 19350 is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 10301 inside the fitting hole 19312b. The insertion portion 19362 of the rear case 1930
It is disposed on the bottom wall portion 19301 by being inserted into the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 through the zero opening.

Next, the operation of the one-way 19350 will be described. One way 1 as mentioned above
9350 is switched between the case where transmission of power to the outer ring 19351 is allowed and the case where it is cut off in the rotation direction between the one direction of the inner ring 19352 and the other direction.

First, the case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring will be described. FIG. 166 (
b), when the inner ring 19352 is rotated in one direction (the direction of the arrow LK (see FIG. 166 (b))), the roller 193 is interposed between the cam surface of the inner ring 19352 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351.
54, the contact of the roller 19354 becomes resistance, and the power of the inner ring 19352 is
9351. In this case, the rotation direction in one direction is set to a direction in which the engaging member 19310 is engaged with the fixing member 18320.

Next, the case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is interrupted will be described. When the inner ring 19352 is rotated in the other direction (the direction of the arrow RK (see FIG. 166 (b))), the roller 19354 is displaced inward in the radial direction of the inner ring 19352 by the resistance that contacts the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351. Thereby, the contact surface pressure between the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351 and the roller 19354 is lowered, and the roller 19354 slides with respect to the outer ring 19351 to interrupt power transmission. In this case, the rotation direction in the other direction is set to a direction in which the engagement member 19310 is disengaged from the fixing member 18320.

As a result, the operating member 1310 is disposed in a state where the engaging member 19310 is disposed on the back case 19300.
The engagement member 19310 can be engaged with the fixing member 18320 by rotating 9360. Further, from the state where the engaging member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged, the operation element 19
It is restricted that the engagement member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 are disengaged by rotating 360. As a result, the engaging member 19310 (operator 19360) is illegally operated,
It is possible to prevent the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 from being replaced with an unauthorized substrate.

Next, referring to FIG. 167 to FIG. 169, the engaging member 2031 in the twentieth embodiment.
0 will be described. In the first embodiment, the movement of the engaging member 310 is the rotation unit 70.
Although the case where the screw is inserted into the 0 back base 720 has been described,
In the 0 embodiment, when the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the engaging member 20
310 is formed on the rear base 20720 of the rotation unit 20700 by the movement of 310.
It is regulated by being engaged with 724a. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 167 and 168, the engaging member 2031 in the twentieth embodiment.
0 and the rotation unit 20700 will be described. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the back case 20300 and the rotation unit 20700 in the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 168 (a)
FIG. 168 is a front view of the engaging member 20310, and FIG. 168 (b) is a rear view of the rotating unit 20700 and the engaging member 20310.

The back case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment is similar to the back case 300 in the first embodiment. The bottom wall portion 301 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the four edges of the bottom wall portion 301 face the front. The outer wall 302 is erected, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the walls 301 and 302. The bottom wall portion 301 is formed with an opening 301a (see FIG. 5) having a rectangular shape in front view at the center thereof, and the bottom wall portion 30 is passed through the opening 301a.
The 3rd symbol display device 81 (refer FIG. 2) arrange | positioned by the back surface of 1 is made visible.

The back case 20300 according to the twentieth embodiment includes an engagement member 20310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)), and the back case 20300. Arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), the substrate box 100 (main controller 11)
0) is mainly provided. Further, the back case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment is provided with a rotating unit 20700 in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the engaging member 20310 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment has a crank shape when viewed from the front. The first piece 31 is formed in the direction parallel to each other.
1 and the 2nd piece 20312 and the 3rd piece 313 which connects the edge parts of the 1st piece 311 and the 2nd piece 20312 in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the 1st piece 311 and the 2nd piece 20312 Is done.

The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are each formed with a long and long sliding groove 314 in the extending direction thereof, whereby the engaging member 20310 is formed of the first piece 311 and the second piece 2.
It is possible to slide in the extending direction of 0312 (arrow LR direction).

The second piece 20312 includes a recess 20312c that is recessed on a side surface parallel to the sliding direction of the engagement member 20310. The recess 20312c is a recess into which the distal end of the engagement portion 20724a of the back base 20720 of the rotation unit 20700 described later is inserted.
It is formed in a shape substantially the same as the outer shape of 24a.

More specifically, the recess 20312c has a dimension SH1 (see FIG. 168 (a)) to the end of the second piece 20312 on the side opposite to the connection side with the third piece 313 (arrow L direction side). The dimension SH2 (FIG. 168 (FIG. 168) in which the protruding portion 301b can slide inside the sliding groove 314 of the 20310 is provided.
It is set substantially the same as b). The recess 20312c is recessed in a triangle having a right angle when viewed from the front, and the right-angled portion is set on the connection side (arrow R direction side) of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313.

The rotation unit 20700 has an opening 301 in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 20300.
a right side of the lower part of a (a front-side rectangular back base 20720 disposed on the arrow R direction side, and a rotating body 800 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back base 20720 9
3), and the player can visually recognize the effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via the light-transmitting center frame 86 disposed on the game board 13.

The back base 20720 is a plate member that connects the back surface of the ball receiving base 710 and the back side (arrow B direction side) of the decoration unit 750, and is disposed on the back side of the ball receiving base 710 and the decoration unit 750. The back base 20720 includes a standing wall 20724 that stands from the back.

The standing wall 20724 is extended in a shape surrounding the outer edge of the engaging member 20310 disposed in the back case 20300. Further, the standing wall 20724 is provided with the recess 20 of the engaging member 20310.
An engaging portion 20724a is formed at a position facing the 312c and the tip is inserted inside the recess 20312c.

The engaging portion 20724a is projected from the standing wall 20724 in the direction (arrow R direction) in which the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, and is erected in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. The wall 20724 is formed with a predetermined gap. Thereby, the engaging portion 2
The rigidity of 0724a can be reduced, and the engaging portion 20724a can be easily elastically deformed. Also,
An area in which the engaging portion 20724a can be elastically deformed can be ensured by the gap between the standing wall 20724 and the engaging portion 20724a.

Further, the engaging portion 20724a has a bent portion 2 that bends toward the engaging member 20310 at the protruding tip portion.
0724a1 and the bent portion 20724a1 has the shape of the bent portion 2031 described above in front view.
It is formed in a triangular shape substantially the same shape as 2c. As a result, the engagement member 20310 has the bent portion 2 inside the recess 20312c of the engagement member 20310 before the engagement with the fixing member 320.
0724a1 is arranged. Therefore, the engagement member 20310 is moved in its displacement direction (arrow LR).
Direction) can be made difficult to slide (see FIG. 168 (b)).

Therefore, it can be suppressed that the engaging member 20310 vibrates with respect to the back case 20300 by a force such as vibration or shaking, and moves in the engaging direction with the fixing member 320 (arrow R direction). Therefore, before the fixing member 320 is disposed on the rear case 20300, the position of the engaging member 20310 is displaced, and the fixing member 32 is disposed when the fixing member 320 is disposed on the rear case 20300.
It is possible to suppress the 0 engaged portion 332 from coming into contact with the engaging member 20310. In other words,
When the fixing member 320 is disposed on the back case 20300, the engaged portion 33 of the fixing member 320 is provided.
It is possible to suppress the engagement member 20310 from being located in the displacement region when the 2 (see FIG. 167) is disposed. As a result, since it is not necessary to operate the engaging member 20310 in the direction to release the engagement with the fixing member 320, it is possible to improve workability when engaging the engaging member 20310 with the fixing member 320. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the engagement member 20310 and the rotation unit 20700 in a state where the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged will be described. FIG. 169
(A) is a rear view of the rotation unit 20700 and the engaging member 20310, and FIG.
b) is a rear view of the back case 20300. FIG. Note that FIG. 169 (a) and FIG. 169 (b
) Shows a state in which the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 20320 are engaged. In FIG. 169 (b), a part of the engaging member 20310 and the outer shape of the standing wall 20724 are shown by chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 169, the operation element 3 starts from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 20300.
15 is operated, and the engagement member 20310 is arranged on the left side (in the arrow L direction side) when viewed from the front with respect to the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 20300.
1, the concave portion 20 of the engaging member 20310 is displaced to the right (in the direction of arrow R) when viewed from the front.
The bent portion 20724a1 disposed inside 312c is pushed out into the recess 20312c by the inclined surface of the recess 20312c.

Here, as described above, the recess 20312c has a distance dimension SH1 to the end of the second piece 20312 opposite to the connection side with the third piece 313 (arrow L direction side) (see FIG. 168 (a)). However, the dimension SH2 (in which the projecting portion 301b can slide inside the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 20310)
168 (b)), the engaging member 20310 is fixed to the fixing member 320.
The third piece 31 of the second piece 20312 of the engagement member 20310 is displaced to the position where it is engaged with the third piece 31.
3 is connected to the bent portion 20724a1 and the engaging member 20 on the opposite side (arrow L direction side).
It is arrange | positioned in the position adjacent to the displacement direction (arrow LR direction) of 310. FIG. Thereby, it can suppress that the engaging member 20310 is displaced in the direction (arrow L direction) which cancels | releases engagement with the fixing member 320 illegally.

As in the first embodiment, the engaging member 20310 has an engaging portion 316 that is a fixed member 3.
By being hooked (engaged) with the 20 engaged portions 332, the displacement of the engagement member 20310 in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member 320 is restricted. However, since the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is inserted through the first opening 301c of the back case 300, the engaged portion 3
There is a possibility that the engagement between the engagement portion 316 and the engagement portion 316 is illegally released through the first opening 301c.

On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, the engagement member 316 of the engagement member 20310 that engages with the fixing member 320 is displaced in the direction in which the engagement of the engagement member 20310 with the fixing member 320 is released.
Since the end on the opposite side can be brought into contact with the bent portion 20724a1 and regulated, an improper object is inserted from the first opening 301c, and the end of the engaging member 20310 and the bent portion 20724a
It can suppress that engagement with 1 is cancelled | released. As a result, the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 3
The board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 can be prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized board due to the unauthorized release of the engagement with the board 20.

Note that the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 20310 are formed by removing the rotating unit 20700 disposed on the inner side (bottom wall portion 301) of the back case 20300 from the back case 20300, and the end portion and the bent portion of the engaging member 20310. After releasing the engagement with 20724a1, the end of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 20310 is elastically deformed, and the end of the engagement member 20310 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, thereby The engagement can be released.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 20300, it is necessary to remove the rotating unit 20700 from the front side of the back case 20300.
It can be suppressed that the engagement between 0310 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 is replaced with an illegal board.

Further, since the engaging member 20310 is formed by bending the shape in front view in a crank shape as described above, illegal objects such as wires and wires inserted from the first piece 311 side are linearly second. It is possible to restrict the feeding to the end of the piece 20312. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an unauthorized object inserted from the first piece 311 side from being accurately sent to the engaging portion between the second piece 20312 and the bent portion 20724a1. As a result, the engagement between the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released, and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 can be prevented from being replaced with an illegal board. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173, the rotation unit 21 in the twenty-first embodiment.
700 will be described. In the first embodiment, the rear base 72 of the rotary unit 700 is used.
Although the case where the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted by the screw inserted through 0 has been described,
In the twenty-first embodiment, the movement of the engagement member 310 is restricted by inserting the first piece 311 into the insertion portion 21724b formed in the back surface base 21720 of the rotation unit 21700. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171, the entire configuration of the engaging member 310 and the rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the back case 300 and the rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment. FIG. 171 (a
) Is a rear view of the rotating unit 21700 and the engaging member 310, and FIG.
171 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a rotary unit 21700 taken along the line CLXXIb-CLXXIb in FIG.

The back case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment is similar to the back case 300 in the first embodiment. The bottom wall 301 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 face toward the front. The outer wall 302 is erected, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the walls 301 and 302. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

Further, the rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment includes an engagement member 310 disposed on the front side (open side (arrow F direction side) formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear case 21.
The board box 100 (main control device 110) is disposed on the back side of the 300 (arrow B direction side).
And a fixing member 320 for fixing the main body. Furthermore, a rotating unit 21700 is disposed in front of the bottom wall 301 in the rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment.
A rear base 21720 having a rectangular shape in front view disposed on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and the back surface thereof And a rotating body 800 (see FIG. 93) disposed on the front side of the base 21720, and an effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via a light-transmitting center frame 86 disposed on the game board 13. It can be made visible to the player.

The back base 21720 is a plate member that connects the back surface of the ball receiving base 710 and the back side of the decoration unit 750, and is disposed on the back side of the ball receiving base 710 and the decoration unit 750. In addition, the back surface base 21720 includes a standing wall 21724 that is erected on the back surface.

The standing wall 21724 is extended in a shape surrounding the outer edge of the engaging member 310 in a state of being disposed in the back case 300. Further, the standing wall 21724 has the engagement member 310 that is connected to the rear case 30.
A state (engagement member 310 and fixing member 320) located on the left (arrow L direction side) end with respect to 0
In a state where the engagement with the engagement member 310 is released) (indicated by an arrow L).
The insertion portion 21724b is provided so as to protrude (toward the direction).

The insertion portion 21724b has a displacement direction of the engaging member 310 from the standing wall 21724 (arrow LR).
And a dimension that overlaps with the engaging member 310 in the state of being engaged with the fixing member 320 in the direction of gravity (the direction of the arrow UB). Also, the insertion portion 21
A bent portion 21724b1 bent to the back side (engagement member 310 side) is formed at the distal end portion of the 724b, and the bent distal end portion of the bent portion 21742b1 is in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the pachinko machine 10. The length overlaps with the engaging member 310.

Furthermore, the width dimension in the up-down direction (arrow UD direction) of the insertion portion 21742b is set to be smaller than the width dimension in the up-down direction of the recess 317 of the engagement member 310. Therefore, the insertion portion 21724b is in a state where the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320.
The bent portion 21724b1 is inserted inside the recess 317. Thereby, it can suppress that the 1st piece 311 of the engagement member 310 is elastically deformed inside the recessed installation of the recessed part 317 from the state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 were engaged. As a result, the engaging member 20310
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being illegally released from the engagement with the fixing member 320 and being replaced with an illegal board.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173, the operation of the insertion portion 21724b when the engagement member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320 will be described. FIG. 172 (a) and FIG. 173 (
a) is a rear view of the rotating unit 21700 and the engaging member 310. FIG. FIGS. 172 (b) and 173 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the back case 300 and the rotation unit 21700. 172 (a) and 172 (b) show a state in which the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released, and FIGS. 173 (a) and 173 (b) show the engagement. Joint member 3
A state in which 10 is engaged with the fixing member 320 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the engagement member 310 is engaged with the fixed member 320 at the end of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 from the state where the engagement with the fixed member 320 is released. Part 3
When inserted into the internal space 32, the end of the first piece 311 is elastically deformed toward the inside of the recess 317. Thereby, the width dimension in the up-down direction (arrow UD direction) of the recessed part 317 is made smaller than the width dimension of the insertion part 21724b in the up-down direction.

Further, when the engaging portion 316 is located in the internal space of the engaged portion 332 (in the case shown in FIG. 173 (a)), the end of the first piece 311 is the protruding tip of the insertion portion 21724b. It is arranged at a position exceeding. In other words, the length dimension of the engaging portion 316 in the left-right direction is the insertion portion 21.
It is set to be larger than the facing distance from the projecting tip of 724b to the end of the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320.

Therefore, when the engaging portion 316 is pushed out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, the end portion on the first piece 311 side of the engaging member 310 can be brought into contact with the bent portion 21724b1 of the insertion portion 21724b. . In this case, the distal end of the insertion portion 21724b is pushed out to the front side (arrow F direction side) along the inclined surface of the bent portion 21724b1. Thereby, the engaging member 310 can be displaced to a position where it engages with the fixing member 320.

As shown in FIG. 171, when the engaging portion 316 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, as described above, from the width dimension of the concave portion 317 in the vertical direction of the first piece 311. Also, since the width dimension in the vertical direction of the insertion portion 21724b is increased,
The bent portion 21724b1 is inserted into the inside.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 from being elastically deformed inside the recessed portion 317. As a result, the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released, and the board box 100 (the main control device 1) connected to the fixing member 320.
10) can be prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized substrate.

Note that the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are arranged inside the back case 300 (the bottom wall portion 301).
) Is removed from the back case 21300 and the engagement between the end of the engagement member 310 and the back case 20300 is released, and then the first of the engagement member 310 is removed.
The end of the piece 311 can be elastically deformed, and the end of the engaging member 310 can be pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332 to release the engagement between them.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 21300, it is necessary to remove the rotating unit 21700 from the front side of the back case 21300.
10 and the fixing member 320 are illegally released from the back side of the back case 21300,
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, referring to FIGS. 174 to 176, the engaging member 2231 in the twenty-second embodiment.
0 and the fixing member 22320 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 has been described.
In the twenty-second embodiment, the fixing member 22 is provided in the concave portion 22311a provided in the engaging member 22310.
A bent portion 22332a1 formed at 320 is engaged. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

With reference to FIG. 174 to FIG. 176 (a), the engaging member 22310 in the twenty-second embodiment.
The structure of the fixing member 22320 will be described. FIG. 174 is a perspective front view of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. 175 (a) and 175 (b) are front views of the back case 22300. FIG. FIG. 176 (a) shows the CLXXVIa− of FIG. 175 (b).
It is a schematic cross section of back case 22300 in a CLXXVIa line. Note that FIG.
FIG. 1A shows a state before the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged.
75 (b) shows a state in which the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged.

As shown in FIGS. 174 to 176 (a), the rear case 223 according to the twenty-second embodiment.
00 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall portion 302 standing from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. In addition, the back case 22300 includes an engaging member 22310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the bottom wall portion 3.
And a fixing member 22320 for fixing the substrate box 100 (main control device 110).

The engaging member 22310 has a crank shape as viewed from the front, and includes a first piece 22231 and a second piece 312 that extend in parallel to each other, and a first piece 2231 thereof.
The first and second pieces 312 are composed of a third piece 313 that connects ends of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312.

In addition, the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 have long and long sliding grooves 31 in the extending direction.
4 is formed, whereby the engaging member 22310 is slidable in the extending direction of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 (arrow LR direction).

The first piece 22311 includes a recess 22311a that is recessed toward the back side (arrow B direction side) on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the end opposite to the side to which the third piece 313 is connected. .

The concave portion 22311a is a bent portion 22332a1 formed in a fixing member 22320 described later.
Is inserted to engage the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. As will be described later, one end (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 is fixed. When housed in the internal space of the engaged portion 22332 of the member 22320, the fixing member 223
20 is formed at a position facing 22232a.

In addition, the internal shape of the concave portion 22311a is formed in a substantially right triangle shape in cross section, the right angle portion is set on the end side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311, and the concave bottom surface is the first. It is formed as an inclined surface that becomes deeper on the back side (arrow B direction) toward the end portion side of the one piece 22311.

The fixing member 22320 includes an interposed member 22330 that engages with the engaging member 22310 described above, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the back side of the interposed member 22330.

The interposition member 22330 is formed in a box shape whose front side (arrow F direction side) is open, a locking portion 331 protruding on one side (arrow R direction side), and the other side (arrow L direction side). The engaged portion 22332 that protrudes from the side surface of the rear case 22300 to the bottom wall 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) and is formed in a frame shape, and the box-shaped bottom surface (side surface on the arrow B direction side) Are mainly provided with an insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39B) that opens in a circular shape and a protrusion 334 that protrudes from the back surface.

The engaged portion 22332 has a first piece 2231 of the engaging member 22310 in the enclosed internal space.
1 is a portion into which an end on one side (arrow R direction side) is inserted, and an inner edge shape thereof is a first piece 22.
It is set slightly larger than the outer shape of 311. The engaged portion 22332 is engaged with the engaged portion 22332 of the engaging member 22310 from one side on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the frame shape.
And a protrusion 22332a protruding in the direction of insertion into the arrow (direction of arrow R).

The protrusion 22332a is a bent portion 2233 that bends to the front end (arrow F direction side) at the end of the tip.
2a1 and the bent portion 22332a1 thereof is the concave portion 223 of the engaging member 22310 described above.
By being inserted into 11a, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be engaged. That is, the bent portion 22332a1 includes the engaged member 22310 and the engaged portion 22332.
It is formed at a position facing the concave portion 22311a in the inserted state.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the engaging portion of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is formed on the front side with the engaging member 22310 sandwiched with respect to the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 22300. Is done. Accordingly, the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be separated from the first opening 301c formed in the bottom wall portion 301.
It can be suppressed that an unauthorized member such as a wire or a wire is inserted from the opening 301c and the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is illegally released.

Further, since the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 can be disposed between the bottom wall portion 301 and the engaging portions of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, the bottom wall portion 301 is provided.
It is possible to suppress a wire, a wire, or the like that is illegally inserted from the opening such as the first opening 301c formed in the straight line from reaching the engaging portions of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. As a result, it is possible to suppress an unauthorized member (such as a wire or a wire) from being inserted through the opening of the bottom wall portion 301 and the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 being illegally released.

In the present embodiment, the protrusions 22332a are provided so as to protrude in the insertion direction of the engagement member 22310 into the internal space of the engaged part 22332. Therefore, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 223
20 is set on the front side of the fixing member 22320. As a result, the bottom wall 3
When an unauthorized member such as a wire or a wire is inserted from the first opening 301c of 01, the bottom wall portion 3 indicates the insertion direction of the unauthorized member that reaches the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.
It can be inclined with respect to the front of 01. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to transmit the force in the direction of releasing the engagement of the engagement portion between the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 from the tip of the unauthorized member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the unauthorized member from being inserted from the first opening 301c of the bottom wall portion 301 and the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 being illegally released.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176 (b), an engagement member 23310 and a fixing member 23320 in the 23rd embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 22232a that engages the engagement member 22310 in the insertion direction of the engagement member 22310 into the engaged portion 22332 is provided, but in the twenty-third embodiment, Engagement portion 23 of engagement member 23310
A protrusion 23332a is provided to protrude in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of 332. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 176 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case 23300 in the 23rd embodiment. Note that the cross-sectional view in FIG. 176 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view in FIG. 176 (a). In the twenty-third embodiment, as described above, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 223 in the twenty-second embodiment are used.
20, only the engagement position is different. Therefore, the portions other than the engagement portion between the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 are the same as those in the twenty-second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

Note that the back case 22300 in the twenty-third embodiment has a bottom wall portion 233 that is substantially rectangular in front view.
01 and an outer wall 302 standing from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 23301 toward the front, and each of the wall portions 23301 and 302 has a box shape in which one surface side (front side) is opened. It is formed. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a (see FIG. 5) having a rectangular front view at the center thereof, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 through the opening 301a. 2) is visible.

Further, the back case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment is the front side of the bottom wall portion 23301 (
An engagement member 23310 disposed on the open side (arrow F direction side) formed in a box shape, and disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 23300, and the substrate box 100 (main control device). 110) is mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 176 (b), in the twenty-third embodiment, the engaged portion 2333 is as described above.
The projecting direction of the projecting part 23332a projecting from 2 is the projecting part 23332a (
A bent portion 23332a1 that is set in the opposite direction (arrow L direction) to that of the protrusion 233332a and is bent toward the back side (arrow B direction side) is formed.

The engagement member 23310 has a bent portion 23332a1 at a position facing the bent portion 23332a1.
A rectangular opening 23310b larger than the outer shape is formed. Thereby, the engaging member 23
When 310 is inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 23332 of the fixing member 23320, the opening 2
The bent portion 23332a1 is inserted inside 3310b, and the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 are engaged.

Further, in the bottom wall portion 23301 of the back case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment, a third opening portion 23301e is formed at a position facing the fixing member 23320. The operator can release the engagement portion between the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 from the back side of the bottom wall portion 23301 by the third opening portion 23301e. As a result, the back case 23300
Thus, the work of removing the fixing member 23320 can be simplified.

Next, referring to FIGS. 177 and 178, the back case 243 in the twenty-fourth embodiment.
00 will be described. In the eighteenth embodiment, the fixing member 18320 is attached to the bottom wall portion 1830.
In the case where the fixing member 18320 is disengaged from the bottom wall portion 24301 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the engaging member 24320 is released from the bottom wall portion 24301. The portion to be inserted into the fixing member 24320 is cut.
In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 177 (a) is a front view of the back case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 177 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case 24300 along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177 (a). FIG. 178 shows the CLXXVIII-C of FIG. 177 (b).
It is sectional drawing of the back case 24300 in a LXXVIII line.

As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the rear case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment.
Includes a bottom wall portion 24301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 24301 toward the front surface. It is formed in a box shape with the (front side) open. Further, the back case 24300 has a bottom wall 2
Engagement member 2 disposed on the front side of 4301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side))
4310 and the back side of the bottom wall portion 24301, and the substrate box 100 (main controller 1).
10) and a fixing member 24320 for fixing.

The bottom wall portion 24301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front at the center, and the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 24301 through the opening 301a.
Reference) is visible. Further, the bottom wall portion 24301 has a first opening portion 24301c that opens to a position facing the fixing member 24320, and a left side (arrow L direction side) of the first opening portion 24301c, and a front-rear direction (arrow F− The operation element 24 which opens in the (B direction) and which will be described later inside.
360 (not shown) into which the insertion portion 24362 of 360 is inserted.

The engaging member 24310 includes a second piece 24312 formed in a T shape in front view, and the second piece 2
And a first piece 24311 bent from the end of 4312 and extending in an arc shape. The second piece 24312 is a through-hole 24 that penetrates in a front-rear direction through a connecting portion between two orthogonally extending portions.
312d is provided, and the distance from the through-hole 24312d to the outside of the extended portion of the second piece 24312 is set substantially the same.

The through hole 24312d is a portion into which an insertion portion 24362 of an operation element 24360 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the insertion portion 24362. Thus, when the operating element 24360 is rotated, the engaging member 24310 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 24312d.

The first piece 24311 is formed in an arc shape centering on the through hole 24312d, and the second piece 2
Each end of 4312 protrudes in one direction of rotation (front view left rotation). Also,
Each of the first pieces 24311 has an engaging portion 24316 protruding at both ends in the radial direction centered on the axis of the through hole 24312d at the protruding tip portion, and from the protruding tip surface toward the connecting side of the second piece 24312. A recessed portion 24317 that is recessed.

The engaging portion 24316 is a portion to be engaged with a fixing member 24320 described later, and the recessed portion 24.
By 317, the protruding tip end portion (the portion where the engaging portion 24316 is formed) of the first piece 24311 can be elastically deformed and engaged with the engaged portion 24332 formed on the fixing member 24320. In addition, the detailed description about the shape of the engaging part 24316 and the recessed part 24317 is mentioned later.

The operation element 24360 is an operation member that transmits an operation from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301 to an engagement member 24310 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301. And an operation portion 24361 formed in a columnar shape, and an insertion portion 24362 protruding coaxially with the operation portion 24361. The operation portion 24361 is formed in the bottom wall portion 24301, and an outer diameter is set to a size larger than an opening through which the insertion portion 24362 is inserted. Thereby, it can suppress that the whole operation element 24360 is displaced to the front side of the bottom wall part 24301. FIG.

The insertion portion 24362 is a portion that is inserted into the through-hole 24312d of the engagement member 24310 as described above, and thereby the rotational force input from the operation portion 24361 is applied to the engagement member 24.
310.

The fixing member 24320 includes an interposed member 24330 that engages with the engaging member 24310 described above, and a shaft support member 340 disposed on the back side of the interposed member 24330.

The interposed member 24330 is formed in a box shape whose front side (arrow F direction side) is open. Also,
The interposed member 24330 includes a housing portion 24335 that protrudes from the front and is formed in a box shape with the lower side (arrow D direction side) open. The accommodating part 24335 has the engaging member 2 inside.
4310 is the portion into which the engagement portion (the tip portion of the first piece 24311) is inserted, and the lower open portion is arranged on the displacement locus of the first piece 24311 of the engagement member 24310 described above. Thereby, the engaging member 24310 can be rotated to accommodate the end of the first piece 24311 of the engaging member 24310 in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335.

In addition, the accommodating portion 24335 is formed so that its internal space is larger than the engaging portion of one engaging member 24310. Thereby, when the engaging member 24310 is cut as will be described later, the cut portion of the engaging member 24310 can be housed in the internal space of the housing portion 24335. In the present embodiment, the size of the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 is the engagement member 243.
10 engaging portions (the tip portion of the first piece 24311) is set to approximately three times the receiving portion 24.
At least three engagement members 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space 335.

As shown in FIG. 178, the accommodating portion 24335 is opened at the lower side, and a stepped portion 24335a protrudes in a stepped manner from the opening portion, and the engaging member 24310 accommodated inside the accommodating portion 24335 at the stepped portion 24335a. The engaging portion 24316 is engaged. As a result, when the engaging member 24310 is rotated, the distal end portion of the first piece 24311 can be inserted into the accommodating portion 24335 and can be engaged with the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24320.

In this case, the recessed depth SH3 (see FIG. 178) of the recessed portion 24317 is equal to the accommodating portion 243.
35 is set to be smaller than the distance dimension SH4 from the end of the first piece 24311 in the state of being accommodated in the engagement 35 to the lower end of the accommodation portion 24335. Therefore, the engaged first piece 24311
The recessed portion 24317 formed in the storage portion 24335 is housed inside the housing portion 24335. Thereby, the end of the first piece 24311 is elastically deformed, and the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24 are thereby deformed.
It can suppress that engagement with 320 is cancelled | released.

Therefore, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the first piece 24311 inserted inside the housing portion 24335.
By cutting the first piece 24311 protruding from the storage portion 24335, the bottom wall portion 24301
The fixing member 24320 can be removed.

In this case, the distance dimension SH5 (see FIG. 178) from the upper inner edge of the accommodating part 24335 to the tip of the first piece 24311 is set to be larger than the distance dimension SH4 described above. Thereby, the cut part of the first piece 24311 can be moved above the accommodating part 24335, and another first piece 24311 is inserted from the open side (arrow F direction side) of the accommodating part 24335 to thereby form the step part 24335a. Can be engaged.

Therefore, the number of times the fixing member 24320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 is determined by the engagement member 24.
This can be determined by the number of remaining first pieces 24311 of 310 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335. As a result, the fixing member 2432
When 0 is illegally removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 and the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 24320 is replaced with an unauthorized substrate, the engaging member 24
The operator can recognize that the fixing member 24320 has been removed illegally by the number of the remaining first pieces 24311 of 310 or the number of the cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335.

Further, as described above, the engaging member 24310 uses the region on the side where the second piece 24312 is formed in a T shape in front view and the first piece 24311 is not formed (the upper side of the T shape), The first piece 24311 can be inserted into the fixing member 24320 by rotating the engaging member 24310. Further, when the first piece 24311 is cut, the engaging member 24310 can be rotated using the cut region of the first piece 24311, and the next (other) first piece 24311 is fixed to the fixing member 24320. Can be inserted. Thereby, the accommodating part 2433 of the 1st piece 24311.
5 can be determined. Therefore, the operator is not cut first
Since it is possible to determine where the piece 24311 is located and determine whether the fixing member 24320 has been illegally released, it is more illegal than the operator counting the number of the first pieces 24311. It is possible to suppress the operator from overlooking the traces.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the decoration member 154 of the general prize opening unit 150 is the main body 1.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the decorative member 154 is bonded to the front side of the base plate 60. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.
FIG. 179 (b) shows a state in which the general prize opening unit 25150 is disassembled from the base plate 60.

The gaming board 25013 in the 25th embodiment is the gaming board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 25013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60.
The game board 25013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general winning opening 63, a first Winning mouth 6
4, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion is the back surface of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. Furthermore, in the 25th embodiment, the second opening 60b of the base 60 (FIG. 1).
1) is provided with a general winning opening unit 25150.

As shown in FIG. 179, the general prize opening unit 25150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment includes a main body 151 disposed along the front surface of the base plate 60. The first standing portion 152 standing from the end of the main body 151 and the second standing portion standing from the front of the main body 141 and having one end connected to the first standing portion 152 1
53, a decorative member 25154 disposed on the back side of the main body 151, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) general winning openings 63 formed in the main body 151.

The decorative member 25154 is formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive material, and is decorated with a pattern or characters (patterns) connected to the decorative member 60c disposed on the front side of the base plate 60. Also,
The decorative member 25154 is formed such that the outer edge thereof is slightly smaller than the inner edge of the recess 151b formed in the main body 151.

In addition, the decorative member 25154 includes an adhesive tape 25154a that is bonded to the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) at the end of the back surface of the decorative member 25154. As a result, the decorative member 25154 can be adhered to the base plate 60 and disposed. Therefore, the operator can attach the decorative member 25154 to the front surface of the base plate 60 while visually recognizing the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 when placing the decorative member 25154 on the base plate 60. Therefore,
It is possible to easily align the decoration positions of the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60. As a result, the decoration position of the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 is suppressed from shifting, and the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 are given to the player as one decoration. Easy to see.

Further, since the decorative member 25154 is directly attached to the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c), the front-rear direction of the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c is more than that in the case where the front side of the main body 151 is decorated. The arrangement in the direction of arrow FB can be made closer. As a result, each decoration member 25154, 6 when the player visually recognizes the decoration member 25154 from an oblique direction.
It can suppress that the position shift of the decoration of 0c becomes large. As a result, the decorative member 25 is given to the player.
The player can easily recognize the 154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 as one decoration.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the concave dimension X1 of the concave portion 151b of the main body 151 is set smaller than the width dimension X2 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in which the decorative member 25154 and the adhesive tape 25154a are combined. Is done. Thus, when the main body 151 is disposed from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decorative member 25154, the decorative member 25154 is recessed from the concave portion 151b.
It can suppress that the front surface of the decoration member 25154 contacts the concave bottom surface 151b2.

Therefore, the back surface portion 151d that forms the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the concave portion 151b can be brought into contact with the front surface of the base plate 60, and a gap is formed between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. As a result, it can be suppressed that dust or the like enters between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60, and the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 becomes difficult to be visually recognized.

Next, a game board 26013 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body 151 of the general prize opening unit 150 has been described. In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the main body 26
An inclined surface 26151a formed at the end of 151 is formed in a circular arc shape that bulges outward. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

180 (a) and 180 (b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 180 (a) and 180 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.
In FIG. 180 (a), the player places the game board 26013 at a position higher than normal (for example,
The line of sight when viewed from the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity is shown by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. The line of sight when viewed from the position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 26013) is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

The game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 26013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Prepare. Further, the game board 26013 is a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and windmills, rails 76 and 77, a general winning opening 63,
The first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). (See below). Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a general winning opening unit 26150 is disposed in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 180, the general prize opening unit 26150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment includes a plate-like main body 26151 along the front of the base plate 60, And a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 26151.

The main body portion 26151 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the decorative member 15 disposed on the back side.
The decoration of 4 patterns, characters, etc. (patterns) can be viewed from the player side. In addition, the main body 261
51, an end face in front view is inclined toward the back side, and an inclined surface 26151a that bulges in a cross-sectional arc shape, and a recess 1 that is recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 26151 toward the front side.
51b.

In the inclined surface 26151a, an inclination angle θ1 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of the imaginary line IL1 that connects the connection point between the front surface side of the main body portion 26151 and the end portion on the back surface side is set to be smaller than 45 degrees. Is done. As a result, the light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is larger than the case where the inclination angle θ1 is set larger than 45 degrees.
The incident angle at the time of entering the outside of 1 is increased. Therefore, when light is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151, the traveling direction of the light can be easily bent upward. Therefore, the player receives the general prize opening unit 2615 from a position higher than the normal position with respect to the game board 26013.
When 0 is visually recognized, the connecting portions of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be easily viewed from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the position in the front-rear direction of the connecting portions of the decorative members 154, 60c, so that the decorative member 154 of the general prize opening unit 26150 is used.
And the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized as one decoration.
In the present embodiment, the angle θ1 is set to 40 degrees.

Further, as described above, the inclined surface 26151a is formed in a circular arc shape that bulges outward, so that the main body 2615 is closer to the center of the main body 26151 (the lower side in FIG. 180 (a)).
The incident angle when the light traveling in the horizontal direction 1 enters the outside of the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is increased. Accordingly, the light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a toward the center of the main body 26151 (the lower side in FIG. 180 (a)).
The incident angle when entering the outside of 51 is increased.

Therefore, the player is below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) passing through an intermediate position between the connection point between the front surface side plane of the main body portion 26151 and the rear end portion via the inclined surface 26151a. When viewing the decoration on the side, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the main body 26151 can be easily brought closer to the direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the front of the base plate 60.

Further, the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b has a horizontal line H passing through an intermediate position between the connection point between the front surface of the main body portion 26151 and the rear surface end portion.
It is set below R1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) and at the back side of the inclined surface 26151a. As described above, when the player visually recognizes the decoration below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) through the inclined surface 26151a, the angle of the player's line of sight passing through the main body 26151 is as follows. Can be easily brought close to a direction (horizontal direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the base plate 60.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), even when the player views the game board 26013 from the position higher than usual, the general winning opening unit 26150 and the base plate 60 are visible.
The decoration of the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the general winning a prize opening unit 2615 through 151a
Together with the decoration of the zero decoration member 154, the player can easily make it visible. As a result, the decoration member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized as one decoration.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), when the player views the game board 26013 from the normal height, the general winning opening unit 26150 and the base plate 60, the bulging shape of the inclined surface 26151a causes the main body. Since the incident angle when light traveling in the horizontal direction through the portion 26151 enters the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a approximates a right angle, the light emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151 can be hardly refracted. Therefore, the direction of the player's line of sight is prevented from bending when passing through the inclined surface 26151a, and the decorative member 15 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 is suppressed.
4 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be made difficult for the player to recognize the positional deviation in the front-rear direction. As a result, the decoration member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized as one decoration.

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, a game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body 151 of the general prize opening unit 150 has been described. In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the main body 2
An inclined surface 27151 a formed at the end of 6151 is formed in a circular arc shape that is recessed inside the main body 27151. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 181 (a) and FIG. 181 (b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. 181 (a) and 181 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.
In FIG. 181 (a), the player places the game board 27013 at a position higher than normal (for example,
The line of sight when viewed from the upper edge of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity is shown by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. 181 (b), the player usually holds the game board 27013. The line of sight when viewed from the position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 27013) is shown by a two-dot chain line.

The gaming board 27013 in the 27th embodiment is the gaming board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 27013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Prepare. Further, the game board 27013 is a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and windmills, rails 76 and 77, a general winning opening 63,
The first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). (See below). Furthermore, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a general winning opening unit 27150 is disposed in the opening of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 181, the general winning opening unit 27150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the gaming board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment includes a plate-like main body 27151 along the front of the base plate 60, And a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body 27151.

The main body 27151 is made of a transparent resin material and is a decorative member 15 disposed on the back side.
The decoration of 4 patterns, characters, etc. (patterns) can be viewed from the player side. In addition, the main body 271
51, an end face in front view is inclined toward the back surface side, and is inclined toward the front side from the back surface of the main body portion 27151, and an inclined surface 27151a having a circular arc shape that is recessed toward the inside of the main body portion 27151. And a recess 151b provided.

The inclined surface 27151a has an inclination angle θ2 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of the imaginary line IL2 that connects the connection point between the front surface of the main body 27151 and the end portion on the back surface is set to be larger than 45 degrees. Is done. Thereby, the protrusion distance to the outer side of the inclined surface 2751a can be made small, and it can suppress that the external shape of the main-body part 27151 becomes large.

In addition, as described above, the inclined surface 27151a is formed in a circular arc shape that is recessed inside the main body 27151, so that the player can connect each decorative member 60c via the inclined surface 27151a.
, 154 can be visually recognized through the inclined surface 27151a due to the concave shape, so that the area where the decoration of each decoration member 60c, 154 can be visually recognized can be expanded. That is, the main body 27151
Of the decorative member 60c, 154 from the inclined surface 2 by a circular arc shape that is recessed toward the inner side.
The light incident on 7151a can be refracted and condensed toward the player's viewpoint. As a result, it is possible to reduce the patterns and characters (pictures) that are visually recognized through the inclined surface 27151a, thereby making it difficult for the player to understand the connection between the decorative members 60c and 154. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the positional deviation of the decorative members 60c and 154, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

Further, the decorative member 154 disposed inside the concave portion 151b has a horizontal line H passing through an intermediate position between the connection point between the front surface of the main body 27151 and the rear surface.
It is set above R2 and set on the back side of the inclined surface 27151a.

Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), when the player visually recognizes the general prize opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60 from a position higher than usual, the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 The incident angle when light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body portion 26151 on the front side of the connecting portion enters the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is increased. Accordingly, the light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the decorative member 154 is easily refracted toward the player's viewpoint, so that the player can move from the normal position with respect to the game board 27013. When the general prize opening unit 27150 is visually recognized from a higher position, the connecting portions of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be easily seen from the front side. As a result, the decorative member 15
Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the position in the front-rear direction of the connecting portion of 4, 60c, the decorative member 154 of the general prize opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 6 of the base plate 60
Together with 0c, it can be easily recognized as one decoration.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 181 (b), when the player visually recognizes the game board 27013 from the normal height, the general winning opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60, the concave shape of the inclined surface 27151a makes the decoration. The incident angle when light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body portion 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the member 154 enters the outside of the main body portion 27151 from the inclined surface 27151a approximates a right angle, so that the light is emitted outside the main body portion 27151. Refracted light can be made difficult to refract. Therefore,
The direction of the player's line of sight is prevented from being bent when the inclined surface 27151a is interposed, and the positional deviation in the front-rear direction between the decorative member 154 of the general prize opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is played. It can be made difficult for a person to recognize. As a result, the decoration member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 27150 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined and easily recognized as one decoration.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182 (a), a game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the inner surface of the end of the recess 151b provided in the main body 151 of the general prize opening unit 150 is parallel to the plate thickness direction of the main body 151 has been described. In the embodiment, the inner surface of the end portion of the recess 28151b is a recessed bottom surface 151.
It is inclined inward toward the b2 side. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 182 (a) is a cross-sectional view of a game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. In addition,
FIG. 182 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. In FIG. 182 (a), the line of sight when the player views the game board 28013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 28013) is a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

Note that the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 28013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Prepare. Further, the game board 28013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and windmills, rails 76 and 77, a general winning opening 63,
The first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). (See below). Further, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a general winning opening unit 28150 is disposed in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the base plate 6 of the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment.
The general prize opening unit 28150 disposed on the front surface side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 28151 along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back surface side of the main body portion 28151. .

The main body 28151 is made of a transparent resin material and is arranged on the back side of the decorative member 15.
The decoration of 4 patterns, characters, etc. (patterns) can be viewed from the player side. In addition, the main body 281
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151 a whose end is inclined toward the back surface side, and a concave portion 28151 b that is recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 28151 toward the front surface side.

As described above, the inner side surface 28151b3 of the concave portion 28151b is formed on the outer side of the main body portion 2 from the concave bottom surface 151b2 side toward the concave opening side (from the arrow F direction side to the arrow B direction side).
Inclined toward the end of 8151. In this case, an inclination angle θ3 of the inner side surface 28151b3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 in the cross section of the recess 28151b (FIG. 182).
(See (a)) is an inclination angle θ4 (with respect to the base plate 60 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body 151) (
It is set smaller than (see FIG. 182 (a)).

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), the player can use the inclined surface 2815 of the main body 28151.
When visually recognizing the decoration member 60c through 1a, the decoration position of the virtual image bent by passing through the main body 28151 and visually recognized by the player, and the decoration member 60c without the main body 28151.
Can be brought closer to the decoration position of the real image when the user visually recognizes. That is, the decorative member 60 that is refracted and visually recognized by the inclined surface 28151a of the main body 28151 and the inner surface 28151b3 of the recess.
The position of c can be positioned on an extension line of the player's line of sight. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the decoration member 60c through the main body 28151, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the decoration caused by the refraction of light and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182 (b), a game board 29013 in the 29th embodiment will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the inner side surface 2915 in the cross section of the recess 29151b.
Although the case where the inclination angle θ3 of the 1b3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set to be smaller than the inclination angle θ4 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60 has been described, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the inner surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b. The inclination angle θ5 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set larger than the inclination angle θ6 with respect to the base plate 60 of the inclined surface 151a. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 182 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 29013 in the 29th embodiment. In addition,
FIG. 182 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. In FIG. 182 (b), the line of sight when the player views the game board 29013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 29013) is a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

Note that the game board 29003 in the 29th embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 29013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Prepare. In addition, the game board 29013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and windmills, rails 76 and 77, a general winning opening 63,
The first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). (See below). Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, a general winning opening unit 29150 is disposed in the opening of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182 (b), the base plate 6 of the game board 29013 in the 29th embodiment.
The general prize opening unit 29150 disposed on the front surface side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 29151 along the front surface of the base plate 60 and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back surface side of the main body portion 29151. .

The main body 29151 is made of a transparent resin material, and the decorative member 15 disposed on the back side.
The decoration of 4 patterns, characters, etc. (patterns) can be viewed from the player side. In addition, the main body 291
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151 a whose end is inclined toward the back surface side, and a concave portion 29151 b that is recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 29151 toward the front surface side.

As described above, the inner side surface 29151b3 of the concave portion 29151b is formed on the outer side of the main body portion 2 from the concave bottom surface 151b2 side toward the concave opening side (from the arrow F direction side to the arrow B direction side).
It is formed to be inclined toward the end side of 9151. In this case, the inclination angle θ5 of the inner side surface 29151b3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 in the cross section of the recess 29151b (FIG. 182).
(See (b)) is an inclination angle θ6 (with respect to the base plate 60 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body 151) (
(See FIG. 182 (b)).

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), the player can move the inclined surface 151a of the main body 29151.
When the decorative member 60c is viewed through the light, the light emitted from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 to the player's viewpoint through the inclined surface 151a is used as the inner surface 2915 of the recess 29151b.
The light can be emitted in a direction substantially orthogonal to the inclination of 1b3. Therefore, when light enters the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154, the light can be prevented from being refracted. As a result, the inner surface 291 of the recess 29151b
When light enters 51b3, the light is refracted so that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are reflected.
Can be suppressed from being viewed from the upper side in the direction of gravity, and the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily viewed by the player as one decoration.

In addition, since a predetermined gap is provided between the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b and the end of the decorative member 154, a dimensional error that occurs when the decorative member 154 is formed by the gap can be absorbed.

Next, referring to FIG. 183 (a), the general winning a prize opening unit 30 in the thirtieth embodiment.
150 will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the inner side surface 2815 of the recess 28151b.
Although the case where 1b3 is formed to be inclined has been described, in the thirtieth embodiment, the recess 301 is formed.
An inner side surface 30151b3 of 51b bulges inside the recess 28151b and is curved to have a circular arc cross section. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

Note that the game board 30013 in the thirtieth embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 30013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Prepare. In addition, the game board 30013 is a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and windmills, rails 76 and 77, a general winning opening 63,
The first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). (See below). Furthermore, in the thirtieth embodiment, the general winning a prize opening unit 30150 is disposed in the opening of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

FIG. 183 (a) is a cross-sectional view of a general prize opening unit 30150 in the thirtieth embodiment. Note that FIG. 183 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. In FIG. 183 (a), the line of sight when the player views the game board 30013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 30013) is a two-dot chain line. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the base plate 6 of the game board 30013 in the thirtieth embodiment.
The general prize opening unit 30150 disposed on the front surface side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 30151 extending along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 30151. .

The main body 30151 is made of a transparent resin material and is a decorative member 15 disposed on the back side.
The decoration of 4 patterns, characters, etc. (patterns) can be viewed from the player side. The main body 301
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151 a whose end is inclined toward the back surface side, and a concave portion 30151 b that is recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 30151 toward the front surface side.

The inner side surface 30151b3 of the recess 30151b is formed so as to be inclined toward the end side of the main body 30151 from the concave bottom surface 151b2 side toward the concave opening side (from the arrow F direction side to the arrow B direction side). At the same time, the cross section bulges in an arc shape toward the inside of the recess 30151b.
Thereby, it is possible to easily direct the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the recess 30151b in a direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the decorative surface of the decorative member 60c. As a result, the recess 30
When the decoration of the game board 30013 is visually recognized via the 151b, it is possible to prevent the edge of the decoration member 154 from being visually recognized and make it easy for the player to visually recognize the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 as one decoration. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 183 (b), the general winning a prize opening unit 311 in the thirty-first embodiment.
50 will be described. In the said 1st Embodiment, although the inclined surface 151a demonstrated the case where a cross section was formed as a linear surface, the inclined surface 31151a in 31st Embodiment is provided with several recessed part 31151a1. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 183 (b) is a cross-sectional view of a general prize opening unit 31150 in the thirty-first embodiment. Note that FIG. 183 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, the game board 31013 in the thirty-first embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Game board 3
Reference numeral 1013 denotes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, wind turbines, rails 76 and 77, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, Second winning port 640, variable winning device 65, first through gate 66, variable display unit 80, etc. (FIG. 2)
The peripheral edge is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Further, in the thirty-first embodiment, a general winning opening unit 31150 is disposed in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 183 (b), the base plate 6 of the game board 31013 in the thirty-first embodiment.
The general prize opening unit 31150 disposed on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body 31151 along the front surface of the base plate 60 and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body 31151.

The main body 31151 is made of a transparent resin material and is a decorative member 15 disposed on the back side.
The decoration of 4 patterns, characters, etc. (patterns) can be viewed from the player side. The main body 311
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 31151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back surface side, and a concave portion 151b that is recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 31151 toward the front surface side.

The inclined surface 31151a has a plurality of recessed portions 311 that are recessed in a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction.
51a1 is provided. The plurality of recessed portions 31151a1 are arranged in parallel in the direction of inclination of the inclined surface 31151a and extend along the end of the main body portion 31151 in a front view. As a result, the light is incident on the inside of the main body 31151 and the end of the main body 31151 (the inclined surface 311).
The light emitted from 51a) can be irregularly reflected. Accordingly, the player can visually recognize the decoration visually recognized through the inclined surface 31151a.

Here, since the end of the decorative member 154 disposed in the main body 31151 is disposed on the back side of the inclined surface 31151a as in the first embodiment, the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60 are provided.
It is possible to make the player visually recognize the connecting part of the decoration of c in a blurred state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the connection of the decoration members, and it is easy for the player to recognize the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 as one decoration.

<Adjustment means for adjusting the flow direction by adjusting the distance between the opposing faces>
Next, with reference to FIG. 184 to FIG. 186, the special winning device 32 in the thirty-second embodiment.
550 will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the facing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is adjusted by sandwiching the shim member SI between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. As described above, in the thirty-second embodiment,
The case where the opposing space | interval of the 1st path | route member 32560 and the 2nd path | route member 32570 is adjusted with the fastening position of a screw is demonstrated. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 184 and FIG. 185, the special winning device 32 in the thirty-second embodiment.
The configuration of 550 will be described. FIG. 184 shows the special winning device 32 in the thirty-second embodiment.
It is a disassembled perspective front view of 550. FIG. FIG. 185 (a) is a front view of the special winning device 32550, FIG. 185 (b) is a top view of the special winning device 32550, and FIG.
185 is a cross-sectional view of the special prize-winning device 32550 along the CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc line in FIG. 185 (a). FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the special prize-winning device 32550 in the thirty-second embodiment.
Includes a first path member 32560 disposed on the front side and a second path member 32570 disposed on the back side of the first path member 32560.

The first path member 32560 is formed of a non-light transmissive material. In addition, the first path member 32
Reference numeral 560 denotes a front plate 32564 formed in a plate shape and disposed on the front side of the game area, and a first wall portion protruding from the left and right ends of the front plate 32564 to the back side (base plate 60 side). 3256
5 is provided.

The front plate 32564 is a plate member serving as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 32570 described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material. This makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 33550. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special prize-winning device 33550 and to suppress the player from quitting the game.

The first wall portion 32565 is a portion connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and includes a through-hole 32565c that penetrates in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction), and two first wall portions 32565.
A plurality of side protrusions 32565d that are juxtaposed on the opposite surface and projecting in a triangular shape in section,
The first wall portion 32565 is mainly provided with standing portions 32565e that are erected from the upper and lower ends of the first wall portion 32565 on the opposite surface side of the second wall portions 32656.

The through-hole 32565c is a through-hole through which a screw for fastening the first path member 32560 to the second path member 32570 is inserted, and is formed at one location on each first wall portion 32565.

The one-side protrusion 32565d is a portion that is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570, which will be described later, and positions the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570. -B direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD)
It extends in the direction.

The standing portion 32565e covers the one-side protrusion 32565d, and the player receives the one-side protrusion 325 from the player.
This is a portion that makes 65d invisible, and is set to be larger than the protruding distance of the one-side protrusion 32565d. Thus, the player can recognize that the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is suppressed by preventing the position where the one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from judging that the player is disadvantaged and not playing the pachinko machine 10.

The second path member 32570 includes a plate-like base plate 32571 that faces the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 and the left and right ends (in the direction of the arrow LR) of the base plate 32571. And a fourth wall portion 32573 protruding from the front plate 32564 side.

The base plate 32571 is a member that forms a pitching path for game balls in a gap between the first path member 32560 and the front plate 32564 facing the front plate 32564. The base plate 32571 is in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the base plate 32571 in front view. The size is smaller than the front plate 32564. Thereby, it can suppress that the base board 32571 is visually recognized from the player side. As a result, it can be prevented that the player visually recognizes the facing distance between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and determines that the game is advantageous or disadvantageous.

In addition, the base plate 32571 is a fourth protrusion 3257 that protrudes toward the first path member 32560 side.
1b and the 5th convex part 32571c, these 4th convex part 32571b, and the 5th convex part 32571
6th convex part 32571d which is located under c and protrudes in the front plate 32564 side.

The 4th convex part 32571b and the 5th convex part 32571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 32550, and the base plate 32571 is located on the outer side in the left-right direction (the outer side in the direction of the arrow LR). It is formed to be inclined downward toward the center of the plate 32571.
As a result, the fourth convex portion 3 flows down between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 facing each other.
Game balls that collide with 2571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c, the fourth convex portion 32571b
Or it can make it easy to make it flow down in the inclination direction of the 5th convex part 32571c.

The sixth convex portion 32571d is formed below the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c described above, and is formed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the base plate 32571. Further, the sixth convex portion 32571d extends in the direction of gravity. As a result, the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571 flows down between the facing of the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564.
The game balls guided by c are distributed to either the left or right of the sixth convex portion 32571d.

Two opposing fourth wall portions 32573 are provided with a plurality of other concave portions 32573c that are recessed toward the inner side in the opposing direction on the outer side surface in the opposing direction, and an adjustment hole 32573 that penetrates in the opposing direction.
b and an adjustment hole 32573 formed on the inner side in the opposing direction of the two fourth wall portions 32573.
a housing portion 32573d surrounding b.

A plurality of other-side recesses 32573c are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) of the fourth wall portion 32573 and extend in the direction of gravity. The other-side recess 32573c is formed to have a substantially triangular cross section, and the cross-sectional shape thereof is set to be substantially the same as the one-side protrusion 32565d. As a result, the first path member 3 is inserted by inserting the one-side protrusion 32565d into the other-side recess 32573c.
2560 can be positioned.

The adjustment hole 32573b is a part that allows the tip of the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 described above to be inserted into the housing portion 32573d side. Also, the adjustment hole 3257
3b is formed in a long hole that is long in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), whereby the movement of the first path member 32560 relative to the second path member 32570 is allowed.

The housing portion 32573d is formed in a U-shaped cross section when viewed from the front, and both ends thereof are coupled to the fourth wall portion 32573. The accommodating portion 32573d extends from the front surface of the base plate 32571 to the front end portion of the fourth wall portion 32573. Thereby, the accommodating part 3
In a space surrounded by 2573d, a screwing plate 32590 for screwing a screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b can be accommodated.

The screw plate 32590 is set to a dimension that can be inserted into the space formed by the accommodating portion 32573d, and the width dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is the dimension in the front-rear direction of the space formed by the accommodating portion 32573d ( It is set smaller than the projecting dimension on the front side of the fourth wall 32573. Accordingly, the screwing plate 32590 can be inserted inside the housing portion 32573d and can be moved in the front-rear direction.

The screw plate 32590 includes a screw hole 32591 for screwing a screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b, and a front-rear direction of the screw hole 32591 (arrow F-B direction).
Guide protrusions 3259 projecting from opposite ends of the four walls toward the opposing surfaces of the fourth wall portion 32573.
2 is provided.

The screw holes 32591 are formed in two places, and are formed side by side in the vertical direction. 2
The screw holes 32591 are formed at positions where the distance dimension of one screw hole 32591 from the upper end is the same as the distance dimension of the other screw hole 32591 from the lower end. Accordingly, when the screw groove of one of the screw holes 32591 is crushed, the screw can be fastened using the other screw hole 32591 by turning the screw plate 32590 upside down.

The guide protrusion 32592 is provided with a predetermined amount of protrusions on both outer sides in the left-right direction from both front and rear end portions, and includes an inclined surface inclined toward the screwing hole 32591. Thereby, the through-hole 325
The tip of the screw inserted through 65c and the adjustment hole 32573b can be guided to the screwing hole 32591. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the screwing hole 32591 is broken, the new screwing hole 32591 can be used by reversing the upper and lower sides. In this case, the screwing hole 32 for the tip of the screw.
Since the position of 591 tends to be out of alignment, the tip of the screw is inserted into the screw hole 32 as in this embodiment.
The configuration guided to 591 is particularly effective.

The adjustment method of the 1st path | route member 32560 with respect to the 2nd path | route member 32570 of the special prize apparatus 32550 comprised as mentioned above is the through-hole 3256 of the 1st path | route member 32560 first.
The screw inserted through 5c and screwed into the screwing plate 32590 is loosened. As a result, the second
The movement of the first path member 32560 with respect to the path member 32570 is allowed.

Next, the first path member 32565 inserted into the other-side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 by elastically deforming the first wall portion 32565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564.
After the one-side protrusion 32565d of 560 is pulled out from the other-side recess 32573c, the position in the front-rear direction is adjusted to return the elastic deformation of the first wall portion 32655 and the one-side protrusion 3 again.
2565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c. Thus, the second path member 32570
In contrast, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed (positioned).

Finally, the threaded plate 32 is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560.
By retightening the screw that is screwed into 590, the first relative to the second path member 32570 is obtained.
Adjustment of the path member 32560 is completed.

According to this, as described above, since the one-side protrusion 32565d and the other-side recess 32573c are formed in corresponding shapes, the one-side protrusion 3256 is secured by fastening the screw after temporarily fixing.
5d can be pushed into the other-side recess 32573c. Therefore, it can be adjusted so that it always becomes the same position in each position which can insert the one side protrusion part 32565d in the other side recessed part 32573c. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of variations in the flow of game balls by the operator who performs the adjustment, and the adjustment can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, position adjustment of the second path member 32570 of the first path member 32560 will be described. FIG. 186 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize-winning device 32550,
FIG. 186 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize-winning device 32550 along the CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb line in FIG. 186 (a).

As shown in FIG. 186, when the first path member 32560 on the left side (arrow L direction side) is pulled out to the front side (arrow F direction side) with respect to the second path member 32570, as shown in FIG. 185. In addition, the distance between the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 on the left side is wider than that on the right side. In this case, the game ball flowing down between the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 facing each other is less likely to collide with the left fourth convex portion 32571b, and accordingly, the game ball can easily flow down between the left facing. . Thus, the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571
It is possible to easily discharge the game balls flowing down between the opposite sides from the lower left side.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, a special prize device 33550 in the thirty-third embodiment will be described. In the thirty-second embodiment, the case where the position of the second path member 32570 with respect to the second path member 32570 is adjusted with the first wall portion 32565 of the first path member 32560 elastically deformed has been described. In the form, the first wall portion 33565 is connected to the front plate 32.
564 is variably connected. In addition, about the same part as each said embodiment,
The same reference numerals are assigned and detailed description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 187 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member 33560 in the thirty-third embodiment, and FIG. 187 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize-winning device 33550. Note that FIG.
b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 186 (c).

As shown in FIG. 187, the special prize-winning device 33550 in the thirty-third embodiment includes a first path member 33560 disposed on the front side and a second path member disposed on the back side of the first path member 33560. 32570.

The first path member 33560 is formed in a plate shape and is disposed on the front side of the game area.
564 and a first wall portion 33565 that is pivotally supported on the left and right ends of the front plate 33564.

The front plate 32564 is a plate member serving as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 32570 described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material. This makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 33550. As a result, the player can be prevented from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special prize-winning device 33550, and the player can be prevented from quitting the game.

The holding portion 33564e is a member that holds a rod RD that pivotally supports a first wall portion 33565, which will be described later, and is set to a size that allows the rod RD to be inserted into an annular inner portion. In addition, the holding portion 33564e is formed at two locations that are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axis of the annular portion of the holding portion 33564e is coaxial in the vertical direction. The holding portion 33564e formed on the lower side of the two holding portions 33564e is a front plate 33564.
And the lower end side is closed. Thereby, the rod RD is held by the holding portion 3.
When the rod RD is inserted into the inside of the holding portion 33564e from the upper side of the 3564e, the rod RD can be prevented from dropping (exiting) from the lower end of the holding portion 33564e.

The first wall portion 33565 is a portion connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and includes a through-hole 32565c penetrating in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction), and two first wall portions 325.
A plurality of side projections 32565d that are juxtaposed on opposite surfaces of 65 and project in a triangular shape in cross section
And an upright portion 32565e that is erected on the opposite surface side of the second wall portion 32666 from both the upper and lower ends (in the direction of the arrow UD) of the first wall portion 32565, and an annular cross-section on the front plate 33564 side And a pivoted support portion 33565f that projects into the main body.

The pivoted support portion 33565f is a portion into which the rod RD to be inserted into the holding portion 33564e of the front plate 33564 described above is inserted, and the inner portion formed in an annular shape is set to a size that allows the rod RD to be inserted. . Further, the pivoted support portion 33565f is formed at two places that are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axis of the annular portion of the pivoted support portion 33565f is coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, the two pivoted support portions 33565f are disposed between the holding portions 335 described above.
A holding portion 33564e formed on the upper side of 64e is disposed.

Accordingly, the connection between the front plate 33564 and the first wall portion 33565 is performed by the holding portion 33564.
e and the supported shaft portion 33565f are arranged coaxially, and the front plate 3356 is inserted by inserting the rod RD from above into the inside of the holding portion 33564e and the supported shaft portion 33565f.
4, the first wall portion 33565 is disposed in a rotatable state.

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), the base plate 325 of the second path member 32570 is formed.
When the front plate 33564 of the first path member 33560 is disposed non-parallel to 71, the angle of the first wall portion 33565 can be changed with respect to the front plate 33564.

That is, in the thirty-second embodiment, when the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 is disposed non-parallel to the base plate 32571 of the second path member 32570, the front plate 325
It is necessary to hold the first wall portion 33565 in an elastically deformed state with respect to 64. Further, when adjusting the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, the second wall member 3565 is elastically deformed outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564.
1570: One side protrusion 325 of the first path member 32560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of 2570
It is necessary to pull out 65d from the other-side recess 32573c. Therefore, the front plate 32564
There is a possibility that the connecting portion between the first wall portion 32565 and the first wall portion 32565 is damaged.

On the other hand, in the thirty-third embodiment, since the first wall portion 33565 can be rotated with respect to the front plate 33564, it is not necessary to elastically deform the first path member 33560, and the front plate 33564 and the first wall are eliminated. It can suppress that a connection part with the part 33565 is damaged.

The adjustment method of the 1st path | route member 33560 with respect to the 2nd path | route member 32570 of the special prize-winning apparatus 33550 comprised as mentioned above is the through-hole 3256 of the 1st path | route member 33560 first.
The screw inserted through 5c and screwed into the screwing plate 32590 is loosened. As a result, the second
The movement of the first path member 33560 with respect to the path member 32570 is allowed.

Next, the first path member 3356 inserted into the other-side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 by rotating the first wall portion 33565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 33564.
After the one-side protrusion 32565d of 0 is pulled out from the other-side recess 32573c, the position in the front-rear direction is adjusted, and the rotation of the first wall 33565 is returned at the adjusted position to again return the one-side protrusion 32565.
d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c. Thereby, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed to the second path member 32570.

Finally, the threaded plate 32 is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 33560.
By retightening the screw that is screwed into 590, the first relative to the second path member 32570 is obtained.
Adjustment of the path member 33560 is completed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 188 to 190, the special prize-winning device 345 in the 34th embodiment.
50 will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the direction in which the game balls flow down is adjusted by adjusting the facing distance between the front and back plates of the special prize-winning device 13550 has been described.
In the thirty-fourth embodiment, the direction in which the game ball flows down can be adjusted by changing the position of the protrusion protruding toward the inside of the flow-down path. In addition, about the same part as each said embodiment,
The same reference numerals are assigned and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the special prize-winning device 34550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. FIG. 188 (a) is a front view of the game board 34013 in the thirty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 188 (b) is CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb of FIG. 188 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the game board 34013 in a line. FIG. 189 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 34013.

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the special prize-winning device 34550 in the 34th embodiment.
Is disposed above the first winning port 64 disposed on the game board 34013. Further, in the special winning device 34550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 34560 arranged on the front side is arranged in the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning port 64 in front view. .

Further, the special prize-winning device 34550 and the first prize-winning port 64 are in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction).
The game balls are arranged at positions separated from each other in diameter. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550.

The special prize-winning device 34550 has a first path member 345 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side).
60, a second path member 34570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560, and a fixture 34553 screwed to the back side of the second path member 34570. Prepare.

The first path member 34560 is a plate member serving as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 34570 described later, and is formed of a non-light-transmitting material.
This makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 34550. As a result, the player can be prevented from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special prize-winning device 34550, and the player can be prevented from stopping the game.

Further, the first path member 34560 is formed in a plate shape, and is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game area, and from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564 to the back side (arrows). 1st wall part 34565 standingly arranged by the (B direction side).

The front plate 34564 is a plate member serving as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 32570 described later, and is based on a base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 described later. Also, the outer shape in front view is large. As a result, the second path member 34570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560 is replaced with the front plate 3.
4564 can make it difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, the second path member 3457 from the player side.
It can suppress that 0 is visually recognized. Therefore, when the position of the 2nd path member 34570 is changed, it can control that the change is recognized by a player.

The first wall portion 34565 is a portion fastened to the base plate 34060 of the game board 13 and has a substantially L-shaped cross section. The dimension of the first wall portion 34565 standing on the back side is the front plate 345.
64 and a facing distance X3 between a fourth convex portion 34571b of a base plate 34571 described later (FIG. 18).
8 (b)) is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The first wall portion 34565 has a bent portion 34565g bent from the standing tip portion in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 34060, and a through-hole 34565g1 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion 34565g. The The through hole 34565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and the screw inserted into the through hole 34565g1 is screwed into the base plate 34060, thereby the first hole.
The path member 34560 can be fastened to the base plate 34060.

The second path member 34570 includes a plate-like base plate 34571 facing the front plate 34564 of the first path member 34560, and a support portion 34579 protruding in a columnar shape from the back side of the base plate 34571.

The base plate 34571 is a member that forms a pitching path for game balls through a gap between the first path member 34560 and the front plate 34564 facing the front plate 34564, and is formed at a position that is separated from the front plate 34564 by a predetermined amount. Further, the base plate 34571 is a fourth convex portion 345 that protrudes toward the front plate 34564 side.
71b. Thereby, it is possible to change the direction in which the game ball flowing down between the opposing side of the base plate 34571 and the front plate 34564 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571b and flows down.

The support portion 34579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 34570, and the columnar shaft is
It is formed at a position that is coaxial with the axis of the base plate 34571 (the center of the base plate 34571). In addition, a circular through hole 34060d is opened at a position corresponding to the support portion 34579 on the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, and the support portion 34 is inside the through hole 34060d.
579 is inserted. Thus, the second path member 34570 is pivotally supported on the base plate 34060.

The support portion 34579 has a fastening hole 34579a recessed at the projecting tip. Fastening hole 345
79a is recessed coaxially with the axis of the support portion 34579, and has an inner peripheral surface processed with an internal thread. Thereby, the screw part 34553b of the fixture 34553 inserted through the through hole 34060d from the back side of the base plate 34060 can be screwed into the fastening hole 34579a.

The fixture 34553 is a fastening member for fastening the above-described second path member 34570 to the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, and protrudes to the front side of the operation part 34553a formed in a column shape. A screw part 34553b provided.

The operation portion 34553a is a portion that is held by an operator who arranges the second path member 34570 on the base plate 34060, and is formed to have an outer shape larger than the through hole 34060d formed in the base plate 34060. In addition, the operation unit 34553a is formed in the through hole 34 of the base plate 34060.
The outer diameter is set larger than the inner diameter of 060d.

Accordingly, when the second path member 34570 is disposed on the base plate 34060 by screwing the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 into the fastening hole 34579a, the fixture 34553 is disposed.
Can be prevented from coming out to the front side of the base plate 34060 via the through hole 34060d.

The screw portion 34553b is formed in a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operation portion 34553a,
The outer peripheral surface is processed with a male screw. As described above, the screw portion 34553b is a portion that is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570, is set to have an outer diameter smaller than the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060, and is inserted through the through hole 34060d. The second passage member 34570 is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a.

According to the special prize apparatus 34550 configured as described above, when changing the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special prize apparatus 34550, the operator can change the base plate 34 of the game board 13.
A hand (arm) is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game board 13 to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base board 34060 through the first opening 60a (center frame 86) formed in 060. Thus, the operation unit 34553a of the fixture 34553 is accessed.

Next, the operation portion 34553a is rotated to fasten the fastening hole 34579 of the second path member 34570.
The screw portion 34553b that is screwed to a is loosened. As a result, the second path member 34570 can be rotated and displaced about the support part 34579, the second path member 34570 is rotated, and the position of the fourth convex part 34571b of the second path member 34570 is changed. Fourth convex portion 345
When the position of 71b is changed, the position at which the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 34550 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571b is changed, so the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special prize-winning device 34550 is changed. Can be changed.

In this case, as described above, the base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the support portion 34579 is formed coaxially with the axis thereof, so that the second path member 34570 is rotated. In this case, it is possible to suppress a change in the arrangement of the second path member 34570 with respect to the base plate 34060 in the front view. Therefore, it can suppress that a player recognizes that the 2nd path member 34570 was rotated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from judging that it is disadvantageous and not playing the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, a change in the discharge position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b (second path member 34570) is changed will be described. 190 (a) to FIG.
90 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 34010 taken along line CXC-CXC in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 190, the fourth protrusion 34571b has a substantially V-shaped protruding shape when viewed from the front. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 190 (a), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged on the lower side, the game balls flowing from above the special prize-winning device 34550 are sent to the central portion along the V-shaped slope. It can be done easily. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to flow into the winning opening 64 disposed below the special winning device 34550.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 190 (b), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged on the upper side, the game balls flowing in from above the special prize-winning device 34550 are placed on the left and right ends along the V-shaped slope. Easy to throw. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to flow into the winning port 64 disposed below the special winning device 34550.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 190 (c) and 190 (b), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged at either of the left and right ends, a game ball flowing from above the special prize-winning device 34550 is displayed. It is possible to make it easy to send a ball along the upper slope of the V shape, and to send a game ball sent to the lower side of the V shape without colliding with the upper side of the V shape along the lower slope of the V shape. Can do. Therefore,
The direction in which the game ball is sent can be changed by the difference in the area where the game ball collides between the upper side of the V shape and the lower side of the V shape.

Although not described in detail, the bent portion of the fourth convex portion 34571b can be disposed at a position other than the positions shown in FIGS. 190 (a) to 190 (d). For example, FIG.
When the second path member 34570 is rotated 10 degrees from the position indicated by 0 (a) in the right direction when viewed from the front, the game ball flowing from above the special prize-winning device 34550 is caused to flow down along the V-shaped inclination. Thus, it is possible to easily discharge the game ball from a position slightly shifted to the left side (arrow L direction side) from the upper side of the winning port 64 disposed below the special winning device 34550.

Next, with reference to FIG. 191 to FIG. 193, a special winning device 355 in the 35th embodiment.
50 will be described. In the thirty-fourth embodiment, the case where the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b has been described. In the thirty-fifth embodiment,
The second path member 35570 is slid to change the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 191 and FIG. 192, the special winning device 35 in the thirty-fifth embodiment.
550 will be described. FIG. 191 (a) shows a game board 35013 in the 35th embodiment.
FIG. 191 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 35013 along the CXCIb-CXCIb line in FIG. 191 (a). FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the special prize device 35550.

As shown in FIGS. 191 and 192, a special prize-winning device 35550 in the 35th embodiment.
Are arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the first winning port 64 arranged on the game board 35013. In the special winning device 35550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 35560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) is the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning port 64 in front view. Arranged in a shape.

Further, the special winning device 35550 and the first winning port 64 are in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction).
The game balls are arranged at positions separated from each other in diameter. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550.

The special winning device 34550 is a first path member 355 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side).
60, a second path member 35570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560, and a fixture 34553 screwed to the back side of the second path member 35570. Prepare.

The first path member 35560 is a plate member serving as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 35570, which will be described later, and is formed of a non-light transmissive material.
This makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the flow direction of the game ball inside the special prize device 35550. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 35550, and to suppress the player from quitting the game.

In addition, the first path member 35560 is formed in a plate shape, and is disposed on the front side of the gaming area, and stands from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564 to the back side (arrow B direction side). And a first wall portion 35565 provided.

The front plate 35564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 35570, which will be described later, and a second path member, which will be described later The outer shape in front view is larger than the base plate 35571 of 35570. Accordingly, the second path member 35 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560.
570 can be made difficult to visually recognize with the front plate 35564. Therefore, the second from the player side
Visibility of the path member 35570 can be suppressed. Therefore, when the position of the 2nd path member 35570 is changed, it can control that the change is recognized by a player.

The first wall portion 35565 is a portion that is fastened to the base plate 60 of the game board 35013, and the standing dimension of the first wall portion 34565 formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section on the back side is the front plate 3556.
4 and a facing distance X4 between a fourth convex portion 35571b of a base plate 35571 described later (FIG. 191).
(See (b)) is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The first wall portion 35565 has a bent portion 35565g that is bent in the direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 60 from the standing tip portion, and penetrates the bent portion 35565g in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The through-hole 35565g1 and the recessed portion 35565g2 that is recessed from the back surface of the bent portion 35565g toward the front side (arrow F direction side) are formed.

The through hole 35565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 35560 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 35565g1 into the base plate 60.

The recessed portion 35565g2 is a portion that accommodates both left and right (arrow LR direction side) ends of a base plate 35571 of the second path member 35570, which will be described later, and is recessed from the base end of the bent portion 35565g. The concave portion 35565g is recessed at the center in the vertical direction. Thus, when the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 are accommodated inside the recessed portion 35565g2, the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 can be hidden by the bent portion 35365g. Therefore, it can suppress that the position of the base board 35571 is recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from judging that it is disadvantageous and not playing the game.

The recessed dimension of the recessed portion 35565g2 is set to a depth dimension larger than the plate thickness of the base plate 35571, and the separation distance X5 between the left and right ends of the bent portion 35565g (FIG. 191).
(See (b)) is set to be larger than the width dimension X6 in the left-right direction of the base plate 35571 (see FIG. 191 (b)). Thereby, the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) can be displaced in the left-right direction. The base plate 35571 (second path member 3557
The displacement method 0) will be described later.

The second path member 35570 protrudes in a rectangular shape in a rear view from the plate-like base plate 35571 facing the front plate 35564 of the first path member 35560 and the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 35571. A support portion 35579.

The base plate 35571 is a member that forms a pitching path for game balls through a gap between the first path member 35560 and the front plate 35564 facing the front plate 35564, and is formed at a position that is separated from the front plate 35564 by a predetermined amount. In addition, the base plate 35571 includes a fourth convex portion 35571b that protrudes toward the front plate 35564 side (arrow F direction side). Thus, the base plate 35571 and the front plate 3556
It is possible to change the direction in which the game ball flowing down between the four opposing surfaces collides with the fourth convex portion 35571b and flows down.

The support portion 35579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 35570, and the base plate 345.
A cylindrical shaft is formed at a position (the center of the base plate 34571) that is coaxial with the shaft 71.
Further, the base plate 60 of the game board 34013 has a long hole-shaped sliding hole 35060e that is elongated in the left-right direction at a position corresponding to the supporting portion 35579, and the supporting portion 35579 is inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e. The As a result, the second path member 35570 is supported by the base plate 60.

The sliding hole 35060e has a width dimension in the short direction (arrow UD direction) that is substantially the same as the vertical dimension (arrow UD direction) of the support part 35579, and the left and right sides of the support part 35579. The width dimension in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) is set larger than the direction (arrow LR direction) dimension. Thereby, the support part 35579 inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e can be slidable in the longitudinal direction of the sliding hole 35060e.

In addition, the support portion 35579 is provided with a fastening hole 35579a at the protruding tip. The fastening hole 35579a can be internally threaded on the inner peripheral surface, and the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 can be screwed into the fastening hole 35579a. The projecting dimension of the support portion 34579 is
It is set smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and the fixing tool 34 is inserted into the fastening hole 35579 a.
The second path member 35570 is attached to the base plate 6 by screwing the screw portion 34553b of the 553.
It can be fixed to zero.

According to the special winning device 35550 configured as described above, when changing the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550, the operator can change the first position formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 35013. Game board 3501 through one opening 60a (center frame 86)
3, the hand (arm) is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60 to access the operation portion 34553 a of the fixture 34553.

Next, the operation portion 34553a is rotated to fasten the fastening hole 35579 of the second path member 35570.
The screw portion 34553b that is screwed to a is loosened. Accordingly, the second path member 35570 is slidable in the left-right direction, the second path member 35570 is slid, and the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b of the second path member 35570 is changed. Fourth convex portion 3557
When the position of 1b is changed, the position at which the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 35550 collides with the fourth convex portion 35571b is changed, so the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special prize-winning device 35550 is changed. Can be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, a change in the game ball discharge position when the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b (second path member 35570) is changed will be described. From FIG. 193 (a) to FIG.
93 (c) is a game board 3501 on the CXCIII-CXCIII line of FIG. 191 (b).
FIG. In FIGS. 193 (a) to 193 (c), the position of the second path member 35570 in FIG. 193 (b) is used as a reference position, and in FIG. 193 (a), the second path member 35570 is fronted from the reference position. FIG. 193 (c) shows a state where the second path member 35570 is displaced from the reference position to the right side (in the direction of arrow R).

As shown in FIG. 193, the fourth convex portion 35571b has a substantially V-shaped projection in front view, and the game ball flowing from above the special prize-winning device 35550 is centered along the V-shaped inclination. It is guided to the part (V-shaped bent part).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the V-shaped bent portion of the fourth convex portion 35571 b is disposed above the first winning port 64, it is discharged from below the special winning device 35550. This makes it easier to allow the game ball to flow into the first winning port 64.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (c), when the second path member 35570 is moved from the reference position (position shown in FIG. 193 (b)), the V of the fourth convex portion 35571b.
Since the bent portion of the character is arranged at a position shifted to the left or right from the upper part of the first winning opening 64, the special winning device 3555 is compared with the case where the second path member 35570 is arranged at the reference position.
The game balls discharged from below 0 are less likely to flow into the first winning port 64.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, a special winning device 36550 in the thirty-sixth embodiment is described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60.
The case where 51 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 and held in a state of being biased toward the back side of the base plate 60 has been described. In the embodiment, the first unit 36551 is urged toward the back side of the base plate 60 by the elastic recovery force of the fastening portion 36551b formed in the first unit 36551. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 194 (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board 36013 in the thirty-sixth embodiment, and FIG. 194 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the game board 36013. Note that FIG.
94 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 194, the special prize-winning device 36550 in the thirty-sixth embodiment is slid from the inside of the first opening 60a in which the center frame 86 is disposed, and the base plate 6
The first unit 36551 is disposed at 0.

The first unit 36551 has a space in which a game ball can be sent inside, and the space is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the front surface of the base plate 60 can be caused to flow into the first unit 36551. The first
The unit 36551 includes a fastening portion 36551b that protrudes from the side surface (back surface) adjacent to the front surface of the base plate 60 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

The fastening portion 36551b is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first unit 36551 to the base plate 60 is inserted. The fastening portion 36551b protrudes toward the back side (arrow B direction side).
The projecting tip is bent in a direction parallel to the back surface of the.

Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a bulging portion 36551b2 bulging on the front side (arrow F direction side) on the side surface on the bending side, and a plate thickness direction (arrow FB) on the bending distal end side with respect to the bulging portion 36551b2. A through hole 36551b1 penetrating in the direction).

The fastening portion 36551b is a distance X7 from the base end (the back surface of the first unit 36551) to the front surface of the bent portion when the first unit 36551 is not attached to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 194 (b)). Is set larger than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60.
Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X8 from the base end (the back surface of the first unit 36551) to the bulging tip position of the bulging portion 36551b2 when the first unit 36551 is not attached to the base plate 60 (FIG. 194). (See (b)) is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60.

When the screw is fastened to the through hole 36551b1, the bulging portion 36551b2 is a force that presses (biases) the first unit 36551 against the back side (arrow F direction side) of the first unit 36551. And is formed between the base end of the bent portion of the fastening portion 36551b and the through hole 36551b1.

As a result, when the screw inserted through the fastening portion 36551b is fastened to the back surface of the base plate 60, the bulging portion 36551b2 contacts the back surface of the base plate 60, so that the gap between the bent portion and the base plate 60 is separated. The force that pushes the bent distal end side into the base plate 60 side with a screw can be converted into a force that pulls out the proximal end side of the bent portion to the back side (arrow B direction side). Thereby, it can suppress that a clearance gap is formed between the back surface of the 1st unit 36551, and the front surface of the base board 60. FIG.

As a result, it is not necessary to fasten the screw through which the first unit 36551 is inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 36551 can be easily formed larger for the fastening allowance. In the thirty-sixth embodiment, the first unit 36551 is attached to the base plate 60 using the first opening 60a to which the center frame 86 is fastened.
The 6551 can be slid to be easily attached to the first opening 60 a of the base plate 60.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195, a special prize device 37550 in the 37th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60.
The case where 51 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 and held in a state of being biased toward the back side of the base plate 60 has been described. In the embodiment, the first unit 37551 is fastened by a screw inserted from the back side of the base plate 60 and held in a state of being biased toward the back side of the base plate 60. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 195 (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board 37013 in the 37th embodiment, and FIG. 195 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the game board 37013. Note that FIG.
95 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 195, the special prize-winning device 37550 in the thirty-seventh embodiment is formed from a first unit 37551 that is disposed in front of the base plate 60.

The first unit 37551 has a space in which a game ball can be sent inside, and the space is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the front of the base plate 60 can be caused to flow into the first unit 37551. The first
The unit 37551 has a plurality of annular projections 3 projecting in an annular shape on the back side (arrow B direction side).
7551b.

The annular convex portion 37551b is a portion into which a screw inserted from the back side of the base plate 60 is screwed, and a female screw is processed on the inner peripheral surface. In the present embodiment, four annular protrusions 37551b are formed on the back surface of the first unit 37551.

In addition, the base plate 60 at a position facing the annular convex portion 37551b is formed with a concave portion 37060d that is recessed in a circular shape. The concave portion 37060d is a portion into which the annular convex portion 37551b is inserted, and has an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the annular convex portion 37551b. Further, the depth of the recessed portion 37060d is set to be larger than the projecting dimension of the annular convex portion 37551b.

In addition, a through hole 37060d1 is formed on the bottom surface of the recess 37060d. The through hole 37060d1 is formed so as to penetrate in a circular shape coaxial with the recess 37060. The through hole 37060d1 has an annular convex portion 3755.
This is a hole through which the tip of a screw threaded into 1b is inserted, and is formed in an opening having an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the recess 37060d. Thereby, a screw can be fastened to the 1st unit 37551 arrange | positioned from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base board 60 to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base board 60. FIG.

In this case, as described above, the concave depth of the concave portion 37060d is set to be larger than the projecting dimension of the annular convex portion 37551b. Therefore, by screwing the screw into the annular convex portion 37551b, The first unit 37551 can be disposed on the base plate 60 in a state where the convex portion 37551b (first unit 37551) is biased to the back side (arrow B direction side). Thereby, it can suppress that a clearance gap is formed between the back surface of the 1st unit 37551, and the front surface of the base board 60. FIG.

As a result, it is not necessary to fasten the screw through which the first unit 37551 is inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 37551 can be easily formed larger by the fastening allowance. In the thirty-seventh embodiment, the fastening portion of the first unit 37551 can be accommodated inside the recess 37060d of the base plate 60, and accordingly, the first unit 37551 is accordingly provided.
It is possible to increase the space for sending game balls formed on the board.

<Change the amount of light emitted to the front side with a game ball>
Next, referring to FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 384 in the thirty-eighth embodiment.
40 will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, a case is described in which a shadow is formed at the position of the game ball accommodated in the lower displacement member 11440 by the light emitted from the control board 491 and the position of the game ball is recognized at the position of the shadow. However, the lower displacement member 11 in the thirty-eighth embodiment.
440 reflects the light emitted from the control board 491 on the outer surface of the game ball, and recognizes the position of the game ball at the position where the light amount is increased. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 196 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment.
FIG. 197 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 38440, and FIG. 197 (b) is a front view of FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement member 38440 in the CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb line of (a), FIG. 197 (c) is sectional drawing of the lower displacement member 38440 in the CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc line of FIG. 197 (a). In FIG. 197 (a), the front decorative member 384 is provided.
51 and the front case 38481 are shown removed, and the front case 38 is shown.
The LED 38483b disposed on the line 481 is shown by a two-dot chain line. Further, FIG. 197 (b)
And in FIG. 197 (c), the state where the front side decorative portion 451 is attached is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment includes a base member 470 coupled to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46), and the base member 4.
A case member 38480 that covers both sides of the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of 70, a transmission mechanism 460 that is displaceably disposed between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a front-rear direction of the case member 38480. The decorative member 11450 formed in the aspect is mainly provided.

The case member 38480 is a member that covers both sides of the base member 470 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and the front case 3 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470.
8481 and a back case 482 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) are mainly provided.

The front case 38481 is formed in a rectangular horizontally long plate shape when viewed from the front. Also, the front case 38
Reference numeral 481 denotes an opening 481a extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) at a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and a bottom wall portion that protrudes from the lower end surface on the back side (arrow B direction side). 481b, a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end, and an LED substrate 38 disposed on the back side.
483.

The LED board 38483 is a member that emits light inside the lower displacement member 38440 (front case 38481), and a main body portion 38483a formed in a plate shape, and the main body portion 38483a.
And a plurality of LEDs 38483b that emit light.

The main body portion 38483a is a base on which wiring for conducting electricity to the plurality of LEDs 38483b is laid, and extends in the displacement direction (arrow LR direction) of the ball receiving portion 467. Multiple LEDs 384
83b are arranged at predetermined intervals in the extending direction of the main body portion 38483a (arrow LR direction).

Each LED 38483b is set in a direction toward the center of the game ball when the game ball passes through the back side (arrow B direction side) of each LED 38483b. As a result, each LED 38
When the game ball is located on the back side of 483b, the light of the LED can be reflected on the outer surface of the game ball to irradiate the front side decoration portion 11451. Therefore, as described above, the front-side decoration unit 11451 includes the transmission unit 11451b that can transmit light. Therefore, the light reflected on the outer surface of the game ball and applied to the front-side decoration unit 11451 is transmitted to the transmission unit 11451b. Can be emitted to the player side (arrow F direction side). Therefore, the light reflected from the player side through the transmission part 11451b can be lightened more in the part reflected by the game ball than in other parts. As a result, by increasing (changing) the amount of light, the player can recognize the position of the game ball sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 38440.

In the present embodiment, the interval at which the plurality of LEDs 38483b are arranged is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, even when the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 467 is displaced, at least a part of the game ball can be irradiated with light emitted from the LED 38483b. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b can be constantly irradiated to the game ball received by the ball receiver 467.

According to the thirty-eighth embodiment, the base member 470, the transmission mechanism 460, and the rear case 482 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the LED 38483b are preferably members having a high light absorption rate. For example, the outer surface of each member constitutes a black color scheme. According to this, LED
It is possible to suppress the light emitted from 38483b from being reflected from the inside of the case member 38480 (the lower displacement member 38440) and emitted from the transmission part 11451b of the front side decoration part 11451. As a result, the difference in the amount of light emitted between the front surface where the game ball is placed and the other front surface can be increased, and the player recognizes the position of the game ball received inside the lower displacement member 39440. It can be made easy.

Next, referring to FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, the lower displacement member 3944 in the 39th embodiment.
0 will be described. In the thirty-eighth embodiment, the case where the player recognizes the position where the game ball is reflected by reflecting light with the game ball has been described, but in the thirty-third embodiment, the ball receiver 3
The light is reflected by the reflecting member disposed at 9467 to recognize the position of the game ball. In addition,
About the same part as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment.
FIG. 199 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 39440, and FIG. 199 (b) and FIG.
(C) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 39440. Note that FIG. 199 (b) and FIG. 199 (
c) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 198 (c).

As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, a lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to a front base 411 (see FIG. 46), and the base member 4 thereof.
A case member 38480 that covers the front and rear of 70, a transmission mechanism 39460 that is displaceably disposed between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member 11450 that is disposed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 38480. .

The transmission mechanism 39460 is a member disposed on the front side of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, and 463, and a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is coupled to the transmission gear 461.
And a movable rack 464 that has a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and is slidably disposed on the front side of the base member 470, and is rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464, and the rack gear 476. A transmission gear 465 engaged with the transmission gear 465, a rack 39466 having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and arranged to be slidably displaceable on the front side of the movable rack 464, and the rack 39466 A ball receiving portion 39467 rotatably disposed at one end side.
And is mainly provided.

The rack 39466 is formed of a rectangular horizontally long rod-like body when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 39466b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the end on the other end side, and a front side. The two sliding plates 466c and the recessed portion 466d that is recessed from one end to the other end on the back side are mainly provided.

The shaft portion 39466b is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 39467, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. Thereby, the ball receiver 4
67 can be rotatably held.

The ball receiving portion 39467 is connected to the first piece 39467c formed by bending substantially L-shaped in front view, the second piece 39467d connected to the first piece 39467c, and the second piece 39467d and the second piece 39467d. A third piece 39467e disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d.

The first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are portions for holding a game ball sent from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57) to the inside of the lower displacement member 39440, and the first piece 39467c.
When a game ball is sent between the second piece 39467d and the second piece 39467d, the second piece 39467d is displaced in a direction away from the first piece 39467c, and a part of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39 are displaced.
467d is arranged in a U shape in a front view, and a game ball can be held in an inner portion of the U shape.

The first piece 39467c includes a receiving piece 39467c4 that forms one extending side formed in an L shape in a front view, a leg portion 467a that forms the other extending side, a receiving piece 39467c4, and a leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 39467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bending portion), and a connecting portion 39467c1 protruding to the opposite side with the bent portion 39467c5 interposed therebetween And comprising.

The receiving piece 39467c4 is a part forming a side surface on the other side (arrow R direction side) formed in a U-shape in front view by the one piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d, and is formed in a crescent shape on the front side. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 39467d.

The connecting portion 39467c1 protrudes from two locations at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow F-B direction) of the bent portion 39467c5. Further, the connecting portion 39467c1 is a second piece 3 described later.
9467d and the third piece 39467e are connected to each other, and include a connection hole 39467c2 that extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and is opened in a circular cross section.

The connecting hole 39467c2 has a shaft portion 39467e protruding from a third piece 39467e described later.
An opening 3 is inserted. The connecting hole 39467c2 has a shaft portion 39467e3 inserted through an insertion hole 39467d3 formed in a second piece 39467d, which will be described later, on the front side (arrow F direction side).
Is inserted from. Further, the shaft portion 39467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the opposite side (arrow B direction side) to the insertion side of the coupling hole 39467c2. Thus, the first piece 39467
The second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e can be fastened to c.

The first piece 39467c includes a recess 39467c3 that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction side) on the projecting proximal end side of the connecting portion 39467c1. The recessed bottom surface of the recess 39467c3 is formed at the lowest position (lowermost part) of the side surfaces where the game balls are held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. Thus, the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d
The game ball held in the roll is rolled inside the recess 39467c3. As a result, the second piece 39467d can be easily displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c by the load of the game ball.

The second piece 39467d includes the receiving portion 39467c4 and the second piece 394 of the first piece 39467c.
67d is a portion that forms the side surface of the other side (arrow L direction side) formed in a U shape when viewed from the front, is formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front, and is recessed in a direction away from the first piece 39467c. Formed into a curved shape. Further, the second piece 39467d is the first piece 39467c.
An insertion hole 39467d3 that opens circularly in the front-rear direction and a recessed portion 39467d2 that is recessed in a circular shape from the front side (arrow F direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side) Prepare mainly.

The second piece 39467d is inserted into the insertion hole 39467d3 and the shaft portion 3946 of the third piece 39467e.
7e3 is inserted, and the connecting shaft 39467e of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2.
4 is inserted. Accordingly, when the second piece 39567d is displaced, the third piece 39467e is similarly displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c, the third piece 39567e is similarly rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c.

Further, the second piece 39467d is a connecting portion 39 protruding from two locations of the first piece 39467c.
It arrange | positions between opposing of 467c1 and is connected with the 1st piece 39467c. As a result, the second
When the piece 39467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 39467d3, the connecting portion 39467c
It is possible to suppress the shaft portion 39467e3 from being bent by causing the second piece 39467d to abut on the side surface on the opposite side.

The recessed portion 39467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 39467e4 of a third piece 39467e described later is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 39467e4.

The third piece 39467e is a reflection plate 39467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape in front view,
A shaft portion 394 protruding from the reflecting plate 39467e1 toward the back side (arrow B direction side).
67e3 and a connecting shaft 39467e4.

The reflection plate 39467e1 is formed of a resin material and is plated on the outer surface. Thereby, when the light radiate | emitted from LED38483b is irradiated to the reflecting plate 39467e1, light can be reflected in the outer surface. In addition, the reflection plate 39467e1
The entirety is formed to be curved in an arc shape toward the front side (arrow F direction side). Thereby, when the light irradiated from the front side is reflected, the light can be condensed on a predetermined part. In addition, shielding of the light of the light emitter 11491a by the reflection plate 39467e1 will be described later.

As described above, the shaft portion 39467e3 is a columnar body that is inserted into the connection hole 39467c2 of the first piece 39467c and the insertion hole 39467d3 of the second piece 39467d. Also, the shaft part 3
The protruding end surface of 9467e3 has a connecting hole 394 from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 39467e3.
A hole into which a screw inserted into 67c2 can be screwed is formed. Therefore, in a state where the shaft portion 39467e3 is inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 and the insertion hole 39467d3, the shaft portion 39467e3 is inserted.
The first piece 39467c, the second piece 39467d, and the third piece 39467e can be connected to each other by fastening the screw to the insertion tip surface of the first piece 3946, and the third piece 39467e is connected to the first piece 3946.
7c can be rotated.

As described above, the connecting shaft 39467e4 has the recessed portion 39467d of the second piece 39467d.
2 is inserted. As a result, the second piece 39467d has a shaft portion 3 with respect to the first piece 39467c.
When the rotational displacement is performed around 9467e3, the connecting shaft 39467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 39467d. Accordingly, the third piece 39467e is replaced with the second piece 39467e.
It can be displaced with the displacement of d.

Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 199, when the ball receiving portion 39467 receives a game ball between the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d, the received game ball becomes the first piece 3
9467c and the receiving surface of the second piece 39467d (the inner side surface formed in a U-shape in front view) roll and are guided to the recess 39467c3 positioned at the lowermost end of the receiving surface. This
The second piece 39467d can be rotated on the outer surface of the game ball around the shaft portion 39467e3 in a direction away from the first piece 39467c. As a result, the third piece 39467e moving with the displacement of the second piece 39467d can be displaced upward and disposed on the light irradiation of the LED 38483b.

Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b is used as the reflection plate 394 of the third piece 39467e.
67e1 reflects to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the lower displacement member 39440 to transmit the transmission part 1
1451b. Thereby, the amount of light emitted from the transmission part 11451b is partially increased, and the player can recognize the position of the game ball sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 39440.

In the second piece 39467d, the connecting shaft 39467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2, and the load of the third piece 39467e is always applied. The center of gravity G of the third piece 39467e is set on the opposite side of the connecting portion between the second piece 39567d and the third piece 39567e with the shaft portion 394673e interposed therebetween. Thereby, in the state where forces other than gravity are not acting on the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467de, the second piece 39467e is caused by the load of the third piece 39467e.
467e can be rotated to the first piece 39467c4 side.

Accordingly, when the game ball is discharged (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 39467, the third piece 394 is obtained.
The second piece 39467d can be displaced to the ball receiving piece 39467c4 side of the first piece 39467c by the load 67e. Therefore, only when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 39467, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 and emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b can be partially increased. As a result, it is possible to prevent light from being reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 by the positioning operation of the ball receiving portion 39467 or the like.

Further, the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 39467b by the operation of sliding the inside of the lower displacement member 39440 in the same manner as the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, and is emitted from the lower displacement member 39440. The game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received by the ball receiver 39467, the ball receiver 39
In the structure in which the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated about the shaft hole 467b as the 467 slides, the ball receiving portion 39 centered on the shaft hole 467b is caused by the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 39467.
The rotation speed of 467 is changed. Therefore, since the rotation speed depends only on the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 39467, there is a problem that the discharging speed of the game ball from the ball receiving portion 39467 is not stable.

In contrast, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the second piece 39467 is caused by the load of the third piece 39467e.
The direction in which d rotates and the rotation direction of the ball receiving portion 39467 around the shaft hole 467b when the game ball is emitted are set to be substantially the same direction, so that the game ball emitted from the emission opening 471 A driving force when the second piece 39467d is displaced can be applied. Therefore, the ball receiver 394
Even if the force applied to the game ball from the ball receiving portion 39467 is reduced when the 67 is displaced and the game ball is discharged from the emission opening 471, the speed of the emitted game ball can be maintained. As a result, the discharge speed of the game ball emitted from the ball receiving portion 39467 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, a first unit 40551 in the forty embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a malfunction is reported when a game ball is clogged in the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1, but in the 40th embodiment, a game ball having a size other than a prescribed size is detected in the main path. Injustice can be reported when passing through SK1. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 200A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 in the 40th embodiment, and FIG. 200B is the first unit 405 in the CCb-CCb line of FIG. 200A.
FIG. Note that the cross-sectional view of FIG. 200A corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 200, the first unit 40551 in the forty embodiment is a front side (
The first path member 560 disposed on the arrow F direction side, the second path member 570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 560, and the second path member 570. And a third path member 40580 disposed on the back surface of the first path member.

The third path member 40580 includes a first covering member 40581 disposed on the back surface on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the second path member 570, and the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the second path member 570. A second covering member 582 (see FIG. 19), a first covering member 40581 and a second
A first drive unit 583 (see FIG. 19) disposed between the covering members 582 and a second drive unit 584 (see FIG. 19) disposed on the back surface of the second covering member 582 are mainly used. It is configured to prepare for.

The first covering member 40581 is a member that forms a pitching path for a game ball that curves in a substantially U shape on the back side (arrow B direction side), and the back side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. And a plate-like attachment portion 4 that continues to the lower side of the bending portion 40581a.
0581b.

The curved portion 40581a includes a first opening 571a and a fourth opening 571d (second path member 5).
70) It is formed to be curved in a U-shaped cross section that is open on the side, and a first rolling portion 576 is disposed on the inside thereof. Further, the bending portion 40581a is formed so that the width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is small toward the back side (arrow B direction side), and the width dimension in the left-right direction at the curved portion having a U-shaped cross section. X10 (see FIG. 200 (a)) is formed to be 1.1 times or less the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when a game ball having a diameter 1.1 times or more than the prescribed game ball is sent, the game ball can be stopped inside the curved portion 40581a (main path SK1).

Further, the bending portion 40581a is disposed inside the recess 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86, similarly to the bending portion 581a in the first embodiment. Therefore, the bending portion 40
The game ball stopped inside 581a can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17), and the pachinko machine 10 can be notified of an error (injustice).

Furthermore, the curved portion 40581a includes an opening 40581a1 that opens to a curved portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a storage portion 4 that protrudes in a box shape that opens upward from an end portion on the back side of the opening 40481a1.
0581a2.

The opening 40581a1 is an opening that discharges a sphere having a diameter smaller than the diameter of the prescribed game sphere from the main path SK1, and has an opening dimension X15 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) (FIG. 200 (
a) is formed to a size larger than 0.9 times the diameter of the game ball. The opening 40
581a1 is formed on the back side of the curved portion 40581 that is the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the first rolling portion 576, and the game ball passing through the main path SK1 can be sent to the opening 40581a1. . Thereby, when a game ball having a diameter 0.9% or more smaller than the prescribed game ball is sent, the game ball can be discharged from the opening 40581a1 to the outside of the main route SK1.

The storage portion 40581a2 is a box that stores the game balls discharged from the opening 40581a1, and the inner space is formed in a size larger than the diameter of the game balls. As a result, the opening 40
The game ball discharged from 581a1 can be stored in the storage portion 40581a2, and the stored game ball can be detected by the detection device 86b3 to notify the pachinko machine 10 of an error (injustice).

In the 40th embodiment, the case has been described in which the width dimension X10 and the opening dimension X11 are formed with a different size of 0.1 times that of a game ball having a prescribed diameter (11 millimeters). It is not restricted to this, You may change the magnification of the magnitude | size with respect to a game ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 201 and FIG. 202, the first unit 415 in the 41st embodiment.
51 will be described. In the first embodiment, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j formed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK3 are vertically moved (arrows) around the curved portion of the curved path WK1. (U-D direction) The case where it is formed to be substantially the object has been described, but the first recess 41571h and the second recess 41571i in the forty-first embodiment.
The third recess 41571j is formed in a different shape, and the same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

201A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in the forty-first embodiment, and FIG. 201B is the first unit 4 along the CCIb-CCIb line in FIG. 201A.
FIG. 202 (a) shows the CCIIa-CCI of FIG. 201 (a).
FIG. 202 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 taken along the line Ia, and FIG.
It is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit 41551 in CCIIb-CCIIb line of 1 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the first unit 41551 in the forty-first embodiment.
The first path member 41560 disposed on the front side, the second path member 41570 disposed on the back side of the first path member 41560, and the back surface of the second path member 41570. The third path member 580 (see FIG. 19) is mainly provided.

The first path member 41560 has a front plate 41564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), and a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens upward (arrow U direction side). A first receiving portion 561, a second receiving portion 562, and a third receiving portion 563 that are formed on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the front plate 41564 and project from the rear side (arrow B direction side). (See FIG. 21),
Below the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 (arrow D direction side)
The first wall portion 41565 is provided below the first wall portion 565 and extends along a part of the end portion of the front plate 41564. The first wall portion 565 is provided at a predetermined interval. Two sets of the second wall portion 566 and the third wall portion 567 (see FIG. 21) that protrude from two places are mainly provided.

The front plate 41564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow path of the game ball formed between the second path member 41570 and the third path member 580 described later.
It is formed from a light transmission member. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 through (through) the front plate 41564.

Further, the front plate 564 has a first convex portion 41564b and a second convex portion 415 at positions facing a first concave portion 41571h, a second concave portion 41571i, and a third concave portion 41571j, which will be described later.
64c and the 3rd convex part 41564d are protrudingly provided.

The second path member 41570 protrudes from the front surface (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 41571 facing the front plate 41564 of the first path member 41560 toward the first path member 41560 side. The fourth wall 573 (see FIG. 21) and the fourth wall 573
A fifth wall 574 (see FIG. 21) that protrudes downward from the fifth wall by a predetermined distance, and a sixth wall that protrudes from the fifth wall 574 by a predetermined distance. And a wall portion 575 (see FIG. 21).

The base plate 41571 is a pitching path of game balls formed between facing the front plate 41564 (
A first recess 41571h provided in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK3),
A second recess 41571i and a third recess 41571j are provided.

The first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j are formed in a curved shape toward the back side. Also, the first concave portion 41571h and the first convex portion 4
The dimension between the opposing faces of 1564b, the dimension between the opposing faces of the second recess 41571i and the second convex part 41564c, and the dimension between the opposing faces of the third concave part 41571j and the third convex part 41564d are respectively the same opposing dimension L19 (FIG. b) see).

The facing distance L19 is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is smaller than the facing distance L20 between the back surface of the front plate 41564 and the front surface of the base plate 571 (see FIG. 201 (b)). Set to Accordingly, the first recess 41571h and the second recess 4157
1i and the third concave portion 41571j, and the first concave portion 41571h and the second concave portion 4 are game balls sent between the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d.
1571i and third concave portion 41571j, first convex portion 41564b, second convex portion 41564c
In addition, the rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball can be reduced by abutting against the third convex portion 41564d.

Further, the projecting dimensions of the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d toward the base plate 41571 are set to be the same. Further, the protruding front end surfaces of the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d, and the first concave portion 41571h,
A distance dimension L21 (refer to FIG. 201 (b)) between the front surface of the base plate 41571 excluding the second concave portion 41571i and the third concave portion 41571j is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Accordingly, the first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j
And the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 415 are game balls sent between the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d.
64d. As a result, the rolling (downflow) speed of the game ball can be reduced.

The first recess 41571h is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK2, and is long and recessed along the direction in which the game balls of the main path SK2 are sent. As a result, the first recess 41571 is obtained.
It is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the first recess 41571h when the game ball sent to the inner side of h is sent inside the first recess 41571h. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 from being stopped due to contact with the first recess 41571h.

The first convex portion 41564b protruding from the surface facing the first concave portion 41571h is the first concave portion 41.
It extends in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of 571h. Thereby, when the game ball sent through the main path SK2 is brought into contact with the first convex portion 41564b, the game ball is moved to the first concave portion 41571h.
It is easy to throw the ball inside.

The second recess 41571i is formed in the base plate 41571 of the curved path WK1, and is long and recessed along the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). Further, the second recess 41571i is formed in an ellipse whose shape in front view is long in the up-down direction, and an intermediate position in the left-right direction of the ellipse is set to an intermediate position in the left-right direction of the curved path WK1 extending in the up-down direction. In addition, the curved center on the upper side (main path SK2 side) of the ellipse of the second recess 41571i is disposed on the pitching trajectory of the center of the game ball sent on the main path SK2. Therefore, since the second recess 41571i is recessed above the pitch of the game ball sent from the main route SK2, even when the game ball is sent through the main route SK2 at a relatively high speed, Center the game ball on the second recess 41571
The front side of i can be passed. As a result, the game balls passing through the main route SK2 are second
It is possible to easily reduce the speed of the game ball by sending the ball to the inside of the recess 41571i, and to prevent the game ball from rampaging along the curved path WK1.

The second convex portion 41564c protruding from the surface facing the second concave portion 41571i is formed to be bent in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front. The second convex portion 41564c has a bent portion set on the front side of the center of curvature above the ellipse of the second concave portion 41571i in front view. In addition, the bent portion on one side of the second convex portion 41564c extends in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is sent on the curved path WK1, and the bent portion on the other side is sent in the game ball on the main path SK2. It extends in a direction orthogonal to the direction. Thereby, the game ball sent from the main route SK2 to the curved route WK1 is brought into contact with the second convex portion 41564c on the other side and sent to the inside of the second concave portion 41571i, and also to the second convex portion 41564c on the one side. It is possible to easily decrease the pitching speed of the game balls that are brought into contact with each other and are sent through the curved path WK11. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball sent to the curved path WK1 from rampaging and to smoothly send the game ball.

The third recess 41571j is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK3, and is recessed in an elliptical shape that is long in the direction in which the game balls of the main path SK3 are sent. As a result, the third recess 415
When the game ball sent to the inside of 71j is sent to the inside of the third recess 41571j, the third
It can suppress that the frictional resistance with the recessed part 41571j increases. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the main path SK3 from stopping due to contact with the third recess 41571j.

Further, in the third recess 41571j, the center of curvature of the upstream end of the game ball sending path is set to the lower side of the horizontal center of the second recess 41571i. Thereby, the curved path WK1
The game ball that has flowed down inside the second recess 41571i can be easily received by the second recess 41571i, and the game ball can be easily sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3.

The third convex portion 41564d protruding from the surface facing the third concave portion 4156771j is formed to be bent in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front. The third convex portion 41564d has a bent portion set on the front side of the center of curvature at the upstream end portion of the third concave portion 41571j in front view. A bent portion on one side of the third convex portion 41564d extends in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is sent on the main path SK3, and a bent portion on the other side is orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is sent on the curved path WK1. It extends in the direction. As a result, the game ball sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is brought into contact with the third convex part 41564d on the other side and sent to the inside of the third concave part 41571j, and also to the third convex part 41564d on the one side. It is possible to reduce the pitching speed of the game balls that are brought into contact with each other and are sent along the main path SK3. As a result, the game ball sent from the curved route WK1 to the main route SK1 can be prevented from being ramped, and the game ball can be sent smoothly.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 203 to 206, the game board 42013 in the forty-second embodiment.
Will be described. In the first embodiment, the other end side of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) disposed in the back case 300 is fixed to the back case 300 with a screw inserted from the back side of the substrate box 100. As described above, in the forty-second embodiment,
A case where the second engagement member 42370 disposed on the back case 42300 is engaged with the board box 42100 will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 203 and FIG. 204, the rear case 423 in the forty-second embodiment.
The overall configuration of 00 will be described. FIG. 203 shows a rear case 42 in the forty-second embodiment.
3 is an exploded perspective front view of 300. FIG. 204 (a) is a front view of the back case 42300, and FIG. 204 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 42300 along the CCIVb-CCIVb line in FIG. 204 (a). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 203 and 204, a back case 42300 according to the forty-second embodiment is erected from the bottom wall portion 42301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 42301 toward the front. The outer wall part 42302 is provided, and each of the wall parts 42301 and 42302 is formed in a box shape in which one surface side (front side) is opened.

The back case 42300 is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301 (the open side formed in a box shape (the arrow F direction side)) and the back surface side of the back case 42300. A fixing member 320 for fixing one end side of the substrate box 42100, and a bottom wall portion 4230.
1, a second engagement member 423 that is disposed on the front side of the first board and fixes the other end of the board box 42100.
70.

The bottom wall portion 42301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape in front view at the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 through the opening 301a.
Reference) is visible. In addition, the bottom wall portion 42301 protrudes in a columnar shape on the front side,
The protruding portion 301b inserted into the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 310, the first opening 301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and the second opening opening at a position facing the engaging member 310.
A second protruding portion 42301f that protrudes in a columnar shape on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the opening 301d and the bottom wall portion 42301 and is inserted into a sliding groove 42372 of a second engagement member 42370 described later.
And a third opening 42301g formed penetratingly in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction) above the second projecting portion 42301f (arrow U direction).

The 2nd protrusion part 42301f is a processus | protrusion which prescribes | regulates the displacement direction of the 2nd engaging member 42370, and is formed along with two places of the gravity direction. Further, the outer diameter of the second projecting portion 42301f is set to be slightly smaller than the groove width in the short direction of the sliding groove 42372 of the second engaging member 42370 described later. Further, the two second projecting portions 42301f are set such that the distance between the centers thereof is smaller than the groove width in the longitudinal direction of the sliding groove 42372. Thereby, the sliding groove 4
Two second projecting portions 42301 f can be inserted and disposed inside 2372.

The third opening 42301g has a protruding portion 4211 of a substrate box 42100, which will be described later, on the inner side.
8 is an opening into which the opening 8 is opened with a size larger than the outer shape of the protruding portion 42118 in front view. In addition, the third opening portion 42301g connects the engaging member 310 to the fixing member 320 in a state where the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged (the state shown in FIG. 204 (a)).
Is formed at a position adjacent to the direction of releasing the engagement (direction of arrow L). This makes it impossible to release the engagement of the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320 in a state where the protruding portion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g. A detailed description of the positional relationship between the protruding portion 42118 and the engaging member 310 will be described later.

The outer wall portion 42302 includes a second opening portion 42302b that opens in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) on the side surface on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in a front view. The second opening 42302b is
This is an opening through which a lower end (arrow D direction side) end of a second engagement member 42370 described later is inserted, and is formed in the displacement region of the second engagement member 42370. Thereby, the second engaging member 4
2370 can be displaced.

The board box 42100 is formed with a horizontally long rectangular outer shape in front view, and the main controller 110 is disposed inside. The board box 42100 has a bearing 117 (see FIG. 206 (a)) that projects from the end on one end side (arrow R direction side) and a projecting section that projects from one surface on the front side of the board box 42100. 42118.

As described above, the projecting portion 42118 has the third opening portion 42301 of the rear case 42300.
g is a portion inserted into g, and in a state where the front surface of the substrate box 42100 and the rear surface of the rear case 42300 are parallel to each other, an opening 42118a described later is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301 of the rear case 42300. Is set. In addition, the protruding portion 42118 is
An opening 42118a that opens in the direction of gravity is provided, and a second engagement member 42370, which will be described later, is disposed inside the opening 42118a. Accordingly, the substrate box 42100 is prevented from rotating around the fixing member 320, and the substrate box 4210 is thereby suppressed.
0 can be disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 42300 in a state where it cannot be displaced.

Further, the third opening portion 42301g into which the projecting portion 42118 is inserted is engaged when the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged as described above (the state shown in FIG. 204 (a)). Since the member 310 is formed at a position adjacent to the direction in which the engagement with the fixing member 320 is released (arrow L direction), the projecting portion 42118 is disposed at a position adjacent to the engagement member 310. Further, the insertion dimension Y6 (see FIG. 204B) of the protruding portion 42118 into the third opening 42301g is a separation distance Y7 between the front surface of the engaging member 310 and the front surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 (FIG. 204B).
It is set larger than (see). As a result, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), the engaging member 310 and the projecting portion 42118 are disposed at a position where they overlap each other in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) position.

Therefore, in a state where the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a of the protruding portion 42118, the engaging member 310 releases the engagement with the fixing member 320 (the protruding portion 42).
The displacement in the direction in which 118 is disposed is restricted. As a result, the opening 42118a has a second
With the engagement member 42370 inserted, the engagement of the engagement member 310 with the fixing member 320 can be prevented from being illegally released, and the board box 42100 (main control device 110) is replaced with an unauthorized base. Can be suppressed.

The opening 42118a of the projecting portion 42118 is opened in the gravitational direction, and the second engagement member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a is displaced and inserted in the gravitational direction. Therefore, since the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the second engagement member 42370, the displacement direction (horizontal direction) of the engagement member 310, and the orthogonal direction are set, the engagement member 310 is impossible due to the player's fraud. The second engagement member 423 inserted into the opening 42118a is subjected to the force when operated by
70 can be easily received. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement with the fixing member 320 from being released when the engaging member 310 is forcibly operated by a player's fraud.

The second engagement member 42370 has a plate member 42371 formed in a plate-like shape having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and faces downward (arrow D direction) from an upper end (arrow U direction side) of the plate member 42371. A recessed portion 42374 that is recessed, a second engaging portion 42373 that protrudes outward in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction) at the upper end (arrow U direction side) end of the plate member 42371, and a recess. Installation part 4237
4 is mainly provided with a sliding groove 42372 opened in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow FB) at a position below 4.

As described above, the sliding groove 42372 is an opening for disposing the second engaging member 42370 so as to be displaceable, and is opened long in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). Also, the sliding groove 423
72, the width dimension in the short direction (arrow LR direction) is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the second protruding portion 42301f disposed inside the sliding groove 42372. Therefore, as described above, the sliding groove 4
When the second projecting portion 42301f is inserted into 2372, the sliding direction of the second engaging member 42370 is defined as the longitudinal direction of the opening of the sliding groove 42372.

The recessed portion 42374 is an opening for easily elastically deforming the upper end portion of the plate member 42371, is recessed downward, and is notched in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the rigidity of the upper end portion of the plate member 42371 can be lowered, and the elastic deformation can be easily performed.

The second engaging portion 42373 is a portion that engages with the end portion of the opening 42118a of the protruding portion 42118 described above, and protrudes from both side surfaces in a direction perpendicular to the notch direction of the recessed portion 42374. The separation distance X12 (see FIG. 204 (a)) between the ends of the protrusions on both sides is the opening 421.
It is set to be larger than the opening dimension X13 in the left-right direction of 18a (see FIG. 204 (b)). Accordingly, when the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engaging portion 42373 engages with the end of the opening 42118a, so that the second engaging portion 42373 is opened. Can be prevented from exiting.

The second engaging portion 42373 is formed in a shape projecting outward in the horizontal direction from the upper side to the lower side of the plate member 42371. Thereby, the second engagement member 42370 is moved to the opening 4.
When inserted into 2118a, the upper side of the plate member 42371 can be easily elastically deformed by bringing the second engagement portion 42373 into contact with the inside of the opening portion 42118a.

The second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a (the engagement portion 42).
373 is engaged with the protruding portion 42118), the lower end portion is the outer wall portion 4230.
It arrange | positions inside the 2nd 2nd opening part 42302b. Thereby, it can suppress that the 2nd engaging part 42370 is operated from the outer side of the back case 42300. FIG. As a result, the second engaging portion 4
It can be suppressed that the engagement between 2373 and the projecting portion 42118 is illegally released and the board box 42100 (main control device 110) is replaced with an illegal base.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204 and FIG. 205, the board box 4 to the back case 42300.
A method of arranging 2100 will be described. 205 (a) is a front view of the back case 42300, and FIG. 205 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 42300 along the CCVb-CCVb line in FIG. 205 (a). 204A and 204B show the state after the substrate box 42100 is disposed on the back case 42300. FIG.
FIGS. 205A and 205B show a state before the substrate box 42100 is disposed on the back case 42300. FIG.

The substrate box 42100 in the forty-second embodiment is similar to the first embodiment described above,
First, the fixing member 320 is engaged with the engaging member 310, and one side is disposed on the back side of the back case 42300.

205 (a) and 205 (b), the engaging member 310 is fixed to the fixing member 3 as shown in FIG.
20, the front end of the second piece 312 of the engaging member 310 is disposed on the front side of the third opening 42301g. Thereby, before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, the protruding portion 42118 of the substrate box 42100 is moved to the third opening portion 42301.
It can suppress that it is penetrated inside g. As a result, it is possible to suppress the board box 42100 from being disposed on the back case 42300 only by the engagement of the protruding portion 42118 and the second engaging portion 42370.

Next, the board box 42100 is rotated around the connecting portion between the fixing member 320 on one side and the other side of the board box 42100, and the protruding portion 42118 is inserted inside the third opening 42301g of the back case 42300. Accordingly, the projecting portion 42118 is disposed at a position where it can engage with the second engagement member 42370.

The second engaging member 42370 is disposed outside the rear case 42300 with the lower side inserted through the second opening 42302b in a state before being inserted into the third opening 42301g (FIG. 205 (a)). reference). As a result, the board box 42100 is moved to the rear case 42.
An operator disposed in 300 can operate the second engagement member 42370 from the outside of the back case 42300 to insert the second engagement member 42370 into the inside of the third opening 42301g.

Further, since the displacement direction of the second engagement member 42370 is set to the gravity direction, the second engagement member 42370 is disposed at the lower end portion by the action of gravity in a state before being inserted inside the third opening portion 42301g. . Accordingly, the projecting portion 42118 becomes the third opening portion 42301 of the rear case 42300.
It can suppress colliding with the 2nd engaging member 42370, when being inserted inside g. As a result, the work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

In addition, when the second engagement member 42370 is forgotten to be engaged with the projecting portion 42118, the second engagement member 42370 can be disposed outside the rear case 42300, which is not normal for the operator. Can be easily recognized. As a result, forgetting to engage the second engaging member 42370 and the protruding portion 42118 can be prevented.

Next, the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 206 (b) is shown in FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the game board 13 in the CCVIb-CCVIb line | wire of a).

As shown in FIG. 206, a standing member 42060f is disposed on the back surface of the base plate 42060 in the forty-second embodiment. The standing member 42060 f is erected toward the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 42060, and the standing tip position is the back case 4230.
The zero bottom wall portion 42301 is set in the same plane. Further, the standing member 42060f has the second
It is disposed below the engaging member 42370 and is disposed outside the back case 42300. Thus, when the rear case 42300 is disposed on the game board 42013 in a state where the second engagement member 42370 and the projecting portion 42118 are forgotten to be engaged, the standing portion 42060f of the second engagement member 42370 is disposed. It can collide with the lower side. As a result, the second engagement member 42
It is possible to suppress the rear case 42300 from being disposed on the base plate 4260 in a state in which the 370 and the protruding portion 42118 are forgotten to be engaged, or in a state in which the substrate box 42100 is forgotten to be disposed in the rear case 42300.

In the present embodiment, a light emitting substrate that irradiates the inside of the back case 42300 is disposed on the standing portion 42060f. As a result, the standing portion 42060f can be combined with a portion that irradiates light, and a portion that prevents the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 from being engaged in an abnormal state. As a result, an increase in the outer shape of the base plate 42060 can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In the first embodiment, in order to retract the ball receiving portion 467 from the third position to the second position or the first position, it is configured to follow the drive of the drive motor KM2, but from the third position to the second position or the second position. The drive for retracting to one position may be driven by a biasing spring. For example, an urging spring is provided between the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 and the base member 470, and an elastic force is applied in accordance with the displacement of the rack 466 or the movable rack 464.

In this case, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position and performs the dispensing operation, the drive motor K
By turning off the driving of M3, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the second position or the first position side by the biasing force of the biasing spring.

Therefore, using the time until the driving force of the driving motor KM2 is switched at the third position,
Since the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced, the wobbling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction of the discharging operation when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 can be suppressed.

That is, when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the discharged game ball, and the lower displacement member 440 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force for displacing the base member 470 downward is exerted by a reaction caused by the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is discharged from the lower displacement member 440. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the engaging protrusion 882 that restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800 has the rotating body 800.
Although the case where two are formed on the side surface with a predetermined interval has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of continuous members may be provided on the side wall of the rotator 800 at a predetermined interval. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be restricted at any position, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 with an external force when the lid member 770 is in the open state can be restricted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the game ball is sent from the opening 831 has been described. However, the opening 831 is a communication hole 881 of the rotating body 800.
You may form in the side surface on the opposite side to b. That is, an opening may be formed on both side surfaces of the rotating body 800 in the axial direction, and one may be used as a sphere inlet and the other as a sphere outlet. In this case, since the pitching path of the ball can be formed inside the rotating body 800, the accessory (the rotating body 800) can be used as the pitching path, especially when there is no arrangement space on the back side of the game board 13. The pitching path can be secured without increasing the size of the game board 13.

In the said 1st Embodiment, although the rotary body 800 demonstrated the case where an external shape was formed in a column shape, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the shape may be a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. In this case, since the shape of the rotating body 800 can be complicated, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the effect has been switched due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 is formed to be operable by the player has been described. However, a push button may be provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654. In this case, the player can perform not only an operation of applying a rotational force to the rotation operation unit 8654 but also an operation of pressing a push button or a combination of the rotation operation and the push operation of the rotation operation unit 8654. . As a result, a plurality of operation forms of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be formed, so that the player can be provided with interest.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8852 are engaged with each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, transmission gear 8651
In addition, a torque limiter or the like that interrupts transmission of the driving force when an overload is applied may be interposed between the transmission gear 8852 and the transmission gear 8852.

In this case, when the player stops the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 in the rotation state, transmission of the rotation driving force from the drive motor KM6 can be blocked, and the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be suppressed from continuing. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation operation unit 8650 from being broken when a rotation opposite to the rotation in the A direction is input to the rotation operation unit 8654 from the player.

Further, when the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654, when the player's fingers or clothes are sandwiched between the rotation plate 817 on the rotation direction side of the rotation operation unit 8654, the rotation is stopped,
Further pinching of the player's fingers and clothes can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can use the rotation operation unit 8.
It is possible to suppress injury by being sandwiched between 654 and the upper plate 8017.

In the eighth embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 is the A direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 may be the left-right direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, it is possible to cause the player to perform an operation associated with the effect of the gaming machine and improve the effect of the effect. For example, it is possible to produce an effect of hitting (flapping) a character or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by hitting the rotation operation unit 8654 so as to rotate rightward with the left hand.

In the first embodiment, the substrate box 100 is disposed on the fixing member 320, and the fixing member 320 is engaged with the engaging member 310, thereby preventing the substrate box 100 from being replaced with an unauthorized substrate. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other members (for example, the third pattern) may be used as long as they have the effect of being able to suppress unauthorized removal by being disposed on the fixing member 320. It may be a display device 81 or a detection device capable of detecting unauthorized input such as unauthorized radio waves or vibrations.

In the first embodiment, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j formed in the first unit 551, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 5 are formed.
The case where 64d is formed at positions facing each other has been described, but is not necessarily limited thereto, and for example, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564 are used.
d is arranged upstream of the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j, and the flowing game balls are moved to the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d. You may form so that it may be received in the 1st recessed part 571h, the 2nd recessed part 571i, and the 3rd recessed part 571j after making it contact | abut.

In the first embodiment, the decorative member 154 has a thickness dimension of the recess 151 of the main body 151.
Although the case where it was made smaller than the recessed depth of b was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the decorative member 154 is formed from an elastically deformable material, and the main body 15
It may be formed thicker than the recessed depth of one recess 151b. In this case, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the main body portion 151 can be disposed in contact with the base plate 60 by being compressed and elastically deformed.

In the first embodiment, when the cam member 422 is disposed at the position of the second displacement state, the forces PW1 and PW2 that are applied from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 act in a direction that cancels each other. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the direction of the force input to the cam member 422 from the point where the end of the cam member 422 and the plate-like protrusion 431b abut may be set to the direction from the abutment point toward the axis of the shaft portion 422a. . According to this, it is possible to suppress the force in the direction rotating around the shaft portion 422a from acting on the cam member 422.

In the first embodiment, the other end side of the substrate box 100 is connected to the rear case 300 by a screw.
Although the case where it is arrange | positioned at the back side of was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the other end side of the substrate box 100 may be fixed by a sealing tool that cannot be removed when engaged with the rear case 300. More specifically, a cylindrical sealing tool that is inserted through openings formed at a plurality of locations on the other end side of the back case 300 is inserted into insertion portions that are recessed at a plurality of locations on the back side of the back case 300. By engaging the insertion portion with the sealing tool, the substrate box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 in a state where it cannot rotate (operate).

When removing the substrate box 100, the other end side of the substrate box 100 can be removed from the back case 300 by cutting the engaging portion between the insertion portion and the sealing tool.
Further, when the other end side of the substrate box 100 is disposed again in the rear case 300, a new sealing tool is inserted through an unused opening of the substrate box 100, and an unused insertion portion of the rear case 300 is inserted. The other end side of the substrate box 100 can be disposed on the back case 300 by engaging with the back case 300.

In the first embodiment, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view is formed larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b, and the end of the decorative member 154 is the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60.
However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view may be set to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b.

In this case, the decorative member 154 of the general prize opening unit 150 and the decorative member 6 of the base plate 60 are used.
By forming 0c from the same material, the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c are formed as a single sheet, and the decorative member 154 is cut from the sheet, whereby the decorative member 154 is formed.
And the decorative member 60c can be formed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to form the decoration member 154 in a separate process, the yield when forming the decoration member 154 can be improved.

When the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in the front view is formed to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b, the decorative member 154 is disposed inside the second opening 60b, and the decorative member 15 is disposed.
4 and the decorative member 60c are preferably arranged on the same plane. In this case, since the decorative surfaces of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c coincide with the front-rear direction in the front view, the player can recognize the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c as one decoration.

In the first embodiment, the first convex portion 571h is provided on the inner surface on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game ball sending path of the first unit 551 toward the back side (arrow B side direction). The second convex portion 571i and the third convex portion 571k are formed, and the first concave portion 571h and the second concave portion 571i are formed in the inner surface of the back side of the game ball sending path of the first unit 511 so as to be recessed toward the back side. And third
Although the case where the recessed part 571j is provided was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this.

For example, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, the third concave portion 571j, and the first convex portion 571.
h, 2nd convex part 571i, and 3rd convex part 571k may be formed in the inner surface on the opposite side in the front-back direction in front view.

Moreover, the recessed part recessed toward the front image may be formed in the inner surface of the front side of the position facing the 2nd recessed part 571i. In this case, as the concave portion is provided in the pitching space of the curved path WK1,
The pitching space can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down too slowly on the curved path WK1. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from staying on the curved path WK1.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 9431b1 protrudes to the front side toward the cam member 422 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example,
The inclined surface 9431b1 may be formed as an inclination that reduces the amount of protrusion to the front side toward the cam member 422.

In this case, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-like protrusion 9531a, the cam member 422 is moved to the curved wall portion 411e of the front base 411.
Can be pressed against. As a result, the cam member 422 can be prevented from swinging back and forth, and the lower displacement member 440 can be easily maintained at the position of the second displacement state.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the light emitter 11491a is formed at a position higher than the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 (in the direction of the arrow U) is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitter 11491a may be disposed at substantially the same height as the center of the game ball received by the ball receiver 467. In this case, the transmission part 11451
It is preferable that the height position of b is formed from the center of the game ball received by the ball receiver 467 to the upper side from the center.

According to this, when a part of the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is blocked by the game ball, the shadow of the game ball formed on the transmission part 11451b is formed in a semicircular shape by the upper hemisphere of the game ball. it can. Thus, the roundness of the game ball can be formed in the shadow formed on the transmission portion 11451b, so that the player can easily recognize the position of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467.

In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments, the case where the third pieces 12467e and 39467e are displaced by the load of the game ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a sensor for detecting that a game ball has passed through a ball sending path for sending a game ball is attached to the ball receivers 12467 and 39467, and the third piece 12467e, 39467e may be displaced alone. According to this, the second piece 12
Since it is not necessary to displace 467d and 39467d by the load of the game ball, the ball receiving portion 12
The reliability of displacement of 467 and 39467 can be improved. In this case, the third piece 12467e
, 39467e are disposed in the ball receiving portions 12467, 39467.

In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments, the case where the rotation axis when the third pieces 12467e and 39467e are rotationally displaced is formed in the first pieces 12467c and 39467c, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the shafts 12467e3 and 39467e3 of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e are inserted into the openings formed in the rack 466, and the third piece 1
2467e and 39467e may be rotationally displaced with respect to the rack 466. In this case, it is possible to easily increase the distance between the rotating shaft and the connecting portion between the second pieces 12467d and 39467d, and thus the third pieces 12467e and 394 with respect to the displacement amount of the second pieces 12467d and 39467d.
The displacement amount of 67e can be easily increased. As a result, the shielding plate 124 of the third piece 12467e.
67e1 can be easily arranged on the front side of the light emitter 11491a. In this case, the opening formed in the rack 466 is formed in a long hole in which the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 can slide.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the second path member 13570 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the first path member 13560 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the first path member 13560 may be moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the second path member 13570. In this case, the relative positional relationship between the second path member 13570 and the front surface of the base plate 60 (game board 13) prevents the player from grasping the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other. it can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the first, tenth, and twenty-fifth embodiments, the case where the decorative members 154, 10154, and 25154 are attached by the adhesive tapes 154a, 10154a, and 25154a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. An adhesive made of a liquid material may be used.

In the thirteenth, thirty-second, thirty-third, thirty-fourth, and thirty-fifth embodiments, the first disposed on the front side.
The path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35560 are formed of a non-light transmissive material, and the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35 are formed.
Although the case where it is difficult for the player to recognize the opposing space between 560 and the second path members 13570, 32570, and 34570 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto.

For example, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560
The first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member 1357 are formed by forming openings in the form of slits having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
The player may visually recognize the game ball flowing down between 0, 32570 and 34570 through the opening. In this case, the plurality of openings formed in the slit shape are set such that the distance to the adjacent opening is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Accordingly, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 355 are used.
It is possible for the player to recognize the game ball flowing down between the opposite of the second path member 13570, 32570, and 34570 through the opening.

In addition, the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 is formed with an opening that is opened in a circular shape smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and second path members 13570, 3257
A game ball that flows down between 0 and 34570 may be visually recognized by the player through the opening. In this case, the adjacent width dimension of the plurality of openings is formed smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the opening of the opening can be made smaller than when the opening is formed in a slit shape, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, and 34 are interposed through the opening.
It can suppress that the space | interval between facing 560,35560 and 2nd path | route members 13570,32570,34570 is recognized by a player.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the portion to which the displacement member 18310 is engaged (the engaged portion 18332).
) Is formed on the fixing member 18320, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the engaged portion 18332 with which the displacement member 18310 is engaged may be formed in the substrate box 100 that is caulked and fixed to the fixing member 18320.

In this case, in a state where the substrate box 100 is not disposed on the back case 18300,
The displacement member 18310 cannot be disposed inside the back case 18300, and the displacement member 1
8310 can be made to protrude to the outside of the back case 18300 by its own weight.

As a result, when the board box 100 is forgotten to be attached to the rear case 18300, the displacement member 18310 is hooked on the outer frame 11 when the game board 18013 is disposed on the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 164 (b)). As a result, the operator can be made aware of forgetting to attach the board box 100.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall 302 of the back case 300.
The insertion portion 21724b of the rotation unit 21700 disposed in the recess 31 is the recess 31 of the displacement member 310.
7, the case where the engagement between the displacement member 310 and the fixing member 320 is prevented from being illegally released has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an insertion portion 21724b to be inserted inside the recess 317 of the displacement member 310 may be formed in the substrate box 100 disposed in the fixing member 320.

In this case, the insertion portion 21724b is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 302 through an opening formed in the fixing member 320. Further, the insertion portion 21724b is formed at a portion where a shaft for caulking and fixing to the fixing member 320 is inserted. As a result, when the bearing portion 117 of the substrate box 100 is cut and illegally removed from the rear case 21300, the insertion portion 21
724b can be left inside the recess 317 of the displacement member 310. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 21300.

Therefore, when the fixing member 320 is replaced, it is necessary to correct the caulking portion between the substrate box 100 and the fixing member 320 (cut the caulking portion). Thus, the fixing member 32
Since it can be difficult to illegally remove 0 from the back member 21300, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed and replaced with an unauthorized substrate box.

In the forty-second embodiment, the case where the light emitting substrate for irradiating light is arranged on the standing part 42060f has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the driving member arranged on the base plate 42060 It may be formed as a control board for controlling the game or a passage for sending game balls.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 287. In the first control example, the configuration is partially changed with respect to each of the above-described embodiments, and the control example is described. The same configuration as that of each of the above-described embodiments is described in detail. Is omitted. Note that some of the configurations used in this control example are given the same reference numerals for the same configurations as those in the above embodiments, but this is for easy understanding of the invention of this control example. Since the specific configuration is the same as the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Conventionally, a jackpot game is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and it is easy to win a ball to a winning device (for example, a variable winning device) during the jackpot game. There is a pachinko machine 10 for playing a game aiming at a game. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the player has a hard time and wins the big hit and the jackpot game is executed, the player's willingness to play is reduced if the percentage of balls to win the winning device (variable winning device) is low. There was a problem of letting it.

  Such a problem is that when the ball flows down the game area formed on the game board 13, it collides with a plurality of obstacles (for example, nails) provided on the game board 13 so that the flow direction of the ball is reduced. This is a problem that cannot be avoided in the pachinko machine 10 because it is caused by an increase or decrease in the number of balls to be awarded to the variable winning device 65 by being varied.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, the pseudo-attacker (effect attacker) 165 (see FIG. 208) is driven in synchronization with the attacker (variable winning device) 65 that is opened during the big hit game. Further, in addition to the ball that has won the variable winning device 65, the ball that has entered the right general winning port 163 (see FIG. 208) and the specific out port 166 (see FIG. 208) flows into the pseudo attacker 165. It is composed. The pseudo attacker 165 is configured to be easier for the player to visually recognize than the variable winning device 65.

  With this configuration, when the jackpot game is started, the player executes the jackpot game while looking at the ball that wins the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, it is possible to make it seem that more balls than the balls actually won in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game are winning in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game.

  Of the balls fired in the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game, the balls that have not won the variable winning device 65 (the other winning (ball) ports are won by the time they reach the variable winning device 65 ( Sphere) is awarded to the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, when the number of winning balls for the variable winning device 65 decreases, the number of winning balls (balls) in other winning (ball) ports (hereinafter referred to as winning ports, etc.) is likely to increase. Regardless of the increase or decrease in the number of balls awarded to the device 65, a predetermined number of balls can be stably awarded to the pseudo attacker 165.

  Further, in the first control example, in accordance with the timing at which a ball that has won (entered) each winning award (specific winning opening 65a, right general winning opening 163, specific out opening 166) wins the pseudo attacker 165, It is configured to execute a winning effect.

  As a result, it is possible to execute a winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 at the timing when the ball has won the pseudo attacker 165, so that the pseudo attacker 165 is a real attacker (variable winning device). 65). Note that the winning effect executed based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 is, for example, a winning sound notification effect for notifying the player that the ball has won the variable winning device 65, or a third For example, a prize ball number display effect for displaying information (acquisition information) for indicating the amount of privilege (prize ball) given to the player based on the winning of a ball in the variable prize winning device 65 on the symbol display device 81. is there.

  Further, in this control example, in order to make the pseudo-attacker 165 win a ball that has won a plurality of different winning holes, etc., the guiding flow path is such that the ball that has passed through each winning hole etc. is guided above the pseudo-attacker 165. 690 (see FIG. 208) is provided, but because the distance from each winning opening to the pseudo attacker 165 is different, the order in which the balls have won in each winning opening, etc., and the order in which the balls have won in the pseudo attacker 165 are different. There is. Therefore, in the first control example, the order of winning in the pseudo attacker 165 can be determined on the basis of the type of the winning opening where the ball has won and the winning timing. If the predetermined number (the number (for example, 10) that satisfies the closing condition of the variable winning device 65) is exceeded during the period in which the pseudo attacker 165 is continuously opened, a specific winning effect (overflow effect) is obtained. Is configured to run.

  In this way, in the configuration in which the balls won at each winning opening etc. flow down the guiding channel 690, the order of winning at the pseudo attacker 165 is calculated instead of the winning order at each winning opening etc., and based on the calculation result By configuring so as to execute a specific winning effect (overflow effect), it is possible to execute the winning effect without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  In this control example, the above-described winning effect is executed based on the detection results of the detection sensors 65s1, 65s2, 163s, and 166s (see FIG. 208) for detecting that a ball has won a prize opening or the like. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated detection sensor for executing a winning effect using a ball that wins the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, since the number of detection means (sensors) attached to the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, the design cost can be suppressed.

  Next, characteristic production contents used in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example will be briefly described. Conventionally, a special symbol lottery right can be reserved and stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four), and the lottery right is held and stored until the special symbol lottery is actually executed. Inside, a process of determining (predicting) the jackpot lottery result in advance (so-called pre-reading process) using the information (winning information) included in the lottery right that is stored on hold, and the production based on the pre-discrimination result There is a pachinko machine 10 that executes (so-called pre-reading effect).

  In a conventional gaming machine using such a configuration, for example, a lottery result is given to a player by changing a display mode of identification information (so-called hold symbol) for indicating a lottery right that is reserved and stored. May be executed in advance. By executing such a pre-reading effect, if the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol may be won in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol. It is possible to continuously give the player a sense of expectation during the period until the game is executed (special symbol lottery period executed before the corresponding reserved symbol).

  However, in the case of the pre-reading effect described above, if the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol (variable reserved symbol) whose display mode is changed is executed, the display of the variable reserved symbol disappears, so that it is currently being executed. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to easily determine whether or not the special symbol lottery (variation) corresponds to the variable holding symbol. On the other hand, this control example is configured to display a display mode during execution based on the variable display mode of the reserved symbols corresponding to the currently executed special symbol lottery (variation). This makes it possible for the player to easily determine whether or not the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) being executed corresponds to the variable holding symbol.

  In addition, by changing the display mode of the reserved symbol as described above, in the case of a configuration in which a plurality of types of effect results are notified in the pre-reading effect informing the player in advance of the lottery result of the special symbol. (For example, when it is configured to notify a plurality of performance results having different expectations of winning a big hit), it is necessary to make the variable display mode different in an easy-to-understand manner so that each performance result can be easily identified. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to notify a lot of information in advance.

  On the other hand, in this control example, in addition to the above-described pre-reading effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the effect device (treasure box accessory 750 (see FIG. 210)) provided separately from the third symbol display device 81 is executed. It is configured as follows. Of the plurality of pieces of information acquired by the prefetching process, information to be notified in advance to the player by changing the display mode of the reserved symbols (for example, prefetching information for showing the jackpot determination result), and a treasure chest role By changing the display mode of the object 750, the information that is notified in advance to the player (for example, the pre-reading information for indicating the winning jackpot type) is made different.

  In this way, by providing a plurality of performance objects to be used for pre-reading effects and making different types of information to be notified in advance by each performance object, it is easy to notify a lot of information to the player in advance. be able to. In addition, in the present control example, an effect device other than the third symbol display device 81 is used, so that it is possible to continuously notify the effect of the prefetch effect.

  Further, conventionally, a variation effect is executed in which identification information (third symbol) for indicating a lottery result of a special symbol is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and then stopped. There is something to make. According to the pachinko machine 10 as described above, it is possible to predict whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit by the variation effect mode of the third symbol, and to enhance the interest of the game. It was. However, since the variation effect mode of the third symbol is determined based only on the lottery result of the special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol is determined by the variation effect mode to be executed for a player who plays for a long time. There was a problem that it was easily discriminated.

  In addition, in order to execute a specific variation effect mode (stop display mode of the 3rd symbol) indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a lottery result (for example, jackpot) that is advantageous to the player, the special symbol lottery Since it is a condition that the result is a lottery result (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player, there is a problem that the frequency of executing the variation effect mode is low.

  In contrast, in the first control example, a lottery result of a symbol other than the special symbol (for example, a normal symbol) is notified using the variation effect mode of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured to be possible. By configuring in this way, the variation effect mode of the third symbol can be set based on information other than the special symbol lottery result (for example, the normal symbol lottery result). It can suppress that the lottery result of a special symbol will be discriminate | determined easily.

  Furthermore, since the specific variation effect mode can be executed even when the normal symbol lottery result is a lottery result (for example, a win) that is advantageous to the player, the execution frequency of the specific variation effect mode can be increased. .

  Further, in the first control example, in order to indicate the normal symbol lottery result using the variation effect set based on the variation time (special symbol variation time) set based on the special symbol lottery result, The third symbol is temporarily stopped (actually moved (swinged) but almost stopped) at the timing when the symbol variation time elapses. As a result, it is possible to make the third symbol appear to be stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop timing of the normal symbol.

  In addition, in this control example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped at the stop timing of the normal symbol during the variation effect corresponding to the variation time (special symbol variation time) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol In addition, it is configured to vary the production mode of the remaining time effect executed during the remaining time based on the remaining time from the temporary stop timing (the time from the temporary stop timing until the special symbol is stopped and displayed). For example, if the remaining time is less than 3 seconds, a remaining time effect is displayed in which the temporary stop display of the third symbol continues. If the remaining time is longer than 3 seconds, the third symbol that is temporarily stopped is displayed. It is configured to display the variation again.

  As a result, even though the remaining time is short (for example, 0.5 seconds), the third symbol that is temporarily stopped is changed again, and an effect that is difficult for the player to execute is suppressed. Can do. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game because the temporary stop display is continued even though the remaining time is long (for example, 10 seconds).

  Furthermore, in this first control example, the length of the remaining time is roughly divided (for example, divided into intervals of 3 seconds), and a re-change effect corresponding to the division is executed. Thereby, it is possible to easily execute the re-variation effect corresponding to the length of the remaining time. In addition, the production modes that can be set as the re-variation production are set in advance at intervals of 3 seconds, 3 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, etc., and after setting the production period corresponding to the remaining time In order to correspond to the detailed remaining time, a re-variation effect is executed by deleting the first half of the effect mode for a predetermined time.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a re-variation effect corresponding to the remaining time that is randomly calculated using a pre-set effect period at regular intervals. Capacity can be reduced. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, an effect in which the third symbol swings is set as the first half (for one second) of the effect mode set in advance corresponding to the remaining time. . Thereby, even if a part of the first half part of the effect mode is deleted in correspondence with the actual remaining time, it is possible to suppress the effect that gives the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is other than the jackpot, when the player wins the jackpot, which is the lottery result that can give the player a smaller amount of privilege (prize ball) than the jackpot game. Also, the above-described specific variation effect is configured to be executed.

  And, as a small hit game executed when winning a small win, a win game executed in the initial period (the first round game period) of the big hit game executed when winning the big hit mentioned above The same game content is configured to be executed.

  As a result, even if a winning game is executed after the specific variation effect is executed, at this point, the player is informed whether the current winning game is a winning game based on a big win or a winning game based on a small win. Since it can be made difficult to understand, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for the big win for a long time.

  In the first control example, the player determines whether the winning game being executed is a jackpot game or a jackpot game using a period in which the same game content is executed in the jackpot game and the jackpot game. It is configured to execute a notification effect for informing the user. By configuring in this way, information that is difficult to discriminate only by the content of the winning game can be notified by the effect, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Conventionally, as an effect (notice effect) for suggesting a player with a lottery result of a special symbol, an effect (operation effect) for displaying the notice content by causing the player to operate the operation means (frame button 22) is executed. There is something to do. When executing such an operation effect, a period (operation effective period) during which the operation of the operation means can be effectively discriminated is set, and a notice content is displayed when the operation means is operated within the operation effective period. In general, it is configured to do so. In order to notify the player that the above-described operation valid period is set, for example, a display mode (button display) simulating the operation means and a display mode (for example, time gauge display) indicating the operation valid period ) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, in one operation effect, there is a display mode in which a time gauge is attached to each of a plurality of button displays in order to cause the player to operate the operation means a plurality of times.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the player can grasp a plurality of notice contents by operating the operation means within the operation effective period corresponding to each button display. It was possible to actively participate in the production. However, if a plurality of button displays for which the operation valid period is set are displayed at the same time, if the operation on the frame button 22 is temporarily neglected, each of the operation valid periods set individually will be provided. Therefore, it is difficult to appropriately operate the operation means, and there is a problem that the willingness to participate in the performance is reduced while the operation valid period is set.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, a plurality of operation effects with overlapping operation effective periods are configured to be executable, and each operation effect is provided when the operation effective period of each operation effect satisfies a predetermined condition. It is configured to execute a fusion operation effect that fuses the two. Specifically, when the display mode of the time gauge indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period is the same among the plurality of operation effects, the fusion operation effect is configured to be executed.

  By configuring in this way, there is a possibility that a plurality of operation effects can be changed to one fusion operation effect, so that it is possible to leave the possibility of completing the operation effect until the end. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to participate in the operation effect during the operation effect.

  In addition, some conventional pachinko machines 10 are configured such that specific notice content is displayed even when the operation means is not operated within the operation effective period set for the operation effect. In such a pachinko machine 10, since the specific notice content can be displayed even when the player does not operate the operation means, the player's willingness to play the game cannot be operated within the operation effective period. Can be suppressed. However, with such a configuration, there is a problem that the relevance between operating the operating means within the operation effective period and displaying the content of the notice is reduced, and the effect of presentation is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, an effect (automatic press effect) in which the operation means is automatically operated when the operation means is not operated when a predetermined period of the operation effective period has elapsed. It is configured to run. As a result, it is possible to strengthen the relevance between operating the operation means within the operation effective period and displaying the content of the advance notice, and to enhance the production effect.

  Further, in the first control example, when the player operates the operation means during the automatic pressing effect, the effect mode of the automatic pressing effect can be changed according to the player's operation. Yes. Therefore, it is possible to provide pleasure for the player to operate the operation means until the end of the period in which the operation effective period is set.

  Here, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 207, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 2) in the first embodiment described above in the left area of the game board 13 (of the variable display device unit 80). The game area formed on the left side is different in that a through gate 67 is provided, and the rest is the same. About the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 207, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is provided with a through gate 67 in the left area, and the player can make a left-handed game (a game for allowing a ball to flow down to the left area of the game board 13). All the spheres fired at the time of passing through the through gate 67 are configured. With this configuration, the player performs a left-handed game (a game for causing a ball to flow down to the left area of the game board 13), and a ball is won at the first winning opening 64 to draw the first special symbol. It is possible to execute the normal symbol lottery even during the time of performing. Accordingly, the normal symbol lottery is performed using the variation effect (the special symbol 1 variation effect) for dynamically displaying the identification information (the third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Results can be shown.

  Although the detailed content of the special figure 1 variation effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 212, in the first control example, the special symbol dynamic display period is matched with the timing at which the lottery result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. In the middle (during 3rd symbol fluctuation), the 3rd symbol is displayed as a temporary stop (the 3rd symbol is swung and displayed to the extent that the player thinks that the 3rd symbol is stopped). It is composed. Thereby, since the lottery result of the normal symbol can be notified using the third symbol, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player.

  In the first control example, the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the same winning display mode when the normal symbol is won and when the special symbol is won (charge effect ( (See FIG. 212). This allows the player to determine whether the winning display mode stopped for the player is a display mode for displaying a special symbol lottery result or a normal symbol lottery result. Can be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to easily give a sense of expectation to the winning game executed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, since the charge effect described above is executed either when winning a normal symbol or when winning a special symbol, chart effect only when winning a special symbol. The execution frequency of the charge effect can be increased compared to the case where is executed.

  Returning to FIG. In the right area of the game board 13, a game area (lower right game area) covered with a resin outer edge member 73 (73b) is formed. This lower right game area is transmissive and is covered with an outer edge member 73b that has been subjected to surface processing (for example, embossing) that diffusely reflects light, so that the player is more involved than other game areas. It becomes a game area that is difficult to see.

  The detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 208. In the lower right game area, a special winning device 550 having a flow path for flowing down the ball and various winning ports through which the ball can win is provided. In addition, a discharge channel is formed for using the balls that have won the various winning openings for a pseudo-production. Then, the ball that has flowed down the lower right game area is configured to enter an out port (not shown) and be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 208, a description will be given of the types of the entrances (winning entrances) provided in the special prize-winning device 550 and the flow down paths of the game balls that have entered the entrances. Note that the flow down path (main paths SK1 to SK6) of the game ball that has flowed into the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 has already been described with reference to FIG. The details will be omitted. FIG. 208 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the special prize device 550. As shown in FIG. 208, the special payout device 550 is provided with a specific out port 166 on the upper right in front view, and on the left side in front view with respect to the specific out port 166, a specific general winning port 163 is provided. The specific general winning opening 163 corresponds to the second receiving unit 562 (see FIG. 22) in the description of the first embodiment described above, and makes the description easy to understand (in order to clarify that it is a ball opening). ) Has been renamed. Similarly, the specific outlet 166 is obtained by changing the name of the third receiving unit 563 (see FIG. 22) in the description of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 208, the specific general winning opening 163 and the out opening 166 are provided with a general winning sensor 163s and an out winning sensor 166s capable of detecting the entering of a game ball. The specific general winning opening 163 is configured as a winning opening in which three winning balls are given to one winning game ball (winning ball), and the winning of the gaming ball is detected by the general winning sensor 163s. Each time it is played, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, the specific out port 166 is configured as an entrance port to which a prize ball is not given even if a game ball enters (it simply discharges the entered game ball to the outside). Even if a game ball is detected in 166s, no prize ball is paid out.

  As shown in FIG. 208, a variable winning device 65 having a specific winning port 65a through which a game ball can be entered is provided at a substantially central portion of the special winning device 550. The variable winning device 65 includes the first variable plate 583b, the first receiving recess 574a, and the second receiving recess 574b in the description of the first embodiment described above. In order to clarify a certain point, in the description of the first control example, the first variable plate 583b is referred to as the opening / closing door 65f1, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are simply referred to as the specific winning opening 65a. It is called. When the big win is won, the open / close door 65f1 is opened a predetermined number of times (6 to 16 rounds) (displaced from the state protruding from the front side to the state retracted to the back side), and then to the specific winning port 65a. And the game ball is ready to enter.

  As shown in FIG. 208, the specific winning opening 65a is provided with specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2 (detecting devices SE3 and SE4 in the description of the first embodiment) capable of detecting the entering of a game ball. ing. The specific winning opening 65a is configured as a winning opening in which 15 prize balls are given to a single game ball (winning), and the game balls are received by the specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2. Each time it is detected, 15 prize balls are paid out. In each jackpot round, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or ten game balls are won) (the open / close door 65f1 is retracted to the back side), so the jackpot During this period, a large number of prize balls are paid out by launching a game ball aiming at the specific winning opening 65a (shooting a game ball toward the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot for the game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 208, the second winning opening (second winning opening) 640 (the third receiving recess 575 a in the description of the first embodiment, 4 receiving recesses 575b (see FIG. 22) and a first electric accessory 640a (second variable member 584b in the description of the first embodiment) for opening and closing the second ball entrance (second prize port) 640. ing. When a game ball enters the second entrance 640, a big win lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed, and when the big win comes, a big win game is executed in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed a plurality of times. Further, as described above, the first electric accessory 640a is activated only for a predetermined time when it is won by a normal symbol lottery executed based on the passing of the game ball through the first through gate 66. .

  The game ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 163 (second receiving portion 562) rolls on the second rolling portion 577 (see FIG. 20), thereby causing the rear view side (the back side of the base plate 60). Be guided to. The game ball guided to the rear side when viewed from the front flows into the guide channel 690 indicated by a broken line in FIG. Similarly, the game ball that has entered the specific out port 166 is guided to the back side of the base plate 60 by rolling the third rolling part 578 (see FIG. 20), and flows into the guide channel 690. To do. In addition, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a rolls along the sub route HK1 (see FIG. 22), is guided to the back side of the base plate 60, and flows into the guide channel 690. That is, a game ball that has entered the specific general winning port 163, a game ball that has entered the specific out port 166, and a game ball that has entered the specific winning port 65a all pass through the guide channel 690. Flow down.

  As shown in FIG. 208, the guide channel 690 entered the specific pitching port 163 and the general pitching part 690 a for allowing the game ball that entered the specific general prize opening 163 to flow into the guide channel 690 and the specific out port 166. An out-ball sending portion 690b for allowing a game ball to flow into the guide channel 690, a specific ball-feeding portion 690c for allowing the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a to flow into the guide channel 690, and the specific channel 690 A merging path 690d that is provided on the most downstream side and flows down (merging) the game balls from the back surface side of the base plate 60 to the effect flow path 691 (sub-path HK3 in the description of the first embodiment). Has been. The game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path 690 via any one of the general pitching part 690a, the out-ball sending part 690b, and the specific pitching part 690c is guided to the effect flow path 691 via the merge path 690d. . The game ball guided to the performance channel 691 falls from the discharge portion 691a at the lower end of the performance channel 691 toward the pseudo attacker 165 (decoration unit 750 in the description of the first embodiment, see FIG. 91). To do. This pseudo-attacker 165 has a pseudo winning opening 165a that allows a game ball to enter, an open state in which a gaming ball can enter the pseudo winning opening 165a, and a pseudo winning opening 165a that cannot be entered. And at least a pseudo door 165f1 configured to be variable in a closed state (opening / closing member 870 in the description of the first embodiment, see FIG. 104 (b)). In addition, on the front side of the pseudo attacker 165, an out port 167 for discharging game balls that have reached the pseudo attacker 165 to the outside with the pseudo door 165f1 closed (winning in the description of the first embodiment). Mouth 761a) is provided.

  Although details will be described later, in the first control example, the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed and the pseudo door 165f1 of the pseudo attacker 165 is opened and closed in each round of the jackpot game. And in this 1st example of control, it is set as the structure which performs the production | presentation (pseudo-winning effect) which suggests paying out of a prize ball according to the entrance timing of the game ball with respect to the pseudo winning opening 165a. In other words, instead of executing the effect of notifying the payout of the winning ball based on the detection of the winning at the specific winning opening 65a, the pseudo winning effect is performed in accordance with the timing of entering the pseudo winning port 165a. It is configured to execute. In other words, by using the pseudo-attacker 165 that is easier to visually recognize than the specific winning opening 65a covered by the first path member 560, it is suggested whether or not the prize ball is paid out, so that It is possible to make the player understand the opportunity to be paid out more clearly.

  In addition, after a winning ball is detected by one of the specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2, the detected game ball flows down the guiding channel 690 and the effect channel 691 and enters the pseudo winning port 165a. It takes about 0.5 seconds. For this reason, in this first control example, the timing at which the pseudo prize winning opening 165a is opened and closed is set to 0. 0 with respect to the timing at which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed at each jackpot. The delay is 5 seconds. Thereby, all the game balls that have won (entered) the specific winning opening 65a can be made to enter the pseudo winning opening 165a.

  Further, in the first control example, as described above, the game balls that have entered the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166 are also configured to be able to reach the pseudo attacker 165. From the viewpoint of the player, it is difficult to distinguish which game entrance the player has entered and entered the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, regardless of the type of entrance, the player can enter the pseudo winning entrance 165a. The pseudo-winning effect is executed for all the balls entered. As a result, as more game balls enter the specific general prize opening 163 and the specific out slot 166 during the jackpot round period, the number of executions of the pseudo-winning effect increases, so that more prizes than the actual prizes. The illusion can be as if a ball was acquired. Therefore, the player's satisfaction in the jackpot game can be further increased. As described above, each jackpot round is terminated when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a ten times. On the other hand, in addition to the game balls that have entered the specific prize opening 65a, the game balls that have entered the specific general prize opening 163 and the specific out slot 166 can also enter the pseudo prize opening 165a. Therefore, in each big hit round, 10 or more game balls can easily enter the pseudo winning opening 165a. Therefore, in each of the jackpot rounds, it is possible to make the player feel as if more game balls than usual are winning in the specific winning opening 65a, so that the player has a greater satisfaction. be able to. Here, in the first control example, the pseudo winning effect is determined depending on whether or not the number of times of entering the pseudo winning opening 165a during the opening period of the one pseudo door 165f1 exceeds the specified number (10 times). (Pseudo winning sound) is made different. As a result, when the pseudo winning sound changes, the player can be caused to have an illusion as if the player has entered the specific winning opening 65a beyond the specified number (over winning). It can make you feel more satisfied.

  Further, in the first control example, whether or not the pseudo winning effect can be executed and the execution timing are set as the timing at which a winning at each winning entrance (specific general winning opening 163, specific out opening 166, specific winning opening 65a) is detected. The configuration is determined by In other words, at the timing when the entrance to each entrance is detected, it is predicted whether the timing at which the game ball from which the entrance has been detected reaches the pseudo attacker 165 is during the opening period of the pseudo door 165f1. When the game is in the open period (that is, when it is predicted that the game ball that has detected the entry will enter the pseudo prize opening 165a during the open period of the pseudo door 165f1), the execution of the pseudo prize effect is determined. It is configured to do. In other words, with respect to the pseudo winning opening 165a, it is possible to execute the pseudo winning effect only by a winning sensor originally provided in each of the winning openings without providing any configuration for detecting the entering of the game ball. The execution timing is determined. By configuring in this way, the number of sensors for detecting the incoming ball can be reduced, so the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

  In the first control example, a period of about 1.5 seconds is required until the game ball in which the pitch is detected reaches the pseudo-attacker 165 after the pitch at the specific general winning opening 163 is detected. It takes a period of about 1 second from the detection of the ball entering the specific out port 166 to the arrival of the game ball in which the ball is detected reaching the pseudo attacker 165. It takes a period of about 0.5 seconds for the game ball in which the incoming ball is detected to reach the pseudo attacker 165 after the incoming ball is detected. For this reason, when a ball entering the specific general winning opening 163 is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is opened after 1.5 seconds, and the pseudo door 165f1 is opened. When it is predicted that the game ball that has detected a winning ball enters the pseudo winning opening 165a, the pseudo winning effect is set to be executed after 1.5 seconds. Similarly, when a ball entering the specific out port 166 is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is opened after 1 second, and the pseudo door 165f1 is opened ( When it is predicted that the game ball that has detected a winning ball will enter the pseudo winning opening 165a), the pseudo winning effect is set to be executed after one second. When a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is opened after 0.5 seconds, and the pseudo door 165f1 is opened (the pitch is entered). When it is predicted that the detected game ball will enter the pseudo winning opening 165a), the pseudo winning effect is executed after 0.5 seconds. As a result, the pseudo winning effect can be executed in accordance with the timing at which the game ball enters the pseudo winning opening 165a. The player can have an illusion as if it were granted. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game by paying attention to whether or not a game ball enters the pseudo attacker 165 in the jackpot, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the first embodiment, not only the game balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a but also the game balls that have entered the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166 can reach the pseudo attacker 165. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a game ball that has entered at least one of the specific general winning port 163 and the specific out port 166 may be configured to be unable to reach the pseudo attacker 165. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the difference between the number of prize balls estimated from the number of pseudo winning effects and the number of prize balls actually paid out.

  In the first embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is provided on the downstream side of the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166, but the arrangement of the respective winning openings may be arbitrarily determined.

  Returning to FIG. A center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 provided substantially at the center of the game board 13 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, the center frame 86 projects to the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the third symbol display device 81 to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 9-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, left, middle and right 3 One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These three symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed (variable) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Display). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b in accordance with the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Next, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in this control example is demonstrated with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example, and FIG. 209 (b) is the diagram of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the display content typically. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the left, middle and right three display devices. A symbol row is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the upper 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The lower third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 kinds of main symbols imitating numbers “0” to “9”. . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the fluctuation display is performed. The jackpot is generated after the change display is finished. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row L1 to L3.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbol of each symbol row is stopped and displayed on the effective line V1. If the third symbol is stopped with a combination of jackpot symbols on the effective line V1 (in the first control example, the same main symbol combination), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the 3rd symbol in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, the number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol sequence, The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above. For example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed may be varied. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81, the 3rd symbol's variable display area is displayed. It is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the third symbol is changing by reducing the size or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, the corner of the display screen). You may make it do. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol is the same as the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol (the degree to which the player is difficult to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be varied so as to correspond to the changing type of the special symbol.

  In addition, the first control example is configured such that the specific symbol can be stopped and displayed as the third symbol variably displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. The details of this specific symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 212, but it is configured in a display form with identification information (for example, “charge”) different from the number, and this specific symbol is on the active line V1. By stopping and displaying, the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result can be notified.

  In this control example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the third symbol indicating the same number is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row L1 and the right symbol row L3, the middle symbol row L2 that is changing is specified. A specific symbol is displayed by interrupting a location (for example, a location between the numbers “0” and “9”). Thereby, since the specific symbol is suddenly displayed after the variation display of the third symbol has elapsed for a predetermined period, an unexpected variation effect can be provided to the player.

  The condition for displaying the specific symbol may be other than the above-described conditions. For example, the number indicated by the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol row L1 and the right symbol row L3 is a predetermined combination. It may be a condition, or it may be a condition that the player operates the operating means during the variation display of the third symbol. Moreover, it is good also as conditions established based on the lottery result of a special symbol. In addition, a variation effect in which a specific symbol is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of variation display of the third symbol may be set in advance when the variation effect is set (at the start of variation).

  In addition, when displaying a specific symbol, a method other than a method of interrupting and displaying a predetermined symbol sequence may be used. For example, it may be replaced with one third symbol preset in the symbol sequence. good. In this case, for example, among the third symbols set in the middle symbol row L2, when a specific third symbol is stopped and displayed, the combination of the third symbols that will show the special symbol jackpot win is stopped and displayed. If the state is a reach state, that is, the reach state, it is preferable that the specific symbol is displayed by replacing the third symbol set before and after the specific third symbol. As a result, even if any of the plurality of consecutive third symbols is stopped and displayed, the lottery result advantageous to the player is shown, so that the player can keep an eye on the changing effect while keeping the player expectation. .

  In this control example, as the special symbol lottery results, three types of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out” can be set as the special symbol lottery results. One jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types with different contents of the jackpot game to be executed and game states set after the jackpot game ends. The combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to suggest (notify) the player of the special symbol lottery result and the jackpot type at the time of the jackpot winning.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit D” in which the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is set, one of the main symbols of “3, 7”, which is an odd number, is a line. In this way, a variable display is displayed in which the stop is displayed together. In addition, in the case of “big hit A”, “big hit B”, “big hit C”, and “big hit E”, a variable display in which any one of the main symbols “0 to 9” is arranged in a line is performed. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “small hit”, a chance item composed of a combination of “341” is displayed. Note that this chance combination is configured not to be selected when the lottery result is out of place. In this embodiment, the chances are configured to be displayed as a combination of specific third symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special symbol (for example, a gold fish symbol) different from the normal third symbols from 0 to 9 is used. ) May be displayed in one or a plurality of combinations, or may be configured to display and notify characters such as “chance”.

  The sub display area Ds is divided into two small areas. On the display screen capable of executing the special symbol variable display, information (execution information) indicating the winning information of the special symbol currently being executed in the small area Ds1. Medium symbol m0) is displayed and information for indicating the winning information of the special symbol that is reserved and stored in the small area Ds2 (Special Fig. 1 First Reserved Symbol m1-Special Fig. 1 Fourth Reserved Symbol m4, Special Fig. 2) The first reserved symbol m5 to the special figure 2 fourth reserved symbol m8) are displayed. Further, the information (contents) displayed in the sub display area Ds is configured to be switched depending on the gaming state. For example, if the jackpot game is being played, a guidance display mode for guiding the gaming content during the jackpot game Is displayed, and even if a variation effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is being executed even when the variation of the third symbol is displayed, the player expects the jackpot expectation of the variation effect to the player. A display mode for showing is displayed. Further, when the changing effect is executed using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the sub display area Ds is erased.

  Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 209 (b). As shown in FIG. 209 (b), in the upper left of the main display area Dm in the front view, a special figure 1 display area Dm1a for variably displaying the fourth symbol in conjunction with the variability display of the first special symbol, and the second special A special figure 2 display area Dm1b for variably displaying the 4th symbol in conjunction with the fluctuation display of the symbol is formed. In the upper right of the main display area Dm in the front view, the variably displayed is linked with the fluctuation display of the normal symbol. The general map display area Dm2 is configured to be stopped and displayed.

  In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 209 (b), the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the common figure display area Dm2 are shown in a size that can be visually recognized by the player. Actually, it is formed in a size that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variation effect of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

  In addition, when an effect using the entire display screen is executed as the variation effect of the third symbol, or the effect movable accessory provided near the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 9) )) Is movable and the size of the display area of the special figure display area Dm1a, special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and general figure display area Dm2 is reduced corresponding to the case where the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is covered. The display position may be varied, or the display position may be temporarily hidden. As a result, powerful effects can be provided without a sense of incongruity.

  Furthermore, instead of the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the universal figure display area Dm2, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are linked to the variable display outside the third symbol display device 81. Then, the fourth symbol which is dynamically displayed may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to provide LED for the 4th symbol in correspondence with each symbol at the same location as the ornamental LED provided in the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the dynamic display of the 4th symbol corresponding to the variable display of each symbol which is difficult for the player to understand can be executed.

<About production contents in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 to 218, the contents of various effects executed in the first control example will be described. First, referring to FIG. 210 and FIG. 211, a look-ahead effect using a reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a treasure chest accessory 750 that is an effect agent provided outside the third symbol display device. Will be explained.

  In the first control example, if a ball enters the special symbol start opening (the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640) during the variation display of the special symbol, The number of counters (winning information) acquired at the time of entering the ball (the right to execute a lottery of special symbols) using a predetermined number (four for each special symbol) is stored (holded) up to a predetermined number. It is configured. And as a display mode for indicating the number of lottery rights stored on hold, the hold symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, the contents of the winning information stored on hold are discriminated in advance before the special symbol lottery is actually executed, and the display mode of the reserved symbols and the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 are determined based on the determination result. A variable effect (prefetch effect) is configured to be executed.

  When this pre-reading effect is executed, the display mode of the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Then, when executing the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol whose display mode is changed, as shown in FIG. 210 (a), the symbol being executed in the display mode corresponding to the reserved symbol whose display mode is variable m0 is displayed in the small area Ds1. In other words, the symbol m0 being executed displayed in the small area Ds1 notifies the player of the display mode of the reserved symbol changed by the pre-reading effect even while the special symbol variation based on the reserved symbol is being executed. It is configured to be able to.

  In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 can be varied in addition to the reserved symbols by the pre-reading effect. Furthermore, even when the pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbols for the same winning information and the pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750, the result of the pre-reading effect is executed. Are configured differently.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 210, during the dynamic display of the special symbol whose lottery result is the jackpot D (16 rounds jackpot), the running symbol m0 indicates that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high. By displaying the “green” display mode (in FIG. 210 (a), the grid pattern display mode), it is suggested to the player that the special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot variation. The treasure chest accessory 750 is displayed in a “red” display mode (in FIG. 210 (b), a diagonal pattern) indicating that the degree of expectation that the jackpot type is jackpot D is high.

  Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 211, while the special symbol with a lottery result of jackpot A (six rounds jackpot) is being displayed, the symbol m0 being executed has a high expectation of winning the jackpot. By displaying the “green” display mode shown (in FIG. 211 (a), the grid pattern display mode), it is suggested to the player that the special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot variation. The treasure chest accessory 750 displays a “green” display mode (in FIG. 211 (b), a grid pattern display mode) indicating that the degree of expectation that the jackpot type is the jackpot A is high.

  In other words, in the first control example, the pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol is mainly set as the pre-playing effect mode of the information indicating the success / failure determination result of the jackpot among the target winning information. The look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 is configured to mainly set the effect mode of the look-ahead effect with information indicating the jackpot type selected when winning the jackpot among the target winning information. ing.

  Accordingly, the player can comprehensively determine the display mode of a plurality of performance objects whose display modes are changed according to the pre-reading effect, and predict various lottery results of special symbols based on the target winning information. Watch the production carefully. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 210 and 211, even if the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 is late, a part of the third symbol that is variably displayed in the main display region Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed. The pre-reading effect is executed so as to be variable before. That is, as described above, the number of the third symbol and the jackpot type are related to each other, and if the jackpot is actually hit, each third symbol is stopped in a predetermined combination (for example, a glance). Since the number of the 3rd symbol is displayed, it directly suggests the result of the special symbol lottery this time (big hit type) to the player. The display mode of the object 750 is made variable.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol to the player in order, and it is possible to give interest to various effects to be executed to the end.

  In this control example, when the pre-reading effect is executed, the display mode of the reserved symbol and the treasure chest accessory 750 is configured to be changed to the display mode indicating the result of the pre-reading effect. For example, the display mode may be changed step by step with the pre-reading performance result as the final stage. In this case, it is preferable that a plurality of stages can be set so that the effect of the pre-reading effect is associated with the size of the privilege to be given to the player. Thereby, it is possible to enjoy the production while expecting that the display mode is changed more.

  Furthermore, it is configured so that the determination as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol and the determination as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 are made different. Therefore, it can be seen at which timing the display mode of the target object changes during the period from when the winning information is stored on hold until the special symbol corresponding to the winning information starts to change. Since it can be made difficult, even if the effect of the pre-reading effect is already displayed, it can be expected that the display mode is further variable.

  As described above, in this control example, the pre-reading effect is configured so that the display modes of the plurality of target objects can be variably displayed at random, but the display mode is variable as the pre-reading effect. You may comprise so that the order of a target object may be predetermined. Thereby, it is possible to clearly tell the player which object to be rendered whose display mode can be changed next. Therefore, it can be easily determined that the display mode has changed.

  In addition, when the display mode of a plurality of performance target objects is variably displayed at random as in this control example, which display mode of the target target object is variable immediately before the timing at which the display mode is actually changed. The same effect can be obtained by configuring so as to be notified.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the timing for variably displaying the display mode of the target object is set at random. However, the display mode may be varied at a predetermined specific timing. The display mode may be changed based on the fact that the user operates the operating means.

  Further, in this control example, by changing the display mode of the reserved symbols, the prize information that is the target of the current look-ahead effect is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the target prize information that is difficult to understand is 750. The pre-reading effect that changes the display mode is executed. Thereby, for example, when the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 is changed prior to the display mode of the reserved symbol, the player is expected to predict which winning information is being pre-readed. Can be provided.

  In this control example, the display mode of the reserved symbols corresponding to the winning information that is the target of the pre-reading effect is configured to be variable. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the reserved symbols before and after the variable is changed. You may comprise so that it may be made. Thereby, even when the pre-reading effect using the reserved symbol is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which reserved symbol (winning information) the pre-reading effect is being executed. Further, in the pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750, the reserved symbol (winning information) to be targeted may be notified to the player.

  In addition, in this control example, as a pre-reading effect, it is configured to execute a plurality of variable display effects by using a plurality of effects target objects for one winning information, but not limited thereto, Each of the plurality of performance target objects may be configured to execute a pre-reading effect on different winning information, for example, a pre-reading effect using a plurality of performance target objects for one winning information. It is configured to determine whether or not to execute, and as a result of the determination, only the target object determined to not execute the pre-reading effect is set as the target object of the pre-reading effect for other winning information You may do it. Thereby, when the display mode of the plurality of performance target objects is changed, the player is a pre-reading effect that is executed for one winning information, or a plurality of that is executed for a plurality of winning information It can be difficult to understand whether it is a look-ahead production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress getting bored early with respect to the content of the pre-reading effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 212 and FIG. 213, the contents of the charge effect for displaying the specific symbol (charge symbol) as the third symbol will be described. FIG. 212 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the charge effect, and FIG. 212 (b) shows an example when the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped in the charge effect. It is a schematic diagram.

  This charge effect is the middle symbol row L2 in which the middle symbol Z2 is variably displayed in the state where the third symbol indicating the same number in the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3 is stopped (ie, the reach state) (FIG. 210 ( This is an effect in which a specific symbol (charge symbol) Z4 is interrupted and displayed in (a). Then, when the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row L2, a combination of the third symbol indicating that the special symbol jackpot or small bonus is won. Furthermore, during this charge effect, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning, an effect of temporarily stopping the specific symbol Z4 at the stop timing is executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212 (a), the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3 are stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating “7”, and the middle symbol row L2 is being displayed in a variable manner, that is, “7 ”Is reached, the specific symbol Z4 is interrupted and displayed in the normal middle symbol row L2 in the middle symbol row L2. In this state, the variation display mode of the fourth symbol indicating that the first special symbol is variably displayed is executed in the special symbol display area Dm1a, and the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol display region Dm2. A variable display mode is displayed to indicate that the

  Then, when reaching the timing at which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 212 (a), the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row L2, as shown in FIG. 212 (b). . This temporary stop display is a display state in which the specific symbol Z4 is swung to such an extent that the player can recognize that the specific symbol Z4 has stopped without actually being completely stopped. In this state, the variation display mode of the fourth symbol indicating that the first special symbol is variably displayed is executed in the special symbol display area Dm1a, and the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display region Dm2. A variable display mode indicating that the stop display is performed in the mode is displayed. And since FIG. 212 (b) shows an example in the case of winning the normal symbol, after the temporary stop of the specific symbol Z4 (after the normal symbol fluctuation stop), the first electric accessory 640a is opened Is done.

  With this configuration, when the specific symbol Z4 stops (temporarily stops) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the player wins a special symbol (big hit, small hit). It ’s hard to tell if you ’ve won, or if you won the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to give interest to the game content executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped (temporarily stopped).

  Furthermore, the charge effect described above (the effect that the specific symbol Z4 is stopped (temporarily stopped)) can be executed when the special symbol is won and when the normal symbol is won. The execution effect can be enhanced by increasing the execution frequency of the production.

  Next, since the above-described charge effect is configured to be executed even when the special symbol lottery result is a big win or small win, the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed based on the special symbol lottery result. In such a case, the player can be expected to have a lottery result (big win) more advantageous to the player. For example, the jackpot game executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed. If the game content of the game and the game content of the small hit game are completely different (for example, the attacker (variable winning device) to be opened is different), the player will draw the special symbol lottery result Since the determination is made immediately, it is difficult for the player to continue to have a sense of expectation.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, the initial game content of the big hit game executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed is the same as the game content of the small hit game. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining what the winning game is being executed immediately after the big hit game or the small hit game is executed. Furthermore, an effect (roulette effect) for notifying the player of the current winning result on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is executed using a period (common game period) in which the same game content is set. It is configured.

  Here, the contents of the roulette effect described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during the execution of the roulette effect, and FIG. 213 (b) displays the effect result of the roulette effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 212 (a), when the roulette effect is executed, a character 811b imitating a boy who will be the main character of the roulette effect in the main display area Dm and a lottery result of this special symbol (big hit or small win) ) And a sword 811k for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol using the roulette 811c.

  The example shown in FIG. 212 (a) is a roulette effect that is executed when a special symbol is won, so the special figure 1 display area Dm1a has a display mode "triangle" The 4th symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, this roulette effect is executed during the small hit game.

  The roulette 811c has a jackpot area (area marked with “circle”) 811c1 indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a jackpot and a small hit area (“X” ”811c2 are formed to have the same size, and are rotated and displayed to the right at a speed at which the player can identify each region. Thereafter, the roulette 811c is rotated and displayed at a high speed (a speed at which it is difficult for the player to identify each area), and an effect in which the sword 811k is thrown toward the roulette 811c is executed.

  When the sword 811k is stabbed into the roulette 811c, the rotational speed of the roulette 811c gradually decreases, and the roulette 811c is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 213 (b). In this state, the player is informed that the area where the sword 811k is stuck is the result of the lottery of the special symbol this time. Since FIG. 213 (b) shows a roulette effect (a roulette effect that is executed during the small hit game) that is executed after winning the small hit, the effect that the sword 811k is stabbed into the small hit area 811c2 is executed. .

  The roulette effect described above is executed during the same period (common game period) of the game content of the small hit game and the game content of the jackpot game, so during the roulette effect, the game content of the win game Cannot determine the lottery result of this special symbol. Therefore, the player who wants to know the result of the lottery for the special symbol as soon as possible pays attention to the effect mode of the roulette effect that is being executed.

  In the above-described example, the big hit area 811c1 and the small hit area 811c2 formed in the roulette 811c are shown to have the same size. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special symbol lottery is performed. It is preferable that the size of each region is made variable according to the result. Thereby, at the start of the roulette effect (before the roulette 811c rotates at a high speed), the player can predict the lottery result of this special symbol by grasping the display mode (size of each area) of the roulette 811c. Can do. In the above-described example, a display mode in which one big hit area 811c1 and one small hit area 811c2 are formed is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. And may be formed alternately.

  In the above-described example, two types of the big hit area 811c1 and the small hit area 811c2 are formed as areas indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the big hit area 811c1 is selected. It may be further subdivided for each jackpot type of winning jackpot.

  In addition, the lottery result of the current special symbol may be suggested by varying the rotation display mode of the roulette 811c, the display mode of the sword 811k, or the display mode of the character 811b.

  In the first control example, when the winning game is started, the above-described roulette effect is executed, and the effect result is automatically displayed. The roulette effect may be started based on the start of the game, and the result of the roulette effect may be displayed based on the winning of the ball to the attacker that is released during the common game period. You may comprise so that the effect result of a roulette effect may be displayed based on predetermined operation being performed with respect to the operation means during the period. Thereby, a player can be actively participated in production.

  In the first control example, the roulette effect is executed during the winning game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the roulette effect is executed during the change of the special symbol. Also good. That is, for example, when the effect period of the roulette effect is 10 seconds and the effect period of the charge effect is 15 seconds, the charge effect is started 25 seconds before the change stop timing of the special symbol, and the change stop timing 10 You may comprise so that the fluctuation production | generation corresponding to a special symbol fluctuation | variation may be set so that a roulette production may be performed before second.

  In this way, when the roulette effect can be executed during the special symbol variation display, not in the winning game, the above-described roulette effect is executed even in the charge effect executed based on the winning winning of the normal symbol. It becomes possible. In this case, for example, when it is determined that the normal symbol that is won during the special symbol variation period is stopped, the stop timing is calculated, and the roulette effect is executed 10 seconds before the calculated stop timing. (The specific design Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the charge effect), and the effect aspect of the charge effect may be set. Further, the roulette 811c displayed in the roulette effect may be set so as to form a common symbol hitting region indicating a normal symbol hit in addition to the big hitting region 811c1 and the small hitting region 811c2. As a result, the roulette effect can be executed even when the normal symbol is won, so the frequency of executing the roulette effect can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 214 and FIG. 215, the content of the first operation effect (button fusion effect) that is one of the operation effects in which the player operates the operation means will be described. FIG. 214 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the content of the effect at the time when the first operation effect (button fusion effect) is started, and FIG. 214 (b) is a diagram after a certain period of time has elapsed. FIG. 215 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the content of the effect. FIG. 215 (a) shows the effect content when the player operates the operation means (the frame button 22) once in the first operation effect (button fusion effect). It is the schematic diagram which showed an example, FIG.215 (b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the content of the effect after button fusion by the 1st operation effect (button fusion effect).

  Here, the contents of the first operation effect (button fusion effect) will be described. This first operation effect (button fusion effect) is an effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol this time is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when the player operates the operation means. Then, the operation means is operated the number of times (three times) corresponding to the number of the third symbols (three in this control example) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbols.

  An operation effective period is set for each operation means operation, and if the operation means is not operated within the operation effective period, the third symbol indicating the special symbol lottery result is not displayed. Further, when the display mode of the time gauge displayed corresponding to the operation valid period set for the operation of each operation unit satisfies a predetermined condition (when the same display mode is obtained), each operation unit By combining these operations, a plurality of third symbols are displayed based on a single operation of the operating means. Thereby, even if the remaining period of the operation effective period is small, it is possible to display all the third symbols, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means to the end.

  As shown in FIG. 214 (a), the left display area 81a, the middle display area 81b, and the right display area 81c are formed so as to cover the left symbol line L1, the middle symbol line L2, and the right symbol line L3 during the variable display. The The left display area 81a displays a first button 822a and a time gauge t1 for indicating the operation effective period of the first button 822a. The middle display area 81b displays a second button 822b and the second button. A time gauge t2 for indicating the operation effective period of 822b is displayed, and a third gauge 822c and a time gauge t3 for indicating the operation effective period of the third button 822c are displayed in the right display area 81c.

  In this state, when the player operates the operating means (the frame button 22), the display mode of the first button 822a is first changed to a display mode indicating that the operating means has been operated, and the left display area 81a Three symbols Z1 are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 215 (a)).

  The operation effective periods corresponding to the buttons 822a to 822c are all configured to have the same length (5 seconds) and the same operation effective period start timing. In FIG. 214 (a), On the display screen, the remaining time displays t1a to t3a of the respective time gauges t1 to t3 are displayed in a display mode indicating different remaining times. Specifically, the remaining time display t1a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 4 seconds, and the remaining time display t2a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 3.5 seconds. The time display t3a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 5 seconds.

  Moreover, in this control example, it is comprised so that the moving speed (the length of the arrow of FIG. 214 (a)) of the time gauges t1-t3 may become the same. That is, the movement start timings (subtraction display timings) of the time gauges t1 to t3 are different in a state where the same operation valid period is set.

  In the case of executing a plurality of operation effects having the same operation effective period in this way, the order of the operation effects is visually indicated to the player by displaying the remaining time different in appearance. Can be discriminated. Further, it is possible to make the user think that the operating means must be operated quickly according to the decrease (subtraction) of the remaining time, and the operating means can be operated eagerly.

  In this effect, the same operation effective period is set and the movement speeds of the gauges of the respective time gauges t1 to t3 (the length of the arrow in FIG. 214 (a)) are the same. If the movement start timing (subtraction display timing) of each of the time gauges t1 to t3 is changed, the timing at which the remaining time becomes 0 may be different. Therefore, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 214 (b), an effect of blinking the time gauge is executed, and the remaining time is not reduced during a period in which the time gauge is off (hidden). doing. As a result, the timing at which the remaining time of each of the time gauges t1 to t3 becomes 0 can be easily unified without preparing a plurality of timing moving speeds. In this control example, the remaining time display of each of the time gauges t1 to t3 is set to be the same at the timing of 1 second of the operation effective period set for each operation effect.

  In FIG. 214 (b), the remaining time t1b of the time gauge t1 indicating the operation effective period of the first button 822a is displayed in a blinking display mode (display mode indicated by a broken line) indicating 2.5 seconds, and the second button 822b is displayed. The remaining time t2b of the time gauge t3 indicating the operation effective period of the third button 822c is displayed in a blinking display mode (display mode indicated by a broken line) indicating the remaining time t2b of the time gauge t2 indicating the operation effective period is 3.5 seconds. Is displayed in a display mode indicating 4.5 seconds. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 214B, the moving speeds of the time gauge t1 and the time gauge t2 are displayed so as to be lower than the moving speed of the time gauge t3.

  In the state shown in FIG. 214 (b), when the player operates the frame button 22 once, as shown in FIG. 215 (a), the left third symbol Z1 displays “7” in the left display area 81a. Displayed in a manner. Even in this state, the time gauge t2 is displayed in a blinking display manner and the time gauge t3 is displayed in a normal display manner as in FIG. 214 (b).

  Then, when the predetermined period elapses in the state of FIG. 215 (a), since the moving speed of the time gauge t3 is faster than the moving speed of the time gauge t2, the remaining time display of the time gauge t2 and the time gauge t3 becomes the same. . When the remaining time display modes of the two time gauges t2 and t3 are the same, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), a fusion button 822d in which the second button 822b and the third button 822c are fused is displayed. A fusion operation effect in which a fusion time gauge t4 in which t2 and time gauge t3 are fused is executed.

  As described above, in this control example, the remaining time of the operation effective period set for each operation effect is set to be the same as the remaining time display of each time gauge t1 to t3 at the timing of 1 second. In the fusion time gauge t4, the remaining time display t4a is displayed in a display mode indicating the remaining time of 1 second. When the player operates the operating means while the fusion button 822d is displayed, the middle symbol Z2 is displayed in the middle display region 81b and the right symbol Z3 is displayed in the right display region 81c at a time.

  In the example described above with reference to FIG. 214 and FIG. 215, the example in which the fusion button 822d is displayed in a state where the left symbol Z1 is already displayed is shown. When the remaining operation effective time is 1 second without being operated, the fusion button 822d is displayed using all of the left display area 81a to the right display area 81c.

  Thus, since the display area where the fusion button 822d is displayed indicates the range of effects (effects for displaying the third symbol) that are executed when the operating means is operated, an operation effect that is easy for the player to understand is provided. Can be provided.

  In this control example, when the fusion operation effect is set, the fusion button 822d is displayed so as to execute an effect that is easy to understand for the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even after the fusion operation effect is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 214 (a) is continuously displayed, and the fusion operation effect is executed based on the fact that the player has operated the operation means. You may comprise. Thereby, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player.

  Moreover, in this control example, it is configured so that the fusion operation effect is executed when the display mode indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period set for each operation effect is the same, but other conditions The fusion operation effect may be configured to be executed when, for example, the operation means is operated within a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) after a plurality of operation effects are started. Or, the remaining time of the operation valid period set in the plurality of operation effects may be all predetermined timing conditions (for example, the remaining time is all odd, the specific digit value indicating the remaining time is 0, the remaining time is The fusion operation effect may be executed when the addition value obtained by adding the values of the digits of the numerical values shown satisfies 10). Thereby, an unexpected operation effect can be provided.

  In the present control example, the case where a plurality of operation effects are executed at the same time has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation effective periods set for the plurality of operation effects only need to be overlapped. May be made different, or the length of each operation effective period may be made different.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218, the contents of the second operation effect (automatic press effect) in the present control example will be described. FIG. 216 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects executed in the second operation effect, and FIG. 217 (a) schematically shows the contents of effects executed in the initial period (first period) of the automatic press effect. FIG. 217 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect executed in the intermediate period (second period) of the automatic press effect, and FIG. 218 (a). Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect executed in the final period (third period) of the automatic press effect.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 216, the contents of the automatic press effect in this control example will be described. In this control example, an operation effective period of 10 seconds is set as an operation effect in which an automatic pressing effect is executed, and an effect result display period of 2 seconds is set after the operation effective period has elapsed. The first 8 seconds of the 10-second operation effective period is set as a button operation immediate response period in which an effect result is immediately displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means). For 2 seconds, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 (operation means) is operated within the predetermined period at the timing when the predetermined period has passed, and the button operation is periodically displayed when the operation result is displayed. It is set as a period.

  During the button operation immediate response period, the button display Z8 (see FIG. 217) corresponding to the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. When the button operation immediate response period elapses, as shown in FIG. An automatic pressing effect is executed. This automatic pressing effect is an effect that is executed for the remaining 2 seconds of the operation effective period (2 seconds from when the operation effective period is set until 8 seconds elapses and after 10 seconds elapses). As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218, an effect is produced in which the character appearing in the main display area Dm presses the button display Z8.

  In this control example, the automatic press effect is set by dividing it into three periods (first period, second period, and third period), and automatic effect 1 (button automatic press effect 1) is executed during the first period. Thus, the automatic effect 2 (button automatic press effect 2) is executed during the second period, and the automatic effect 3 (button automatic press effect 3) is executed during the third period.

  In the second operation effect thus configured, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the button operation immediate response period (see (Example 1) in FIG. 216), the effect result is displayed immediately after the button operation is executed. Until the period ends, a display mode indicating the effect result is displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period (see (Example 2) in FIG. 216), the effect result display period ends from the timing of the second period after a waiting period until the first period elapses. In the meantime, the display mode showing the effect result is displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated during the third period (see (Example 3) in FIG. 216), the display mode showing the same effect result as when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period is the main display area. Dm is configured to be displayed.

  In this way, by setting the period during which the automatic press effect is being executed as the button operation periodic response period, even if the frame button 22 is operated during the automatic press effect, the effect being executed is suddenly interrupted. In addition, it is possible to suppress an effect with a sense of incongruity being executed, and it is possible to cancel the automatic pressing effect by operating the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to make a player participate eagerly for the operation effect.

  In addition, during the standby period that occurs when the frame button 22 that is executing the automatic press effect is operated, the automatic press effect is continuously executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. And an effect mode indicating that the light emitting means is in a standby period is set. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the frame button 22 has been operated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 217 and FIG. 218, the contents of the effect during the automatic press effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the automatic press effect is executed, and the button automatic press effect 1 is executed, a character 811a imitating a bird appears in the main display area Dm and land on the button display Z8. The production is executed. In this state, the remaining time display t5a of the time gauge t5 indicating the operation effective period of the button display Z8 is 2 seconds (first period).

  Then, when the remaining time of the operation effective period becomes 1.5 seconds (second period), the button automatic press effect 2 shown in FIG. 217 (b) is executed. This automatic button press effect 2 is an effect in which the character 811a rides on the button display Z8 and looks around. In this state, the remaining time display t5b of the time gauge t5 indicating the operation valid period of the button display Z8 is 1.5 seconds (second period). Next, when the remaining time of the operation valid period is 1 second (third period), the button automatic press effect 3 shown in FIG. 218 is executed. In this button automatic pressing effect 3, an effect is performed in which the character 811a riding on the button display Z8 presses the button.

  As described above, in this control example, the character 811a appears as the automatic press effect, the effect of pressing the button is executed, and the operation result display period is the timing when the automatic press effect is completed (the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed). Since the effect result of the operation effect is set and displayed, the player can be related to the operation effect and the effect result.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is operated during the automatic press effect, the effect result display is executed at the timing when the currently set period (the first period to the third period) has elapsed. However, in this case, the start mode of the effect result display (the effect mode executed for 0.5 seconds after the start) is varied according to the period during which the frame button 22 is operated. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period, an effect mode in which the character 811a flying in the sky falls and presses the button display Z8 is set, and the frame button is set during the second period. When 22 is pressed, an effect mode is set in which another character imitating a bird rides on the button display Z8 and the button display Z8 is pressed with weight.

  With this configuration, it is possible to display the effect result without changing the effect mode of the automatic press effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 and without giving a sense of incongruity. In this control example, the effect of the automatic press effect executed in each period is configured so as not to vary depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is operated. Only an easy element (for example, color change or comment addition) may be changed. In this case, it is preferable to change the effect contents only when the effect result is an effect result advantageous to the player. . Thereby, the pleasure of operating the frame button 22 during the automatic pressing effect can be provided to the player, so that the game motivation can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the contents of the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 will be described. FIG. 219 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen at the time when a ball is won in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot production using the pseudo attacker 165, and FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display screen at the time of a ball | bowl winning in the attacker 165. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 219 (a), when the variable winning device 65 provided in the special winning device 550 wins the jackpot (hit D) to be opened, and the jackpot game is executed, the third symbol display device In 81, the big hit game screen is displayed. In the jackpot game-in-progress screen, a jackpot display 830 indicating that the jackpot game is being played is displayed in the main display area Dm, and acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is displayed. In the sub display area Ds, the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2 are integrated, and a comment “Right-handed” indicating the game method during the big hit game is displayed.

  FIG. 219 (a) shows that a ball launched by a right-handed game has won a special winning opening 65a in the special winning device 550 (a winning opening where the ball can be won by opening the variable winning device 65). Although the display content at the time is shown, the acquisition information 831 is displayed in a state where the number of prize balls given based on the fact that a ball has won the specific prize opening 65a is not added.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 219 (b), the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a in accordance with the timing at which the ball that won the specific winning opening 65a in the state shown in FIG. 219 (a) wins the pseudo attacker 165. The number of prize balls given based on the above is added. Specifically, when the specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2 (see FIG. 208) detect that the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a, the timing when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from that point, that is, the specific winning opening 65a. The display mode indicating that a winning ball has been awarded is displayed at a timing when a period (0.5 seconds) required for the winning ball to reach the pseudo attacker 165 has elapsed.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player think that a prize ball is awarded based on the fact that a ball has won a prize in the pseudo attacker 165. In addition, since the winning sound for notifying the player that the ball has won the variable winning device 65 by voice is also configured to be delayed in accordance with the update timing of the acquired information 831 described above, FIG. 219 (b) shows. A winning sound is output from the audio output device 226 at the indicated timing.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
As described above with reference to FIG. 4, the main controller 110 is equipped with the MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, and display setting on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the first control example. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select the special symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type in the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 Special hit type counter C2 to be used, stop type selection counter C3 for determining stop types of special symbols (type per reach, out of reach (outgoing length A, outgoing short A), out of reach type), variation pattern selection Are used, and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the special hit random number counter C1. Further, the normal winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 253). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing a holding ball of the first special symbol, and a holding ball of the second special symbol. Special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) are provided, respectively, and a special symbol holding common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided. A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter are matched to the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, for each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the same value is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640.

  In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 499) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 499 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 499). The configuration is back. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 499, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 499. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 253).

  The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special bonus random number counter C1. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot if it matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for a special symbol having a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability that a special symbol jackpot is higher than the low probability (special symbol). The period is a high probability state of symbols) and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently.

  In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222 (a)) for a special symbol with a high probability and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222 (a)) for a special symbol with a low probability. , Provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol is out of place. If the random number becomes, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the screen is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. . In this embodiment, there are five types of jackpot types, “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, “Big Jack C”, “Big Jack D”, and “Big Jack E”. Either is determined. A display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 499. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are five random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random values “0 to 4” are the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability. 202a. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 5 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are six random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “4 to 9” are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability. . As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 6 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “6/500”.

  In this control example, the jackpot random number stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time and the jackpot random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers for each jackpot are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random number regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this control example, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. As shown in FIG. 223 (a), the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type is the same as the special chart 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 referred to in correspondence with the lottery of the first special symbol. A special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 referred to corresponding to the lottery of 2 special symbols is set.

  The special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops and the lottery result in the fluctuation is a big hit. A determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored in association with the big hit type.

  FIG. 223 (b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, the jackpot type when the acquired random number value in the special jackpot type counter is “0 to 49” is “jackpot A”. Further, when the value is “50 to 68”, the jackpot type is “hits B”, and when the value is “69 to 98”, the jackpot type is “hits C” and “99”. In this case, “big hit D” is set as the big hit type.

  Thus, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the big win is won with the first special symbol (special figure 1), the four types of hit types are determined by the random number value indicated by the special hit type counter C2. It is configured to be.

  The special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops and the lottery result in the fluctuation is a big hit. A determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the special hit type counter C2 is stored in association with the jackpot type.

  FIG. 223 (c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, the jackpot type when the acquired random number value in the special jackpot type counter is “0 to 49” is “jackpot D”. The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is set to “jackpot E”.

  Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured such that five types of hits are determined based on the random number value indicated by the special hit type counter C2. In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type selected when the determination result is a jackpot between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different, the first special symbol, the second special symbol and the player You can be interested in which of the lottery is executed. In addition, since the selection ratio per probability variation jackpot for which probability variation is given to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same (100%), the probability variation rate differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the gaming machine As a whole, it is possible to suppress a problem that the probability variation rate is not constant. In addition, since the selection ratio of jackpot D in the second special symbol is set higher, the probability that the 16R probability variable jackpot is selected is set higher than in the first special symbol, and it is configured to be advantageous to the player. Yes.

  The variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198 and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The above-described stop type selection counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 determine rough display modes such as so-called short-time deviation, long-term deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 display the third symbol reach type and detailed information displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 253) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224) that stores random values for determining the variation time of the symbol variation from the values (random numbers) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  As shown in FIG. 224 (b), in the variation pattern selection table 202b, the normal / latent probabilities used for the gaming state (normal state, latent state) when the probability of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is low. A variation pattern selection table 202b1 and a probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 used for a gaming state (probability variation state) when the probability of determining whether or not a normal symbol is high are set.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) as a gaming state, It is configured to be able to set three game states, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), and at the end of the jackpot game, the type of winning jackpot or winning the jackpot The gaming state is set according to the gaming state set at the time.

  As will be described in more detail in the description of the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the sound lamp control device 113 described later, in the main control device 110, the determination result, the number of held balls, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type Based on the value of the counter CS1, the content of the rough variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the variation time are determined, and a variation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

  Next, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226. FIG. FIG. 225 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal / latent probability variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal / latent probability variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set in correspondence with the lottery result of the special symbol, and for each variation pattern, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, A value with the variation type counter CS1 is assigned. In addition, when the determination result is a win, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2), respectively. Is set.

  Next, referring to FIG. 226, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time variation pattern table 202b2. In the short time variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, and for each variation pattern, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are set. And the value is assigned. In addition, when the determination result is a win, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2), respectively. Is set.

  The normal winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the ordinary hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interruption process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. And is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal random number table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal random number counter C4 is When the value of the winning random number set by the normal random number table 202c matches, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, the normal random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) is used for the normal symbol low probability (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state), and the probability of hitting the normal symbol from the low probability. It is divided into two types, one for a high high probability (period in which the normal symbol is in a short time state), and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. Further, the normal symbol hit type and the long hit per hour are set, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

  Here, in this control example, it is configured so that it can be won per long only during the low probability state of the normal symbol, and when winning per long, the electric accessory 640a is opened in 4 seconds of opening time. Long wins are executed. As a result, the special drawing 2 lottery can be temporarily executed in the normal state. The normal hit (per short) of the normal symbol other than the long hit described above is a time when the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is opened in the open state with an open time of 0.2 seconds is executed once.

  In this control example, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed in the probability variation period is set to be the same as the opening operation for a long time, but not limited to this. The opening operation may be performed. Specifically, for example, for 3 seconds, the opening operation may be performed once. With this configuration, it is possible to make the ball enter the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 when hitting for a long time, and during normal games, the variation display with the second special symbol Can be easily executed, and the player can enjoy the change of the game effect by the change display of the second special symbol on which a fresh notice display or the like is displayed.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 222 (c), when the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is “5” at the low probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is normal hit. If it is “6”, it is determined that it is a long hit. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is normal hit.

  In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is operated can be lowered, and the frequency of entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the profit on the game store side by increasing the player's consumption of game balls. On the other hand, in the short time and the probability variation period where the probability is high, the opportunity to operate the electric accessory 640a can be given with a probability of “1 / 1.2”, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is provided. You can increase your chances to enter. Therefore, it is possible to set a gaming state advantageous to the player while suppressing the player's consumption of the game ball. Therefore, a player can play a game aiming at a game with a high probability, and can play a game for a longer time.

  The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238). The update is repeated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 253).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 218, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 219, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 255), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 251) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  As shown in FIG. 221 (a), in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the above-described special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222), fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224), ordinary random numbers In addition to the table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)) and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 223), a small hit random number table 202e, a big hit scenario table 202f, and a small hit scenario table 202g are set. Although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 stores various data necessary for the game, programs, and the like in addition to the above-described ones.

  The small hit random number table 202e is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not a special winning lottery that can be given to the player is less than in the special symbol lottery. Here, the contents of the small hit random number table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 222 (b). As shown in FIG. 222 (b), in this control example, only the lottery shown in FIG.

  The jackpot scenario table 202f and the jackpot scenario table 202g are data tables in which the game operation content during the jackpot game and the game operation content during the jackpot game are stored in association with the determined hit type. Based on the information (scenario) stored in the data table, each winning game operation is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, small hitting / medium flag 203g, hour / medium counter 203j, probability variation counter 203m, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored. The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a normal random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) In the vacant area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winnings stored in the other reserved areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (the third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance into the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4. One is added. On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a new special symbol variation display is executed.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command. The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning in the second entrance 640, and other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The sound lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. The value of the number of held balls of the variable display held at 110 can be acquired. As a result, the number of suspended balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is retained in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol retained ball number counter 203f is set to an initial value of zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of retained balls for variable display increases. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time a new variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed.

  If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, the value of the normal random number counter C4 Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.

  The small hitting medium flag 203g is a flag that is set to ON while the small hitting game is being executed. The probability variation counter 203m is a counter for measuring a period during which the probability variation state continues, and a predetermined value is set when the probability variation state is set. Then, when the value of the counter is updated at the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed during the probability variation state, and the updated value reaches a predetermined value, processing to end the probability variation state is executed. Is done.

  The hour / minute counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the ordinary symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203j has an initial value set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Is done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the number of the hour / medium counter 203j.

  In the other memory area 203z, flags, counters, stored data, and the like necessary for other control processing executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 are set, but details thereof are omitted.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch of the operation handle 51 is detected by the touch sensor 290, and the operation handle is set on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and variable effects (variation Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach mode is used. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the contents of the production, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 227 (a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a hold rank selection table 222b, a hold mode selection table 222c, and a treasure box mode selection table 222d.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command and the variation pattern type, respectively, and a variation value of one variation pattern is determined by obtaining a counter value for selection (not shown).

  The reserved rank selection table 222b is a data table for selecting a rank (holding rank) related to the presence or absence of the prefetch effect based on the winning information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110. In this control example, the hold rank is set for all of the winning information corresponding to the received win command, and whether to perform the pre-reading effect according to the set hold rank, An effect mode in the case of executing the effect is set.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 228 (a), the contents defined in the reserved rank selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 228 (a) schematically shows the contents of the reserved rank selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the hold rank selection table 222b is associated with the type of determination result of the winning / failure included in the received winning command and the value of the hold rank counter 223p1 included in the effect counter group 223p. A plurality of reserved ranks (rank 1 to rank 4) are defined.

  Specifically, when the determination result is “big hit D” that is most advantageous to the player, “rank 2” is within the range of “0 to 69” and “rank 2” is “70 to 69”. “Rank 3” is defined in the range of “89”, “Rank 1” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”, and the determination result is “Large hit A, B, E”. “Rank 3” is defined in the range of the counter 223p1 of “0 to 69”, “Rank 2” is defined in the range of “70 to 89”, and “Rank 3” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”. .

  When the determination result is “big hit C, small win”, the value of the holding rank counter 223p1 is “0 to 69” in the range “rank 3” and “70 to 89” in the range “70 to 89”. When “Rank 4” is defined as “Rank 2” in the range of “90 to 99” and the determination result is “Out of” which is the most disadvantageous for the player, the value of the pending rank counter 223p1 is “Rank 4” is defined in the range “0 to 69”, “Rank 4” is defined in the range “70 to 89”, and “Rank 3” is defined in the range “90 to 99”.

  In other words, in this control example, four types of “Rank 1” to “Rank 4” can be selected as the types of holding ranks selected for each winning information, and the determination result is advantageous to the player. It is so set that an advantageous rank (a rank having a small value) is easily selected.

  In this way, in the case of executing a plurality of pre-reading effects, instead of setting the effect mode of each pre-reading effect based on the determination result of winning information, a holding rank is set based on the determination result of winning information. In addition, by configuring so as to set the production mode of each pre-reading effect based on the reserved rank, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the production mode of the pre-reading production to be executed. .

  In other words, when the pre-reading effect is executed when the result of the determination is wrong, in order to make the player have a sense of expectation, it is possible to set an effect mode with a high expectation level, but it is excessive for the player. In order to suppress expectation and a decrease in gaming motivation, it is common to configure an effect mode with a low expectation level. When performing a pre-reading effect, a configuration is made such that an effect mode with a low expectation degree is set at a rate of about 90%, and an effect mode with a high expectation level is set at a rate of about 10%, The pre-reading effect is executed without causing discomfort to the player.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, if the effect mode of each prefetch effect is set based on the result of the determination of success or failure, the effect mode with low expectation is set as the effect mode of one prefetch effect, There is a problem that an effect mode having a high expectation level is set as an effect mode of the other prefetch effect, and it becomes impossible to increase the effect of the prefetch effect.

  On the other hand, by setting the hold rank in advance based on the determination result, and configuring the production mode of each pre-reading effect according to the set hold rank, for example, the determination result is not correct. In this case, a low-expectation look-ahead effect that selects an effect mode of each pre-reading effect from a low-expectation effect mode and a high-expectation look-ahead effect selected from an effect mode with a high expectation level are executed separately. Therefore, an appropriate effect mode can be set for each prefetch effect without causing the above-described problem.

  In addition, for example, by configuring so that more reservation ranks can be set than the type of the determination result, it is possible to execute a variety of prefetch effects without a sense of incongruity.

  The holding mode selection table 222c is a data table for selecting the display mode of the holding symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. This control example is configured such that the display mode of the reserved symbols can be varied at the timing when a winning command is received from the main control device 110 or when a new special symbol variation (lottery) is started. .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 228 (b), the contents defined in the hold mode selection table 222c will be described. FIG. 228 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the reservation mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 228 (b), the hold mode selection table 222c is associated with the hold rank selected using the hold rank selection table 222b and the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 included in the effect counter group 223p. A plurality of hold modes are defined.

  In this control example, the color of the reserved symbol is varied as the reserved mode, and the colors of the reserved symbols normally displayed in “white” are “rainbow” and “red” in descending order of expectation. , “Green”, “yellow”, and “blue”.

  Specifically, in the case of “holding rank 1” having the highest degree of expectation of winning (set only when the big hit D is won), the value of the holding state counter 223p2 is “0 to 69”. "Red" in the range, "-(no change)" in the range of "70 to 89", "Green" in the range of "90 to 93", "Yellow" in the range of "94 to 96", When “rainbow” is defined in the range of “97 to 99” and “holding rank 2”, the value of the holding mode counter 223p2 is “0 to 69” and “green” “Yellow” in the range of “70 to 79”, “− (no change)” in the range of “80 to 89”, “Red” in the range of “90 to 96”, and “97 to 99” “Blue” is defined.

  In the case of “hold rank 3”, the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 is “− (no change)” in the range of “0 to 69”, and “yellow” is in the range of “70 to 79”. , “Green” is defined in the range of “80 to 89”, “blue” is defined in the range of “90 to 96”, “red” is defined in the range of “97 to 99”, and “hold rank 4” In some cases, the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 is “− (no change)” in the range of “0 to 89”, “blue” is in the range of “90 to 93”, and the range is “94 to 96”. “Yellow”, “97” to “98” are defined as “green”, and “99” is defined as “red”.

  In this control example, the mode for changing the color of the reserved symbol is selected as the reserved mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the shape of the reserved symbol may be set to be variable. In addition, a display mode indicating the effect of the pre-reading effect may be displayed in the vicinity of the reserved symbol (a range in which the player can identify the target reserved symbol).

  The treasure box mode selection table 222d is a data table that is referred to when selecting the display mode (color) of the treasure box role 750, and sets the display mode based on the jackpot type included in the corresponding winning information. is there.

  Here, the contents defined in the treasure chest form selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the treasure chest form selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 229, the treasure box mode selection table 222d is a jackpot type information (win / fail judgment result) included in the winning information and presence / absence of change in the display mode of the holding symbol indicating the corresponding winning information (the holding mode is already variable). A plurality of treasure box modes are defined in correspondence with the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 of the production counter group 223p.

  Specifically, when the determination result is “big hit D” and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is “red” in the range of “0 to 69”. ”Is defined as“ rainbow ”in the range of“ 70 to 89 ”,“ − (no change) ”in the range of“ 90 to 99 ”, and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is variable, The value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is defined as “red” in the range of “0 to 89” and “rainbow” in the range of “90 to 99”.

  In other words, in the present control example, when the display pattern of the reserved symbol has already been changed with respect to the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning information indicating that the “big hit D” has been won, The display mode is always changed. On the other hand, in the state where the display mode of the reserved symbols is not changed, the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 may not be changed. Thereby, it is possible to set an effect pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed without changing the display mode of the reserved symbol and the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750.

  Further, the display mode of “rainbow” having the highest expectation degree is selected when the hold mode is not changed, compared to when the hold mode is changed. Thereby, since the treasure chest accessory 750 is easily changed to the display mode “rainbow” with the highest expectation level without changing the display mode (holding mode) of the reserved symbol by the pre-reading effect, An unexpected effect can be executed while providing pleasure for predicting which holding symbol the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 has changed.

  Next, in a case where the determination result is “big hit B” and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is “0 to 69” in the range of “blue” When “-(no change)” is defined in the range of “70 to 89”, “red” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”, and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is variable, the treasure box mode The value of the counter 223p3 is defined as “blue” in the range of “0 to 69” and “red” in the range of “70 to 99”.

  When the determination result is “big hit A, C, E, or small win” and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is “0 to 69”. “-(No change)” is specified in the range of “70”, “blue” is specified in the range of “70 to 89”, “-(no change)” is specified in the range of “90 to 99”, and the corresponding reserved symbols are displayed. When the mode is variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is defined as “blue” in the range of “0 to 89” and “red” in the range of “90 to 99”.

  Finally, when the result of the determination is “out” and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is “− (no change) in the range of“ 0 to 89 ”. ) ”Is defined as“ blue ”in the range of“ 90 to 99 ”, and the value of the corresponding reserved symbol display mode is variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is in the range of“ 0 to 69 ”. “Blue” is defined as “− (no change)” in the range of “70 to 99”.

  Further, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 227 (b), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, the normal reserved ball number counter 223c, and the fluctuation start flag 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, winning information storage area 223f, state setting area 223g, operation effect flag 223h, operation effect type storage area 223i, pressed flag 223k, hold effect information storage area 223m, operation valid timer 223n, effect There are a counter group 223p, a pending production flag 223q, a treasure box production flag 223r, a pseudo winning order storage area 223s, a common figure variation start flag 223t, a common figure production prohibition flag 223u, a common figure production flag 223v, and other memory areas 223z. At least.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a first display held by the main controller 110. A counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) for special symbol variation effects up to four times for each special symbol type. The number of reserved balls such as when a winning information command is received or when a variable pattern command is received. Update according to the increase / decrease timing.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable display of the second special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a. In the counter that counts up to four times for each special symbol type, the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the second special symbol that is held in the main control device 110 is received, It is updated in accordance with the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases such as when a variation pattern command is received.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Thus, the number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of held balls is subtracted. In this case, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball is received from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2207 in FIG. 298). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display controller 114 of the value of the stored special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114. .

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 hold. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223b is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is The value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The normal reserved ball number counter 223c differs from the above-described special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in that the target is changed from a special symbol to a normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed description is omitted.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2302 in FIG. 259), and the third symbol It is turned off when variable display is set on the display device 81 (see S3002 in FIG. 267). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2204 in FIG. 258), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3007 in FIG. 267). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas corresponding to the first special symbol (first area to fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the second special symbol (first area to first area). 4 areas) and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to normal symbols, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is detected in the main controller 110, a special hit random number counter C1 acquired according to the start winning, Various information obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn from each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 (whether it is a big hit, a big hit type in the case of a big win, a fluctuation pattern) Predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  Further, when the passage of a sphere to the through gate 67 is detected, the normal symbol corresponding to the passage is drawn from the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired according to the passage. The lottery result is predicted in advance, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 receives various information notified by the winning information command (in the case of special symbol winning information, whether or not it is a jackpot type in case of jackpot, variation pattern, normal symbol) In the case of the winning information, the winning information is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information includes four areas (first entry 64 or second entry 640) corresponding to the detected entry, or four areas (ordinary symbols). Among the vacant areas of the first area to the fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  In the first control example, the main control device 110 is based on various types of information (whether it is a big win, a big hit type in the case of a big win, a variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning prize is drawn. Although a configuration in which a winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113 is used, other configurations may be used.

  For example, when a start winning occurs, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is added to various information predicted corresponding to the start winning. Is added to the setting means for setting the winning information command and the various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f when the winning information command is received and included in the received winning information command. It is good also as a structure which provides the discrimination | determination means which discriminate | determines whether various information (winning information) corresponds. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is appropriately stored.

  Further, in the first control example, a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set and notified to the voice lamp control device 113 when a new start winning is generated, but the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The notification timing is not limited to the above-described timing (timing at which the winning information command is set). For example, a storage means for temporarily storing the winning information command is provided, and in addition to the timing at which the start winning is received, the timing is periodically (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game condition is variable (for example, when the game state transitions from the short-time state to the normal state, or when the big hit game starts or ends), or when the special symbol starts to change (or A configuration may be used in which a winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of stopping. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called pre-reading effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

  In this control example, setting of an effect mode such as a change in the display color of the reserved symbol is executed as a pre-read effect based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f. In this way, by executing various effects (pre-read effects) based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, the player can be made to each held ball from before the variable display is started. You can have a sense of expectation that will be a big hit. It is also possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

  The state setting area 223g includes a current gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming state before a predetermined period (for example, a gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot if the game is currently a jackpot game). This is a storage area to be set (stored).

  In the state setting area 223g, when various state commands output from the main controller 110 are received by the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 258), information indicating the gaming state included in the received state commands is extracted. The current gaming state is set. In the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 258), when it is determined that a command indicating that the jackpot game is executed is received, the information set (stored) as the current game state is immediately before It is configured to be set (stored) as the set gaming state. As a result, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the fluctuating effect executed after the end of the jackpot game according to the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot. In addition, for example, even if it is a jackpot of the same jackpot type, in the case of having a configuration in which the game state executed after the jackpot game is varied according to the gaming state at the time of winning, It is possible to predict the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game on the voice lamp control device 113 side and execute the effect during the jackpot game for suggesting the prediction result.

  The operation effect flag 223h is for indicating that the operation effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the operation effect is being executed. The setting state of the operation effect flag 223h Accordingly, the processing contents when the operation means is operated are made different.

  This operation effect flag 223h is executed when it is determined in the change effect setting process (see S3004 in FIG. 268) that the change effect to be executed this time includes an operation effect (S3105: Yes in FIG. 268). Turned on in the operation effect setting process (S3106 in FIG. 269) (see S3204 in FIG. 269) and referred to in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 271) (S3304 in FIG. 271) and turned on. If it is set (S3304: Yes in FIG. 271), the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (see S3305 in FIG. 271). Then, it is also referred to in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (see S3501 in FIG. 273), and the operation effect effect mode based on the presence / absence of the frame button 22 operation is set for the operation effect being executed. .

  The operation effect type storage area 223i is a storage area for temporarily storing the type of operation effect to be executed, and indicates the effect type of the operation effect determined in the operation effect setting process (see S3106 in FIG. 269). Is stored (see S3203 and S3207 in FIG. 269). The effect type of the operation effect stored here is referred to when determining which operation effect is currently being executed in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (see S3502 and S3509 in FIG. 273). ). Thereby, a different process can be performed according to the kind of operation effect. Further, the information stored in the operation effect type storage area 223i is cleared when the operation effect ends (when the corresponding variation pattern effect ends).

  The pressed flag 223k indicates that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 22 (operation means), and is set to ON when the frame button 22 is pressed during an operation effect. Is.

  This pressed flag 223k is determined in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 271) when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 is performed with the operation effect flag 223h set to ON (FIG. 271 (S3304: Yes), is set to ON (see S3305 in FIG. 271), and is referenced in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (S3503, S3511, and S3518 in FIG. 273). And after setting the production | presentation aspect of the operation effect based on a reference result, it is set to OFF (S3505, S3513, S3520 of FIG. 273).

  In this control example, there are a case where the effect mode is changed immediately after the player operates the operating means, and a case where the effect mode is changed after a predetermined period has passed. In such a case, by using the pressed flag 223k, it is possible to reliably change the effect mode of the operation effect based on the operation result of the operation means.

  The reserved effect information storage area 223m is a storage area for storing various information set for executing the prefetch effect, and includes four storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, It is formed from four storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls of special symbols, and each storage area is configured to store information indicating a reservation rank, a reservation mode, and a treasure box mode. And when new special symbol fluctuation | variation is started, it is comprised so that the various information stored in each storage area may shift like the winning information storage area 223f.

  In this control example, by using the information stored in the hold effect information storage area 223m, the special symbol variation starts from the information set when the winning command is received (for example, information indicating the hold rank). Since it can be held until it is performed, it becomes possible to execute a prefetch effect using the information at any timing. As a result, an unexpected look-ahead effect can be executed for the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In this control example, the pre-reading effect is configured to be executed at the timing when the pre-reading effect mode is determined. However, for example, the determined pre-reading effect mode is stored in the hold effect information. It may be configured to store in the area 223m and execute a prefetch effect using the stored effect mode when a predetermined condition is satisfied. By configuring in this way, for example, by using the winning information included in the winning command received during the period in which the execution of the pre-reading effect is prohibited by executing the pre-reading effect for another reserved symbol. Thus, it is possible to determine a pre-reading effect mode and execute a new pre-reading effect based on the end of the pre-reading effect executed for another reserved symbol.

  In addition, when the process of setting the effect mode of the prefetch effect is executed once, the process of setting the effect mode of the prefetch effect is executed again for a predetermined period (for example, until the variation of the special symbol is executed twice). In the case of using a prohibition process, information specifying the prohibition period may be stored in the hold effect information storage area 223m, or a hold indicating a special symbol change to be executed next. A configuration in which prohibited information unique to a specific storage area is set on the storage area side so as to prohibit the execution of prefetch effects based on the hold effect information stored in the storage area where the hold effect information corresponding to the symbol is stored You may do it.

  The operation effective timer 223n is a timer for measuring an operation effective period during the operation effect (a period during which it is effectively determined that the player has operated the operation means (frame button 22)), and the operation effect is executed. A value for timing the period corresponding to the case is set. The operation valid timer 223n is periodically subtracted from the value set in the counter update process (S2113) executed at intervals of 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 257) of the sound lamp controller 113.

  The effect counter group 223p is a counter group having a plurality of counters used for selecting various effects. The contents of various counters included in the effect counter group 223p will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect counter group 223p. As shown in FIG. 230, in this control example, the production counter group 223p includes a holding rank counter 223p1, a holding mode counter 223p2, a treasure box mode counter 223p3, and other counters 223pz. The loop counter is repeatedly updated in the range of “99”.

  Each counter included in the effect counter group 223p is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. Each counter is configured to be updated within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) without being synchronized.

  The on-holding effect flag 223q is a flag for indicating that a holding effect that is one of the pre-reading effects is being executed, and is set to be on when the holding effect is being executed. This on-hold production flag 223q is set to ON in the hold mode selection process (see S2405 in FIG. 261) (see S2506 in FIG. 261), and when set to ON, a new hold mode is not set. Referenced (see S2501 in FIG. 261). Then, in the stop process (see FIG. 266), when it is determined that the special symbol variation that is the target of the holding effect has stopped (S2957: Yes in FIG. 266), it is set to off (see S2958 in FIG. 266).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a holding effect from being simultaneously executed for a plurality of holding symbols, so that the player pays attention to a pre-reading effect executed for a specific holding symbol. be able to. In addition, when a winning command indicating that the winning / failing determination result is correct in a state where a pre-reading effect in which the winning / failing determination result is out of execution has been received, execution of the pre-reading effect on the winning information corresponding to the winning command Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect in which the fluctuation result of the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the pre-reading effect is not executed becomes a big hit.

  In the present control example, the use of the pending production flag 223q is configured to suppress the execution of the pre-reading production with respect to a plurality of held symbols. The pre-reading effect may be executed up to two reserved symbols, and there is winning information indicating a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the pre-reading effect being executed. May be configured to switch the reserved symbol that is the target of the prefetch effect.

  The treasure box effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the treasure box effect, which is one of the pre-read effects, is executed, and is set to ON when the treasure box effect is being executed. The treasure box effect flag 223r is different only in that the target of the above-described hold effect flag 223q is replaced with a pre-read effect that changes the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. To do.

  The pseudo winning order storage area 223s is stored in the pseudo attacker 165 calculated with respect to a ball won in each winning opening (right general winning opening 163, specific out opening 166, specific winning opening 65a) provided in the special winning apparatus 550. This is a storage area for temporarily storing the arrival order (pseudo winning order). In the pseudo-winning order storage area 223s, in the pseudo-attacker effect process (see S2812 in FIG. 265) executed in the right-attacker jackpot related process (see S2702 in FIG. 264), the fact that the ball has won in each winning mouth When the command shown is received, the winning sequence to the pseudo attacker 165 is calculated by adding the ball flow down period from each winning opening to the pseudo attacker 165, and the calculation result is stored (S2903 in FIG. 265). . And it is referred when setting the specific effect mode (overflow effect mode) for the pseudo-winning information whose winning order stored in the winning order storage area 223s is 10 or later. The information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is cleared every time one round game is completed (see S2808 in FIG. 264).

  The ordinary drawing effect possible flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the variation pattern of the normal symbol won per long opening is executed, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol won per long opening is executed. If set to ON. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether the effect mode can be varied based on the lottery result of the normal symbol while the charge effect is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol. . When it is determined that when the variation pattern command indicating that the variation pattern of the normal symbol won per long opening is executed is executed, the effect mode of the charge effect cannot be replaced ( S2305 in FIG. 259: No), it is not set to ON.

  The general drawing effect prohibition flag 223u is a flag for indicating that the execution of the general drawing effect (the effect of changing the effect type of the charge effect based on the lottery result of the normal symbol) is prohibited. Is set to ON when it is determined that the execution of is prohibited. This ordinary drawing prohibition flag 223u is determined in the winning information related processing (see S2209 in FIG. 260) when it is determined that there is winning information indicating that a special symbol win (big win or small win) is won (see FIG. 260 (see S2407 of 260), and is set to ON (see S2408 of FIG. 260).

  Then, in the fluctuation pattern reception process (see S2202 in FIG. 259), it is referred to when a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a long open of a normal symbol (per normal figure length) is received (S2305 in FIG. 259). Based on this, the setting status of the normal drawing effect flag 223t is varied. The ordinary drawing effect prohibition flag 223u is set to OFF when a special symbol indicating a winning (big hit, small win) is stopped and displayed.

  By configuring in this way, a special symbol based on the lottery result of the normal symbol is provided when there is winning information indicating a special symbol hit (big hit, small hit) that is advantageous to the player over the long open of the normal symbol. It is possible to suppress the variation effect of the symbol from being varied. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from providing an incomprehensible effect by executing the effect based on the common figure length while the pre-reading effect is being executed based on the winning information indicating the winning. be able to.

  Note that, in this control example, it is configured to turn on the ordinary drawing prohibition flag 223u when it is determined that there is winning information indicating that a special symbol win (big win or small win) is won. The ordinary drawing effect prohibition flag 223u may be set to be turned on under other conditions. For example, the ordinary drawing effect prohibition flag 223u may be set at a timing other than when the changing effect indicating the special symbol lottery result is during high-speed fluctuation. May be set to on. Thereby, it can suppress giving the player the uncomfortable feeling that the fluctuation production under execution changes suddenly.

  Furthermore, in addition to the timing of receiving the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the normal figure per long opening, the general figure effect prohibition flag 223u is set on based on the timing when the game is executed per normal figure long opening. Also good.

  The ordinary drawing effect flag 223v is a flag for indicating that the ordinary drawing effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the ordinary drawing effect is being executed. This ordinary drawing effect flag 223v is set to ON when the ordinary drawing effect is executed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 272) (see S3406 in FIG. 272). Then, in order to set the display mode of the third symbol to be displayed at the special symbol stop timing, it is referred to in the stop process (see S2213 in FIG. 266) executed when the special symbol stop command is received (see FIG. 266). 266, S2952). Further, it is also referred to for setting a variation pattern of a variation effect set in accordance with the start of variation of the special symbol (see S3103 in FIG. 268).

  The continuation flag 223x is a flag for determining that the ordinary drawing effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol variations, and when the ordinary symbol effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol variations. Is set to on. This continuation flag 223x is turned on when it is determined in the charge effect setting process (see S3104 in FIG. 270) that the normal map variation time is longer than the special map variation time being executed (S3224: Yes in FIG. 270). It is set (see S3231 in FIG. 270). Then, it is referred to in the stop process (see S3103 in FIG. 266) (see S2953 in FIG. 266), and when it is determined that it is turned on (S2953: Yes in FIG. 266), the ordinary drawing effect (charge effect) is given. In order to continue without a sense of incongruity, a process for displaying a reduced third symbol for reducing and stopping the third symbol is executed.

  In this way, when the charge effect is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, when the process of changing the effect mode of the charge effect is performed based on the lottery result of the normal symbol, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. Even when the timing is later than the special symbol variation stop timing, the continuation flag 223x can be used to execute the charge effect across the special symbol variation stop timing. In addition, when the charge effect is executed across the special symbol variation stop timing, it is more difficult for the player to determine the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the special symbol lottery result than the normal stop display mode. By variably setting to, the player can execute the charge effect without a sense of incongruity.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Control). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 251).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) executed after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 274) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 237), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first start port 64a is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 274).

  Here, the power-on variation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 35). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", the image showing it will be displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is "out of special symbol", the image showing it will stop the changing effect It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and images indicating “o” and “x” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 231, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the ten main symbols (see FIG. 209) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b is generated, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 even though the changing effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the production is not started immediately.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  Since the first starting port 64a is a winning port from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters the ball, the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball becomes the second starting port. As it becomes easier to enter 64b, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of possessed balls is difficult to decrease or the number of possessed balls is not decreased even when a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 235 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table.

  When the MPU 231 specifies to display any one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (in the sea, on the beach, the background for the preparation period, or the background dedicated to the time effect) according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 The rear image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified with the passage of time.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 36) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 237) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 236 are applicable). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 236).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 236, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 237) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 236, when the pointer 233f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 35 on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S6005 in FIG. 274). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7705 in FIG. 285 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 276 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 276) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 276 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7601 in FIG. 285 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (see FIG. 285 (b)) is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 237), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 237) describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 237), which will be described later, with the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the image rendering process for one frame (FIG. 276 (b)) ) (See S6303)), the pointer update process (see S7305 in FIG. 284 (b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 237), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 237 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 38, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 276 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7307 in FIG. 283). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7809 in FIG. 286). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7810 in FIG. 286). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7902 in FIG. 287).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed (see S7902 in FIG. 287).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 238 to 255. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. Store in the corresponding buffer area.

  Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, 299, 99, and 239, respectively). When it reaches, each clears to 0. The updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first start port 64a is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39. After the through gate passing process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and then the other winning process is executed (S109). Further, other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S110), and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 253) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, the process of S213 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S204 that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the processing of S208 is 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 253) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. To store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S214 (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) and a special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 240 and 241. When the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S208) or the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S213) is executed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are commonly used. A special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the provided execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2 The type is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). Then, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) or the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213). It is determined whether the result (the current lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot scenario table 202f is set (S218). Thereafter, the values of the probability variation counter 203m and the hour / medium counter 203j are set to 0 (S219), and the big hit / medium flag 203n is set to ON (S220). Then, a stop command is set (S221), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S217 that the current lottery result is not a big win (S217: No), a small hit setting process (S222) is executed. The small hit setting process (S222) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, a game state update process (S223) is executed. The game state update process (S223) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, a stop command is set (S221), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (S209). This special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are selected. It is a process for determining the production pattern (fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production performed in step S2.

  In the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S208), first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is acquired. (S251). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S252). The determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is performed by determining whether or not the probability variation counter 203m is on. The probability variation counter 203m is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot D and the jackpot E. On the other hand, it is set off based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S252: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability change state, the process proceeds to S253. In the process of S253, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222 (a)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained. Obtain (S253). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random number values stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. As described above, six random numbers of “5 to 10” are set as special value jackpots for special symbols in the probability variation gaming state (special gaming state). When the winning random number value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S255.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S252 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state of the special symbol (S252: No), the process of S254 is executed. In the process of S254, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S251 and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a (S254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random number values stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), five values of “0 to 4” are set, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the disturbances to be hit by these If the numerical value matches, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S255.

  In the process of S255, whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S253 or S254 is a big win of the special symbol (that is, the value of the special special random number counter C1 acquired and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a (S255), if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S255: Yes), the value of the special hit type counter C2 obtained in the processing of S251 The display mode at the time of jackpot is set based on (S256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S251 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2, and the big win (( Among the jackpots D and jackpots E)), the type of jackpot is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is a big hit D (16R probability variation big hit), and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, the big hit E (See FIG. 223 (c)).

  In the process of S256, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit D, big hit E). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit D, jackpot E) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined based on the variation pattern selection table for normal 202b1 (S257). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S257, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0-50”, normal reach, “51-250 If it is within the range of “”, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined.

  In the variation pattern, main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination, and notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the determined variation time. The sound lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode that is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the result of the determination. The main control device 110 is configured such that even if the display mode is out of reach, the audio lamp control device 113 can be switched to the out display mode that is not the reach display mode as long as the variation time is the same. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, as variation patterns for detachment, “short out”, “long out”, “out normal reach”, and “out super reach” are defined. Various variations of “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns for common use of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S255 that the special symbol is out (S255: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S258). In the process of S258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is set. Based on the above, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is confirmed, and normal reach, super Determine the fluctuation time of the design fluctuation such as reach.

  When the process of S257 or the process of S259 is completed, a change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change pattern determined by the process of S257 or the process of S259 is set (S260). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S257 or S259 is set (S261). When the process of S261 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are selected. It is a process for determining the production pattern (fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production performed in step S2.

  In this special symbol 1 variation start process (S214), similar to the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), the special symbol 1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a obtained by the processing of S271 is firstly stored. Each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (S271).

  Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S272). If it is determined that the gaming state is in the probability variation period (S272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol. Since the state is surely changed, the process proceeds to S273. In the process of S273, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a (S273). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random number values stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. As described above, 11 random numbers of “5 to 10” are set as the special symbol jackpot random numbers, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits them. In this case, it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S275.

  On the other hand, in the process of S272, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the certain change state (S272: No), the process of S274 is executed. In the process of S274, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random number values stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, “0 to 4” is set, and when the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that wins the special symbol, Is determined to be a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S275.

  In the process of S275, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S273 or S274 is a special symbol jackpot (S275), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S275: Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271 (S276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202d1, and the big win (big hit) of the four types of special symbols is compared. A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) are determined as to which jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (6R probability variable big hit), and if it is in the range of “50 to 68”, the big hit B If it is in the range of “69-98”, it is determined that it is a jackpot C (8R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of “99”, it is determined that it is a jackpot C. (See FIG. 223 (c)).

  In the process of S276, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined based on the variation pattern selection table for normal 202b1 (S277). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S277, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0-50”, it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of “51-250”. Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

  In the variation pattern, main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination, and notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the determined variation time. The sound lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode that is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the result of the determination. The main control device 110 is configured such that even if the display mode is out of reach, the audio lamp control device 113 can be switched to the out display mode that is not the reach display mode as long as the variation time is the same. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. ing. As a variation pattern for the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D, “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined.

  In the process of S275, when it is determined that the special symbol is off (S275: No), the display mode at the time of the off is set (S278). In the process of S278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on the above, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is confirmed, and the normal reach, super Determine the fluctuation time of the design fluctuation such as reach.

  When the processing of S277 or S279 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S277 or S279 is set (S280). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S277 or S279 is set (S281). When the process of S281 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the small hit setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the small hit setting process (S222). This small hit setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is an execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is performed based on the values of the various counters stored in the table, and a process for determining whether or not a small hit is made, and a small hit scenario performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined. It is processing.

  In the small hit setting process (S222), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S301). When it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S301: Yes), a small hit scenario is set based on the small hit scenario table 202g (S302). Next, the small hitting / medium flag 203g is set to ON (S303), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S301, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S301: No), this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the game state update process (S223) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the game state update process (S223). This game state update process (S223) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238). This is a process for executing a subtraction process and updating the gaming state based on the subtracted value.

  In the game state update process (S223), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203m is greater than 1 (S351). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S351: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is greater than 1 (S351: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203m is decremented by 1 (S352). Next, in the process of S352, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203m that has been subtracted is 0 (S353). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is 0 (S353: Yes), since it is the timing to end the probability variation, a state command indicating a normal state is set (S354), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S353, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is not 0 (S353: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is greater than 1 (S355). If it is determined that the value is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S355: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S355 that the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is greater than 1 (S355: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203j is decremented by 1 (S356). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203j subtracted in the process of S356 is 0 (S357). If it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is 0 (S357: Yes), a state command indicating the shift to the latent state is set (S358), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S357, when it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is not 0 (S357: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 238), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first winning port 64, and when there is a starting win, This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command of the first special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1301) of a main process (see FIG. 253) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the pending ball number command is set by the process of S405, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, about S408-S414, about each process of S401-S406 demonstrated above, the process with respect to having won the 1st winning opening 64 is only changed into the process with respect to having won the 2nd starting opening 64b, Since the same processing is executed, detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, when a game ball is won in the second winning port 640 and stored as a holding ball, each value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 is acquired and the corresponding special symbol 2 is acquired. It is stored in the empty holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, by acquiring the respective values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 similar to those of the first special symbol for the second special symbol based on the entry to the second winning port 640. Since the lottery can be executed using a common random number for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the winning probability can be made constant for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  After performing the process of S413, a prefetch process is performed (S414). Details of the look-ahead process (S414) will be described with reference to FIG. 245, but based on the values of various counters acquired for entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Thus, a process for determining in advance each lottery result executed at the start of variation is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the incoming ball, but may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, there is no need for a storage area for storing the value of each counter until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. In addition, a part of the counters (for example, only the variation type counter CS1) may be acquired at the start of the variation. By configuring in this way, a counter related to the determination of success / failure is acquired at the time of entering the ball, and a counter not related to the determination of success / failure can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored is maintained while maintaining fairness of the game. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the prefetching process (S414) which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S414).

  In the prefetching process (FIG. 36, S414), first, determination of whether or not to start the change is made based on the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 (S421). The determination of success / failure at the start of change is a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area indicating whether the game state at the start of change is a normal game state (low probability) or a probability change game state (high probability game state). The determination is made based on whether or not the counter value stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is variably displayed and the hit type.

  In the process of S422, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the process of S421 is a win (S422). When it is determined that the determination result is a win (S422: Yes), it is determined based on the special hit type counter C2 whether the hit type is a big hit A (S423). When it is determined that the hit type is jackpot A (S423: Yes), a winning command indicating the jackpot A is set (S424). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (S423: No), a winning command indicating that the jackpot B is set is set (S425). Also, in the process of S422, when it is determined that the determined result of the determination is not good (S422: No), a winning prize command is set (S426).

  As described above, since the result of the determination of whether or not prior to the start of the fluctuation is output as a winning command to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a holding ball is established, the sound lamp control device 113 The success / failure determination result and its hit type can be recognized in advance. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can change the player's advance notice determination result for the hold ball to the player based on the winning command (for example, the color of the hold symbol can be changed to a color for notifying the determination result). In addition, it is possible to execute an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the result of the determination of the success / failure in the holding ball. In addition, since the winning command is output as one winning command for the holding ball every time the holding ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the holding ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the pre-reading process (S407) which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 of FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S407).

  In this prefetching process (S407), it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S501: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning at the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning is a winning of the first special symbol (S502).

  In the process of S502, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S502: Yes), based on the special symbol big hit random number table 202a1, the special figure big hit type selection table 202d1, and the small hit random number table 202e. The lottery result, the jackpot type and the jackpot type are acquired (S503), and the process proceeds to S504. In the process of S504, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, the jackpot determination result, and the jackpot type acquired in S503 (or S505) is set (S504), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S502 that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result, The jackpot type is acquired (S505), the process of S504 is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second symbol 640 associated with the second winning a prize opening 640 are displayed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of one electric accessory 640.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the second symbol display device 83 is in the middle of displaying the winning symbol, and the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640 associated with the second winning prize opening 640 is performed. And in the middle of being made. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, a normal symbol variation start process is executed (S608), and this process ends. The normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S609). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S637 or the process of S638 of FIG. 38 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S609 (S609: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S609 (S609: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S610). In the process of S610, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S707 of FIG. 247 or the process of S710, the “○” symbol as the second symbol is displayed as the second symbol display. The device 83 is set to be stopped (lighted). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S713 in FIG. 247, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lighted Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S610, when the second symbol display update process (see S1307) of the main process (see FIG. 253) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S707, S710 or S713 in FIG.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S611). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S611: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640 associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S612), and the per-drawing operation command is set. (S613), and the process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the first electric combination 640 is set by the processing of S612, the first electric combination opening / closing process (see S1306) of the main process (see FIG. 253) is executed next. The opening / closing control of the accessory 640 is started, and the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640 is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S709 or S712 of FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S611, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S611: No), the processes of S612 and S613 are skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, the normal symbol variation start process (S608) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation start processing (S608). In the normal symbol variation start process (S608), the normal symbol variation start setting executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 246) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238) is set. This is a process for execution.

  It is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit with a special symbol (S701). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S701: Yes), the process proceeds to S704.

  In the process of S701, if the special symbol is not big hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (S702). If it is not surely changed (S702: No), the process proceeds to S704.

  If the probability change is in progress (S702: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state, so the normal hit random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 in FIG. And a lottery result as to whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired based on the value of R and the normal random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 222 (c)) (S703). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)) for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 222 (c)).

  In the process of S704, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the normal random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 of FIG. Based on the low probability normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)), the lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S704). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 222 (c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5”, it is determined that the normal symbol is short-circuited. If it is determined that it is within the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbols (see FIG. 222 (c)).

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because, during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits a ball in an attempt to make a prize at the specific prize opening 65a. This is because a ball that has been opened and intended to win the specific winning opening 65a is prevented from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second winning opening 640, even if it is suppressed that a ball enters the second winning opening 640 during a special symbol jackpot, There are many balls in 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second winning opening 640 becomes maximum (four times).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S703 or S704 is a normal symbol win (S705). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S705: Yes). Then, it is determined whether the hit type of the normal symbol is for a long time (S706). When it is determined that the normal symbol hit type is long time hit (S706: Yes), the display mode for the long time hit is set (S707). In the process of S707, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a variation pattern command per normal length is set (S708), the opening time and the number of times of the first electric accessory 640 are set to 2 seconds × 2 times (S709), and the process proceeds to S715.

  If it is determined in step S706 that the normal symbol hit type is normal hit (S706: No), the normal hit display mode is set (S710). Next, a variation pattern command per common map is set (S711). The opening period of the first electric accessory 640 associated with the second winning opening 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of opening is set to 1 (S712), and the process proceeds to S636.

  In the process of S705, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S705: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of ending is completed, an unillustrated fluctuation pattern command is set (S714), and the process proceeds to S715.

  In the process of S715, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (S715). If the probability change is in progress (S715: Yes), the change time of the change display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S716). This process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not in the process of S715 being surely changed (S715: No), the fluctuation display fluctuation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S717), and this process is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the second winning port 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 640.

  In the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of opening for a long time are the same as the case where the normal symbol is hit in the probabilistic state and the short time state. You may comprise so that it may set.

  Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the first through-gate 66. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the hit random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the first through gate 66 (S801). Here, the passage of the sphere in the first through gate 66 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the first through gate 66 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S803: No), the process proceeds to S806. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the first through gate 66 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter One is added to the value (M) of 203f (S804). Then, the value of the normal random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S805), and the process proceeds to S806. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. Next, a general-purpose prefetching process (S806) is executed, and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the general-purpose prefetching process will be described (S806). FIG. 249 is a flow chart showing the contents of this general-purpose prefetching process (S806). In the general symbol prefetching process (S806), first, prior discrimination based on the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is executed (S901). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 newly stored in the processing of S805 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c.

  Next, based on the result of prior discrimination, a hit prior determination result and a variation time determination result are acquired (S902). Thereafter, a general winning information command is set (S903), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the other winning process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the contents of the other winning process (S109). This other winning process (S109) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 238), and the presence / absence of a ball in the specific winning port 65a and the specific outro is determined. This is a process for setting a command.

  In the other winning process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the specific winning opening 65a (S1001). If it is determined that there is a prize at the specific prize opening 65a (S1001: Yes), a specific prize command is set, and the process proceeds to S1003. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1001 that there is a prize at the specific winning opening (S1001: No), the process of S1002 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1003.

  After executing the processing of S1001 or S1002, it is next determined whether or not there is a ball in the specific outro (S1003). If it is determined that there is a ball in the specific outro (S1003: Yes), a specific out ball entering command is set (S1004), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1003, when it is determined that there is no entry in the specific outro (S1003: No), the process of S1004 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S913 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S913. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S914, S915) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S911.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), a state command is transmitted based on the long-time release flag 203i (S908). Next, the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S910), and the process proceeds to S911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S911, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1301 to S1307 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1310 and S1311 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1301). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S131 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 238) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) or the start winning process (see FIG. 244) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning command set in the start winning process or the prefetch process (see FIG. 245) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1302). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1303), and then, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1304). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1304) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, when the special symbol is in the small hit state, a small hit effect is executed, or a small hit control process for opening or closing the third winning opening 82 of the third electric accessory is executed (S1305). In the big hit control process, the third winning opening 82 is opened for each round of the small hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the third winning opening 82 has elapsed, or whether the ball has won the prescribed number in the third winning opening 82. judge. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the third winning opening 82 is closed. The opening and closing of the third prize winning opening 82 is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1305) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the first electrical accessory 640 associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1305). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S612 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 246), the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is started. . The opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S709 in FIG. 247 or the processing of S712 in the normal symbol variation start processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1306). In the first symbol display update process, the process of S257 or S259 of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 240), or the process of S277 or S279 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 241). When the variation pattern is set, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation display according to the variation pattern. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the process of S257 or S259 of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 240), or the process of S277 or S279 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 241). When the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process is completed, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the process of S256 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 208) or The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S258 or the processing of S276 of the special symbol 1 variation start processing (see FIG. 241) or the processing of S278. (Lights up).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1307). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S716 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 247) or the processing of S717, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation display. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S610 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 246), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S707 or the processing of S710 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 247). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1308). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1308: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1309). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1309: Yes), the process proceeds to S1301, and the above-described processes after S1301 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1309: No), the initial time is reached until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1310, S1311).

  First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1310). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1302 (S1311).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1301 to S1307 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated by using the remaining time, whereby the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1). The initial value of the normal random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1308, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1308: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 40 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1312 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1312), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1313). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1314), the access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1315), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1308 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1301 to S1307 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1310 and S1311 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1301. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1301 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1301. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 257), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (S1304), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot scenario is set (S1401). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1401: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the jackpot scenario is set (S1401: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S1402), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S1403). ). More specifically, in the process of S1402, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S1403, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario It is determined whether the value falls within the range.

  In the process of S1403, when it is determined that the opening timing of the jackpot scenario is reached (S1403: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S1404), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening timing of the jackpot scenario is not reached (S1403: No), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405).

  In the process of S1405, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405: Yes), the special winning opening 65a in the jackpot is set to open (S1406), and the number of newly started rounds is set. The round number command shown is set (S1407), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1405 that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405: No), it is next determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S1405: No). S1408). Here, in this control example, when the total number of balls (for example, five) is won while the specific winning opening 65a is opened, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed for a predetermined time. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the condition for ending the round of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1408: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the processing of S1409 (the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is The solenoid is turned off so as to be in the closed state), and the process is terminated. Note that the above-described determination processing from S1405 to S1409 is repeatedly executed for the number of jackpot rounds set in the jackpot scenario.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1409, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S1409: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1410), and the ending effect is determined. Is the start timing (S1410: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S1411), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1410: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (S1412). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates a case where an ending effect execution period has elapsed. In the process of S1412, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S1412: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is set based on the current jackpot type (S1413), and the probability change is determined based on the jackpot type. The value of the counter 203m is set (S1414), the big hit flag 203n is set to OFF (S1415), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1412, when it is determined that it is not the big hit end timing (S1412: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the small hit control process (S1305) which is one process in the main process (refer FIG. 253) performed by MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hitting control process (S1305).

  In the small hit control process (S1305), first, it is determined whether or not a small hit scenario is set (S1501). Specifically, the process of S1604 of the special figure 2 off stop process (see FIG. 45) is executed to determine whether or not a small hit scenario is set. If the small hit scenario is not set in the processing of S1501 (S1501: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if a small hit scenario is set in the processing of S1501 (S1501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S1502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (S1503). More specifically, in the process of S1502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S1503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is changed to the small hit scenario. It is determined whether the value corresponds to the start of the opening.

  In the process of S1503, when it is determined that it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (S1503: Yes), a small hit opening command is set (S1504), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for starting the opening of the small hit scenario (S1503: No), it is then determined whether it is the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (S1505).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1505 that it is the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (S1505: Yes), the third winning opening 82 is set to open (S1506), and then a round start command is set (S1507). ), This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (S1505: No), it is then determined whether the round end condition for the currently executed round is satisfied (S1508). Here, in the present control example, when the total number of balls (for example, five) is won while the third winning opening 82 is opened, or the opening period of the third winning opening 82 is a predetermined time. If it has elapsed, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1508, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S1508: Yes), the third winning opening 82 is set to be closed in the process of S1509. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the condition for ending the round of the third winning opening 82 is not satisfied (S1508: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1510).

  In the process of S1510, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1510: Yes), a small hitting ending command is set (S1511), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the small hit is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1510 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1510: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S1512). Here, the small hit end timing indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1512 that it is the end timing of the small hit (S1512: Yes), the small hitting medium flag 203g is set to OFF (S1513), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not the small hit end timing (S1513: No), this processing is ended.

<Control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIG. 256 to FIG. 273, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current power-off processing in S2119 is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 257). ) Is determined during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 257, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 257), it executes the power-off process in S2119. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2119 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S2119 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S2118, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S2119, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S2119 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 259). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2119 is executed. Therefore, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2119 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S2008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S2004 to S2006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and interrupt permission is set. In step S2011, the process proceeds to the main process. Thereafter, it is determined whether a status command is received from the main controller 110 (S2012). This status command is a command set in the process of S1208 of the startup process (see FIG. 252) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. If it is determined in step S2012 that a status command has been received (S2012: Yes), information indicating the received status command is set in the status setting area 223g, and this processing ends (S2013).

  In this way, when the power is turned on, a command that can determine whether or not a normal symbol is being hit for a long time is output from the main control device 110, so that the voice lamp control device 113 side can also determine the state. Can do.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S2009 is that when the process from S2004 to S2006 is reached via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S2101 was executed (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2114 without performing the processes in S2102 to S2113. Whether or not 1 msec has passed in the processing of S2101 is mainly related to display (production) in S2102 to S2113, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec) This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2114, the variable display setting process of S2115, and the process of updating various counter values not shown in a short cycle. In other words, the reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110 can be prevented by executing the process of S2114 in a short cycle, and the command determination process can be received by executing the process of S2115 in a short cycle. Based on the command, the setting related to the changing effect can be performed without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2115 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Subsequently, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a hold lamp (not shown) is turned on according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, or the value of the normal reserved ball number counter 223c. Is done.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. Details of the frame button input monitoring / production process (S2107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S2108 is executed. The sound editing / output process of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. The liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) described above will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S2110 ends, an operation effect management process is executed (S2111). The operation effect management process (S2111) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 273, but the effect mode displayed during the operation effect depends on whether or not the operation means (frame button 22) is operated. A process for varying is executed.

  After executing the operation effect management process (S2111), the operation control process (S2112) is executed. In this motion control process (S2112), motion control of various effect movable accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is executed. The operation control of the various effect movable accessories is an effect set based on a lottery result of a special symbol, a lottery result of a normal symbol, an operation result of an operation means (frame button 22), a game result during a jackpot game, or the like. This is executed according to the contents of the operation scenario of the movable movable object for use, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the process of S2112 is completed, a counter update process is executed (S2113). In this counter update process (S2113), a process for updating the value of a counter (timer) for timekeeping information necessary for executing various effects, for example, the operation valid timer 223n is executed.

  When the process of S2113 is completed, a command determination process is executed next (S2114). The command determination process (S2114) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After executing the command determination process (S2114), the variable display setting process is executed (S2115). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S2115 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2116). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2116 (S2116: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S2118), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2119). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2120), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2117: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2117: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2114). This command determination processing (S2114) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 258), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation pattern reception process is executed (S2202), and this process ends. Details of the variation pattern reception process (S2202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern command is not received in the processing of S2201 (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not a stop type command is received (S2203). When the stop type command is received (S2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2205), and this process ends. .

  In the process of S2203, when the stop type command is not received (S2203: No), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command is received (S2206). When the reserved ball number command is received (S2206: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 reserved ball) Number counter 223b) (S2207), and the process is terminated. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored. Further, when a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is received, information for indicating the number of reserved balls is stored in the normal reserved ball number counter.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2206, if no pending ball number command has been received (S2206: No), it is determined whether or not a winning-related command has been received (S2208). When a prize-related command is received (S2208: Yes), a prize information-related process is started (S2209), and this process is terminated. Details of the winning information related process (S2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 260, but a winning command output from the main control device 110 (a winning command corresponding to a special symbol, a winning command corresponding to a normal symbol). Based on this, a process for pre-determining the winning information included in the winning command and executing an effect (pre-reading effect) based on the pre-determination result and a process for temporarily storing the pre-determination result are executed. Is done.

  In the process of S2208, when no winning-related command is received (S2208: No), it is then determined whether a winning-related command has been received (S2210), and if it is determined that it has been received (S2210: Yes). Then, a hit-related process is executed (S2211), and this process ends. This winning association process (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in step S2210 that a hit-related command has not been received (S2210: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S2212). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2212: Yes), the stop process is executed (S2213), and the process is hunted. This stop process (S2213) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received in the process of S2212 (S2212: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, the details of the variation pattern reception process (S2202), which is one process in the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 258), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern reception process. In this variation pattern reception process (S2202), a variation pattern (variation effect) of a special symbol is set using the variation pattern selection table 222a based on the received variation pattern command. When a variation pattern command indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery is received, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation effect can be executed based on the normal symbol lottery result.

  In the fluctuation pattern reception process (S2202: FIG. 259), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command received this time is for a special figure (S2301), and a fluctuation pattern command for a special figure, that is, a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol is shown. If it is determined that the command is a command (S2301: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2302), and the variation pattern is extracted using the variation pattern selection table 222a based on the received command. In step S2303, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the variation pattern command received this time is not for special drawing, that is, if it is determined that the variation pattern command for ordinary drawing has been received (S2301: No), then, It is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received for this time is a variation pattern command indicating that it has been won per unit length (per long opening) (S2304). In the process of S2304, if it is determined that a variation pattern command indicating that the winning is per ordinary figure length (per long opening) has been received (S2304: Yes), then the ordinary figure effect prohibition flag 223u is set to ON. (S2305: No), the multi-drawing effect possible flag 223t is set to on, and this processing is terminated.

  In the processing of S2304, when it is determined that a command other than the variation pattern command indicating that the winning is per long (long opening) is received (S2304: No), or the normal drawing is prohibited in the processing of S2305. If it is determined that the flag 223u is set to ON (S2305: Yes), this processing ends without setting the ordinary drawing effect possible flag 223t to ON.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 260, the winning information related process (S2209), which is one process in the command determination process (S2114: see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the winning information related process (S2209). This winning information related process (S2209) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the winning information related process (S2209), it is first determined whether or not the received winning information command is a command indicating special symbol winning information (a special information winning information command) (S2401), and a special drawing winning information command is determined. (S2401: Yes), the winning information included in the received winning information command is read (S2402), the determination result of the winning / notifying determination included in the read winning information, and the value of the acquired hold rank counter 223p1. Is used to select a reservation rank based on the reservation rank selection table 222b (S2403).

  Then, the hold rank selected in the process of S2403 is stored in the place corresponding to the winning information command received this time in the hold effect information storage area 223m (S2404). Thereafter, a hold mode selection process (S2405) and a treasure box mode selection process (S2406) are executed. Here, the hold mode selection process (S2405) executes a process for setting a pre-reading effect (holding effect) for changing the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol based on the winning information read this time. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) executes a process for setting a pre-reading effect (treasure box effect) for changing the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 based on the winning information read this time. This will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S2406 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the winning information read this time includes winning information (S2407). If it is determined that the winning information is included (S2407: Yes), the ordinary drawing effect is performed. The prohibition flag 223u is set to ON (S2408), the received winning information is stored in the corresponding position of the winning information storage area 223f (S2409), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the winning information command received this time is for a normal symbol (ordinary figure) (S2401: No), the processes of S2402 to S2408 are skipped and the process is terminated. Although detailed description is omitted, in the winning information related process (S2209), when a winning information command for ordinary use is received, whether the received winning information command includes information or not, In addition, when winning information is included, it is configured to determine whether or not winning information for executing a game per long opening is included, and further, a normal time change time is determined. The result is stored in the paying information storage area 223f.

  As a result, it is possible to determine in advance how many seconds the game per long opening will be executed according to the normal symbol, so that the lottery result of the normal symbol across multiple normal symbol fluctuations as well as the special symbol It is possible to execute an effect (a pre-reading effect). In addition, since it is possible to determine whether or not a game per long opening is executed during the special symbol variation period being executed, for example, an effect based on the normal symbol variation is interrupted during the special symbol deviation variation It is also possible.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which a plurality of different symbol lotteries (the special symbol lottery and the regular symbol lottery) are executed in parallel, the lottery varies based on the symbol variation on the side which is the lottery result advantageous to the player. Since the effect (variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81) can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since it is possible to suppress execution of a fluctuating effect based on a lottery result (disappearance) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the contents of the hold mode selection process (S2405) executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold mode selection process (S2405). In the hold mode selection process (S2405), a process for setting a hold effect that is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold symbol based on the winning information received this time is executed.

  When the hold mode selection process (S2405) is executed, it is first determined whether the hold effect flag 223q is set to on (S2501), and it is determined that the hold effect flag 223q is not set to on. (S2501: No), that is, if it is determined that the currently held effect is not set (executed), it is possible to set a new reserved effect, so S2502 for setting the reserved effect. The process of S2506 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2501 that the on-hold effect flag 223q is set to on (S2501: Yes), a new on-hold effect cannot be set (executed). The processing of S2502 to S2506 is skipped and this processing is terminated.

  When the process of S2502 is executed, the hold rank stored in the hold effect information storage area is read (S2502), and the hold rank read in the process of S2502 and the acquired value of the hold mode counter 223p2 are used. Then, a hold mode is selected based on the hold mode selection table 222c (S2503).

  Then, a hold command for display corresponding to the selected hold mode is set (S2504), the selected hold mode is stored in the hold effect information storage area 223m (S2505), and the hold mode for changing the display mode of the hold symbol is selected. If it has been set, the on-hold presentation flag 223q is set to on (S2506), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, this control example is configured to execute a holding effect that changes the display mode of the holding symbol when winning information is acquired. Moreover, it can suppress that a holding | maintenance effect is set redundantly by using the flag 223q during a holding | maintenance effect.

  In this control example, while the hold effect is being executed (set), the pre-read effect (hold effect) is prevented from being executed (set) based on the newly received winning command. ) Are executed in duplicate, and it is possible to prevent the player from executing a performance that is difficult to understand for the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a predetermined number of times (for example, You may comprise so that a holding | maintenance effect may be overlapped and executed with an upper limit of 2).

  Further, in this control example, the process for selecting the hold effect is always executed when the hold effect flag 223q is not set to ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a predetermined lottery is executed in the winning information related process (see S2209 in FIG. 260) executed when the game is received, and the lottery result is a predetermined lottery result, the above-described hold mode selection process is executed. You may comprise. In this way, by configuring the process for setting the hold effect to be executed at random, the hold effect for which the hold effect has not been executed is not executed in spite of the hold mode selection process being executed. It can be difficult to understand whether the hold mode selection process has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the variation effect of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the reserved effect has not been executed.

  In addition, once the holding effect is executed, a predetermined condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaches 10 times or a condition that is satisfied when the time has passed 10 minutes) is satisfied. A determination unit that determines whether or not the condition is satisfied may be provided so that a new hold mode selection process is not executed until the determination unit determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to set a period during which the holding effect is not intentionally executed.

  In addition, in this control example, when the hold effect that changes the display mode of the hold symbol is selected in the hold mode selection process (when other than “−” is selected by the hold mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 228)). However, for example, when the display mode of the holding symbol is not changed in the holding mode selection process, the holding effect flag 223q is set to ON. You may do it. In this case, it is preferable to provide a period during which the hold effect is not intentionally executed as described above. By comprising in this way, it becomes possible to set the period when the display mode of a pending | holding symbol is not changed more randomly, and can improve an effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the contents of the hold mode selection process (S2405) executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the contents of the treasure box mode selection process (S2406). In this treasure box mode selection process (S2406), a process for setting (executing) a treasure box effect (see FIG. 210 (b)) that is an effect of changing the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 based on the winning information received this time. Is executed.

  When the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the treasure box effect flag 223r is set to ON (S2601), and it is determined that the treasure box effect flag 223r is not set to ON. (S2601: No), that is, when it is determined that the treasure chest effect is not set (executed), it is possible to set a new treasure chest effect, so S2602 to S2606 for setting the treasure chest effect. Execute the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that the treasure box effect flag 223r is set to ON (S2601: Yes), the new treasure box effect cannot be set (executed). The processing of S2602 to S2606 is skipped and this processing is terminated.

  When the process of S2602 is executed, the notification determination result is read from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S2602), and then the hold mode change is performed from the information stored in the holding effect information storage area 223m. Information indicating the presence / absence (information indicating whether or not a reserved symbol for which a holding effect is executed) is read (S2603). Then, based on the treasure box mode selection table 222d using the determination result of the success / failure read in the process of S2602, the information indicating the presence / absence of the change in the hold mode read in the process of S2603, and the value of the acquired treasure box mode counter 223p3. A treasure box mode is selected (S2604).

  Then, a lamp treasure chest command corresponding to the selected treasure chest mode is set (S2605), the selected treasure chest mode is stored in a corresponding location in the holding effect information storage area 223m (S2606), and the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 is changed. If the treasure box mode to be changed is selected, the treasure box effect flag 223r is set to ON (S2606), and this process is terminated.

  The display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 is variably controlled based on the lamp treasure chest command set by the processing of S2605. The sound lamp control device 113 may have means for variably controlling the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750, or a control device different from the sound lamp control device 113 may be used.

  As described above, in this control example, the treasure box mode selection process (S2406 in FIG. 262) is performed in the winning information related process (see S2209 in FIG. 260) in the same manner as the above-described hold mode selection process (see S2405 in FIG. 261). See). Then, when selecting a treasure box mode in which the display mode of the treasure chest item 750 is changed in this treasure box mode selection process, based on the determination result of whether or not the display mode of the target reserved symbol is variably displayed. Further, the treasure box mode is selected, and after the holding mode selection process (S2405 in FIG. 261) is executed in one winning information related process (S2209 in FIG. 260), the treasure box mode setting process (see FIG. 262 S2406) is executed. Thereby, it is possible to reliably set an appropriate effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the contents of the hit-related process (S2211 in FIG. 263) will be described. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related process (S2211). This hit-related process (S2211) is executed in the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 258) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is related to the win (big hit, small win) from the main controller 110. It is executed when a command is received.

  In this control example, the third electric combination 82a (see FIG. 207) provided in the left area of the game board 13 is opened when the big win C is won by the special symbol lottery and when the small win is won. The winning game (left winning game) is executed, and when the big winnings A, B, D, E are won by lottery of special symbols, the variable winning device 65 provided in the right area of the game board 13 is opened. The winning game (right winning game) is configured to be executed. In the hit-related process (S2211 in FIG. 263), a display command for displaying information related to the winning game on the third symbol display device 81 is set. The process and the winning effect that differs depending on the type of the winning game to be executed are configured to be executed.

  When the hit-related process (S2211 in FIG. 263) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command related to jackpot C or a jackpot, that is, a command related to a left hit game (S2701). ). Here, when it is determined that the command is related to the big hit C or the small hit (S2701: Yes), the processing of S2703 to S2709 is executed in order to set various display contents regarding the left hit game. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a command related to the big hit C or the small hit, that is, a command related to the right hit game (S2701: No), various display contents regarding the right hit game are displayed. In order to set, right attacker jackpot related processing is executed (S2702), and this processing is terminated. The contents of the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702) will be described later with reference to FIG. 264. First, the processes of S2703 to S2709 for setting various display contents related to the left winning game will be described.

  When the process of S2703 is executed, it is determined whether the command received this time is a hit start command indicating a hit start (S2703). If it is determined that the command is a hit start command (S2703: Yes), A roulette effect (see FIG. 213) corresponding to is determined (S2704), a display command corresponding to the determined roulette effect is set (S2705), and this process ends.

  Here, the roulette effect described above with reference to FIG. 213 is an effect executed for a predetermined period (5 seconds), and when a small hit game is executed, the small hit game period (5 seconds), In other words, the game is executed using the opening period (2 seconds), the round game period (1.5 seconds), and the ending period (1.5 seconds) of the small hit game. When a jackpot (bonus C) game is executed, 5 seconds after the jackpot game is started, that is, an opening period (2 seconds), a part of the first round game period (from the start of the round game) 3 seconds).

  In this control example, the same hitting operation is executed during the period in which the roulette effect is being executed regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. That is, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C has the opening period set to 2 seconds, and as the first round game, the third electric accessory 82a is released for 1.5 seconds after the round game is started. Later, a round game is set in which the third electric combination 82a is opened for 28.5 seconds after a 3 second closing period (period in which the third electric combination 82a is closed).

  By configuring in this way, while the roulette effect is being executed (while the first half period of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot game or the jackpot C is being executed), the contents of the hit game being executed Based on this, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the hit game currently being executed is a big hit game or a small hit game. Further, as described above, as the first round game in the jackpot game, a closing period of 1.5 seconds is set after the execution period (5 seconds) of the roulette effect has elapsed. As a result, the third electric accessory 82a is not released until the player recognizes the effect result after the result of the roulette effect is displayed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 213, the player is informed of the type of winning game being executed by the roulette effect, but in addition to such a roulette effect, It may be configured to execute a roulette effect (Gascellulet effect) for notifying the player of a hit type different from the type of game. In this case, even though the jackpot game is actually executed The effect result indicating the small hit game may be displayed as the effect result of the gaserulette effect. Thereby, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. In the process of S2703, when it is determined that the command received this time is not a hit start command (S2703: No), it is then determined whether the command received this time is a round number command (S2706). If it is determined that the command is a command (S2706: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (S2707), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2706 that the command received this time is not a round number command (S2706: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command (S2708), and it is determined that it is an ending command. In this case (S2708: Yes), a display ending command is set (S2709), and this process is terminated. Also. If it is determined in step S2708 that an ending command has not been received (S2708: No), this process ends.

  Next, in the hit related process (see S2701 in FIG. 263), it is executed when it is determined that the hit related command received this time is a command related to the jackpot A, B, D, E (S2701: No in FIG. 263). The contents of the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the contents of the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702).

  In this control example, when a jackpot game is executed to open the variable winning device 65 provided in the special winning device 550 in the right area of the game board 13, a pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed. (See FIG. 219). In the right attacker jackpot related processing (S2702), processing necessary to make the content of the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 correspond to the jackpot game (right hit game) that is actually executed is executed.

  When the right attacker jackpot related processing (S2702) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S2801). If it is determined that the command is a jackpot start command (S2801: Yes). Then, a display jackpot start command is set (S2802), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2801 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2801: No), it is then determined whether the command received this time is a round command (S2803), and the command is a round command. Is determined (S2803: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S2804), an opening operation for opening the pseudo attacker 165 is set (S2805), and this process is terminated. . When the release operation is set in the process of S2805, a solenoid (not shown) for operating the pseudo attacker 165 in the operation control process (see S2112) executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) of the sound lamp control device 113. Z) is set to ON, and the pseudo attacker 165 is variably operated from a closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball to an open state where the ball is easy to enter.

  As described above, the actual jackpot is configured by performing the release operation of the pseudo-attacker 165 at the timing of receiving the round number command for indicating that a new round game is started from the main controller 110. Since the game content and the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 can be made similar, the pseudo jackpot effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the process of S2803, if it is determined that a round number command has not been received (S2803: No), then it is determined whether a close command has been received (S2806), and if it has been determined that a close command has been received (S2806: Yes), the closing operation of the pseudo attacker 165 is set (S2807), the information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is cleared (S2808), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2806 that a close command has not been received (S2806: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S2809). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S2809). : Yes), the display ending command is set (S2810), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S2809 that an ending command has not been received (S2809: No), it is then determined whether a winning-related command has been received (S2811).

  Here, winning-related commands are various commands that are output when a ball wins a winning opening where a ball can win (win) when a player plays a right-handed game during a big hit game. Specifically, a specific winning command for indicating that the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a, a specific general winning command for indicating that the ball has won the specific general winning opening 163, and the specific out slot 166 Shows a specific out entry command to indicate that a ball has entered.

  In this control example, whether or not there is a winning of a ball (entering a ball) in any of a winning entrance that gives a prize ball based on the fact that the ball has entered and a entrance (out) that does not give a prize ball. The main controller 110 is configured to execute the determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a means for determining that a ball has entered the specific out port 166 is provided on the sound lamp controller 113 side. Also good.

  That is, in the case of a winning opening that must be awarded when a ball wins (wins), the main controller 110 wins the ball in order to execute processing for giving the prize ball. Since it has the structure to discriminate | determine, the structure can be diverted. On the other hand, when the ball enters the specific out port 166, there is no particular process that the main control device 110 has to execute. Therefore, the configuration for determining that the ball has entered the specific out port 166 is an audio lamp control device. It may be provided on the 113 side. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the control processing load of the main controller 110.

  If it is determined in the process of S2811 that a prize-related command has been received (S2811: Yes), a pseudo-attacker effect process is executed (S2812), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2811, when it is determined that a winning-related command has not been received (S2811: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the contents of the pseudo attacker production process (S2812) will be described. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pseudo-attacker effect process (S2812). In this pseudo-attacker effect process (S2812), a process for setting various effects executed during the pseudo jackpot effect that opens the pseudo-attacker 165 is performed.

  When the pseudo-attacker effect process (S2812) is executed, first, it is confirmed that the command received this time is a specific winning command, that is, a ball has entered the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 208) of the variable winning device 65. It is determined whether or not a command indicating is received (S2901). If it is determined that the specific winning command has been received (S2901: Yes), a pseudo winning effect is set after 0.5 seconds (S2902).

  When a pseudo winning effect is set in this process, a winning sound is output from the audio output device 226 based on the setting information, and a ball to the specific winning opening 65a is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of prize balls awarded based on winning is displayed. In addition, the variable prize device 65 is caused to execute an effect for indicating that the ball has won the various effect devices provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  When the processing of S2902 is completed, the timing at which the pseudo winning effect set this time is executed is stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s (S2903). Here, the processing of S2903 will be described in detail. In the pseudo winning order storage area 223s, the timing at which the pseudo winning effect is executed, that is, the timing at which the ball wins (arrives) at the pseudo attacker 165 is arranged in time series. This is a storage area for storing. The pseudo winning order storage area 223s is provided with an area capable of storing 20 pieces of timing information in correspondence with the order in which the pseudo winning effects are executed, and the timing at which the pseudo winning effects are executed is set. Every time, timing information is stored in each area in the order of execution of the pseudo winning effect (pseudo winning order).

  In this control example, since the distance from each prize opening (ball entry opening) provided to the special prize winning device 550 to the pseudo attacker 165 (the distance of the ball flow down) is different, each prize opening ( There is a case where the order in which the balls win the winning entrance and the order in which the balls reach the pseudo attacker 165 (win), for example, 0.2 seconds from the time when the ball wins the specific general winning opening 163 When a ball wins in the specific winning port 65a later, the winning ball of the specific winning port 65a that has been won later reaches the pseudo attacker 165 first.

  Therefore, the pseudo winning order storage area 223s stores the information stored in each area so that the timing information set later can be stored so as to interrupt the order of the plurality of timing information already stored. It is configured to be easily shiftable. Further, the upper limit number (30) of timing information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is configured to be larger than the winning number (10) which is a closing condition of the round game executed during the big hit game. The timing information (ordinary timing information) stored in the number of winnings (10) that is the closing condition of the round game and the timing stored outside the number of winnings (10) that are the closing condition of the round game Information (over timing information) is identified.

  Thereby, in addition to the timing information set corresponding to the ball won in the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the ball won (entered) in the specific general winning port 163 and the specific out port 166. Correspondingly set timing information can also be reliably stored.

  When the processing of S2903 is finished, next, based on the information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s, the timing information stored in the areas after the winning order for winning in the pseudo attacker 165, that is, over An over pseudo-winning effect is set for the timing information (S2904), and this process ends.

  As the over pseudo-winning effect set in the processing of S2904, for example, the sound mode of the winning sound output from the audio output device 226 is changed, or the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is over-winned. An effect that displays a display mode indicating that the game has been performed, or an effect for indicating that the various winning devices provided in the pachinko machine 10 have been over won.

  If it is determined in the process of S2901 that the command received this time is not a specific winning command (S2901: No), it is then determined whether the received command is a specified general winning command (S2905). If it is determined that the command is received (S2905: Yes), a pseudo winning effect is set after 1.5 seconds (S2906), the processes of S2903 and S2904 described above are executed, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2905 that the received command is not a specific general winning command (S2905: No), it is then determined whether the received command is a specific out-entry command (S2907). If it is determined that the command is an out-ball entering command (S2907: Yes), a pseudo winning effect is set after one second (S2908), the processing of S2903 and S2904 described above is executed, and this processing ends. In the process of S2907, when it is determined that the specific out-ball entering command has not been received (S2907: No), this process is ended as it is.

  In this control example, when a ball is won at the specific winning opening 65a and when a ball is won at the specific general winning opening 163, a winning ball is provided. When a ball is won at 166, no prize ball is awarded. Therefore, in the pseudo winning effect (S2902, S2906 in FIG. 265) set based on the winning of the ball in the specific winning opening 65a and the specific general winning opening 163, the acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of winning balls is In the pseudo winning effect (S2908 in FIG. 265) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and set based on the ball entering the specific out port 166, the acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of winning balls is the first. The 3 symbol display device 81 is configured not to be displayed.

  With this configuration, the display mode of the acquired information 831 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165, and the number of winning balls actually paid out to the player It is possible to prevent a large error from occurring. In addition, since many balls win the pseudo attacker 165 during the pseudo jackpot effect, the game can be executed without executing the process of updating the display mode of the acquired information 831 for each ball winning the pseudo attacker 165. The display mode of the acquired information 831 can be updated without giving the person a sense of incongruity.

  Further, in this control example, when the display mode of the acquisition information 831 is updated, the minimum unit (for example, a numerical value is used) until the value displayed in the acquisition information 831 reaches a value corresponding to the set display mode. “1”) is updated every time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which sphere winnings the display mode of the acquired information 831 is executed on, so it is possible to provide a player with a less uncomfortable effect. .

  As described above, in this control example, as a pseudo jackpot effect, the display mode of the acquisition information 831 is updated based on the winning of a ball at a winning opening where a winning ball is generated. For example, the storage means for storing the number of winning balls acquired during the jackpot game, and the acquired information displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of winning balls stored in the storing means. Update means for executing the update process of 831; discrimination means for discriminating the number of prize balls (the number of unreported prize balls) for which the process by the update means has not been executed among the number of prize balls stored in the storage means; When the number of unreported prize balls is a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) or more, the update process may be periodically executed by the update means.

  Further, the pseudo-attacker 165 is provided with detection means for detecting that a ball has won, and when the detection means detects the ball, the update means is executed based on the number of prize balls stored in the storage means described above. Alternatively, the update process may be executed on the basis of detecting that a winning ball has been received in each winning port of the special winning device 550.

  Next, the content of the stop process (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the content of the stop process (S2213). In this stop process (S2213), a process for setting the display mode of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the timing of stopping the special symbol fluctuation is executed.

  When this stop process (S2213) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol fluctuation (special figure fluctuation being executed) corresponding to the current stop command is a fluctuation per special figure (big hit fluctuation, small hit fluctuation). If it is determined that there is no fluctuation per special figure (S2951: No), it is then determined whether the normal drawing effect flag 223v is set to ON (S2952), and the normal drawing effect flag If it is determined that 223v is set to ON (S2952: Yes), it is then determined whether the continuation flag 223x is set to ON (S2953).

  That is, in the above-described processing of S2951 to S2953, processing for determining whether or not the normal drawing effect is executed across the current special figure stop timing is executed. In the process of S2953, when it is determined that the continuation flag 223x is set to ON (S2953: Yes), that is, when the ordinary drawing effect is continuously executed even after the special figure fluctuation is stopped, the reduced third design Is set (S2954), the corresponding 3rd symbol stop display is set (S2955), and the process proceeds to S2957.

  In this way, it is difficult for the player to know the timing for stopping the special symbol variation by configuring the reduced third symbol to be displayed when the ordinary diagram effect is continuously executed even after the special symbol variation stop. Therefore, the charge effect (see FIG. 212) being executed for the player is executed based on a special symbol lottery or based on a normal symbol lottery. It can be made difficult for the player to determine whether or not it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2951 that there is a fluctuation per special figure (S2951: Yes), or the normal drawing effect flag 223v is not set to ON (set to OFF) in the process of S2952. ) (S2952: No), since the charge effect was not executed during the special symbol change being executed, the process proceeds to S2955 without setting the reduced third symbol.

  Further, when it is determined in the process of S2953 that the continuation flag 223x is not set to ON (S2953: No), that is, when the normal drawing effect is completed during the current special symbol change, the normal third symbol is displayed. Since the stop display only needs to be performed, the normal drawing effect flag 223v is set to OFF (S2956), and the process proceeds to S2955.

  In the process of S2957, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol variation is a variation that is a target of a holding effect (see FIG. 210 (a)) or a treasure box effect (see FIG. 210 (b)). Here, the determination is performed based on the information stored in the hold effect information storage area 223m. If it is determined that the target fluctuation is detected (S2957: Yes), the hold effect flag 223q and the treasure box effect flag 223r are set to OFF (S2958), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2957 that there is no target variation (S2957: No), the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the variable display setting process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S2115). This variable display setting process (S2115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process (S2115: FIG. 267), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3001). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, is off) (S3001: No), the variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so that the processing of S3006 Transition to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S3001: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S3002), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command for display is Obtained from the RAM 223 (S3003).

  Next, a variation effect setting process is executed (S3004), a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S3005). The contents of the variable effect setting process executed in the process of S3004 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3006.

  In the process of S3006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3006). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3006: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3007), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is Obtained from the RAM 223 (S3008). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3010.

  In the processing of S3010, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3010). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of Z2509 is executed, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the contents of the variable effect setting process (S3004), which is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation effect setting process (S3004). In this variation effect setting process (S3004), a process for setting a detailed effect mode (notice content) of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

  When the variation effect setting process (S3004) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probable variation state (S3101). Here, based on the information set in the state setting area 223g, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state. If it is determined in the processing of S3101 that the current state is the probability variation state (S3101: Yes), the display pattern command during probability variation is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S3102), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3101 that the current state is not in a probable state (S3101: No), it is then determined whether the normal drawing effect flag 223v is set on (S3103), and is set on. In other words, the ordinary drawing effect (charge effect based on the result of the normal symbol lottery) is executed with the variation effect corresponding to the previous special symbol variation, and the ordinary symbol effect spans this special symbol variation. When the process is executed (S3103: Yes), the charge effect setting process is executed (S3104), and this process is terminated.

  The detailed contents of the charge effect setting process (S3104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 270, but based on the remaining period of the normal drawing effect and the change time (variation pattern) of this special symbol change, An effect mode of a charge effect that is continuously executed and a change effect after the end of the charge effect is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3103 that the normal drawing effect flag 223v is not set to ON (S3103: No), it is determined whether or not the currently obtained variation pattern has an operation effect (S3105). If it is determined that there is an effect (S3105: Yes), an operation effect setting process is executed (S3106), and this process ends. Details of the operation effect setting process (S3106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S3105, if it is determined that the operation pattern is not included in the variation pattern acquired this time (S3105: No), then a charge effect (a charge effect executed based on a special symbol lottery) is included. If it is determined that a charge effect is included (S3107: Yes), the charge effect flag 223y is set to ON (S3108), and the process is terminated. Here, by setting the charging effect flag 223y to ON, it is possible to determine that it is the timing at which the normal drawing effect can be executed.

  In the process of S3107, when it is determined that the charge pattern is not included in the variation pattern acquired this time (S3107: No), the hold mode selection process is executed (S3109), and the treasure box mode selection process is executed ( S3110), the process is terminated. In the hold mode selection process (S3109), the same process as the hold mode selection process (S2405) described above is executed, and in the treasure box mode selection process (S3110), the same process as the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) described above. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in this control example, the look-ahead effect (holding) is performed at the timing of receiving the special symbol winning command and the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, that is, the timing at which the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the special symbol is varied. Production, treasure chest production).

  Next, the contents of the operation effect setting process (S3106) executed in the variation effect setting process (see S3004 in FIG. 268) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (S3106). In this operation effect setting process (S3106), a preparation process corresponding to the operation effect type included in the current variation pattern is executed.

  When the operation effect setting process (S3106) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current operation effect is the first operation effect (see FIG. 214) (S3201), and when it is determined that the operation effect is the first operation effect (S3201). S3201: Yes) sets an operation command corresponding to the first operation effect (S3202), stores the first operation effect type in the operation effect type storage area (S3203), and sets the operation effect flag to ON (S3204). ), This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that it is not the first operation effect (S3201: No), it is determined whether it is the second operation effect (S3205), and when it is determined that it is the second operation effect ( (S3205: Yes), an effect command corresponding to the second operation effect is set (S3206), the second operation effect means is stored in the operation effect type storage area (S3207), and the process proceeds to S3204. If it is determined in step S3205 that it is not the second operation effect (S3205: No), an effect command corresponding to the other operation effect is set (S3208), and the above-described process of S3204 is executed. Exit.

  In this control example, the first operation effect is configured to be set more frequently than the second operation effect. And it is comprised so that it may discriminate | determine in order with the high frequency set. With this configuration, the processing speed can be increased.

  Next, the contents of the charge effect setting process (S3104) executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 268) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the contents of the charge effect setting process (S3104). When the charge effect setting process (S3104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol is a win (big hit, small win) (S3221), and if it is determined that it is a win (S3221). : No), the ordinary drawing effect possible flag 223t is set to OFF (S3222), and this process is terminated.

  By configuring in this way, a special symbol lottery where the charge effect (ordinary symbol effect) indicating that the normal symbol lottery result is a win (per normal symbol) may be more advantageous to the player than per regular symbol. The priority is set lower than the variation effect for indicating the result. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that the player is most interested in (for example, an effect for indicating that the jackpot is won) from being obstructed by other effects.

  If it is determined in the process of S3221 that the lottery result is not a win (is out of place) (S3221: No), the special figure fluctuation time extracted from the current special figure fluctuation pattern, and the remaining period of the current figure fluctuation Is determined (S3223), and based on the determination result of S3223, it is determined whether the normal map change time is longer (S3224). If it is determined in the process of S3224 that the normal map change time is shorter, that is, the normal map change that is the target of the normal map effect during this special map change period ends (S3224: No), then, It is determined whether the difference is 3 seconds or more (S3225), and if it is determined that there is 3 seconds or more (S3225: Yes), the charge symbol (specific symbol) Z4 is temporarily stopped in accordance with the usual symbol variation end timing. A pattern (variation effect) is determined (S3226).

  Then, the variation pattern using the remaining period after the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped is determined (S3227), the normal drawing effect flag 223v is set to ON (S3228), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3225, when it is determined that there is no difference between the stop timing of the normal symbol and the stop timing of the special symbol for 3 seconds or more (S3225: No), from the normal symbol change end timing to the special symbol change end timing A variation pattern for temporarily stopping the charge symbol (specific symbol) Z4 is determined, and the process proceeds to S3228.

  That is, in this control example, when setting a variation effect corresponding to a new special symbol variation, it is determined whether an effect (ordinary diagram effect) for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol variation being executed is being executed. When the ordinary drawing effect is continuously executed, a variation effect corresponding to the ordinary drawing effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to easily set a variation effect (ordinary effect) corresponding to a general symbol variation executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.

  Moreover, the display mode (charge symbol) of the identification information for indicating the lottery result of the usual drawing and the identification information (charge symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol are the same (including some errors). In addition, since it is configured to execute the normal drawing effect using a part of the special symbol variation effect (for example, the charge effect), the charge effect effect result (charge It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the symbol display) displays the lottery result of the special symbol or the lottery result of the normal symbol.

  Furthermore, in this control example, if the time from the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol to the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the special symbol lottery of this time will be performed after the end of the regular drawing production. It is configured to execute a special drawing variation effect for indicating the result. Thereby, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the lottery result.

  On the other hand, in this control example, if the time from the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol to the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), However, it is configured so that the symbol indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed for a long time stop (temporary stop display) without executing the special symbol variation effect. Yes. Returning to the process of FIG. In the process of S3224, when it is determined that the normal time change time is shorter, a change pattern for continuing the charge effect is determined, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and the execution of the notice effect or the like is set based on the pressing operation.

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process (S2107: see FIG. 271), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S3301), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S3301: No). Then, this process is finished as it is. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the current operation is in an effective period (S3302). In the process of S3302, when the type of operation effect is set in the operation effect setting process (S3106 in FIG. 269), the operation effective period corresponding to the type is set in the operation effective timer 223n, and the operation effective timer 223n. It is determined whether or not the value indicates the operation valid period.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3302 that the operation is valid (S3302: Yes), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3303), and the pressed flag 223k is set to ON. If it is determined that it is not performed (S3303: No), it is determined whether the operation effect flag 223h is on (S3304), and if it is determined that the operation effect flag 223h is set to on (S3304). : Yes), the pressed flag 223k is set to ON, and this processing is terminated.

  That is, in this control example, when the first operation effect and the second operation effect are set among the operation effects, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the operation valid period, and is already pressed. The flag 223k is set to ON, and an effect mode corresponding to the progress of the first operation effect and the second operation effect is set according to the setting state of the pressed flag 223k. As a result, an effect based on the operation can be executed immediately after the frame button 22 is operated, or an effect based on the operation can be executed after the frame button 22 has been operated. Can be increased.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3304 that the operation effect flag 223h is not set to ON (S3304: No), an operation mode corresponding to the set operation valid period is determined (S3306), and determined. A display command corresponding to the operated mode is set (S3307), and the process is terminated. Further, when it is determined in the process of S3302 that the operation is not valid (S3302: No), or when it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is ON in the process of S3303 (S3303: Yes), This process is finished as it is.

  In this control example, an example is shown in which the variable condition for changing the effect mode of the operation effect is established based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 once. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The variable condition may be satisfied when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) within the operation effective period, or an operation unit having a plurality of operation methods is provided, You may comprise so that a variable condition may be satisfied, when an operation means is operated by the specific operation method.

  Further, in this control example, the fact that the operating means has been operated is indicated by setting one flag (pressed flag 223k) to ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure so as to show different operation results, and to change the production mode of the operation effect according to the type of the operation result.

  Further, in this control example, a display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is described as an example of an operation effect whose effect mode is changed based on operation of the operating means. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect of moving the decorative movable device provided in the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) may be executed.

  In this control example, when an operation effect other than the first operation effect or the second operation effect is being executed, operating the frame button 22 determines the operation mode corresponding to the set operation effective period. (See S3306 in FIG. 271), but other configurations may be used.

  Specifically, an operation effective period during which the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) can be effectively determined is set within the production period of the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the set operation In order to determine the valid period, the value of the operation valid timer 223n is set. Then, storage means for storing the length of the set operation effective period and calculation means for calculating the remaining period of the operation effective period based on the value of the operation effective timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated are provided. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide an operation mode selection table in which different operation modes are defined according to the length of the remaining period calculated by the calculation unit.

  By configuring in this way, different operation modes are selected according to the timing at which the player operates the operation means (according to the remaining time at the time when the operation means is operated). Can be provided.

  In addition, one operation effective period is determined from a plurality of operation effective periods, and an operation effective period setting unit that can be set within the display effect production period, and an operation effective timer 223n at the time when the operation unit is operated. Based on this value, a calculation means for calculating the progress rate (%) of the operation effective period may be provided. With this configuration, different operation effective periods can be set for display effects in the same display mode, and further, based on the length of the set operation effective period and the timing at which the operation means is operated. According to the value (%) of the calculated operation effective period, that is, the length of the entire operation effective period is 100, and the ratio of the period that has already elapsed (or the period that has not yet elapsed) is calculated as a percentage. The operation mode to be executed can be varied.

  Thereby, even if the operation means is operated at the same timing based on the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, different operation modes can be set, so that a variety of effects are provided to the player. be able to.

  Furthermore, instead of setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation effective period, the operation mode is set by setting the operation mode according to the percentage value calculated by the calculation means. The range defined in the data table for selection can be limited to “1-100”. That is, when the operation mode is set according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation effective period, for example, in the case where 2 to 15 seconds can be set as the length of the operation effective period, 6 seconds When the operation means is operated in the third second when the time is set (remaining time 3 seconds) and when the operation means is operated in the seventh time when the 14 seconds is set (remaining time 7 seconds) Since the remaining time is different, different operation modes are set.

  In the above-described examples, the operation means is operated at the midpoint of the operation valid period and the operation difficulty is the same, so that the operation is performed when setting the same operation mode. It is necessary to specify the data table so that the operation mode is selected based not only on the remaining time of the effective period but also on the length of the set operation effective period and the remaining time of the effective operation period at the time when the operation means is operated. There is.

  In this case, if the length of the operation effective period is set to be variable to a plurality of lengths, the capacity of the above-described data table is greatly increased, and a situation occurs in which the data capacity is compressed. . On the other hand, since the operation value is selected using the percentage value as described above, the same value can be used regardless of the length of the operation effective period. Therefore, the data capacity of the data table can be reduced.

  In addition, as a classification means for dividing the percentage value calculated by the calculation means into a plurality of ranges, for example, a first classification means for dividing into “1% to 50%” and “51% to 99%”; “1% -10%”, “11% -20%”, “21% -30%”, “41% -50%”, “51% -60%”, “61% -70%”, “71” % To 80% "," 81% to 90% "and" 91% to 99% "are provided, and further based on whether or not a predetermined condition such as a lottery result of special symbols is established. And determining means to determine which classification means to use, classifying the percentage value calculated by the calculation means by the classification means determined by the determination means, and selecting the operation mode based on the classified information You may comprise so that it may do.

  In addition, in the case of using a configuration in which an operation mode to be executed thereafter is changed according to the operation timing of the operation means, for example, a pachinko machine is used as an operation effect executed by operating the operation means. It is preferable to use the effect of moving the effect movable accessory provided at 10. Thus, the operation effect can be executed without worrying about the period of the operation effect executed based on the set operation mode and the display effect period displayed on the display means.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 272, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) will be described. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110), the third symbol display device 81 updates the effect mode of the executing special figure variation effect based on a predetermined variation pattern, and the effect mode of the special diagram variation effect. Processing for replacing the effect based on the normal symbol lottery (ordinary effect) is executed.

  When the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) is executed, it is first determined whether the charge effect flag 223y is set to on (S3401). If it is determined that the charge effect flag 223y is set to on (S3401: Yes). ), It is determined whether or not the special figure variation currently being executed is a hit variation (S3402). If it is determined in the processing of S3402 that there is no hit fluctuation (S3402: No), it is then determined whether the normal drawing effect flag 223t is set on (S3403), and is set on. If it is determined (S3403: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present time is within the effect replacement possible period (S3404).

  In this control example, the period during which the special symbol variation is changing at high speed (the period in which none of the third symbols Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed), and only the third symbol Z1 that is stopped and displayed first are stopped and displayed. Only during the set period, the effect mode of the changing effect set based on the lottery result of the special symbol can be replaced with the effect mode based on the result of the normal symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, after the special symbol variation effect has progressed and the player has been able to predict the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the reach state), the variation effect effect mode has been replaced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the performance that is difficult for the player to understand.

  In the process of S3404, when it is determined that it is within the period where the effect can be replaced (S3404: Yes), the ordinary drawing effect flag 223t is set to off (S3405), and the ordinary drawing effect flag 223v is set to on. (S3406), a replacement display command is set (S3407), other liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S3408), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3401 that the charge effect flag 223y is not set to ON (S3401: No), if it is determined that the winning variation is being performed in S3402 (S3402: Yes), S3403 If it is determined in the process of step S3404 that the ordinary drawing effect flag 223t is not set to ON (S3403: No), and if it is determined that the effect is not within the effect replacement period (S3404: No). Since the ordinary drawing effect cannot be executed, the process proceeds to S3408.

  Next, the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111). In this operation effect management process (S2111), a process for setting the effect mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 is executed during the period in which the operation effect is being executed.

  When the operation effect management process (S2111) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the operation effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3501). If it is determined that the operation effect flag 223h is not set to ON, that is, it is determined that the operation effect is not currently being performed (S3501: No), this processing is ended as it is. If it is determined that the operation effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3501: Yes), the first operation effect is executed based on the information stored in the operation effect type storage area 223i. (S3502), if it is determined that the first operation effect is being performed (S3502), it is then determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3503).

  When it is determined in the process of S3503 that the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3503: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3504), the pressed flag 223k is set to off (S3505), The process related to the first operation effect is ended, and the process proceeds to S3509. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON (S3503: No), next, a display mode indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period set for each operation effect Is coincident with each other (in this control example, it is determined whether the remaining period of the operation presence transition period is 1 second) (S3506).

  Here, when it is determined that it is the coincidence timing (S3506: Yes), a fusion effect display mode for changing the button display which is not operated at the present time to the fusion button display is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3506 that the coincidence timing is not reached, the processing proceeds to S3509 as it is. Thereby, in a state where the first operation effect is being executed, if a predetermined condition is satisfied without operating the frame button 22 for the plurality of operation effects, a fusion operation effect that combines the plurality of operation effects is executed. Will be. Thereby, an unexpected production can be provided to the player, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Next, in the processing of S3509, it is determined whether or not the second operation effect (see FIG. 216). If it is determined that the second operation effect is being performed (S3509: Yes), it is determined whether the current operation is in the first operation period (button operation immediate response period) (S3510). As described above with reference to FIG. 216, in the second operation effect of this control example, an operation effective period of 10 seconds is set, and the first 8 seconds of the effect result immediately corresponds to the operation of the frame button 22. Is set as a period during which the button is displayed (period immediately corresponding to the button operation), and the remaining two seconds periodically determine whether the frame button 22 has been operated (0.5 second interval, 1 second interval). It is set as a period during which the effect result is displayed based on the determination result (period for button operation regular correspondence).

  In the process of S3510, when it is determined that the first operation period is being performed (S3510: Yes), it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is on (S3511), and the pressed flag 223k is not set to on. If it is determined (S3511: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3511 that the pressed flag 223k is set on (S3511: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3512), and the pressed flag 223k is set off (S3513). ), This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3510, when it is determined that the current time is not during the first operation period (S3510: No), it is next determined whether it is the first operation period elapsed timing (S3514). Here, when it is determined that it is the timing at which the first operation period has elapsed (S3516: Yes), an automatic pressing effect mode is set (S3515), and then it is determined whether the current operation is in the second operation period. (S3516). If it is determined in S3516 that the second operation period is in progress (S3516: Yes), it is determined whether the current timing is to determine the operation status of the frame button 22 (whether a predetermined period has elapsed) (S3517). When it is determined that it is not the timing to determine (S3517: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S3517 that the predetermined period has elapsed (S3517: Yes), it is then determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3518), and the pressed flag 223k is set to on. If it is determined that it has been set (S3518: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3519), the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3520), and the process proceeds to S3522. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3518 that the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON (S3518: No), an automatic press effect is set (S3521), and the process proceeds to S3522. In the process of S3522, display effect commands corresponding to the set effects are set, and the process ends.

<Regarding Control Processing in Display Control Device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 274 to 287, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 274). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process is finished.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 275, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S6101. In addition, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 274. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 285 (a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S7602 in FIG. 285 (a)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)), the simple command determination process is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. (See S6308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 276 (b)).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) at the first start port 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image at power-on (not shown) can be displayed immediately during the variation rendering period to perform a simple variation rendering. it can. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276 (a). FIG. 276 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276 (b). FIG. 276 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 237) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 276 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S6301: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 283 to 284.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp control device 113, a continuous notice is given to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction for transferring the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 237 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command; The stop type counter is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process of S6304 is executed. Migrate to

  Next, with reference to FIG. 277 to FIG. 282, details of the above-described command determination process (S6302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. First, FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process (FIGS. 277 and S6302), as shown in FIG. 277, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). (S6401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 278 (a), details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described. FIG. 278 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S6501 is turned on, and other variations A data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S6503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S6503, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S6504, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 277. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 278 (b). FIG. 278 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S6601). The stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed. The final setting is made (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S6603). Thereafter, the processing returns to S6401 in FIG.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the task process (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description is continued. If it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the process of S6406 (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If it is determined that the display notice display command for display is received (S6408: Yes), the notice effect display process is executed (S6409). The details of the notice effect display processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (a), but the expectation degree to the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special symbol variation display. Or setting of a notice display mode for notifying the player of notice of a big hit or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 279 (a), the notice effect display process (S6409) will be described. FIG. 279 (a) is a flowchart showing the notice effect display processing (S6409).

  In the notice effect display process (FIG. 279 (a), S6409), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display notice display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6701). A transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the advance notice to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the advance notice display indicated by the received display advance notice display command is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S6702).

  Next, the data table determination flag is set to ON (S6703), and time data representing the variation time is counted based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter 233h is set (S6704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6705).

  In this way, the advance notice display is set based on the display advance notice display command output from the sound lamp control device 113 and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and even if it is the same variation pattern, it can be shown to the player as if it is a different display mode.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the notice display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the selection of the notice display is executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table for notice is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set may be overwritten by setting the notice display. Good.

  Returning to FIG. In the process of S6408, when it is determined that there is no display preview display command (S6408: No), it is determined whether there is a display change replacement command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). When it is determined that there is a display variation replacement command (S6410: Yes), a variation replacement display process is executed (S6411). The details of the change replacement display process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (b).

  Here, the change replacement display process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (b). FIG. 279 (b) is a flowchart showing the change replacement display process (S6411).

  In the change replacement display process (FIG. 279 (b), S6411), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display change replacement command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6801). The transfer data table is determined by determining the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the change display for display at the display timing based on the display timing of the change display indicated by the received display change display command. It is set in the buffer 233e (S6802).

  Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6803), and time data representing the variation time is counted based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter 233h is set (S6804), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6805).

  Thus, based on the display variation replacement command output from the sound lamp control device 113, the variation replacement display is set and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and even if it is the same variation pattern, it can be shown to the player as if it is a different display mode.

  In this embodiment, the content and display timing of the variable replacement display are selected by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection of the variable replacement display is executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. You may comprise.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table for variable replacement is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the variable replacement display is overwritten by setting the display data table already set. It may be configured.

  Returning to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6410 that there is no display change replacement command (S6410: No), it is determined whether there is a display operation effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). When it is determined that there is a display operation effect command (S6412: Yes), an operation effect display process is executed (S6413). This operation effect display process (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 280 (a).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 280 (a), the operation effect display process (S6413) will be described. FIG. 280 (a) is a flowchart showing the operation effect display process (S6413).

  In the operation effect display process (FIG. 280 (a), S6413), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display operation effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6901). A transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the operation effect for display at the display timing based on the display timing of the operation effect display indicated by the received display operation effect command is determined and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The setting is made (S6902).

  Next, the data table determination flag is set to ON (S6903), and time data representing the variation time is counted based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter 233h is set (S6904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6905).

  As described above, the operation effect display is set based on the display operation effect command output from the sound lamp control device 113 and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and even if it is the same variation pattern, it can be shown to the player as if it is a different display mode.

  In the present embodiment, the contents of the operation effect display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, but not limited thereto, the selection of the operation effect display is executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. You may comprise.

  In this embodiment, the display data table for operation effects is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set is set to overwrite operation display settings. May be.

  Returning to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no display operation effect command (S6412: No), it is determined whether there is a display button fusion command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If it is determined that there is a display button fusion command (S6414: Yes), button fusion display processing is executed (S6415). The button fusion display process (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 280 (b).

  Here, the button fusion display process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 280 (b). FIG. 280 (b) is a flowchart showing the button fusion display process (S6415).

  In the button fusion display process (FIG. 280 (b), S6415), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display button fusion command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7001). A transfer data table corresponding to the set button fusion display data table for display at the display timing based on the display timing of the button fusion display indicated by the received button fusion command for display is determined and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The setting is made (S7002).

  Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S7003), and time data representing the variation time is counted based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter 233h is set (S7004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7005).

  As described above, the button fusion display is set based on the display button fusion command output from the sound lamp control device 113 and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and even if it is the same variation pattern, it can be shown to the player as if it is a different display mode.

  In this embodiment, the button fusion display content and display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, but not limited thereto, the button fusion display is selected by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. You may comprise.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table for button fusion is configured to be set. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the display data table that has already been set is configured to be overwritten by setting button fusion display. May be.

  Returning to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S6414 that there is no display button fusion command (S6414: No), it is determined whether there is a display pseudo-winning command among unprocessed commands (S6416). If it is determined that there is a display pseudo winning command (S6416: Yes), a pseudo winning display process is executed (S6417). The details of the pseudo winning display process (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 281, the pseudo winning display process (S6417) will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing this pseudo winning display process (S6417).

  In the pseudo winning display process (FIG. 281, S6417), first, a display data table corresponding to the received pseudo winning command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7101). A transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for pseudo winning that is set for display at the display timing based on the display timing of the pseudo winning display indicated by the received display pseudo winning command is determined and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Setting is performed (S7102).

  Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S7103), and time data representing the variation time is counted based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter 233h is set (S7104), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7105).

  In this manner, the pseudo winning display is set based on the display pseudo winning command output from the sound lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and even if it is the same variation pattern, it can be shown to the player as if it is a different display mode.

  In this embodiment, the contents of the pseudo winning display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, but not limited thereto, the pseudo winning display is selected by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. You may comprise.

  In this embodiment, the display data table for pseudo winning is set. However, the display data table is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set is set to be overwritten by overwriting. May be.

  Returning to FIG. If it is determined in step S6416 that there is no display pseudo winning command (S6416: No), it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6418). If (S6418: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the error command process (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S7202). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7202, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 277. If it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S6418 (S6418: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the processing returns to S6401.

  In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processes of S6402 to S6420 are executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination End the process.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)), the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 35 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 278 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 278 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 278 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 to 284, the details of the display setting process (S6303) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 283, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7301: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S7302 to S7304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7302), S7303 to S7304. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 284 (a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7401).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 283. After the warning image setting process (S7304) or in the process of S7303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7303: No), the process proceeds to S7305.

  In S7305, pointer update processing is executed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 284 (b). FIG. 284 (b) is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7503: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7505), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S7503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, it returns to FIG. 283 and continues description. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image expanded in the processing of S7306 together with the warning image expanded previously, and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S7308: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S7309).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7309: No), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet, and the confirmed display effect is at the timing for performing the confirmed display, so first the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7310), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 as it is. (S7315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started, the previous stop pattern determination flag set in S7315 is specified and the stop effect of the change effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the confirmation display flag is on instead of off (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7316). If the demo display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S7317), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7318). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  In the process of S7316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S7316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that, in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table that stipulates that the image (FIG. 35) is stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 285 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S7601, that is, if it is off (S7601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 285 (b). FIG. 285 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7701), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S7701: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S7702). In the process of S7702, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S7702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to S7703. Also, as a result of the process of S7701, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to S7703.

  In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S7704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S7703 (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 276 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device A normal image is displayed at 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) (see S7601: No in FIG. 285 (a)).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 286. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the display setting process (S6303) executed previously is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802). If it is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7803, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7804), and the process proceeds to step S7805.

  In the process of S7802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7802: No), the process of S7803 and S7804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7805. In the processing of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7806).

  In the process of S7806, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S7806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to S7807. Also, as a result of the process of S7805, when the transfer instruction of image data is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7805: No), the process proceeds to S7807.

  In the process of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807). If the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S7803 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S7809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S7809, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7809). The determination in the process of S7809 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7809 (S7809: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7809 (S7809: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7810). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7810, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7811), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 287, details of the above drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 237 is generated (S7901). That is, in the process of S7901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, instead, each apparatus 113,114 may be integrated and provided as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. After that, the command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the image data read by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being used). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) In the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231, and the signal is resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from time to time, so that the MPU 231 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 235 and 236 are not used. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, the MPU 231 also transfers transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, when image data is transferred in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is performed. Therefore, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required to be stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be stored. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Note that the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process executed by the MPU 231 or a loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the important process in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 can execute the image data without affecting the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. The transfer process can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate an address set in a common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in a common address system is used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. 237 may be directly connected. Also, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is provided by connecting to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the NAND flash memory 234a uses the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control device 114 is configured as described in the above embodiment, so that an image can be displayed without any problem at a desired display time. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first releases the system reset in the area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR-type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) may be output to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do.

  Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated in the internal bus (bus line 240) designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from the data and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, so that the display main process can be activated in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided directly connected to line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and is read from the character ROM 234 while drawing the image. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. The same content as that of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident. However, all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawing image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are retained without being overwritten when the power is turned on has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the sound lamp controller 113 is not limited thereto. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is continuously held in the resident video RAM 235. It may be left. In addition, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out newly resident image data, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. You may make it transfer during unused (namely, during the period when the image data corresponding to a transfer image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not used (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it do.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transfer image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transfer image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data. You may make it display on the 3 symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. While the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data through the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. Before starting to transfer main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the main display process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is checked, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being stored normally. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. You may comprise. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. Accordingly, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure and the execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If it is, image data can be prevented from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for power recovery can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the RAM determination value is stored in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, and the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power interruption or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can start the game immediately. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  Although the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) in which data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the period (blank period) of scanning the blank area that is the scanning area other than the display area in which the actual image is displayed in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after power-on are performed on the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is not transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, for example, by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. The resident video RAM 235 is transferred while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying an image upon power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image. If the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the back image change command and the frame button operation command are generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the back image change command and the frame button are generated by the display control device 114. Although the case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the super-reaching effect mode are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, based on the back image change command or the gaming state command, it is possible to change the rendering mode of the back image or super reach according to the gaming state. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the super-reach effect according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the rear image after the change or the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area. What is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored? The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to The control device 110 may detect a vibration error and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 283). May be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by executing a warning image setting process (see FIG. 284 (a)). In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that a warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13, it replaced with a vibration sensor or the magnet sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 with a vibration sensor. Also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is indicated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the magnetic lamp control device 113 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field. An error command for reporting an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for informing the magnetic field error by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. May turn on the error occurrence flag and set the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the 3rd symbol display device 81. Can be deterred.

  When the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect are defined by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table uses 1 in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying the image for the frame as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed, and the sprite after the change in the sprite It may define color information for specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one effect, the display data table displays an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with the address expressed as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. The MPU 231 then replaces the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thereby, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table is included in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when an image is drawn according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added in association with identification information (“addition effect 1”, “addition effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the additional displayable effect for each address. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing to draw an image based on the additional drawing content. Many sprites can be drawn depending on the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select a super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. May be. Thereby, the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prescribe the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing contents of the effects to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined to include not only the additional drawing content but also transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for image drawing performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing contents and transfer data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. A display data table is prepared for each element such as “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “notice production”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, and according to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, by making the variation effect into elements as described above and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (one 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information previously developed from the other frame buffer. Is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 should develop the drawn image every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As explained above, a fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. In this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time it ends, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change and display the back image and stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9”, is not necessarily described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the above embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first supplies image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is transferred to the time-varying image area 235b, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power-on after the power is turned on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Thereby, since the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 can be used in an operation check in a player, a hall-related person or a factory at the time of manufacture. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 235b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be rendered (rendering content) at that time and the data to be transferred at that time. Although the case of defining the image data information (transfer data information) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, it is stored whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and also stores image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be memorized. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “Back A” among the plurality of back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the rear image of the super reach that is expected to appear frequently or high appear in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Information on the sprite type required in the table is described. Based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is normally sent from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. In addition, the back image is not limited to scrolling or changing in color as time passes. In addition, instead of such back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time is displayed. It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above embodiment, the information on the various counters (special hit random number counter C1 and special hit type counter C2) acquired when the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 at the start winning prize is used as the number of held balls command. The case of inclusion is not necessarily limited to this, but information on various counters (special hit random number counter C1 and special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of winning a start by another command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113. You may be notified.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one first start port 64a is provided in the game board 13 where a special symbol jackpot lottery starts when a ball enters, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrance is detected independently and the jackpot lottery is started. In this case, when there is a holding at each first entrance, the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 indicates which of the first entrances is holding. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by one. The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased, respectively), Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the winning to the first start port 64a and the passage of the through gate 67 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times. You may set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of held balls for variable display based on a winning at the first starting port 64a is different from the number in the part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or the number of four divided areas by the number of held balls. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 306. In addition to the contents described in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, in the second control example, an effect of giving points to the player is executed, and the determination result of special symbols depending on the points, An example of control in a configuration in which the content owned by the player himself / herself is consumed and selected can be selected. Note that description of the same content as in the first control example is omitted. Further, in the second control example, there is a part described in the control process in which the effects described in the first control example are deleted, but this is omitted for convenience of description, and naturally the first control example. In addition to all the contents described in (4), a configuration in which the contents of the second control example are added may be used. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  With reference to FIGS. 288 to 291, an example of the point acquisition effect and the point consumption effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described. FIG. 288 is an example of a point acquisition effect. In this control example, as a privilege to be given to the player, in addition to the prize ball that is paid out to the player when the game ball enters the jackpot game or the general winning opening, etc., points (numerical privilege) Is provided, and a point effect in which the assigned points are accumulated is executed.

  FIGS. 288 (a) to 288 (b) show a part of the display mode in the point acquisition effect variation pattern in which the execution of the point acquisition effect is set as one type of the variation pattern determined by the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. FIG. This point acquisition effect variation pattern is a variation pattern determined by lottery based on the variation pattern command acquired from the main control device 110 when the result of the determination is correct or incorrect. In the case of winning, it is composed of a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) that is displayed with a symbol (a combination of the same gills with the same third symbol) that informs that it is a winning symbol. Is composed of a variation pattern that is displayed with a symbol (a third symbol is a combination of loose eyes other than a glance) that notifies that it is finally off.

  FIG. 288 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when execution of the point acquisition effect is started in the point acquisition effect variation pattern. This point acquisition effect is set to start in the middle of the execution period (dynamic display period) of the variation pattern regardless of whether it is a hit or miss, and the displayed third symbol is not displayed or The point acquisition effect displayed in a semi-transparent manner is displayed in a state where it is easy to visually recognize, and information values (numerical symbols) indicating a plurality of point values are rotated and displayed together with the tornado display. In the same display area, a hero's character is displayed facing the tornado, and a plurality of (for example, four) swords are displayed above the hero's head. In the example of FIG. 288 (a), four swords (a1 to a4) are displayed. It is notified that it is an effect that the player can acquire the point value by the sword piercing the point value with respect to a large number of point values displayed by rotating together with the tornado. Also, in the lower part of the display area, a message “GET POINTS !!” is displayed as a notification mode that suggests that it is an effect that the player can acquire points. It is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that it is an effect informing that any of the rotating point values is given to the player. In addition, the total value of the point values currently acquired by the player is displayed at the lower left of the display area (upper part of the display area Ds of the pending symbols being executed) (in the example of FIG. 288 (a), The point is 500 points).

  FIG. 288 (b) shows that, in the point acquisition effect, the sword displayed above the hero's head is released toward the point value (the effect of flying), and the effect that each sword has stabbed the point value is executed. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case of.

  In the example of FIG. 288 (b), the sword a1 is stabbed at the point value of 100 points, the sword a2 is stabbed at the point value of 20 points, the sword a3 is stabbed at the point value of 50 points, and the sword a4 is stabbed at the point value of 70 points. The case is shown. The total point value acquired by the four swords is displayed in the lower part of the display area with the characters “240 points GET !!”.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the timing at which points are awarded to the player is mainly during the special symbol fluctuation period, and the special symbol lottery result is displayed (variation display period). Is displayed in accordance with a period in which a notice display indicating a lottery result is executed prior to (a period from the end of the period to the time of confirmation). A point value is selected by selecting the result of lottery of a special symbol that has begun to fluctuate or the result of determining the lottery result of a special symbol that has been stored on hold before the start of fluctuation (pre-reading result) as one of the selection information. The notice effect given to the person is executed.

  When the variation display or the stored determination result of the hold is successful, a higher point value is more easily determined than when the result is a miss. As a result, the notice mode of the high point value is displayed, so that it can be expected that the lottery result of the special symbol that is fluctuating or the special symbol that is stored on hold will be a win. In addition to this, it is possible to play a game with expectation of winning even for a stored ball already stored. That is, the notice display effect that gives the player the point value displayed as the notice display is not only the displayed special symbol of the change, but also the lottery result of the special symbol displayed variably over a plurality of changes. The player can have an expectation corresponding to the notice effect for a longer period of time.

  In addition, even if a point value is given but there is nothing to win the fluctuation or the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold, the given point value is accumulated and given later. Can be used for effects that use point values (effects that use point values to select reach, etc.), and the greater the total value of accumulated point values, the higher the expectation of jackpot The high reach display mode can be selected by the player using the point value.

  As a result, when the reach selection variation pattern that allows the player to select the type of reach display mode using the point value is executed while the total value of the accumulated point values is large, You can have a high expectation for jackpot games. Therefore, the effect to which the point value is given is not only for notifying the player of the change of the special symbol and the lottery result of the special symbol that is stored on hold, but the first winning port 64 is ahead of this. Alternatively, it is also used for notifying a future lottery result in which a game ball enters the second prize opening 640 and a lottery is executed, and the player can have a long-term expectation.

  Although details will be described later, the display data of the point values displayed together with the tornado of the point acquisition effect displayed in FIG. 114, and when the display timing of the point acquisition effect is reached by the voice lamp control device 113, the sword (a1 to Each point value to be stabbed in a4) is determined.

  Specifically, the first basic point value, the second basic point value (low), and the second basic point value (high) are used as basic point values for the change start timing of the point acquisition effect variation pattern (point consumption effect variation pattern). ) Is determined. At the start of change, the point value is determined based on the current accumulated point value, the lottery result of the special symbol that fluctuates (result of determination of success / failure), and the lottery result of the special symbol that is stored on hold (winning information) Is done.

  However, in the configuration of this control example, since the notice effect that gives the point value is executed at a random timing after the change of the special symbol is started, the accumulation is performed at the timing when the point acquisition effect is actually executed. The total value of the point values that have been increased is the result of the pre-reading of the reserved ball that has been increased or newly won (the new reserved ball stored by winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640). There are changes such as winning. It is necessary to determine the current point value and the lottery result state again and determine the point value to be given at the timing when the notice effect that gives this point value is executed.

  Here, in this control example, the point value determined when the point acquisition effect variation pattern is executed includes the first basic point (partial point values to be assigned are distributed to either or both of the two swords). The second basic point which is a point value obtained by subtracting the first basic point from the second basic point (low) which is less than the value obtained by subtracting the first basic point from the point value to be provided By determining the two point values (high), when the accumulated points are increased by more than the reference value (for example, 500 points or more) at the time of execution of the point acquisition effect than when it was determined A display command indicating the first basic point and the second basic point (low) is output to the display control device 114.

  In addition, even when the accumulated point value is higher than the reference value by the time of the determination, when the winning ball is stored, the first basic point and the second basic point (high) are indicated. A display command is output to the display control device 114.

  As described above, since the two patterns of point values are determined in advance at the time of determination, the control load during execution of the point acquisition effect can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 289 to 291, point effects in this control example will be described. First, FIG. 289 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case where execution of the point acquisition effect on the holding ball is started in the point acquisition effect variation pattern. In FIG. 289 (a), the special symbol change is executed, and the total points currently acquired (900 points in the example of FIG. 289 (a)) are displayed in the point display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm. The points that have been earned are reported to the player in an easily understandable manner. In the sub-display area, an executing symbol m0, a first reserved symbol m1, and a second reserved symbol m2 are displayed, and a reserved ball written as 500p is displayed in the second reserved symbol m2. Yes. As described above, in this control example, the result of determining the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold before starting the change (pre-read result), the point value is given to the second change from the change using the hold ball To inform the player. By configuring in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation that a point value can be obtained not only by the result of the change but also by the change of the special symbol stored on hold. Further, the point giving effect using the holding ball may be displayed on the running symbol m0 without being limited to the holding ball stored and held. With this configuration, the player can execute the game while expecting an unexpected point acquisition.

  FIG. 289 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect display mode in which the player can select the reach desired by the next change by consuming the point value acquired so far.

  In the example of FIG. 289 (b), the currently acquired point value is displayed in the point display area Dm3 (1800 points in the example of FIG. 289 (b)), and using this, the player selects the reach of the next variation. can do. In the main display area Dm, reach patterns that can be selected this time are displayed, and a left option 822e, a middle option 822f, and a right option 822g are displayed. In the upper part of the main display area Dm, the text “Please buy a reach!” Is displayed, and the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the next reach can be selected using the current point value. The A cursor ka is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm. As will be described in detail later, when the player presses the frame button 22, the displayed cursor ka moves below the options 822e to 822g, and the player ka selects the option desired by aligning the cursor ka with the desired option. be able to.

  In the options 822e to 822g, reach contents and necessary point values are respectively displayed. In the example of FIG. 289 (b), the left option 822e has “A reach 500 points” and the middle option 822f has “B reach 800 points”. In the right option 822g, “SP reach 10,000 points” is displayed. The player can select a reach based on the display contents of the respective options and the current earned point value displayed in the point display area Dm3. In the example of FIG. 289 (b), since the current point value is 1800 points, the player can select “A reach” and “B reach” of the left option 822e.

  In this way, by configuring the player to select the variation pattern of the next variation according to the current earned point value, the player can have a sense of expectation for the point earning game, and the interest of the game Can be increased. In this control example, the reach that cannot be selected with the current point value is displayed as in the right option 822g. However, only the reach that can be selected with the current point value is displayed. Also good. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game without feeling disappointed that the player cannot select the desired reach.

  FIG. 290 is a diagram showing an example of the content of the effect that when the special symbol pseudo-variation by the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it can be changed again using points.

  In the example of FIG. 290 (a), the result of the special symbol detachment is temporarily stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. 7 is displayed on the left symbol Z1 and 7 is displayed on the right symbol Z3, but 4 is stopped on the middle symbol Z2, and it is temporarily stopped as a display mode of disengagement. Then, in the lower right corner of the main display area Dm, the characters “Change again using 500 points!” Are displayed, and the special symbol can be changed again by using the point value currently acquired by the player. The player is informed that he can.

  FIG. 290 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the special symbol is changed again from FIG. 290 (a) using points. In the main display area Dm, 7 is stopped and displayed on the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3, and the middle symbol Z2 is re-variably displayed.

  Thus, even when pseudo variation is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, by setting the point consumption effect, it is possible to provide the player with a thrilling feeling even after the symbol variation is stopped.

  FIG. 291 is a diagram showing an example of display contents that do not change (fix) a part of the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the acquired point values. In FIG. 291 (a), symbols Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed. In the upper part of the main display area Dm, “2000 points left symbol with 3 variations and 7 symbols HOLD!” Is displayed in characters. In other words, if 2000 points are used, the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the left symbol Z1 is fixed with 7 symbols that are likely to win the jackpot with higher expectation during the three variations from the variation.

  FIG. 291 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display content when the left symbol Z1 is fixed at 7. FIG. In the main display area Dm, a left symbol Z1 in which the symbol is fixed at 7, a middle symbol Z2 and a right symbol Z3 being changed are displayed. In the upper part of the main display area Dm, “Remaining 2 variation HOLD” is displayed, and the remaining number of variations in which the left symbol Z1 is fixed is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  By configuring in this way, the opportunity to execute the point effect increases, and the player can have further expectation for the point effect.

<Electric Configuration in Second Control Example>
An electrical configuration in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296. The second control example is different from the first control example in that a point selection table 222ad, a variable point selection table 222ae, and a consumption point selection table 222af are added to the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, respectively. . Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, description thereof is omitted.

  The point selection table 222ad is a selection table for selecting a point value to be given to the player in advance notice or the like. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 293 and 294, the selection table is configured to be switched between a state where there is a holding ball and a state where there is no holding ball, and a state where there is a holding ball (see FIG. 293). Then, the hold effect (the effect of changing the hold symbol to give the point (point value is displayed in the hold symbol)), the PUSH effect (the point value is displayed and given by pressing the frame button 22) ), Character effect (the effect that the character for the notice is displayed while the special symbol is changing and the character gains points) is determined by the effect counter acquired, and the point value set in the table is set Is done. For example, if the value of the acquired effect counter is 100, 200 pt is determined as the character effect.

  Further, in the state where the special symbol is not variably displayed (determined timing or the like), the hold effect is forcibly selected. For example, if the value of the effect counter is 100, the hold effect of 200 pt is selected.

  Next, when there is no reservation ball, it is selected from the point selection table 222ae shown in FIG. In addition, in the state without a holding ball, it is different by the point comprised so that a holding | maintenance effect may not be selected.

  The variation point selection table 222ae is a selection table for setting a point value set in the point acquisition effect shown in FIG. The variable point selection table is a table for selecting a first basic point (first) and a second basic point (second (low), second (high)). At the start of the change, the first basic point, the second basic point (low), and the second basic point (high) are selected. The first basic point is a point value that is displayed in the production in any state, and the second basic point value is a high point value depending on the point value that the player holds at the actual production execution timing. The second basic point (high) is selected, or the second basic point (low), which is a low point value, is selected. The second basic point (high) is selected when the possession point is not higher than 1000 pt with respect to the selection time, while the second basic point (low) is displayed when it is higher than 1000 pt. It is configured.

  In this way, the processing load at the time of performing the performance can be reduced by selecting so that even if the point value varies at the start of the variation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 288 (a), how many point values are assigned to which swords (a1 to a4) is distributed based on the display position table shown in FIG. 295 (b). It is determined. When the acquired effect counter is 100, the first basic point value is distributed to the sword a4 and the sword a3. This distribution is performed so as to be within the first basic point value selected in a possible combination with respect to the point value displayed in FIG. For example, when the production counter is 100 and the holding point value is 300, 60 points are selected as the first basic point value, 60 points are selected as the second basic point (low), and 120 points are selected as the second basic point (high). Is done. In the display position table, 60 points that are first basic point values are set, for example, 40 points for the sword a4 and 20 points for the sword a3. Here, the display control device individually sets the display data of each sword and each point value shown in FIG. 288 (a) as the display data for each point value, and each sword and each point value data. Are set so as to correspond to each other, the point value selected in the variable point selection table is distributed to each sword, and an effect that the player acquires can be executed.

  With this configuration, even if the same first basic point is selected, the point value corresponding to each sword can be made random, and various effects can be achieved. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute various point acquisition effects with less variation patterns than setting a plurality of point value effects that can be acquired for each variation pattern.

  The winning consumption point selection table 222g is a selection table for determining the consumption points of each reach in the consumption effect shown in FIG. 289 (b) when the winning / non-winning determination result is changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 296 (a), the selection is made based on the current possession point and the value of the acquired effect counter.

  The outlier consumption point selection table 222g is a table for determining a point value to be selected when outlier variation display is executed (see FIG. 296 (b)). Note that the specific configuration is the same as that of the hit consumption point selection table, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 304. The control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example is different from the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above in advance setting processing (S2131), special point selection processing (S2132), The difference is that a consumption reach selection process (S2133) is added and a command determination process 2 (S2134) is executed instead of the command determination process (S2114 in FIG. 258). In addition, about another process, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the main process in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process in the second control example. In the main process in the second control example, after executing the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) for the main process in the first control example (see FIG. 257), the notice setting process (S2031), the special point selection process (S2132), point of addition of consumption reach selection processing (S2133), frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) instead of frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S2130), command determination processing (S2114) The difference is in the command determination process 2 (S2134). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 298, the command determination process 2 (S2134) in the second control example will be described. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S2134) in the second control example. In the command determination process 2 (S2134) in the second control example, when it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the variation pattern reception is performed in response to the command determination process (S2114) in the first control example. The difference is that the process 2 (S2220) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 299, the fluctuation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example will be described. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the contents of variation pattern reception processing 2 (S2220) in the second control example. The variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example determines whether the variation pattern command received this time is a point acquisition effect with respect to the variation pattern reception process (S2202) of the first control example. The difference is that the selection process is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the fluctuation pattern reception process 2 (S2220), first, the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2221), and the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern command received this time and the value of the fluctuation pattern selection counter 223aa ( S2222). Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern determined in the processing of S2222 is a point acquisition effect (S2223). When it is determined that the determined variation pattern is a point acquisition effect (S2223: Yes), a point selection process is executed (S2224), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determined variation pattern is not a point acquisition effect (S2223: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, the point selection process (S2224) which is one process of the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the content of the point selection process (S2224).

  In the point selection process (S2224), first, the value of the point storage area 223ab is acquired (S2321), and it is determined whether or not the variation pattern determined this time is a win (S2322). If it is determined that the variation pattern determined this time is a win (S2322: Yes), it is determined whether or not the received winning information is a win (S2323). When it is determined that the winning information is a win (S2323: Yes), a pointless effect is set (S2324), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2322 that the current variation pattern is not a win (ie, it is out of place) (S2322: No), or if it is determined that the received winning information is not hit ( S2323: No), based on the current point from the variation point selection table 222ae, a basic point is selected and set in the first basic point setting area (S2325). Then, based on the current point value, a point value is selected from the second basic point selection table 222ae2, and the current point value and the selected point value are set in the second basic point setting area (S2326). Exit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 301, the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S2130) in the second control example will be described. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S2130) in the second control example. In the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S2130) in the second control example, when it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received with respect to the command determination process (S2114) in the first control example (S2201: Yes). The point of difference is that operation processing relating to point selection and determination is executed.

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S2130), it is first determined whether or not the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the button operation is valid (S2421). When it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S2421: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2421, when it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S2421: No), the value of the operation valid timer 223n is subtracted (S2422), and then subtracted in the process of S2422. It is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S2423). If it is determined that the value of the subtracted operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S2423: Yes), a display command indicating the reach content corresponding to the cursor position is set (S2424), and the process proceeds to S2425. On the other hand, in the process of S2423, when it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 (S2423: No), the process of S2424 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2425.

  After performing the processing of S2423 or S2425, it is determined whether or not a selection operation has been performed (S2425). If it is determined that the selection operation has been executed (S2425: Yes), information corresponding to the operation is stored in the cursor position storage area 223ac (S2426), and a display command corresponding to the cursor position is set (S2427). This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the selection operation has not been executed in the processing of S2425 (S2425: No), it is determined whether the determination operation has been executed (S2428). When it is determined that the determination operation has been executed (S2428: Yes), the reach command for displaying the reach content determined in the processing of S2428 is set (S2429), and the point corresponding to the determined reach content is subtracted. (S2430), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination operation has been executed in the process of S2428 (S2428: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, the contents of the advance notice setting process (S2131) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the contents of the advance notice setting process (S2131). The advance notice setting process (S2131) is a process in the main process (FIG. 297) in the second control example, and a process of selecting a point value of point effect from the point selection table 222ad when the special symbol is changing Executed.

  In the advance notice setting process (S2131), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (S2511). If it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S2511: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is changing in the processing of S2511 (S2511: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is within the execution period of the notice effect (S2512). When it is determined that it is within the execution period of the notice effect (S2512: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223ad is acquired (S2513), and the point selection table is based on the value of the effect counter 223ad acquired in the process of S2513. A point value is selected from 222ad (S2514), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2512 that the notice is not within the period during which the advance notice can be executed (S2512: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is greater than 0 (S2515). If it is determined that the number of held balls is greater than 0 (S2515: Yes), since it is a period during which a holding effect can be executed, the value of the effect counter 223ad is acquired (S2516), and the effect counter 223ad acquired in the processing of S2516 Based on this value, the point of the hold effect is selected from the point selection table 222ad (S2517), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 in the processing of S2515 (S2515: No), it is determined that the advance notice cannot be set, and this processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, the contents of the special point selection process (S2132) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special point selection process (S2132).

  In the special point selection process (S2132), first, it is determined whether or not the point effect is being changed (S2611). If it is determined that the change is not a change in which the point effect is executed (S2611: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S2611, it is determined whether or not it is the point setting timing (S2612). If it is determined that it is not the point setting timing (S2612: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the point setting timing (S2612: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current point effect is an effect for setting 0 points (S2613). If it is determined that the current point is an effect for setting 0 point (S2613: Yes), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2613 that the current effect is not the effect of setting 0 points (S2613: No), the process proceeds to S2614.

  After executing the processing of S2613, it is next determined whether or not there is any winning information in the winning information storage area 223f (S2614). When it is determined that the winning information storage area 223f is a hit (S2614: Yes), a display command indicating a high point between the first basic point setting area and the second basic point setting area is set (S2615). The process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2614, when it is determined that the winning information storage area 223f is not hit (S2614: No), it is determined whether or not the difference between the currently acquired point and the current point is 1000 points or more (S2616). If it is determined that the difference between the currently acquired point and the current point is 1000 points or more (S2616: Yes), the process of S2615 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2616, when it is determined that the difference between the currently acquired point and the current point is not 1000 points or more (S2616: No), the first basic point setting area and the second basic point setting area A display command indicating the low point is set (S2617), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the contents of the consumption reach selection process (S2133) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing the contents of the consumption reach selection process (S2133).

  In the consumption reach selection process (S2133), first, it is determined whether or not the consumption reach can be executed (S2711). If it is determined that the consumption reach is not executable (S2711: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the consumption reach can be executed (S2711: Yes), it is determined whether it is the reach data selection timing (S2712). If it is determined that it is not the reach data selection timing (S2712: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the reach data selection timing (S2712: Yes), the process proceeds to S2713.

  In the processing of S2713, it is determined whether or not the current variation is a winning variation pattern (S2713). When it is determined that the current fluctuation is a win (S2713: Yes), a consumption point is set based on the current number of points from the winning consumption point selection table 222af (S2714), and the process proceeds to S2717. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2713 that the current variation is not the winning variation pattern (that is, it is out of place), it is determined whether or not the current point is greater than or equal to the set value (S2715). If it is determined that the current point is not equal to or greater than the set value (S2715: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2715 that the current point is equal to or greater than the set value (S2715: Yes), a consumption point is set based on the current number of points from the outlier consumption point selection table 222af (S2716). ), The process proceeds to S2717. In the process of S2717, a display reach selection command corresponding to the selected reach effect in which the selected consumption point is set is set (S2717), and this process ends.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 305 to 306, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. In the processing in the display control device 114 in the second control example, the V interrupt processing is performed in place of the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)) in contrast to the processing in the display control device 114 in the first control example. 2 (refer to FIG. 305), and the command determination process 2 (S6311 in FIG. 306) is executed instead of the command determination process (S6302 in FIG. 277). In addition, about another process, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st control example, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 305, the V interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V interrupt process 2. The V interrupt process 2 in the second control example is different in that the command determination process 2 (S6311) is executed instead of the command determination process (S6302). Since other processes are the same, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 306, the command determination process 2 (S6311) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S6311).

  In the command determination process 2 (S6311) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no current display notice display command (S6408: No), it is determined whether there is a display point command. (S6421). If it is determined that there is a display point command (S6421: Yes), the point command received this time is set in the display point storage area (S6422), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6421 that there is no display point command (S6421: No), it is determined whether there is a display effect point command (S6423). If it is determined that there is a display effect point command (S6423: Yes), a point display process (S6424) is executed, and the process returns to S6401.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6423 that there is no display effect point command (S6423: No), it is determined whether there is a display reach command (S6425). If it is determined that there is a display reach command (S6425: Yes), a reach display data table corresponding to the command received this time is set (S6426), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6425 that there is no display reach command (S6425: No), it is determined whether there is a display reach selection command (S6427). If it is determined that there is a display reach selection command. (S6427: Yes), the corresponding selection reach display data table is set (S6428), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display reach selection command (S6427: No), the process proceeds to S6418.

<Regarding the third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 to 319. In the second control example, control in the above-described lower displacement unit 400 will be described. It should be noted that the first control example and the second control example described above may be combined with the third control example, but for the sake of convenience, the first control example and the second control example are partly omitted from illustration. .

  In the third control example, operation control of the lower displacement unit 400 and control in a configuration in which a game ball is launched from the emission opening 400 will be described. Note that description of the same content as in the first control example is omitted. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Configuration of Lower Displacement Unit 400 in the Third Control Example>
FIG. 307 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the third control example, which is substantially the same as FIG. 66 described above, but a storage sensor SP5 is added. The storage sensor SP5 is configured to detect whether a game ball has entered from the opening 451a and to detect whether a game ball has entered the ball receiving portion 467. Further, since both tip portions of the ball receiving portion 467 are disposed at positions where they can be detected, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 can also be detected.

  As a method of detecting the position of the ball receiving portion, when the movable rack 464 is moved from the origin position toward the exit opening 471, the tip of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by the storage sensor SP5, and then the rear side ball The tip of the receiving part 467 is detected. In this case, after the front storage sensor SP5 is turned on, the slide motor is driven for 10 steps, and then stop control is performed, so that the ball receiving position (position shown in FIG. 307 (b)) is reached. The ball receiver 467 can be moved so as to be positioned.

  Further, after the storage sensor detects the front end of the ball receiving portion 467, if the storage sensor is turned on for 20 steps before the slide motor KM2 is driven, the game ball is held in the ball receiving portion 467 ( It can be determined that the game ball is in the ball receiving portion 467. Further, when the movable rack 464 is moved from the state where the movable rack 464 is moved to the firing position (position shown in FIG. 307 (c)) to the origin position (position shown in FIG. 307 (a)), the rear end is also provided. Although the storage sensor SP5 first detects the (ball receiving portion 467), the method for detecting the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is the same.

  The storage sensor SP5 is configured by a reflective laser output sensor, and the laser light output from the storage sensor SP5 to the front surface is blocked and the laser light reflected by the detection unit of the storage sensor SP5 is detected ( ON state) sensor.

  Therefore, the storage sensor SP5 not only detects that a game ball has entered the opening 451a, but also detects a state in which a game ball enters the ball receiving unit 467, detects the position of the ball receiving unit 467, and is movable. The position of the rack 464 can also be detected.

  In the initial state (at the end of the initial operation after the power is turned on), the movable rack 464 is moved to the origin position shown in FIG. As already described with reference to FIG. 81, at the origin position, the contact plate 464c rotates the bulging portion 543a in the backward direction to restrict the game balls from being distributed to the opening 451a. As the movable rack 464 moves from the origin position to the ball receiving position (see FIG. 307 (b)), the bulging portion 543a rotates forward, and the game balls are distributed to the opening 451a. Here, the time required for the movable rack 363 to move to the ball receiving position is the time required for the game ball that has been distributed in the direction of the opening 451a by the rotation of the sorting member 540 to reach the opening 451a. It is configured to be movable in a time shorter than the time. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball enters before the ball receiving unit 467 moves to the ball receiving position and cannot accept the game ball in the ball receiving unit 467.

  When the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the movable rack 464 is moved to the origin position in the received state, and thereafter, the tilting motor KM1 of the lower displacement unit 400 is driven to move the lower displacement unit 400 to the first position. It is rotationally driven so as to rise to the 1 overhang state (see FIG. 48). As a result, the lower displacement unit is driven up in a state where the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the rotating shaft side of the lower displacement unit 400, so that the driving force required for the increase can be reduced and the motor or the like can be reduced. The load of can be reduced.

  When the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging state, the lower displacement unit 400 is driven upward by the player's operation of the frame button 22. This driving is stopped when the slide motor KM2 is driven for 30 steps. Next, when the frame button 22 is operated, the 30-step slide motor KM2 is driven so as to drive the displacement unit 400 moved downward. At this time, it is determined whether or not it is detected (detected as ON) by the ascending position sensor that detects that the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging position while driving 30 steps. It is configured to be stop-controlled at timing. In the state where the raised position sensor is not turned on even after 30 steps of driving, the slide motor KM2 is driven until the raised position sensor is further turned on. If the raised position sensor does not turn on even after 15 steps of driving, the lower displacement unit 400 is stopped at the position raised by 15 steps. In this way, it is possible to clearly determine that the ascending position sensor does not turn on, and to switch to control with only the number of steps to play a game. In this case, an error may be notified by a lamp, a display, an external terminal, or the like.

  When the big hitting ending is set, the lower displacement unit is moved to the ascending position, and then the movable rack 464 is moved in the direction of the launch position, so that the game ball held in the ball receiving portion 467 is emitted to the exit opening 471. More game balls are fired. The firing timing is the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22, and if the frame button 22 is not operated even after the effective time of the frame button 22 has elapsed, the firing operation is automatically executed. .

  When the power is turned on, an initial operation described later is also executed in the lower variable unit 400. If a small hit or big hit C is executed in a state where the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the small hit or big hit C that has been executed is restored to the state when the power was turned off. 3 The electric combination is opened. In this case, the game ball enters the third electric accessory and the game ball moves to the lower variable unit 400 in a state where the initial operation of the lower variable unit 400 executed by the sound lamp control device 113 is not completed. There is a risk of flowing down.

  In that case, a game ball enters from the opening 451a of the lower variable unit 400 and a game ball enters the ball receiving portion 467, or a game ball enters from the opening 451a. There is a problem that the game ball enters the state (see FIG. 67 (c)). However, in the third control example, a command (a payout command or a winning effect (a payout award) from the main control device 110 based on the game ball of the third electric accessory entering during the period when the initial operation is being executed. In order to execute a command for displaying a value corresponding to the number of balls on the third symbol display device 81), when monitoring) is received, the monitoring of the storage sensor SP5 is started, and after the initial operation ends, an ending command, 2 after receiving any one of the fluctuation pattern command and the customer waiting command (a command output from the main control device 110 when the fluctuation is not executed for a certain period of time, or the fluctuation handle and the firing handle are not operated for a certain period of time). Monitoring whether the storage sensor SP5 is turned on until a second elapses (identifies whether the storage sensor SP5 is turned on at every interval (for example, 4 ms) through which a game ball can pass) That) to run.

  With this configuration, the storage sensor can be used for a period during which the game ball can enter the opening 451a even when the third electric accessory is released at the timing when the initial operation is performed. SP5 can be monitored, and it can be monitored whether or not the game ball has entered the lower variable unit 400. When the storage sensor SP5 is monitored to detect the passing of a game ball, either an ending command (a command output at the end of the jackpot game), a variation pattern command, or a customer waiting command is output 2 In the operation of discharging the game ball from the lower variable unit 400 at the timing when the second has passed, the discharge operation (after the operation of the operation rack 464 moving to the launch position in a state where the rotation of the lower variable unit 400 is at the original position, And the operation of collecting the game ball discharged from the emission opening 471 of the lower variable unit 400 through the collection port 411f (see FIG. 43) is executed.

  Thus, even when the game ball is guided into the lower variable unit 400 during the initial operation, the discharge operation is executed after the game ball does not enter the lower variable unit 400.

  The discharging operation is executed after 2 seconds have elapsed from each command described above. The movable rack 464 moves from the launch position to the origin position, and the sorting member 540 moves the game ball to the lower variable unit 400. Considering the period from when the game ball reaches the opening 451a (the last game ball allocated), the passage of 2 seconds is set.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned command output based on having entered the 3rd electric accessory from main controller 110 during the period when initial operation is performed is received, storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is turned on. Selection of an effect (fluctuation pattern) that tilts the lower variable unit 400 until the discharge operation is completed is prohibited and its execution is prohibited. That is, the production using the lower variable unit 400 is prohibited until the fluctuation when the discharging operation is completed.

  On the other hand, when the command is received but the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not turned on (that is, OFF), either an ending command (a command output at the end of the jackpot game), a variation pattern command, or a waiting for customer command The monitoring of the storage sensor SP5 is executed until the monitoring period until 2 seconds elapses after receiving the signal, and the effect using the lower variable unit 400 for the fluctuations that are started before the execution ends. Configured to prohibit.

  With this configuration, the lower variable unit 400 is configured not to tilt when the game ball is inadvertently inserted into the lower variable unit 400 by the initial operation. It is possible to suppress the trouble that the tilting motor KM1 is excessively loaded and damaged due to the tilting operation in the entered state.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
In the third control example, the initial operation data 222ba, the firing operation data 222bb, the origin operation data 222bc, the discharge operation data 222bd, the first operation data 222be, and the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 are compared with the ROM 222 of the first control example. Second operation data 222bf is added. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, description thereof is omitted.

  The initial operation data 222ba is movable data that is set to execute the initial operation of the lower variable unit 400 that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309, the motor type, the driving direction, and the motor stop condition are set for each operation status. The operation status is set in the initial operation setting process (see S2021, FIG. 312) executed in the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 executed when the power is turned on, and the operation status is changed from the initial value 0. It is started and incremented by one, and the drive corresponding to the operation status is executed. Every time the execution is completed, the operation status is added and necessary initial operations are sequentially executed. Regarding the driving direction set in the initial operation data 222ba, the + direction of the slide motor is a direction that drives the motor from the origin position to the firing position direction to move the movable rack 464, and the plus direction of the tilting motor is This is the direction in which the lower variable unit 400 is rotated from the origin position (the retracted position sensor is on) to the first overhanging direction.

  The launch operation data 222bb is operation data in which the movable rack 464 is driven from the origin position to the launch position and a game ball is launched from the exit opening 471. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310 (a), the slide motor is constituted by data that is driven in the + direction until the launch position sensor is turned on.

  The origin operation data 222bc is origin return movable data for moving the movable rack 464 and the lower variable unit 400 to the origin position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310 (b), after the game ball is fired from the exit opening 471, the origin position sensor is turned on in the negative direction (to drive the origin motor in the direction of the origin position). And the tilting motor is driven until the retracted position sensor is turned on (driven in the direction of retracted position (origin position)).

  Further, when the discharge operation is executed by the operation of the movable rack 464 in a state where the lower variable unit 400 is at the retracted position (origin position), the movable data is not set in the tilt motor.

  The discharge operation data 222bd is operation data for discharging the game ball that has entered the lower variable unit 400, and the same data as the discharge operation data 222bb is set.

  The first operation data is operation data for receiving the game ball in the ball receiving unit 467 in a state where the lower variable unit 400 is in the retracted position, and after moving the movable unit 464 from the original position to the ball receiving position, This is drive data to be moved to the position (see FIG. 311 (a)).

  The second operation data 222bc is that the lower variable unit 400 is moved to the raised position (first extended state) and raised by 30 steps based on the operation of the frame button 22, and then the frame button 22 is operated. And data for executing a turning operation (oscillation operation) for lowering until the ascending sensor is turned on. In addition, the display mode imitating the lower displacement unit 400 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the effect of launching a game ball from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement unit 400, the lower displacement unit 400 is operated. Without changing, the display mode imitating the lower displacement unit can be changed to the first projecting state, and the effect of launching the game ball can be substituted for the display mode and displayed. Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is swung, the lower displacement unit 400 is changed to the first overhanging state, but in the rocking effect, the lower displacement unit 400 is not swung and is in the first overhanging state. The third symbol display device 81 on the back side of the lower displacement unit 400 is swung within a predetermined movable range from the lower displacement unit 400 that is stopped by the lower displacement unit 400. The simulated display mode can be displayed and the display mode and the lower displacement unit 400 can be fused to produce a swing effect. Here, an RTC capable of measuring the date and time is mounted on the sound lamp control device 113, and the swinging effect of the lower displacement unit 400 is not executed after a certain period of time (for example, after one year). By switching to the swing effect combined with the display mode, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement unit 400 from malfunctioning by moving beyond the durability of the lower displacement unit 400. In addition, when a failure that does not operate even when the operation data of the lower displacement unit 400 is set is detected, a display mode imitating the lower displacement unit 400 is variably displayed instead of the effect that the lower displacement unit 400 operates. You may make it do.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 to 319. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example is different from the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above in the initial operation setting process (S2071) and the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140). ), Which is different in that an operation control process (S2112) is added. Specifically, a process for controlling the operation of the lower displacement unit 400 and a process for confirming the initial operation of the lower displacement unit 400 during the startup process are added.

  Next, an initial operation setting process (S2071) which is one process of the start-up process in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 312 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial operation setting process (S2071). The initial operation setting process (S2071) is a process for confirming the operation content of the lower displacement unit 400 during the startup process.

  In the initial operation setting process (S2071), first, it is determined whether or not the saving sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S2031). If it is determined that the saving sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not on (S2031: No), it is determined whether an upper left prize ball command has been received (S2032). If it is determined that the upper left prize ball command has been received (S2032: Yes), the operation prohibition counter 223bk is set to 2 (S2033), the saving sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set to ON (S2034), and the processing of S2038 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2032 that the upper left prize ball command has not been received (S2032), the processing of S2033 to S2034 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2038.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2031, when it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S2031: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S2035). When it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not “ON” (S2035: No), the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to ON (S2036), the saving sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set to OFF (S2037), Transition to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2035 that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S2035: Yes), the processes of S2036 to S2037 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2038.

  In the processing of S2038, it is determined whether or not the ball discharge operation has been completed or the value of the operation status stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0. If it is determined that the ball discharge operation has not been completed (S2038: No), the processing of S2031 to S2037 is repeatedly executed until the operation is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation is completed (S2038: Yes), it is determined whether the operation status is set to 5 (S2039). If it is determined that the operation status is not set to 5 (S2039: No), the operation status is set to +1 (S2040), the corresponding operation data is set (S2041), and the fixed display data table is used. The time data is set in the time counter (S2042), and the process returns to S2031. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2039 that the operation status is 5 (S2039: Yes), the operation status is reset (S2043), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 313, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In the main process in the third control example, after executing the same processes as S2101 to S2111 in the main process (see FIG. 257) in the first control example, an initial discharge operation setting process (S2140) and an operation control process (S2141). And is different in that it is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, an initial discharge operation setting process (S2140) which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 313) in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140).

  In the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140), first, it is determined whether or not the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S3901). If it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not on (S3901: No), since the ball is not stored in the ball receiving unit 455, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S3901: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 223bl is greater than 0 (S3902). When it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S3902: No), it is determined whether the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3903). If it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not on (S3903: No), it is determined whether the storage sensor is on (S3904). If it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S3904: Yes), the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to on (S3905), and the process proceeds to S3906. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3903 that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3903: Yes), or when it is determined that the storage sensor is not on in the process of S3904 (S3904: No). The process of S3905 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3906.

  In the process of S3906, it is determined whether any one of the jackpot ending command, the variation pattern command, or the customer waiting command is received (S3906). When it is determined that any of the jackpot ending command, fluctuation pattern command, or customer waiting command has been received (S3906: Yes), the value of the standby counter corresponding to 2 seconds is set (S3907), and this processing is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the jackpot ending command, variation pattern command, or customer waiting command has been received (S3906: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3902, when it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is greater than 0 (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3908). When it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not on (S3908: No), it is determined whether the storage sensor is on (S3909). If it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S3909: Yes), the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to on (S3910), and the process proceeds to S3911. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3908 that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3908: Yes), or when it is determined that the storage sensor is not on in the process of S3904 (S3909: No). The process of S3910 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3911.

  In the process of S3911, 1 is subtracted from the value of the standby counter 223bl (S3911). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby counter 223bl subtracted in the process of S3911 is 0 (S3912). If it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is 0 (S3912: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3913). If it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3913: Yes), discharge operation data is set (S3914), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) in the process of S3912 (S3912: No), or the ball discharge flag 223bj is not turned on in the process of S3913. If it is determined (S3913: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, the operation control process (S2141), which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 313) in the third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation control process (S2141). In this operation control process (S2141), a process for controlling the operation of the lower displacement unit 400 is executed according to the gaming state.

  In the operation control process (S2141), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit / medium flag 223ac or the big hit / medium flag 223ab is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is a small hit or a big win (S4001). When it is determined that the small hit / medium flag 223ab or the big hit / medium flag 223ab is on, the first operation setting process is executed (S4002), and this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 316, the first operation setting process (S4002), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be described. FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first operation setting process (S4002). In the first action setting process (S4002), a process for controlling the action of the ball receiving unit 445 is executed when the gaming state is a small hit or a big hit.

  In the first operation setting process (S4002), first, it is determined whether or not the operation status is 0 (S4101). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is zero. If it is determined that the operation status is 0 (S4101: Yes), 1 is set to the operation status (S4102), and operation data is set to the ball receiving unit 445 (S4103). The operation status 1 is defined in the first operation data 222be (see FIG. 310A), but when the operation status is set to 1, the slide motor KM is driven and is driven in the plus direction from the origin position. Then, when the first sensor is set to ON, it stops. By driving in this way, it is possible to drive to a position where the ball flowing in from the third winning opening 82 can be received by the ball receiving portion 467.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation status is not 0 in the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not the operation status is 1 (S4104). If it is determined that the operation status is 1 (S4104: Yes), it is determined whether or not the second position sensor is on (S4105). If it is determined that the second position sensor is not on (S4105: No), the ball receiving unit 445 is not driven up to the second position, so the process of S4106 to S4107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4108. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the second position sensor is ON, 2 is set as the operation status (S4106), and operation data is set (S4107). In the operation status 2, standby is set until a ball is stored in the ball receiving unit 467 from the third winning port 82.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4104 that the operation status is not 1, it is determined whether the operation status is 2 (S4108). When it is determined that the operation status is 2 (S4108: Yes), it is determined whether or not the storage sensor is on (S4109). If it is determined that the storage sensor is not on (S4109), since the ball entered from the third winning opening 82 is not stored, the processing of S4110 to S4111 is skipped and the processing of S4112 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4109 that the storage sensor is on (S4109: Yes), the operation status is set to 3 (S4110), the operation data is set (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. To do. In operation status 3, when a ball is stored in the ball receiving portion 467 from the third winning opening 82, the slide motor is driven in the minus direction. When the origin sensor is set to ON, it stops. That is, the ball receiving unit 445 is controlled so as to return once to the origin position when the ball is stored from the third winning opening 82. Then, the balls stored in the discharge operation setting process (S4004) and the firing operation setting process (S4008) described later are discharged.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4108 that the operation status is not 2 (S4108: No), it is determined whether the operation status is 3 (S4112). If it is determined that the operation status is 3 (S4112: Yes), it is determined whether or not the origin sensor is on (S4113). If it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4113: Yes), the operation status is reset (S4114), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4001 that the small hitting / medium flag 223bb or big hitting / medium flag 223ba is not on (S4001: No), it is determined whether or not the small hitting ending flag 223bd is set to on (S4003). . If it is determined that the small hitting ending flag 223bd is on (S4003: Yes), the discharge operation setting process (S4004) is executed, and this process is terminated.

  Here, the discharge operation setting process (S4004), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing the contents of the discharge operation setting process (S4004). In the discharge operation setting process (S4004), a process for controlling the operation of discharging the ball from the ball receiving unit 445 at the timing of the small hitting ending is executed.

  In the discharge operation setting process (S4004), first, it is determined whether or not the origin operation flag 223bh is on. If it is determined that the origin operation flag 223bh is not on (S4201: No), discharge operation data is set (S4202). Then, it is determined whether the launch position sensor is set to ON (S4203). If it is determined that the firing position sensor is off (S4203: Yes), the origin operation data is set (S4204), the origin operation flag 223bh is set on (S4205), and the process proceeds to S4206. On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the origin operation flag 223bh is OFF (S4201: No), the process of S4201 to S4205 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4206.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the origin sensor is on (S4206). If it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4206: Yes), the origin operation flag is set to off (S4207), the small hitting ending flag 223bd is set to off (S4208), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4206, when it is determined that the origin sensor is not on (S4206: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Returning to FIG. In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the small hitting ending flag 223bd is OFF (S4003: No), it is determined whether the big hit round is the eighth round (S4005). When it is determined that the jackpot round is the eighth round (S4005: Yes), the second operation setting process (S4006) is executed, and this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 318, the second operation setting process (S4006), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be described. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second operation setting process (S4006). In the second action setting process (S4006), in the eighth round of the big hit, the lower displacement unit 400 is raised to the firing position, and when the player presses the frame button 22, the up and down rolling effect is executed. Control processing.

  In the second operation setting process (S4006), first, it is determined whether or not the operation status is 0 (S4301). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is zero. If it is determined that the operation status is 0 (S4301: Yes), 1 is set to the operation status (S4302), and operation data is set to the lower displacement unit 400 (S4303). The operation status 1 is defined in the second operation data 222bf (see FIG. 310 (b)), but when the operation status is set to 1, the tilting motor is driven and is driven in the plus direction from the origin position. And it stops when the ascending sensor is set to ON.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the operation status is not 0 (S4301: No), it is determined whether the operation status is 1 (S4304). If it is determined that the operation status is 1 (S4304: Yes), it is determined whether the ascending sensor is on (S4305). If it is determined that the ascending sensor is not on (S4305: No), since the lower displacement unit 400 is not driven to the first position, the processing of S4306 to S4307 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4308. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ascending sensor is on, 2 is set as the operation status (S4306), and operation data is set (S4307).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the operation status is not 1 (S4304: No), it is determined whether the operation status is 2 (S4308). If it is determined that the operation status is 2 (S4308: Yes), it is determined whether the ascending sensor is on (S4309). If it is determined that the ascending sensor is not on (S4309), the lower displacement unit 400 is in a standby state at the origin position, so the processing of S4310 to S4312 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4313. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4308 that the ascending sensor is on (S4309: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4310). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4310: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4310: Yes), the operation status is set to 3 (S4311), the operation data is set (S4312), and the process proceeds to S4313. In the operation status 3, when the ball is stored in the ball receiving portion 467 from the third winning opening 82, the tilting motor is driven in the plus direction. Then, when the lower displacement unit 400 is set to rise by 30 steps, it stops.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4308, when it is determined that the operation status is not 2 (S4308: No), it is determined whether or not the operation status is 3 (S4313). When it is determined that the operation status is 3 (S4313: Yes), it is determined whether the lower displacement unit 400 has been raised by 30 steps (S4314). When it is determined that the lower displacement unit 400 has been raised by 30 steps (S4314: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lower displacement unit 400 has been raised by 30 steps (S4314: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4315). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4315: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4315 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4315: Yes), the operation status is set to 2 (S4316), operation data is set (S4317), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. In the process of S4005, if it is determined that there is no eighth round of jackpot (S4005: No), it is determined whether the jackpot ending flag is 223bc (S4007). If it is determined that the jackpot ending flag 223bc is on (S4007: Yes), the firing operation setting process (S4008) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot ending flag 223bc is not on (S4007: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 318, the firing operation setting process (S4008) which is one process in the operation control process (S2141) will be described. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the contents of the firing operation setting process (S4008). This launching action setting process (S4008) executes a process for launching the sphere stored in the first action setting process (S4002) from the lower displacement unit 400 in the jackpot ending.

  In the firing operation setting process (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the ascending sensor is on (S4401). If it is determined that the ascending sensor is not on (S4401: No), descent 30 step data is set (S4402), and the process proceeds to S4411. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ascent sensor is on (S4401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the firing effect flag 223be is on, that is, whether or not the firing effect is set (S4403). If it is determined that the firing effect flag 223be is not on (S4403: No), since the firing effect is not set, the firing effect flag 223be is set on (S4404), and the firing effect is set (S4405). , The process proceeds to S4411.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the firing effect flag 223be is on (S4403: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is on (S4406). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is on (S4406: Yes), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4411. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4406: No), the firing effect is set (S4407), and the firing effect flag 223be is set to off (S4408). Next, the firing operation data is set (S4409), the firing effect in-operation flag 223bg is set to on (S4410), and the process proceeds to S4411.

  In the process of S4411, it is determined whether or not the launch position sensor is on (S4411). If it is determined that the launch position sensor is on (S4411: Yes), origin operation data is set to return the lower displacement unit 400 to the origin position (S4412), and the origin operation flag 223bh is set to on. (S4413) and the process proceeds to S4414. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4411 that the launch position sensor is off (S4411: No), the lower displacement unit 400 is not the launch position, so the processes of S4412 and S4413 are skipped and the process of S4414 is performed. Transition.

  After executing the processing of S4411 or S4413, it is determined whether the origin sensor is on, that is, whether the lower displacement unit 400 is the origin position (S4414). If it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4414: Yes), the big hit ending flag 223bc is set to off (S4415), the origin operation flag 223bh is set to off (S4416), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4414 that the origin sensor is not on (S4414: No), this process ends.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 320 to 351. This fourth control example is different from the first control example described above in that the configuration of the game board 13 is changed, the control content of the main control device 110 is changed, and the control content of the sound lamp control device 113. It is different from the changed point. The same elements as those in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  A large difference between the fourth control example and the first control example described above will be briefly described. In the first control example described above, the control process of the main controller 110 is executed so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not dynamically displayed simultaneously (in parallel). In the fourth control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are largely different in that the control process is executed so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are dynamically displayed simultaneously (in parallel).

  In the first control example described above, the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed while the jackpot game is being executed, whereas in the fourth control example, the jackpot game is executed. When the latent state is set as the gaming state, the present embodiment is greatly different in that the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed. Furthermore, it is also greatly different in that the contents of the pseudo jackpot effect are different.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 320 and 321. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example has a lower first entrance 64D in the lower area of the game board 13 with respect to the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. The lower electric winning combination 64Da associated with the lower first winning slot 64D is provided, and the second variable winning device 650 (second specific winning slot 650a) is provided below the lower first winning slot 64D. This is different in that a special winning device 1550 is provided in the right region of the game board 13 instead of the special winning device 550.

  The lower first entrance 64D is in a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter by the lower electric accessory 64Da which is variably controlled from the closed position to the open position where it is difficult for the ball to enter when the winning is made by lottery of normal symbols. And a ball entry means capable of setting a state where the ball is easy to enter. When a sphere enters the lower first entrance 64Da, the same processing as when a sphere enters the first entrance 64 is executed.

  The lower first entrance 64 </ b> D is disposed at a location that is less visible to the player than the first entrance 64, and has a shape that is less visible to the player than the first entrance 64. It is configured so that the player is not notified that the ball is easy to enter the first entrance 64D. Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to grasp at which timing the lottery right in FIG. 1 is acquired. In the present control example, the lower first entrance 64D is provided directly below the first entrance 64, and of the balls launched aiming at the first entrance 64, the first entrance 64 is entered. By configuring so that the ball that has not been entered can enter the lower first entrance 64D, the ball can enter the lower first entrance 64D without giving the player a sense of incongruity. However, the position of the lower first entrance 64D is not limited to this, and may be provided above the first entrance 64, or may be provided in the vicinity of the general winning entrance 63 so as to be inconspicuous. .

  The second variable winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a specific jackpot is won in the lottery shown in FIG. 1, and by opening the open / close door 650f1, the ball is easily opened and the open / close door is opened. By closing 650f1, the operation is controlled so that the ball is in a closed state where it is difficult to win. In this control example, when the second variable winning device 650 is won for the jackpot to be opened, a jackpot game in which only a small amount (about 40) of prize balls is awarded is executed. Therefore, the winning of the jackpot where the second variable winning device 650 is opened is not a big hit that is aimed at acquiring a winning ball, but a transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player (in this control example, a latent probability state). It will be a big hit aimed at. In this way, even if the number of prize balls awarded to a player by winning a single jackpot is small, if the gaming state advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot ends, the jackpot game (Winning a big hit) will give a privilege advantageous to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 321, details of the special prize apparatus 1550 provided in the fourth control example in place of the special prize apparatus 550 in the first control example described above will be described. FIG. 208 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the special prize device 1550. As shown in FIG. 208, in the special prize winning device 1550 in the fourth control example, the position where the specific general prize winning opening 163 is disposed (the front of the specific winning outlet 166) with respect to the special prize winning device 550 in the first control example. The second entrance 640 is provided on the left side of the view), the pseudo through gate 1167 is provided above the second entrance 640, and the pseudo second entrance is provided above the production flow channel 691. A game ball flows down to a point different from the guide channel 690 (pseudo second entrance 1640) on the upstream side of the guide channel 690 (around the general pitching portion 690 a) in that the ball port 1640 is provided. A branching portion 694a that branches to the second guiding channel 694) is provided, and a game ball that has reached the branching portion 694a is caused to flow down to the guiding channel 690 or to the second guiding channel 694. Switch between flowing down That channel switching member 695 is different in that it is provided. In addition, the second entrance 640 was provided in the first control example as the second entrance 640 was moved to the position where the specific general winning entrance 163 was provided in the first control example. The difference is that the position is hollow. Further, it is different in that the number of prize balls to be paid out when the entry to the specific prize opening 65a is detected is changed to ten.

  As shown in FIG. 321, the second entrance 640 in the fourth control example is only provided with a pseudo through gate 1167 above it, and is not provided with any configuration that prevents entry. The player can always enter the ball by making a right strike. More specifically, about 1/3 of the right-handed game ball enters the second entrance 640 and about 2/3 flows into the main path SK1. A branching portion 694a provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the second entrance 640 can reach is branched toward the back side of the general pitching portion 690a, and the flow path switching member 695 is provided. Since the game ball flows down along the inclination of the guide flow path 690 in the state where it is retracted to the retracted position (back side in the front view), it flows down to the second guide flow path 694 via the branch portion 694a. There is no. On the other hand, in the state where the flow path switching member 694a projects to the projecting position shown in FIG. In addition, since the flow path switching member 695 is tilted in the direction of guiding the game ball toward the rear side when viewed from the front at the extended position, the game ball is guided to the branch portion 694a by the inclination of the flow path switching member 695. To the guide channel 694. In addition, the flow path switching member 695 is temporarily used when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the fact that the player enters the second entrance 640 during execution of the latent effect production B described later. The game balls that have been moved to the extended position and triggered the lottery of the second special symbol are distributed to the second guide channel 694 and then retreated to the retreat position.

  As shown in FIG. 321, the second guide channel 694 is provided with a guide channel sensor 694s that can detect the passage of a game ball. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the guide flow path sensor 694s, the pseudo electric accessory 1640a associated with the pseudo second entrance 1640 is opened for 2 seconds, and the pseudo second entrance 1640 is opened. You can enter the ball. At the most downstream side of the second guide channel 694, the game ball that has flowed down the second guide channel 694 rolls from the back side of the front view to the front side of the front view and falls to the pseudo second entrance 1640 A ball discharge portion 694b that can be operated is provided. The game ball that has fallen from the ball discharge portion 694b enters the pseudo second entrance 1640 or enters the out port 1640b provided on the left side of the pseudo second entrance 1640. And discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Since the period required for the second induction channel 694 to flow down is about 1 second, the game ball that has flowed down the second induction channel 694 basically has a duration of 2 seconds, which is the opening period of the pseudo electric accessory 1640a. In between, it enters the pseudo second entrance 1640. The out port 1640b is irregular in itself, such as a ball clogging, and the game ball that has reached the pseudo second entrance 1640 after the elapse of the opening period of the pseudo electric accessory 1640a is normally discharged to the outside. Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 321, the pseudo second entrance 1640 is provided with a pseudo electric accessory 1640a. This pseudo electric accessory 1640a is opened and closed as a part of the entertainment effect (latency effect B) in the latent probability mode (high probability state of the special symbol and low probability state of the normal symbol) that is most advantageous to the player. The details will be described later, but once the mode is changed to the latent mode, a special loss (small hit) that the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 1 second with high probability when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery. It becomes. As a result, in the latent mode, the player can enter the second entrance 640 and perform the lottery of the second special symbol by simply making a right-hand hit. In addition, the second special symbol can be executed. When a small hit is made in the lottery, the main paths SK1 to SK3 are allowed to flow down, and a game ball can be entered into the open special winning opening 65a. That is, it becomes an advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed without reducing the holding ball. Further, if the big special is won by lottery of the second special symbol in the latent probability mode, the gaming state after the big winning is set to the latent probability mode again unless the probability variation limit number is reached. That is, the latent accuracy mode and the jackpot are repeated until the probability variation limit number is reached. In the fourth control example, since the probability variation limit number is set to 36 times, the advantageous latent mode and the big hit are repeated until the maximum big hit is 36 times (the latent probability mode is looped).

  However, the number of probability variation limits, small hits, etc. are relatively few, and the specifications are not familiar to many players, making it difficult to understand the gameplay and playing on the pachinko machine 10 May be shunned by the player. Therefore, in the fourth control example, an effect (latent effect effect B) is executed to make the player recognize the behavior in the advantageous latent probability mode in a pseudo manner as if it is in the probability variation state of a general model. It is configured. More specifically, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent mode (and when the pseudo jackpot effect described later is not executed), the game that triggered the lottery of the second special symbol The ball (the game ball that has entered the second entrance 640) is caused to flow down to the second guide channel 694 (that is, the channel switching member 695 is moved to the projecting position), and is guided by the guide channel sensor 694s. At the timing when the passage is detected, the pseudo electric accessory 1640a is opened, and the game ball that has flowed down the second guide channel 694 enters the open pseudo second entrance 1640. And in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, it is set as the structure which performs a jackpot fluctuating display effect, after a game ball enters into the pseudo 2nd entrance 1640. FIG. Further, the board configuration is such that the ball cannot enter the second entrance 640 unless it passes through the pseudo through gate 1167. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player think as if the pseudo electric combination 1640a is released based on the passing of the game ball through the pseudo through gate 1167. Further, it is possible to execute an effect as if the second special symbol lottery has been executed based on the entry into the pseudo second entrance 1640. That is, a behavior similar to the behavior of a probability change state (a gaming state in which an electric accessory is easily released and a high probability of winning) in a general gaming machine (in an advantageous probability variation state, a high probability is obtained by passing the through gate by right-handed. Thus, the electric combination at the second start opening is opened, and a game ball is inserted into the second start opening, thereby realizing a large probability of winning).

  It should be noted that in all game states (modes) other than the latent probability mode, the behavior is similar to the behavior in a normal state (a game state in which an electric accessory is hard to be released and a jackpot probability is low) in a general gaming machine. The production mode and the like are set in Thereby, it is easy for a wide range of players to understand, and a game with sharpness can be realized.

  Further, in the fourth control example, in the probability variation mode, an effect (pseudo-hit effect) in which a jackpot of a plurality of times (for example, five times) is shown as if it is a jackpot of 1 is executed. More specifically, a configuration in which a plurality of rounds (for example, five rounds) in a jackpot are made to appear as if they were one round by production, so that the number of winning balls in one jackpot is the actual number of winning balls. The illusion can be as if more. Therefore, when a big hit is made, the player can have a greater satisfaction. In addition, as described above, in the fourth control example, once the latent accuracy mode is entered, the big hit and the latent accuracy mode are repeated until the maximum of 36 hits, so the actual internal state and the production contents are linked. If this happens, the jackpot and the latent mode are frequently switched, which may make the player feel annoying. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, since a plurality of jackpots (and a latent probability mode between jackpots) are configured to produce an effect (a pseudo jackpot effect) that appears as if one jackpot, You can make it feel as if you could have won more prize balls. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player feels bothersome. Further, in the fourth control example, once the mode is changed to the latent probability mode, the latent probability mode is looped until the probability variation limit number is reached. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, if the number of jackpots is set as one pseudo jackpot effect, it is possible to easily determine whether the pseudo jackpot effect can be finished perfectly when the latent mode is finished (that is, when the probability variation limit number is reached). . Therefore, the pseudo jackpot effect can be executed in a more natural manner.

  In the fourth control example, when the game is in the latent mode and the pseudo jackpot effect is not being executed, each time the game ball enters the second entrance 640, the entered game Although the ball is made to enter the pseudo second entrance 1640, it seems as if the second special symbol variation display effect is executed as if entering the pseudo second entrance 1640. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which flows down the game ball used as the opportunity of the said jackpot lottery to the pseudo 2nd entrance 1640 only when it becomes a jackpot by the lottery of the 2nd special symbol. By configuring in this manner, in the latent mode, when entering the pseudo second entrance 1640, it is possible to realize a behavior as if it would be a big hit, so the pseudo second entrance 1640 It is possible to play a game by paying attention to whether or not a game ball enters. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 322, the flow of games in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 322 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 322, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is configured to be able to set four game states (normal state, probability changing state, latent state, and short time state). When a special symbol jackpot is won, the high probability state of the special symbol is always set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, the upper limit is set for the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously, and the upper limit is reached for the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously (probability limit state) Only when the jackpot is won, the low probability state (short time state) of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends.

  In the fourth control example, the gaming state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set is configured such that the latent state is more advantageous to the player than the probability variation state. Further, once the state shifts to the latent state, the latent state is easily set continuously until the probability variation limit state is reached. By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the player to play an advantageous game by shifting to the latent state while the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is small.

  When the normal state is set as the gaming state, it becomes a gaming state in which the special drawing 1 lottery is mainly performed (the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state has a long time (for example, 10 minutes) as a variable time). 99.5% when winning the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is shifted to the probability variation state, and 0.5% is shifted to the latent probability state.

  While the probability variation state is set, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it becomes easier for the ball to win the lower first entrance 64D than in the normal state. It becomes easy. Furthermore, the jackpot winning probability of the special figure 1 is set higher than that in the normal state, and the transition rate to the latent state when winning the big hit in the special figure 1 is 10 times (5%) of the normal state. Even when the probability variation state is set, a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery, so that the game state in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly performed during the probability variation state. It becomes.

  In the latent state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 lottery is set to a long time (for example, 10 minutes), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery is set to a short time. The game state is mainly performed, and the player is configured to play a right-handed game. When the big win is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the latent probability state is set again until the probability variation limit state is reached. Also, in the special drawing 2 lottery, it is set to win the jackpot in most cases where the jackpot is not won. Therefore, the special figure 2 lottery in the latent state is the lottery most advantageous to the player, and the game state is most advantageous to the player in the latent state.

  If you win a jackpot in the probable limit state, the short time state is set. In this short time state, the game state in which the special drawing 1 lottery is mainly performed is performed, and the special jackpot lottery in the special diagram 1 is executed with the same big hit probability as in the normal state. Since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the special figure 1 lottery is easier to execute than the normal state. In addition, the short-time state continues until a predetermined condition other than the big win is won (for example, the condition that the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the predetermined number (50 times), the condition that the special symbol is won (one time)). In this case, if the jackpot is won during the short state at this time, it shifts to a latent state most advantageous to the player with a high probability (95%). By shifting (retracting) from the short-time state to the latent state in this way, the game can be executed in the latent state from the first time the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously, A game can be provided to the player.

  In this control example, a special winning lottery game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed in the same manner as the special winning jackpot winning in FIG. doing. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the current probability variation number (the remaining number of times until the probability variation limit state) based on the number of times the second variable winning device 65 is opened.

  Unlike the configuration of this control example, it may be configured to execute a suggestion effect that suggests to the player the current probability of change (remaining number of times until the probability change limit state) based on winning the small hit. good.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 323, an effect (effect mode) executed according to the set gaming state will be described among effects executed in the fourth control example. FIG. 323 is a transition diagram showing the transition contents of effects executed corresponding to the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 323, in the state in which the normal state and the probability change state are set, the same effect mode (normal effect mode) is set, and whether the player is currently in the normal state or the probability change state. It is configured to make it difficult to understand. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to easily grasp the remaining probability variation number until the probability variation limit state.

  In this control example, since the time-short state is set only when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation limit state has been reached, the normal performance mode is executed without winning the jackpot during the time-short state. Only in the case where it is possible to make the player know that the current state is normal. Therefore, it is possible to provide game information that is advantageous only to a player who has played a game for a long time.

  In this control example, the normal state and the probability change state are configured so that the change times set based on the special drawing 1 lottery are the same (the same change pattern selection table is used). ) Thereby, it can suppress that the present game state is discriminate | determined by the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 lottery performed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and it is configured to be able to set a variation time that can be set only in either the probability variation state or the normal state, and when the variation time is set, the current gaming state can be suggested You may do it. Furthermore, the variation time is set by referring to a variation pattern selection table that differs depending on the current probability variation number (the remaining number of times until the probability variation limit state), and according to the variation time of the special figure 1 lottery executed. It may be configured such that the player can determine the current probability of change.

  Next, when transitioning to the latent probability state in a state where the normal performance is being executed (a state in which the normal state and the probability variation state are set), two rendering modes are set according to the current number of probability variations. The Specifically, when the remaining number of times until the probability variation limit state is 30 or more in the state where the latent probability state is set, an odd number of slots (for example, 777) are stopped and displayed as the third symbol indicating the big hit. Then, in the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game executed in a state where the probability variation limit state has been reached, the latent effect stage A mode for executing the pseudo jackpot game effect is set.

  When the latent state is set and the remaining number of times until the probability variation limit state is less than 30, an even number of crests (for example, 666) are stopped and displayed as the third symbol indicating the big hit, Executes the game effect in the latent state, during the period from the end of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game executed in the state where the probability variation limit state has been reached, until the winning of the predetermined number (1-5 times) of the jackpot Then, a latent production effect B mode for executing a pseudo jackpot game effect is set for a period until winning a jackpot of a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times).

  In other words, this control example is configured to give a player a lot of prize balls in two states: a big hit gaming state and a continuous small hit gaming state (so-called small hit RUSH) in the latent state. However, during the latent state, not only do you win the jackpot frequently, but also win the jackpot with a high probability, so the jackpot game production will be performed based on the actual jackpot winning, If it is configured to perform the hit game effect, there is a problem that the effect becomes complicated and an effect that is difficult for the player to execute is executed.

  On the other hand, in this control example, as described above, in the period in which the latent probability state is set, regardless of whether the jackpot game or the small hit game, the pseudo jackpot game effect is executed in a pseudo manner. A period during which the certain state game effect (small hit RUSH effect) is executed is set. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the effect to be executed from being complicated and provide the pachinko machine 10 that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, when the probability variation limit state is reached, and then the time reduction state is set, the pullback mode is set, and a roaring effect is shown to indicate that the game state is easy to shift to the latent state for the player. Executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 324, characteristic production contents in the fourth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 324 (a), the contents of the pseudo jackpot effect (super jackpot effect) executed during the latent effect A mode will be described. FIG. 324 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a pseudo jackpot effect (super jackpot effect) executed during the latent effect A mode. The same elements as those of the display screen in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 324 (a), in the pseudo jackpot effect (super jackpot effect) executed during the latent performance A mode, a comment indicating that a super jackpot is being displayed is displayed in the main display area Dm. Acquisition information 803 indicating the number of prize balls awarded during the performance is displayed. Then, a stored image for showing the player that the acquired information 803 is increasing is displayed in the center with a dynamic image. Then, a guidance display Dm9 for guiding the right-handed game to the player is displayed.

  Here, in the latent performance A mode, a prize ball given during the latent probability state, that is, a prize ball given when each right-handed game ball won during the latent probability state wins each prize opening ( All of the balls that have entered the second entrance 640 and the balls that have been awarded to the variable winning device 65 by the small hit game) are treated as the winning balls acquired during the big hit game. During the latent production A mode, the flow path switching member 695 (see FIG. 321) is located at the embedded position and entered the second entrance 640. The sphere is configured to have a sphere flow that wins the pseudo attacker 165.

  As a result, a pseudo jackpot effect that causes all of the winning balls in the latent state to win the pseudo attacker 165 is executed, and a pseudo jackpot effect indicating that the jackpot game is continuously executed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be executed. Therefore, a pseudo jackpot effect can be executed during the latent state without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 324 (b), the contents of the pseudo-latent state game effect among the effects executed during the latent effect B mode will be described. FIG. 324 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a pseudo latent game effect. As shown in FIG. 324 (b), in the pseudo-latent state game effect, the characters “RUSH” for indicating that the current state is the latent game state are displayed, and whether or not the small hit game is executed. (A game indicating that the character 811 has opened the treasure box 812, and if the contents of the treasure box 812 is “V”, the player has won a small hit). This pseudo-latent state game effect is executed during the period when the potential game state and the jackpot game until reaching the predetermined number of times are performed. When the game is executed, the acquisition information 803 is notified so that the number of prize balls given during the jackpot game and the prize balls given by the jackpot game are displayed.

  Here, during the period in which the pseudo-latency state game effect is being executed during the latent effect stage B mode, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, the special drawing 2 lottery is executed. Since it is necessary to indicate to the player, the flow path switching member 695 (see FIG. 321) is located at the protruding position, and the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 flows down toward the pseudo electric accessory 1640a. It is configured to be a sphere flow.

  In addition, the update timing of the acquisition information 803 displayed in each production described above and the update timing of the production mode are simulated based on the timing at which the ball actually wins, as in the first control example described above. The timing at which the ball reaches the winning opening is predicted and set in accordance with the timing based on the prediction result. Since the detailed content is the same as that of the first control example described above, a description thereof will be omitted.

<Electric Configuration of Main Controller in Fourth Control Example>
The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example is different from the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the first control example described above in that the random number 4 table 202ca per special symbol is changed instead of the random number table 202a per special symbol. Instead of the pattern selection table 202b, the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cb, instead of the normal hit random number table 202c, the normal hit random number 4 table 202cc, and instead of the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202d1, the special figure 1 big hit type selection 4 table 202cd1 is replaced with a special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2 and a special figure 2 big hit type selection 4 table 202cd2 is provided, and a small hit random number 4 table 202ce is provided instead of the small hit random number table 202e.

  The RAM of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example is different from the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the first control example described above in that the probability variation flag 203ca, the game state storage area 203cb, the jackpot flag 203cc, 1 fluctuation stop flag 203cd, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce, small hit flag 203cf, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci, probability variation upper limit counter 203cj It is different in point. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the contents of the random number 4 table 202ca per special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol random number 4 table 202ca is different from the above-described special symbol random number table 202a in that the value range of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol is different. Specifically, in the special symbol low probability state, the range of “0-4” is specified, and in the special symbol high probability state, the range of “0-39” is defined as the range corresponding to the jackpot. .

  Next, the contents of the small hit random number 4 table 202ce will be described with reference to FIG. 325 (b). Unlike the above-described small hit random number table 202e, the small hit random number 4 table 202ce is configured such that each of FIG. 1 and FIG. Specifically, in the case of Special Figure 1, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is determined to be a range of “50 to 59”, and in the case of Special Figure 2, the range of “50 to 479” is determined to be a big hit. It is stipulated in. In other words, in the fourth control example, in the lottery of Fig. 1, the winner is won with a probability of about 1/50, and in the lottery of Fig. 2, the winner is won with a probability of about 1/1. It is composed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 325 (c), the contents of the ordinary random number 4 table 202cc will be described. The ordinary random number 4 table 202cc is different from the ordinary random number table 202c described above in that the elements per long open are deleted, and the probability of winning in a low probability state of ordinary symbols is reduced. The difference is that the probability of winning in the high probability state of the symbol is increased, and the rest is the same.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 1 big hit type selection 4 table 202cd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (a). FIG. 326 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 326 (a), when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the first attacker (second variable winning device 650) is opened and the jackpot (big jackpot) in which the probability variation state is set. A, jackpot B) and the second attacker (variable winning device 65) are opened, and the jackpot (jackpot C) for which the latent state is set is defined in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2 will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (b). FIG. 326 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2. As shown in FIG. 326 (b), when the big win in the special figure 2 is won, the second attacker (variable winning device 65) is opened, and the big hit (big hit C) for which the latent state is set is special. It is defined in association with the value of the hit type counter C2.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cb will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 327, in the present control example, the probability variation 4 table 202cb1 that is normally used when the normal state and the probability variation state are set, and the latent probability used when the latent probability state is set. 4 table 202cb2 and 4 table 202cb3 for time saving used when the time saving state is set, and the table corresponding to the set gaming state is referred to.

  FIG. 328 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the four tables for probability variation 202cb1. As shown in FIG. 328, in this control example, a long-time variation pattern is set as the variation pattern in FIG. 2 when the normal state and the probability variation state are set. Therefore, the lottery game of the real special figure 1 is performed.

  FIG. 329 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the latent probability four table 202cb2. As shown in FIG. 329 (a), in the present control example, a long-time variation pattern is set as the variation pattern of FIG. Therefore, the lottery game of the real special figure 2 is performed.

  FIG. 329 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time reduction 4 table 202cb3. As shown in FIG. 329 (b), in this control example, a long-time variation pattern is set as the variation pattern of FIG. Therefore, the lottery game of the real special figure 1 is performed. In general, it is defined that the length of the variation time selected as the variation pattern in FIG. 1 is shorter than the probability variation four table 202cb1. Therefore, the special figure 1 variation can be executed more efficiently than the probability variation state.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 330 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the following configuration is added. Since the other elements are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The probability variation flag 203ca is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of the special symbol is set, and indicates that the special symbol is in the high probability state when set to ON. That is, when the probability variation flag 203ca is set to ON, as the gaming state, the probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state), or the latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state), One of the normal symbols (low probability state) is set.

  The probability variation flag 203ca is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the winning jackpot type is a jackpot for setting a probability variation state or a latent probability state after the jackpot is completed. And when the symbol which shows that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed, it is set to off.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the special symbol jackpot winning, and the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a special symbol after a special symbol high probability state (special symbol high probability state) is set as a special symbol high probability end condition for ending the special symbol high probability state. The probability variation flag 203ca may be set to OFF when the number of times of fluctuation (number of times of special figure fluctuation) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). In this case, in order to set the timing when the probability variation flag 203ca is set to OFF, the storage means for preliminarily storing the number of special diagram fluctuations as the special diagram high accuracy end condition, and the time after the special diagram high accuracy state is set Measuring means for measuring the number of special figure fluctuations, and end judgment for judging whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means satisfies the number of special figure fluctuations (special figure high-precision termination condition) stored in the storage means And means.

  Furthermore, a plurality of special figure high-accuracy end conditions are prepared. For example, a special figure 1 high-precision end condition that can be established based only on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special figure high-accuracy state or the variation of the second special symbol A special figure 2 high-precision end condition that can be established based only on the number of times, and a lottery end condition that can be established when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result that wins a small hit) Such a special figure high-accuracy end condition may be facilitated, and the probability variation flag 203ca may be set to OFF when any special figure high-accuracy end condition is satisfied.

  The special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the first entrance 64 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. The flag to be set. This special figure 1 jackpot flag is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot.

  When the special symbol 1 jackpot flag is on and the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol is completed, a process of removing the second special symbol and forcibly stopping the symbol with the symbol is executed. Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other hits a big hit or a small hit during execution of one big hit.

  The special figure 2 jackpot flag is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the second entrance 640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. The flag to be set. This special figure 2 jackpot flag is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot.

  When the special symbol 2 jackpot flag is on and the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol is completed, a process of detaching the first special symbol and forcibly stopping the symbol with the symbol is executed. Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other hits a big hit or a small hit during execution of one big hit.

  The gaming state storage area 203cb is a storage area for storing information indicating the currently set gaming state and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is 0 and the probability variation flag 203ca is off), the gaming state storage area 203cb is in the winning state In the area, “00H” is stored as information indicating the normal state. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is in a probable change state (if the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is 1 or more and the probability change flag 203ca is on), the game state storage area 203cb has a winning state area. “01H” is stored as information indicating the probability variation state. Also, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent probability state (if the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is 0 and the probability variation flag 203ca is on), the winning state area of this gaming state storage area 203cb is displayed. “02H” is stored as information indicating the latent state.

  The information stored in the game state storage area 203cb is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

  The small hit flag 203cf is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on having entered the second inlet 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. The flag to be set. This small hit flag 203cf is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit. When the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends with the small hit flag 203cf being on, the variation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (the counter for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is subtracted). Stop) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem in which a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol during the second special symbol small hit and the big hit is started during the small win. it can.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci are counters for measuring the fluctuation times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. The first special symbol and the second special symbol When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended based on the time measurement results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci.

  The jackpot flag 203cc is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot is being hit. If this jackpot flag 203cc is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the jackpot is not hit. This jackpot medium flag 203cc is set to ON when the jackpot start is set. On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot.

  The small hitting / measuring flag is a flag indicating whether or not the small hitting is being hit. If this small hitting flag is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting small, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not in small hitting. This small hitting / medium flag is set to ON when the small hitting start is set. On the other hand, it is set off at the end of the small hit.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to win a small hit with the second special symbol, and when the small hit is won (when the small hitting medium flag is set to ON), the first It is configured to interrupt the special symbol variation display. That is, among the special symbols of multiple types (the first special symbol, the second special symbol), one of the special symbols (second special symbol) is won in the lottery, and the small hitting medium flag is set to ON. In this state, the display of the variation of the other special symbol (first special symbol) does not end, so that the player can play a game while paying attention to the small hit game. In addition, during the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the variation display of the other special symbol from being ended and the big hit game from being started.

  Note that, in this control example, the first special symbol is also configured to win a small hit like the second special symbol described above. Since the process when winning the small bonus in the lottery of the first special symbol is the same as the process when winning the bonus in the lottery of the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is a flag indicating that it is a period from when the change of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) with the jackpot stop symbol until the jackpot is started. When the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to ON, even when there is a new entry to the second entrance 640, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. Is done. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to ON when the second special symbol is removed and the symbol is forcibly stopped, and is OFF when the process for executing the variable display of the second special symbol is avoided. The

  In this control example, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cd is provided in which the target is changed from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1 with respect to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce described above. The only difference is that the target of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is changed from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period for opening the first specific winning opening 65a as the game content of the small hit game is set to 1.5 seconds, and the end condition of the round established by the number of winning is set to 10 doing. In other words, the valid period of the round game (1.5 seconds) elapses before 10 balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hit game (until the round end condition for the number of winnings is satisfied). It will be. Therefore, since the period of the small hit game can be made constant, the production over the small hit game (the period from the start of the change of one special symbol to the end of the change of the other special symbol via the small hit game) The production period of a series of productions executed in the same manner can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily synchronize the change timing of the special symbol and the execution timing of the effect, and enhance the effect.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is a flag indicating a period during which the fluctuation time update (subtraction) of the special figure 1 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the fluctuation time update (subtraction) is stopped. When it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small hit, and is referred to in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 32). The As a result of the reference, if it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as when changing is executed. That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped because the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON. Then, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation executing process is set to ON, it is set to OFF.

  In the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol can be won by the small bonus, so the special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small bonus is the first special symbol. If the lottery of the first special symbol can be won in small hits, the special special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol. good.

  The probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is a counter for setting an upper limit value at which the probability variation state is continuously set. In this control example, the upper limit number of times that the probability variation state is continuously set after the jackpot is ended is defined (36 times). Then, the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is referred to when determining whether or not the number of times that the probability variation state is continuously set has reached the upper limit number. The value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is incremented by 1 every time the probability variation state is set at the end of the big hit game. The counter value is cleared when the normal state or the short time state is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot, based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot (based on the fact that the jackpot game is executed) When the other special symbol's change display is forcibly stopped and the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped with a combination that indicates a small hit Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hit game ends).

  That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed into various modes. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the game result that is most advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit), and while the variable display for indicating the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

<Electric Configuration of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fourth Control Example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is different from the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above in that an effect mode storage area 223ca and a probability change upper limit number counter 223cb are added. ing. The rest is the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The effect mode storage area 223ca is an area for storing the currently set effect mode. In the fourth control example, as the effect mode set when the latent state is set as the game state, a pseudo jackpot effect that simulates the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game (FIG. 324 ( a) (see below)) is divided into a predetermined period (for example, a period of time for winning three times of jackpots), and a pseudo state is executed for each division. It is configured to be able to set a latent probability effect B mode for executing a latent probability game effect (see FIG. 324 (b)).

  In this effect mode storage area 223ca, a probability variation upper limit counter 223cb in a case where a big win is won in a gaming state other than the latent probability state (normal state, probability variation state, short time state), and the latent probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. The effect mode selected based on the value of is stored. Then, while the latent state is continuously set, the same effect mode is stored, and the stored information (effect mode) based on the setting of the game state other than the latent state is cleared. The

  The probability variation upper limit counter 223cb is a counter for measuring the number of times that a special symbol high probability state (probability variation state, latent probability state) is continuously set, and the special symbol high probability continuously set. This is referred to when determining whether the number of states (probability change state, latent probability state) has reached the upper limit number (for example, 36 times). The probability variation upper limit counter 223cb is incremented by 1 when the special symbol high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and is cleared when the special symbol high probability state is not set after the jackpot game ends. The

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 332 to 347. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 332, the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in this control example will be described. FIG. 332 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S104). When the special symbol variation process 4 (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current big hit or small hit (S4501), and if it is determined that the big hit or small hit (S4501: Yes) Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4502). In the process of S4502, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during the interruption is interrupted because one special figure is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the winning. In the process of S4502, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4502: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the special figure temporarily stopped is updated. (S4503), that is, a process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special figure for which the subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this process is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4501 that the current big hit or small win is being made (S4501: No), whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch is larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 fluctuates). (S4504), if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203ch is not greater than 0 (0) (S4504: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S4508) is executed, and thereafter, the flow shifts to S4509, where the variation processing related to the special figure 2 is executed. Details of the first special symbol variation start process (S4508) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4504, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch is larger than 0 (S4504: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation execution process 4 (S4505) is executed. The first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) executes the process during the special symbol 1 variation, and will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  When the first special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4505) is completed, it is then determined whether it is the end time of the variation time (whether the special diagram 1 variation time counter 203ch is 0) (S4506), and the variation time. When it is determined that it is the end timing (S4506: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (S4507) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, in the process of S4506, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation time (S4506: No), the process of S4507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4509.

  In the processing of S4509 to S4513, the same processing as S4504 to S4507 executed for the special figure 1 is executed. When the processing of S4509 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S4509), and the special figure 2 fluctuation is detected. If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203ci is not greater than 0 (0) (S4509: No), the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510) is executed, and then this process is terminated. Details of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4509 that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci is greater than 0 (S4509: Yes), the second special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4511) is executed. This second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511) executes the process during the special symbol 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511) is completed, it is next determined whether it is the end time of the variation time (whether the special diagram 2 variation time counter 203ci is 0) (S4512), and the variation time. When it is determined that it is the end timing (S4512: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (S4513) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4512, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation time (S4512: No), the process of S4513 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 333, the first special symbol variation start process (S4508), which is a process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S104 in FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. . FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S4508).

  In the first special symbol variation starting process (S4508), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S4601), and the acquired value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1). ) Is greater than 0 (S4602). In the process of S4602, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S4602: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1 is subtracted (S4603), and the reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S4604). .

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later executed by the MPU 201, the voice is recorded. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  When the process of S4604 is completed, the data in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S4605). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  When the process of S4605 ends, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S4606). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 334. The value of the first special random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not the jackpot is based on the set gaming state.

  When the processing of S4606 is completed, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 is executed (see FIG. 335). Although details will be described later, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607) is performed in the first special symbol determination result and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the counter CS1.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607) ends, it is then determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is greater than 0 (S4608). When it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is larger than 0 (S4608: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203j is decremented by 1 (S4609), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4608, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203j is not a value larger than 0 (S4608: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4602, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S4602: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, referring to FIG. 334, a first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606), which is a process of the first special symbol variation start process (S4504 in FIG. 333) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. explain. FIG. 334 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606). In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, during the period in which the variation display (bonus variation) won in the jackpot in any one special symbol is executed, whether or not the jackpot was won in the other special symbol lottery It is configured not to make a determination.

  In other words, in a state where it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period (after the lapse of the fluctuation time) by one special symbol lottery, the other special symbol lottery will win a big hit, and multiple times in a short period of time It is configured to suppress winning a jackpot and giving a privilege excessively.

  In this way, by performing the process of acquiring various counter values in the same manner as the normal special symbol lottery, skipping the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process, and setting the out symbol, the other It is possible to respond quickly to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S4701). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203ca is set to ON (S4702). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol has a high probability state (probability change state, latent state). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ca is on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S4702: Yes), the random value that is a jackpot defined in the first per random number table 202a for high probability And whether the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer matches, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S4703). On the other hand, in the process of S4702, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ca is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S4702: No), the first per-random number table 202a for low probability is displayed. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value that is a big hit matches the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (S4704).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S4703 or S4704 is a big hit (S4705). If the lottery result is a big hit (S4705: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit flag 203ck is set for the first special symbol. It is set to ON (S4706), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to jackpot (S4707). Then, based on the value of the acquired hit type counter, the big win symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4709), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4705 that the lottery result is out (S4705: No), the off symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4709), and thereafter This process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 335, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S4508 in FIG. 333), will be described. FIG. 335 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607 in FIG. 335), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606 in FIG. 334), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S4801). Here, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is on. The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to ON in the process of S4707 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) described above.

  If it is determined in the process of S4801 that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S4801: Yes), the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) described above is obtained in the process of S4701. Based on the value of the hit type counter C2, the big hit type is determined from the special figure 1 big hit type selection 4 table 202d1 (see FIG. 326 (a)) (S4802), and the process proceeds to S4803.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4801, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203ck is off) (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped. Thus, the process proceeds to S4803.

  In the process of S4803, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S4803). Next, a variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 327 to 329) corresponding to the gaming state is read (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805. Note that the gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203ca and the value of the time reduction counter 203f. In the process of S4805, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S4805), and then a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern ( S4806).

  When the process of S4806 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S4807), then the first special symbol change start is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S4808), and the process of S4805 is performed. A value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in is set in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203ch, and this processing is terminated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 336, the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) executed in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S154 of FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The contents will be explained. FIG. 336 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505). In the first special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4505), when the subtraction of the variation time in the special diagram 1 is interrupted, the subtraction is resumed and the variation time is subtracted.

  When the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4901). Here, a brief description will be given of a case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON when the special figure 1 is changing and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that it is a hit (small hit). When the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on, the big hit flag 203o is set to on in the processing, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds in the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next time the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 332) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is turned on), the process of S4501 is a big hit Therefore, the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is not executed. Then, when the big hit game (or small hit game) is completed and it is determined that the big hit game (or small hit game) is not in the process of S4501, the first special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4505) is executed. Will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON is a big win (or small win) game. Is completed, and the timing for resuming the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation for which the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been interrupted is configured.

  Returning to FIG. 336, the description will be continued. In the process of S4901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4901: Yes), then a special figure 1 change restart command is set (S4902). The stop flag 203cg is set to OFF (S4903), and the process proceeds to S4904. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4901: No), the processes of S4902 and S4903 are skipped and S4904. Move on to processing.

  In the process of S4904, the special figure 1 variation time counter 203ch is decremented and updated by 1 (S4904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S4905), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 337, the first special symbol variation stop process (S4507), which is a process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S154 in FIG. 332), will be described. FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stopping process (S4507).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (S4507), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 big hit flag 203ck is set to ON for the first special symbol (special diagram 1) (S5001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to ON for the first special symbol (S5001: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to ON (S5002). A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is turned on is set (S5003). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol (S5004).

  When the processing of S5004 is completed, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci is set to 0 (S5005), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203cl is set to ON (S5006). The stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S5008), and the process proceeds to S5009. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5006 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203cl is set to OFF (S5006: No), the processes of S5007 to S5008 are skipped and the process proceeds to S5009.

  After executing the processing of S5006 or S5008, a jackpot scenario is set (S5009). Next, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203ck, the probability variation flag 203ca and the hourly / short hour counter 203j are reset (S5010), the big hit medium flag 203cc is set to ON (S5011), and the process proceeds to S5012. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5001 that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203ck is not on (S5001: No), the process proceeds to S5012.

  In the process of S5012, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S5012). Then, the process which stops the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st special symbol currently variably displayed on the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S5013), and this process is complete | finished.

  Thus, in the first special symbol stop process (S4507), the process of stopping the variable display (S5002 to S5009) with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big win (S5001: Yes), processing for forcibly stopping the second special symbol during the variable display (S5003, S5004) is executed.

  In addition, in the fourth control example, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol during the variable display is configured to be stopped and forcibly stopped and displayed as a symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. And it is good also as a structure which restarts the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol after the jackpot of a 1st special symbol is complete | finished. Thereby, compared with the case where it stops compulsorily by off, it can be set as a natural aspect effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 338, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510) executed in the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. To do. FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510). In the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510), a process for starting the variation of the special symbol 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the processing related to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 333 to 337, the variation target is merely changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Detailed descriptions of elements are omitted.

  In the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203ce is set to ON (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to ON (S5101: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to OFF (S5102), and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is a flag that is set to ON while the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the outage when the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol ends. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is on, it means that a big hit is started, and therefore the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol should not be set. For this reason, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is on in the process of S5101, the process is terminated without executing the processes of S5102 to S5107 for setting the fluctuation start.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S5101: No), the second special symbol execution area Data (various counter values) is acquired (S5103). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S5103, it is determined whether there is acquired data (S5104). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S5104: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5103 that there is data (S5104: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination processing 4 for executing the second special symbol jackpot determination based on each stored counter value. Is executed (S5105). Details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 will be described later with reference to FIG. 339.

  When the process of S5105 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 for selecting the variation pattern is then executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S5103 (S5106). ). Details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S5106 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5107). When it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5107: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203j is decremented by 1 (S5108), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5107, when it is determined that the value of the time / shortage counter 203j is 0, that is, the time is not short (S5107: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, referring to FIG. 339, second special symbol jackpot determination processing 4 (S5105), which is one processing of second special symbol variation start processing 4 (S4510 in FIG. 338) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. ). FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105), the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) described above is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334). Differences from the above will be mainly described.

  When the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area is acquired (S5201). And the process of S5202-S5204 for acquiring the lottery result whether it is a big win based on each acquired counter value and the state of the probability change flag 203ca is performed. Each of these processes is different in that the counter value used for the lottery (determination) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area, and the other control is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334). Is executed.

  When the processing of S5203 or S5204 is completed, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big win (S5205). If it is determined that the big win is obtained (S5205: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. The processing of S5206 to S5208 for setting the jackpot is executed, and this processing is terminated. In each of these processes of S5206 to S5208, the same processes as the processes of S4706 to S4708 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) are executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5205, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big win (S5205: No), a stop symbol corresponding to the small special hit or miss of the second special symbol is set. The special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process 4 is executed (S5209), and this process is terminated. Details of the special figure 2 deviation variation process 4 (S5209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation variation process 4 (S5209).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation process 4 (S5209), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S5203 or S5204 of FIG. 339 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S5301), and the lottery result is small. When it is determined that it is a win (S5301: Yes), the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5302), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small win (S5303). Then, a small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S5304), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the lottery result is out (S5301: No), the off symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S5305), and then This process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 341, second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 (one of the second special symbol variation start processing 4 (S4510 in FIG. 338)) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. S5106) will be described. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106 in FIG. 341), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S5401). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105 in FIG. 339), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the second special symbol jackpot is set. (S5402). Here, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is on for the second special symbol. The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to ON in the process of S5207 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 339) described above.

  If it is determined in the process of S5402 that the big special symbol of the second special symbol has been set (S5402: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 328 and 329) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S5403). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S5201 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 339) described above, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2 (FIG. 326 (b) ))), The jackpot type is determined (S5404).

  When the processing of S5404 is completed, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S5405), and then a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern. (S5406). Then, the process proceeds to S5408.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5402 that the second special symbol jackpot is not set (S5402: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407) is executed, and the process of S5408 is performed. Migrate to

  In the process of S5408, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S5408). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the variation start of the second special symbol (S5409), and sets a value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the processing of S5405 in the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203ci ( S5410), the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407) will be described. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407 in FIG. 342), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5501). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5501). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cf is ON (S5501: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S5502). Then, based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202ce (not shown), the small hit type is selected (S5503).

  Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 327 to 389) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S5504), and the small variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the read variation pattern selection table. Is selected (S5505). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern is set (S5506), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5501 that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (ie, it is out of place) (S5501: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 327 to 389) (S5507), and a deviation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S5508). Thereafter, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected deviation fluctuation pattern (S5509), and the present process is terminated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 343, second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511) which is one processing in the special symbol variation processing (see S154 of FIG. 332) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The contents of are explained. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511). In the second special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4511), when the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, a process of restarting the subtraction and a process of subtracting the fluctuation time are executed.

  When the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511) is executed, first, the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203ci is decremented by 1 and updated (S5601), and the second special symbol variation of the first symbol display device 37 is updated. The display is updated (S5602), and this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (S4513) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (S4513). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S4513) is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2.

  When the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (S4513) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to on (S5701), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to on. If it is determined that there is a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command (S5703: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S5703). Next, when the process of S5703 is completed, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and is stopped and displayed with the symbol (S5704). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203ck is on (S5706). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is ON (S5706: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to OFF (S5707), and the storage information for the special figure 1 jackpot flag is deleted (S5708). , The process proceeds to S5709. On the other hand, in the process of S5706, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203ck is off (S5706: No), the processes of S5707 to S5708 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5709.

  In the process of S5709, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S5709), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl, the probability variation flag 203ca, and the hour / short hour counter 203j are reset (S5710). Next, the jackpot flag 203cc is set to ON (S5711), and the process proceeds to S5712.

  In the process of S5712, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S5712). Then, the process which stops the fluctuation | variation display of the 2nd special symbol currently variably displayed on the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S5713), and this process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5701 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is not set to ON (S5701: No), the special figure 2 off stop process 4 is executed (S5702), and the above-described S5712, The process of S5713 is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 345, the special figure 2 outage stop process 4 (S5702), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S4513 in FIG. 344), will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 off stop processing 4 (S5702). In the special figure 2 outage stop process 4 (S5702), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than the big hit (small hit, out), the special figure 2 indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the lottery result of FIG. 2 is a small hit, a process for temporarily stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 1 being executed is executed.

  In the special figure 2 off stop processing 4 (S5702), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5801). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5801: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S5802). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating ON of the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set (S5803).

  When the processing of S5803 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S5804). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203cf is set to OFF (S5805), and the small hit medium flag 203g is set to ON (S5806).

  When the process of S5806 is completed, a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S5807). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is variably stopped at the small hit symbol (S5808), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5801 that the small hit flag 203cf is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S5801: No), the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S5809). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the variation is stopped with the symbol (S5810), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, the variable display control of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, so the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed simultaneously. Can be displayed. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game efficiently.

  In addition, in this control example, when the special symbol which shows a big hit in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can grasp what is not, you can play the jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 346, the normal symbol variation process (S156) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S156). This normal symbol variation process (S156) is executed in the timer interrupt process, and the second symbol variation display and variation time performed in the second symbol display device 83, the lower motor accompanying the lower first entrance 64D. This is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time of the accessory 64Da.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S156 in FIG. 346), first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S5901). As a normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the second symbol display device 83 is in the middle of displaying a hit, and the opening / closing control of the lower electric accessory 64Da associated with the lower first entrance 64D. In the middle of being made. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit as a result of the determination (S5901: Yes), it is in a state where a new normal symbol variation (lottery) cannot be started (executed). This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S5901: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (ordinary symbol changing). If it is determined (S5902) and it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (ordinary symbol fluctuation) (S5902: No), that is, even if the current symbol is a normal symbol change, If it is determined that there is no particular state, that is, a state in which a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can be started (executed), the value of the normal symbol retention ball counter 203e (the variation display suspension in the normal symbol) The number of times M) is acquired (S5903).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S5904), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0. (S5904: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S5904: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S5905). The data stored in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S5906).

  In the process of S5906, the data stored in the normal symbol holding first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the normal symbol hold first area → the execution area, the normal symbol hold second area → the normal symbol hold first area, the normal symbol hold third area → the normal symbol hold second area, and the normal symbol hold fourth area. → Shift the data in each area, such as the normal symbol hold third area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S5907).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / middle counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5908). If it is determined that the value of the hour / short counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5908: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the ordinary random number 4 table 202cc for high probability because the time is short (S5909). ). Specifically, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “205 to 232”, the normal symbol is off. It is determined that On the other hand, in the process of S5908, when it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S5908: No), it is based on the ordinary random number 4 table 202cc for low probability. The lottery result is acquired (S5910). Specifically, the lottery result is acquired based on the normal random number 4 table 202cc for the low probability. If the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5”, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 6 to 232”, it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol. To do.

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S5909 or S5910 is a normal symbol win (S5911), and if it is determined that it is a normal symbol win (S5911: Yes) ), The display mode for winning is set (S5912), and the process proceeds to S5914. In the process of S5911, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5911 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S5911: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S5913), and the process proceeds to S5914. In the process of S5913, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S5914. When the process of S5912 or the process of S5913 is completed, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter (S5914), and this process is terminated.

  When the processing of S5912 or S5914 ends, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol high probability state (short time state) in the process of S591 (S5911), and the pachinko machine 10 has a normal symbol high probability state (short time). Is determined (S5911: Yes), the normal symbol variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S5913), and then the general symbol short variation flag 203t is set to ON. (S5914), this process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the normal symbol is not in a high probability state (short-time state) (ordinary symbol is in a low probability state) (S5911: No), the variation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device Is set to 10 seconds (S5915), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5902 that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S5902: Yes), the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S5915). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S5910 or the processing of S5912 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S5915, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S5915: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5915 that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S5915: Yes), then a stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S5916). In the process of S5916, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S5912, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed as a stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S5913, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. It should be noted that the period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part is lit in the blinking display (alternate display of “◯” and “x”) indicating that the second symbol is changing. (Confirmed display). Thereby, it can be made to grasp | ascertain easily that the 2nd symbol was stopped and displayed with respect to the player.

  When the processing of S5916 is completed, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation processing (S156) when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started next. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit (S5917). If it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbols (S5917: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S5917: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5918).

  In the process of S5918, when it is determined that the value of the hour / counter counter 203j is 0, that is, when it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery (variation) is started this time is the normal state (S5919). : No), the opening time of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set to 0.9 seconds, the number of opening times is set to 2 (S5920), and the process proceeds to S5921.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5918, when it is determined that the value of the time-shortage counter 203j is greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the current normal symbol lottery (variation) is started is the time-shortened state. (S5918: Yes), the opening period of the lower electric accessory 64Da associated with the lower first entrance 64D is set to 1 second, the number of opening is set to 2 (S5924), and the process proceeds to S5923. To do.

  As described above, in this control example, the timing at which the normal symbol lottery (variation) is executed, and the timing at which the lower electric accessory 64Da opening operation to be executed based on the normal symbol winning is set. Only when both are in the time-short state, the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening action that is advantageous to the player. For example, in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol lottery ( Even if a short-time state is set before the normal symbol fluctuation time (10 seconds) ends, a long open is set as the operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da. There is nothing to do. Similarly, the normal state is set as the gaming state until the normal symbol change (lottery) executed in the state where the time reduction state is set is won and the normal symbol change stops. Even in this case, the lower opening of the lower electric accessory 64Da is not set. Therefore, it can be suppressed that a privilege (long opening of the lower electric accessory 64Da) that is excessively advantageous to the player is provided.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the lower electric accessory 64Da from being long open in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player is executed. The easy period can be limited to the short-time state. In this control example, the gaming state at the timing at which the normal symbol lottery (variation) is started and the timing at which the lower electric accessory 64Da is set to open is determined, and the gaming state set at each timing. Although the above-described configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the lower electric accessory 64Da based on the above, other configurations may be used.

  For example, an opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when the timing for starting the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol and the timing for setting the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da are both in the normal state (see FIG. 346). (Open operation set in S5924) may be set (short open is set), and long open (open operation set in S5922 of FIG. 346) may be set in other states. By configuring in this way, a benefit (long release) that is advantageous to the player is provided even for normal symbol fluctuations that are executed in the period before and after the short time state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the time-saving state more advantageous to the player.

  In this way, while the time reduction state is set as the gaming state, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes very short as “10 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the case where the normal state is set, Since the opening period of the lower first entrance 64D becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first entrance 64D. Become. In this control example, when the jackpot game is executed, the time-short state is terminated, so that the jackpot game is in the normal state. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed, the time reduction state is continuously set unless the time reduction end condition is satisfied. During the winning game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the small winning game, and the lower electric accessory 64Da is opened for a long time, and a plurality of winning ports (first specific winning port 65a, lower first winning ball). The specific period during which the ball enters the mouth 64D) is easy.

  By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, the lower electric accessory 64 </ b> Da and the lower first entrance 64 </ b> D are disposed above the first variable winning device 65. In addition, it may be configured such that a ball enters the two winning holes (V winning device 65a, lower first ball opening 64D) during the small hit game, so that the winning ball that can be acquired during the small hit game The number can be increased, and a privilege more advantageous to the player can be given.

  Returning to FIG. 346, the description will be continued. In the process of S5920, the opening / closing control start of the lower electric accessory 64Da associated with the lower first entrance 64D is set (S5921), and this process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set by the process of S5923, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the main process of opening / closing the electric accessory is executed next, and the process of S5924 Alternatively, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S5922 are completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 347, the jackpot end process (S1451) will be described. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S1451). In the jackpot end process (S1451), a process for setting a game state after the jackpot is executed at the end of the jackpot game.

  In the jackpot end process (S1451), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is 35 or less (S5951). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is 35 or less (S5951: Yes), the probability variation flag 203ca is set to ON (S5952), and the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is incremented by 1 (S5953). Next, the number command indicating the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is set (S5954), and the process proceeds to S5955.

  In the process of S5955, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj added in the process of S5953 is 35 (S5955). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is 35 (S5955: Yes), a state command before reaching the upper limit is set (S5956), and the process proceeds to S5957. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5955 that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is not 35 (S5955: No), the process of S5956 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5957.

  In the process of S5957, the big hit type read executed this time is executed (S5957). Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type read in the process of S5957 is jackpot C (S5958). If it is determined that the read jackpot type is jackpot C (S5958: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is set to 0 (S5960), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5958 that the jackpot type is not jackpot C (S5958: No), it is determined whether or not the read jackpot type is jackpot B (S5959). When it is determined that the read jackpot type is jackpot B (S5959: Yes), the game state at the time of winning is read from the game state storage area 203cb (S5961). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning read in the process of S5962 is a latent probability or a probability changing state (S5962). When it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not a latent state or a state of probability change (that is, a normal state or a time-short state) (S5962: No), the value of the time-shortage counter 203j is set to 10,000. (S5964), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5962 that the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent probability state or a probability variation state (S5962: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is set to 0 (S5963) This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5959 that the game is not a big hit B (S5959: No), the game state at the time of winning is read from the game state storage area 203cb (S5965). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is a short-time state (S5966). When it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is the time-saving state (S5966: Yes), the time-shortage counter 203j is set to 0 (S5960), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5966 that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the short-time state (S5966: No), 10000 is set in the short-time counter 203j (S5964), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5951 that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is not 35 or less (S5951: No), the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is set to 50 (S5967), and the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is set. The value is set to clear (S5968), and this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the sound lamp control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 348 to 351. First, the main process 4 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. The main process 4 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 257) in the first control example.

  Of the main process 4 (see FIG. 348) in the fourth control example, the processes of S2101 to S2113 and S2115 to S2120 are respectively S2101 to S2113 and S2115 of the main process (see FIG. 257) in the first control example. The same processes as those in steps S2120 to S2120 are executed. In the main process 4 (see FIG. 348) in the fourth control example, the command determination process 4 is replaced with the command determination process (see S2114, FIG. 258) of the main process (see FIG. 257) in the first control example. (S2171), and the process proceeds to S2115. This command determination process 4 (S2171) is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 258). Details of the command determination process 4 (S2171) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing the above-described command determination process 4 (S2171). This command determination process 4 (S2171) is a process executed in place of the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 258) as described above. Of the command determination process 4 (S2171) in the fourth control example, the processes of S2201 to S2213 are the same as the processes of S2201 to S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 258) in the first control example. Executed.

  In the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 349) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S2212 that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include a stop command. Next, it is determined whether or not a status command is included in an unprocessed command (S2251). If it is determined that a status command is included (S2251: Yes), A state command for executing control according to the gaming state notified by the command is executed (S2252). Details of the status command processing (S2252) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the state command process (S2252) is finished, the effect type and effect of the pseudo effect (the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165, the pseudo variation effect using the pseudo second entrance 1640, etc.). A pseudo effect setting process for setting a period is executed (S2253), and this process ends. The details of the pseudo effect setting process (S2253) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 349) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S2251 that the status command is not included in the unprocessed commands received from the main controller 110. (S2251: No) Next, it is determined whether or not a certain number of times of change command is included in the unprocessed command (S2254), and it is determined that a number of commands of the probability change is included in the unprocessed command. If this is the case (S2254: Yes), the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state notified by the probability variation count command (the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110) is used as the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cb. After setting (S2255), the process is terminated. By the processing of S2255, every time the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is changed on the main control device 110 side (every time the jackpot ends and the probability variation state of the special symbol or the special symbol low probability state is set) The value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cb can be updated in synchronization with the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj. Therefore, the remaining number of jackpots until the upper limit of the probability variation state is reached can be accurately grasped on the sound lamp control device 113 side. If it is determined in the process of S2251 that the unchanged command does not include the probability variation number command (S2251: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 350, the details of the status command process 4 (S2252) will be described. This state command process 4 (S2252) is a process for executing control according to the type of gaming state notified by the state command received from the main controller 110 as described above.

  In this state command process 4 (see FIG. 350), first, it is determined whether or not a change in gaming state has been notified (S3601), and the gaming state has not been changed (that is, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions). If it is determined that the notification is received (S2601: No), the process proceeds to S3609. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change of the gaming state is notified by the state command (S3601: Yes), whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (normal mode) or the probability change state (probability change mode) Is determined (S3602), and if it is determined that the current state is either the normal state or the probability variation state (S3602: Yes), the display command indicating the normal performance mode is set, and the process proceeds to S3609. The normal effect mode is an effect mode in which an effect that appears as if in a normal state in a general gaming machine is executed as described above.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, the normal state and the probability variation state are both a game state in which a game proceeds by performing a left-handed game aiming at the first entrance 64. In addition, even if a big hit is made, if the game state after the big hit is not in a latent state, it is concealed that the big win itself is, simply because the game ball has entered the general winning opening in the normal state It is configured to make it appear as if a prize ball has been granted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game without making the player aware of the relatively complicated state transition until the transition to the most advantageous latent state (latent probability mode). In other words, the player can be discouraged by winning only a small number (40) of winning balls despite having been a big hit, or the player is likely to be disappointed and the lower electric accessory 64Da is easily opened and closed. However, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the disadvantage to the player. As a result, it is possible for the player to feel that the unfavorable gaming state is merely continuing through the normal state, the probability changing state, and the jackpot state of the type that does not shift to the latent state, which are relatively unfavorable for the player. Since it can be made to appear, it is possible to provide a player with a more understandable presentation. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the gameability from becoming difficult for the player to understand, it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the state command process 4 (see FIG. 350) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S3602 that the current state command is not the normal state or the probability change state (S3602: No). ), Which means that the gaming state notified by the state command is either the latent state (latent mode) or the short time state, so that the gaming state notified by the state command is the latent state It is determined whether or not there is (S3604). In the process of S3604, when it is determined that the shift to the latent state (latent mode) has been notified by the state command (S3604: Yes), next, whether or not the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223cb is 5 or less. (S3605), and it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223b is 5 or less (that is, the number of times of looping the latent probability mode remains 30 times before reaching the probability variation limit number). In this case (S3605: Yes), a display command indicating the latent effect A mode is set (S3606), and the process proceeds to S3609. As a result, it is possible to continue performing the effect (see FIG. 324 (a)) as if the big hit state continues until the latent mode ends, so a very large number of rounds of 60 rounds or more. The player can have an illusion as if the jackpot was executed. Therefore, the player can have a greater satisfaction.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3605, it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223b is 6 or more (that is, the number of times the latent probability mode is looped before reaching the probability variation limit number is less than 30). If so (S3605: No), a display command indicating the latent effect B mode is set (S3607), and the process proceeds to S3609. In this latent production B mode, roughly divided, by the pseudo special 2 variation production, every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the pseudo electric accessory 1640a is opened and the game ball to the pseudo second entrance 1640 Is entered, and a period in which the variable display effect is executed and a period in which the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed are set. In the pseudo jackpot effect, an effect is shown in which a maximum of five jackpots (and a latent probability mode between jackpots) are shown as if they were one jackpot. As a result, a special symbol lottery is executed based on the entrance to the pseudo second entrance 1640, and the effect can be achieved as if the pseudo attacker 165 was opened and closed. Operation more easily understandable for a person can be realized. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3604, when it is determined that the gaming state notified by the state command is not the latent state (S3604: No), it is confirmed that the transition to the time-saving state (time-saving mode) is notified by the state command. This means that a display command indicating the time reduction mode is set (S3608), and this process ends.

  In the process of S3609, the information indicated by the received status command is stored (stored) in the status setting area 223g (S3609), and information corresponding to the effect mode set by any of the processes of S3603, S3606, S3607, and S3608. Is stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca (S3610), and this process ends. By executing the state command process 4 (see FIG. 350), it is possible to set an effect mode according to the gaming state notified from the main control device 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 351, the details of the above-described pseudo effect setting process (S2253) will be described. This pseudo effect setting process (S2253) is a process for setting the effect operation according to the type of the pseudo effect set in the state command process 4 (see FIG. 350).

  In this pseudo effect setting process (see FIG. 351), first, information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is read (S3701), and whether or not the read information is information indicating the latent effect A mode. It is determined (S3702). In the process of S3702, when it is determined that information indicating the latent effect A mode is stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca (S3702: Yes), the discharge for controlling the closing and opening of the flow path switching member 695 is performed. By setting the path switching solenoid to OFF, the flow path switching member 695 is set in an open state (S3703). Next, the number of rounds corresponding to the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cb is set as the number of rounds of the super-hit effect (S3704), and the process proceeds to S3705. In the super jackpot effect, an effect is performed in which five rounds of actual jackpots are shown as if they were one round. The jackpots of the second special symbol are all 10 rounds, so the number of rounds of the super jackpot effect is the value of the remaining jackpot number up to the probability variation limit number (the value obtained by subtracting the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cb from 36). A value multiplied by 2 is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3702 that the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is not information indicating the latent effect A mode (S3702), the processes of S3703 and S3704 are skipped, The processing moves to S3705.

  In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is information indicating the latent effect B mode (S3705), and is determined to be information indicating the latent effect B mode. In this case (S3705: Yes), the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223cb is read (S3706), and the effect period of the pseudo jackpot effect is set based on the read counter value (S3707), and the set effect period of the set jackpot effect is set An outside period (outside the execution period of the pseudo jackpot effect) is set as an effect period of the pseudo special figure 2 variation effect (S3708), and the process proceeds to S3709.

  In the processing of S3707 and S3708, for example, each pseudo jackpot is set so as to be as many as five actual jackpots, and the remaining jackpot count (the remaining jackpot count up to the probability variation limit count) is a value that cannot be divided by 5. In this case, the jackpot corresponding to the number of times divided by 5 is set as the duration of the first pseudo jackpot effect. More specifically, for example, in the process of S3705, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cb is 8, the remaining jackpot number up to the probability variation limit number (the number of jackpots to be won in the current latent probability mode) ) Means 28 times, so the first to third time (3 times, which is the remainder of 28 times divided by 5), the jackpot (and the latency mode period between jackpots) is 1 pseudo jackpot effect Set as the production period. In addition, thereafter, the pseudo special 2 fluctuating production period linked with the jackpot latent mode is repeated, and the pseudo jackpot production period that continues for five times (and the jackpot mode between the jackpots). Set to.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3705, when it is determined that the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is not information indicating the latent effect B mode (S3705: No), the processes of S3706 to S3708 are skipped. The process proceeds to S3709. In the process of S3709, a display effect command corresponding to each set effect is set, and this process ends.

  By executing this pseudo effect setting process (see FIG. 351), the effect mode of the pseudo effect executed in the latent mode is changed to the remaining jackpot number (the number of jackpots to be won before reaching the probability variable limit number). It can set to the mode according to. Therefore, the interest for the game in the latent mode can be improved.

  In the fourth control example, in the latent performance B mode, the arrangement is made so that the jackpot period for five times is as long as the pseudo-big jackpot effect period as much as possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, you may comprise so that the production | presentation period of each pseudo jackpot effect may become the period (number of jackpots) as close as possible. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cb is 8, a pseudo jackpot configured with four jackpot execution periods (and a jackpot mode period between jackpots) as a pseudo effect. An effect may be set twice, and a pseudo jackpot effect configured with five jackpot execution periods (and a jackpot latent mode period) may be set four times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the duration of each pseudo jackpot effect and the difference in the number of winning prize balls, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

<Modification of the first control example>
Next, a modification of the above-described first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 352 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 in the present modification. In the configuration of the game board 13 of the first control example described above, the second entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 are provided in the right region (see FIG. 208). On the other hand, the present modification is different in that the second entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 are provided in the right region.

  With this configuration, when a left-handed game is being performed, if the player wins a normal game, the ball can enter the second entrance without changing the game method. Therefore, when the effect mode of the charge effect is varied based on the usual drawing lottery result, the player can be notified of the lottery result advantageous to the player, so that the effect content to be executed can be watched closely. There is.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the number of special symbols is not limited to this, and three or more special symbols are used. These special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the gameability in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a rule in which a plurality of special symbols is determined and the gameability in which a lottery (variation) is performed independently have been described. However, each of the gaming properties described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
A displacement member formed so as to be displaceable in a first direction from a reference position and configured to be able to move a game ball in accordance with the displacement in the first direction, and a game from outside the track region of the displacement member to the track region of the displacement member In a gaming machine provided with a restricting means that restricts a ball from being sent, the displacement member includes:
The gaming machine A1 is formed to be displaceable from the reference position in a second direction opposite to the first direction.

Here, a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable in the first direction from the reference position and formed so as to be able to move the game ball in accordance with the displacement in the first direction, and a track region of the displacement member from outside the track region of the displacement member 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including a regulation unit that regulates that a game ball is sent to is known (for example, JP 2010-166997 A). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to suppress a specified number or more of the game balls from being sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member by the restriction of the restriction means. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, for example, if malfunction occurs in the restricting means due to sticking or wear, there is a risk that more than a specified number of gaming balls will be sent toward the trajectory region of the displacement member. In this case, there is a problem that a problem may occur due to game balls exceeding the specified number. That is, for example, game balls in excess of the specified number may enter the drive mechanism of the displacement member and be bitten by the movable part, causing damage. Alternatively, there is a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number may flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the second direction opposite to the first direction, so that the trajectory region of the displacement member can be expanded accordingly. Therefore, for example, even when a malfunction occurs in the restricting means and more than a specified number of game balls are sent,
Since the track area of the displacement member is enlarged, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be received in the track area. As a result, the game balls that exceed the specified number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the drive mechanism portion of the displacement member and out of the game area, and as a result, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be prevented from being defective. It can be made difficult to occur.

The gaming machine A1 includes a passage member that is formed as a passage through which a game ball can pass and whose downstream is communicated with the track region of the displacement member, and the restricting means restricts the passage of the game ball in the passage member. Characteristic gaming machine A2.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 includes a passage member that is formed as a passage through which a game ball can pass and that communicates with the track region of the displacement member on the downstream side. Since the passage of the ball is regulated, for example, even when a malfunction occurs in the regulating means and a specified number or more of the game balls are sent, the extra number of game balls are passed through the passage member through the passage member. The ball can be reliably sent to the orbital area. As a result, problems caused by game balls exceeding the specified number can be made difficult to occur.

In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to receive and hold a specified number of game balls sent from the passage member at the reference position, and at least the diameter of the game ball from the reference position in the second direction. The gaming machine A3 is formed so as to be displaceable by a distance exceeding.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to receive and hold a prescribed number of gaming balls sent from the passage member at the reference position, and from the reference position to the second position. Since it is formed to be displaceable by a distance exceeding at least the diameter of the game ball in the direction, after receiving the prescribed number of game balls at the reference position, the prescribed number is obtained by displacing the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction. The extra game balls can be sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member (the region on the first direction side of the displacement member). Therefore, it is possible to move the game balls in excess of the specified number as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction.

In this case, the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, and the game balls exceeding the specified number can be sent to the trajectory area. Therefore, the specified number of game balls and the game balls exceeding the specified number are separated. can do. Therefore, for example, by displacing the displacement member in the first direction, the operation of discharging only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track area while maintaining the state where the specified number of game balls are held by the displacement member. It becomes possible.

In gaming machine A3, gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed to be capable of changing its posture when displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is formed so that its posture can be changed when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position. While it is easy to maintain the state where the ball is held by the displacement member and the fall of the game ball from the displacement member can be suppressed, when the ball reaches a predetermined position, the change of the posture of the displacement member is used to play the game ball. Can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

In the gaming machine A4, the gaming machine A4 includes a recess formed in a track region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and the displacement member is disposed in the recess when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. A gaming machine A5 comprising a projecting portion to be engaged, and the projecting portion is formed so as to be changeable by being engaged with the concave portion.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A4, the gaming machine A5 includes a recess that is recessed in the track region when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Since the protrusion is engaged with the recess and the protrusion is engaged with the recess so that the posture can be changed, the structure for changing the posture of the displacement member can be simplified.

In the gaming machine A5, the protruding portion protrudes from the displacement member toward the first direction, and the protruding tip is in contact with the lower half surface of the gaming ball sent to the track region of the displacement member. A gaming machine A6 that is touched.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the projecting part projects from the displacement member in the first direction, and the projecting tip is sent to the track region of the displacement member. Since it is formed so as to be able to contact the lower half surface (that is, the game balls exceeding the specified number), when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is placed on the lower half surface with the protrusion. It can be moved while pushing. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge game balls in excess of the specified number from the track area.

Further, the protrusion is interposed between the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member and the game balls sent to the track area of the displacement member (game balls exceeding the specified number). It is possible to secure an interval between a specified number of game balls and a game ball exceeding the specified number by the protruding length of the portion. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track area while maintaining the state where the specified number of game balls are held by the displacement member.

Furthermore, the role of changing the attitude of the displacement member by engaging with the recess and the role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half of the ball are used as the protrusion, so the number of parts is reduced accordingly, and the product Cost can be reduced.

In gaming machine A5 or A6, gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the size of the recess in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the size of the recess in the first direction is made smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member That is, it is possible to easily pass through the recess when the displacement ball is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge game balls in excess of the specified number from the track area.

In any one of the gaming machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in a track region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and more than the recess. When the game ball sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is moved to the wall. The game machine A8 is characterized in that a change in the posture of the displacement member is regulated by being in contact with the portion and the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A8, in any of the gaming machines A5 to A7, the concave member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the gaming ball in the track region when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position. When the game ball sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is separated from the wall portion. Since the change in posture of the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be regulated by being in contact with the displacement member, only the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number are maintained while maintaining the state where the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls. Easy to discharge from the orbital area.

That is, since the wall portion is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is moved by being pushed by the protrusion as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is moved. By making the lower half surface abut against the wall portion, the game ball can easily get over the wall portion. In this case, the game ball is brought into contact with the displacement member (that is, the game ball is interposed between the displacement member and the wall portion), and a reaction force can be applied from the game ball to the displacement member. The posture change can be restricted, and it is possible to prevent the prescribed number of game balls held by the displacement member from dropping off. As a result, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, only the game balls exceeding the specified number can be easily discharged from the track area.

On the other hand, when game balls (that is, game balls exceeding a specified number) are not sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member, no game ball is interposed between the wall portion and the displacement member, so that the protrusion is in the recess. By engaging, the posture of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge a specified number of game balls (that is, game balls held by the displacement member) from the displacement member by utilizing the change in the posture of the displacement member.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member. It is possible to restrict or allow the game ball to be sent to the track region of the member. That is, the restriction or allowance of the game ball can be switched in synchronism with the displacement of the displacement member, so that, for example, according to the sensor device for detecting the position of the restricting means and the detection result of the sensor device. The driving means for driving the regulating means or the control of each means can be made unnecessary, and accordingly, the product cost can be reduced and the reliability of the operation can be improved.

In the gaming machine A9, the restricting means allows the game ball to be sent to the track region of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement member being displaced in the second direction from the reference position. Characteristic gaming machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A9, the restricting means is a game ball that moves the displacement member to the track region in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction. Therefore, the game ball can be reliably sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member and to the region on the first direction side of the displacement member.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, a base member in which the displacement member is displaceably disposed, and a vertically lower portion and an upper portion in the vertical direction of an end portion on the first direction side of the base member. And a recovery member having an opening in the game machine A11.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A10, the displacement member is disposed so as to be displaceable, and disposed below the end of the base member on the first direction side in the vertical direction. And a recovery member having an opening in the vertical direction upward, so that a game ball that is moved in accordance with the movement of the displacement member in the first direction and is discharged from the track region of the displacement member (that is, an amount exceeding a specified number) Game balls) can be received from the opening of the collecting member and collected.

In the gaming machine A11, the base member is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and the opening of the recovery member is at least the first member in the base member displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. A gaming machine A12 that is formed in a size that is located below the direction side end in the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A11, the base member is formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the displaced position, and the opening of the recovery member is displaced at least to the retracted position or the displaced position. Since the base member has a size that is positioned vertically below the end portion on the first direction side of the base member, the base member is discharged from the track region of the displacement member regardless of whether the base member is displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. The game balls to be played (that is, game balls in excess of the specified number) can be received from the opening of the collection member and collected.

In any of the gaming machines A5 to A8, by being inserted into the recessed space of the recess,
A gaming machine A13 comprising an insertion member for restricting the protrusion from engaging with the recess.

According to the gaming machine A13, in any of the gaming machines A5 to A8, the displacement member is provided with an insertion member that restricts the protrusion from engaging with the recess by being inserted into the recessed space of the recess. With the displacement in the first direction, it is possible to prevent the posture of the displacement member from being changed when the game balls exceeding the specified number are discharged from the track region of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track area while maintaining the state where the specified number of game balls are held by the displacement member.

The gaming machine A13 includes a base member that is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and the displaceable member is disposed so as to be displaceable, and the insertion member displaces the base member to the retracted position. When this is done, the gaming machine A1 is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, and separated from the recessed space of the recess when the base member is displaced to the displacement position.
4.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A13, when the base member is displaced to the retracted position, the insertion member is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, so that the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. As a result, when the amount of game balls exceeding the specified number is discharged from the track area of the displacement member, the displacement member is prevented from changing its posture, and the specified number of game balls are held by the displacement member. On the other hand, when the base member is displaced to the displacement position, the insertion member is separated from the recessed space of the recess, so that the protrusion is engaged with the recess as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. By being combined, it is possible to change the posture of the displacement member and to easily discharge a specified number of game balls from the displacement member.

<Concept of Invention with Distribution Unit 500 as an Example>
A downflow path through which the game ball flows down, a first branch path and a second branch path branched from the downflow path, and a game ball flowing down the downflow path to one of the first branch path or the second branch path A gaming machine comprising a sorting means for sorting, comprising a displacement member formed to be displaceable and receiving a game ball from the first branch passage, wherein the displacement member is displaced in contact with the sorting means. In the gaming machine B1, the distribution means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched.

Here, the downflow passage through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and the game ball flowing down the downflow passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine provided with a sorting means for sorting is known (for example, JP-A-2014-223).
176). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game ball that has flowed down the downflow passage,
Since one ball is alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are equally distributed between the first branch passage and the second branch passage (ie, half each). Sorted. That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, the gaming machine B1 includes a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and that receives a game ball from the first branch passage, and the displacement member abuts on the distribution means to be displaced. Since the means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch path or the second branch path can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be changed.

According to the gaming machine B1, since the allocating means can be displaced using the displacement of the displacement member, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means and a transmission mechanism for displacing the allocating means. it can. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the sorting means is controlled using position detection by the sensor device or driving by the driving means, the reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting means is reduced due to malfunction due to detection failure or control failure. However, according to the gaming machine B1, the sorting destination by the sorting means can be switched in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the reliability of the sorting operation can be improved.

In particular, since the displacement member is a member that receives a game ball from the first branch passage, the distribution destination of the distribution means can be switched to the first branch passage in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the first branch The game balls distributed to the passage can be reliably received by the displacement member.

In the gaming machine B1, the displacing member includes an urging unit that applies an urging force to the allocating unit and maintains a distribution destination by the allocating unit in one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. By displacing the allocating means in a direction against the direction of the urging force, the distribution destination by the allocating means is switched to the other of the first branch path or the second branch path, and the urging force The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is returned to one of the first branch path and the second branch path by the biasing force of the means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, a biasing force is applied to the sorting means,
Since the urging means for maintaining the distribution destination by the distribution means in one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage is provided, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being inadvertently switched. In this case, since the distribution means is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member and the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging means. It is not necessary that the member is in contact with the distributing means. That is, the displacement member can be separated from the distribution means. Therefore, the freedom degree of design of the movable range of a displacement member can be raised.

In the gaming machine B2, the urging means applies an urging force to the allocating means to maintain the distribution destination by the allocating means in the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, the biasing means applies a biasing force to the sorting means and maintains the sorting destination by the sorting means in the second branch passage, so that the displacement member However, it is possible to prevent the sorting destination by the sorting means from being switched to the first branch path in a state where the game ball cannot be received.

In the gaming machine B3, the gaming machine B3 includes a base member that is formed so as to be displaceable between a first position and a second position and on which the displacement member is disposed, and the base member is disposed at the first position. The displacement member is capable of receiving a game ball from the first branch passage and is capable of contacting the distribution means, and the displacement member is in the state where the base member is disposed at the second position. A gaming machine B4, wherein the member is made incapable of receiving a game ball from the first branch passage and incapable of contacting the distributing means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the gaming machine B4 includes a base member formed so as to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and the displacement member is disposed on the base member. The aspect which displaces a displacement member in the state which has arrange | positioned the base member in the 1st position, and the aspect which displaces a displacement member in the state which has arrange | positioned the base member in the 2nd position can be formed. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In this case, when the base member is located at the second position, the displacement member is unable to receive the game ball from the first branch passage, and in such a state, the displacement member is unable to contact the distribution means. Therefore, in a state where the displacement member cannot receive the game ball (a state where the base member is disposed at the second position), it is possible to suppress switching of the distribution destination by the distribution unit to the first branch passage.

The gaming machine B4 includes a second base member formed as a separate member from the base member, and the distribution means is disposed on the second base member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the gaming machine B5 includes the second base member formed as a separate member from the base member, and the second base member is provided with the distributing means. Therefore, the increase in size of the base member can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least between a switching position and a receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, and the displacement member is displaced to the switching position. In this state, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and when the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member can receive the game ball from the first branch passage. And the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage.
.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be at least displaceable between a switching position and a receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, In the state where the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in the state where the displacement member is displaced to the reception position, the displacement member receives the game ball from the first branch passage. In addition to being able to receive, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the prescribed number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the displacement member receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, so the displacement member There is a possibility that the game balls are distributed to the first branch passage beyond the prescribed number that can be received. When a means for restricting the inflow of game balls to the first branch passage is separately provided, the structure becomes complicated and the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B6, the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, and after the prescribed number (or less than the prescribed number) of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position. Then, since the distribution destination is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from flowing down to the first branch passage. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball exceeding the regulation number which a displacement member can receive is distributed to a 1st branch passage. Also,
Since there is no need to provide the above-described means separately, it is possible to improve the reliability and reduce the product cost.

In the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or a plurality of protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed on an inner wall surface thereof, and provides resistance to a game ball passing through the first branch passage. A gaming machine B7 comprising means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or a plurality of protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed on the inner wall surface, and passes through the first branch passage. Since the resistance means for applying resistance to the game ball to be played is provided, the speed of the game ball passing through the first branch passage can be reduced. Therefore, the time required when the displacement member is displaced from the switching position to the reception position can be lengthened accordingly, so that the game ball can be reliably received by the displacement member. Further, the output of the driving means can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the displacement member can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B6 or B7, the allocating means moves the first according to the displacement of the allocating means.
A first in / out portion and a second in / out portion formed so as to be capable of intruding into and from the branch passage are provided, and the first in / out portion projects the game ball flowing down the down passage by projecting into the first branch passage. The second
It is formed so as to be able to be distributed to the branch passage, and the second in / out part is more in the first in / out part than the first in / out part.
It is located on the downstream side of the branch passage and protrudes to the first branch passage so that the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be regulated.
A gaming machine B8, wherein one of the protruding and retracting portions is retracted out of the first branch passage in a state where one protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6 or B7, the distribution means includes a first in / out portion formed so as to be in / out with respect to the first branch passage according to the displacement of the distribution means, and A first in / out part is provided so that the first in / out part protrudes to the first branch passage so that a game ball flowing down the down passage can be distributed to the second branch passage. It is located on the downstream side of the first branch path with respect to the in / out part and protrudes into the first branch path so that the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch path can be regulated, and the first in / out part In the state where one protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage, so that the distribution means is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member. Then, only the specified number of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage and used as the displacement member. It can be only taken.

That is, the first state where the first in / out portion protrudes to distribute the game balls flowing down the down passage to the second branch passage, and the first in / out portion retreats so that the game balls flowing down the down passage A second state for distributing to the first branch passage, a third state for restricting the flow of game balls distributed to the first branch passage (reserving game balls) by projecting the second in / out part, The fourth in which the game ball stored in the first branch passage flows down and is received by the displacement member by the withdrawal of the in / out part.
By combining these states, only a prescribed number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

Further, according to the gaming machine B8, the sorting means includes the first in / out part and the second in / out part, that is,
Since it is formed as one component, the structure of the distribution means (structure for operating the first and second protrusions and the second protrusions and exerting their functions) can be simplified. Furthermore, since one of the first protruding part and the second protruding part is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage when one protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the two positions of the displacement member (switching position) It is sufficient that the distribution means is formed to be displaceable in two positions according to the receiving position. That is, the first to fourth states described above can be formed by displacing the distributing means at two positions. Therefore, the structure of the allocating means and the structure for displacing the allocating means in accordance with the displacement of the displacing member can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball allocating operation can be improved accordingly.

<Concept of Invention with Distribution Unit 500 as an Example>
A downflow path through which the game ball flows down, a first branch path and a second branch path branched from the downflow path, and a game ball flowing down the downflow path to one of the first branch path or the second branch path A gaming machine comprising a sorting means for sorting, characterized in that it comprises a flow-down state changing means that is positioned downstream of the sorting means and that regulates or allows the flow of game balls in the first branch passage. Game machine C1.

Here, the downflow passage from which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and the game ball flowing down the downflow passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine provided with a sorting means for sorting is known (for example, JP-A-2014-223).
176). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game ball flowing down the downflow passage is
Since it is only distributed to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, there is a problem that it is insufficient to provide interest to the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the game machine C1 is provided with a flow state changing means that is located downstream of the distribution means and restricts or allows the flow of game balls in the first branch passage. Can be given.

That is, the operation of the flow-down state changing means regulates the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage, stores the game balls in the first branch passage, and allows the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. The game balls stored in the first branch passage can be made to flow down (open).
Thereby, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, the operation of stopping (reserving) the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage is temporarily stopped. Then, the stopped (stored) game ball can be caused to flow down (release). As a result, interest can be given to the player.

In the gaming machine C1, the first branch passage is provided in a state in which the distribution means and the flow-down state changing means are integrally formed, and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage. In the state where the flow of the game ball in the flow is regulated by the flow state change means and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is caused by the flow state change means. A gaming machine C2 that is allowed.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, since the allocating means and the flow-down state changing means are integrally formed, the allocating means and the flow-down state changing means are operated. It is possible to simplify the structure and improve the operation reliability. That is, when the distribution means and the flow-down state changing means are formed separately, there are two parts, so that the structure for operating these two parts is complicated and the reliability of the operation is reduced. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, since the distributing means and the flow-down state changing means can be formed as one part, the structure can be simplified correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the operation reliability can be improved. Can be planned.

Further, in this case, if the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch path by the operation of the integral member, the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch path is regulated by the flow state changing means and the first When the game balls are stored in the branch passage and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow of game balls in the first branch passage is allowed by the flow-down state changing means and stored in the first branch passage. The game ball that has been made can be allowed to flow down (release). That is, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of stopping (reserving) the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage, In addition to forming an action to flow down (open) the stopped (stored) game ball, these storage and release actions can be alternately formed in conjunction with the sorting operation.

In the gaming machine C2, the integral member is formed to be displaceable between a first state position and a second state position, and in the state where the integral member is displaced to the first state position, the distribution means is the first state position. It is arranged at a position where the one branch passage is assigned as a distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position for restricting the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage, and the integrated member is displaced to the second state position. In the state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is assigned as a distribution destination, and the flow-down state changing means is arranged at a position allowing the flow of game balls in the first branch passage. A gaming machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the integral member is formed to be displaceable between the first state position and the second state position, and in the state where the integral member is displaced to the first state position. The distribution means is disposed at a position where the first branch passage is assigned to the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is disposed at a position for restricting the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage, and the integral member is displaced to the second state position. In this state, since the distributing means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is assigned as the distribution destination, and the flow-down state changing means is arranged at a position allowing the flow of game balls in the first branch passage,
In addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage by displacing the integral member at two positions (first state position and second state position), the first member
It is possible to form an operation that stops (stores) the flow of the game balls distributed to the branch passages once, and an operation that flows (opens) the stopped (stored) game balls, and stores and releases them. Can be alternately formed in conjunction with the sorting operation. That is, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced and the operation reliability can be improved.

In the gaming machine C3, the one-piece member is formed to be rotatable, and at least the flow-down state changing means is formed to be able to move in and out with respect to the first branch passage, and the game ball is projected by projecting to the first branch passage. The game machine C4 is formed in a shape curved in an arc shape with the rotation axis of the integral member as a center.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the integral member is formed to be rotatable, and at least the flow-down state changing means is formed to be capable of appearing and retracting with respect to the first branch path. The flow of the game ball is regulated by projecting to the inner wall of the first branch passage so as to be curved and curved in the shape of the arc around the rotation axis of the integral member. It is possible to reduce the area of the hole that is opened.

In the gaming machine C4, the flow state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the flow-down state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave, so that the flow-down state change to the first branch passage In the initial state in which the means starts to protrude (that is, the state where only the front end side of the flow state changing means protrudes into the passage), the shape of the front end side of the flow state changing means is easy to regulate the flow of the game ball It can arrange | position in direction and can make it easy to regulate the flow-down of the game ball distributed to the 1st branch passage.

Further, in a state where the flow state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage to the maximum and restricts the flow of the game ball, the game ball can be stably held by the recess of the flow state changing means, so that the game ball can be prevented from rampage. .

In the gaming machine C4 or C5, the gaming machine C4 or C5 includes a biasing unit that applies a biasing force to the integrated member and biases the flow-down state changing unit in a direction protruding into the first branch passage. A gaming machine C6, wherein the distance to the rotating shaft of the integral member is made larger than the distance from the distributing means to the rotating shaft of the integral member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the gaming machine C6 is provided with a biasing means that biases the integral member in a direction in which the flow-down state changing means projects into the first branch passage. Therefore, the urging force can be used to easily maintain the integrated member in a posture (that is, the first state position) in which the flow state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage.

In this case, in the gaming machine C6, the distance from the flow state changing means to the rotating shaft of the integrated member is made larger than the distance from the distributing means to the rotating shaft of the integrated member, so that the game balls flowing down collide with each other. Even when the same impact force is applied due to the large distance from the rotating shaft, the flow-down state changing means is likely to be immersed, but the biasing direction of the biasing means is such that the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage. By being made into the direction to do, it can suppress that the flowing-down state change means is immersed by the amount of the urging force.

In the gaming machine C6, the integrated member is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the integrated member is rotated in the direction in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage due to its own weight. A posture in which the flow state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage (that is, the first state position).
Easy to maintain. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to further suppress the immersion state changing means from being immersed by its own weight.

In addition, even when the urging means falls off, it is possible for the game ball to flow down to the first branch passage by maintaining the integrated part in a posture in which the flow state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage by its own weight. Can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution unit is the first branch passage, and the flow of game balls in the first branch passage is restricted by the flow state changing unit, A gaming machine C, wherein a gaming ball that flows down the flow-down passage is formed to be able to flow down to the second branch passage when a specified number of game balls are stored in the branch passage.
8.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage, and the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is the flow-down state changing means In a state where a prescribed number of game balls are stored in the first branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are formed to be able to flow down to the second branch passage, so that more than the prescribed number of game balls flow down When flowing down the passage, it is possible to suppress the amount of game balls that exceed the specified number from staying in the downflow passage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the distribution means (operation using the distribution destination as the second branch passage) from being hindered by the game balls stagnating in the flow-down passage.

In the gaming machine C8, an inner wall facing the second branch passage in the flow-down passage has a game ball flowing down the flow-down passage as a tail end of the prescribed number of game balls stored in the first branch passage. The game machine C9 is formed so as to be capable of being guided to the side surface of the game ball of the second branch passage side.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C8, the inner wall facing the second branch passage in the downflow passage has a predetermined number of game balls flowing down the downflow passage stored in the first branch passage. Since it is formed so that it can be guided to the side surface on the second branch passage side in the last game ball of the game balls,
The game ball flowing down the downflow passage can easily flow down to the second branch passage after colliding with the last game ball of the prescribed number of game balls.

Note that the last game ball among the prescribed number of game balls means a game ball located on the upstream side (opposite to the flow-down state changing means). When the specified number is 1, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the first branch passage.

In the gaming machine C8 or C9, the gaming machine C10 is characterized in that a downstream direction of the downstream end of the downstream passage is formed in a direction different from a downstream direction of the upstream end of the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C8 or C9, the flow-down direction at the downstream end of the flow-down passage is formed in a direction different from the flow-down direction at the upstream end of the first branch passage. When the game ball that flows down collides with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage, the direction of the repulsive force applied to the last game ball is set in the first branch passage. It can be different from the flow direction at the upstream end. As a result, it is possible to prevent the last game ball from jumping out of the upstream end of the first branch passage and flowing into the second branch passage due to the repulsive force at the time of collision.

In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the allocating means is formed so as to be capable of appearing and retracting with respect to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage, and a position of the protrusion and discharge is a flow-down direction at a downstream end of the flow-down passage A gaming machine C11 characterized in that it is an inner wall on an extension line of

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the sorting means is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage, Since it is the inner wall on the extension line in the flow-down direction at the downstream end of the passage, the sorting means can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the downstream end of the flow-down passage. Therefore,
It is possible to shorten the time required for the game balls to be distributed after the sorting means starts to project into the flow-down passage or the first branch passage. As a result, the distribution destination can be switched more reliably by the distribution means.

In the gaming machine C11, the allocating means distributes the game ball flowing down the flow-down path to the second branch path by projecting into the flow-down path or the first branch path, The gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the projecting direction of the means is set so that the upstream end of the second branch passage is directed.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C11, the sorting means projects the game ball flowing down the flow-down path to the second branch path by protruding into the flow-down path or the first branch path. Since the projecting direction of the distributing means is set to a direction directed to the upstream end of the second branch passage, when the game ball flowing down the downflow passage comes into contact with the distributing means in the middle of the projecting operation The game ball can be pushed into the second branch passage in accordance with the protruding operation of the sorting means. As a result, the distribution to the second branch passage can be performed more reliably.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side, and a game ball is formed on the inner wall on the lower side in the gravitational direction so as to be capable of rolling. The game machine C13 is characterized in that the changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and retract from the inner wall on the lower side in the gravity direction into the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed to be inclined downward toward the downstream side, and the gaming ball is placed on the inner wall on the lower side in the gravity direction. The flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to roll, and is formed so as to be able to protrude and retract into the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity, so that the game is started after the flow state change means starts to protrude into the first branch passage. It is possible to shorten the time required until the flow of the sphere can be regulated. As a result, the distribution destination of the distribution means is switched from the second branch passage to the first branch passage, and when the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage, the flow-down state change means It is easy to keep the protrusion in time.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first branch passage, and at least protrudes to the first branch passage in the protruding direction. A gaming machine C14, wherein a force component is applied from the game ball to the flow-down state changing means.

According to the gaming machine C14, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be capable of appearing and retracting with respect to the first branch passage, and at least protrudes to the first branch passage. Since the force component in the direction of the action is applied from the game ball to the flow state changing means, when the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is restricted, the game ball flows down due to the impact when the game ball collides. It is possible to suppress the state changing means from being immersed. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

<Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, a base member disposed on one side of the base member so as to be displaceable, and a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, a base associated with the displacement of the displacement member. A gaming machine D1 comprising a suppressing means for suppressing the reaction of the members.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a base member, a base member that is displaceably disposed on one side of the base member, and a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member (for example, JP, 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of displacing the base member between the extended position where the base member extends to the gaming area and is visible from the player, and the retracted position retracted from the gaming area, An effect of displacing the displacement member can be performed in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the overhang position.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since one side of the base member is displaceably disposed on the base member, when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattling with respect to the base member with the one side serving as a fulcrum. There was a problem that was likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the suppression means for suppressing the reaction of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is provided, the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member when the displacement member is displaced is suppressed. can do.

The reaction force accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is generated, for example, by a change in the center of gravity accompanying the displacement of the displacement member, or by an action of an inertial force accompanying an increase or decrease (change in acceleration) of the displacement member. Examples thereof include those generated by the reaction force when the displacement member is displaced and emitted from the game ball.

In the gaming machine D1, the suppression means includes a disposition member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displaceable member is formed so as to be able to hold and emit a game ball, and the disposition member includes: A gaming machine D, which is formed to be displaceable when a game ball is emitted from the displacement member.
2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the suppression means includes a disposing member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displaceable member is formed so as to be able to hold and emit the game ball. And
Since the arrangement member is formed to be displaceable when the game ball is emitted from the displacement member, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member. That is, when a game ball is fired from the displacement member, the center of gravity of the base member is changed by the weight of the game ball, for example, in a direction that cancels out the change in the center of gravity due to the launch of the game ball. When the structure which displaces an installation member is employ | adopted, generation | occurrence | production of the shakiness of the base member accompanying the change of a gravity center position can be suppressed. Further, when a game ball is fired from the displacement member, the base member receives a reaction as the game ball is fired. For example, the arrangement member is displaced in a direction that cancels the reaction caused by the game ball being fired. When it employs, the occurrence of rattling of the base member due to the reaction can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming machine D3 is provided with a reverse member that is displaced with at least a displacement component that is opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member when the displacement member is displaced.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, the reverse member that is displaced with at least a displacement component that is opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member. Since it is provided, it can be made small by the displacement of a reverse member that the gravity center position of a base member changes with the displacement of a displacement member. As a result, rattling of the base member due to the change in the center of gravity position can be suppressed.

In addition, when the displacement member is started to be displaced, if the displacement of the opposite member is started, at least a part of both inertia forces can be canceled out. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state.

The gaming machine D2 or D3 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member to displace the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member. A gaming machine D4 to play.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2 or D3, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the displacement of the displacement member to the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member to displace the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide driving means for displacing the arrangement member or / and the reverse member. That is, the driving means for displacing the displacement member is the disposing member or (and)
It can also serve as a driving means for displacing the reverse member. Therefore, the base member can be reduced in weight and the rattling can be easily suppressed.

Further, since it is possible to mechanically synchronize with the displacement of the displacement member and / or to displace the reverse member, for example, the position of the displacement member is detected by a sensor device and disposed according to the detection result. Control of driving the member or (and) the reverse member with the driving means can be made unnecessary, and the product cost can be reduced correspondingly, and the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member or (and) the reverse member with respect to the displacement member can be reduced. Can be secured.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts displacement from a second position, and the displacement start from a first position closer to one side of the base member than the second position. The game machine D5 starts to be displaced from the first position in a state where at least the base member is disposed at a predetermined position with respect to the base member.

Here, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized,
Shaking of the base member is likely to occur due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member has a mode of starting displacement from the second position and one side of the base member from the second position. And a state in which the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member (for example, the base member protrudes into the game area from the player). Since the displacement is started from the first position at the overhang position where the visual recognition is possible, rattling of the base member can be suppressed. That is, since the first position is closer to one side of the base member than the second position, the weight of the displacement member can be determined based on the first position as the start position of the displacement member. The member can be kept close to the fulcrum when the member shakes against the base member, and accordingly, the influence of the inertial force when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be made difficult to act on the base member. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress rattling of the base member.

The gaming machine D5 includes a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member having a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, and the displacement member is disposed on the rack member. Machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5, the gaming machine D6 includes a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member formed with a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, and the rack member includes a displacement member. Therefore, when starting displacement of the displacement member from the first position, not only the weight of the rack member but also the weight of the rack member is one side of the base member (the base member is relative to the base member). It can be close to the fulcrum when rattling. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state.

In the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position is the direction away from one side of the base member, so the displacement member is in the first position. In the state where the rack member is disposed, the rack member can be brought closer to one side of the base member. That is, in order to displace the displacement member (rack member) in a direction away from one side of the base member, the rack member is based on a portion on the rack gear side where the pinion gear is engaged after the displacement member starts to be displaced. It will be directed to one side of the member. Therefore, the weight of the rack member can be made closer to one side of the base member (the fulcrum when the base member rattles against the base member), and as a result, the displacement member can be displaced from the stopped state. The backlash of the base member can be easily suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, comprising: a support structure that supports the base member to displace one side of the base member; and a drive mechanism that drives the base member supported by the support structure, The displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and emit the game ball, and the drive mechanism restricts the base member from being displaced in a reaction direction when the game ball is emitted from the displacement member. A gaming machine D8, comprising:

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a support structure that supports the base member so that one side of the base member can be displaced, and a base member that is supported by the support structure are driven. The displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and emit the game ball, and the drive mechanism is configured to displace the base member in a reaction direction when the game ball is emitted from the displacement member. Since the restricting means for restricting is provided, it is possible to suppress the base member from being displaced with respect to the base member due to the reaction. As a result, occurrence of rattling of the base member can be suppressed.

<Concept of Invention with Rotating Unit 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotating member that is formed so as to be rotatable and whose outer peripheral surface is disposed so as to be visible to a player, the gaming machine includes a displacement member disposed so as to be displaceable on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. A featured gaming machine E1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a rotating member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer peripheral surface is disposed so as to be visible to a player (for example, JP 2009-119140 A). In this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the player can visually recognize the display (symbol) on the outer peripheral surface while rotating the rotating member or stopping the rotating member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, as the spinning member is rotated or stopped, it is only possible to form an effect mode that allows the player to visually recognize the display of the outer peripheral surface. There was a problem that was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the displacement member is disposed so as to be displaceable on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the display of the outer peripheral surface is displayed to the player as the rotating member is rotated or stopped. In addition to the effect mode to be visually recognized, the effect mode of displacing the displacement member can be formed, so that the effect can be enhanced by changing the effect mode accordingly.

The rotating member does not need to have a circular cross-sectional shape cut along a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis, and may be a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member may not be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least between the first position and the second position, and at the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is formed by the displacement member. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that at the second position, at least a part of the displacement member protrudes radially outward of the drum member.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotation member is formed by the displacement member. The outer shape can be reduced, and the space required for the rotation of the rotating drum member can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, at least a part of the displacement member protrudes radially outward of the rotating member, so that it is easy for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the displacement member. Can be increased. In addition, for example, the rotating member is rotated in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the first position, and the displacement member is disposed (displaced) at the second position when the rotation of the rotating member is stopped. The part (displacement member) visually recognized with the outer peripheral surface of a rotating member can form the aspect protruded to radial direction outward of a rotating member, and can enhance interest.

The gaming machine E2 includes light emitting means for emitting light, and the rotating member is formed to have an internal space, the light emitting means is disposed in the internal space, and the displacement member is the second member.
When displaced to a position, an outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum member is opened, and the internal space communicates with the outside.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E2, it comprises a light emitting means for emitting light,
The rotating member is formed having an internal space, and light emitting means is disposed in the internal space.
When the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is opened and the internal space communicates with the outside, so that the light emitted by the light emitting means can be emitted to the outside, and the displacement member is By being displaced to one position, the emission to the outside can be blocked. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machine E4 includes a driving unit that generates a driving force and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the rotating member and the displacement member. .

Here, in order to form the rotator member in a rotatable manner and displace the displacing member in the rotator member, a driving means is required for each of the rotator member and the displacing member. Bulky. Further, when the driving means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the rotating member, the weight of the rotating member increases, and it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means to the rotating member and the displacement member Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, the rotation of the rotating member and the displacement of the displacement member can be performed by also using one drive means. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Moreover, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the displacement member on the rotating member, the weight of the rotating member can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating member can be started or stopped smoothly.

In the gaming machine E4, the driving means is formed so as to be able to generate a rotational driving force, the transmitting means transmits a rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating member, A displacement-side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force to the displacement member; and the rotational driving force is transmitted to one of the rotational-side transmission means or the displacement-side transmission means in accordance with the rotational direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means. A gaming machine E5, comprising a one-way clutch mechanism that blocks transmission to the other.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the driving means is formed so as to be able to generate a rotational driving force, and the transmission means transmits the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating member. Means, a displacement-side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and a rotational driving force according to the rotational direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means is transmitted to one of the rotation-side transmission means or the displacement-side transmission means. In addition, since the one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off the transmission to the other is provided, it is possible to switch the drive target (rotating member or displacement member) driven by the rotational driving force only by switching the rotation direction of the driving means. That is, according to the rotation direction of the driving means, the rotation of the rotating member and the stop of the rotation, and the displacement of the displacement member and the stop of the displacement can be switched. It can be simplified.

In the gaming machine E5, the rotation-side transmission means includes a gear train that forms part or all of a transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the rotor member, and one of the gear trains. A gaming machine E6 comprising a load gear to be engaged.

Here, in the structure in which the driving object (rotating member or displacement member) is switched according to the rotation direction of the driving means using the one-way clutch mechanism, when transmission of the driving force from the driving means is interrupted, It becomes a state where the rotation or displacement in the direction driven by the driving force is free. Therefore, for example, when the driving object of the driving means is switched from the rotating member to the displacing member and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, the rotating member becomes rotatable, and the rotation continues due to inertial force (rotation). There is a risk of being.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E5, the rotation-side transmission means is a gear train that forms part or all of the transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating member. And a load gear meshed with one gear of the gear train, even when transmission of the rotational driving force from the driving means is interrupted, a load (resistance) when rotating the load gear ) Can be used to suppress the rotation of the rotating drum member.

In the gaming machine E5 or E6, the gaming machine E7 is provided with a reverse rotation restricting means for restricting the rotating member from rotating in the direction opposite to the direction rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means. .

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E5 or E6, the reverse rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotating member in the direction opposite to the direction rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means. Since it is provided, for example, it is possible to prevent the rotating member from being reversely rotated due to a deviation in the center of gravity of the rotating member or a collision of game balls.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotating member is formed having an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, an outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is opened, and the internal space Is connected to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotating member is formed with an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member Is released,
Since the internal space communicates with the game area, the game balls flowing down the game area can flow into the internal space of the rotating member, or the game balls in the internal space of the rotating member can flow out to the gaming area. . Further, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is closed, so that the inflow and outflow of the game ball between the internal space and the game area can be blocked. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is the game. A gaming machine E9 that is projected to the area.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E8, the displacement member is pivotally supported on one side by the rotating member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the opposite side to the one side Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space of the rotating member using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine E9, the upper surface of the displacement member is inclined downward from the other side toward the one side when the displacement member is displaced to the second position.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E9, the displacement member is inclined downward from the other side to the one side in the state where the displacement member is displaced to the second position. After the game ball that has flowed down is received by the upper surface of the displacement member, the received game ball can be guided (rolled) along the downward slope of the upper surface of the displacement member to the inner space of the rotating member. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space of the rotating member using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine E9 or E10, the gaming machine E11 is provided with a displacement setting means for restricting or allowing the displacement of the displacement member in accordance with the rotational position of the rotating member.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E9 or E10, the gaming machine E11 includes the displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotating drum member. Interference with other members around the rotating drum member can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines E9 to E11, a rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the rotating drum member is provided, and the rotation restricting member is configured such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member is the A gaming machine E12 that restricts the rotation of the rotating drum member when projecting into a gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E9 to E11, the gaming machine E12 includes rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotating member, and the rotation regulating member has the displacement member displaced to the second position. When the other side of the displacement member is extended to the game area, the rotation of the rotation member is restricted, so that the rotation member is rotated while the displacement member is extended and is positioned on the rotation trajectory. It can suppress that a displacement member interferes with another member. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

<Concept of Invention with Rotating Unit 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine including a rotating member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer peripheral surface is disposed so as to be visible to a player, the rotating member includes an internal space formed therein and an internal space formed outside the internal space. And a communication port formed so that a game ball can pass therethrough and a gaming machine F1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a rotating member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer peripheral surface is disposed so as to be visible to a player (for example, JP 2009-119140 A). According to this gaming machine, the rotator member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the player can visually recognize the display (symbol) on the outer peripheral surface while rotating the rotator member or stopping the rotator member. be able to. However,
In the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the use of the rotating member is insufficient because it is only used as a member for holding a display for the player to visually recognize on the outer peripheral surface.
In other words, the rotator member is required to hold a display that can be visually recognized by the player, and is thus formed in a relatively large size. Therefore, while the occupied space by the rotating member is increased, portions other than the outer peripheral surface are not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the rotating member includes an internal space formed therein, and a communication port that allows the game ball to pass through while communicating with the internal space. The game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port. Therefore, the internal space of the spinning member that is a dead space can function as a storage space for a game ball or a pitching passage, and the spinning member can be used accordingly.

In addition, a communicating port may be formed only in one place of a rotating member, and may be formed in two or more places. When the communication port is formed only at one place, the communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum member. As a result, the position of the communication port can be raised or lowered in accordance with the rotational position of the rotating drum member, so that the game ball flows into or out of the internal space via the communication port (the communication port faces upward). The game ball can flow into the internal space at the same time, and the game ball in the internal space can flow out when the communication port faces downward).

Further, the rotating drum member does not have to have a circular cross-sectional shape cut by a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis, and may be a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member may not be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine F1, the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the communication port includes the first communication port and the second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port. One of the communication port or the second communication port is used as an inflow port for allowing game balls to flow into the internal space from the outside, and the other of the first communication port or the second communication port is used as an outflow port for allowing game balls to flow out from the internal space to the outside. It can be. That is, even if the rotating member is not rotated (while maintaining the stopped state), the rotating member can be used as a game ball sending passage. In addition, in the state which is rotating the rotating member, you may utilize this rotating member as a pitching path.

In the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and is formed as an inflow port through which a game ball flowing down a game area flows into the internal space, and the second communication port is The gaming machine F3 is formed on an end surface of the rotating drum member in the rotation axis direction, and is formed as an outlet for allowing a game ball to flow out from the internal space to the game area.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and is formed as an inlet for allowing the game ball flowing down the gaming area to flow into the internal space. The second communication port is formed at the end surface of the rotating member in the rotation axis direction, and is formed as an outlet for allowing the game ball to flow out from the internal space to the game area. In addition to making it easier for the player to visually recognize the inflow, the game ball can be discharged while maintaining the rotating member in a stopped state.

That is, the rotating member is disposed so that its outer peripheral surface is visible from the player,
Since the first communication port (inlet) is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the inflow of game balls. On the other hand, when the second communicating port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the gaming ball cannot flow out from the internal space when the rotating member is displaced to the rotational position where the communicating port is located above. Since the second communication port (outlet) is formed on the end surface of the rotating member in the rotation axis direction, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can flow out of the internal space regardless of the rotational position of the rotating member.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, a displacement member is disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be displaceable. When the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the communication port is displaced. The gaming machine F4, wherein the communication port is opened when the member is shielded and the displacement member is displaced to the second position.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the gaming machine F4 includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the displacement member is displaced to the first position. Then, the communication port is shielded by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the communication port is opened, so that the inflow / outflow of the game ball through the communication port is blocked and allowed. Can be switched.

In the gaming machine F4, the communication port is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the displacement member is pivotally supported on one side so as to be rotatable on the rotating member, and the displacement member is in the second position. When displaced, the game machine F5 is characterized in that the other side opposite to the one side is projected to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is pivotally supported on one side by the rotating member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the opposite side from the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the communication port is formed as an inflow port, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space of the rotating member using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F5, a gaming machine F6, wherein one side of the displacement member is positioned on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating drum member with respect to the other side.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, the displacement member is positioned on the front side in the rotational direction of the rotating member relative to the other side, so that the rotating member is rotated. Even if the displacement member interferes with members disposed around the rotating drum member, the force generated by the interference can be applied in the direction of closing the displacement member (displacement to the first position). That is, the displacement member protrudes by interfering with other members when the rotating drum member rotates (displaced to the second position).
This can be suppressed. Moreover, it can suppress that a displacement member engages with another member and rotation of a rotating member is inhibited.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the rotating member is rotatably disposed on the base member, and is supported by the base member and disposed in the inner space of the rotating member. A gaming machine F7 comprising a fixing member that is non-rotating.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, a base member in which the rotating member is rotatably disposed, and an internal space of the rotating member supported by the base member And a fixed member that is not rotated with respect to the rotating drum member, so that the game ball that has flowed into the internal space is held by the fixed member or rolled on the fixed member toward the outlet. ,
Along with the rotation of the rotating member, it is possible to prevent the game ball from violating in the internal space or preventing the game ball from rolling and staying in the internal space.

In any one of the gaming machines F4 to F6, the gaming machine F8 is provided with a displacement setting means for restricting or allowing the displacement of the displacement member in accordance with the rotational position of the rotating member.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, the displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotating member is provided.
It can suppress that the displacement member displaced to the position interferes with other members around the rotating drum member.

The gaming machine F5 or F6 includes rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the rotating member, and the rotation restricting member is configured such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member is moved to the game area. A gaming machine F9 that regulates rotation of the rotating drum member when overhanging.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5 or F6, the gaming machine F9 includes rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotating member. The rotation regulating member has a displacement member displaced to the second position, and the displacement member Since the rotation of the rotating member is restricted when the other side is extended to the game area, the rotating member is rotated in a state where the displacement member is extended, and the other member located on the rotation trajectory. It is possible to suppress the interference of the displacement member. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F3, light emitting means that is formed so as to be capable of emitting light and disposed in the inner space of the rotating member, and the second communication port is formed at an end surface in the rotation axis direction of the rotating member. The gaming machine F10 is provided with an opening formed in an end face opposite to the end face, and an electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, an opening is formed on the end surface of the rotating member in the rotation axis direction opposite to the end surface on which the second communication port is formed. Since the electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening, it is possible to easily secure a usable space for each of the second communication port and the opening. As a result, the game ball can flow out smoothly through the second communication port, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line can be easily performed. In addition, since the second communication port and the opening can be separated as much as possible, the internal space can be
Interference between the game ball rolling to the communication port and the electrical connection line can be easily suppressed.

<Concept of Invention with Rotating Unit 700 as an Example>
A first member and a second member formed to be displaceable, wherein the first member covers at least a part of the second member in an invisible manner, and a state in which the first member is disposed at the covering position. In the gaming machine formed to be displaceable with respect to the retreat position that reduces the region that covers the second member invisible, the first member is in the state of being displaced to the retreat position. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the displacement of the game machine G1 can be regulated.

Here, the first member and the second member that are formed so as to be displaceable are provided, and the first member is disposed at a covering position that covers at least a part of the second member invisible, and at the covering position. In addition, there is known a gaming machine that is formed so as to be displaceable between a retreat position that reduces a region that covers the second member in an invisible manner (for example, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, the first
By disposing the member at the covering position and disabling the second member from being visible to the player, by displacing the first member to the retracted position, the second member is exposed so that the player can visually recognize it. be able to.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the second member is formed to be displaceable, when the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the second member is displaced. There is a risk. For this reason, there is a problem in that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of production is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the state where the first member is displaced to the retracted position,
Since the second member is formed so that the displacement of the second member can be restricted, the player can visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and an effect of production can be ensured. That is, when performing the effect of displacing the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position, which must be performed for the effect, This is used as a means for regulating displacement. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide or control a mechanism for restricting the displacement of the second member, and the structure can be simplified correspondingly.

In the gaming machine G1, the second member is formed so as to be rotatable, and the center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the second member is formed to be rotatable and its center of gravity is offset from the center of rotation, so the degree of freedom in designing the second member. Can be increased. That is, the second member does not need to have a shape whose center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and for example, an asymmetric shape with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the effect of the second member can be enhanced. . On the other hand, if the position of the center of gravity of the second member is decentered in this way, the second member may be rotated (rotated) around the rotation center by its own weight. Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state. It is possible to secure the effect.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, a displacement member disposed to be displaceable on the second member is provided,
The gaming machine G3, wherein the displacement member is formed to be displaceable in a state where at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the second member includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed, and at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. Since the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the displacement effect is further increased by displacing the displacement member. Can do. On the other hand, if the displacement member is displaced when the second member is exposed, the position of the center of gravity moves along with the displacement, and the second member may be rotated (spinned). Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state. It is possible to secure the effect.

In the gaming machine G3, the outer peripheral surface of the second member is disposed so as to be visible to a player, and the one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the second member. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the other side opposite to the gaming machine is formed so as to be able to project into the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the second member is arranged so that its outer peripheral surface is visible to the player, and the displacement member is rotatable on one side to the outer peripheral surface of the second member Is pivotally supported by
Since the other side opposite to the one side is formed so as to be able to project to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received on the upper surface of the displacement member. Thus, for example, when a game ball inflow port is formed in the second member, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily introduced into the inflow port using the displacement member. . In this case, if the game ball flowing down the game area is received by the displacement member, the second member may be rotated by the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, and thus the displacement member is projected to a predetermined position in the game area. Can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine G4, the first member is disposed in the gaming area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member in the covering position, and is outside the gaming area in the retracted position. A gaming machine G5 that is arranged.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the first member is arranged in the gaming area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member in the covering position, so that the game flowing down the gaming area It can suppress that a ball collides with the 2nd member and this 2nd member rotates. In particular, when the rotation position of the second member is a rotation position in which the displacement member is directed toward the game area, a game ball flowing down the game area collides with the displacement member, and the displacement member is released (tensioning). Can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first member is disposed outside the game area in the retracted position, a space for the displacement member to protrude into the game area can be secured by the displacement of the first member to the retracted position. . Accordingly, the outer peripheral surface of the second member can be brought closer to the game area side (player side), and the player can easily make the displacement member visible.

In the gaming machine G5, the first member is formed to be rotatable around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and is formed in a plate shape that curves along the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A gaming machine G6 that is characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, the first member is formed to be rotatable around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and the outer peripheral surface of the second member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a space necessary for displacement between the covering position and the retracted position. Therefore, a space for disposing other members can be ensured accordingly.
In addition, by forming the first member to be curved in this way, a game ball flowing down the game area is
It is possible to smoothly flow down by suppressing the staying on the first member arranged at the covering position.

In any of the gaming machines G3 to G6, the gaming machine G7 includes a driving unit that generates a driving force and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the second member and the displacement member. .

Here, in order to form the second member to be rotatable and displace the displacement member to the second member, a driving means is required for each of the second member and the displacement member. Bulky. When the driving means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the second member, the second
Since the weight of the member increases, it is difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the second member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G3 to G6, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means to the second member and the displacement member Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, the second member can be rotated and the displacement member can be displaced by also using one drive means. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Moreover, since it is not necessary to mount the drive means for displacing the displacement member on the second member, the weight of the second member can be reduced, and the rotation of the second member can be started or stopped smoothly.

In the gaming machine G7, the gaming machine G8 is provided with connecting means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and interlocking the displacement of the first member with the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G7, the first member and the displacement member are connected, and the connecting member that links the displacement of the first member to the displacement of the displacement member is provided. The driving means for causing the first displacement member to function as the driving means for displacing the first displacement member.
In this case, when the displacement member and the first member are displaced by the driving force of separate driving means,
When the control failure occurs, the displacement member and the first member may interfere with each other. Since the displacement member and the first member can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, the displacement member and the first member can be synchronized. Interference with one member can be reliably suppressed.

<Concept of Invention with Rotating Unit 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising: a driving means for generating a driving force; a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force of the driving means; and a transmission means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member. A first member, a second member positioned closer to the displacement member in the driving force transmission path than the first member, and an engagement member disposed between the first member and the second member When the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engagement member engages with the first member and the second member, and the driving force is transmitted. In addition, in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in advance in the one direction with respect to the first member.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force, a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force of the driving unit, and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member. (For example, JP-A-2015-029849). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the transmission state of the driving force by the transmission means from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member is also constant. It is displaced at a displacement speed, and a change cannot be given to the displacement mode of the displacement member. For this reason, there is a problem in that the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

Although the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing / decreasing the drive speed of the drive means, the displacement speed in the predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in the other sections. In order to achieve speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member, and to increase or decrease the output of the driving means in accordance with the detection result of the sensor device, resulting in an increase in product cost and control cost. . In addition, the structure and control become complicated, leading to a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the transmission means includes the first member, the second member positioned on the displacement member side in the transmission path of the driving force relative to the first member, the first member, and the second member. An engaging member disposed between the members, and when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member. Thus, the driving force is transmitted and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, and in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in advance in one direction with respect to the first member. Therefore, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other sections regardless of the drive state of the drive means. Therefore, a change can be given to the displacement mode of a displacement member, and the presentation effect of the production accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be heightened.

Moreover, according to the gaming machine H1, the second member can be advanced in one direction with respect to the first member regardless of the driving state of the driving means. For example, in all the sections in the displacement section of the displacement member, The driving means can be driven at a constant driving speed, and in the middle of the displacement section of the displacement member (ie,
There is no need to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive means depending on whether it is a predetermined interval or another interval. As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the operation reliability can be improved. Alternatively, driving of the driving means can be stopped in a predetermined section, and in this case, energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, according to the gaming machine H1, in the driving state in which the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engaging member is released and the transmission of the driving force is cut off. The displacement member can be in a stopped state (non-driving state), and the driving force of the driving means in such a driving state is
It can be used as a driving force for driving other members. That is, by switching the drive direction of the drive means, the two members, the displacement member and the other member, can be displaced respectively.

The transmission means is formed such that when the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engagement member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted. It may be.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable, and its gravity center position is decentered from the rotation center. In the predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member moves the second member in the one direction. A gaming machine H2 which is formed so as to be operable in a direction of displacement.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable and its center of gravity is decentered from the rotation center. Since the two members are formed so as to be able to act in a direction in which the two members are displaced in one direction, the second member can be displaced in one direction with respect to the first member by utilizing the weight of the displacement member. . That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, and to enhance the effect effect of the production accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, when the displacement member is formed so as to be able to repeat the rotation of 360 degrees about its rotation axis, the displacement speed (rotation speed) of the displacement member in a predetermined section is A mode in which the rotational speed is made faster than the displacement speed (rotational speed), that is, a rotational mode in which the rotational speed is increased or decreased during one rotation can be repeatedly performed.

In the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body portion that is rotationally driven by the second member, a crank member that protrudes from the main body portion and has a pin portion that is eccentric from the rotation center of the main body portion; A sliding groove through which a pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed on one end side, and an intermediate portion is rotatably supported on the other end side of the arm member. A gaming machine H3 that is connected to a member.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the transmission means is provided to project from the main body that is rotationally driven by the second member and the main body, and is eccentric from the center of rotation of the main body. Since it includes a crank member having a pin portion and an arm member in which a sliding groove through which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed on one end side and an intermediate portion is rotatably supported. The other end side of the arm member can be reciprocated by rotating the crank member with the second member and sliding the pin member along the sliding groove. In this case, since the other end side of the arm member is connected to the displacement member, the displacement member can be reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocation of the other end side of the arm member. . That is,
The displacement direction of the displacement member can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive means.

In the gaming machine H3, the displacement member is accompanied by a reciprocating operation on the other end side of the arm member.
During reciprocation between the first position and the second position and being displaced from the first position to the second position, and during being displaced from the second position to the first position The direction in which the weight of the displacement member acts on the second member is changed from the direction in which the second member is displaced in the other direction to the direction in which the second member is displaced in the one direction. Characteristic gaming machine H4.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating operation on the other end side of the arm member, and the first position To second
During the displacement to the position and during the displacement from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member acts on the second member is the second member in the other direction. Since the second member is changed from the direction of displacement to the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, when the displacement member is reciprocated, the displacement member is moved from the middle of the displacement regardless of the direction of displacement. The displacement speed can be increased. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, and to enhance the effect effect of the production accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, the displacement member is reciprocated between an extended position (first position) where the displacement member is visibly extended from the player and a retracted position (second position) where the extended position is retracted. When operating, when the displacement member is extended from the retracted position to the extended position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed halfway while increasing the displacement member's displacement speed to increase the displacement member vigorously. In addition to being able to project to the overhanging position, when retracting the displacement member from the overhanging position to the overhanging position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed up to the middle, while the displacement member speed increases from the middle. Thus, the displacement member can be immediately retracted to the retracted position.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed so as to be slidable, and in the predetermined section, the displacement member is inclined downward in the direction of the slide displacement, so that the weight of the displacement member deviates from the second member. The gaming machine H5 is formed so as to be capable of acting in a direction to be displaced in the one direction.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be slidable, and in a predetermined section, the displacement member is inclined downward in the direction of the slide displacement. Is formed so as to be able to act in a direction in which the second member is displaced in one direction, so that the second member is displaced in one direction with respect to the first member by utilizing the weight of the displacement member. be able to. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, and to enhance the effect effect of the production accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold a gaming ball at least in the predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold the game ball at least in a predetermined section, so that the displacement member holds the game ball. In the state, the weight of the entire displacement member is increased by the weight of the game ball, and the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be further increased. Further, the weight of the entire displacement member is varied depending on whether the game ball is held on the displacement member and the case where the game ball is not held, or depending on the number of game balls held. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of a displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, and to enhance the effect effect of the production accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

In any one of the gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion that receives a game ball flowing down the game area, and at least in the predetermined section, when the receiving portion receives the game ball, the gaming ball The gaming machine H7 is configured so that a force applied to the displacement member can be applied in a direction in which the second member is displaced in the one direction.

According to the gaming machine H7, in any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving part for receiving the game ball flowing down the gaming area, and at least in a predetermined section, when the receiving part receives the game ball Since the force applied to the displacement member from the game ball is formed so as to be able to act in a direction to displace the second member in one direction, the kinetic energy of the game ball when the receiving portion receives the game ball Can be used to increase the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section. Also, the force applied to the displacement member varies depending on whether the receiving portion receives the game ball, whether it receives the game ball, or depending on the flow velocity (the magnitude of the kinetic energy) of the game ball at the time of receiving. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of a displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, and to enhance the effect effect of the production accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

Note that the game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to a game ball that moves along the direction of gravity on the front surface of the game board, but also includes a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. As a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, for example, a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity by colliding with a nail, a tulip, an accessory, etc. Thus, a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means includes a gear train that forms part or all of the transmission path of the driving force, and a load gear that meshes with one gear of the gear train. A gaming machine H8 characterized by

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means meshes with a gear train that forms part or all of the driving force transmission path and one gear of the gear train. In the predetermined section, when the game ball is held by the displacement member or received by the receiving portion, the weight or kinetic energy of the game ball is used. The second member is displaced in advance in one direction with respect to the first member (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in another section), If the game ball is not held by the displacement member, or if the game ball is not received by the receiving portion, the second member is applied to the first member by utilizing a load (resistance) when the load gear is rotated. Displaced in advance in one direction ( Chi, displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined interval is faster) it can be suppressed.

That is, when the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the receiving part does not receive the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section becomes faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other sections. Only when the game ball is held by the displacement member or when the receiving part receives the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section is made higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other sections. A mode of increasing the speed can be easily formed.

<About the concept of the invention taking the back case 300 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a gaming board, a back member disposed on the back side of the gaming board, and a fixing member disposed on the back member, the gaming board is disposed between the facing from the gaming board to the back member. A displacement member operable on the back side of the game board from the opposite side from the game board to the back member, wherein the fixing member has a protrusion that engages with the displacement member. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the protruding portion and the displacement member are engaged, and the fixing member is disposed on the back member.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine including a game board, a back member disposed on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member disposed on the back side of the back member is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004). -3360
No. 3). According to this gaming machine, the fixing member is fastened to the back member by the screw inserted from the front side of the back member. Thereby, it is suppressed that a fixing member is removed from the back side of a game board.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the step of disposing the fixing member on the back member includes the step of disposing the fixing member on the back member and the step of fastening the fixing member to the back member from the back side of the back member. And the work from the opposite direction is the work from the front side of the back member. for that reason,
There has been a problem that the number of work steps for disposing the fixing member on the back member increases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the displacement member is disposed between the game board and the back member and is operable on the back side of the game board from the outside between the game board and the back member. (Displacement member 310), the fixing member includes a protrusion (engaged portion 322) that engages with the displacement member, and the protrusion and the displacement member are engaged so that the fixing member is arranged on the back member. Thus, the fixing member can be disposed on the back case by one-way work from the back side. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the step of turning to the front side or reversing the back member after working from the back side. As a result, the number of work steps for disposing the fixing member on the back member can be reduced.

The gaming machine I1 includes a first member disposed between the game board and the back member, and the displacement member is disposed on the back side of the first member. I2
.

Here, in a recent gaming machine, the first member (between the facing from the game board to the back member) (
There is a tendency to increase the size of the accessory device. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the enlarged first member is disposed in front of the fixing member or in a position close to the fixing member, the fixing member is fastened from the front side of the back member. In the meantime, the first member gets in the way. Therefore, it has been difficult to dispose the fixing member on the back member by fastening the fixing member with a screw inserted from the front side of the back member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the first disposed between the gaming board and the back member.
Since the displacement member is provided on the back side of the first member, the gap between the game board and the back member in the state where the first member is provided between the game board and the back member. The displacement member and the fixed member can be engaged with each other by operating the displacement member from the outside. Therefore, the fixing member can be disposed on the back member without the displacement member being obstructed by the first member disposed between the game board and the back member.

Further, since the displacement member is disposed between the back member and the first member, the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be disposed between the back member and the first member. Therefore, access to the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member from being illegally released and the fixing member from being illegal (for example, replaced with an illegal fixing member).

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to a facing surface between the back member and the game board.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the displacement member is slid and displaced on a plane parallel to the opposing surface of the back member and the game board. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced, The amount of displacement in the facing direction between the back member and the game board can be set to zero. Thereby, the space which arrange | positions a 1st member between opposing of a displacement member and a game board can be ensured. as a result,
The outer shape of the first member in the opposing direction of the back member and the game board can be increased, and the degree of freedom in designing the first member can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member includes a bottom wall portion facing the game board, and a side wall portion standing on the game board side from an edge portion of the bottom wall portion. An opening is formed in one of the bottom wall and the side wall, and the displacement member is inserted into the opening and has an operating element protruding outside from the inside of the back member. A gaming machine I4 characterized by comprising.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member is erected on the gaming board side from the bottom wall part facing the gaming board and the edge of the bottom wall part. A side wall, and an opening formed in either the bottom wall or the side wall. The displacement member is inserted through the opening from the inside of the back member to the outside. Because it is equipped with a protruding operator, the operator is operated from the outside of the back member (the outside between the game board and the back member),
The displacement member can be displaced. Therefore, even if the first member is disposed inside the back member (between the game board and the back member), the displacement member can be displaced without being obstructed by the first member. .

In the gaming machine I4, in the state in which the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is released, the gaming machine I4 includes an urging unit that urges the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixing member. A gaming machine I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, in a state where the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is released, the biasing force is applied to bias the displacement member in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member. Since the biasing means is provided, when the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to be engaged, or when the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is incomplete, the displacement member is engaged with the fixing member. It can be displaced in the releasing direction. Therefore, the operator can determine whether or not the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is correct at the position where the operation element protruding outside the back member is disposed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the forgetting engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member.

The urging means may include a spring or rubber disposed between the displacement member and the back member to urge the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member, or the weight of the displacement member. For example, the displacement member is acted on in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member.

The gaming machine I4 or I5 includes an outer frame formed in a frame shape that can accommodate the game board and the back member, and an inner shape of the outer frame is an outer shape in front view of the game board and the back member. A gaming machine that is formed substantially the same, and in a state where the displacement member and the fixing member are disengaged, the operation element is arranged on the outer side between the game board and the back member. I6.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4 or I5, the gaming machine I6 includes an outer frame formed in a frame shape that can accommodate the gaming board and the rear member, and the inner shape of the outer frame is the gaming board and the rear member. Is formed substantially the same as the outer shape in front view, and in a state where the displacement member and the fixing member are disengaged,
Since the operation element is arranged outside the opposing side from the game board to the back member, when the game board and the back member are accommodated in the outer frame when the displacement member and the fixed member are disengaged, the outer frame The operating element can be brought into contact with the sway. Thereby, it can suppress that a game board and a back member are accommodated in an outer frame. Therefore, when it is forgotten to arrange the fixing member on the back member or when the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is forgotten, the forgetting (abnormality) can be noticed to the operator. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board from being housed in the outer frame in a state where the fixing member is forgotten to be disposed on the back member or the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is forgotten.

In any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the gaming machine I7 is provided with suppression means for suppressing the operation element from being operated in a direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member. .

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines I4 to I6, there is provided suppression means for suppressing the operation of the operating element in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member. Therefore, it can suppress that the operation element is operated and the displacement member is displaced in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member using the operation element.

In addition, as a suppression means which suppresses that an operation element is operated in the direction which cancels | releases engagement with a displacement member and a fixing member, the form supported by the operation element so that it can idle | spin in the direction which cancels | releases engagement A configuration in which the projecting tip of the operating element protrudes in a direction in which the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is released, and a configuration in which the operating element is disposed between the displacement member and the fixing member Etc. are exemplified.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed,
A first protrusion that protrudes from the elastic piece, and the fixing member includes an accommodating portion that opens to a displacement region of the displacement member and is recessed in a displacement direction of the displacement member, The accommodating portion includes a second protrusion protruding from a displacement region of the first protrusion, and the second protrusion is configured such that the displacement member is displaced in one direction, and the first protrusion The elastic piece can be displaced by abutting, and the displacement member is displaced in the other direction so that the displacement member and the fixing member can be engaged by abutting the first member. A gaming machine I8.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed and a first protrusion that protrudes from the elastic piece, and the fixing member is A receiving portion that opens to the displacement region of the displacement member and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member, the receiving portion includes a second protrusion that protrudes from the displacement region of the first protrusion, The two projecting portions are displaced in one direction so that the elastic piece can be displaced by contacting the first projecting portion, and the first projecting member is displaced by the displacement member being displaced in the other direction. Since the displacement member and the fixing member can be engaged with each other by contact, the displacement of the displacement member in one direction can be allowed and the displacement of the displacement member in the other direction can be restricted by the second protrusion. Thereby, the displacement of the displacement member in both the engagement direction with the fixing member and the drop-off direction can be restricted.

In the gaming machine I8, the accommodating portion is set to a size that can accommodate the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, the elastic piece A gaming machine I9 characterized in that it is accommodated.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I8, the housing portion is set to a size that can accommodate the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, Since the elastic piece is accommodated in the accommodating portion, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the elastic piece from the outside of the accommodating portion in a state where the displacement member and the fixing member are engaged. Therefore, it can suppress that an elastic piece is operated from the outer side of an accommodating part, and is elastically deformed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member from being illegally released. In this case, it is possible to remove the fixing member from the back member by cutting the displacement member (the base end portion of the receiving portion) located outside the receiving portion.

In the gaming machine I9, the displacement member includes a plurality of elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating portion, and the accommodating portion is set to a size that can accommodate a plurality of elastic pieces. Machine I10.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I9, the displacement member includes a plurality of elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating portion, and the accommodating portion is set to a space that can accommodate a plurality of elastic pieces. Therefore, when the displacement member (the base end portion of the elastic piece) located outside the housing portion is cut and the fixing member is removed from the rear member, the cut displacement member (elastic piece) is placed inside the housing portion. The displacement member (elastic piece) that is not cut in this state can be accommodated inside the accommodation portion. Therefore, since the displacement member (elastic piece) cut inside the accommodation portion can be accommodated and left, the number of displacement members accommodated in the accommodation portion is compared with the number of cut elastic pieces of the displacement member. Thus, when the fixing member is illegally removed and changed to an illegal fixing member, the number of the fixing members can be different so that the operator can detect that the gaming machine has been cheated.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I10, the first member regulates displacement of the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member when the displacement member is engaged with the fixed member. The gaming machine I11 is provided with a regulating means.

According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I1 to I10, when the displacement member is engaged with the fixed member, the restriction that restricts the displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the engagement with the fixed member is released. Since the means is provided, it is possible to restrict the displacement member from being displaced when a force acts in a direction in which the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is released by fraud. Therefore, when force is exerted in the direction in which the displacement member disengages the fixed member due to fraud, it is possible to prevent the force from concentrating on the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixed member. It is possible to suppress the displacement member or the fixing member from being damaged by the force input by.

In addition, since the first member includes the regulating means, when removing the fixing member from the back member,
By removing the first member from the back member, the restriction of the displacement of the displacement member by the restricting means can be released. In this case, by removing the first member, it is possible to access the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member, so that it is possible to improve work efficiency when removing the fixing member from the back member.

Examples of the restricting means for restricting the displacement of the displacement member include a form in which a protrusion is disposed inside the engagement recess to restrict the elastic deformation of the displacement member, and a form in which the protrusion is engaged with the displacement member.

<Concept of Invention with General Winning Port Unit 150 as an Example>
A base member having a game area on the front side, and a first forming a decoration on the front of the base member
A gaming machine comprising: decoration means; and second decoration means for forming a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means in front view, wherein the first decoration means and the second decoration means are in the front-rear direction in front view. The gaming machine J1 is arranged at a position adjacent to the game machine J1.

Conventionally, a base member having a game area on the front side, a first decoration means disposed on the front surface of the base member and having a decoration formed on the front surface, and a first member disposed on the front surface of the first decoration means. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes one member and second decoration means that is disposed in front of the first member and has a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means in a front view (for example, JP2007
-000195). According to this gaming machine, the design of the base member can be secured by allowing the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the second decoration means as one decoration.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the second decoration means is arranged on the front surface of the first member, the second decoration means is separated from the first decoration means by the thickness of the first member. It is arranged at a distant position. Therefore, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means are visually recognized as being shifted by the thickness of the first member depending on the position (the direction of the line of sight) where the player visually recognizes the base member. There was a problem that the designability of the member deteriorated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, since the first decoration means and the second decoration means are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction in the front view, the first decoration means and the second decoration means The front and rear separation distance can be reduced. Thus, when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are viewed from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means It can suppress that it is visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration and improve the design of the base member.

Moreover, the 1st decoration means should just be a thing in which a decoration is formed, for example, sticks the sealing member which printed the decoration on the plate-shaped member on the front of a base member, or a decoration on the front of a base member Is to be printed.

When the second decoration means is attached (adhered) to the front of the first decoration means, the operator can attach (adhere) the second decoration means while visually checking the decoration of the first decoration means. it can. Therefore, the operator can easily attach the second decoration means to the first decoration means at a position where the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means are continuous. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the workability of the operator who attaches the second decoration means to the first decoration means.

The gaming machine J1 includes a front member that is formed of a light-transmitting material, has an outer shape that is larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means in front view, and is disposed in front of the second decorative means. The member includes a concave portion that is recessed in a shape that is larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means on the surface facing the second decorative means, and the concave dimension of the concave portion is greater than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means. Is also set to a large value.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J1, the gaming machine J2 is formed from a light-transmitting material, and has a larger outer shape than that of the second decorative means when viewed from the front, and is disposed in front of the second decorative means. The front member is provided with a concave portion recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means on the surface facing the second decorative means, and the concave dimension of the concave portion is the second decorative means. Therefore, the front member can be disposed on the base member in a state where the second decoration means is accommodated in the recess. Thereby, it can suppress that a 2nd decoration means falls out between between a base member and a front member.

Moreover, since the recessed dimension of the recess is set to a value larger than the thickness dimension of the second decoration means,
It can suppress that a clearance gap is formed between a front member and the 1st decoration means. Thereby, it can suppress that dust and dirt are pinched | interposed between a front member and a 1st decoration means, and the decoration of a 1st decoration means becomes difficult to visually recognize.

In the gaming machine J2, the concave portion has an inner surface formed along the outer shape of the second decorative means, and the second decorative means is disposed by being adhered to the concave bottom surface of the concave portion. A gaming machine J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2, the recess has an inner surface formed along the outer shape of the second decoration means, and the second decoration means is adhered to the recessed bottom surface of the recess. Because it is established
By disposing the second decoration means along the concave portion of the front member, the second decoration means can be positioned and disposed with respect to the front member. Thereby, when the front member is arranged in front of the first decoration means, it is possible to suppress the second decoration means from being sandwiched between the edge of the front member and the first decoration means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first decoration means and the front member, and the decoration of the first decoration means is visually recognized with dust and dirt sandwiched between the front member and the first decoration means. It can suppress becoming difficult.

In the gaming machine J3, the front member includes a protrusion that protrudes toward the base member from a surface facing the base member, and the base member includes an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Is inserted into the opening so that the front member is positioned with respect to the base member.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J3, the front member includes a protrusion that protrudes from the surface facing the base member toward the base member, and the base member has an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the front member is positioned with respect to the base member by inserting the protrusion into the opening, the position of the front member relative to the first decoration means can be suppressed from shifting. The second decoration means is positioned with respect to the front member by the concave portion of the front member. Therefore,
By positioning the front member with respect to the first decoration means, it is possible to suppress displacement of the arrangement of the first decoration means and the second decoration means. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration.

In the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on a concave bottom surface of the recess, the second decoration means is formed with a through hole penetrating in a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the protrusion is inserted into the through hole. A gaming machine J5 that is characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recess, and the second decoration means is formed with a through-hole penetrating at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the protrusion is inserted into the hole, the arrangement of the second decoration means with respect to the front member can be simplified.
That is, if the second decoration means is simply disposed inside the recess of the front member, the edge of the second decoration means needs to be disposed along the recess, whereas the protrusion on the second decoration means. By forming the through hole to be inserted, the arrangement of the second decoration means relative to the front member can be determined only by inserting the protrusion into the through hole. As a result, the arrangement of the second decoration means with respect to the front member can be simplified.

In addition, since the projection for positioning the front member is inserted into the through hole of the second decoration means with respect to the first decoration means, the second decoration means and the first decoration means are positioned at the same portion (projection). Therefore, the positioning accuracy between the decorative member and the first decorative means can be improved. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration.

In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined portion that is inclined toward the first decoration means toward the outer edge in a front view, and the second member is provided on the back side of the inclined portion.
A gaming machine J6, wherein an edge of the decoration means is disposed.

Here, in order to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration, it is necessary to suppress the positional deviation between the decorations of both. However, when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the positions of the decorations of both are shifted in the front-rear direction by the thickness of the second decoration means. There is a problem that when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are visually recognized from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the two decoration means, there is a risk that the front-rear positional deviation may be recognized.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined portion that is inclined toward the first decoration means side toward the outer edge in the front view. Since the edge part of the second decoration means is disposed on the back side of the part, the positional deviation of the decoration due to the difference in the arrangement in the front-rear direction between the second decoration means and the first decoration means is caused by the inclined part of the front member. Refraction of light can make it difficult for a player to recognize.

More specifically, the light that is reflected by the decoration of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, passes through the inside of the front member, and is emitted from the inclined portion is inclined in the light passage direction with respect to the front surface of the base member. When the angle is made smaller than the inclination angle in the direction perpendicular to the inclined surface of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member, the inclination angle in the light emitting direction from the inclined portion relative to the front surface of the base member is the base. It is made smaller than the inclination angle of the light passing direction with respect to the front surface of the member. Accordingly, the connecting portion of the first decoration means and the second decoration means from the direction of the crossing angle smaller than the inclination angle in the direction orthogonal to the inclined surface of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member. The light passing direction viewed by the player who visually recognizes can be made closer to the overlapping direction of the first decoration means and the second decoration means. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decoration means and the second decoration means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the front-rear positional deviation.

In the gaming machine J6, the second decoration means includes an adhesion surface bonded to the front member, and a non-adhesion surface not adhered to the front member, and the inclined portion and the second decoration means are at least A gaming machine J7, which is provided with the non-adhesive surface at opposing positions.

Here, when the player visually recognizes the connecting portion of the decoration of the first decoration means and the second decoration means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion, the front and rear of the first decoration means and the second decoration means There is a possibility that the player will recognize the misalignment of the direction decoration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J6, the second decoration means
An inclined surface and a second surface, each having an adhesive surface bonded to the front member and a non-adhesive surface not bonded to the front member.
Since the non-adhesive surface is provided at a position facing the decoration means at least, a clearance is formed between the second decoration means and the front member (inclined portion) on the non-adhesion surface, and passes through the non-adhesion surface of the front member. Can be totally reflected. Thereby, when the player visually recognizes the second decoration means through the inclined portion from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the decoration at the end of the second decoration means. . As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decoration means and the second decoration means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclination portion, it is difficult to visually recognize the decoration of the second decoration means. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the positional deviation of the decoration in the front-rear direction of the first decoration means and the second decoration means.

In the gaming machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion is formed in an arc shape in which an outer edge of a cross section in a direction orthogonal to an extending direction of the outer edge of the front member in a front view is curved convexly toward the outer edge of the front member. The game machine is characterized in that the end of the second decoration means is disposed on the center side of the front member in a front view with respect to a substantially intermediate position of straight lines connecting the ends of the inclined portions. J8.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion has an outer edge of a cross section in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member in front view, protruding toward the outer edge of the front member. Since the end portion of the second decoration means is disposed on the center side of the front member in front view, rather than the substantially intermediate position of the straight line connecting the end portions of the inclined portions. When the first decoration means and the second decoration means are visually recognized from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, the center of the front member is refracted by the bending of the inclined portion. The direction of the light passing through the side can be brought close to the direction in which the first decoration means and the second decoration means overlap. Further, the second portion is located closer to the center side of the front member than a substantially intermediate position of a straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portions.
Since the end part of the decoration means is disposed, it is possible to suppress the player from recognizing the positional deviation between the first decoration means and the second decoration means in the front-rear direction. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the second
It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the decoration means as one decoration.

In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner side surface of the recess is formed with a second inclined portion that is inclined outward in a front view toward the first decoration means side, and the second inclined portion is formed on the base. The gaming machine J9, wherein an inclination angle with respect to the front surface of the member is set smaller than an inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recess is the first
A second inclined portion that is inclined outward in front view toward the decoration means side is formed, and the second inclined portion is set such that an inclination angle with respect to the front surface of the base member is smaller than an inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member. Therefore, the position of the decoration (virtual image) of the first decoration means visually recognized through the inclined part and the second inclined part is the decoration of the first decoration means visually recognized without passing through the inclined part and the second inclined part. It can be brought close to the position of (real image). As a result, when the first decoration means is visually recognized through the front member, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the first decoration means from being easily recognized by the refraction of light through the front member.

<About the concept of the invention taking the special winning device 550 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a game board having a game area on the front side; and a path unit that is disposed on the game board and has a path that guides a game ball that flows down the game area. A first path for sending a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board in front view, and a game ball sent from the first path in a horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the first path A second path for sending a ball to the other side, and a third path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path, and the third path is a front side or a back side with respect to the game board A gaming machine K1 characterized in that a guide means for sending a game ball to at least one of the game boards is provided on at least one inner wall on the front side or the back side with respect to the game board.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that includes a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side, and a path unit that is disposed on the gaming board and has a path that guides the sending of gaming balls flowing down the gaming area. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, the game ball that has flowed into the guide route formed in the route unit is guided (rolled) along the route of the guide route, so that the game ball rolls (down). Can be given.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to secure a pitching distance of a game ball of a predetermined distance inside the path unit, a first path that sends the game ball to one side with respect to the game board, and its first When a second path for sending a game ball sent from one path to the other side with respect to the game board and a third path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path are formed, the first path Since the speed of the game ball that rolls is maximized at the communication portion with the third path (the downstream end of the first path), the game ball is placed on the inner wall of the third path where the direction of the ball is changed. Collisions make it easier to bounce. Therefore,
There is a possibility that the game ball that has collided with the inner wall of the third path returns to the first path, or swings (shakes) inside the third path in the pitching direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the first path. Therefore, the first
Since the game ball sent from the route to the third route swings in the third route, the player's line of sight cannot follow the game ball sent to the third route in a certain direction, and is sent to the third route. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the game balls.

In this case, by making the route of the third route longer, the game ball passing from the first route can be smoothly switched to the rolling direction of the second route and the game ball passing through the third route. Can be prevented, but since the third path is formed long, the size of the entire path unit is increased correspondingly, and a space for arranging the path unit on the game board cannot be secured.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the path unit has a first path for sending a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board in a front view, and a game ball sent from the first path. First
A second path for sending a ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the path, the first path, and the second path
A third path connecting one side of the path, and the third path is a front side of the game board with guiding means for sending the game ball to at least one of the front side or the back side with respect to the game board. Alternatively, since it is provided on at least one inner wall on the back side, the game ball passing through the third path can be moved to the front side or the back side (front-back direction of the game board in front view). By the movement of the front or back side game ball, the game ball that rolls and accelerates on the first path can be delayed on the third path, and the game ball that has collided with the inner wall of the third path correspondingly It is possible to suppress returning to one path, or swinging (blurring) in the pitching direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the first path in the third path. Thereby, the player's line of sight can follow the game ball sent from the third route in a certain direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the third route.

Moreover, since it can suppress that a game ball shakes (shakes) in a horizontal direction (front view left-right direction) with respect to the game board in front view, the part for the 3rd path | route which connects the 1st path | route and the 2nd path | route. It is not necessary to lengthen the path to suppress the swinging of the game ball, and the path of the third path can be shortened. As a result, the path unit can be accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the path unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

In addition, as a guide means for guiding the game ball, the game ball is guided to the second path by switching the rolling direction of the game ball due to unevenness or disposing a displacement member at the path switching portion and displacing the displacement member. The method of doing is illustrated.

In the gaming machine K1, the guide means is composed of a recess that is recessed on the inner wall on either the front side or the back side and a projection that is projected on the other inner wall on the front side or the back side. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the concave portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K1, the guide means includes a recess formed in the inner wall on either the front side or the back side, and the inner wall on the other side of the front side or the back side. Since the concave portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other, the game ball is partially displaced in the middle of the path of the third path, so that the game ball The pitching speed can be slowed down. Therefore, the route of the third route can be shortened. As a result, the path unit can be easily accommodated in a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the path unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

In the gaming machine K2, a horizontal separation dimension from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set to be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K2, the horizontal separation dimension from the projecting tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. It is possible to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the third path to be sent to the guide means to come into contact with the convex portion of the guide means. Thereby, it is possible to easily reduce the rolling speed of the game ball that flows down the first path and is sent to the third path by contacting the convex part. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which collided with the inner wall of the 3rd path | route returns to a 1st path | route, or swings in the direction different from the ball-feeding direction of a 3rd path | route on a 3rd path | route. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the third route.

In the gaming machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on an inner wall on the front side with respect to the gaming board, and the concave portion is formed on an inner wall on the rear side with respect to the gaming board. Machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the gaming board, and the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the rear side with respect to the gaming board. Therefore, the plate | board thickness of the front side of a path | route unit can be made thin. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the inside of the route unit through the front of the route unit, and to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent inside the route unit. In addition, since the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side of the path unit, it is possible to suppress the guide means from projecting to the front of the path unit, and accordingly, the path unit is disposed on the player side, It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the route unit.

More specifically, when the concave portion is formed on the inner surface on the front side, it is necessary to make the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit larger than the depth of the concave portion. Therefore, as the board thickness on the front side of the path unit increases, the game ball sent on the back side becomes less visible to the player. In addition, when the concave portion is formed on the inner surface on the front side, it is conceivable to curve the plate on the front side of the path unit along the shape of the concave portion. An interval from the glass plate forming the front surface of the area is necessary, and the entire game board needs to be arranged on the back side. Accordingly, the game ball sent through the route unit is less likely to be visually recognized by the player as the player moves away from the back side.

Furthermore, when the concave portion is formed on the inner surface on the front side, it is conceivable to open the portion where the concave portion is formed, but in this case, the rigidity of the path unit is reduced by the amount of the opening formed,
The path unit is easily damaged. In addition, if an opening is formed in the front of the path unit, there is a risk that the opening will pass and the dishonesty will be made.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine K4, since the concave portion is formed on the back side of the path unit and the convex portion is formed on the front side of the path unit, the thickness of the entire front side of the path unit is suppressed from increasing. It is easy to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the path unit, and the path unit is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine by suppressing partial projection to the front side of the path unit. The game ball passing through can be easily seen.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex portion and the concave portion are formed such that a cross section in a gravitational direction is formed in an arc shape in a front view, and an axis of the arc is set coaxially.

According to the gaming machine K5, in the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex portion and the concave portion are formed in a circular arc shape in cross section in the direction of gravity, and the axis of the circular arc is set on the same axis. The separation distance can be made constant. As a result, it is possible to suppress the separation distance between the convex portion and the concave portion from being partially smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and to prevent the game ball passing through the path unit from being sandwiched between the convex portion and the inner wall. it can.

In the gaming machine K5, the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along an extension line of a rolling locus at the center of the gaming ball rolling on the first path in a front view.

According to the gaming machine K6, the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along the extended line of the rolling trajectory at the center of the game ball rolling on the first path in front view, so that the game rolls on the first path. Even when the rolling speed of the ball is high, the center of the game ball sent from the first route to the third route can be prevented from being sent above the upper end of the recess. As a result, the game ball sent from the first route to the third route can be sent inside the recess.

In any one of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the concave portion is formed at a position that is separated from both side surfaces in the horizontal direction of the third path in a front view than a radial dimension of the gaming ball. .

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recess is formed at a position spaced apart from the radial dimension of the gaming ball from both horizontal sides in the front view of the third path. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which flows down along the inner wall of a recessed part collides with the both sides | surfaces of the horizontal direction in the front view of a path | route unit, and shakes inside a recessed part. As a result, a game ball sent along the inside of the recess can be smoothly sent to the second path.

In any one of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the concave portion is recessed in a circular arc shape with a cross section in the ball feeding direction of the first path in a front view centering on a central part in the horizontal direction of the third path, The game K8 is characterized in that the convex portion is provided with a rectangular cross section in the ball feeding direction of the first path in a front view.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the recess has a cross section in the direction of the ball of the first path in a front view that is recessed in a circular arc shape, and the convex portion has a front surface. Since the section of the first path in viewing direction in the direction of the ball is projected in a rectangular shape, the guiding means
The distance between the opposing portions of the concave portion and the convex portion is narrowed toward both ends of the first path in the ball feeding direction. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball sent to the inside of the recess to swing in the direction of the first route. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the third route.

In the gaming machine K8, the convex portion extends downwardly and inclines toward one side in a direction opposite to the direction in which the game balls of the second path are sent in a front view.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K8, the convex portion extends downwardly and inclines toward one side of the second path in the direction opposite to the direction in which the game balls are sent. The game ball that comes into contact with the convex portion when flowing down the three paths can be guided in the inclination direction of the convex portion. Thereby, the game ball which contact | abutted to the convex part can be guided along the inner wall of the recessed part of the side spaced apart from a 2nd path | route.
As a result, the game ball that flows from the third path to the second path can be rolled in the direction of the game ball of the second path, and the game ball can smoothly flow from the third path to the second path. it can.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first route includes second guide means at a connection portion with the third route, and a game ball sent from the first route is sent from the second guide means. A gaming machine K10 that is capable of being guided by the guiding means.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first path includes the second guide means at the connection portion with the third path, and the first guide means Since the game balls sent from the route can be guided to the guide means, the game balls sent from the first route to the third route can be easily sent to the guide means of the third route. Thereby, the game ball can be smoothly sent from the first route to the third route. Therefore, the flow of the game ball from the third route to the second route can be made smoother as the game ball sent from the first route can be easily sent to the guide means. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the pitching of game balls in the entire path unit.

In the gaming machine K10, the second guide means is provided with a second convex portion projecting on one of the front side and the rear side of the first route, and a second convex portion provided at a position facing the second convex portion. The gaming machine is characterized in that the width of the second recess is set larger in a direction perpendicular to the flow-down direction of the game ball toward the upstream side of the first path in a front view. K11.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K10, the second guiding means includes a second convex portion protruding from one of the front side and the rear side of the first path, and the second convex portion. It is comprised from the 2nd recessed part recessedly provided in the position which opposes, and the 2nd recessed part sets the width dimension of the direction orthogonal to the flow-down direction of a game ball toward the upstream of a 1st path | route in front view. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the second concave portion to accept the game ball sent through the first route. Thereby, the game ball can be smoothly sent from the first route to the third route. Therefore, the flow of the game ball from the third route to the second route can be made smoother as the game ball sent from the first route can be easily sent to the guide means. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the pitching of game balls in the entire path unit.

In the gaming machine K10 or K11, the second recess has the downstream end of the first path positioned downstream of the rolling surface of the gaming ball of the first path. .

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K10 or K11, the second recess is
Since the downstream end of the first path is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game ball of the first path, the game ball flowing from the first path to the third path along the inner wall of the second recess , Can flow into the third path farther from the first path. As a result, the game balls flowing into the third route from the first route can be easily sent to the inside of the recess, and the inflow of game balls from the third route to the second route can be facilitated.

<About the concept of the invention taking the special winning device 550 as an example>
In the gaming machine, comprising: a game board having a game area on the front side; and a flow direction changing means for changing the flow direction of a game ball disposed in front of the game board and flowing down the game area, the flow direction changing means Is a first member disposed in front of the game board, a second member disposed at a predetermined interval on the front side of the first member, and at least one of the first member or the second member. An adjusting means for displacing one of the game balls, and the adjusting means changes a distance between the facing portions of the first member and the second member to flow down between the facing portions of the first member and the second member. The gaming machine L1 can adjust the flow direction of the game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine including a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and a nail that is driven against the front of the gaming board (for example, JP-A-11-197311). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to adjust the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area by adjusting the angle of the nail hitting the game board (bending the nail). However, in the case of changing the flow direction of the game ball by changing the angle of the nail, the angle of the nail is visually recognized by the player, which is disadvantageous for the player (the game ball is difficult to flow down to an advantageous flow path). When it is recognized that the angle is the angle of the nail, there is a problem in that the player does not play with the gaming machine judged to be disadvantageous, and the operating rate of the gaming machine decreases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the flow direction changing means is a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and a first member disposed on the front side of the first member with a predetermined interval. Two members and adjusting means for displacing at least one of the first member and the second member, and the adjusting means changes the distance between the facing of the first member and the second member to change the first member and the second member. Since the flow direction of the game ball flowing down between the two members facing each other can be adjusted, the flow direction of the game ball can be changed (adjusted) by a distance in the front-rear direction with respect to the front view of the game board. Therefore, compared to the front view of the game board, it is less likely that the player visually recognizes the flow direction changing means and determines that it is disadvantageous or advantageous than a nail that changes the flow direction of the game ball at a horizontal separation distance. it can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the game board, and the adjusting means
A gaming machine L2 in which the position of the first member is displaced.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board, and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjusting means. By hiding at least a part of the first member disposed on the back side by the two members, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the position of the first member. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize the displacement of the position. Therefore, it can suppress that the space | interval between facing of a 1st member and a 2nd member is grasped | ascertained by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from judging that the player is disadvantageous from the interval between the facing portions of the first member and the second member and not playing the game on the gaming machine, so the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine L2, the gaming board includes a first opening that opens to a position corresponding to the first member, and a fastening member that is inserted through the first opening from the back side of the gaming board is the first member. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that the first member is disposed on the gaming board by fastening to the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L2, the gaming board includes a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first opening is inserted from the back side of the gaming board. By fastening the fastening member to the first member, the first member is disposed on the game board, so there is no need to form a fastening part for fastening the first member on the front side of the game board, and accordingly, the front The external shape of the first member in view can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for disposing other members in front of the game board.

In addition, since the fastening member is fastened from the back side of the game board, it is possible to make it difficult to access the fastening member from the front side of the game board in a state where the flow direction changing means and the game board are assembled. As a result, it can be suppressed that the fastening member is illegally operated and the position of the first member is illegally changed.

In the gaming machine L3, the first member includes a protruding portion that protrudes toward the gaming board and is inserted into the first opening, and the fastening member is fastened to a tip of the protruding portion. First
A gaming machine L4, wherein a member is disposed on the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L3, the first member has a protruding portion that protrudes toward the gaming board and is inserted into the first opening, and a fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protruding portion. Thus, since the first member is disposed on the game board, the fastening portion of the fastening member can be accommodated inside the first opening. Therefore, since it can suppress that the fastening part with a fastening member protrudes in the front side of the 1st member, the space between the opposing of a 1st member and a 2nd member can be ensured.

In the gaming machine L4, the first member can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the front surface of the game board by the adjusting means, and the first opening has the same size as the displacement area of the protrusion. The gaming machine L5 is characterized by being opened at the same time.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L4, the first opening is opened to the same size as the displacement area of the protruding portion, so that when the position of the first member is displaced, the protruding portion The portion can be displaced along the first opening. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced,
It can suppress that a member is displaced to directions other than a displacement direction (direction displaced by the adjustment means). As a result, it is possible to simplify the work when the operator adjusts the position of the first member.

The gaming machine L6 according to any one of the gaming machines L3 to L5, wherein the gaming board includes a second opening that opens at a position different from the first opening.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines L3 to L5,
Since the second opening is provided at a position different from the first opening, the fastening member fastened to the back side of the game board can be operated through the second opening. As a result, the work process when the operator operates the adjusting means can be simplified.

That is, on the back side of the game board, an accessory device and a case member that accommodates the accessory device are arranged. Therefore, when operating the fastening member from the back side of the game board, When the case member that accommodates the accessory device needs to be removed from the game board, the fastening member can be operated from the front side of the game board by the second opening, so that the operator can move the back side of the game board. Since it is not necessary to remove the accessory device to be disposed and the case member that accommodates the accessory device, the operator's work process can be simplified.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming machine L7 is characterized in that the position of the second member with respect to the first member is changed in the front-rear direction in a front view by the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the position of the second member is changed in the front-rear direction in the front view with respect to the first member. It is possible to suppress the position of the second member from being changed in front view as compared to the case where the position is changed in the left-right or up-down direction in front view. Therefore, it can suppress that a player judges that it is advantageous or disadvantageous by the change of the position of the 2nd member in front view. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and an outer shape in front view is formed larger than the first member, and the first member is A gaming machine L8 that is covered with a second member.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed from a non-light-transmitting material, and the outer shape in front view is formed larger than the first member,
Since the first member is covered with the second member in the front view, the first member is the second member in the front view.
The first member can be made difficult to be recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the interval between the facing portions of the first member and the second member, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is made of a non-light transmissive material, and at least one of the first member or the second member protrudes to the other of the first member or the second member. A gaming machine L9 including a projecting portion.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and at least one of the first member or the second member is the first member. Alternatively, since the projecting portion projecting to the other of the second members is provided, the game ball sent between the first member and the second member facing each other can be brought into contact with the projecting portion to change the direction of pitching. it can. Therefore, it can suppress that a player judges that it is advantageous or disadvantageous by recognizing the space | interval between facing of a 1st member and a 2nd member. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjustment means can adjust the other position of the first member or the second member stepwise with respect to one of the first member or the second member. A gaming machine L10 comprising means.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means sets the other position of the first member or the second member relative to one of the first member or the second member. Since the step adjustment means that can be adjusted stepwise is provided, an operator who changes the position of the first member or the second member can adjust the change of the position stepwise. As a result, it is possible to suppress an error from occurring in the adjustment position of the first member or the second member. Therefore, the position adjustment of the first member or the second member can be simplified.

In addition, as a means for adjusting the positions of the first member and the second member in stages, the first member or the second member may be used with respect to a plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the second member. By changing the insertion position of the projecting convex portion, the first member or the second member is changed in position, or a plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the game board The form which changes the position of a 1st member by changing the insertion position of the convex part protrudingly provided by the other of a member or a game board is illustrated.

<About the concept of the invention taking the special winning device 550 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising: a game area where game balls flow down; and a plurality of guide paths for guiding the sending of game balls flowing down the game area, and a path unit disposed in the game area.
The path unit is formed of a material that can transmit light and is disposed on the front side of the gaming area, and a second guide path is disposed on the back side of the first guide path. A first winning path through which a game ball can be entered, and the second guiding path has a second winning port through which a game ball can be entered. The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that a gaming value entering the first prize opening is given a higher gaming value than a gaming ball entering the second prize opening.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a route unit having a plurality of guide routes for flowing down a game ball is arranged in a game area, and the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the unit to improve the interest of the player. (For example, JP-A-2015-131046).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the player by allowing the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the guide route, the handling of each guide route tends to be complicated. This makes it difficult for the player to determine which of the guide routes the game ball is flowing down. Therefore, when the game value of the game ball flowing down the guide route is different,
It becomes difficult for the player to judge whether the route is advantageous (high game value is given) or disadvantageous (low game value is given), and the player's interest by the game ball flowing down the route unit There was a problem that it could not be improved sufficiently.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the path unit is formed of a material that can transmit light and is disposed on the front side of the game area, and the back surface of the first guide path. A second guide route disposed on the side, the first guide route includes a first winning opening capable of entering a game ball, and the second guide route receives a game ball. Because a game ball that has a possible second prize opening and enters the first prize opening has a higher game value than a game ball that enters the second prize opening,
It is possible to make it easier for the player to watch the game ball flowing down the first guide route. In addition, when a game ball flows down to the first and second guide routes at the same timing, the second guide route including the second winning opening having a low game value is located on the back side of the first guide route. Since it is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first guide route having the first prize opening having a high game value. As a result, it is possible to make a player visually recognize a game ball to which a high game value is given, so that it is easy to improve the interest of the player.

Note that the predetermined game value means, for example, a game ball that is paid out to the player as a privilege when the game ball is inserted into the first or second winning opening.

In the gaming machine M1, the first guide route includes a first route for sending a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and a game ball sent from the first route as a game ball on the first route. A second path for sending a game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the first path, and a connection path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity. The path is formed in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side of the gaming area, and the gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the first guide route is sent from the first route for sending the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and from the first route. A second path for sending the game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the game ball on the first path, and one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity. A connecting path for connecting, and the connecting path is formed in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side of the gaming area, so that the first path and the second path are directly connected with the shortest distance. It is possible to increase the bent portion of the pitching path compared to the case where Thereby, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be gradually reduced at the bent portion, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connection path and swinging (shaking) in the connection path. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly flowed from the first route to the second route, so that the player can easily see the game balls sent from the first route to the second route.

In addition, to prevent the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connection path and swinging (blurring),
Although it is conceivable to increase the internal space of the connection path in the direction of pitching the first path and to prevent the game ball from repeatedly colliding with the inner wall of the connection path, in this case, the internal space of the connection path is the first space. The connection path is protruded in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, as it is increased in the direction of pitching one path. Accordingly, since the path unit in the front view is enlarged in the horizontal direction, it is difficult to fit the path unit in a predetermined range in the front view.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine M2, the connection path is curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side, so that the outer shape of the path unit in the front view can be kept within a predetermined range. Therefore,
When the player visually recognizes the game ball flowing down the first guide route, the range visually recognized by the player can be kept within a predetermined range (the outer shape of the route unit). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

In the gaming machine M2, the path unit is disposed on the other side of the gaming area in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and the connection path is formed on one side of the path unit in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Characteristic gaming machine M3.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2, the path unit is disposed on the other side in the horizontal direction of the gaming area in the front view, and the connection path is one of the horizontal directions of the path unit in the front view. Since it is formed on the side, the connection path can be formed at a position close to the player located in front of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the connection path. As a result, even if the game ball is sent to the back side through the connection path, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the connection path.

In the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first prize opening is disposed between the first path and the second path in a front view.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first prize opening is
Since it is disposed between the first route and the second route in a front view, the first winning opening is formed in the first guide route using the dead space that forms the first route and the second route. it can. Thereby, it can suppress that the external shape of the path | route unit in front view becomes large. as a result,
The range in which the player can visually recognize the route unit can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

In any one of the gaming machine M2 to the gaming machine M4, the connection path includes a third winning opening through which a game ball can be inserted at two positions of the connection part between the first path and the second path, And a displaceable member displaceable at a position for closing or opening the prize winning opening, and the game ball entering the third winning prize opening is identical to the game ball entering the first winning prize opening. A gaming machine M5 that is given a gaming value.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M2 to M4, the connection path includes a third winning opening that allows a game ball to enter the two places of the connection part between the first path and the second path. And those third
And a displaceable member displaceable at a position for closing or opening the prize winning opening, and the game value entered into the third winning prize opening is the same game value as the game ball entering the first winning prize opening. Is given,
The game balls sent from the first route to the connection route can be easily put into one of the two third winning holes, and the game balls flowing down the connection route give the player interest. Easy to do.

That is, between the upstream third prize opening formed in the connection part of the connection path and the first path, and the downstream third prize opening formed in the connection part of the connection path and the second path. Since the connecting path can be arranged in the position, the third prize port is closed by the displacement member when the displacement member is repeatedly operated at a predetermined timing to the position for closing or releasing the third prize port. In this case, the game ball sent from the first path to the connection path is caused to flow down the connection path that curves to the back side, thereby securing a time until the third prize opening is released, and the third on the downstream side. It can be made to flow into the prize opening. As a result, the game balls sent to the connection path can be easily flown into the third winning opening, so that the game balls flowing down the connection path can easily give the player interest.

In addition, since the two third prize winning openings are formed at the upstream and downstream ends of the connection path (the connection part between the first path and the second path), respectively, Sphere time can be lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time for providing the player with interest, and to easily enhance the player's interest.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, the gaming machine M6 is characterized in that a detection means for detecting the passage of the gaming ball is disposed outside the connection path.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, the detecting means for detecting the passing of the gaming ball is disposed on the connection path, so that the game ball is blocked by the connection path. In this case, the detection of the detection means is continued, so that the gaming machine can detect an error. In addition, since the detection means is disposed outside the connection path, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being caught by the detection means as compared to the case where the detection means is disposed in the connection path. It is possible to prevent the sphere from clogging in the connection path.

Furthermore, since the detection means is disposed outside the connection path where the rolling of the game ball is slowed down, it is possible to easily detect the number of game balls passing through the connection path. Therefore, when the number of balls detected by the detection means is larger than the number of balls to be won at the first winning port or the third winning port, it is possible to make the gaming machine recognize that fraud has been performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraud from continuing by notifying that the fraud has been performed by a warning sound or abnormal lighting.

In the gaming machine M6, the connection path has an inner wall facing dimension in front view that is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is opposed to the inner wall of the first path in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is sent. A gaming machine M7, which is set to be smaller than the interval dimension.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M6, the connection path is set such that the dimension between the opposing inner walls in the front view is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball and is orthogonal to the direction in which the gaming ball is sent. Since the dimension is set to be smaller than the opposing dimension of the inner wall of the first path in the direction, when a game ball having a diameter larger than a predetermined dimension (a diameter larger than a specified value) is sent, the game ball remains in the connection path. Can be clogged. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game ball having a diameter larger than the standard from flowing down the path unit.

In addition, since the detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball is disposed in the connection path, when a game ball having a diameter larger than the standard remains in the connection path (clogged), the detection means causes the gaming machine to Can detect errors.

In the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connection path is formed with an opening that opens at a predetermined value smaller than the diameter of the game ball on a radially outer side wall of the path that curves in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side. A gaming machine M7.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connection path is provided on the side wall on the radially outer side of the path curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side, and is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Since an opening that opens at the value of is formed, when a game ball having a diameter less than a predetermined dimension (a diameter smaller than the standard) is sent, the game ball is moved from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connection path. Can be discharged. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game ball having a diameter smaller than the standard from flowing down the path unit.

Since the opening is formed on the radially outer side wall of the connection path, which is the rolling surface of the game ball flowing down the connection path, when the game ball flowing down the connection path has a smaller diameter than the standard, It is easy to discharge game balls.

In the gaming machine M8, the game machine M8 is provided with a storage portion that protrudes from the outside in the radial direction of the connection path and is formed in a box shape that communicates with the opening. ,
A gaming machine M9 formed in a detection range of the detection means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M8, the gaming machine M9 includes a housing part that is formed in a box shape that projects from the radially outer side of the connection path and communicates with the opening. Since the ball is formed in a size that can be accommodated and is formed in the detection range of the detection means, a game with a diameter (a diameter smaller than the standard) of a predetermined size or less discharged from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connection path The sphere can be stored inside the housing. In addition, since the storage unit is formed within the detection range of the detection unit, the game ball stored inside the storage unit can be detected by the detection unit. As a result, when the game ball is stored inside the housing portion, the game machine can detect an error by the detection means.

In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M9, a position where the inflow port of the game ball on the first guide route and the inflow port of the game ball on the second guide route are adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. A gaming machine M10 that is formed as follows.

According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M9, the inlet of the gaming ball on the first guidance path and the inlet of the gaming ball on the second guidance path are: Since it is formed at a position adjacent in the horizontal direction in the front view, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board is the first
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which of the guide route or the second guide route is inflow until immediately before inflow. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to keep an eye on the game ball that flows down the game area and is sent to the path unit. As a result, it is easy to give interest to the player.

<Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
A base member having a game area on the front side; and a first member having a pitching path which is disposed on the front side of the base member and is formed as a space capable of sending game balls flowing down the game area. In the gaming machine, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state of being biased to the back side with respect to the base member by a fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. A gaming machine N1 to play.

Conventionally, a first member having a base member having a game area on the front side, and a pitching path formed as a space that is arranged on the front side of the base member and is capable of sending game balls flowing down the game area.
There is a gaming machine provided with a member (for example, JP-A-2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, the first member includes an extending portion that extends on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member on the side surface (base member and contact portion) on the base member side, and the extending portion By screwing a screw inserted through an opening formed in the base member into the base member, the screw is disposed in close contact with the front surface of the base member.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to arrange the first member in close contact with the front surface of the base member, it is essential to fasten the screw inserted from the front side of the first member to the base member. It is necessary to form an opening for inserting the first member in the first member. Here, in order to form the opening at a position that does not interfere with the pitching of the game ball, it is necessary to form the opening outside the pitching space of the game ball, and the extending portion where the opening is formed is outside the pitching space. Need to form. For this reason, an area that can be used as a pitching path is reduced with respect to the outer shape of the first member because the extending portion is formed on the outer edge of the first member, and the pitching path of the first member cannot be sufficiently increased. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state of being biased to the back side with respect to the base member by the fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. The first member and the base member can be disposed in close contact with each other by the biasing force acting on the first member toward the back surface. Further, since the first member is disposed on the base member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member, a fastening allowance (an opening through which the fixing means is inserted) is formed on the front side of the first member. There is no need to form the extended portion to be formed. Therefore, the entire region can be used as a pitching path with respect to the outer shape of the first member in front view. As a result, the pitching path of the first member can be increased.

In addition, since the fastening portion between the base member and the first member is not exposed to the front side, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion between the base member and the first member from being illegally removed, and the fastening portion is visually recognized by the player. It is possible to suppress the player's interest from being reduced.

In the gaming machine N1, a second disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member.
The second member is fixed to the first member by the fixing means inserted into the first member side from the back side of the second member and fixed to the first member, A gaming machine N2 that is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap from the member.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine N1, the second member is provided on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member is on the back side of the second member. The first member is fixed to the first member by a fixing means that is inserted from the first member to the first member and fixed to the first member, and is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. When the second member and the second member are fastened, a force biased toward the back side can be applied to the first member by the predetermined gap.
Moreover, since the force biased to the front side can be applied to the second member, the base member can be sandwiched between the first member and the second member. Accordingly, the first member and the second member are less likely to be displaced from the base member due to the clamping force between the first member and the second member.
There is no need to fasten the member or the second member to the base member, and the fastening of the second member can be simplified correspondingly.

The predetermined gap between the first member and the second member is set to a value larger than 0 and smaller than the width dimension of the base member in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front. Thereby, when the 1st member and the 2nd member are fastened, the force which mutually attracts can be made to act on both the 1st member and the 2nd member by the gap.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member protrudes inside the first opening. The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that the first member is disposed on the base member by fastening the fixing means to the tip of the protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member is the first
A first opening formed at a position facing the member; the first member includes a protrusion protruding inside the first opening; and a fixing means is fastened to the tip of the protrusion. Since the first member is disposed on the base member, the fastening portion of the fixing means can be disposed inside the first opening. Thereby, it can suppress that the fastening part of a fixing means is arrange | positioned in the front side of a base member, and can suppress that the fastening part of a fixing means is formed in the pitching space of a 1st member. As a result, the first
The size of the pitching space of the member can be ensured.

Moreover, since the fastening allowance (insertion depth) of a fixing means can be ensured by a protrusion part, it can suppress that the fastening of a fixing means remove | deviates from a 1st member. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the urging force to the back surface acting on the first member.

In the gaming machine N1, a second disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member.
And a third member disposed between the first member and the second member, wherein the base member has an opening formed at a position facing the first member. The third member is configured such that a dimension in the front-rear direction in the front view is set to be smaller than a dimension in the front-rear direction in the front view of the base member, and is disposed inside the first opening. The member is disposed in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member has a predetermined gap with the third member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member. A gaming machine N4 that is fastened to the back side of the third member in a state.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the second member disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member is disposed between the first member and the second member facing each other. A base member is provided with a first opening formed at a position facing the first member,
The third member has a dimension in the front-rear direction in the front view that is set smaller than a dimension in the front-rear direction in the front view of the base member, and is disposed inside the first opening. The first member is the front of the third member. Since the second member is fastened to the back side of the third member with a predetermined gap from the third member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member. The biasing force toward the back side can be applied to the first member via the third member. Therefore, the urging force to the back side that acts when the second member and the third member are fastened by the fixing means can also be applied to the third member. As a result, it is possible to reduce the urging force acting on the contact portion of the first member with the base member, and it is possible to prevent the first member from being damaged.

Moreover, the rigidity of the whole 1st member can be improved because a 3rd member closely_contact | adheres to the back side of a 1st member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the whole ball of the first member from being elastically deformed by the urging force acting on the back surface acting on the first member, and the game ball feeding path formed on the first member from being deformed. As a result, the game ball of the first member can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of a frame-like member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening formed in the base member. A gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of the frame-like member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening that is opened in the base member. So
The urging force acting on the third member can be used as a force for urging the frame-shaped member to the back side. Therefore,
The frame-shaped member can be easily disposed in a state of being in close contact with the base member.

Further, the biasing force to the back side acting when the second member and the third member are fastened by the fixing means,
Since it can be made to act on the contact surface of a frame-shaped member and a base member, the force which acts on the contact part with the base member of a 1st member can be made small, and it suppresses that a 1st member is damaged. it can.

In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member is disposed on the back side of the first member, and is a drive for driving the displacement member. And the third member includes a third opening that is opened to a size that allows the driving means to be inserted, and the driving member is inserted into the third opening. A gaming machine that is disposed on the back side of one member.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member is disposed on the back side of the first member, the displacement member capable of displacing the ball space of the gaming ball of the first member. Drive means for driving the displacement member, and the third member has a third opening that is opened to a size that allows the drive means to be inserted, and the drive means is inserted inside the third opening. In this state, the driving member can be covered with the third member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires inserted from the outside of the gaming machine from being accessed by the driving means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being cheated.

In the gaming machine N6, the second member protrudes toward the first member and communicates with the ball feeding space of the first member, and the game ball sent to the ball feeding space of the first member is used as the second member. A gaming machine N7, comprising a communicating portion capable of delivering a ball, wherein the communicating portion is disposed outside the third opening.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine N6, the second member protrudes toward the first member, communicates with the ball feeding space of the first member, and is sent to the ball feeding space of the first member. A communication portion capable of sending a ball to the second member is provided, and the communication portion is disposed outside the third opening, so that the third member can be disposed between the communication portion and the driving means. it can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the magnetic force generated by the drive of the drive means to act on the communicating portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent to the communication part from being slowed down or stopped at the communication part due to the influence of the magnetic force of the driving means. It is possible to stabilize the game balls sent to the members.

In the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member protrudes from at least two locations on the back side of the first member. A protrusion that protrudes from the back surface of the first member and passes through the first opening; and bends at an end of the first piece to be outside the first opening. A second piece extending toward the front, and a raised portion that rises on the front side of the second piece that overlaps the base member in front view, the first piece in front view of the base member The protruding dimension is set to a value larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the protruding portion has the same dimension as the width dimension in the front-rear direction in the front view of the base member, Is set small, and the bent tip of the second piece is The base member by being fastened to the serial fixing means,
The gaming machine N8, wherein the first member is disposed in a state of being biased to the back side with respect to the base member.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member is a back surface of the first member. A projecting portion projecting from at least two locations on the side, the projecting portion projecting from the back surface of the first member and passing through the first opening, and bent at the end of the first piece A second piece that extends toward the outside of the opening; and a raised portion that rises on the front side of the second piece that overlaps the base member in front view, the first piece in front view of the base member. The projecting dimension is set to a value larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the protruding part is set so that the dimension between the first member and the back surface is the same as or smaller than the width dimension in the front-rear direction in the front view of the base member. The bent tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means. As a result, the first member is disposed in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base member, so that it is not necessary to provide a portion for fastening fixing means (for example, a screw) on the back side of the first member. A space for sending game balls formed in the first member can be secured. As a result, the pitching space can be increased, so that the pitching direction of the game ball sent to the first member can be changed, and the pitching can be facilitated.

Further, since the screwing portion of the fixing means can be used as the base member, it is possible to suppress elastic deformation of the ball feeding space of the first member by applying a biasing force to the screwing portion of the fixing means. as a result,
It can suppress that the speed of the game ball sent by the 1st member elastically deforms and is sent from the ball feed path of the 1st member becomes slow.

In the gaming machine N8, the base member includes a second opening formed in the front-rear direction in a front view, and a frame-shaped member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening. A gaming machine N9, wherein the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine N8, the base member has a second opening formed in the front-rear direction in a front view, and the front side of the base member along the second opening. Since the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other, the projecting portion is arranged inside the first opening using the opening of the second opening. Can be set. Therefore, since the arrangement | work operation | work to the base member of a 1st unit can be simplified, manufacturing cost can be reduced.

<Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine, comprising: a base member; a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member; and a driven member that is connected to the displacement member and is driven by the displacement of the displacement member. The displacement member is displaced between a first position and a second position, and an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. And a second displacement region for displacing the second position from the third position, and the driven member has the displacement member from the first position to the second position. By being displaced to the second position, the second driven position is driven from the first driven position, and the third driven position, which is an intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position, is displaced from the first driven position. A first driven area to be moved forward from the third driven position A second driven region for displacing the second driven position, wherein at least a part of the second displacement region and the first driven region are set to the same region, and the displacement member has the second displacement region. The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that, when being displaced, swinging in a direction other than the displacement direction of the displacement member is restricted by the restriction means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and driven by the displacement of the displacement member, the driven by the displacement of the displacement member are provided. A gaming machine that displaces a member is known (for example, JP-A-2015-02984).
9). However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to restrict the displacement of the displacement member and the driven member and the swing of the driven member other than the driven direction, if the restricting means for restricting the swing of both the displacement member and the driven member is formed, There is a problem in that it has to be formed in two places, and accordingly, the shape becomes complicated and the manufacturing cost increases.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine O1, the displacement member includes a restricting means for restricting the swing of the driven member in a direction other than the driven direction, and the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position. A first displacement area for displacing a third position between the first position and the second position from the first position; and a second displacement area for displacing the second position from the third position. The displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, so that the second driven position is driven from the first driven position, and the intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position is changed from the first driven position. A first driven region that displaces the third driven position; and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a portion of the second displaced region and the first driven region is When the displacement member is displaced in the second displacement region, the restriction means sets the same region. The direction of oscillation of the other direction of displacement of the position member is restricted,
The swinging of the driven member and the displacement member can be regulated using the same part of the regulating means. Therefore, since the restricting means only needs to be formed in one place, the shape can be simplified correspondingly, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, since the swinging of the driven member and the displacement member can be regulated using the same part of the regulating means, it is not necessary to form a driven member, a displacement member, and a regulating part respectively for one regulating means. Accordingly, the restricting means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine O1, the restricting means is configured as a wall portion protruding from the base member toward the driven member, and the driven member is located at a position overlapping the at least part of the base member in a front view. A sliding displacement is possible on a plane parallel to the member, and a region overlapping the base member in a front view is gradually reduced with the follower from the first follower position to the second follower position. Game machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1, the restricting means is configured as a wall portion protruding from the base member to the driven member side, and the driven member is at least one of the base members in a front view. It is possible to slide and displace on a plane parallel to the base member at a position that overlaps the part,
Along with the follower from the first follower position to the second follower position, the region overlapping the base member in the front view is gradually reduced, so that in the second follower position, the follower member protrudes outside the base member in the front view. The region is made larger than the first driven position. Therefore, it is difficult to restrict the swing of the driven member by the restricting means disposed on the base member as much as the driven member protrudes outside the base member. Accordingly, the driven member is more likely to swing toward the base member as it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position. By restricting the swing of the displacement member connected to the driven member, The number of restriction points can be increased, and the driven member can be made difficult to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress swinging when the driven member is disposed in the second driven region.

In the gaming machine O2, the follower member is formed in a rectangular shape with a long side when viewed from the front.
A rotation shaft rotatable on one side of the longitudinal direction, and rotatably disposed on the base member; in the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to a horizontal direction; When driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates about the rotation axis,
The gaming machine O3, wherein the other side of the driven member is disposed above the rotating shaft in the gravitational direction.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape with a long side when viewed from the front, and has a rotation shaft that can rotate on one side in the longitudinal direction. It is rotatably arranged, and in the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction,
When driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates about the rotation axis, and the other side of the driven member is disposed above the rotation axis in the gravitational direction. When the second driven position is driven from the first driven position, it rotates and the longitudinal side rises. Therefore, as the driven member stands, the load of the driven member is likely to act toward the rotating shaft, and the driven member is likely to swing in the swinging direction of the driven member due to the load acting in the swinging direction of the driven member.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by restricting the swing of the displacement member connected to the driven member, the number of places restricted by the restricting means can be increased, and the driven member can be made difficult to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress swinging when the driven member is disposed in the second driven region.

Further, when the driven member is driven in the first driven region where the force to lift the other end of the driven member is required, the first position to the third position (first displacement region) where the restriction of the displacement member is released. Since it is necessary to displace the displacement member, the restriction member is released from the restriction by the restriction means in the first displacement region, so that the movement of the displacement member can be prevented from being delayed by the restriction means. Therefore,
When the displacement force of the driven member is required, the displacement force of the driven member can be ensured.

In the gaming machine O2 or O3, the driven member includes a protruding portion that protrudes at a position facing the wall portion, and a distal end of the protruding portion is brought into contact with the wall portion to displace the driven member. The displacement member is set to be displaceable in a space between the driven member and the wall portion facing each other in the second displacement region, and the displacement member is disposed in a facing direction between the driven member and the wall portion. A gaming machine O3 in which at least a part of the gaming machine overlaps with the driven member.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O2, the driven member includes a protruding portion that protrudes at a position facing the wall portion, and the tip of the protruding portion is in contact with the wall portion. The displacement of the driven member is restricted, and the displacement member is set so as to be able to displace a space between the facing of the driven member and the wall portion in the terminal displacement region, and at least the displacement member in the facing direction of the driven member and the wall portion. Since a portion overlaps the driven member, the displacement member can be prevented from tilting to the opposite side to the wall portion. As a result, the displacement of the displacement member in both axial directions can be restricted by the driven member and the wall, and the swinging can be suppressed when the displacement member is displaced.

In the gaming machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member is brought into contact with the protruding portion of the driven member at the second driven position.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member is brought into contact with the protruding portion of the driven member at the second driven position, so that the displacement member is moved from the first driven position to the second driven position. When displaced to the position, the outer edge can be brought into contact with the protruding portion of the displacement member and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to combine the role of the protruding portion in contact with the wall portion to restrict the displacement of the driven member and the role of assisting the stopping operation of the displacement member. Therefore, a space in which the displacement member and the driven member can be displaced can be secured.

In the gaming machine O5, when the driven member is pivotally supported at one end by the base member and the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the displacement direction of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member Is set in a direction toward the axis of the displacement member.
.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O5, when the driven member is pivotally supported at one end by the base member and the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the driven member is connected to the displacement member. Since the displacement direction of the portion is set in a direction toward the axis of the displacement member, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from being displaced by the load of the driven member when the load of the driven member acts on the displacement member. That is, when the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the relationship between the driven member and the displacement member can be a dead center relationship, and therefore, the displacement member can be suppressed from being displaced. As a result, the second
It can suppress that a displacement member displaces by external forces other than a drive means in a driven position.

In the gaming machine O5, when the driven member has one end pivotally supported by the base portion and the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the displacement direction of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member is The gaming machine O7 is characterized in that a direction in which a reaction force acting due to contact between the protruding portion and the displacement member is combined is set to a direction toward the axial center of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O5, the driven member is pivotally supported at one end by the base member and the displaced member is disposed at the second driven position. Since the direction in which the displacement direction of the connecting portion and the direction in which the reaction force due to the contact between the projecting portion and the displacement member acts is set to the direction toward the axis of the displacement member, the load of the driven member is When acting on the displacement member, it can be suppressed that the displacement member is displaced by the load of the driven member. That is, when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the direction of the force acting on the displacement member from the driven member is directed to the axis of the displacement member, so that the displacement member rotates about the shaft support portion. The generation of the force can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

In the gaming machines O1 to O7, the projecting portion is provided with a predetermined gap from the wall portion, and is brought into contact with the wall portion when the displacement member contacts. Machine O8.

Here, if the projecting portion of the driven member and the wall portion are always in contact with each other, resistance is generated when the displacement member is displaced by the driving means, and it may be difficult to stably displace the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine O8, the projecting portion is disposed with a predetermined gap from the wall portion, and is brought into contact with the wall portion when the displacement member abuts, so that the displacement member is in the second driven position. When displaced, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from swaying and to suppress the protrusion and the bulging portion from becoming resistance during the displacement.

<About the concept of the invention taking the lower displacement member 440 as an example>
A decorative member formed of a light transmissive material capable of transmitting light on the back side in a front view, and disposed on the back side of the decorative member in a state displaceable on a plane parallel to the front;
A gaming machine comprising: a receiving unit capable of receiving and holding a game ball; and a light emitting unit disposed on a back side of the decorative member and capable of emitting light toward a displacement region of the receiving unit, The means is arranged on the back side of the receiving part or between the decorative member and the receiving part, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is received by the receiving part or a game ball received by the receiving part. A gaming machine P1 that is blocked or reflected to partially vary the amount of light emitted from the decorative member.

Conventionally, a decorative member made of a light-transmitting material capable of transmitting light on the back side in a front view and a rear surface of the decorative member arranged in a displaceable manner on a plane parallel to the front. There is known a gaming machine provided with a receiving portion that can receive and hold a game ball (for example, JP 2010-166997 A). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to produce an effect of moving the game ball with the movement of the receiving unit by moving the receiving unit after receiving and holding the game ball in the receiving unit.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the receiving part is disposed on the back side of the decorative member, it is difficult for the player to recognize the receiving part and the position of the game ball received in the receiving part. Therefore, after the game ball is received (held) by the receiving unit, when the receiving unit moves,
It is difficult for the player to grasp the direction in which the game ball received (held) received (held) by the reception unit and the reception unit has moved, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the position of the game ball received by the reception unit. There was a problem.

On the other hand, the gaming machine P1 includes a light emitting means that is disposed on the back side of the decorative member and can emit light toward the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the light emitting means is on the back side of the receiving portion or the decorative portion. The light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked or reflected by the game ball received between the member and the receiving portion and received by the receiving portion or the receiving portion, and the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is partially Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member positioned on the front side of the game ball received by the receiving unit or the receiving unit, and the amount of light emitted from the decorative member at other positions, By making it different, it is possible to make the player recognize that the receiving part or the game ball received by the receiving part is located on the back side of the part where the light quantity is different.

More specifically, when the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked by the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part, thereby receiving the receiving part or the receiving part. It is possible to make the amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received in the darker than the other part of the decorative member. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is small (
The player can recognize that the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part is located on the back side of the dark part.

On the other hand, when the light emitting means is disposed between the decorative member and the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the receiving part or the game ball received by the receiving part, so that the receiving part or The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received in the receiving part can be made brighter than the other parts of the decorative member. As a result, a large amount of light is emitted from the decorative member (
It is possible to make the player recognize that the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part is located on the back side of the bright part.

In the gaming machine P1, the receiving part is formed below the center of the game ball held in the receiving part in the gravity direction, and the light emitting means is substantially the same as the center of the game ball held in the receiving part. The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that a light emitting portion is arranged at a height, and the light transmitting portion of the decorative member is formed at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means.

Here, in the structure in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the decoration member, and the light is reflected or blocked by the game ball received by the receiving part or the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is the game ball. In addition to irradiating not only the receiving part, light is easily reflected or blocked by the receiving part. Therefore, the brightness of the light formed by the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is affected by the receiving portion, so that the shape of the light and dark becomes different from the outer shape of the game ball, and the light amount of light is given to the player. It may be difficult to recognize that the game ball is arranged on the back side of the different parts.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P1, the receiving part is formed below the center of the game ball held in the receiving part in the gravitational direction, and the light emitting means is provided in the receiving part. The light emission part is arranged at substantially the same height as the center of the held game ball, and the light transmission part of the decorative member is
Since it is formed at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means, the brightness of light formed by being emitted from the light emitting means and blocked or reflected by the receiving portion is transmitted through the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. Thus, it is possible to suppress the formation on the front side of the decorative member. Thereby, the bright and dark shape of the light formed through the light transmitting portion of the decorative member can be brought close to the outer shape (circular shape) of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game ball is placed in a portion where the amount of light is different.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the receiving part is formed of a light transmissive material, the gaming machine P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the receiving part is formed of a light transmissive material, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected or blocked by the receiving part. Can be suppressed. Thereby, when the game ball is not received by the receiving part, it can suppress that the part from which the light quantity of light differs in the light transmissive part of a decoration member is formed. Therefore, when the game ball is not received by the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the return operation of the receiving unit can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member during the positioning operation and the return operation of the receiving unit, and to focus the player only on the displacement operation of the receiving unit when it is desired to watch.

In the gaming machine P2 or P3, the game machine P2 or P3 includes a connecting member that is formed of a non-light-transmitting material and is connected to one side in the displacement direction of the receiving portion, and the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement region of the receiving portion. The connecting member is set to have a larger dimension in the displacement direction of the receiving portion than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, and is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. Along with this, the gaming machine P4 is projected or retracted between the light emitting means and the decorative member.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P2 or P3, the gaming machine P4 includes a connecting member that is formed of a non-light-transmitting material and is connected to one side in the displacement direction of the receiving portion. The connecting member is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member, and is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. With this displacement, the light emitting means and the decorative member are projected or retracted between the light emitting means and the decorative member, so that the light emission area from the decorative member can be changed with the displacement of the receiving portion. That is, the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the decorative member can be blocked by the connecting member, and the area blocking the light can be changed with the displacement of the receiving portion. As a result, the receiving portion and the connecting member are projected and displaced between the light emitting means and the decorative member so that the emission area of light emitted from the decorative member can be reduced. As a result, since the light emission surface of the decoration member is made small, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the receiving portion or the portion with a small amount of light emitted from the decoration member by the game ball received in the reception portion.

In the gaming machine P4, the connecting member is a part of driving means for driving the receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P4, the connecting member is a part of the driving means for driving the receiving portion, and therefore the role of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the receiving portion, and the light emitting means The role of blocking the light emitted from can be shared by the connecting member. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the driving means for driving the receiving portion.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion includes a displacement member that is displaceable from a game ball received in the receiving portion, and the displacement The member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and is displaceable at a position where it projects or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and when the game ball is received in the receiving portion, A gaming machine P6 that protrudes between the light emitting means and the decorative member.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving part, and the receiving part is a gaming ball that is received by the receiving part. The displacement member is provided with a displaceable member, and the displaceable member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material and is displaceable at a position where the light emitting means and the decorative member protrude or retreat between the facing members. Is received, and the light emitting means and the decorative member protrude between the facing members, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked by the displacement member and the game ball only when the game ball is held in the receiving portion. Thus, the player can recognize the position of the game ball by the shadow (dark portion) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received by the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the return operation of the receiving unit can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can play the game in a concentrated manner.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on a front side of a displacement area of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion includes a displacement member that can be displaced by a game ball received in the receiving portion, and the displacement The member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and is displaceable at a position where it projects or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and when the game ball is received in the receiving portion, A gaming machine P7 that protrudes between the light emitting means and the game ball facing each other.
.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion is a gaming ball that is received by the receiving portion. The displacement member is provided with a displaceable member, and the displaceable member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material and is displaceable at a position where the light emitting means and the decorative member protrude or retreat between the facing members. Is received, the light projecting between the light emitting means and the game ball is projected, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the displacement member and the game ball only when the game ball is held in the receiving portion. Thus, it is possible to make the player recognize the position of the game ball in a bright part (a part with a larger amount of light than others) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received by the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the return operation of the receiving unit can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can play the game in a concentrated manner.

In this case, it is preferable that the displacement member is generally formed of a metal material whose light reflectance is higher than that of the resin material, or the outer surface is coated with metal. Thereby, it is possible to easily reflect the light irradiated to the displacement member, clarify the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member,
This makes it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball.

In the gaming machine P7, the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape that is recessed on the back side.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P7, the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape that is recessed on the back side, so that the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the displacement member is reflected to the decoration member side. In this case, the reflected light can hardly diffuse (light can be easily collected). Therefore, by collecting the light reflected from the displacement member and emitted from the decorative member, the difference in the amount of light can be clarified and the player can easily recognize the position of the game ball.

In the gaming machines P1 to P8, the decoration member is formed to protrude in a convex shape in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines P1 to P8, the decorative member is formed to protrude in a convex shape in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means, so that the light of the light emitting means transmitted from the decorative member is transmitted. Easy to diffuse. As a result, it is possible to enlarge a portion where the amount of light formed by the game ball received by the receiving unit is different and allow the player to recognize it, so that the player can recognize the position of the game ball received by the receiving unit. Easy to do.

In the gaming machines 01 to P9, the light emitting means can emit at least two or more colors.

According to the gaming machine P10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines P1 to P9, the light emitting means can emit at least two or more colors. Can be changed.

For example, when the first region of the first light emission color and the second region of the second light emission color are divided, and the receiving portion is arranged in the first region, the expectation of jackpot Make it high. as a result,
It is possible to make it easier for the player to watch the position of the game ball held in the receiving unit.

In this case, since the range of the first region and the range of the second region can be changed only by changing the emission color, a plurality of effects forms are formed by changing the emission range. Can make it easier for players to entertain.

<Characteristic Q group> (Be sure to take the firing sensor when descending vertically)
A movable means configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, a movable control means capable of moving and controlling the movable means, and the movable means at the first position. In a gaming machine having first position detecting means capable of detecting position, when the movable control means is moved from the first position to the second position, the first position detecting means can detect the position from the first position. When the movable means is stopped based on predetermined movement data for moving to the second position and then the movable means is stopped, and when the movable means is moved from the second position to the first position. Moves the movable means based on movement data for moving from the second position toward the first position, and stops the movable means when the movable position is detected by the first position detection means. What to do Game machine Q1 characterized by Rukoto.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. In addition, an effect in which the player is notified after the lottery result variably displays the symbol or the like for a certain period of time is executed, but the effect of moving a movable object or the like is executed within the period in which the effect is executed. Thus, a gaming machine has been proposed for notifying a player of various effects (for example, JP 2012-130802 A). By the way, the above-described gaming machine executes stop control to stop at a predetermined stop position when moving a movable object, but may stop at a predetermined stop position when stopping the movable object. There was a problem that the stop position would not be able to be varied. An object of the gaming machine described above is to provide a gaming machine that can move and control a movable object stably.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, when moving from the first position to the second position, by moving based on the movable data, the control load is reduced as compared with the case where the movable position is moved while being detected at any time. Although it is a controllable structure, when moving from the second position to the first position, the movable means is controlled to stop based on the result detected by the detection means, so the movable means moved to the first position. In practice, even if there is a variation in the position, it can be controlled by stopping at the more accurate first position, and the variation when moved to the first position becomes larger depending on the number of movements. Can be prevented, and the movable object can be controlled stably.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the movable means includes launch means capable of launching a game ball, and the launch means launches a game ball in a state of being moved to the first position. A gaming machine Q2.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine Q1, since the game ball is launched while being moved to the first position, the accuracy of the game ball is varied by accurately moving to the first position. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress problems that occur.

  The gaming machine Q1 or Q2 includes a base member that movably fixes the movable means, and the movable means includes a shaft portion that is pivotally supported by the base member so that one end side thereof can be rotated, and the one end side. At least a moving means for moving the game ball to the other end side, and an opening for launching the game ball by the launching means on the other end side; It is movable to the first position set at a position rotated in the first direction with the shaft portion as an axis, and the shaft portion is pivoted from the first position with the second rotation amount. The gaming machine Q3 is configured to be movable from the origin position to the second position set at a position rotated in the first direction.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the moving ball is moved by the moving means, so that the center of gravity of the movable means is varied, and the stop control becomes difficult. Since it is the structure which can be stopped exactly by the 1st position, there exists an effect that the malfunction by the stop control of a movable means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine Q3, the moving means starts moving the game ball from the shaft portion to the other end side after the movable means starts moving control from the origin position to the first position. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine Q3, the game ball moves to the other end before rotating to the first position, thereby increasing the weight on the other end and increasing the movable load. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress problems that occur. Also, by moving the movable control to the first position after the start of the movable control, there is an effect that the game ball can be moved to the other end side in accordance with the timing when the movable means is moved to the first position. is there.

<Characteristic R group> (Detection of power supply return sensor)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a movable means movable to a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a game ball entered into the ball entry means to the movable means Guidance means capable of guiding the game, and the movable means holds an opening means into which a game ball guided by the guide means can enter and a game ball that has entered from the opening means. Holding means, and moving means capable of moving the game ball held by the holding means, wherein the gaming machine moves the game ball entered from the opening means to the movable means. A gaming machine R1 having a discharge control means capable of causing the moving means to execute a discharge operation that can be discharged to the outside.

  Traditionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have moved the movable object to a position where the player can visually recognize it as one of the effects for notifying the success / failure determination result such as hitting, and a novel impression to the player A gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting bored of the game at an early stage has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-130802). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that a malfunction occurs due to movement. An object of the gaming machine described above is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress problems.

  According to the gaming machine R1, the game ball is configured to be able to enter, and even if it is a movable means configured to move the entered game ball, the game ball that has entered the movable means is discharged to the outside by a discharge operation. Since it is comprised so that it can do, even when a game ball enters into a movable means excessively, a game ball can be discharged | emitted and can be operated normally, and there exists an effect that a malfunction can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine R1, a main control means capable of executing a game control, a sub control means capable of executing a game control based on a control signal output from the main control means, and the ball entry means A ball detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered, and the main control means detects that the game ball has entered by the ball detection means. Based on the opening detecting means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered from the opening means, and the movable control means. A movable control means capable of controlling the movable means, and an initial operation control means for causing the movable control means to execute a predetermined initial action on the movable means when the gaming machine is powered on. And the initial operation is executed And when the opening signal is received by the opening detecting means for at least a period until the initial operation is completed, And an initial discharge operation control means to be executed by the discharge control means.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1, during the initial operation, if there is a possibility that a game ball may enter the movable means, the opening detection means is monitored. By entering the ball, the discharge operation is executed after the end of the initial operation, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress problems in the execution of the initial operation.

  In the gaming machine R2, when the moving means is moved to a predetermined position, the holding means is configured to be able to hold a game ball entered from the opening means. R3.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2, the holding means is configured to be able to hold the game ball that has entered from the opening means by being moved to a predetermined position by the moving means. There is an effect that the reception of the game ball can be controlled by limiting the timing at which the holding means can hold.

  In the gaming machine R2 or R3, when the entrance signal is received during the period in which the initial operation is being executed, the opening detection means performs a period until a predetermined period elapses after the initial operation is completed. A gaming machine R3 characterized by comprising determination control execution means for executing determination control for determining whether or not a game ball is detected.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2 or R3, when a ball entry signal is received during the period when the initial operation is being executed, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball is detected by the opening detection means. Therefore, in a state where a game ball cannot enter the movable means, the detection process can be omitted, and the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine R3, the predetermined period is a period until a predetermined number of seconds elapses after receiving a specific control signal from the main control means.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R3, it is executed after outputting a specific control signal, so that the timing at which the discharging operation is executed can be made constant, and the discharging is performed at an appropriate timing. There is an effect that the operation can be executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the main control unit includes a determination unit that can execute the determination, and a dynamic display unit that dynamically displays identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination unit on the display unit. The dynamic display mode determination unit for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display unit, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display unit. And a special state setting means capable of changing the entrance means to a special state in which a game ball can easily enter the game machine R5.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, when the determination result becomes a specific determination result, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, so There is an effect that it is possible to give the player an opportunity to enter the ball and to provide a novel effect to the player.

  In the gaming machine R5, the specific slave control signal is a signal output based on the end of the special state, the gaming machine R6.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine R5, the discharging operation can be performed after the special state is finished, so that the discharging operation is performed after the gaming ball is difficult to enter the movable means. It is possible to reduce the malfunction.

<Characteristic S group> (Sound effect at the time of winning a special electric accessory)
A first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the first entry means, and a game ball entered by the first detection means A first signal output means for outputting a first signal, a first flow path through which a game ball entering the first ball entry means can pass, and one of the first flow paths. And a visual recognition unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a game ball passing through the unit, a second ball entry means capable of entering a game ball that has not entered the first ball entry means, A second detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and a second signal is output when the second detection means detects that a game ball has entered. Second signal output means, first flow path guiding means for guiding a game ball that has entered the second ball entering means to the first flow path, and the first signal The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the fact that the first period has passed since the transmission and the second effect based on the fact that the second period has elapsed since the reception of the second signal. A gaming machine S1 having a second effect executing means for executing an effect.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that, during the bonus game, the player gets tired of the game that makes the game monotonous. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a problem that a player gets bored of the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine S1, the second effect is executed at the timing when the game ball that has entered the second entry means without passing through the first entry means also passes through the visual recognition unit. There is an effect that it is possible to diversify the production together with the first production due to entering the ball, and to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine S1, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entry means, display means for displaying information corresponding to the entry, and the information displayed on the display means as the first entry. Updating means for updating corresponding to the game ball that has entered the first entry means, and the updating means updates the information at least at the timing when the second effect is executed. A gaming machine S2 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1, it is possible to make it seem as if the information has been updated with respect to the gaming ball that has not entered the first entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player think as if the player has entered the ball entry means including the game ball that has entered the ball means.

  In the gaming machine S1 or 2, in the gaming machine S1 or 2, the third guiding means for guiding the game ball that has not entered the first and second entering means to the first guiding path, and the third guiding means And a third effect executing means capable of executing a third effect at a timing when the game ball guided by the player reaches the visual recognition unit.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the game ball guided to the third guiding means is also guided to the visual recognition unit and the third effect is executed, so that the gaming ball is used as the entering means. It is possible to make it seem that the game ball that has entered the ball passes through the visual recognition part, and it is possible to make the player seem to have many game balls entering the ball entry means. is there.

  In the gaming machine S3, the updating means updates the information at least at a timing at which the third effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S3, the information is updated in accordance with the timing at which the third performance is executed, so that the game that has not entered the first and second entry means. It is also possible to make the ball appear as if it is entering the first entry means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the first period is set to be equal to or longer than a first flow-down period required for a game ball that has entered the first entry means to reach the visual recognition unit. And the second period is set to be equal to or longer than a second flow-down period required for a game ball that has entered the second entry means to reach the visual recognition unit. S5.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the effect is produced in accordance with the timing of reaching the visual recognition part, so that the visual recognition part seems to be a ball entry means. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines S1 to S5, an opening through which a game ball can enter is formed as a part of the first flow path in the first flow path of the visual recognition unit. A gaming machine S6, wherein a game ball to be entered is configured to be visible.

  According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines S1 to S5, the opening formed in the visual recognition part can be made to appear as a ball entry means, and more game balls enter the ball entry means. The effect is that you can make it appear as if it is a ball.

<Characteristic T group> (pseudo jackpot production during the latent state)
Discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information indicating the first discrimination result on the display means Is displayed, the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game advantageous to the player, the first gaming state and the first gaming state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means is completed. A gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a gaming state, and a privilege game effect capable of executing a privilege game effect when the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game executing means. An execution means, and a pseudo privilege game effect execution means capable of executing the privilege game effect in a pseudo manner when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. Game machine T1 which is characterized.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, whether the game is won or not is drawn, and if the lottery result is a win, There was a game where a special game that can give a lot of prize balls was executed. Furthermore, the first gaming state and the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state can be set as the gaming state in which the above-described lottery is executed, and the second gaming state is set. In such a case, there has been proposed a gaming machine that facilitates execution of a special game that can give a player a prize ball (for example, JP 2013-226399 A). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine can give a player a prize ball by a special game and a special game, so that it can improve the interest of the game. Since it is necessary to execute a game and a game aimed at special games, there is a problem that the gameability becomes complicated and the player's willingness to play is reduced. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in gaming motivation and improves the fun of gaming.

  According to the gaming machine T1, when a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the pseudo privilege game effect is executed, so the contents of the effect that is executed in a state advantageous to the player are unified. be able to. Therefore, by performing an effect that is easy to understand for the player, there is an effect that the game motivation can be suppressed and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, since the bonus game effect can be simulated in addition to the case where the bonus game is being executed, it is possible to make the player think that a lot of bonus games are being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T1, variable entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a ball can enter and a second state in which the ball is less likely to enter than the first state, and at least the variable entry means. Pseudo ball entry means capable of entering a game ball that has been balled, and variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means to the first state when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. The gaming machine T2 is characterized in that the pseudo ball entering means is a game ball to be inserted when the pseudo bonus game effect execution means executes the pseudo bonus game effect.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1, when the pseudo bonus game effect is executed, the effect of entering the game ball into the pseudo ball entering means is executed. There is an effect that it can be executed.

  In the gaming machine T1 or T2, when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting unit, the gaming machine T1 or T2 has an effect condition determining unit that determines whether a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and the pseudo privilege game effect The game machine T3, wherein the execution means executes the pseudo bonus game effect when it is determined by the effect condition determination means that the predetermined effect condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the pseudo privilege game effect is not executed even in the second game state. By configuring in this way, for example, when the period in which the second gaming state is set is short (when it is shorter than the execution period of one privilege game), the execution of the pseudo privilege game effect is suppressed. be able to. Therefore, since it can suppress that the production | presentation which gives a player discomfort is performed, there exists an effect that the production effect of the production performed can be heightened.

  In the gaming machine T3, the upper limit value setting means for setting the upper limit value of the number of times the second gaming state is continuously set after the jackpot game is ended, and the second gaming state is continuously set by the gaming state setting means. A set number measuring means for measuring the set number of times, wherein the effect condition determining means determines that the effect condition is determined when the number of times measured by the set number of times measuring means is less than a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine T4 characterized in that it is determined that is established.

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the maximum number of times that the second game state can be set continuously is set, and it is determined how many times the second game effect is currently set. The effect condition is established when the number of consecutive settings in the second gaming state is less than the predetermined number. Thereby, since the stable pseudo privilege game effect can be executed in a state where the period during which the second game state is set is secured, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T4, when the effect condition determining means determines that the number of times measured by the set number of times measuring means is greater than a predetermined number of times, a second game state effect different from the pseudo bonus game effect is executed. A gaming machine T5 characterized by having a second gaming state effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the number of consecutive setting of the second gaming state is greater than the predetermined number, the specific second gaming state effect is executed without executing the pseudo bonus game effect, so that the player can easily understand the effect. There is an effect that it can be executed.

<Feature U group> (Point consumption effect)
Displays a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means Dynamic display means for dynamic display on the means, dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a determination result specific to the display means In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, based on establishment of a predetermined condition, Numerical effect execution means capable of executing numerical effects for giving numerical information to a player, and numerical information storage means capable of accumulating and storing numerical information of numerical effects executed by the numerical effect execution means, The player can operate An operation means capable of operating and at least a part of the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage unit. And a dynamic display mode determination control unit that can be determined by operating the operation unit.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. As an effect for displaying the lottery result, a plurality of symbols for notifying the lottery result are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery result is notified by a combination in which the symbol is stopped and displayed. There has been proposed a gaming machine in which a notice effect for notifying a player of a lottery result before the figure stops as an effect other than the symbol is executed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the player is bored with the performance performed by the player until the lottery result is won. An object of the gaming machine described above is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine U1, since the contents of the dynamic display mode related to the notification of the determination result can be changed by the numerical information accumulated by the numerical effect to be executed, the numerical effect is executed and the numerical information is accumulated. There is an effect that it is possible to make it interesting to follow and to suppress getting bored with the gaming machine at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine U1, when the part of the aspect is determined by the dynamic display aspect determination control means, the corresponding numerical information is subtracted from the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. A game machine U2 that is updated and stored as described above.

  According to the gaming machine U2, the accumulated numerical information is subtracted by determining the dynamic display mode corresponding to the numerical information in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U1, so that the compensation using the numerical information is used. It is possible to execute an effect that provides a dynamic display mode and to improve the interest of the player.

  The gaming machine U3 or U2 has a notifying means for notifying information corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

  In addition to the effects played by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the information corresponding to the stored numerical information is notified by the gaming machine U3, so that the player can easily recognize the state of the numerical information stored. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U3, there is provided numerical information determining means for determining the numerical information given to the player by the numerical effect executed by the numerical effect executing means, the numerical information determining means, The gaming machine U4 is configured to be able to determine numerical information corresponding to the numerical information stored by the numerical information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines U1 to U3, the numerical information given by the numerical effect can be determined in correspondence with the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the numerical information can be given in accordance with the numerical information held by the player.

<Feature V group> (Button pressing timing common acquisition process)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation effect execution means for executing a predetermined operation effect based on the operation of the operation means, and an effective period for effectively determining the operation on the operation means are set. A game machine comprising: an effective period setting means for performing, and an effect setting means for setting an effect mode for a predetermined period including the effective period set by the effective period setting means, wherein the operation means is provided during the effective period. Is operated by the operation effect executing means based on the operation timing calculated by the calculation means and the calculation means for calculating the operation timing based on the effective period set by the effective period setting means. A gaming machine V1 having a production mode setting means for setting a production mode of the operation performance to be executed.

  Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that performs a lottery drawing and executes a variable display effect for displaying the lottery result on a display device. Furthermore, there is provided a gaming machine that provides a plurality of suggestion effects for suggesting the lottery result, and executes a specific suggestion effect based on an operation result to an operation means operable by the player as a part of the plurality of suggestion effects. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-283442). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a specific suggestion effect is executed regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated, so that the player's willingness to operate the operating means is reduced, and the player becomes early However, there was a problem that the game would get bored of the game.

  According to the gaming machine V1, since it is possible to set the effect mode of the operation effect based on the operation timing of the operation means during the effective period, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the gaming machine at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine V1, the calculation means calculates a ratio between the effective period and the remaining period of the effective period at the timing when the operation means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine V1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the production mode of the operation effect is set based on the ratio between the effective period and the remaining period of the effective period calculated based on the operation timing of the operation means. Thereby, since the operation effect is set based on the length of the effective period to be set and the operation timing of the operation means, it is possible to set various operation effects and enhance the effect. There is.

  In addition, when using the structure of game machine V2, it is good to comprise so that a different effective period may be set with respect to the same effect aspect set by the effect setting means. By configuring in this way, even if the operation means is operated at the same timing with respect to the effect mode being executed, the calculation result of the calculation means can be made different by changing the set effective period. It is possible to vary the effect mode of the operation effect.

  The gaming machine V1 or V2 includes display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect and movable means capable of executing a predetermined movable effect, wherein the effect setting means is the effect mode executed by the display means. The gaming machine V3 is characterized in that the operation effect executing means executes the operation effect using the movable means.

  According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1 or V2, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the effect operating means is operated while the effect displayed on the display means is being executed, the operation effect for moving the movable means is executed. Even if the operation is performed, the operation effect can be executed without changing the content of the effect displayed on the display means. Therefore, the control for executing the operation effect can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine V2 or 3, the effective period setting means can set different effective periods when the same effect form is set by the effect setting means.

  According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V2 or 3, the following effects are produced. That is, even when the operation means is operated at the same timing with respect to the effect mode being executed, the calculation result of the calculation means is made different by changing the set effective period, thereby producing the effect of the operation effect. Aspects can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to provide various operation effects to the player who always operates the operation means at a constant timing, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines V2 to V4, a first dividing means for dividing the ratio calculated by the calculating means by a first condition and a second dividing means for dividing by a second condition different from the first condition And a segment determining unit that determines whether the ratio is to be segmented by either the first segmenting unit or the second segmenting unit, and the presentation mode setting unit is determined by the segment determining unit The gaming machine V5 is characterized in that an effect mode of the operation effect is set based on contents.

  According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines V2 to V4, the following effects are produced. In other words, since the ratio calculated by the calculation means is divided under different conditions, and the operation effect production mode is set based on the divided contents, even if the calculation results of the calculation means are the same, different operations are performed. Production can be performed. Therefore, various operation effects can be provided to the player, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game early.

<Characteristic W group> (Notice the pre-reading result of jackpot)
Entry means capable of entering a game ball, acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the game sphere entering the entry means, and storage storing the information acquired by the acquisition means Means, determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on the display means, When the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the privilege game executing means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, and the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. In a gaming machine having a bonus game type determining unit that determines a type of the bonus game to be executed based on the information stored in the storage unit, the game machine includes the bonus game type determining unit prior to the determining unit. Storage means Based on the stored information, the determination result corresponding to the pre-determined information includes a pre-determination unit that performs a pre-determination and pre-information for indicating the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination unit A prior notification means for informing before starting the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the above, and when the determination means determines a specific determination result, the bonus game type determination means determines the The award game type pre-determination means for pre-determining the information stored in the storage means before the determination means determines the type of the award game, and the determination result by the privilege game type pre-determination means are shown. Pre-game type notification means for informing before starting the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the information for which prior game information has been determined Gaming machine W1, characterized in that.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Different types of benefits that can be obtained by a plurality of types of players are set in the executed privilege game, and when one is won, one privilege game type is determined, There has been proposed a gaming machine that makes a player's interest different depending on the type of award game being executed even if it is a win (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has been required to improve not only the effect of improving the interest with respect to losing but also the interest with respect to the type of privilege game. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine W1, since the prior game information corresponding to the type of privileged game that is executed in the case of winning is also notified, it is possible to provide the player with an effect combined with the notification result by the prior determination. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine W1, the game machine W1 includes a symbol display unit that displays a symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage unit before being determined by the determination unit, on the display unit, and the prior notification unit includes the symbol A gaming machine W2 which is notified by changing a display mode of the symbol displayed by the display means.

  According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine W1, information related to the determination result can be identified by a pattern in a state stored in the storage means before the identification information is dynamically displayed, Not only the determination result of the identification information displayed dynamically but also the determination result stored in the storage means can be interested, and the player can be prevented from getting bored of the game early. effective.

  In the gaming machine W1 or W2, the effect means for executing an effect when the privilege game is executed and the prior privilege game type notifying means cause the effect means to execute a specific effect. A gaming machine W3.

  According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W1 or W2, notification about the bonus game type is executed at an early stage by the presentation means that executes the presentation when the bonus game is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to easily identify that the notification is related to the.

  In the gaming machine W3, the advance privilege game type notification means performs notification in response to execution of notification for indicating the prior determination by the prior notification means. Machine W4.

  According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W3, in response to the prior notification related to the determination result being executed, the bonus game type is also notified in advance. There is an effect that it is possible to perform prior notification combined with the notification content.

<Characteristic X group> (Notice of small hits and charge pattern)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means are stored. Storage means, first determination means for executing a first determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. Dynamic display means for displaying, and privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; Based on the establishment of the determination condition, when the second determination means capable of executing the second determination and the second determination result by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, Variable so that the ball is easy to enter. In the gaming machine having variable means, the specific second determination result includes a first determination type for changing the variable means to the easy-to-enter state, and the entrance means more than the first determination means. And a second determination type that sets the variable means to a special easy-to-enter state so that a game ball can easily enter the game, and the privilege game executing means determines the specific determination result by the determination means. Can be executed a special game different from the bonus game when it is determined as a different special first determination result, and the identification information is special as a stop display mode for indicating the special first determination result. When the special game determined to be the specific second determination result corresponding to the second determination type is executed during the dynamic display of the identification information, the special game is displayed. Dynamic display before the game runs Gaming machine X1, characterized in that by switching the identification information of the special identification information is intended for the temporary stop display.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. As an effect for displaying the lottery result, a plurality of symbols for notifying the lottery result are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery result is notified by a combination in which the symbol is stopped and displayed. There has been proposed a gaming machine in which a notice effect for notifying a player of a lottery result before the figure stops as an effect other than the symbol is executed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the player is bored with the performance performed by the player until the lottery result is won. An object of the gaming machine described above is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine X1, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the special identification information is displayed, and to get bored with the game during the period until the specific determination result is notified by displaying the special identification information. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine X1, when the dynamic display of the identification information is started, the gaming machine X1 includes a dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information. A gaming machine X2 that determines whether or not the special game is executed during a target display and determines a dynamic display mode based on the determination result.

  According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine X1, there is an effect that it is possible to easily set the special identification information by determining the execution of the special game before the dynamic display.

<Characteristic Y group> (The end of the effective time is notified at the same timing by a plurality of button effects)
Corresponding to operation means that can be operated by the player, operation effect setting means for setting an operation effect to be executed when the operation means is operated, and operation effects set by the operation effect setting means In the gaming machine having an effective period setting unit that sets an effective period that is determined to be effective when the operation unit is operated, the operation effect setting unit can set a plurality of the operation effects. The effective period setting means determines one effective period for the plurality of operation effects set by the operation effect setting means, and the plurality of operation effects are set within one effective period. Based on the operation performed by the player, the one operation effect is executed in a predetermined order, and the notifying means individually responds to the plurality of operation effects. Gaming machine Y1, characterized in that the identification information for indicating the individual valid period that is to broadcast in response to the set the expiration time.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. When the lottery result is notified, the symbol for notifying the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner during the variation time determined by the lottery, and then stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols indicating the lottery result. During the period in which the variable display is executed, a gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect is displayed in which a notice display regarding a lottery result to be notified is displayed by operating an operation unit that can be operated by a player ( For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-217766. By the way, the above-described gaming machine has been demanded to further improve the gaming interest by suitably performing various effects using the operating means. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine Y1, even when a plurality of operation effects are set, the operation effective period is notified, so that the period during which the operation means can be operated can be recognized as an individual operation effect. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Y1, the identification information is notified by changing the individual effective period in order corresponding to the predetermined order corresponding to the decrease in the effective period. Machine Y2.

  According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine Y1, the operation information is variably displayed in the order in which the identification information indicating the individual effective period is executed, so that a plurality of operation effects are executed for the player. There is an effect that the order can be identified.

  In the gaming machine Y2, when the effective period elapses in the state where the plurality of operation effects are set, each of the identification information to be notified is notified that the effective period has elapsed at the same timing. A gaming machine Y3 that is variable as described above.

  According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Y2, it is possible to notify the player that the individual effective period has elapsed in accordance with the elapse of the effective period, and to correctly notify the elapse of the effective period There is.

  In the gaming machine Y1 to the gaming machine Y3, when the identification information varies in response to the decrease in the validity period, the identification information is updated and varied after blinking display. Game machine Y4.

  According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the identification information can be changed after the blinking display, so that it can be difficult to understand even if the speed at which the identification information is changed is not constant. There exists an effect that the control which alert | reports time can be made easy.

<Characteristic Z group> (automatic press of button effect)
When the operation effect is set by the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation effect setting means that sets the operation effect that is executed when the operation means is operated, and the operation effect setting means, An effective period setting means for setting an effective period during which an operation by the operation means is determined to be effective, and when the effective period is set by the effective period setting means, identification information corresponding to the set effective period is notified. In the gaming machine having the notification means, the notification means notifies the specific notification mode based on the fact that the effective period is equal to or less than a predetermined period.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. When the lottery result is notified, the symbol for notifying the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner during the variation time determined by the lottery, and then stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols indicating the lottery result. During the period in which the variable display is executed, a gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect is displayed in which a notice display regarding a lottery result to be notified is displayed by operating an operation unit that can be operated by a player ( For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-217766. By the way, the above-described gaming machine has been demanded to further improve the gaming interest by suitably performing various effects using the operating means. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine Z1, the specific notification mode is notified when the validity period reaches a predetermined period, so that it is possible to easily notify the player that the specific period has been reached, and the interest of the game is improved There is an effect that can be done.

  The gaming machine Z1 includes a suggestion mode display unit that displays on the display unit a suggestion mode that suggests to the player that the operation unit is operated during the period in which the effective period is set, and the suggestion mode display The means is configured to display the suggestion mode variably to an operated suggestion mode indicating that the operation unit has been operated based on the operation unit being operated, and the validity period is equal to or less than a predetermined period. Even if the operation means is not operated, a pseudo operation mode indicating that the operation means is operated in a pseudo manner in a mode different from the operated suggestion mode is displayed. A gaming machine Z2.

  According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Z1, the pseudo operation mode is displayed, so that the effective period has passed even if the operation effect is automatically executed as the effective period elapses. The effect is that it can be easily recognized.

  In the gaming machine Z2, the suggestion mode is configured by a symbol imitating the shape of the operation means, and the pseudo operation mode is configured by an effect mode for operating the symbol. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Z2, there is an effect that it is possible to easily notify that the operation effect has been executed due to the expiration of the effective period.

  In any of the gaming machines Z1 to Z3, when the operation means is operated at a timing when the specific notification mode is displayed, a special notification mode is notified in addition to the specific notification mode. A gaming machine Z4.

  According to the gaming machine Z4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Z1 to Z3, when the operating means is operated at the timing when the specific notification mode is displayed, the special notification mode is notified. There is an effect that it is possible to realize that the performance has been executed by the operation by the person.

  In any one of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)

Claims (3)

Operation means that can be operated by the player;
An operation effect setting means for setting an operation effect to be executed when the operation means is operated;
When the operation effect is set by the operation effect setting unit, an effective period setting unit that sets an effective period in which the operation by the operation unit is determined to be effective;
When the effective period is set by the effective period setting means, in a gaming machine having notification means for notifying identification information corresponding to the set effective period,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the notification means notifies a specific notification mode based on the fact that the effective period is equal to or less than a predetermined period. Having a suggestion mode display means for displaying on the display means a suggestion mode that suggests to the player that it is a period during which the operation means is operated during the period in which the effective period is set;
The suggestion mode display means includes
Based on the operation means being operated, the suggestion aspect is variably displayed as an operated suggestion aspect indicating that the operation means has been operated,
Based on the fact that the operation means is not operated even if the effective period is equal to or less than a predetermined period, a pseudo operation mode indicating that the operation unit is operated in a pseudo manner in a mode different from the operated suggestion mode is displayed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: The suggestion aspect is composed of a pattern imitating the shape of the operation means,
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the pseudo operation mode is configured as an effect mode of operating the symbol.

Images